0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views1,141 pages

Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2021-06 EN 202107091542421799

Uploaded by

Rafael

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views1,141 pages

Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2021-06 EN 202107091542421799

Uploaded by

Rafael

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1141

Manual Collection

This document contains

Industrial Controls
a compilation of all manuals
for the SIMOCODE pro
system family.
Use the bookmarks on the Motor Management and Control Devices
left edge of the screen to
navigate. SIMOCODE pro

Edition 06/2021 siemens.com

Introduction 1
Configuring a reversing
starter 2

List of abbreviations A
Industrial Controls

Motor management and

control devices
SIMOCODE pro

Getting Started

06/2021
A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Smart Infrastructure Ⓟ 06/2021 Subject to change All rights reserved
Electrical Products
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 3
Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro
4 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
1.1 Important notes

Scope of application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components. It contains a
description of the components applicable at the time of printing the manual. SIEMENS reserves
the right to include updated information about new components or new versions of
components in a Product Information.

Manual Collection
A Manual Collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743951), a
collection of the following five SIMOCODE pro manuals is at your disposal in Industry Online
Support:
• SIMOCODE pro - 1 Getting Started
• SIMOCODE pro - 2 System Manual
• SIMOCODE pro - 3 Parameterization
• SIMOCODE pro - 4 Applications
• SIMOCODE pro - 5 Communication

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be parameterized for various
SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload. These are always displayed in tabular form:
• "X" = Applicable
• "—" = Not applicable
• Default values are marked "d" for "default" in parentheses.

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s (default: 0) — —

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 5
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Brief description of the responses:

• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is generated which is
available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The fault message and the device-internal signal
remain on until the appropriate length of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault has been
eliminated and acknowledged.
• Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is generated that is
available as diagnostics via the communication bus.
• Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed as
required.
• Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.

Further information
Please read the operating instructions of the respective components. You can find the operating
instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man).
You can find further information on the Internet:
• SIMOCODE pro (https://www.siemens.com/simocode)
• Information and Download Center (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16027/cat)
• Siemens Industry Online Support (SIOS) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)
• Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert)

Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to carry out safety-related functions as part
of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors,
evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer is
responsible for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG, its
subsidiaries, and associated companies (hereinafter referred to as "Siemens") are not in a
position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine not designed by
Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are made or implied in the
following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims above those beyond the
scope of the Siemens general terms of delivery can be derived from the following description.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company
certified for the disposal of electronic waste and dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.

SIMOCODE pro
6 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

At Siemens Industry Online Support you can obtain up-to-date information from our global
support database:
• Product support
• Application examples
• Forum
• mySupport
Link: Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en)

Product support
You can find information and comprehensive know-how covering all aspects of your product
here:
• FAQs
Answers to frequently asked questions
• Manuals/operating instructions
Read online or download, available as PDF or individually configurable.
• Certificates
Clearly sorted according to approving authority, type and country.
• Characteristics
For support in planning and configuring your system.
• Product announcements
The latest information and news concerning our products.
• Downloads
Here you will find updates, service packs, HSPs and much more for your product.
• Application examples
Function blocks, background and system descriptions, performance statements,
demonstration systems, and application examples, clearly explained and represented.
• Technical data
Technical product data for support in planning and implementing your project
Link: Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)

mySupport
The following functions are available in your personal work area "mySupport":
• Support Request
Search for request number, product or subject
• My filters
With filters, you limit the content of the online support to different focal points.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 7
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

• My favorites
With favorites you bookmark articles and products that you need frequently.
• My notifications
Your personal mailbox for exchanging information and managing your contacts. You can
compile your own individual newsletter in the "Notifications" section.
• My products
With product lists you can virtually map your control cabinet, your system or your entire
automation project.
• My documentation
Configure your individual documentation from different manuals.
• CAx data
Easy access to CAx data, e.g. 3D models, 2D dimension drawings, EPLAN macros, device
circuit diagrams
• My IBase registrations
Register your Siemens products, systems and software.

SIMOCODE pro
8 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

The Siemens Industry Online Support app provides you access to all the device-specific
information available on the Siemens Industry Online Support portal for a particular article
number, such as operating instructions, manuals, data sheets, FAQs etc.
The Siemens Industry Online Support app is available for Android and iOS:

Android iOS

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 9
Introduction
1.4 Support Request

1.4 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

SIMOCODE pro
10 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.5 Security information

1.5 Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary
to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security
concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to
an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only
when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available
and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer
supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber
threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed
under
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 11
Introduction
1.6 Current information about operational safety

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Risk of Property Damage
Please take note of our latest information!
Systems with safety-related characteristics are subject to special operational safety
requirements on the part of the operator. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special
product monitoring measures. We therefore also provide information in the newsletters
Industrial controls (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/automation/industrial-
controls/forms/newsletter.html) and Safety Integrated (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/
products/automation/topic-areas/safety-integrated/factory-automation/newsletter.html)
about new products, further technical developments as well as standards and guidelines.

SIMOCODE pro
12 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

1.7 Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company
certified for the disposal of old electrical and/or electronic devices and dispose of the device in
accordance with the regulations in your country.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 13
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro
14 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter 2
2.1 Introduction and objective of the example

Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to
commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with:
• Initially, one local control station - Local Control
• Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO.
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software is used for parameterization.
The PC / PG is connected to the basic unit via a PC cable.

Objective of the example

This example is intended to:
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.
2. Help you modify this example for your application.
3. Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching
devices and control and signaling devices)
• Implementation / activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function blocks), with
control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).

Requirements
• Load feeder / motor is present
• PLC / PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface or PROFINET interface is present
• The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring module, has already
been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the feed-
through openings of the current measuring module.
• PC / PG is present

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 15
Configuring a reversing starter
2.1 Introduction and objective of the example

• The SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software is installed.

• The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to restore the basic factory
settings in the manual SIMOCODE pro - application examples (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743959).

SIMOCODE pro
16 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Required components
The following table lists the components required for this example:

Table 2-1 Required components for the example of the reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Item Ordering data Order number

1 SIMOCODE pro C, pro S or pro V PB basic unit 3UF7000-1AU00-0 (pro C)
3UF7020-1AU00-0 (pro S)
3UF7010-1AU00-0 (pro V)
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011-1AU00-0
SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit 3UF7011-1AU00-1 (1 port)
3UF7011-1AU00-2 (2 ports)
2 0.3 A to 3 A current measuring module 3UF7100-1AA00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting basic unit to the current measuring 3UF793.-1AA00-0
module, depending on length
4 SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Basic, Standard or Premium software for pa‐ 3ZS1322-6CE13-0YG8 (Basic)
rameterization via the system interface 3ZS1322-5CC13-0YA5 (Standard)
or 3ZS1322-6CC13-0YA5 (Premium)
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for parameterization via the 3ZS1312-5CC10-0YA5
system interface with graphic editor
or
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for parameterization via PROFI‐ 3ZS1312-6CC10-0YA5
BUS DP and the system interface with the graphic editor, includes STEP -7
Object Manager
5 PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC / PG 3UF7941-0AA00-0 (USB)

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 17
Configuring a reversing starter
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:

0DLQ FLUFXLW &RQWURO FLUFXLW

13( a +] 9

/
/
/
1
3(

4 )

6 6 6

WKURXJKKROH
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ $ $ ,1 ,1 ,1 9
RSHQLQJV
PRGXOH ,0 %DVLF XQLW %8

6\VWHP 6\VWHP
&RQQHFWLQJ FDEOH
LQWHUIDFH LQWHUIDFH

287 287

4 4
4 1/ದ
4

3( 8 9 :
0RWRU PRWRU UDWHG FXUUHQW HJ $
0 - &/$66
a
2SWLRQDO 7KHUPLVWRU

Figure 2-1 Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control
station for the commands:
• CCW
• OFF
• CW
Displays, messages, etc, have not been taken into account.

SIMOCODE pro
18 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

6WDQGDUG UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU 5HYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU ZLWK 6,02&2'( SUR

// //

1HFHVVDU\ LQWHUORFNV )

6
DQG FRQQHFWLRQV

6 6 6

$ $ ,1 ,1 ,1 9

6 4 6 4
%DVLF XQLW %8

4 4
287 287D

4 4 4 4
1/ದ 1/ದ

6 /()7 EXWWRQ 4 &RQWDFWRU FORFNZLVH URWDWLRQ

6 2)) EXWWRQ 4 &RQWDFWRU FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH URWDWLRQ
6 5,*+7 EXWWRQ
Figure 2-2 Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit via software.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 19
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

2.3 Parameterization

The basics of parameterization

After the external wiring connections have been made (contactor coils connected, current
measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized. For this
purpose, you need to understand the following points:

Table 2-2 Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks

Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations, control functions and
motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the set current for overload protection.
4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.
5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:
1. Interconnect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into the
sockets").
2. If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of control function.
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs and labeled as follows:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets and labeled as follows:
8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a
button now, the contactors will not be energized.

General procedure for parameterizing the reversing starter

Parameterization means:
• Setting values
• Connecting function blocks
Where this example is concerned, this means:
1. Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the interlocks and
connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.
2. Determine the set current Is for motor protection. In this case, the set current corresponds to
the rated motor current, i.e. 3 A.

SIMOCODE pro
20 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

3. The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection / Control" function block via the software, i.e:
– "BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
– "BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left)
4. The plugs on the "Protection / Control" function block must be connected via software to the
sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket

6,02&2'( SUR

ವ &RQQHFW ವ 6HOHFW UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU ವ &RQQHFW

GLJLWDO LQSXWV ವ 6HW ,V UHOD\ RXWSXWV
%8 ,QSXWV %8 2XWSXWV
3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO 4( 5LJKW
21
4(
2))
21! ,V $
/HIW

&RQWURO VWDWLRQ /RFDO &RQWURO >/&@ &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

Figure 2-3 Schematic of a parameterization example

The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function.
See Manual SIMOCODE pro - application examples (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743959).

Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Proceed as follows:

Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC / PG.
2 • Select "Create new project" in the portal view and enter the project name and, if applicable, a description
• Click the "Generate" button
3 Switch to the project navigator ("Project view" button)
4 Double-click "Add new device" in the project view.
5 With the "Start device wizard" option activated, select the SIMOCODE device you wish to add in the product tree
of the "Controllers" and confirm your selection with "OK"

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 21
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

6 • Select an application (e.g. reversing starter) in the device wizard and close the dialog by selecting "Finish".
When you select this application, a range of presets will be automatically carried out that you will have to
check later. You will find the device wirings corresponding to the applications in the manual SIMOCODE pro
- application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743959). The SIMOCODE
device has now been added to the project navigator.
• You can change the device name "Control_device_1" to a device and application-specific name via the shortcut
menu.
• Expanding the device in the project navigator reveals the following entries:
– Device configuration
– Online & diagnostics
– Parameters
– Commissioning
– Charts
– Traces.
Select the entries by double-clicking.
7 Add further components to the selected basic unit in the device configuration, for example the current measuring
module IM 0.3 - 3A
8 In "Parameters", under "Motor protection → Overload/Unbalance/Stalled Rotor", set the current setting Is 1 to 3 A
9 Under "Charts → Chart_1", open the graphical parameter view (editor "CFC")
10 Check the following settings:
• BU - Output 1 → Contactor Control QE1
• BU - Output 2 → Contactor Control QE2

%8 2XWSXWV
3URWHFWLRQ
&RQWURO 4(

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 6), other presets might be made when the BU outputs are assigned to the
contactor controls.

SIMOCODE pro
22 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

11 Check the following settings:

• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU - Input 1
• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU - Input 2
• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU - Input 3

%8 ,QSXWV
&RQWURO6WDWLRQV
21

2))

21!

The control station "Local Control" is now connected with the binary inputs of the basic unit.
Check whether the enables for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2" are set.
12 As required, further protection and monitoring functions can be activated or further logic and standard functions
from the function block library can be used in the chart.
Parameterization is complete. Save your project by selecting Project → Save.

Specific procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES 2007

Proceed as follows:

Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC / PG.
2 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you select this application, a range of presets
will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later.
3 Select SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V under "Device Configuration". Deactivate the
operator control block if this is not installed.
4 • Open the "Device Parameters → Motor Protection → Overload / Unbalance / Stalled Rotor" dialog box.
• Set the current setting Is1 to 3 A.
5 Check the following settings:
• BU - Output 1 → Contactor Control QE1
• BU - Output 2 → Contactor Control QE2

%8 2XWSXWV
3URWHFWLRQ
&RQWURO 4(

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made when the BU outputs are assigned to the
contactor controls.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 23
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

6 Check the following settings:

• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU - Input 1
• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU - Input 2
• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU - Input 3

%8 ,QSXWV
&RQWURO6WDWLRQV
21

2))

21!

The control station "Local Control" is now connected with the binary inputs of the basic unit.
Check whether the enables for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2" are set.
7 Parameterization is complete.
Save the parameter file on your PC / PG using "Switching Device → Save".

Transferring parameters to the basic unit and commissioning with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
After creating the parameter file, you can now transfer it to the SIMOCODE pro, and commission
the reversing starter. To do so, proceed as follows:

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the USB interface of the PC / PG to the system interface of the basic unit using the SIRIUS USB PC cable.
You may have to install a device driver for the parameterization cable when using the USB PC cable for the first
time.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro is ready.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit as follows:
• Click on the "Download to device" icon or the "Online → Download to device" menu item.
• The dialog that follows asks you for the type of the connection between the PC and the device - select Sirius PtP
(Point-to-Point) here and the applicable virtualized COM interface and click on the "Start search" button. All
accessible devices are now displayed in the list.
5 You can now start downloading parameters via the "Load" button.
6 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive a message confirming successful downloading under
"Info → General".

Note
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the preset, 5-
second interlocking time has expired.

SIMOCODE pro
24 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.3 Parameterization

Transferring parameters to the basic unit and commissioning with SIMOCODE ES 2007
After creating the parameter file, you can now transfer it to the SIMOCODE pro, and commission
the reversing starter. To do so, proceed as follows:

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the serial interface of the PC / PG to the system interface of the basic unit using the USB PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro is ready.
4 • Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit, e.g. using "Target System → Load to Switching Device".
• Go online, e.g. via "Online → Connect online"
• Select the type of interface (SIRIUS PtP or PN/IE)
• Select the PG/PC interface
• Click the "Start search" button. A search is made for compatible stations.
• Select a station
• Download the parameter file to the device (using the "Load to device" button)
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to device successfully
accomplished".

Note
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the preset, 5-second
interlocking time has expired.

Configuration with local control station completed

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a functional reversing
starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization are correct, the contactors
for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the corresponding buttons
are pushed.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 25
Configuring a reversing starter
2.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP

2.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP

In this section
In this section, you will find out how a control station can be added to the previously configured
example by means of PROFIBUS DP. You can switch between the local control station (local) and
PLC / PCS (remote). SIMOCODE pro can then be controlled locally via the buttons and via the PLC/
PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you only
have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as
a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP.

Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled:
• The motor is switched off.
• The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights up green
• You have connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP interface is on the
front (9-pin D-sub connector)
• SIMOCODE pro is integrated in your automation system. Further information on integrating
DP slaves can be found in the automation system documentation.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. This can be done in the following ways:
• With SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) or SIMOCODE ES 2007
• Via the addressing plug

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Proceed as follows:

Ste Description
p
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the USB interface of the PC / PG to the system interface of the basic unit using the SIRIUS USB PC cable. You may
have to install a device driver for the parameterization cable when using the USB PC cable for the first time.
In addition you can also change the PROFIBUS address without a SIRIUS PC cable, directly via the PROFIBUS interface.
Requirement: PROFIBUS interface in PC/laptop. Procedure: See step 4
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro is ready.

SIMOCODE pro
26 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP

Ste Description
p
4 Set the address of a device configured in SIMOCODE ES (as started under Parameterization (Page 20)):
• Select the device configuration of the created device
• Mark the SIMOCODE basic unit and navigate to "Properties → General → PROFIBUS address" in the status window. In
this view the PROFIBUS address can be entered in the field "Address".
• Then load the parameterization into the device.
Selecting the PROFIBUS node in the network view
• Double-click on "Control Device_1"
• Modify the PROFIBUS address
• Select "Download to device" in the overview.
• With extended download: Select "Start search"
• Under device type select the corresponding PROFIBUS node
• Then load the parameterization into the device.
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive a message confirming successful downloading under
"Info → General".

Setting the PROFIBUS-DP address with SIMOCODE ES 2007

Proceed as follows:

Ste Description
p
1 Plug the USB PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open menu Switching device → Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. Confirm with OK.
5 Open the Device Parameters → Bus Parameters dialog box.
6 Select the DP address.
7 • Save the data in the basic unit with Target System → Load to Device. The address is set.
• Confirm the change of address.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:

Table 2-3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Ste Description
p
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switches.
The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 27
Configuring a reversing starter
2.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP

Ste Description
p
4 Briefly press the "TEST/RESET" button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
5 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

Additional internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and the
necessary internal connections have been made. The following additional internal components,
which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are
now required:
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and "RIGHT"
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC] and PLC/PCS [DP]
(remote)
– Bit 0.5=0: Local control station [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/PCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been connected as
factory defaults with the bits (sockets) of PROFIBUS DP cyclic send data. The assignments can be
found in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) under "Parameters → Motor Control → Control Stations".

Figure 2-4 Functional diagram of reversing starter

Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown here. The assignments can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under "Function Blocks > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data".
Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter with
an additional control station implemented via PROFIBUS DP. The contactors for clockwise and
counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.

SIMOCODE pro
28 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

In this section
In this section, you will find out how a control station can be added to the previously configured
example by means of PROFINET. You can switch between the local control station (local) and PLC/
PCS (remote). SIMOCODE pro can then be controlled locally via the buttons and via the PLC/PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro.

Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled:
• The motor is switched off.
• The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights up green
• You have connected the basic unit to the automation system via PROFINET. The two
PROFINET interfaces are located on the front (RJ-45 female connector). It is immaterial which
of the two PROFINET interfaces you use.
• You have integrated SIMOCODE pro into your automation system and defined the IP
configuration and the PROFINET IO station name for SIMOCODE pro V PN and transferred it
into the device. Further information on integrating PROFINET IO devices can be found in the
automation system documentation.

Setting the IP configuration and station names with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
The precondition for communication between the automation system and SIMOCODE pro via
PROFINET is definition of the IP configuration and the PROFINET station name. This can be done
in the following ways:
• With the configuration tool of your automation system
• With SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal).
Proceed as follows:

Ste Description
p
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the USB interface of the PC / PG to the system interface using the SIRIUS USB PC cable.
You may have to install a device driver for the parameterization cable when using the USB PC cable for the first time.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green.
SIMOCODE pro can be started up.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 29
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Ste Description
p
4a Set the address of a device configured in SIMOCODE ES (as started in step 3):
• Select the IP parameters under "Parameters → PROFINET parameters" to match the configuration in the automation
system. To this end, you must set the check mark next to "Overwrite IP parameters in device"
• Enter the IP address
• Enter the subnet mask
• In the "Station" section, define the PROFINET device name to match the configuration in the automation system. To
this end, you must set the check mark next to "Overwrite device name in device"
• Load the parameterization into the device
4b Set the address of a SIMOCODE device without integrating it into the current project:
• In the project navigator, open "Online access". Here, by means of "COM<x> [SIRIUS PtP] → Update accessible devices",
you can access the device connected to the serial interface. If the serial interface COM<x> should indicate a protocol
other than SIRIUS PtP, you can change this via "Properties" in the shortcut menu: There, select the "IP parameters"
under "Parameters → PROFINET parameters" to match the configuration in the automation system. To this end, you
must set the check mark next to "Overwrite IP parameters in device"
• Enter the IP address
• Enter the subnet mask
• In the "Station" section, define the PROFINET device name to match the configuration in the automation system. To
this end, you must set the check mark next to "Overwrite device name in device"
• Download the changes to the device
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive a message confirming successful downloading under
"Info → General"

Additional internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and the
necessary internal connections have been made. The following additional internal components,
which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are
now required:
• Cycl. Receive bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT," "OFF," and "RIGHT"
• Cycl. Receive bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC] and PLC/PCS [DP]
(remote)
– Bit 0.5=0: Local control station [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/PCS [PN] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [PN] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been connected as
factory defaults with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic receive data. The assignments can be found
in SIMOCODE ES under "Parameters → Motor Control → Control Stations".

SIMOCODE pro
30 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Figure 2-5 Functional diagram of reversing starter

Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown here. The assignments can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under "Function Blocks > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data".
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter with
an additional control station implemented via PROFINET.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the
corresponding bits.

Setting the IP configuration and station names with SIMOCODE ES 2007

The precondition for communication between the automation system and SIMOCODE pro via
PROFINET is definition of the IP configuration and the PROFINET station name. This can be done
in the following ways:
• With the configuration tool of your automation system
• Via SIMOCODE ES.
Proceed as follows:

Table 2-4 Set IP parameters and PROFINET IO device names with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the "Switching Device → Open Online" menu.
4 • Go online, e.g. via "Online & diagnostics"
• Select the type of interface (SIRIUS PtP or PN/IE)
• Select the PG/PC interface
• Click the "Start search" button. A search is made for compatible stations
• Select a station
5 Open the "Device Parameters → PROFINET Parameters" dialog box.
6 Choose the IP parameters to match the configuration in the automation system. Select the "Overwrite IP parameters in
device" parameter. If the IP parameters are assigned by the IO Controller in the automation system, no setting is
necessary here and the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter must not be selected.
7 Select the PROFINET device name to match the configuration in the automation system. Select the "Overwrite device
name in device" parameter. If the device name is assigned by the configuration tool of the automation system (e.g.
STEP 7), no setting is required here and the parameter "Overwrite device names in device" must not be set.
8 Save the data in the basic unit with "Target System → Load to Device". The address is set. Confirm the change of address.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 31
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device names with STEP 7 HW Config

It is possible to set this parameter with the STEP 7 HW Config function "Target system → Edit
Ethernet station."
The precondition for using this function is that the PG or the PC is also connected to
SIMOCODE pro via Ethernet.
If the MAC address of the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is used, you can assign the IP parameters
and the PROFINET device names. You will find the MAC address on the front of the basic unit.
Alternatively, you can read the MAC address out via the local device interface with SIMOCODE ES
with "Switching device → Open online" under PROFINET parameters.

Additional internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and the
necessary internal connections have been made. The following additional internal components,
which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are
now required:
• Cycl. Receive bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT," "OFF," and "RIGHT"
• Cycl. Receive bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC] and PLC/PCS [DP]
(remote)
– Bit 0.5=0: Local control station [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/PCS [PN] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [PN] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been connected as
factory defaults with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic receive data. The assignments can be found
in SIMOCODE ES under "Device Parameters → Motor Control → Control Stations".

Figure 2-6 Functional diagram of reversing starter

Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown here. The assignments can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under "Function Blocks > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data".

SIMOCODE pro
32 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter with
an additional control station implemented via PROFINET.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the
corresponding bits.

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 33
Configuring a reversing starter
2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

SIMOCODE pro
34 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 35
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

SIMOCODE pro
36 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Index
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing
plug, 27
C Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 26
Control station local control, 15
Setting the PROFIBUS-DP address with
Current notes on operational safety, 12
SIMOCODE ES 2007, 27
SIMOCODE ES, 15
D
Disclaimer of liability, 6 T
Transferring parameters to the basic unit and
commissioning with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 24
F Transferring parameters to the basic unit and
Factory settings, 16 commissioning with SIMOCODE ES 2007, 25
Fault message, 6

L
Local control station, 18

M
Manual Collection, 5

P
Parameterization, 20

R
Recycling and disposal, 6
Response, 5
Reversing starter, 15, 17, 20

S
Set IP parameters and PROFINET IO device names with
SIMOCODE ES, 31
Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device names
with STEP 7 HW Config, 32
Setting the IP configuration and station names with
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 29
Setting the IP configuration and station names with
SIMOCODE ES 2007, 31
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address, 26

SIMOCODE pro
Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 37
Index

SIMOCODE pro
38 Getting Started, 06/2021, A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
Advantages/benefits/
configuration with 2
SIMOCODE pro

Industrial Controls Areas of application 3

Motor management and Features 4

control devices
SIMOCODE pro Overview of functions 5
Check list for selecting a
System Manual device series 6
An overview of system
components 7
Description of system
components 8

Compartment identification 9

Accessories 10

3UF50 compatibility mode 11

Mounting, wiring,
connecting 12
Commissioning, service,
troubleshooting 13
Safety and commissioning
information for Ex areas 14

Technical data 15
CAx data, dimension
drawings 16
06/2021
A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Siemens AG A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Smart Infrastructure Ⓟ 06/2021 Subject to change All rights reserved
Electrical Products
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Important notes................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support ....................................................................................... 13
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app................................................................................. 15
1.4 Support Request ................................................................................................................ 16
1.5 Security information .......................................................................................................... 17
1.6 Current information about operational safety ..................................................................... 18
1.7 Information about third-party software .............................................................................. 19
1.8 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 22
1.9 What is SIMOCODE pro? ..................................................................................................... 23
1.10 Device series...................................................................................................................... 24
1.11 Modules, interfaces, configuration options ......................................................................... 26
2 Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro .................................................................... 29
2.1 Advantages/benefits........................................................................................................... 29
2.2 Independent operation ...................................................................................................... 32
2.3 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro .................................................................... 33
2.4 Typical configuration.......................................................................................................... 35
3 Areas of application............................................................................................................................. 37
4 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 39
5 Overview of functions ......................................................................................................................... 43
5.1 Protection functions........................................................................................................... 43
5.2 Monitoring functions ......................................................................................................... 45
5.3 Safety-oriented tripping ..................................................................................................... 48
5.4 Control functions ............................................................................................................... 50
5.5 Communication ................................................................................................................. 51
5.6 Standard functions............................................................................................................. 54
5.7 Freely-programmable logic modules................................................................................... 55
5.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data ............................................................................. 56

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 3
Table of contents

6 Check list for selecting a device series ................................................................................................ 59

7 An overview of system components.................................................................................................... 63
8 Description of system components ..................................................................................................... 79
8.1 Basic units (BU).................................................................................................................. 79
8.2 Operator panel (OP)........................................................................................................... 83
8.3 Operator panel with display ............................................................................................... 86
8.3.1 Description of the operator panel with display .................................................................... 86
8.3.2 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display.......................... 89
8.3.3 Menu of the operator panel with display ............................................................................ 91
8.3.3.1 Timing charts..................................................................................................................... 91
8.3.3.2 Displays of the operator panel with display ....................................................................... 106
8.3.3.3 Read and adapt main display ............................................................................................ 108
8.3.3.4 Display of measured values in the measured values display............................................... 110
8.3.3.5 Motor protection and motor control status ....................................................................... 112
8.3.3.6 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/
maintenance display ........................................................................................................ 113
8.3.3.7 Status display for fieldbus communication ........................................................................ 114
8.3.3.8 Displays the current status of all device I/Os...................................................................... 115
8.3.3.9 Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 117
8.3.3.10 Adapt display settings ...................................................................................................... 119
8.3.3.11 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands........................................................ 121
8.3.3.12 Displaying all pending messages ...................................................................................... 122
8.3.3.13 Displaying all pending warnings ....................................................................................... 122
8.3.3.14 Displaying all pending faults ............................................................................................ 123
8.3.3.15 Reading the device's internal error buffer.......................................................................... 123
8.3.3.16 Reading the device's internal event memory..................................................................... 123
8.3.3.17 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components ............................. 124
8.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and
SIMOCODE pro V device series.......................................................................................... 125
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High
Performance device series................................................................................................ 127
8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g.
3UF711.1AA00-0)............................................................................................................ 133
8.7 Spectrum of the expansion modules ................................................................................ 137
8.8 Digital module (DM) ........................................................................................................ 138
8.9 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)......................................................................................... 139
8.10 Analog module (AM)........................................................................................................ 141
8.11 Ground-fault module (EM) ............................................................................................... 142
8.12 Temperature module (TM) ............................................................................................... 143
8.13 Multifunction module ...................................................................................................... 144
8.14 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit................. 145
8.15 Configuration notes for use of a SIMOCODE pro V MR and SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit... 148

SIMOCODE pro
4 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Table of contents

9 Compartment identification .............................................................................................................. 149

9.1 Applications and advantages of compartment identification ............................................. 149
9.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification ............................... 151
9.3 Operating compartment identification.............................................................................. 152
9.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification................................................. 156
9.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification ................................................... 159
9.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification ........................................ 160
9.7 Compartment identification dimension drawings.............................................................. 161
9.8 Technical data compartment identification ....................................................................... 162
10 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 163
11 3UF50 compatibility mode................................................................................................................. 167
11.1 Application, Win-SIMOCODE-DP converter ........................................................................ 167
11.2 Diagram of send and receive data .................................................................................... 168
11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data ............................................................................................. 169
12 Mounting, wiring, connecting ........................................................................................................... 173
12.1 Mounting ........................................................................................................................ 173
12.1.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and the decoupling module ............................ 173
12.1.2 Mounting the bus terminal............................................................................................... 175
12.1.3 Mounting of digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ........................................... 176
12.1.4 Mounting of current measuring modules.......................................................................... 177
12.1.5 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules.......................................................... 178
12.1.6 Mounting of the operator panel and operator panel with display ...................................... 179
12.2 Wiring, connecting........................................................................................................... 182
12.2.1 Wiring basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module .................................. 182
12.2.2 Wiring digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe .................................................... 207
12.2.3 Wiring of current measuring modules............................................................................... 212
12.2.4 Wiring of current / voltage measuring modules................................................................. 214
12.2.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing transformer) ........... 218
12.3 System interfaces............................................................................................................. 222
12.3.1 Information about the system interfaces .......................................................................... 222
12.3.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module, current
measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules .......................................... 223
12.3.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ........................ 228
12.3.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display.................... 228
12.3.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover .......................................... 232
12.3.6 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket.............................................................................. 233
12.3.7 Ethernet cable to RJ45 socket (PROFINET and EtherNet/IP) ................................................ 234
12.3.8 Modbus RTU connection to the SIMOCODE pro device ...................................................... 235
12.4 Configuration guidelines .................................................................................................. 237
12.4.1 Configuration guidelines on PROFIBUS DP......................................................................... 237
12.4.2 Configuration guidelines on PROFINET.............................................................................. 238

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 5
Table of contents

13 Commissioning, service, troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 241

13.1 General information about commissioning and service..................................................... 241
13.2 Commissioning ................................................................................................................ 243
13.2.1 Commissioning with PROFIBUS......................................................................................... 243
13.2.1.1 PROFIBUS commissioning steps ........................................................................................ 243
13.2.1.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address...................................................................................... 244
13.2.1.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFIBUS).......... 245
13.2.1.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe ....................... 245
13.2.2 Commissioning with PROFINET......................................................................................... 246
13.2.2.1 PROFINET commissioning steps ........................................................................................ 246
13.2.2.2 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name............................................................. 247
13.2.2.3 Setting the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage ..................... 249
13.2.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFINET).......... 250
13.2.3 Commissioning with Modbus ........................................................................................... 251
13.2.3.1 Commissioning with Modbus RTU .................................................................................... 251
13.2.4 Commissioning with EtherNet/IP ...................................................................................... 256
13.2.4.1 EtherNet/IP commissioning steps...................................................................................... 256
13.2.4.2 Setting IP parameters and EIP device name....................................................................... 256
13.2.4.3 Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage ........................... 258
13.2.4.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel with EtherNet/IP... 259
13.3 Service ............................................................................................................................ 260
13.3.1 Preventive maintenance................................................................................................... 260
13.3.2 Backing up and saving parameters ................................................................................... 262
13.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components ............................................................................. 264
13.3.4 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel ..................................... 268
13.3.5 Restoring factory settings................................................................................................. 270
13.3.6 Firmware update of device components ........................................................................... 271
13.3.7 Support Request .............................................................................................................. 273
13.4 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 274
13.4.1 Error buffer ...................................................................................................................... 274
13.4.2 Event memory ................................................................................................................. 276
13.4.3 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling ............................................................ 277
14 Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas......................................................................... 287
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection) ........................... 287
14.1.1 Module integration .......................................................................................................... 287
14.1.2 Information and standards ............................................................................................... 287
14.1.3 Installation and commissioning – motor protection functions (overload protection,
thermistor protection)...................................................................................................... 289
14.1.3.1 Operating Instructions ..................................................................................................... 289
14.1.3.2 Setting the rated motor current ........................................................................................ 289
14.1.3.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input ............................................................................... 291
14.1.3.4 Sensor circuit wiring ........................................................................................................ 292
14.1.3.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1 .................. 292
14.1.3.6 Cable protection .............................................................................................................. 293
14.1.3.7 Test ................................................................................................................................. 293
14.1.3.8 Further safety guidelines.................................................................................................. 294
14.1.3.9 Ambient conditions.......................................................................................................... 295
14.1.3.10 Safety values ................................................................................................................... 295
14.1.4 Maintenance and repairs.................................................................................................. 296

SIMOCODE pro
6 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Table of contents

14.1.5 Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 296

14.1.6 Further information ......................................................................................................... 296
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring ........................ 297
14.2.1 Module integration .......................................................................................................... 297
14.2.2 Information and standards ............................................................................................... 297
14.2.3 Installation and commissioning – dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by means
of active power monitoring .............................................................................................. 300
14.2.3.1 Operating Instructions ..................................................................................................... 300
14.2.3.2 General information on installation and commissioning ................................................... 301
14.2.3.3 Special conditions for commissioning and operation......................................................... 301
14.2.3.4 Setting the parameters..................................................................................................... 303
14.2.3.5 Line protection ................................................................................................................ 304
14.2.3.6 Test ................................................................................................................................. 305
14.2.3.7 Further safety information ............................................................................................... 307
14.2.3.8 Environmental conditions ................................................................................................ 308
14.2.3.9 Safety values ................................................................................................................... 308
14.2.4 Periodic tests ................................................................................................................... 308
14.2.5 Maintenance and repair ................................................................................................... 309
14.2.6 Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 309
14.2.7 More information............................................................................................................. 309
15 Technical data.................................................................................................................................... 311
15.1 Common technical data ................................................................................................... 311
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units ..... 313
15.3 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units ..... 318
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring
modules .......................................................................................................................... 321
15.5 Technical data of the decoupling module ......................................................................... 326
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules ......................................................................... 327
15.6.1 Technical data of the digital modules ............................................................................... 327
15.6.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ....................................... 328
15.6.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module ............................................................... 329
15.6.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module........................................................ 331
15.6.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe......... 332
15.6.6 Technical data of the analog module ................................................................................ 332
15.6.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0 .......................................... 334
15.6.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0 .......................................... 334
15.6.9 Technical data of the temperature module ....................................................................... 335
15.7 Technical data of the multifunction module...................................................................... 337
15.8 Technical data of the operator panels ............................................................................... 340
15.8.1 Technical data of the operator panel................................................................................. 340
15.8.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display ............................................................. 340
15.9 Technical data of the compartment identification ............................................................. 342
15.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100
kA and 690 V for 1st generation current / voltage measuring module................................ 343
15.11 Typical reaction times ...................................................................................................... 344
15.11.1 Typical reaction times of the SIMOCODE pro C/V device series ........................................... 344

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 7
Table of contents

15.11.2 Typical response times of SIMOCODE pro S device series ................................................... 345
15.11.3 Typical reaction times of the Modbus RTU device series..................................................... 346
15.12 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support........................................................... 347
16 CAx data, dimension drawings.......................................................................................................... 349
16.1 CAx data.......................................................................................................................... 349
A List of abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 351
A.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 351
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 355
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 377

SIMOCODE pro
8 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
1.1 Important notes

Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro System Manual describes in detail the motor management system and its
functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance.
In addition to help on how to identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the manual
also contains specific information for servicing and maintenance.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage controls and
distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation technology.

Scope of the manual

This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components. It contains a
description of the components applicable at the time of printing the manual. SIEMENS reserves
the right to include updated information about launched new components or new versions of
components in a Product Information.

Manual Collection
A Manual Collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743951), a
collection of the following five SIMOCODE pro manuals, is available in Industry Online Support:
• SIMOCODE pro - 1 Getting Started
• SIMOCODE pro - 2 System Manual
• SIMOCODE pro - 3 Parameterization
• SIMOCODE pro - 4 Applications
• SIMOCODE pro - 5 Communication.

Device series
When reference is made to "SIMOCODE pro", the reference also includes the following device
series:
SIMOCODE pro C (see Device series (Page 24))
SIMOCODE pro S (see Device series (Page 24))
SIMOCODE pro V PB (PROFIBUS) (see Device series (Page 24))
SIMOCODE pro V PN (PROFINET) (see Device series (Page 24))

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 9
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

SIMOCODE pro V PN GP (PROFINET) (see Device series (Page 24))

SIMOCODE pro V MR (Modbus RTU) (see Device series (Page 24))
SIMOCODE pro V EIP (EtherNet/IP) (see Device series (Page 24))
When reference is made to "SIMOCODE pro V", the reference also includes all pro V devices,
independently of communication.

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be parameterized for various
SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload. These are always displayed in tabular form:
• "X" = Applicable
• "—" = not applicable
• Default values are marked "d" for "default" in parentheses.

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0) — —

Short description of the responses:

• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is generated which is
available as diagnostics via the communication bus. The fault message and the device-
internal signal remain on until the appropriate length of time has elapsed or the cause of the
fault has been eliminated and acknowledged.
• Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is generated that is
available as diagnostics via the communication bus.
• Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed as
required.
• Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.

SIMOCODE pro
10 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Operating instructions and other manuals

• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components (Operating instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man))
• In addition to the "SIMOCODE pro" manual collection, the following manuals are available to
you:
– The manual "SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)
– The appropriate manual for the DP master
– The system manual "SIMATIC PROFINET System Description" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)
– The manual "Fault-tolerant S7-400H systems" (https://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/1186523)
– Programming manual "PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930)
– The application description "Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 and ET200 S" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454)

More information
You will find further information on the Internet:
• SIMOCODE pro (https://www.siemens.com/simocode)
• Information and Download Center (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16027/cat)
• Siemens Industry Online Support (SIOS) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
ps)
• Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert).

Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to perform safety-related functions as part of
a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors,
evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer is
responsible for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG, its
subsidiaries, and associated companies (hereinafter referred to as "Siemens") are not in a
position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine not designed by
Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are made or implied in the
following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims above those standard to
Siemens can be derived from the following description.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 11
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro
12 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 13
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

SIMOCODE pro
14 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

Android iOS

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 15
Introduction
1.4 Support Request

1.4 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

SIMOCODE pro
16 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.5 Security information

1.5 Security information

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 17
Introduction
1.6 Current information about operational safety

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

SIMOCODE pro
18 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Information about third-party software

1.7 Information about third-party software

Third-party software components

This product, this solution or this service ("product") contains the third-party software
components listed below. These consist either of open source software that is licensed under a
license recognized by Open Source Initiative (http://www.opensource.org) or a license defined
by Siemens as being comparable ("OSS") and/or commercial software or freeware. With regard
to the OSS components, the relevant OSS terms and conditions take priority over all other terms
and conditions applicable to this product.
SIEMENS is providing you with the OSS portions of this product at no additional cost. Insofar as
SIEMENS has combined or linked, according to the definition of the applicable license, specific
components of the product with OSS components that are licensed under GNU LGPL Version 2
or a later version, and insofar as the applicable object file may not be used without restrictions
("LGPL-licensed module", whereby the LGPL-licensed module and the components with which
the LGPL-licensed module is combined are hereinafter referred to as "combined product") and
the applicable LGPL license criteria are fulfilled, you may additionally (i) edit the combined
product for your own purposes and may in particular acquire the right to edit the combined
product to link it with a modified version of the LGPL-licensed module and (ii) reverse engineer
the combined product, but solely for the purpose of error correction of your edits. The right to
edit shall not include the right to distribute. You must treat as confidential all information you
acquire from reverse engineering of the combined product.
Certain OSS licenses require SIEMENS to publish the source code, e.g. the
GNU General Public License, the GNU Lesser General Public License and the
Mozilla Public License. Insofar as these licenses apply and the product has not already been
delivered with the necessary source code, anyone may request a copy of the source code from
Support Request during the period of time specified in the applicable OSS license:
Use the Support Request online form to send your query directly to our Technical Support. After
describing your query in a few guided steps, you will immediately be provided with possible
suggestions for solving the problem.

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

Subject: open source inquiry (specify the product name and version, where applicable)

SIEMENS can charge a processing fee of up to 5 euros to respond to the inquiry.

Warranty regarding use of open source software

The warranty obligations of SIEMENS are laid down in the applicable contract with SIEMENS.
Insofar as you modify the product or the OSS components or use them in a manner other than
specified by SIEMENS, warranty shall be ruled out and no technical support shall be provided.
The following license terms and conditions may contain liability limitations that apply between

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 19
Introduction
1.7 Information about third-party software

you and the relevant licensor. To clarify matters, your attention is drawn to the fact that SIEMENS
shall not cede any warranty obligations on behalf of or as an obligation for a third-party licensor.

NOTICE
Open source software and/or third-party software included in this product
Please note the following license terms and conditions and copyright notices applicable to the
open source software and/or other components (or parts thereof):

Component Open Source Acknowledgements/ License conditions and copyright notices

Software Comments
[Yes/No]
tiva ware - 2.1.0 NO LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPO‐
NENT TIVA PRODUCTS - 2.1.0 (see below)

LICENSE CONDITIONS AND COPYRIGHT NOTICES

Commercial Software: tiva ware - 2.1.0

Enclosed you'll find license conditions and copyright notices applicable for Commercial
Software tiva ware - 2.1.0.

License conditions:
//
// Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
// modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
// are met:
//
// Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
// notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
//
// Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
// notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
// documentation and/or other materials provided with the
// distribution.
//
// Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of
// its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
// from this software without specific prior written permission.
//
// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS

SIMOCODE pro
20 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Information about third-party software

// "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
// A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
// OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
// SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
// DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
// THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyrights:
Copyright © 2013-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2012-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2011-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2010-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2008-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2007-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2006-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Copyright © 2005-2014 Texas Instruments Incorporated

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 21
Introduction
1.8 Recycling and disposal

1.8 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro
22 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.9 What is SIMOCODE pro?

1.9 What is SIMOCODE pro?

SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Device) is a flexible and modular motor
management system for motors with constant speeds in low-voltage applications. It optimizes
the link between the control system and the motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows
significant savings to be made during installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance.
SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear system and links the higher-level
automation system and the motor feeder intelligently. It comprises the following functions:
• Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection, independently of the automation
system
• Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)
• Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data
• Fail-safe shutdown up to SIL3 using fail-safe expansion modules (High Performance units
only)
• Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET, Modbus RTU and EtherNet/IP
• Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software package
Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors,
circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 23
Introduction
1.10 Device series

1.10 Device series

The following functionally graduated device series are available for SIMOCODE pro:
• Basic units:
SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for PROFIBUS DP communication with a direct-on-line
and reversing starter function and/or for controlling a circuit breaker (MCCB).
• General Performance units:
– SIMOCODE pro S - the smart system for PROFIBUS DP with direct-on-line, reversing, and
star-delta starter function or for controlling a circuit breaker or soft starter. Its
expandability with a multifunction module ensures there are always plenty of inputs and
outputs. It enables precise ground-fault monitoring via the 3UL23 residual current
transformer and temperature measurement.
– SIMOCODE pro V PN GP - the smart system for PROFINET with direct-on-line, reversing,
and star-delta starter function or for controlling a circuit breaker or soft starter. Its
expandability with an expansion module ensures there are always plenty of inputs and
outputs, precise ground-fault monitoring via the 3UL23 residual current transformer and
temperature measurement.
• High Performance units:
SIMOCODE pro V – the variable system that offers numerous functions, such as voltage
measurement and fail-safe shutdown, in addition to all the SIMOCODE pro C/pro S functions.
Devices are available for the following communication protocols:
– PROFIBUS DP
– Modbus RTU
– PROFINET
– EtherNet/IP.
See Check list for selecting a device series (Page 59).

SIMOCODE pro
24 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
SIMOCODE pro
PROFINET IO / OPC UA ETHERNET / IP PROFIBUS MODBUS RTU

Figure 1-1
Current/voltage measuring module

Operator panel with display

max. 5/7 expansion modules

High

System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005

Performance

Safety
SIMOCODE pro V PN SIMOCODE pro V EIP SIMOCODE pro V PB SIMOCODE pro V MR

Extended control functions

(e.g. positioner, pole-changing starter)

SIMOCODE pro device series

Current measuring module

Operator panel
General

1 expansion module
Performance

Basic control functions SIMOCODE pro V PN GP SIMOCODE pro S

(e.g. direct-on-line/reversing start)

25
1.10 Device series
Introduction
Introduction
1.11 Modules, interfaces, configuration options

1.11 Modules, interfaces, configuration options

For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current measuring module.
Both modules are connected to each other electronically via the system interface, by means of
a connecting cable, and can be installed together as a unit (behind one another) or separately
(side-by-side). An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the second system
interface on the basic unit, and installed in the switchgear cabinet door. The current measuring
module and the operator panel are connected to the basic unit via connecting cables, which also
supply the power. More inputs, outputs and functions can be added to the SIMOCODE pro S,
pro V PB, pro V MR, pro V EtherNet/IP and pro V PN /pro V PN GP basic units by means of optional
expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs already existing on the basic
unit. All modules are connected by connecting cables. The connecting cables are available with
different lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.15 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m; round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m,
2.5 m).

NOTICE
Maximum length of the connecting cable
The total length of all cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system interfaces of the basic
unit!

NOTICE
The maximum distance between modules
The maximum distance between the modules (e. g. between the basic unit and the current
measuring module) must not exceed 2.5 m.

Additional control programs (star-delta starters, Dahlander starters, pole-changing starters, soft
starters, each program also possible in combination with reversing starter, solenoid valve and
positioner) are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V High Performance units. The SIMOCODE pro V
device type is also particularly versatile. Its functionality can be expanded, if required, for
example:
• The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and adapted.
• A current/voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage measurement and
for monitoring power-related measured values (power management).
• A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors.
• A ground-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current
transformer.
• An analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and outputs, for example,
for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
• An operator panel with display (OPD) is available as an alternative to the standard operator
panel (OP) (restriction in the case of the SIMOCODE pro V PB: from version *E03*).

SIMOCODE pro
26 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.11 Modules, interfaces, configuration options

A special current/voltage measuring module for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps in

hazardous areas by active power monitoring can be used in combination with the following high
performance devices with PTB 18 ATEX 5003:
• SIMOCODE pro V PB from version *E16*
• SIMOCODE pro V PN from version *E13*
• SIMOCODE pro V EIP from version *E04*
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S are upwardly-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V. This
means you can combine different series in your plant according to functional requirements.
Depending on functional requirements, the systems can be used simultaneously in a low-
voltage switchboard without any problems and without any additional effort.
Parameterization of SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro S can be transferred without a problem.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 27
Introduction
1.11 Modules, interfaces, configuration options

SIMOCODE pro
28 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE
pro 2
2.1 Advantages/benefits
• The quantity of cabling required between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced
significantly by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the
fieldbus (see Figures "SIMOCODE pro, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at
automation level (PLC)")
• Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and monitoring
functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources and ensures that the feeder
is fully functional and protected even if the control system or bus system fails.
• By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostics data in the feeder and
process control system, plant availability is increased, and the feeder is easier to service and
maintain.
• The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder thanks to the
high degree of modularity.
• SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions for every
customer application.
• By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function, the quantity of
required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This drives down storage costs and
limits potential wiring errors.
• Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more efficiently and
ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the tripping response stays the
same, even after many years.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 29
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.1 Advantages/benefits

0DLQFLUFXLW &RQWUROFLUFXLW $XWRPDWLRQOHYHO

/
/
/

. .

2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWPHDVXULQJPRGXOH

&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH

%DVLFXQLWVSUR&9

. .
5HPRWH

3URWHFWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ &RQWUROFLUFXLW &RPPXQLFDWLRQ

RYHUORDGWKHUPLVWRUHDUWKIDXOW LQFOXGLQJPRQLWRULQJLQWHUORFNV RSHUDWLQJVHUYLFHDQGGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD
FRQWUROFRPPDQGV

Figure 2-1 SIMOCODE pro C, pro V, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

SIMOCODE pro
30 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.1 Advantages/benefits

0DLQFLUFXLW &RQWUROFLUFXLW $XWRPDWLRQOHYHO

/
/
/

. .

&XUUHQWPHDVXULQJPRGXOH
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH

%DVLFXQLWSUR6

. .
5HPRWH

3URWHFWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ &RQWUROFLUFXLW &RPPXQLFDWLRQ

RSHUDWLQJVHUYLFHDQGGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD
RYHUORDGWKHUPLVWRUHDUWKIDXOW LQFOXGLQJPRQLWRULQJLQWHUORFNV
FRQWUROFRPPDQGV

Figure 2-2 SIMOCODE pro S, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 31
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.2 Independent operation

2.2 Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro protects and controls the motor feeder, independently of the automation
system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor
feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to the fieldbus. This can easily be connected later, if required.

SIMOCODE pro
32 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.3 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

2.3 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The
component and wiring requirements for this type of configuration are as follows:
• Use and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers and
analog/digital converters
• Wiring of the control circuit
• Connection of start / stop control devices
• The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
• Wiring of the interlocks
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

13(a+]9 /
/ )
/
/
1 $XWRPDWLRQ OHYHO ,2 PRGXOH
3(
4
)HHGEDFN &RQWURO FRPPDQGV
)
7KHUPLVWRU

4 RSHQ
2YHUORDG

DXWRPDWLF

212))
4

&XUUHQW

0DQXDO
2))
21

)

;

4
4
0DQXDO $XWR

;

/RFDO VWRS
)
6 3/&

6WDUWVWRS
/RFDO VWDUW
4
6 4
$P$
3( 8 9 :
4 4
0 ˽ 4 4 ) ) 4 '

a ; ) $
1
4 7KHUPLVWRU
6ZLWFKJHDU
HYDOXDWLRQ
1

Figure 2-3 Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro only is used to perform all control, monitoring and signal pre-processing
functions.
The advantages of this configuration are as follows:
• Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers and analog/
digital converters are not necessary.
• The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 33
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.3 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

• The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit.
• The contactor coil is energized via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary contact for
locking is not required.
The following figure illustrates a configuration with SIMOCODE pro connected to PROFIBUS:

3/&3&6 &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

13( a +] 9 3/&3&6 >'3@
/ 352),%86 '3
/
/
1 )LOOOHYHO LQGLFDWRU
3(
/
// /ದ

4 &RQWURO VWDWLRQ
)
/RFDO FRQWURO VWDWLRQ >/&@

6 6
/LTXLG FRQWDLQHU

&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ $ $ ,1 ,1 9 ,Q ,Qದ &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

PRGXOH ,0 $QDORJ PRGXOH $0 2SHUDWRU SDQHO
%DVLF XQLW 6,02&2'(SUR9

6\VWHP &RQQHFWLQJ FDEOH

LQWHUIDFH

7 7 287 2XW 2XWದ

'LVSOD\
4
1/ದ 0RWRU FXUUHQW
4
8QLW RI , V

3XPS
3( 2SWLRQDO
8 9 :
3&ZLWK
7
0 7KHUPLVWRU 6,02&2'( (6
˽
a
7

Figure 2-4 Configuration of a load feeder (direct-on-line starter) with SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro
34 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.4 Typical configuration

2.4 Typical configuration

The following figures show typical hardware configurations:

6,02&2'( SUR & %DVLF 8QLW %8

&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ
PRGXOH,0

2SHUDWRU SDQHO 23

8)
Figure 2-5 Typical SIMOCODE pro C hardware configuration

6,02&2'( SUR 6
%DVLF 8QLW %8
0XOWLIXQFWLRQPRGXOH00
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ
PRGXOH,0

2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23

Figure 2-6 Typical SIMOCODE pro S hardware configuration

6,02&2'( SUR 931*3 %DVLF XQLW %8

&XUUHQWPHDVXULQJ
PRGXOH,0

2SHUDWRU SDQHO 23

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 35
Advantages/benefits/configuration with SIMOCODE pro
2.4 Typical configuration

Figure 2-7 Typical SIMOCODE pro V PN GP hardware configuration

6,02&2'( SUR 9 %DVLF 8QLW %8

'LJLWDO 0RGXOH '0

&XUUHQWYROWDJH $QDORJ 0RGXOH $0
PHDVXULQJPRGXOH80

2SHUDWRU 3DQHO 23'

$GGLWLRQDO RSWLRQDO H[SDQVLRQV DUH SRVVLEOH

Figure 2-8 Typical SIMOCODE pro V PROFIBUS/Modbus RTU hardware configuration

6,02&2'( SUR 931 %DVLF XQLW 6,02&2'(SUR931

&XUUHQWPHDVXULQJ
PRGXOH,0

2SHUDWRU SDQHO 23

Figure 2-9 Typical SIMOCODE pro V PN/EtherNet/IP hardware configuration

For information about system components, see Chapter Description of system components
(Page 79).

SIMOCODE pro
36 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Areas of application 3
SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where plant downtimes are very
expensive (e.g. steel or cement industry) and where it is important to prevent plant downtimes
through detailed operating, service and diagnostics data or to localize the fault very quickly in
the event of a fault.
SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited especially for operation in motor control
centers (MCC) in the process industry and in power plants.
Applications:
• Protection and control of motors:
– in hazardous areas for different types of protection according to the ATEX
Directive 2014/34/EU (see also Section Safety and commissioning information for Ex
areas (Page 287))
– Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water management)
– In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing industry, power
plants)
• Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring of motors and
shutdown if power consumption falls below a minimum value – especially also including
hazardous areas
– Type of ignition protection b "Control of ignition sources", ignition protection system b1,
approval according to DIN EN ISO 80079-37
– Approval according to ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU and IEC Ex
See also Chapter Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring
(Page 297) in the safety and commissioning information for Ex areas.
SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including oil and gas), the steel
industry, water management, and the paper, pharmaceutical, cement and glass industries.
Further applications include power plant engineering and diamond, gold and platinum mines.
Based on the experience gained with the predecessor system SIMOCODE DP, SIMOCODE pro has
been tailored even more specifically to the requirements of these industries. The availability of
motors and thus the entire process plays an important role in these industries. Downtimes
caused by faults often lead to high costs. This is why it is even more important to detect potential
faults early on and to initiate targeted, preventative measures. SIMOCODE pro provides the user
with a motor management system based on years of experience and the latest technology.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 37
Areas of application

SIMOCODE pro
38 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Features 4
Multifunction, electronic full motor protection for rated motor currents up to 820 A
SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a
combination of delayable, multi-level protection and monitoring functions:
• Current-dependent delayed electronic overload protection (CLASS 5E to 40E)
• Thermistor motor protection
• Phase failure/unbalance protection
• Stalled rotor protection
• Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current
• Voltage monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by means of active power monitoring
• Monitoring of cos phi (no-load operation/load shedding)
• Ground-fault monitoring
• Temperature monitoring, e.g. using Pt100/Pt1000
• Monitoring of operating hours
• Monitoring of downtimes
• Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time
• Safety-related tripping of motor feeders, e.g. fail-safe tripping in the process industry, locally
or via fieldbus (see manual "SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852))

Recording of measured curves

SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example, illustrate the
characteristic curve of the motor current during motor startup.

Flexible motor control with integrated control functions (instead of extensive hardware
interlocks):
SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions, including all
necessary connections and interlocks:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter (direct-on-line starter)
• Reversing starter
• Star-delta starter, also with direction reversal
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starter), also with direction of
rotation reversal

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 39
Features

• Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with direction of rotation
reversal
• Positioner control
• Solenoid valve control
• Actuation of a circuit breaker
• Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter
These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be assigned freely to device
inputs and outputs.
These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet customer requirements
of the motor feeder, without requiring additional auxiliary relays in the control circuit. This is
achieved by means of freely parameterizable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers, pulse
width modulators, etc.) and standard functions (power failure monitoring, emergency start,
external fault monitoring, etc.).

Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data:

SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostics data and helps to detect
impending faults in good time and stop these occurring with preventative measures. If a fault
occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced and resolved within a short period of time. Plant downtime
is thus reduced to a minimum or does not occur at all. See Chapter Overview of functions
(Page 43).

Communication:
The SIMOCODE pro basic units have integrated communication bus interfaces and are thus able
to replaces all individual wiring and distribution boxes normally required to exchange data with
a higher-level automation system with a single bus cable.

Communication through PROFIBUS:

PROFIBUS stands for Process Field Bus. PROFIBUS is a multi-vendor standard for the networking
of field devices (e.g. PLCs, drives, actuators, or sensors) in compliance with the European process
and fieldbus standard (PROFIBUS standard EN 50170, Volume 2, -PROFIBUS). It specifies the
functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics of a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-compatible automation systems and field
devices at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP (= Distributed Peripherals),
FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological
Functions) protocol.
PROFIBUS DP is a bus system with the DP (distributed I/O) protocol. The main task of PROFIBUS DP
is to manage the fast, cyclic data exchange between the central DP devices and the I/O devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1 is the extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of
parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.
SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V support, among others:
• Baud rates up to 1.5 Mbit / s or 12 Mbit / s
• Automatic baud rate detection
• Communication with one master (class 1) and up to two masters (class 2)
• Time stamp with high timing precision (SIMATIC S7) for SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro
40 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Features

• Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)

• DPV1 communication downstream from the Y-Link.
See Chapter "PROFIBUS communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Communication via PROFINET:

PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the open Industrial Ethernet Standard from Profibus &
Profinet International (PI) for automation.
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
continuation of PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus, and Industrial Ethernet, the
communication bus for the cell level. Experiences from both systems have been and are being
integrated in PROFINET.
SIMOCODE pro V PN (High Performance unit) has two integrated PROFINET interfaces and
provides communication functions via PROFINET IO with the following properties:
• Integrated switch with two ports
• Device replacement without removable medium/programming device
• Shared device in combination with DF-FP modules
• Media redundancy
• System redundancy
• RT communication
• Support for PROFIenergy
SIMOCODE pro V PN GP (General Performance unit) has one/two integrated PROFINET
interface(s) and provides communication functions via PROFINET IO with the following
properties:
• Integrated switch with two ports (device with two ports)
• Device replacement without removable medium/programming device
• Shared device in combination with DF-FP modules
• Media redundancy (device with two ports)
• System redundancy
• RT communication
• Support for PROFIenergy
See Chapter "PROFINET communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Communication via Modbus:

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 41
Features

sends a request to a slave address and only this slave address responds to the command
(exception: broadcast frames to slave address 0 that are not acknowledged by the slaves).
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus devices have been developed in accordance with the "MODBUS over
serial line specification and implementation guide" (available at www.modbus.org (http://
www.modbus.org)). You can find the relevant information on establishing Modbus RTU
communication in this specification. The key points for a Modbus RTU communication network
("Multipoint System requirements") listed in the specification apply equally for a communication
network with SIMOCODE devices.
See Chapter "Modbus communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Communication via EtherNet/IP:

EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol, often simply called EIP) is a real-time Ethernet that is
used mainly in automation engineering. EtherNet/IP was developed by Allen-Bradley and was
later handed over to the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) as an open standard. See
Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (http://www.odva.org).
Besides PROFINET and Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based fieldbus that is currently
widely spread.
SIMOCODE pro V EtherNet/IP devices were developed in compliance with the EtherNet/IP
standard and have the following properties:
• Integrated switch with two ports
• Media redundancy via Device Level Ring (DLR)
• System redundancy (as of E03).
See Chapter "EtherNet/IP communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

SIMOCODE pro
42 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions 5
5.1 Protection functions
Detailed description: See Chapter "Motor protection" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE
pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

Overload protection
Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with adjustable tripping
characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947‑4‑1 requirements.

Unbalance protection
Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase unbalance.

Phase failure protection

Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by phase failure.

Stalled rotor protection

Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.

Thermistor protection
SIMOCODE pro provides the option of connecting thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for
monitoring the motor temperature.

Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps

The following high performance devices with PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X can be used to implement dry-
running protection of centrifugal pumps (non-electrical devices) through active power
monitoring and motor shutdown:
• SIMOCODE pro V PB from version *E16*
• SIMOCODE pro V PN from version *E13*
• SIMOCODE pro V EIP from version *E04*

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 43
Overview of functions
5.1 Protection functions

This applies to centrifugal pumps with progressive flow characteristics, which are also suitable
for pumping flammable media and are also installed in hazardous areas.

WARNING
Installation in potentially explosive atmospheres
SIMOCODE pro itself is not suitable for installation in potentially explosive atmospheres!

If the active power, and thus the flow rate, falls below a minimum value, the motor - and thus
the centrifugal pump - is switched off The devices support monitoring of the minimum flow rate
for a freely selectable minimum value. A delay time (effective during operation including the
pump's regular switch-off) can be specified to minimize the probability of incorrect tripping in
addition to the parameter for the trip level of the minimum active power (which corresponds to
a minimum flow rate). During the start-up procedure, operation with active power below the
trip level can constitute a regular operating status of short duration (depending on the
procedure used to open the pressure-side shut-off valve). For this reason, a start-up bridging
time can be specified to prevent incorrect tripping during the start-up procedure.
The parameters can be entered using the "SIMOCODE ES" (TIA Portal) engineering software.
It is also possible to determine the trip level in a "teach-in" and to enter the further parameters
with the aid of menu-guided input screens. Using this method, the operating point with
optimum flow rate and the point with minimum flow rate are started up with real operating
medium, as a result of which the trip level of the minimum active power is determined. The
teach-in has to be repeated following any changes in the pump or system characteristics (e.g. as
a result of changing the operating medium or of intervention in the plant configuration).
With regard to dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps, a current/voltage measuring
module especially intended for this function is also required in addition to the basic unit.
See also:
• Chapter "Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring
(Page 297)" in the safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
• Chapter "Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps" in the manual Parameterizing
SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
44 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.2 Monitoring functions

5.2 Monitoring functions

Detailed description: See Chapters "Monitoring functions" and "Logic blocks" in the manual
Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).

Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. This enables incipient anomalies in the
system to be detected in good time. If a current limit is exceeded but still below the overload
limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor
bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor belt.

Ground-fault monitoring
Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to
• Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
• Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
• Perform maintenance to meet all demands.
Basic units have:
• An internal ground-fault monitoring system: For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic
unit calculates a possible fault current/ground-fault current from the total current via a
current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module. Internal ground-fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either
grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
• External ground-fault monitoring in SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V 4) : The external
ground-fault monitoring using residual current transformer 3UL23 and ground-fault module
is normally used in the following cases:
– in cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
– in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example,
for condition monitoring.
A ground-fault module can be used to create an additional input on the SIMOCODE pro V and
SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic units to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
A multifunction module can be used to create an additional input on the SIMOCODE pro S
basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
With ground-fault detection using the 3UL23 residual current transformer, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value, and to define freely selectable
warning and trip limits in a wide range from 30 mA - 40 A.
See also Chapter "External ground-fault monitoring with 3UL23 residual current transformer"
in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 45
Overview of functions
5.2 Monitoring functions

Voltage monitoring 1)
High Performance SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network
or a single-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
• Monitoring for undervoltage: Two-level monitoring for freely selectable limits. The response
of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized.
• Monitoring for further availability: Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can
indicate the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or fuses.

Temperature monitoring 2)
The SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro V and SIMOCODE pro V PN GP devices offer the option of
implementing analog temperature monitoring, e.g. of the motor windings or the bearings -
SIMOCODE pro S with the multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro V/SIMOCODE pro V PN with the
temperature module.
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V support two-level monitoring for overtemperature for
freely selectable limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or
trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature monitoring takes into account
the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits in use.

Active power monitoring 1)

The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load results in increased wear
of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Excessively low active power can
indicate no-load operation of the motor, for example.
High Performance SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-level active power monitoring for
freely selectable upper and lower limits respectively. The response on reaching a prewarning
level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Cos phi monitoring 1)

The power factor fluctuates more than the motor current, particularly in the low-end
performance range of a motor. For this reason, the monitoring of the power factor comes into
consideration for the detection of faults. Examples: Breakage of a drive belt or drive shaft
High Performance SIMOCODE pro V enables two-level monitoring of the power factor cos phi for
freely selectable minimum limits. The devices' response on reaching a prewarning level or trip
level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Monitoring operating hours, stop time, and number of starts

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor to avoid plant
downtimes due to failed motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being
stopped for too long. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating
that the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated. After the motor
has been replaced, the operating hours and stop times can be reset.

SIMOCODE pro
46 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.2 Monitoring functions

To avoid excessive thermal loads and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor starts in
a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by
pre-warnings.

Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 3)

High Performance SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process
variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry operation, or a
differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the degree of pollution in a filter. If the
fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential
pressure value is exceeded, the filter should be cleaned.
The devices support two-phase monitoring of the applicable process variable for freely
selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a
prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Phase sequence identification 1)

SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined by identification of
the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong, a signal can be generated or the motor
switched off. See Chapter Menu of the operator panel with display (Page 91).

Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors

SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or
overshooting a set threshold value by means of unrestricted limit monitors, e.g. the
frequency 1). Further information can be found in Chapter "Limit monitors" in the manual
Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).

1) For use with current / voltage measuring module

2) Temperature module or multifunction module additionally required
3) Analog module additionally required
4) SIMOCODE pro V and pro S device types: Ground-fault module or multifunction module and
residual current transformer additionally required

See also
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring (Page 297)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 47
Overview of functions
5.3 Safety-oriented tripping

5.3 Safety-oriented tripping

The SIMOCODE pro motor management system has two modules for the safety-related tripping
of motors:
• Fail-safe digital module DM-F local: For applications requiring safety-related tripping of a
motor feeder via a hardware signal that is acquired and evaluated by the module.
• DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module: For applications that require the safety-related
tripping of a motor feeder by a fail-safe controller (F‑CPU) via the communication bus with
the fail-safe PROFIsafe profile.
These modules conform to the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP devices or safety
circuits described in EN 418 and EN 60204‑1 (06.2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level / Safety Integrity Level can
be achieved:
• PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
• SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061
Safety technology and safety-related functions
• Are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules.
• Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.

A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below

• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, German (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852)
• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, English (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/en)
• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, French (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/fr)
• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, Spanish (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/es)
• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, Russian (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/50564852)
• Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro, Chinese (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/cn/zh/view/50564852/en)
• Operating instructions "Fail-Safe Digital Module DM-F Local" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49222263)
• Operating instructions "Fail-Safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49222281).

You will find the System Manuals and Operating Instructions at Manuals/operating instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)

SIMOCODE pro
48 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.3 Safety-oriented tripping

CAUTION
Loss of safety function is possible
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit!
For capacitive and inductive loads, an adequate protective circuit is required!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 49
Overview of functions
5.4 Control functions

5.4 Control functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:

Table 5-1 Control functions

Control function SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB, V MR, V PN, V EIP
Overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Reversing starter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta reversing starter — — — ✓
Dahlander starter, combinable with re‐ — — — ✓
versing starter
Pole-changing starter, combinable with — — — ✓
reversing starter
Solenoid valve — — — ✓
Positioner — — — ✓
Soft starter — ✓ ✓ ✓
Soft starter with reversing contactor — — — ✓

All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly
adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions: See Chapter "Motor control" in the
manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
50 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.5 Communication

5.5 Communication

PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB D socket or terminal connection
on the basic units). SIMOCODE pro supports the following services, for example:

Table 5-2 PROFIBUS DP services

Service SIMOCODE pro

C S V PB
Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit / s via Sub-D socket ✓ — ✓
Baud rates of up to 1.5 Mbit / s via terminal con‐ ✓ ✓ ✓
nection
Automatic baud rate detection ✓ ✓ ✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services ✓ ✓ ✓
(DPV1)
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y ✓ ✓ ✓
link
Alarms according to DPV1 ✓ ✓ ✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — — ✓
3UF50 compatibility mode — — ✓
Safety-related tripping "PROFIsafe" — — ✓

Detailed description: See Chapter "PROFIBUS DP communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro
- Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Modbus RTU
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU possesses integrated Modbus RTU communication functions.
Detailed description: See Chapter "Modbus communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

PROFINET

PROFINET IO
SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V PN GP have integrated PROFINET IO device communication
functions, such as:
• Integrated switch with two RJ45 ports
• Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP) / BIB-2, LLDP, NTP
• Port diagnostics
• Deactivation of ports
• Media redundancy
• Shared device

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 51
Overview of functions
5.5 Communication

• Device replacement without PG/PC

• I/O data
• Diagnostics and maintenance alarms
• Data records
• PROFIenergy
• PROFIsafe

Note
Use of PORT connections with SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic units
Only PORT 1 can be used with SIMOCODE pro V PN GP 3UF7011-1A.00-2 basic units

OPC UA
In addition to the PROFINET IO device communication functions, SIMOCODE pro V PN also has
OPC UA server functions. Using these functions, an OPC UA client can access SIMOCODE pro V PN
data.

Web server
In addition to the PROFINET IO device communication functions, both the SIMOCODE pro V PN
High Performance device and the SIMOCODE pro V PN General Performance device have an
integrated web server function that permits access to the service and diagnostic data from a PC
on which a web browser is installed.
Detailed descriptions: See Chapter "PROFINET communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

EtherNet/IP
SIMOCODE pro V EtherNet/IP has integrated EtherNet/IP communication functions:
• Integrated switch with two RJ45 ports
• Assembly objects for integration in cyclic communication with the controller
• CIP objects
• Application objects for access to SIMOCODE data such as measured values, statistics data,
diagnostics and selected parameters
• Device Level Ring support
• Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/BIB-2, LLDP, NTP
• Port diagnostics
• Deactivation of ports
Detailed description: See Chapter "EtherNet/IP communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

SIMOCODE pro
52 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.5 Communication

Web server
In addition to the EtherNet/IP communication functions, SIMOCODE pro V EIP has an integrated
web server function that permits access to the service and diagnostic data from a PC on which
a web browser is installed.
Detailed descriptions: See Chapter "EtherNet/IP communication" in the manual SIMOCODE pro
- Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743960)"SIMOCODE pro - Communication".

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 53
Overview of functions
5.6 Standard functions

5.6 Standard functions

Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated, e.g. time-staggered
restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:

Table 5-3 Standard functions

Standard function SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Test 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reset 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Test Position Feedback 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(TPF)
External fault 4 4 4 6 6 6 6
Operational Protection Off — — — 1 1 1 1
(OPO)
Power failure monitoring — — — 1 1 1 1
(UVO)
Emergency start 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Watchdog (PLC / PCS mon‐ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
itoring)
Time stamping — — — 1 — — —
Safety-related tripping — — — 1 1 1 1
"Local"

Detailed description: See Chapter "Standard functions" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE
pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
54 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.7 Freely-programmable logic modules

5.7 Freely-programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the freely
programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical operations,
time relay functions and counter functions. Furthermore, limit monitors can monitor any value
in SIMOCODE pro for undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several freely parameterizable logic modules:

Table 5-4 Freely-programmable logic modules

Logic module SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Truth table 3 in‐ 3 4 4 6 6 8 8
puts / 1 output
Truth table 2 in‐ — 2 2 2 2 2 2
puts / 1 output
Truth tables 5 in‐ — — — 1 1 1 1
puts/2 outputs
Timers 2 2 2 4 4 6 6
Counters 2 2 2 4 4 6 6
Signal condi‐ 2 4 4 4 4 6 6
tioning
Non-volatile ele‐ 2 2 2 4 4 4 4
ments
Flashing 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Flicker 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Limit monitor — — — 4 4 6 6
Calculation — — — 2 1) 2 4 4
modules (calcu‐
lators)
Analog multi‐ — — — — — 1 1
plexer
Pulse width — — — — — 1 1
modulator
1) from version *E03*

Detailed description: See Chapter "Logic blocks" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 55
Overview of functions
5.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

5.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and diagnostics data.

Operating data
• Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the current flow in
the main circuit: thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and contactors is not
necessary.
• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of current setting
• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 1)
• Frequency 7)
• Active power in W 1)
• Apparent power in VA 1)
• Power factor in % 1)
• Phase unbalance in %
• Phase sequence 1)
• Ground-fault current 6)
• Temperature in the respective sensor measuring circuits, and maximum temperature in K 3)
• Current analog signal values 4)
• Time to trip in s
• Temperature rise for motor model in %
• Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of individual measured values
with the help of the logic modules (calculators) provided by SIMOCODE pro. For example, the
temperature recorded by SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either °F or °C and transmitted to
the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data for maintenance:
• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
• Motor stop times, also resettable
• Number of motor starts, also resettable
• Number of permissible starts remaining
• Number of overload trips, also resettable
• Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable 2)
• Internal feeder-related comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
• Safety-related tripping monitoring in h, also resettable 5)

SIMOCODE pro
56 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Overview of functions
5.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

Diagnostics data
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further processing in the
device or in the control system
• Device-internal error logging with time stamp
• Value of the last trip current
• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on command), etc.
• "Local" and "PROFIsafe" diagnostic messages

1) When using SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units with current / voltage measuring
module
2) When using SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units from version *E03* current / voltage measuring
module
3) When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the 3UF77 temperature module or the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit with multifunction module
4) When using SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units with analog module
5) When using SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units together with DM-F fail-safe
digital module
6) When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the 3UF7510 ground-fault module or the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit with a multifunction module and 3UL23 residual current transformer
7) 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module necessary

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 57
Overview of functions
5.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

SIMOCODE pro
58 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Check list for selecting a device series 6
The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device series for your
requirements:

Function/component SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Control functions Intelligent overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter, reversing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
starter
Star-delta starter — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Dahlander starter — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Pole-changing starter — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Soft starter — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Solenoid valve — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Positioner — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Can be combined with — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
reversing function
Protection functions Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Thermistor motor pro‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tection with PTC (binary)
Stalled rotor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Unbalance ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Phase failure ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Dry-running protec‐ Minimum level; in com‐ — — — ✓ — ✓ ✓
tion for centrifugal bination with current/
pumps by means of ac‐ voltage measuring mod‐
tive power monitoring ules for dry-running pro‐
tection
Measurement func‐ Current measurement ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tions Current/voltage/power — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
measurement

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 59
Check list for selecting a device series

Function/component SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Monitoring functions Current limit monitoring ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault monitor‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ing (internal)
Ground-fault monitor‐ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ing (residual current
transformer)
Voltage monitoring — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Temperature monitoring — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Active power monitoring — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Power factor (cos phi) — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
monitoring
Monitoring operating ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
hours, stop time, and
number of starts
Monitoring additional — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
process variables via the
analog module
Phase sequence detec‐ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tion
Monitoring any meas‐ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ured values using unre‐
stricted limit monitors
Frequency measure‐ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ment (with the 2nd gen‐
eration current/voltage
measuring modules)
Safety functions Safety-related tripping — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Number of inputs/ Number of digital inputs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
outputs of basic unit
Max. number of digital 4 8 8 12 12 12 12
inputs with expansion
modules
Number of outputs of 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
basic unit
Max. number of digital 3 4 5 7 7 7 7
outputs with expansion
modules

SIMOCODE pro
60 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Check list for selecting a device series

Function/component SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Expansion modules Multifunction module; — ✓ — — — — —
monostable relay; 24 V
DC inputs, temperature
measurement, ground-
fault monitoring
Multifunction module; — ✓ — — — — —
monostable relay; 110 -
240 V AC/DC inputs,
temperature measure‐
ment, ground-fault
monitoring
Digital module; mono‐ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
stable relay; 24 V DC in‐
puts
Digital module; bistable — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
relay; 24 V DC inputs
Digital module; mono‐ — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
stable relay; 110 to 240
V AC/DC inputs
Digital module; bistable — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
relay; 110 to 240 V
AC/DC inputs
DM-F LOCAL fail-safe — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe — — — ✓ — ✓ —
digital module
Analog module: — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Measuring, processing
and outputting analog
values
Ground-fault module: — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Residual current moni‐
toring using a residual
current transformer
Temperature module: — ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Analog temperature
monitoring of three
measuring circuits with
NTC, PT100, PT1000,
and KTY

1) only 1 sensor can be connected

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 61
Check list for selecting a device series

SIMOCODE pro
62 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components 7
Modules
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC10 (https://www.siemens.com/ic10).
For simple product selection, we recommend the TIA Selection Tool (https://www.siemens.com/
TIA-Selection-Tool).

Note
Product version data
The product version data (*Exx*) refer to the device series (pro C, pro S, etc.).

Table 7-1 Modules

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
Basic units (BU)
SIMOCODE pro C — — — — — — —
The compact Basic Performance system for
PROFIBUS and direct-on-line and reversing
starters and/or for controlling a circuit break‐
er.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, monostable relay out‐
puts
24 V DC 3UF7000-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7000-
AC/DC 1AU00-0
SIMOCODE pro S — — — — — — —
The smart General Performance system for
PROFIBUS and for direct-on-line, reversing
and star-delta starters or for controlling a cir‐
cuit breaker or soft starter.
4 inputs/2 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, expandable with expan‐
sion modules
24 V DC 3UF7020-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7020-
AC/DC 1AU00-0

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 63
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
SIMOCODE pro V PN GP — — — — — — —
The smart General Performance system for
PROFINET and for direct-on-line, reversing
and star-delta starters or for controlling a cir‐
cuit breaker or soft starter.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, expandable with 1 ex‐
pansion module
24 V DC 3UF7011-
1AB00-1 (
2 ports)
3UF7011-
1AB00-2 (
1 port)
110-240 V 3UF7011-
AC/DC 1AU00-1 (
2 ports)
3UF7011-
1AU00-2 (
1 port)
SIMOCODE pro V PB — — — — — — —
The variable High Performance system for
PROFIBUS, which offers numerous functions
in addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C/S
functions.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, monostable relay out‐
puts, expandable with expansion modules
From product version *E16* with
PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X: Suitable for dry-running
protection for centrifugal pumps by means of
active power monitoring
24 V DC 3UF7010-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7010-
AC/DC 1AU00-0
SIMOCODE pro V MR — — — — — — —
The variable High Performance system for
Modbus RTU that offers numerous functions
in addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C/S
functions.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, monostable relay out‐
puts, expandable with expansion modules
24 V DC 3UF7012-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7012-
AC/DC 1AU00-0

SIMOCODE pro
64 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
SIMOCODE pro V PN — — — — — — —
The variable High Performance system for
PROFINET with extensive functions. 4 inputs/
3 outputs freely parameterizable, input for
thermistor, monostable relay outputs, ex‐
pandable with expansion modules
From product version *E13* with
PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X: Suitable for dry-running
protection for centrifugal pumps by means of
active power monitoring
24 V DC 3UF7011-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7011-
AC/DC 1AU00-0
SIMOCODE pro V EIP — — — — — — —
The variable High Performance system for
EtherNet/IP that offers numerous functions
in addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C/S
functions.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable,
input for thermistor, monostable relay out‐
puts, expandable with expansion modules
From product version *E04* with
PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X: Suitable for dry-running
protection for centrifugal pumps by means of
active power monitoring
24 V DC 3UF7013-
1AB00-0
110-240 V 3UF7013-
AC/DC 1AU00-0
Operator panel (OP)
Installation in control cabinet door or front
plate, for connection to basic unit, system
interface for connecting a PC, 10 LEDs for
status indication and user-assignable but‐
tons for controlling the motor.
— 3UF7200- 1 1 — 1 1 1 1
1AA00-0
— 3UF7200- 1 1 — 1 1 1 1
1AA01-0

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 65
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
Operator panel with display (OPD) 4)
Installation in control cabinet door or front
panel, for connection to a pro V basic unit,
system interface for connecting a PC, 7 LEDs
for status indication and user-assignable but‐
tons for controlling the motor, multiple-lan‐
guage display, e.g. for indication of meas‐
ured values, status information or fault mes‐
sages.
— 3UF7210- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
1AA00-0 *E03*)
— 3UF7210- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
1BA00-0 *E03*)
— 3UF7210- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
1AA01-0 ( *E03*)
titanium
gray)
— 3UF7210- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
1BA01-0 (t *E03*)
itanium
gray)
Current measuring module (IM)
Current measuring with through-hole or bus
connection system.
0.3 A to 3 A — 3UF7100- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(straight-through 1AA00-0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
transformer) 3UF7101- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.4 A to 25 A 1AA00-0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(straight-through 3UF7102-
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
transformer) 1AA00-0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 A to 100 A 3UF7103-
1AA00-0
(straight-through
transformer) 3UF7103-
1BA00-0
20 A to 200 A
3UF7104-
(straight-through
1BA00-0
transformer)
20 A to 200 A
(bar connection)
63 A to 630 A
(bar connection)

SIMOCODE pro
66 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
Current/voltage measuring module (UM)
Can only be mounted next to the basic unit,
otherwise like current measuring modules.
Additionally:
• Voltage measurement
• Power measurement
• Power factor (cos phi) measurement
• Phase sequence
0.3 A to 3 A — 3UF7110- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
(through-hole 1AA00-0 — — — *E02*) 1 1 1
transformer) 3UF7111- 1 (from
— — — 1 1 1
2.4 A to 25 A 1AA00-0 *E02*)
— — — 1 1 1
(through-hole 3UF7112- 1 (from
transformer) — — — 1 1 1
1AA00-0 *E02*)
10 A to 100 A — — — 1 1 1
3UF7113- 1 (from
(through-hole 1AA00-0 *E02*)
transformer)
3UF7113- 1 (from
20 A to 200 A 1BA00-0 *E02*)
(through-hole
3UF7114- 1 (from
transformer)
1BA00-0 *E02*)
20 A to 200 A (bus
connection)
63 A to 630 A (bus
connection)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 67
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
2nd generation current/voltage measur‐
ing modules (UM+)
Can only be mounted below / next to the ba‐
sic unit, otherwise like current measuring
modules.
In addition to current measurement:
• Voltage measurement
• Frequency measurement
• Power measurement
• Power factor (cos phi) measurement
• Phase sequence detection
• Dry-running protection for centrifugal
pumps by means of active power moni‐
toring (DRP device)
0.3 A to 4 A — 3UF7110- — — — 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from 1
(straight-through 1AA01-0, — — — *E15*) *E03*) *E10*) 1
transformer) 1) 3UF7120- 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from
— — — 1
1AA01-0 ( *E15*) *E03*) *E10*)
3 A to 40 A — — — 1
DRP)
(straight-through 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from
3UF7111- — — — 1
transformer) 1) *E15*) *E03*) *E10*)
1AA01-0, — — — 1
10 A to 115 A 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from
3UF7121-
*E15*) *E03*) *E10*)
(straight-through 1AA01-0 (
transformer) DRP) 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from
*E15*) *E03*) *E10*)
20 A to 200 A 3UF7112-
1AA01-0, 1 (from 1 (from 1 (from
(straight-through
3UF7122- *E15*) *E03*) *E10*)
transformer)
1AA01-0 (
20 A to 200 A DRP)
(bar connection) 3UF7113-
63 A to 630 A 1AA01-0,
(bar connection) 3UF7123-
1AA01-0 (
TLS)
3UF7113-
1BA01-0,
3UF7123-
1BA01-0 (
DRP)
3UF7114-
1BA01-0,
3UF7124-
1BA01-0 (
DRP)

SIMOCODE pro
68 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
Decoupling module (DCM) 1)
For connecting on the line side of a current/
voltage measuring module of the 1st gener‐
ation UM at the system interface for use of
voltage measurement in isolated-neutral sys‐
tems, systems with high-impedance resistive
or asymmetrical grounding, and in single-
phase systems.
— 3UF7150- — — 1 1 1 1 1
1AA00-0
Digital modules (DM) 2)
Up to two digital modules can be used to add
additional binary inputs and relay outputs to
the basic unit. The input circuits of the digital
modules are supplied from an external pow‐
er supply.
4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs.
Input voltage 24 V — 3UF7300- — 1 1 2 2 2 2
DC; monostable 1AB00-0 — 1 1 2 2 2 2
relay outputs 3UF7300-
Input volt‐ 1AU00-0
age 110 V-240 V A
C/DC; monostable
relay outputs
Input volt‐ — 3UF7310- — — — 2 2 2 2
age 24 V DC; bista‐ 1AB00-0 — — — 2 2 2 2
ble relay outputs 3UF7310-
Input volt‐ 1AU00-0
age 110 V-240 V A
C/DC; bistable re‐
lay outputs
Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 69
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 2)
For fail-safe tripping via hardware signal.
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel;
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe
tripping.
Inputs for sensor circuit, start signal, cascad‐
ing and feedback circuit
Safety function via DIP switch
Rated control supply
voltage Us:
24 V DC 3UF7320- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
110 to 1AB00-0 — — — *E07*) 1 1 1
240 V 3UF7320- 1 (from
AC/DC 1AU00-0 *E07*)
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 2)
For fail-safe tripping via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe:
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe
tripping
1 input for feedback circuit; 3 binary stand‐
ard inputs.
24 V DC 3UF7330- — — — 1 (from — 1 —
110 to 1AB00-0 — — — *E07*) — 1 —
240 V 3UF7330- 1 (from
AC/DC 1AU00-0 *E07*)
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, the basic
unit can be optionally expanded by analog
inputs and outputs (0 to 20 mA).
2 inputs (passive) for inputting and 1 output
for outputting 0/4 to 20 mA signals.
— 3UF7400- — — — 1 1 2 2
1AA00-0
Ground-fault module (EM)

SIMOCODE pro
70 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
The external ground-fault monitoring using
residual current transformer and ground-
fault module is normally used in the follow‐
ing cases:
• in cases in which power systems are
grounded with high impedance
• in cases, in which precise detection of the
ground-fault current is necessary, for ex‐
ample, for condition monitoring.
— 3UF7500- — — — 1 (from 1 1 1
1AA00-0 *E02*)
for con‐
necting
a 3UL22 re
sidual-cur‐
rent trans‐
former
— 3UF7510- — 1 1 1 (from 1 1 (from 1
1AA00-0 *E10*) *E04*)
for con‐
necting
a 3UL23 re
sidual-cur‐
rent trans‐
former
Temperature module (TM)
Irrespective of the thermistor protection of
the basic units, an additional max. 3 analog
temperature sensors can be evaluated using
a temperature module.
Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84
or NTC
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog tem‐
perature sensors.
— 3UF7700- — 1 3) 1 3) 1 (from 1 2 2
1AA00-0 E*E02*
)
Multifunction module

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 71
An overview of system components

Module Control MLFB Dia‐ Number that can be connected to

supply gram pro C pro S V PN GP pro V P pro V M pro V P pro V EI
voltage B R N P
To expand
• the number of inputs and outputs
• the functional scope
the SIMOCODE pro S basic units.
The following inputs and outputs are availa‐
ble:
• 4 digital inputs
• 2 relay outputs
• 1 input for connecting an analog temper‐
ature sensor (sensor types: PT100/
PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC)
• 1 input for connecting a 3UL23 residual
current transformer
Input voltage 24 V DC 3UF7600- — 1 — — — — —
1AB01-0
Input voltage 110-240 V AC/DC 3UF7600- — 1 — — — — —
1AU00-0

Note
When using the 2nd generation current / voltage acquisition modules (UM+), no decoupling
module must be connected.

Detailed description: See Description of system components (Page 79)

Dimension drawings: See CAx data, dimension drawings (Page 349)
Mounting instructions See Mounting (Page 173)
Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V PB when using an operator panel with display
and/or a decoupling module: See Chapter Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when
using an older basic unit (Page 145) and Configuration notes for use of a SIMOCODE pro V MR
and SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit (Page 148).
2)

Note
Use of a DM-F instead of a DM
You can use a fail-safe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP) instead of a digital module (DM).

3) Only one temperature sensor can be connected

SIMOCODE pro
72 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

Note
Usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit: The operator panel with display can only be used with
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit from version *E03*.
• SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP basic unit: An operator panel with display from version *E07*
is required for use with these basic units.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro PN basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro MR basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• When using the "Dry-running protection by means of active power monitoring" function, the
following operator panels with display are permitted:
– 3UF7210-1AA00-0: ≥ E12
– 3UF7210-1AA01-0: ≥ E03
– 3UF7210-1BA00-0: ≥ E04
– 3UF7210-1BA01-0: ≥ E03

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 73
An overview of system components

Accessories
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC10 (https://www.siemens.com/ic10).

Table 7-2 System components, accessories that can be connected

System component, acces‐ MLFB Diagram for for for V PN for pro for for for
sory pro C pro S GP V PB pro V pro V P pro V E
MB RT N IP
U
Connecting cable ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for connecting the basic unit, current measur‐
ing module, current/voltage measuring mod‐
ule, operator panel, and decoupling module
0.025 m ribbon 3UF7930-0AA0
0.1 m ribbon 0-0
0.15 m ribbon 3UF7931-0AA0
0-0
0.3 m ribbon
3UF7935-0AA0
0.5 m ribbon
0-0
0.5 m round
3UF7932-0AA0
1.0 m round 0-0
1.5 m round 3UF7932-0BA0
2.5 m round 0-0
3UF7937-0BA0
0-0
.........
3UF7933-0BA0
0-0
Interface covers 3UF7950-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
For covering unused system 0-0 (light gray)
interfaces 3RA6936-0B (ti‐
tanium gray)
Memory module 3UF7900-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Backup of the full set of pa‐ 0-0 (light gray) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
rameters of a SIMO‐ 3UF7900-0AA0 — ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓
CODE pro system when the 1-0 (titanium
— ✓ ✓ ✓ 1)
✓ ✓ ✓
device is replaced. If a de‐ gray)
vice is replaced, parameter 3UF7901-0AA0
transfer without PC. 0-0 (light gray)
3UF7901-0AA0
1-0 (titanium
gray)
Initialization module 3UF7902-0AA0 — ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓
Storage and initialization of 0-0
device parameters and de‐
vice addressing in motor
control centers.

SIMOCODE pro
74 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

System component, acces‐ MLFB Diagram for for for V PN for pro for for for
sory pro C pro S GP V PB pro V pro V P pro V E
MB RT N IP
U
Y connecting cable — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Connection of the basic unit and current or
current/voltage measuring module with the
initialization module when using the initiali‐
zation module
Length of sys‐ Length of
tem interface open cable 3UF7931-0CA0
0.1 m end 0-0
0.5 m 1.0 m 3UF7932-0CA0
1.0 m 1.0 m 0-0
1.0 m 3UF7937-0CA0
0-0
Addressing plug 3UF7910-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Assigning the PROFIBUS/ 0-0
Modbus RTU address with‐
out using a PC/PG to SIMO‐
CODE pro through the sys‐
tem interface
USB PC cable 3UF7941-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for connecting SIMO‐ 0-A
CODE pro to the USB inter‐
face of a PC/PG
USB-to-serial adapter 3UF7946-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
For connecting an RS 232 PC -0
cable to the interface of a
PC.
Door adapter 3UF7920-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for bringing out the system 0-0
interface, for example, out
of a cabinet
Adapter for operator pan‐ 3UF7922-0AA0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
el 0-0
Enables use of the smaller
operator panel (OP) after
system replacement in a
front panel cutout in which
a larger 3UF5 2 operator
panel of SIMOCODE DP had
previously been used.
Degree of protection: IP54.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 75
An overview of system components

System component, acces‐ MLFB Diagram for for for V PN for pro for for for
sory pro C pro S GP V PB pro V pro V P pro V E
MB RT N IP
U
Labeling strips ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for pushbuttons of the oper‐ 3UF7925-0AA0
ator panel 3UF7 20 0-0
for pushbuttons of the oper‐ 3UF7925-0AA0
ator panel with display 1-0
3UF7 21 3UF7925-0AA0
for LEDs of the operator pan‐ 2-0
el 3UF7 20
Push-in lugs for screw
mounting
e.g. on mounting plate; 2
units required per device
Can be used for the current 3RV2928-0B ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓
measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring
modules
3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1 and 3U
F7 1.2
Can be 3RP19 03 ✓ — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
used for 3UF700, 3UF701, 3
UF7 3, 3UF7 4, 3UF7 5 and
3UF7 7
Can be used for 3UF7020- 3ZY1311-0AA0 — ✓ ✓ — — — —
1A.01-0 and 3UF7600-1A.0 0
1-0
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lug and ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
busbar connections: 3RT1956-4EA1
Length 100 mm, can be 3RT1966-4EA1
used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
Length 120 mm, can be
used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0
Covers for box terminals: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Length 25 mm, can be used 3RT1956-4EA2
for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT1966-4EA2
Length 30 mm, can be used
for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0

SIMOCODE pro
76 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
An overview of system components

System component, acces‐ MLFB Diagram for for for V PN for pro for for for
sory pro C pro S GP V PB pro V pro V P pro V E
MB RT N IP
U
Covers for screwed con‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
nection:
between contactor and cur‐
rent measuring module or
3RT1956-4EA3
between current/voltage
3RT1966-4EA3
measuring module with di‐
rect mounting
can be used for
3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
can be used for
3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0
Box terminal blocks ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
for round and ribbon cable
conductors 3RT1955-4G
up to 70 mm2, can be used 3RT1956-4G
for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
3RT1966-4G
up to 120 mm2, can be used
for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
up to 240 mm2, can be used
for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0
Bus termination module ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
with dedicated power sup‐
ply;
for bus connection after the
last device on the bus
3UF1900-1KA0
Supply voltage: 0
115/230 V AC 3UF1900-1KB0
24 V DC 0
Note
The use of bus connection
modules is recommended,
in particular, when using SI‐
MOCODE pro S.
Bus connecting terminal 3UF7960-0AA0 — ✓ ✓ — — — —
For securing the PROFIBUS 0-0
cable on the SIMO‐
CODE pro S basic unit.

1) For basic unit SIMOCODE pro V PB from version E09

Software, selection and ordering data:

Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing: See Manual Parameterizing
SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).
Selection and ordering data: See Catalog IC10 (https://www.siemens.com/ic10).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 77
An overview of system components

SIMOCODE pro
78 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components 8
8.1 Basic units (BU)

Types of basic units

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are
always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They contain the processor in which all
protection, control and monitoring functions of the SIMOCODE system are executed.

%DVLF8QLW6,02&2'( SUR & %DVLF8QLW6,02&2'( SUR 9 %DVLF8QLWV6,02&2'( SUR 931SUR931*3

352),%860RGEXV578 DQG6,02&2'(SUR9(WKHU1HW,3

%DVLF8QLW6,02&2'( SUR 6

Figure 8-1 Basic units

The basic units are suitable for DIN rail mounting or with additional push-in lugs for mounting
on a mounting plate. They are always equipped with removable terminals.
The basic units are available in different types for the following supply voltages:
• 24 V DC
• 110 to 240 V AC / DC

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 79
Description of system components
8.1 Basic units (BU)

SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

Basic unit pro C is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series and is used
in conjunction with a current measuring module and optional operator panels.
The following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) and reversing starter
• Circuit breaker control (MCCB).

SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Basic unit pro S is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro S device series and is used
in conjunction with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel. As compared
with the basic unit, SIMOCODE pro C provides the following expansion options by means of
connecting a multifunction / expansion module:
• Increased device functionality with additional inputs and outputs
• Connection of a residual current transformer
• Connection of a temperature sensor.
The following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) and reversing starter
• Star-delta starter
• Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
• Control of a soft starter.

SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit

The SIMOCODE pro V PN GP General Performance basic unit for PROFINET is used in combination
with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel. It provides the following
expansion options by means of connecting an expansion module:
• Increased device functionality with additional inputs and outputs
• Connection of a residual current transformer
• Connection of a temperature sensor.
The following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) and reversing starter
• Star-delta starter
• Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
• Control of a soft starter.

SIMOCODE pro
80 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.1 Basic units (BU)

SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic unit

The SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series and are used in combination with a current measuring module or
current / voltage measuring module and optional operator panel.
The following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) and reversing starter
• Star-delta starter, possibly combined with reversing starter
• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), possibly combined with
reversing starter
• 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, possibly combined with reversing
starter
• Positioner control
• Solenoid valve control
• Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
• Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter
The SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units provide the following expansion options not
offered by the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE PRO V PN GP basic units:
• Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to need
• Use of a current / voltage measuring module in place of a current measuring module
• Additional inputs and outputs, as required
• Larger number of inputs and outputs
• Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel.

Operator controls and display elements, system interfaces basic units

LEDs for device diagnostics (DEVICE, BUS, GEN. FAULT)
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault diagnostics, and indicate the
basic status:
• Of the device itself via the "DEVICE" LED
• For bus communication via the "BUS" LED
• By displaying the activity at the two ports via the LEDs "PORT 1" and "PORT 2"
• Of any motor feeder faults via the "GEN. FAULT" FAULT" LED
For further information, refer to Chapters Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on
the operator panel (PROFIBUS) (Page 245) and Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and
on the operator panel (PROFINET) (Page 250).

"TEST/RESET" button

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 81
Description of system components
8.1 Basic units (BU)

Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and makes it possible
to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping the contactor control. If a memory
module or addressing plug is plugged in, parameterization can be initiated via the TEST/RESET
button or, for example, by accepting the PROFIBUS address.
You will find further information in Chapter "Test/Reset" in the manual Parameterizing
SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958), in
Chapters Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 244) and Setting IP parameters and PROFINET
device name (Page 247) and in Chapter Backing up and saving parameters (Page 262).

System interfaces
2 system interfaces for connecting
• a current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module and
• an operator panel or expansion modules

SIMOCODE pro
82 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.2 Operator panel (OP)

8.2 Operator panel (OP)

Function of the operator panel

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It has an external
system interface on the front to allow easier parameterization or diagnostics via a
PC / programming device. This system interface (with cover for IP54) can be used to connect (by
means of the PC cable) a PC with the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software installed or the memory
module or the addressing plug.
On the rear system interface, it is connected to the basic unit or to an expansion module via a
connecting cable. It is supplied with power via the basic unit.
The operator panel is frequently installed in the front panels of motor control centers. It is used
in all device series. It also contains all the status LEDs available on the basic unit and the "TEST/
RESET" button, and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the control cabinet.
The following are available:
• 5 buttons, of which 4 are freely parameterizable
• 10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:

Figure 8-2 Operator panel

Labeling strips:
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow LEDs 1 to 3:
• Buttons 1 to 4: 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
• LEDs 1 to 3: 1 individually inscribable labeling strip

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 83
Description of system components
8.2 Operator panel (OP)

6723
&/26( 23(1

23(1 &/26(

/('JUHHQ /('JUHHQ /('JUHHQ /('JUHHQ
%XWWRQ %XWWRQ %XWWRQ %XWWRQ

, 7(67
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1 )$8/7

/('\HOORZ /('\HOORZ /('\HOORZ

Figure 8-3 Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs

Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:

/DEHOLQJ VWULSV

6WRUDJH FOLSV
Figure 8-4 Storage clips for labeling strips for pushbuttons and LEDs of the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro
84 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.2 Operator panel (OP)

"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the rear of the
operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet. In this case, the storage clips for the labeling strips
cannot be used.

0HPRU\ PRGXOH LQ WKH SDUN SRVLWLRQ

Figure 8-5 "Park position" for memory module

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 85
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3.1 Description of the operator panel with display

Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with display (OPD) is
also available for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series. This operator panel can
additionally display current measured values, operating data, diagnostics data or status
information of the motor feeder on the cabinet. It also contains all the status LEDs that are
present on the basic unit and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the cabinet.
The motor can be controlled via the buttons on the operator panel. Current measured values,
status information, fault messages or the device-internal error log are simultaneously shown on
the display.

Note
Usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit: The operator panel with display can only be used with
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit from version *E03*.
• SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP basic unit: An operator panel with display from version *E07*
is required for use with these basic units.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro PN basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro MR basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• When using the "Dry-running protection by means of active power monitoring" function, the
following operator panels with display are necessary:
– 3UF7210-1AA00-0: ≥ E12
– 3UF7210-1AA01-0: ≥ E03
– 3UF7210-1BA00-0: ≥ E04
– 3UF7210-1BA01-0: ≥ E03

The following are available:

• 4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
• 4 keys for navigating the display menu, 2 of these are softkeys with different functions (e g.
test / reset)
• 2 system interfaces (front and back)
• 7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the motor control
buttons, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, CCW, CW, etc.)

Note
Modification of selected device parameters via the operator panel with display
Modification of selected device parameters is possible via the operator panel with display
(see Parameters (Page 117))

SIMOCODE pro
86 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

The following figure shows an operator panel with display:

Figure 8-6 Operator panel with display

The operator panel with display can be connected directly to basic unit SIMOCODE pro V or an
expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by the basic unit. This front
system interface (with cover for IP54) can be used to connect (by means of the PC cable) a PC
with the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software installed or the memory module and the addressing
plug.

NOTICE
Active operation
You must not remove or plug in the operator panel with display during operation!

Note
When using an operator panel with display, you may have to consider restrictions in the type and
number of expansion modules that can be connected to a basic unit!
See Chapter Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit
(Page 145).

Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 (6 pre-assigned and 1 that can be labeled individually)
are included:

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 87
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

%XWWRQ

/('JUHHQ

%XWWRQ

/('JUHHQ

%XWWRQ

/('JUHHQ
%XWWRQ

/('JUHHQ

&/26(

, 23(1 23(1

6723 &/26(

Figure 8-7 Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display

Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with display:

/DEHOLQJ VWULSV

6WRUDJH FOLSV
Figure 8-8 Storage clips for labeling strips

"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with display beneath the
system interface:

SIMOCODE pro
88 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Figure 8-9 "Park position" for memory module

8.3.2 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display

Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostics data as well as the
status information of the motor feeder in plain text or with the aid of symbols.

,/ $
,/ $
,/ $

$7 0HQX

Figure 8-10 Display elements of the operator panel with display

1
Shows the current setting Is / rated motor current in A. For motors with two speeds, the relevant
current setting Is1 or Is2 is always displayed depending on whether the current speed is slow or
fast, e.g. 8 A. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the motor is

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 89
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

stopped to alternate between the display of the two current settings. When running, the current
setting for the active motor speed is always displayed.
2
Shows the set class time of the overload protection, e.g.: 10 = class 10E (class = trip class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the motor temperature is being monitored
by thermistors or analog temperature sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). (T= temperature
monitoring active.)
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured values when running.
This is the standard display at the topmost menu level. Predefined profiles in the display settings
can be selected for this purpose. By pressing the "Menu" softkey on the right, you can navigate
through the submenus of the main display (see Chapter Read and adapt main display
(Page 108)).

Operator controls of the operator panel with display

Figure 8-11 Operator controls of the operator panel with display

1
Four freely parameterizable operator keys with status LED. These operator keys are used to
control the motor with integrated status LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be user-
defined. Labeling can be either freely chosen or achieved using the labeling strips supplied with
the device (see also Chapter Operator panel with display (Page 86) and Chapters "Operator panel
LED" and "Operator panel buttons" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958))
2

SIMOCODE pro
90 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Two softkeys. They can have different functions depending on the menu displayed (e.g. open
menu, exit menu, TEST/RESET). The currently assigned functions are shown on the lower left or
right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (one upwards arrow and one downwards arrow). They serve to navigate the
menu or change the display settings, e.g. to adjust the contrast or to select a profile for the main
display.

8.3.3 Menu of the operator panel with display

8.3.3.1 Timing charts

Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display

Main menu, operator panel with display
Details: See Displays of the operator panel with display (Page 106).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 91
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

0DLQGLVSOD\ ,GHQWLILFDWLRQ

0HDVXUHGYDOXHVGLVSOD\ $ERXW6,02&2'(

6WDWXVGLVSOD\ %DVLF8QLW6,02&2'(SUR93%$ERYH (

6WDWLVWLFVPDLQWHQDQFH

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

'HYLFH,2V

3DUDPHWHU

'LVSOD\VHWWLQJV

&RPPDQGV

6WDWXVLQIRUPDWLRQ

:DUQLQJV

)DXOWV

(UURUEXIIHU

(YHQWPHPRU\
23'DERYH (

Figure 8-12 Main menu, operator panel with display

Main display, operator panel with display

Details: See Read and adapt main display (Page 108).

1 Measured values, operator panel with display

Details: See Display of measured values in the measured values display (Page 110).

SIMOCODE pro
92 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

,BPD[>$@ 7HPSHUDWXUHV

3KDVHFXUUHQWV 7HPSHUDWXUHPRGXOH

PD[7HPSHUDWXUH>r&r)@
777>r&r)@

,/,/,/>$@ 7HPSHUDWXUHPRGXOH
PD[7HPSHUDWXUH>r&r)@
777>r&r)@

3KDVHXQEDODQFH>@
7KHUPDOPRWRUPRGHOO>@

3KDVHYROWDJHV
7LPHWRWULS>V@

8/18/18/1
&RROLQJGRZQSHULRG>V@

/LQHWROLQHYROWDJHV
RQO\23'DERYH ( /DVWWULSFXUUHQW>$@

8//8//8//

3RZHU36&RV3KL

&RV3KL>DEV@
3>N:@6>N9$@

([WHUQDO(DUWK)DXOW

(DUWKIDXOWFXUUHQW>$@
ODVWWULSSFXUUHQW>$@

$QDORJ,2V

$QDORJPRGXOH
(($>P$@

Figure 8-13 Measured values, operator panel with display

Note
Numbering of the displays
The numbering is valid with the maximum expansion.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 93
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

2 Status motor protection/motor control, operator panel with display

Details: See Motor protection and motor control status (Page 112).

*HQHUDO 6DIHW\

'0)/RFDO
*HQHUDOIDXOW (QDEOLQJFLUFXLW
*HQHUDOZDUQLQJ 6ZLWFKRII
6DIHW\RN 6DIHW\
'0)/RFDO
&XUUHQWIORZLQJ
'HYLFHRN
',36DIHW\
'0)352),VDIH
%XVRN (QDEOLQJFLUFXLWV
6363/6LQ5XQ 6ZLWFKRII
352),VDIHRN 6DIHW\

&RQWURO 0LVFHOODQHRXV

21 21 'HYLFHWHVW

2)) 21!
21!! 6WDUWDFWLYH DFWLYH

,QWHUORFNLQJWLPHDFWLYH 3KDVHVHTXHQFH
&KDQJHRYHUSDXVHDFW

RQO\23'DERYH ( DQG

232 6,02&2'(SUR9%DVLF8QLWDERYH (
5HPRWH
73)

)& )2
7& 72

3RVLWLRQHU
&ORVHV
2SHQV

1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQGPRGH

3URWHFWLRQ

&RROLQJGRZQSHULRGDFW
3DXVHWLPHDFWLYH
(PHUJHQF\VWDUWH[HFXWHG

Figure 8-14 Status motor protection/motor control, operator panel with display -
PROFIBUS / Modbus RTU

SIMOCODE pro
94 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

*HQHUDO 6DIHW\

'0)/RFDO
*HQHUDOIDXOW (QDEOLQJFLUFXLW
*HQHUDOZDUQLQJ 6ZLWFKRII
6DIHW\RN 6DIHW\
'0)/RFDO
&XUUHQWIORZLQJ
'HYLFHRN
',36DIHW\
'0)352),VDIH
%XVRN (QDEOLQJFLUFXLWV
6363/6LQ5XQ 6ZLWFKRII
352),VDIHRN 6DIHW\

352),HQHUJ\

&RQWURO &RPPDQG6WDUWB3DXVH

(QHUJ\VDYLQJPRGHDFWLYH

21 21
2)) 21! 0LVFHOODQHRXV
21!! 6WDUWDFWLYH

,QWHUORFNLQJWLPHDFWLYH 'HYLFHWHVW
&KDQJHRYHUSDXVHDFW DFWLYH

232
5HPRWH 3KDVHVHTXHQFH
73)

RQO\23'DERYH (
)& )2
7& 72

3RVLWLRQHU
&ORVHV
2SHQV

1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQGPRGH

3URWHFWLRQ

&RROLQJGRZQSHULRGDFW
3DXVHWLPHDFWLYH
(PHUJHQF\VWDUWH[HFXWHG

Figure 8-15 Status motor protection/motor control, operator panel with display - PROFINET / EtherNet/
IP

3 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display

Details: See Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/
maintenance display (Page 113).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 95
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

1XPEHURIRYHUORDGWULSV &RXQWHU

0RWRURSHUDWLQJKRXUV>K@ &RXQWHU$FWXDOYDOXH

2SHUDWLQJKRXUV &RXQWHU

0RWRU! 2XWSXW

1XPEHURIVWDUWV &DOFXODWRUV

3HUPLVVLEOHVWDUWV$FWXDOYDOXH &DOFXODWRU

6WDUWVSRVVLEOH
2QHPRUHVWDUWRQO\SRVVLEOH &DOFXODWRU
1RVWDUWSRVVLEOH

0RWRUVWRSWLPH>K@ 6DIHW\7LPHXQWLO

7HVWUHTXLUHG>ZHHNV@
23'DERYH ( DQG%DVLF8QLW
6,02&2'(SUR9DERYH (
0RWRUVWRSWLPH!

(QHUJ\FRQVXPHG>N:K@

1XPEHURISDUDPHWHUL]DWLRQV

2SHUDWLQJKRXUVEDVLFXQLW>K@

7LPHU

7LPHU$FWXDOYDOXH>V@

7LPHU2XWSXW

2XWSXW

Figure 8-16 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display - PROFIBUS / Modbus

SIMOCODE pro
96 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

1XPEHURIRYHUORDGWULSV &RXQWHU

0RWRURSHUDWLQJKRXUV>K@ &RXQWHU$FWXDOYDOXH

2SHUDWLQJKRXUV &RXQWHU

0RWRU! 2XWSXW

1XPEHURIVWDUWV &DOFXODWRUV

3HUPLVVLEOHVWDUWV$FWXDOYDOXH &DOFXODWRU

6WDUWVSRVVLEOH
2QHPRUHVWDUWRQO\SRVVLEOH &DOFXODWRU
1RVWDUWSRVVLEOH

0RWRUVWRSWLPH>K@ &DOFXODWRU

0RWRUVWRSWLPH! &DOFXODWRU

(QHUJ\FRQVXPHG>N:K@ 6DIHW\7LPHXQWLO

7HVWUHTXLUHG>ZHHNV@

1XPEHURISDUDPHWHUL]DWLRQV

2SHUDWLQJKRXUVEDVLFXQLW>K@

5HDOWLPHEDVLFXQLW

7LPHU

7LPHU$FWXDOYDOXH>V@

7LPHU2XWSXW

2XWSXW

Figure 8-17 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display - PROFINET / EtherNet/IP

4 Communication on the fieldbus, operator panel with display

Details: See Status display for fieldbus communication (Page 114).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 97
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

'LDJQRVWLFV
352),%860RGEXVDGGUHVV 'HYLFHIDXOW
(YHQW

352),VDIHDGGUHVV 'LDJQRVWLFV
23'DERYH ( DQG%DVLF8QLW :DUQLQJ
6,02&2'(SUR9DERYH ( )DXOW

%DXGUDWH

%XV
RN
0RQLWRULQJ

3/&3&6
LQ5XQ
0RQLWRULQJ

%XV3/&IDXOW5HVHW
0DQXDO
$XWR

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

6WDUWXSSDUDPHWHUEORFN

7LPHVWDPSLQJ
$FWLYH

&RPSDWLELOLW\PRGH

&RPSDWLELOLW\PRGH
8)PRGH

8)2SHUDWLQJPRGH
'39
'39

8)EDVLFW\SH

Figure 8-18 Communication on PROFIBUS / Modbus, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro
98 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

'LDJQRVWLFV
,3FRQILJXUDWLRQ 'HYLFHIDXOW
(YHQW

'LDJQRVWLFV
,3DGGUHVV :DUQLQJ
)DXOW

6XEQHWPDVN

$GGUHVVURXWHU

'HYLFHQDPH

0$&DGGUHVV

352),VDIHDGGUHVV

%DXGUDWH

%XV
RN
0RQLWRULQJ

3/&3&6
LQ5XQ
0RQLWRULQJ

%XV3/&IDXOW5HVHW
0DQXDO
$XWR

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ

6WDUWXSSDUDPHWHUEORFN

7LPHVWDPSLQJ
$FWLYH

Figure 8-19 Communication on PROFINET/EtherNet/IP, operator panel with display

5 Device I/Os, operator panel with display

Details: See Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 115).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 99
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

'0 '0)/RFDO
,QSXWV ,1 6WDUW
%DVLF8QLW )HHGEDFNFLUFXLW 7HPSHUDWXUHPRGXOH
&DVFDGHG
'0 '0)/RFDO
,QSXWV 6HQVRUFKDQQHOV
PD[WHPS>r&)@

'0 '0)/RFDO
2XWSXWV 2XWSXWV '0)/RFDO
777>r&)@
(QDEOLQJFLUFXLW
'0 '0)352),VDIH
37& ,QSXWV 6HQVRUW\SH 3W 3W
17& .7<
+LJKUHVLVWDQFHQRWSUHVHQW )HHGEDFNFLUFXLW .7<
'0 '0)352),VDIH
37& 2XWSXWV '0)352),VDIH 6HQVRU
RN )DXOW
6KRUWFLUFXLW (QDEOLQJFLUFXLW 2XWRI5DQJH

&XUUHQWPHDVXULQJ *URXQGIDXOWPRGXOH

,/,/,/>$@ *URXQGIDXOWFXUUHQW>$@

(0
,QSXWV
9ROWDJHPHDVXULQJ 2SHQFLUFXLW
6KRUWFLUFXLW

8/18/18/1>9@ $QDORJPRGXO

RU 8//8//8//>9@ ,QSXWV
RQO\23'DERYH (

'LJLWDOPRGXOH ,QSXW(>P$@

,QSXWV
2XWSXW>P$@

0RQRVWDEOHRXWSXWV ,QSXWV
2SHQFLUFXLW

%LVWDEOHRXWSXWV

Figure 8-20 Device I/Os, operator panel with display

6 Parameters, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro V allows selected parameters to be set using the operator panel with display 1).
Details: See Parameters (Page 117)

SIMOCODE pro
100 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

6HWFXUUHQW,V,V

7ULS,!,
&XUUHQW/LPLWV :DUQLQJ,,
6WDOOHG5RWRU

9ROWDJH 7ULS
/LPLWV :DUQLQJ

&RV3KL 7ULS
/LPLWV :DUQLQJ

$FWLYH3RZHU 7ULS3!3
/LPLWV :DUQLQJ33

([WHUQDO 7ULS
(DUWK)DXOW :DUQLQJ

P$ $07ULS!
/LPLWV $0:DUQLQJ!

7HPSHUDWXUH 707ULS!
/LPLWV 70:DUQLQJ!

/LPLW /LPLW
PRQLWRU
Figure 8-21 Parameter settings, operator panel with display

1)
Overview of the basic units and operator panels and their product versions, which permit the
setting of parameters via the operator panel with display:

Operator panel
3UF7210-1AA00- 3UF7210-1BA0 3UF7210-1AA01 3UF7210-1BA01
0 0-0 -0 -0
SIMOCODE pro V PN 3UF7011-1A.00-0 E01 E07 E01 E01 E01
SIMOCODE pro V EIP 3UF7013-1A.00-0 E01 E07 E01 E01 E01
SIMO‐ 3UF7010-1A.00-0 E15 E10 E02 E01 E01
CODE pro V PROFI‐
BUS
SIMOCODE pro V MR 3UF7012-1A.00-0 E03 E10 E02 E01 E01

You will find usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display in Chapter
Description of the operator panel with display (Page 86).
7 Display settings, operator panel with display
Details: See Adapt display settings (Page 119).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 101
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

/DQJXDJHV
8)b$$ 8)b%$
(QJOLVK (QJOLVK
'HXWVFK ₼⦌
)UDQ©DLV ̷͚͑͘͘͏͐
&RQWUDVW>@ 3ROVNL 뼑霢꽩
(VSDQRO
3RUWXJX¬V
,WDOLDQR
6XRPL
,OOXPLQDWLRQ>2IIV

VPLQPLQ@
,/,O,/>$@
,/,O,/>@
,PD[>$@
3URILOHV ,PD[>@
,PD[&RV
,PD[8/1&RV6
,PD[8//&RV6
,PD[8/1&RV3
,PD[8//&RV3
9ROWDJHGLVSOD\ >P$@,QSXW2XWSXW$0
>P$@,QSXW2XWSXW$0
>P$@,QSXW,QSXW$0
>P$@,QSXW2XWSXW$0
>P$@,QSXW2XWSXW$0
3KDVHYROWDJHV >P$@,QSXW,QSXW$0
PD[7HPSHUDWXUHr&70
7HPSHUDWXUHr&70
PD[7HPSHUDWXUHr)70
7HPSHUDWXUr)70
/LQHWROLQHYROWDJHV PD[7HPSHUDWXUHr&70
7HPSHUDWXUHr&70
PD[7HPSHUDWXUHr)70
7HPSHUDWXUHr)70
:DUQLQJV 8/18/18/1
'RQRWGLVSOD\ 8//8//8//
'LVSOD\ ,PD[8/1&RV
,PD[8//&RV
,PD[8/17PD[r&
)DXOWV ,PD[8//7PD[r&
'RQRWGLVSOD\ ,PD[8/17PD[r)
'LVSOD\ ,PD[8//7PD[r)
&DOFXODWRU
&DOFXODWRU
5HWXUQWRPDLQ (QHUJ\FRQVXPHG>N:K@
GLVSOD\>0DQXDOVV
PLQPLQ@ RQO\23'DERYH (

)DFWRU\VHWWLQJV
'LVSOD\

5HVWRUH
GLVSOD\VHWWLQJV

Figure 8-22 Display settings, operator panel with display

8 commands, operator panel with display (for pro V PB / pro V MR basic units)
Details: See Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands (Page 121).

SIMOCODE pro
102 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

&RPPDQGV

([HFXWH7HVW5HVHW

352),%860RGEXV
$SSO\DGGUHVV

0HPRU\0RGXOH
3URJUDP

0HPRU\0RGXOH
&OHDU

0HPRU\0RGXOH
5HDG

'HYLFH
5HVWDUW

%DVLF8QLW
)DFWRU\VHWWLQJV
Figure 8-23 Commands, operator panel with display

9 Messages, operator panel with display

Details: See Display of all pending status information (Page 122).

7KHUPLVWRUWULS

:DUQLQJ7!

Figure 8-24 Messages, operator panel with display

10 Warnings, operator panel with display

Details: See Display of all pending warnings (Page 122).

7KHUPLVWRUWULS

:DUQLQJ7!

Figure 8-25 Warnings, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 103
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

11 Faults, operator panel with display

Details: See Display of all pending faults (Page 123).

7ULS7!

2YHUORDGSKDVHIDLOXUH

Figure 8-26 Faults, operator panel with display

12 Fault memory, operator panel with display

Details: See Reading the device's internal error buffer (Page 123)

)DXOW

Figure 8-27 Fault memory, operator panel with display

13 Event memory, operator panel with display (only for OPD as from *E06* and BU2 as from
*E07*)
Details: See Reading out the device-internal event memory (Page 123).

'0 '0)/RFDORU'0)352),VDIH

(YHQWPHPRU\

'0 '0)/RFDO
(QDEOLQJFLUFXLW!

'0 '0)352),VDIH
(QDEOLQJFLUFXLW!
352),VDIH$GGUHVV

'0 '0)/RFDORU'0)352),VDIH

(QDEOLQJFLUFXLW!

Figure 8-28 Event memory, operator panel with display

14 Identification, operator panel with display

Details: See Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components (Page 124).

SIMOCODE pro
104 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

6\VWHP
,GHQWLILFDWLRQ 6,02&2'(SUR

Plant identifier ID number

Location designation HW version

Date FW version

Comment Time stamp

%DVLF8QLW 'LVSOD\

0/)% 0/)%

Short code HW version

6,02&2'(SUR9

Manufacturer FW version
6,(0(16

Device family
Load feeder

Device subfamily
Motor management

Device class
6,02&2'(SUR9

Figure 8-29 Identification, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 105
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3.3.2 Displays of the operator panel with display

You can navigate through the menu using the arrow keys and softkeys. Each menu item may
have one or more submenus. The menu structure and display are, in part, directly dependent on
the device parameterization (e. g. selected control function) and hardware configuration (e.g.
type and number of expansion modules used).
• Main display
The "main display" is the standard display of the SIMOCODE pro. It displays current measured
values, which can be selected via profiles predefined to meet user-specific requirements. For
detailed information: See "Read and adapt main display (Page 108)"
• Measured values display
The "Measured values display" provides an overview of all values measured by SIMOCODE
pro. For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related measured values or
temperatures. For detailed information: See "Display of measured values in the measured
values display (Page 110)."
• Status display
The "Status display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information
relevant to the protection and control of the motor. For detailed information: See "Motor
protection and motor control status (Page 112)."
• Statistics/Maintenance
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all SIMOCODE pro
information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. For detailed information: See "Display
of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance display
(Page 113)."
• Communication
The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning fieldbus
communication. For detailed information: See Status display for fieldbus communication
(Page 114)
• Device I/Os
The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all inputs
and outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules. For detailed
information: See Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 115)
• Parameters
SIMOCODE pro V allows selected parameters to be set using the operator panel with display:
For detailed information: See Parameters (Page 117)
The parameterization is possible with the following combinations of basic unit/operator panel
with display:

Operator panel
3UF7210-1AA00- 3UF7210-1BA00- 3UF7210-1AA01 3UF7210-1BA01
0 0 -0 -0
SIMOCODE pro V PN 3UF7011-1A.00-0 E01 E07 E01 E01 E01
SIMOCODE pro V EIP 3UF7013-1A.00-0 E01 E07 E01 E01 E01

SIMOCODE pro
106 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

SIMO‐ 3UF7010-1A.00-0 E15 E10 E02 E01 E01

CODE pro V PROFI‐
BUS
SIMO‐ 3UF7012-1A.00-0 E03 E10 E02 E01 E01
CODE pro V Mod‐
bus RTU

You will find usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display in Chapter
Description of the operator panel with display (Page 86).
• Display settings
All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via "Display
Settings". In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it
is also possible to select the profiles here that are relevant for adjusting the main display. For
detailed information: See also "Adapt display settings (Page 119)."
• Commands
The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for
testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory
module or into SIMOCODE pro. For detailed information: See "Resetting, testing and
parameterizing via commands (Page 121)."
• Messages
The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all pending status information.
For detailed information: See "Display of all pending status information (Page 122)."
• Warnings
The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. For detailed
information: See "Display of all pending warnings (Page 122)."
• Faults
The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. For detailed information:
See "Display of all pending faults (Page 123)."
• Error buffer
The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-internal error buffer. For
detailed information: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer (Page 123)."
• Event memory
The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal event
memory. For detailed information: See "Reading out the device-internal event memory
(Page 123)."
Note
Precondition for event memory display
Is only displayed if DM-F present.

• Identification
In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information/labeling regarding
SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic unit, operator panel with display). For detailed
information: See "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 124)."
• About SIMOCODE
The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information about SIMOCODE pro.
See Timing charts (Page 91).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 107
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3.3.3 Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on their switchboard,
various profiles are stored in the operator panel with display that enable user-specific adaptation
of the standard measured values displayed in the SIMOCODE pro main display. The profile is
selected in the menu "Display settings" → Profiles (see Section Adapt display settings
(Page 119)).
The set current, the selected class time for the overload protection system and the use of
temperature monitoring based on thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed (if
programmed) at the bottom left of the main display. The submenus of the main display can be
navigated with the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be
used to alternate between the display of the two set currents.
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] 1)
Shows the currents in all three phases in A.
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] 1)
Displays the currents in all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
• Imax [A] 1)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A.
• Imax [%] 1)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
• Imax, Cos phi 2)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amps and the power factor.
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the power
factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the
power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the power
factor, and the active power in kW.
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, P 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the
power factor, and the active power in W.
• In1/output AM1 / In1/output AM2 5) [mA]
Shows the current value at input 1 of analog module 1 / 2 and at the output of analog module
1 / 2 in mA.
• In2/output AM1 / In2/output AM2 5) [mA]
Shows the current value at input 2 of analog module 1 / 2 and at the output of analog module
1 / 2 in mA.
• Inputs AM 1 / inputs AM2 5) [mA]

SIMOCODE pro
108 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Shows the current value at the two inputs of analog module 1 / 2 in mA.
• Max. temp. °C TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °C.
• Temperatures °C TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °C.
• Max. temp. °F TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °F.
• Temperatures °F TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °F.
• UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 3)
Shows all phase voltages in V.
• UL1-L1, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 4)
Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and the
power factor as absolute values.
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V and the
power factor.
• Imax, UL1-N, °C 7)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and the
maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C.
• Imax, UL1-L2, °F 7)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the
maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F.
• Calculator 1
Shows the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1 provides without units in the
range 0 ... 65535.
Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte value sent directly from the automation system on the
display of the switchboard or the display without units of each 2-byte value in SIMOCODE pro.
• Calculator 2
Shows the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2 provides without units in the
range 0 ... 65535.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 109
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation
system on the display of the switchboard or the display without units of each 2-byte and 4-byte
value in SIMOCODE pro.
• Energy consumed 2)

Note
Modified system expansion or hardware configuration
If the main display permanently fails to show measured values, this indicates that a profile has
been selected in the display settings that is no longer supported, due, for example, to a changed
system expansion or changed hardware configuration. The profile must be reselected.

1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is used
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used
3) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used Values will only be displayed if
phase voltage is set/configured
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used and line-to-line voltage is set/
configured
5) Possible only if the analog module is used
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used
7) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module and temperature module are used
Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured

8.3.3.4 Display of measured values in the measured values display

The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro measured values.
Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all or only some of the values listed here
will be available. These are the most important menus by way of example:
• Imax 1)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases and can be switched between A or % of Is
• IL1, IL2, IL3 1)
Shows the currents of all three phases and can be switched between A or % of Is.
• Phase unbalance 1)
Shows the current phase unbalance as a percentage.
• UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 2)
Shows all phase voltages in V.
• U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 3)
Shows all line-to-line voltages in V.
• Cos phi, P, S 4)
Shows the power factor (0 to 100 % or absolute, switchable using the right softkey), the
active power in kW, and the apparent power in kVA.
• Frequency [Hz] 7)

SIMOCODE pro
110 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

• Ground-fault current [mA]

Shows the measured value of the residual current.
• Last trip current [mA]
Shows the last measured value of the residual current.
• Analog input 1, analog input 2, analog output (for AM1) 5)
Shows the current values at both inputs and the actual value at the output of analog
module 1 and can be switched over between mA and %.
• Analog input 1, analog input 2, analog output (for AM2) 5)
Shows the actual values at both inputs and the actual value at the output of analog module 2
and can be switched over between mA and %.
• Max. temperature 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 in °C (can be switched to °F).
• Max. temperature 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 2 in °C (can be switched to °F).
• T1, T2, T3 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 in °C (can be switched to °F).
• T1, T2, T3 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 2 in °C (can be switched to °F).
• Thermal motor model
Shows the current temperature rise of the internal thermal motor model in %.
• Time to trip
Shows the estimated time to trip.
• Cooling down period
Displays the cooling down period remaining before the motor can be switched on again after
an overload trip.
• Last trip current
Shows the magnitude of the current that was measured at the moment of the overload trip,
unit of measurement can be switched between A and % of Is.
1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is used
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used Values will only be displayed if
phase voltage is set/configured
3) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used and line-to-line voltage is set/
configured
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used
5) Possible only if the analog module is used
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used
7) 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module necessary

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 111
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3.3.5 Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information relevant
to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type of status information depicted is,
therefore, in part directly dependent upon the parameterized control function and the hardware
configuration of SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

General
• General fault, general warning
• Current flowing, device ok
• Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run

Control

Note
Display status information
The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.

• ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>, start active

• Interlocking time active, change-over pause active
• OPO, Remote, TPF
• FC, FO, TC, TO: Only for "Positioner" control functions.
• Positioner runs in CLOSED direction, positioner runs in OPEN direction: Only for "Positioner"
control functions.
• Non-maintained command mode

Protection
• Cooling down period active, pause time active, emergency start executed

Other
• Device test active
• Phase sequence 1-2-3, phase sequence 3-2-1
Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used.

SIMOCODE pro
112 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Safety
• Safety DM-F Local: Status of enabling circuit, shutdown "Safety," "Safety o.k." (only with an
OPD as from product version *E04*, a SIMOCODE pro V MR / PN / EIP basic unit or a
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit as from product version *E07* and a DM-F Local)
• DIP switches, DM-F Local: Status of DIP switches 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 (only with an OPD as from
product version *E04*, a SIMOCODE pro V MR/PN/EIP basic unit or a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic
unit as from product version *E07* and a DM-F Local)
• Safety DM-F PROFIsafe: Status of enabling circuit, shutdown "Safety," "PROFIsafe active" (only
with an OPD as from product version *E04*, a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit or a
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit as from product version *E07* and a DM-F PROFIsafe).

8.3.3.6 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/

maintenance display

The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all SIMOCODE pro information that
is primarily relevant to maintenance. The states of timers and counters, etc. are displayed, as
well as operating hours, stop times and the number of starts.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

General
• Number of overload trips
• Motor operating hours
• Motor operating hours >: Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours
monitoring.
• No. of starts - actual value
• Permissible starts - actual value
• One more start only, no start
• Stop time: Displays overshooting of the set limit for motor stop time monitoring.
• Energy consumed (possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used)
• Number of parameterizations
• Motor operating hours basic unit
• Real time basic unit
• Timer
• Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) actual value
• Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) output
• Counter
• Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) actual value
• Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) output

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 113
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Calculators
• Calculator 1
• Calculator 2
• Calculator 3
• Calculator 4

Safety
• Time until test requirement: Remaining time until next test requirement in weeks (displayed
only when DM-F is installed).

8.3.3.7 Status display for fieldbus communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning fieldbus
communication.

PROFIBUS/Modbus:
In addition to the current PROFIBUS/Modbus device address, the baud rate or fieldbus-relevant
settings concerning process and diagnostic alarms to the automation system.
These are the most important menus by way of example:
• PROFIBUS/Modbus address
• PROFIsafe address: Indicates the PROFIsafe address (only for OPD versions as from *E04*,
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit as from *E07* and an available with a DM-F PROFIsafe)
• Baud rate
• Bus ok, Bus monitoring
• PLC/PCS in Run, PLC/PCS monitoring
• Bus/PLC fault - reset
• Startup parameter block
• Time stamping active
• Compatibility mode
• Compatibility mode 1, 3UF50 Mode
• 3UF50 mode DPV0, DPV1
• 3UF50 basic type
• Diagnostics device error, diagnostics message: Displays which diagnostic information of type
"device error" and/or "message" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system
via PROFIBUS.
• Diagnostics warning, diagnostics trip: Displays which diagnostic information of type
"warning" and/or "trip" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via
PROFIBUS.

SIMOCODE pro
114 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

PROFINET:
Not only information about IP configuration, device name, MAC address, PROFIsafe address but
also settings about the status of communication and the response of SIMOCODE pro if
communication failures are displayed.
These are the most important menus by way of example:
• IP configuration
• Device name
• MAC address
• PROFIsafe address: Shows the PROFIsafe address (only when DM-F PROFIsafe is installed)
• Baud rate
• Bus OK, bus monitoring
• PLC/PCS in Run, PLC/PCS monitoring
• Bus/PLC fault - reset
• Startup parameter block
• Diagnostics device error, diagnostics message: Shows which type of diagnostic information
is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via PROFINET.
• Diagnostics warning, diagnostics trip: Shows which type of diagnostic information is sent by
SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via PROFINET.

8.3.3.8 Displays the current status of all device I/Os

The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all inputs and
outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules. The type of status
information displayed is directly dependent upon the SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

Basic unit
• Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4)
• Outputs 1 (2, 3)
• PTC high resistance/not present
• PTC ok, PTC short circuit

Current measurement
IL1, Il2, IL3: Displays the currents (in A) in all three phases (possible only if a current measuring
module or current / voltage measuring module is used).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 115
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Voltage measurement
• UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N: Displays all line-to-line voltages in V (possible only if a current / voltage
measuring module is used and the OPD is version *E04* or higher and line-to-line voltage is
set/configured).
• U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1: Displays all line-to-line voltages in V (possible only if a current /
voltage measuring module is used, line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD used is
version *E04* or higher).

Digital module 1, digital module 2

• Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4): Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable."
• Outputs 1, 2 "monostable" (possible only if digital module 1 is used as "monostable").

Note
Display
For OPD up to product version *E03*, the display is different.

• Outputs 1, 2 "bistable" (possible only if digital module 1 is used as "monostable" or "bistable").

Digital module 1 as DM-F Local

Possible only if digital module 1 is "Local," an OPD as from version *E04* and a SIMOCODE pro V
(PB basic unit as from product version *E07*) is used.
• Inputs DM-F Local: Inputs "IN," "Start," "Feedback circuit," "Cascaded."
• Sensor channels DM-F Local: Sensor channels 1, 2
• Outputs DM-F Local: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit."

Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe

Possible only if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe", an OPD as from version *E04* and a
SIMOCODE pro V PB / PN basic unit (PB as from product version *E07*) is used.
• Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Inputs 1, 2, 3, "Feedback circuit".
• Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit."

Ground-fault module
Possible only if the ground-fault module is used.
• Ground-fault current [mA]
• Inputs
- Open circuit
- Short-circuit.

SIMOCODE pro
116 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Analog module
Possible only if the analog module is used.
• Input 1, input 2
• Output
• Open circuit

Temperature module
Possible only if the temperature module is used.
• Max. temperature
• T1, T2, T3
• Sensor type Pt100, Pt1000, NTC, KTY83, KTY85
• Sensor fault sensor out of range

8.3.3.9 Parameters

You can set the following parameters using the operator panel with display:

Parameters Range Note

Overload protection → current settings Possible only if a current measuring module is config‐
ured
Current setting Is1 0.00 - 9,999.00 A -
Current setting Is2 0.00 - 9,999.00 A Possible only in conjunction with the following control
functions:
• Dahlander starter
• Dahlander reversing starter
• Pole-changing starter
• Pole-changing reversing starter
Current limits Possible only if a current measuring module is config‐
ured
Monitoring of current limits → trip level I > (up‐ 0 - 1020 % of Is -
per limit)
Monitoring of current limits → warning level I > 0 - 1020 % of Is -
(upper limit)
Monitoring of current limits → trip level I < 0 - 1020 % of Is -
(lower limit)
Monitoring of current limits → warning level I < 0 - 1020 % of Is -
(lower limit)
Motor protection → stalled rotor protection 0 - 1020 % of Is -
level
Voltage monitoring → voltage limits Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
configured
Trip level U < (lower limit) 0 - 2040 V -
Warning level U < (lower limit) 0 - 2040 V -

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 117
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Parameters Range Note

Cos phi monitoring → Cos phi limits Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
configured
Trip level cos phi < (lower limit) 0 - 100 % -
Warning level cos phi < (lower limit) 0 - 100 % -
Active power monitoring → Active power Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
limits configured
Trip level P > (upper limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Warning level P > (upper limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Trip level P < (lower limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Warning level P < (lower limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Ground fault monitoring → Ground fault Possible only if a 3UF7510 ground-fault module is con‐
limits figured
Trip level 0.00 - 40.00 A -
Warning level 0.00 - 40.00 A -
0/4-20 mA monitoring → 0/4-20 mA limits Possible only if analog module 1 and/or 2 is configured
Analog module 1 - trip level 0/4-20 mA > (up‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
per limit) ues" menu
Analog module 1 - warning lev‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
el 0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) ues" menu
Analog module 1 - trip level 0/4-20 mA < (lower 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
limit) ues" menu
Analog module 1 - warning lev‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
el 0/4-20 mA < (lower limit) ues" menu
Analog module 2 - trip level 0/4-20 mA > (up‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
per limit) ues" menu
Analog module 2 - warning lev‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
el 0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) ues" menu
Analog module 2 - trip level 0/4-20 mA < (lower 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
limit) ues" menu
Analog module 2 - warning lev‐ 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured val‐
el 0/4-20 mA < (lower limit) ues" menu
Temperature monitoring → temperature Possible only if temperature module 1 and/or 2 is con‐
limits figured
Temperature module 1 - trip level > (upper lim‐ 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
it)
Temperature module 1 - warning level > (upper 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
limit)
Temperature module 2 - trip level > (upper lim‐ 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
it)
Temperature module 2 - warning level > (upper 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
limit)
Limit monitor - limit monitor limit 0 - 65535 -
Limit 1 0 - 65535 -
Limit 2 0 - 65535 -
Limit 3 0 - 65535 -

SIMOCODE pro
118 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Parameters Range Note

Limit 4 0 - 65535 -
Limit 5 0 - 65535 -
Limit 6 0 - 65535 -

Note
Password protection
It is only possible to change these parameters if password protection is not active. Only then can
you choose the parameter to be modified with the "OK" button.

Proceed as follows to change a parameter:

• Choose menu item "Parameters" from the main menu
• Then choose the parameter to be changed in the relevant submenu
• Click OK to confirm the selection
You can now change the value with the ▲ and ▼ buttons. The longer you hold these buttons for,
the larger the step by which the value changes.

8.3.3.10 Adapt display settings

The default settings configured in the basic unit can be modified via the display settings.
However, changes made in this way do not result in a change to the configured defaults. In
addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also possible
to select the profiles here that are relevant for adjusting the main display. In the factory settings
menu item, the changes made to the display settings can be reset to the values configured in the
basic unit.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

Languages
English (default), German, French, Polish, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Finnish
or alternatively
English, Chinese, Russian, Korean.

Contrast
0 % to 100 % (default: 50 %)

Illumination
Specifies how long the backlit display will remain on on the operator panel with display after the
last keystroke and enables permanent activation or deactivation of the backlit display. Off, 3 s,
10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 119
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Profiles
Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a defined profile is no longer
supported by SIMOCODE pro, for example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the start
display will be shown instead of the default main display:
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (default)
• Imax [A]
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
• Imax [%]
• Imax, Cos phi
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, P
• In1/output AM1 [mA] (only if analog module 1 is present and configured)
• In2/output AM1 [mA] (only if analog module 1 is present and configured)
• In1/output AM2 [mA] (only if analog module 2 is present and configured)
• In2/output AM2 [mA] (only if analog module 2 is present and configured)
• Inputs AM 1 / inputs AM2 [mA]
• Max. temp. °C/°F TM1 (only if temperature module 1 is present and configured)
• Temperatures °C/°F TM1 (only if temperature module 1 is present and configured)
• Max. temp. °C/°F TM2 (only if temperature module 2 is present and configured)
• Temperatures °C/°F TM2 (only if temperature module 2 is present and configured)
• UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
• UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
• Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi
• Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi
• Imax, UL1-N °C/°F (temperature display TM1! 1))
• Imax, UL1-L2, °C/°F 1) (temperature display TM1! 1))
• Calculator 1
• Calculator 2
• Energy consumed [kWh] (only if a current / voltage measuring module is configured).

SIMOCODE pro
120 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

See Section Read and adapt main display (Page 108).

NOTICE
1) Temperatures
The temperature from temperature module 1 is always shown in this display profile.
The temperature from temperature module 2 is not shown in this profile.

Voltage display
Switch voltage display: Defines whether "phase voltages" or "line-to-line voltages" will be
displayed (available only with an OPD as from product version *E04* and a SIMOCODE pro V PB
basic unit up to product version *E06*). Configuration is performed in the basic unit as from
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, product version *E07*.

Warnings
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the display is switched over to
the menu item "Warnings" so that details are displayed (not activated per default): Do not display
(default) - Display

Faults
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the display is switched over to the
menu item "Faults" so that details are displayed (switched on per default, higher priority than
pending warnings): Do not display - Display (default)

Return to main display

Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to the main display:
Manual, 3 s, 10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min

8.3.3.11 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for testing
the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory module or
into SIMOCODE pro.

Program memory module

Parameters are transferred to memory module The memory module must be plugged into the
system interface for this purpose.

Clear memory module

Parameters in memory module are reset. The memory module must be plugged into the system
interface for this purpose.

Read memory module

Acceptance of the parameters from the memory module into the basic unit. The memory
module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 121
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Memory module write protection on

All contents of the memory module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent changes
to the contents of the memory module and any parameter changes to the connected
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
An inadvertent change of parameters for a motor feeder is prevented.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the event "Memory
module write-protected".

Memory module write protection off

With this command you can cancel the write protection of the memory module.

Restart
Initialization of SIMOCODE pro. New start.

Factory settings
All parameters assume their factory settings again.

Set time (= PC time)

If no NTP server address has been configured or no server has been found in the network, you
can set the time of day here, that is, the real-time clock of SIMOCODE pro is set to the system time
of the computer.

Test
Execute the test function. Same function as "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and operator
panel

Reset
Execute a reset operation. Same function at "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and operator
panel.

8.3.3.12 Displaying all pending messages

This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A precise description of
the pending status information messages can be found in Chapter Alarms, faults, and system
events - error handling (Page 277).

8.3.3.13 Displaying all pending warnings

This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the displays settings, it is
possible to set that the display will automatically switch to this menu item when a new general
warning occurs so that the exact cause of the general warning can be displayed. A precise
description of the pending warnings can be found in Chapter Alarms, faults, and system events
- error handling (Page 277).

SIMOCODE pro
122 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

8.3.3.14 Displaying all pending faults

This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the display settings, it is possible
to set that the display will automatically switch to this menu item when a new general fault
occurs so that the exact cause of the general fault can be displayed. A precise description of the
pending faults can be found in Chapter Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling
(Page 277).

8.3.3.15 Reading the device's internal error buffer

The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro's internal error buffer. The
time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed here. See also Chapter Error buffer (Page 274).
A precise description of the faults can be found in Chapter Alarms, faults, and system events -
error handling (Page 277).

8.3.3.16 Reading the device's internal event memory

The "Event memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro's internal event memory.
The two most recent events "DM-F enabling circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling circuit open" are
displayed, together with the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and "DM-F PROFIsafe".

Event memory
The event memory is displayed.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed," DM-F Local

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed," the time and the related DIP
switch configuration.

Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local module.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed," DM-F PROFIsafe

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed," the time and the related
PROFIsafe address.

Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F PROFIsafe module.

Last event "Enabling circuit open"

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and the corresponding time.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 123
Description of system components
8.3 Operator panel with display

Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe module.

8.3.3.17 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information about the used SIMOCODE
pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware versions. This dialog box also enables
identification of the motor feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE pro, as well as a
request for the location designation and display of the device's internal comment.
The essential menus are described by way of an example below:

Identification
• Plant identifier
• Location designation
• Date installed
• Description

Basic unit
• Order number
• Short code
• Vendor
• Device subfamily
• Device class
• System
• Ident. no.
• Hardware version
• Firmware version
• Time stamp

Display
• Order number
• Hardware version
• Firmware version

SIMOCODE pro
124 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V device series

8.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C,

SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V device series
Current measuring modules can be used together with all device series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to the current setting to be
monitored for each feeder (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring
modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to
820 A.
Current measuring modules are available for the following current ranges (see figure below):
• 0.3 to 3 A with through-hole connection
• 2.4 to 25 A with through-hole connection
• 10 to 100 A with through-hole connection
• 20 to 200 A with through-hole technology or bus connection system
• 63 to 630 A with bus connection system

$ $ $ $
$ $

$$ $$

Figure 8-30 Types of current measuring modules

The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable, which also
supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail
mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. Basic units
can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current measuring modules up to
200 A can also be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 125
Description of system components
8.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V device series

The current measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw
attachments.

Note
Current measuring modules with a current setting of up to 100 A can be connected to the basic
unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind one another). Larger current measuring
modules can only be mounted separately.

SIMOCODE pro
126 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the

SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

Variants
Two device generations of the current / voltage measuring modules are available:

1st generation: UM, MLFB ending in 000 (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA00-0).

A decoupling module may be required when using these current / voltage measuring modules.
See Chapter Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules
(e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0) (Page 133).

2nd generation: UM+, MLFB ending in 010 (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA01-0).

Note
When using the 2nd generation current / voltage acquisition modules (UM+), no decoupling
module must be connected.

Function
The SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series allows use of a current / voltage measuring
module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current,
current / voltage measuring modules also enable:
• Monitoring voltages up to 690 V (UM, UM+)
• Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi (UM, UM+)
• Determining the frequency (UM+)
• Monitoring the phase sequence (UM, UM+)
With SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), you can define under "Parameters → Device
configuration → Display voltage" whether the phase voltage or line-to-line voltage is to be used
system-wide (when using a SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic unit from firmware
version V3.0).
Current / voltage measuring modules are available for the following current ranges:

Current range Through-hole connec‐ Through-hole technolo‐ Bus connection system

tion gy or bus connection sys‐
tem
UM 0.3 to 3 A ✓ — —
2.4 to 25 A ✓ — —
10 to 100 A ✓ — —
20 to 200 A — ✓ —
63 to 630 A — — ✓

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 127
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

Current range Through-hole connec‐ Through-hole technolo‐ Bus connection system

tion gy or bus connection sys‐
tem
UM+ 0.3 to 4 A ✓ — —
3 to 40 A ✓ — —
10 to 115 A ✓ — —
20 to 200 A — ✓ —
63 to 630 A — — ✓

The diagram below shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:

$ $ $ $
$ $

$$ $$

Figure 8-31 Variants of current / voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro
128 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

Wiring:
The current / voltage measuring modules are connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable,
which also supplies the power.
For the purpose of calculating or monitoring power-related measured values, current / voltage
measuring modules are equipped with additional, removable terminals to which the voltages of
all three phases of the main circuit are connected. An additional 3-core cable can be used, for
example, to connect the main circuit directly from the bus connections of the current / voltage
measuring module with the connection terminals of the voltage measuring module.

Mounting:
The current / voltage measuring modules UM / UM+ with a current setting of up to 115 A are
suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional
push-in lugs. These can be connected to the basic unit mechanically and installed as a unit
(behind one another). For current / voltage measuring modules UM+ with a current setting of up
to 115 A it is possible to mount the basic unit on the current / voltage measuring module.
Current / voltage measuring modules with a setting current up to 200 A can also be mounted on
the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with
the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure.
The current / voltage measuring module with a current setting of up to 630 A can only be
mounted using the integrated screw attachments. In this case, basic units can only be installed
separately next to the current / voltage measuring modules.

Application notes when using a 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module

Note
MLFB
The MLFBs of 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules end
in 010 (e.g. 3UF71101AA010)

Measured variables and measurement accuracies

The following new measured quantities are available:
• Frequency f of the supply voltage 1)
• Average phase current - mean value (I1/I2/I3) I_avg:
Thanks to the internally determined ground-fault current, it is possible to monitor it by means of
a warning and tripping threshold (up to max. 6x Io). The relevant settings are made via the
"Internal ground fault" function block. See Chapter "Ground fault monitoring" in the manual
Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).
The accuracy of measured values has been improved. The following measuring accuracies are
possible in the rated ranges:
• Current I: 1.5%
• Voltage U: 1.5%

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 129
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

• Power factor cos phi: 1.5%

• Active power P: 5%
• Active energy E: 5%
• Frequency f of the supply voltage: 1.5%
• Average phase current - mean value (I1/I2/I3) I_avg: 1.5%
• Ground-fault detection according to IEC 60947-1:
– in the range 30% - 120% Is: ± 10% (Class CI-A)
– in the range 15% - 30% Is: ± 25% (Class CI-B)
The measurement ranges of the current / voltage measuring modules have been adjusted to the
current ranges of SIRIUS Innovations contactors and load feeders. This results in increases to the
following measuring ranges: 0.3 to 4 A; 3 to 40 A and 10 to 115 A.
The measured values with the accuracy figures mentioned can be found in data record 94 -
Measured values (from byte position 132) and in data record 95 - Statistics data in the manual
SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743960).
1)

Note
Frequency measurement
For a correct frequency measurement, the voltage measurement must be connected.

Measurement performance
The rate of measured value acquisition has been improved, and so updating of all measured
values within 200 ms can be assumed.

Tripping characteristic
The overload tripping characteristic, which is calculated in the measuring modules, has been
revised in the 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules. By means of diverse
analyses, the characteristic curve has been adjusted further to the actual requirements for
overload release.
The tripping characteristic fulfills all basic points defined for overload protection
in IEC 60947-4-1. In particular in the range of the 2-fold motor rated current, the characteristic
curve was approximated to the practical conditions. Thus, the characteristic curve has
steepened slightly, which produces slower tripping in the range between 1.15-fold and 6-fold
motor rated current, and faster tripping in the range above 6-fold motor rated current.
The tripping characteristics can be found in Chapter "Overload protection" in the manual
Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).
The trip classes have been extended with trip class 7. Thus, if required, finer coordination of the
trip classes can be chosen in the lower range (if, for example, there is a wish to approximate to
the characteristic curve of the class 10E current measuring modules).

SIMOCODE pro
130 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

Interaction with the SIMOCODE basic units

The 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules operate with the new functions
together with the basic units as from the following product versions:
• SIMOCODE pro V PB: From E15
• SIMOCODE pro V MR: From E03
• SIMOCODE pro V PN: From E10
• SIMOCODE pro V EIP: From E01.

NOTICE
Connecting current / voltage measuring modules to the basic unit
The 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules must be connected directly to the
basic unit in order to achieve the full performance capability.

NOTICE
Compatibility/compatibility mode
• The 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules also function with older
SIMOCODE basic units. In this case, they behave compatibly with the 1st generation
current / voltage measuring modules and can replace them in an application (compatibility
mode). The prerequisite is that the current setting must lie within the permitted range of the
2nd generation current/voltage measuring module. Example: A 1st generation current /
voltage measuring module 3UF7111-1AA00-0 (2.4 - 25 A) is to be replaced. If the current
setting lies within the range of 2.4 to 3.0 A, a 2nd generation current / voltage measuring
module 3UF7110-1AA01-0 (0.3 - 4 A) must be used.
• If both the SIMOCODE pro basic unit and also the current / voltage measuring module are
replaced and the hardware parameterization is unchanged (the SIMOCODE ES
parameterization still contains a 1st generation current / voltage measuring module), the
compatibility mode of the current / voltage measuring module is also active.
• In the event that a 1st generation current / voltage measuring module is replaced by a
2nd generation current / voltage measuring module, an existing decoupling module must
be removed to ensure fault-free operation.
Specifically, this means:
• The tripping characteristic remains as in the 1st generation current / voltage measuring
modules.
• The measurement accuracy figures and measured values correspond to those of the 1st
generation current / voltage measuring modules.
• The new measured values stored as float in the data records are not entered (see manual
SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743960) → Tables, data records - definitions").

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 131
Description of system components
8.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM, UM+) for the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series

The following restrictions still have to be observed:

NOTICE
Maximum configuration of the SIMOCODE system with older basic units
SIMOCODE pro V PB (≤ E14) or pro V MR (E01) and a 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring module
• When using BU / UM+: max. 4 expansion modules
• When using BU / UM+ / OP:
– max. 4 expansion modules
– max. 3 expansion modules when using AM, TM and EM
• when using BU / UM+ / OPD: Max. 3 expansion modules, of which one AM, TM or EM or max.
2 expansion modules from AM, TM and EM when using a BU 24 V DC
• when using BU / UM+ / OPD: Max. 2 expansion modules, of which one AM, TM or EM when
using a BU 110-240 V AC/DC
In this case, the installation guidelines for configuration with the 2nd generation current /
voltage measuring modules must be observed.

See also Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit
(Page 145) for more information.

NOTICE
Rated motor current is in the range from 2.4 - 2.99 A and a 1st generation current / voltage
measuring module with the 2.4 - 25 A measuring range is used
In this case, the 0.3 - 4 A measuring range must be used for the 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring modules.
This requires a change of the parameterization to the smaller measuring range (0.3 - 4 A).
Attention must be paid to this with regard to code conversion of the MLFB numbers.
The installation width of the two measuring ranges is identical.

SIMOCODE pro
132 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0)

8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage

measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0)

Function of the decoupling module

When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded networks, each
current / voltage measuring module must have a decoupling module connected upstream in
series at the system interface. Where voltage or power is measured with SIMOCODE pro in
systems with additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring, a decoupling module
must be connected between the basic unit and each current / voltage measuring module. If
using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these networks, it is imperative that an
additional decoupling module is not used.

Figure 8-32 Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V device series

Note
Connectable expansion modules
When using a decoupling module, note that the type and number of expansion modules that
can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See Chapter Configuration information for
SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit (Page 145).

Note
Using the decoupling module
Do not use the decoupling module with the 2nd generation current / voltage measuring
modules.
In the event that a 1st generation current / voltage measuring module is replaced by a
2nd generation current / voltage measuring module, remove the decoupling module.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 133
Description of system components
8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0)

Using the decoupling module in different networks

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module, especially for
the following networks:
• Isolated systems
• High-impedance grounded systems
• Asymmetrically grounded systems
• Single-phase systems
The tables below show decoupling module requirements for different grounding systems and
system configurations (star systems, delta systems, and single-phase systems):

Star networks:

Table 8-1 Decoupling module requirements for star networks

Star configuration Network configuration Decoupling module re‐ Note

quired?
4-wire, star, grounded with L1 No "TN-S system" according to
low impedance L2 IEC 60364
L3

N
PE

4-wire, star, grounded with L1 Yes —

high impedance L2
L3

R
N
PE

3-wire, star, grounded with L1 No "TN-C system" according to

low impedance L2 IEC 60364
L3

SIMOCODE pro
134 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0)

Star configuration Network configuration Decoupling module re‐ Note

quired?
3-wire, star, grounded with L1 Yes —
high impedance L2
L3

3-wire, star, with isolated neu‐ L1 Yes "IT system" according to

tral L2 IEC 60364
L3

Delta configurations

Table 8-2 Decoupling module requirements for delta networks

Delta network1) Network configuration Decoupling module re‐ Note

quired?
3-wire, delta, one phase L1 Yes Parameter "Voltage display →
grounded L2 phase voltages" must be ac‐
L3
tive.

3-wire, delta, L1 Yes Parameter "Voltage display →

with isolated ground
L2 phase voltages" must be ac‐
L3
tive.

Center tap grounded L1 Yes Parameter "Voltage display →

L2 phase voltages" must be ac‐
L3
tive.

N
PE

1) Mainly encountered in North America

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 135
Description of system components
8.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA00-0)

Single-phase systems

Table 8-3 Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks

Single-phase network Network configuration Decoupling module re‐ Note

quired?
L Yes Parameter "Voltage dis‐
play → Phase voltages" must
be active. The voltage applied
N is calculated from U_L1N +
U_l2N

SIMOCODE pro
136 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.7 Spectrum of the expansion modules

8.7 Spectrum of the expansion modules

Expansion modules are provided as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro S and pro V device
series. The following expansion modules are available:
• Digital modules (DM) (Page 138)
• Fail-safe digital module Local (DM-F Local) (Page 139)
• PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module (DM-F PROFIsafe) (Page 139)
• Analog module (AM) (Page 141)
• Ground-fault module (EM) (Page 142)
• Temperature module (TM) (Page 143)
• Multifunction module (Page 144) (for the SIMOCODE pro S device series)
All expansion modules have an enclosure width of 22.5 mm or 45 mm. They are equipped with
2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals on the front panel. The
expansion module is connected, for example, to the system interface of the basic unit via the
first system interface using a connecting cable. For example, further expansion modules can be
connected via the second system interface or the operator panel.
All expansion modules are suitable for DIN rail mounting or can be fastened directly to a
mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.

Figure 8-33 Expansion module

Note
When an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module is used, you may have to take
further restrictions into consideration concerning the number of expansion modules
connectable per basic unit.
See Chapters Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit
(Page 145) and Configuration notes for use of a SIMOCODE pro V MR and SIMOCODE pro V EIP
basic unit (Page 148)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 137
Description of system components
8.8 Digital module (DM)

8.8 Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and
relay outputs available at the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
The following digital modules are available:

Table 8-4 Versions of digital modules

Inputs Power supply Outputs

4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 V to 240 V AC/DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 V to 240 V AC/DC 2 bistable relay outputs

Up to 2 digital modules can be connected to one SIMOCODE pro basic unit. 4 additional binary
inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are thus provided by each module. All types can be
combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro can therefore be expanded to provide a maximum of
12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after disconnection/failure/interruption of
the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs is
maintained even after disconnection/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
You can set a debouncing time for the digital module inputs if required (see Chapter "Digital
module inputs" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958)).
Power supply to the inputs: See Chapter Wiring basic units, expansion modules and the
decoupling module (Page 182).

Note
To implement some motor control functions, a further digital module is required in addition to
the relay outputs on the basic unit.

Note
If 2 digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the closest to the basic unit via
the system interface will be identified as digital module 1. The digital module connected next in
line will be identified as digital module 2. If one digital module is connected to the front and
another to the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the front system
interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital module 1.

SIMOCODE pro
138 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.9 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)

8.9 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)

Requirements and safety-related functions of the DM-F fail-safe digital modules

The fail-safe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor management system with
fail-safe functions for switching off motors:
• DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
• DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
These modules conform to the general requirements for emergency stop devices or safety
circuits described in EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06.2006).
With appropriate external circuitry, the following performance levels / safety integrity levels can
be achieved:
• PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
• SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 / 62061.
Safety engineering and safety-related functions:
• These are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules.
• They therefore have no direct impact on existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics: See Chapter Technical data (Page 311) and / or Manual
SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/50564852).
"TEST/RESET" DM-F button, setting the DM-F DIP switches, DM-F system interfaces: See Manual
SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/50564852).

Documentation for safety-related functions and fail-safe digital modules

Safety-related functions and additional information on fail-safe digital modules can be found in
the following documentation:
• Manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)
• Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F Local"
• Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe"
You can find the manual and operating instructions under Manuals/operating instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)
The fail-safe DM-F Local digital module facilitates safety-related tripping of a motor feeder by
means of a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the module.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 139
Description of system components
8.9 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)

From a non-safety-related perspective, the DM-F module comprises:

Table 8-5 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the digital module Fail-safe Local (DM‑F Local)

Inputs Power supply Outputs

4 non-safety-related digital in‐ 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
puts: relay outputs
• Input 1: Sensor circuit
• Input 2: Start input
• Input 3: Feedback circuit
• Input 4: Cascading input

The fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital module provides safety-related tripping of a motor feeder
by a fail-safe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the fail-safe PROFIsafe profile.
From a non-safety-related perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe module comprises:

Table 8-6 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the digital module Fail-safe PROFIsafe
(DM‑F PROFIsafe)

Inputs Power supply Outputs

4 non-safety-related digital in‐ 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
puts relay outputs

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit!
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads!

SIMOCODE pro
140 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.10 Analog module (AM)

8.10 Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units can be
optionally expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). This makes it possible to
detect and monitor any process variables that can be mapped onto a 0/4 to 20 mA signal.
Typical applications are, for example, fill-level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry
operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer. The
automation system has free access to the measured process variables. The analog output can,
for example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer instrument. The
automation system can also freely access the output via the communication bus.
• 1 analog module can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• 2 analog modules can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic units
• For each analog module, 2 analog inputs (passive) for detecting 0/4 mA to 20 mA signals.
Both inputs are set either to 0 mA to 20 mA or to 4 mA to 20 mA.
• For each analog module, 1 output for issuing a 0/4 mA to 20 mA signal.

Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied in each case by an
external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transformer). If the output of the analog module
is not being utilized, it can be used as current source for an input.

Note
Requirements for using an analog module with SIMOCODE pro V PB
Use of an analog module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, at least version *E02* or
later (from 04/2005).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 141
Description of system components
8.11 Ground-fault module (EM)

8.11 Ground-fault module (EM)

The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 and 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault modules are suitable for use with
the SIMOCODE pro V/pro S basic units. 1 ground-fault module can be connected to 1 basic unit.

NOTICE
Use of residual current transformers
The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL22 residual current transformer.
The 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL23 residual current transformer.

Requirements for use of ground-fault modules in combination with SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit:

Note
Requirements for use of a 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module with
SIMOCODE pro V PB
Use of a ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, at least version *E02*
or later (from 04/2005).

Note
Requirements for use of a 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module with
SIMOCODE pro V PB
Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, with at least product
version *E10* (from 09/2013).

Detailed information on ground-fault monitoring: See Chapter "Monitoring functions" in the

manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
142 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.12 Temperature module (TM)

8.12 Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V/pro S device series
by an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to the thermistor monitoring system
for the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can
be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the
highest temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The temperatures
recorded can be fully integrated and monitored in the process and can also be transferred to a
higher-level automation system via the communication bus.
You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor windings,
bearings, coolant or gearbox oil.
Various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100/PT1000) for use with solid, liquid, or gaseous
media are supported.

Note
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.

• 1 temperature module can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• 1 temperature module with 1 sensor to the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
• 2 temperature modules can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic units
• 1 temperature module to the SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit
• 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems.

Note
Requirements for using a temperature module with SIMOCODE pro V PB
Use of a temperature module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, at least version *E02* or
later (from 04/2005).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 143
Description of system components
8.13 Multifunction module

8.13 Multifunction module

The multifunction module is the expansion module of the SIMOCODE pro S device series with
the following functions:
• Digital module function with four digital inputs and two monostable relay outputs
• Ground-fault module function with one input for connecting a 3UL23 residual current
transformer
• Temperature module function with an input for connecting a PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84,
or NTC analog temperature sensor
No more than one multifunction module can be connected to one SIMOCODE pro S basic unit.

Note
Use of expansion modules of SIMOCODE pro V with the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
One of the following expansion modules of SIMOCODE pro V can be used with the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit (3UF7020-1AB01-0 or 3UF7020-1AU01-0) instead of the 3UF76*
multifunction module:
• 24 V DC digital module with monostable relay outputs (3UF7300-1AB00-0) or
110 ... 240 V AC/DC digital module (3UF7300-1AU00-0)
• Ground-fault module (3UF7510-1AA0-0)
• Temperature module (3UF7700-1AA00-0), limited to use of one sensor input only

SIMOCODE pro
144 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.14 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit

8.14 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an

older basic unit

Note
Restrictions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series
The restrictions mentioned here apply to the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance device series
with the following product versions:
• SIMOCODE pro V PB: Before E15
• SIMOCODE pro V PN: Before E10
• SIMOCODE pro V MR: Before E03
Devices with the stated product versions or later can be used without restriction with an
operator panel with display and 2nd generation current/voltage measuring modules.

You will find usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display in Chapter
Description of the operator panel with display (Page 86).

Use of a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display

If you want to use an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module in the
SIMOCODE pro V system, then the following configuration instructions concerning the type and
number of connectable expansion modules must be observed.
The following table shows the maximum possible configuration with expansion modules for the
various combinations (✓ = possible, - = not possible):

Maximum configuration with expansion modules

Table 8-7 Maximum configuration with expansion modules when using an operator panel/operator panel with display, a
1st generation current/voltage measuring module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units
(3UF7010-1A.00-0) with a 24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V AC/DC supply

SIMOCODE pro basic unit SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 24 V DC Us = 110-240 V AC/DC
OP Meas‐ Decou‐ DM- DM AM TM EM DM- DM AM TM EM
ure‐ pling F/DM F/DM
ment module
None/O I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
P U/I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
U/I 4) ✓ ✓ 1) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓
✓ 1) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ -
✓ - ✓ ✓ -
✓ - ✓ - ✓

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 145
Description of system components
8.14 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit

SIMOCODE pro basic unit SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 24 V DC Us = 110-240 V AC/DC
OPD I - Max. 4 modules Max. 4 modules
U/I - Max. 4 modules Max. 3 modules 5)
- - ✓ ✓ -
U/I 4)
✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2)
- ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
✓ 1)
✓ 1)
✓ 3)
- -
✓ - - ✓ ✓

1) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active simultaneously (> 3 s)
2) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 3 of 5 relay outputs active simultaneously (> 3 s)
3) Analog module output is not used.
4) 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules; MLFB ending in 000
(e.g. 3UF7110-1AA00-0)
5) AM and TM cannot be used at the same time

Table 8-8 Maximum configuration with expansion modules when using an operator panel/operator panel with display, a
2nd generation current/voltage measuring module and a SIMOCODE pro V-PB basic unit with a product version
earlier than E15 / SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit with product version E01

SIMOCODE pro basic unit SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 24 V DC Us = 110-240 V AC/DC
OP Meas‐ DM- DM AM TM EM DM- DM AM TM EM
urement F/DM F/DM
None/UI Max. 4 modules
OP U/I Max. 4 modules 1)
- - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓
OPD U/I Max. 3 modules 1)
Max. 2 modules 1)

- - ✓ ✓ -
- - ✓ - ✓
- - - ✓ ✓

1) Max. 1 AM, TM, EM module

Note
Decoupling module
A decoupling module is not necessary for 2nd generation current/voltage measuring modules.

SIMOCODE pro
146 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Description of system components
8.14 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an older basic unit

Configuration instructions for the use of fail-safe expansion modules

In conjunction with DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules, the expansion
modules can be used as follows:

Fail-safe digital Number of expansion Digital module 2 Analog module Temperature Ground-fault
module modules module module
DM-F Local max. 4 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DM-F PROFIsafe max. 3 ✓ ✓ ✓ —

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 147
Description of system components
8.15 Configuration notes for use of a SIMOCODE pro V MR and SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit

8.15 Configuration notes for use of a SIMOCODE pro V MR and

SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit
The following expansion modules are not supported:
• DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module (3UF7330-..)
• Ground-fault module (3UF7500-..).
You will find usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display in Chapter
Description of the operator panel with display (Page 86).

SIMOCODE pro
148 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification 9
9.1 Applications and advantages of compartment identification
The compartment identification described in this chapter is mainly used in application in which
SIMOCODE pro is used in a withdrawable motor control center (MCC).
In withdrawable motor control centers, all components belonging to the motor feeder are
grouped together as one unit in a switchboard-specific enclosure. In this way, a complete
withdrawable module can be replaced very quickly and without isolating the MCC if a
component is defective.
This principle is very often used in the various branches of the process industry. That is why a
SIMOCODE pro with such a design is used in very many of its applications.
With the compartment identification mechanism, programming a SIMOCODE pro S/pro V device
when a withdrawable module is replaced is completely automated.
The initialization module (3UF7 902-0AA00-0) permanently installed in the switchboard
contains a copy of the SIMOCODE device parameters and the device addressing, which are taken
over completely automatically by the new SIMOCODE pro device after replacement of the
withdrawable module.
No special knowledge of SIMOCODE is necessary any longer to replace withdrawable modules
and at the same time the risk of incorrect parameterization in the SIMOCODE device is reduced.

8) RQO\8) LQFO8)

8)&$ 8)$$

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 149
Compartment identification
9.1 Applications and advantages of compartment identification

Figure 9-1 Compartment identification

CAUTION
Basic units SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000*) and basic units SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010*) to
E08, V3.0
These basic units do not support the initialization module and start with the internal
parameters.

A configuration such as the one shown above ensures

• that the parameters, device addressing, and I&M data of the initialization module are
downloaded to the SIMOCODE basic unit during device start-up of SIMOCODE pro
• the parameters, device addressing, and I&M data are additionally written to the initialization
module when parameterizing SIMOCODE pro
This makes it simple for a user to change a withdrawable module without having to deal with
further details of parameterization or address assignment.
The advantages of operation with a permanently installed initialization module in the
switchboard:
• Device parameters and device addressing are automatically stored in the initialization
module in the motor control center and loaded form this initialization module (initialized).
• It is possible to replace an MCC motor feeder without special knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
• Manual addressing and parameterization are no longer necessary. The simplifies operation
of the switchboard.

SIMOCODE pro
150 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification

9.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment

identification

Basic unit versions

The compartment identification function is supported by the following basic units:
• SIMOCODE pro S basic units
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units as from product version E09, firmware version V3.1
• SIMOCODE pro V MR basic units
• SIMOCODE pro V PN basic units
• SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic units.

NOTICE
Basic units SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000*) and basic units SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010*) to
E08, V3.0
These basic units do not support the initialization module and start with the internal
parameters.

NOTICE
Current measuring module required
To operate SIMOCODE pro with an initialization module, a current measuring module or a
current / voltage measuring module must be connected to the basic unit.

Version of the operator panel with display

The compartment identification function is supported by operator panels with display as from
product version *E07*.
When using the "Dry-running protection by means of active power monitoring" function, one of
the following operator panels with display is necessary:
• 3UF7210-1AA00-0: ≥ E12
• 3UF7210-1AA01-0: ≥ E03
• 3UF7210-1BA00-0: ≥ E04
• 3UF7210-1BA01-0: ≥ E03

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 151
Compartment identification
9.3 Operating compartment identification

9.3 Operating compartment identification

Safety guidelines

Note
Startup with an initialization module
During device startup with an initialization module, there must be no memory module in the
system interface of the SIMOCODE basic unit.
If there is a memory module in the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro basic unit,
• the "Fault - parameterization" fault message will be output
• the "Gen.Fault" LED will flash red.

Note
Contacting of the initialization module
The initialization module must be contacted before or together with the voltage supply of the
basic unit.

Loading parameters from the initialization module

As soon as contact has been established with the initialization module and the voltage has been
switched on, the parameters of the initialization module are loaded into the basic unit. The
previous parameterization is overwritten and the compartment identification is activated (see
the following topic "Autoactivation of compartment identification").
You can also track successful read-in of the parameters from the initialization module with the
"initialization module read in" event in the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) online functions.

Note
Loading parameters from the initialization module into the SIMOCODE pro V basic units
with an earlier product version
Basic units SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000*) and SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010*) to E08, V3.0 do not
detect the initialization module and ignore its parameters!

Note
Connecting a SIMOCODE pro S basic unit or a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Because a basic unit in these device series does not find any valid parameters on start-up with
an empty initialization module, "Trip - Parameterization" is signaled. The "general fault" LED of
the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), writes valid parameters
to the basic unit and the initialization module again.
You can then acknowledge the fault message.

SIMOCODE pro
152 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.3 Operating compartment identification

Saving parameters onto the initialization module

If an initialization module is connected to a SIMOCODE pro basic unit, all parameters that are
saved to the SIMOCODE basic unit, e.g. SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), are automatically copied into
the initialization module.
You can also track successful writing of the parameters into the initialization module with the
"initialization module programmed" event in the SIMOCODE ES online functions.

Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)" software

From a technical point of view, the initialization module is treated like an expansion module of
SIMOCODE pro.
To use the mechanism of compartment identification, choose the "initialization module" option
in the "Parameter → Device configuration" dialog box in the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Autoactivation of compartment identification

If a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit detects a connected initialization module
during device startup, it will automatically load the parameters stored in it and will start with
these parameters.
At the same time, the "Initialization module" parameter of the device configuration in the
SIMOCODE pro basic unit is activated so that, on each new device startup, an initialization
module is expected.

Note
Device startup when the "initialization module" parameter is activated
If no initialization module is detected during device start-up, SIMOCODE pro will signal "Trip -
Configuration fault." The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit flashes.
The basic unit can only be reset when the configuration error has been remedied by connecting
an initialization module or when a configuration has been loaded into the device without the
"initialization module" option.

Deactivation of the compartment identification

To prevent SIMOCODE pro V from expecting an initialization module during device startup, you
clear the "Initialization module" check mark in the "Parameter → Device configuration" dialog
box. In this case, no initialization module must be connected to the SIMOCODE basic unit while
this configuration is being downloaded.
A further way of deactivating the compartment identification is to reset the SIMOCODE pro basic
unit to the factory settings. Resetting is performed in the "Commands" dialog box. In this case,
too, no initialization module must be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit. The parameter
settings can then also be reloaded into the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 153
Compartment identification
9.3 Operating compartment identification

Commands

"Initialization module write protection on" command

All contents of the initialization module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent
changes to the contents of the initialization module and any parameter changes to the
connected SIMOCODE pro basic unit. An inadvertent change of parameters for a motor feeder
is prevented. SIMOCODE pro signals successful execution of the command with the
"initialization module write-protected" event.

"Initialization module write protection off" command

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the initialization module.

"Initialization module write protection identification data on" command

The device addressing stored in the initialization module and the I&M data (identification &
maintenance) are write-protected. With this command, you can
• prevent inadvertent changes to the addressing and I&M data for the motor feeder.
• continue to make parameter changes in the initialization module as well as in the
SIMOCODE pro basic unit if the address data and I&M data are identical to the data already
contained in the device when parameters are downloaded.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the "initialization module
identification data write-protected" event.

"Initialization module write protection identification data off" command

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the identification data of the
initialization module.

"Clear initialization module data" command:

With this command
• all contents of the initialization module are erased
• The initialization module is reset to the as-delivered state.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful deletion with the "Initialization module cleared" event.
On startup with an empty initialization module, the basic unit signals "Fault - parameterization."
The "general fault" LED of the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), writes valid parameters
to the basic unit and the initialization module again. You can then acknowledge the fault
message

Messages
You can check the states of the initialization module by the following events (in the
""Commissioning → Faults, warnings, event" dialog box of the "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)"
software:
• Initialization module write-protected
• Initialization module write-protected, parameter changes not allowed
• Initialization module identification data write-protected

SIMOCODE pro
154 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.3 Operating compartment identification

• Initialization module read in

• Initialization module programmed
• Initialization module cleared.
See Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification (Page 160).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 155
Compartment identification
9.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

9.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

Mounting the initialization module in the switchboard

Mounting the initialization module with the mounting lugs in the switchboard

)DVWHQLQJVWUDS
Figure 9-2 Mounting the initialization module

Wiring the initialization module

Unlike the other expansion components of the system, the initialization module does not have
a connector. It is intended for installation in the fixed part of the switchboard. Connect the
initialization module to a motor control center's control connector toward the switchboard using
the four connecting wires.
On the mating side, there is a withdrawable module to whose control connectors the
corresponding four connecting wires of the Y connecting cable are connected (see figure).
Connect each of the wires that are of the same color on the initialization module and the Y
connecting cable.

NOTICE
Note the correct colors!
Incorrect wiring can destroy the initialization module.

Note
Cable routing
When wiring the initialization module make sure the individual conductors are routed as close
together as possible (ribbon cable).

NOTICE
Maximum length of the connecting cable
The total length of all cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system interfaces of the basic
unit!

SIMOCODE pro
156 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

8) ุ(98) RQO\8) LQFO8)

8)&$ 8)$$

2EVHUYHFRORUV
DVUHTXLUHG

Figure 9-3 Wiring the initialization module

CAUTION
SIMOCODE pro basic units with an earlier product version
SIMOCODE pro C basic units (3UF7000*) and SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units (3UF7010*) up
to E08, V3.0 do not support the initialization module and start with the internal parameters.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 157
Compartment identification
9.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring module
or to the current / voltage measuring module
• Connect the connector in the middle of the Y connecting cable (1) on the basic unit
• Connect the connector at the end of the Y connecting cable (2) to a current measuring
module or current / voltage measuring module
• If you are using a decoupling module:
– Connect the connector at the end of the initialization cable (2) on the decoupling module.
– Connect the decoupling module with a system interface connecting cable to the current /
voltage measuring module.

Figure 9-4 Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring module
or to the current / voltage measuring module

SIMOCODE pro
158 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification

9.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification

General safety information

Note
Operating Instructions
During commissioning and service work, also heed the relevant "Initialization Module"
Operating Instructions!
You will find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man).

Commissioning the initialization module

Sequence for initial startup of a new SIMOCODE pro basic unit and a new initialization
module

Step Description
1 Connect the SIMOCODE pro basic unit to the planned expansion modules and to the initialization module.
2 Switch on the power supply. The following LED states result:
• The "DEVICE" LED lights up green
• The "BUS" LED lights up or flashes green when the bus is connected
• The "GEN.FAULT" LED flashes red
At the same time, the "Fault - parameterization" fault message is output.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software installed. For this, connect the
PC/PG to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below) or to the basic unit via the communication
bus.
4 Acknowledge the pending fault either locally on the device or via the SIMOCODE ES software by means of the
"TEST/RESET button".

Figure 9-5 Connecting a PC to a SIMOCODE pro basic unit

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 159
Compartment identification
9.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification

9.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification

Messages

Table 9-1 Alarm, fault, and system events

Message Description Troubleshooting

Initialization module write-protected The initialization module is completely Deactivate write protection of the initial‐
write-protected. ization module.
Initialization module write-protected, The initialization module is completely Deactivate write protection of the initial‐
parameter changes not allowed or partially write-protected. Reparamete‐ ization module.
rization of SIMOCODE pro is denied be‐
cause the initialization module is write-
protected.
Initialization module identification data The device addressing and the I&M data • Select a parameterization with iden‐
write-protected in the initialization module are write-pro‐ tical addressing and I&M data
tected. Parameterization will only be ac‐
• Deactivate the partial write protec‐
cepted by SIMOCODE if the new param‐
tion of the initialization module.
eter set is identical to the data stored in
the initialization module at that time.
Initialization module read in The parameters of the initialization mod‐ -
ule were read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization module programmed The reparameterization was accepted in -
the initialization module.
Initialization module cleared The initialization module has been -
cleared and is now back in the as-deliv‐
ered condition.

SIMOCODE pro
160 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Compartment identification
9.7 Compartment identification dimension drawings

9.7 Compartment identification dimension drawings

ุ

[PP
Figure 9-6 Dimension drawing initialization module

4 x 1 mm2

Version 1 - 0,1 m: 3UF7 931-0CA00-0

Version 2 - 0,5 m: 3UF7 932-0CA00-0
Version 3 - 1,0 m: 3UF7 937-0CA00-0
Figure 9-7 Dimension drawing Y connecting cable

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 161
Compartment identification
9.8 Technical data compartment identification

9.8 Technical data compartment identification

Technical data initialization module

• Order number (MLFB): 3UF7 902-0AA00-0
• Ambient temperature: -25 ... +80 °C
• Rated insulation voltage: 300 V
• Rated operating voltage: 24 V.

Technical data Y connecting cable

• Order numbers (MLFB):
– Version 1 - 0.1 m: 3UF7 931-0CA00-0
– Version 2 - 0.5 m: 3UF7 932-0CA00-0
– Version 3 - 1.0 m: 3UF7 937-0CA00-0.
• Ambient temperature: -25 ... +60 °C
• Rated insulation voltage: 300 V
• Rated operating voltage: 24 V.

SIMOCODE pro
162 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Accessories 10
Accessories overview
The following figure shows selected accessories:

6\VWHPLQWHIDFH 'RRUDGDSWHU $GDSWHUIRU

FRYHU 2SHUDWRUSDQHO

0HPRU\PRGXOH6,02&2'(SUR 86% 3&FDEOH

,QLWLDOL]DWLRQPRGXOH

&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH

Figure 10-1 Accessories

USB PC cable
For device parameterization, for connecting a PC via its USB interface or serial interface to the
system interface of a basic unit.

Note
PC cable variant
For SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP, a serial PC cable 3UF7940-0AA00-0 as from product version *E02*
or a USB PC cable USB 3UF7941-0AA00-0 can be used.

USB-to-serial adapter
For connecting an RS -232 PC cable to the USB interface of a PC.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 163
Accessories

Memory module
Enable all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred to a new system without
the need for additional resources or specialist expertise, for example, if the device is replaced
(see also Chapter Replacing SIMOCODE pro components (Page 264)).

Note
Memory module type
• The SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units up to product version *E08* only
support the 3UF7900* memory module.
• The SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro V MR and SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units support all
memory modules as from product version *E09*.
• A 3UF7901* memory module is required for the SIMOCODE pro V PN and
SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic units. The 3UF7900* memory module is not supported.

Initialization module
The initialization module enables all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred
to a new system without the need for additional resources or specialist expertise, for example,
if the device is replaced. It can be installed permanently in the switchboard.

Note
Basic unit support
The SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units (as from product version *E09*)
support the initialization module.

Further information: See Chapter Compartment identification (Page 149).

Addressing plug
For "hardware" assignment of the PROFIBUS DP address without PC/PG on SIMOCODE pro via the
system interface. Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug: See
Chapter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 244).

Connecting cable
Different types and lengths of connecting cable are available. It is required to connect the basic
unit to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules or the operator
panel.

Note
The total length of all cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system interfaces of the basic
unit!

SIMOCODE pro
164 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Accessories

Door adapter
The door adapter is used to facilitate access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for example
via the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.

System interface cover

The system interface cover helps to protect and/or seal the system interfaces against the ingress
of dirt. In normal operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.

Operator panel adapter

The operator panel adapter enables use of the 3UF720 operator panel of SIMOCODE pro in a
front panel cutout, in which a 3UF52 operator panel of SIMOCODE-DP (IP54 degree of
protection) has previously been used, e.g. after system replacement.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 165
Accessories

SIMOCODE pro
166 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
3UF50 compatibility mode 11
11.1 Application, Win-SIMOCODE-DP converter

Application of 3UF50 compatibility mode

3UF50 compatibility mode is used whenever a SIMOCODE-DP device is to be replaced with a
SIMOCODE pro V PB device without modification of the configuration.
In 3UF50 compatibility mode, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit with a 3UF50
configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1) communication
with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE-DP.
SIMOCODE-DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis, as well as DPV1 data
sets (DS 130, DS 131, DS 133).

Win SIMOCODE-DP converter

In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE-DP to be integrated into the
technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V PB, the device parameters must be adjusted accordingly.
The "Win SIMOCODE-DP Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables
you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win SIMOCODE-DP into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files (sdp files).

Safety guidelines

Note
Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win-SIMOCODE-DP Professional
software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Note
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the startup parameter block is always set, i.e. the transmission
of the device parameters created using the SIMOCODE-DP GSD or the SIMOCODE-DP Object
Manager cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V PB.

Note
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which SIMOCODE-DP is
integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the SIMOCODE-DP Object Manager
(OM).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 167
3UF50 compatibility mode
11.2 Diagram of send and receive data

11.2 Diagram of send and receive data

The following table shows the send and receive data in compatibility mode:

Table 11-1 "Receive" configuration

Receive
Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic
type 1, SI‐ type 1, SI‐ type 2, SI‐ type 2, SI‐ type 3, SI‐ type 3, SI‐
MOCODE MO‐ MOCODE MO‐ MOCODE MO‐
DP CODE pro V DP CODE pro V DP CODE pro V
0 Receive da‐ Cyclic re‐ 0 Receive da‐ Cyclic re‐ 0 Receive da‐ Cyclic re‐
1 ta ceive 1 ta ceive 1 ta ceive
bit 0 to 1.7 bit 0 to 1.7 bit 0 to 1.7
2 Not suppor‐ 2 Not suppor‐ 2 Not suppor‐
3 ted 3 ted 3 ted

Table 11-2 "Send" configuration

Send
Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic
type 1, SI‐ type 1, SI‐ type 2, SI‐ type 2, SI‐ type 3, SI‐ type 3, SI‐
MOCODE MO‐ MOCODE MO‐ MOCODE MO‐
DP CODE pro V DP CODE pro V DP CODE pro V
0 Send data Cyclic 0 Send data Cyclic 0 Send data Cyclic
1 send 1 send 1 send
bit 0 to 1.7 bit 0 to 1.7 bit 0 to 1.7
2 Motor cur‐ Specified: 2 Motor cur‐ Specified: 2 Acycl. Send
3 rent max. cur‐ 3 rent max. cur‐ 3 Bit 0 to 1.7
rent Imax rent Imax
4 Number of Specified:
5 starts Number of
starts
6
(Byte 0)
7 Counter 1 Specified:
8 value Counter 1 -
Actual value
9 Counter 2 Specified:
10 value Counter 2 -
Actual value
11 Sensor val‐ Specified:
ue TM - Max.
tempera‐
ture

Note
The send data bytes 2 - 11 are always permanently assigned in compatibility mode (see Table
"'Send' configuration").

SIMOCODE pro
168 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
3UF50 compatibility mode
11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data

11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data

The following table shows the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode:

Table 11-3 Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode

Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Equivalent in SIMO‐

Device-specific diag‐ Device-specific diag‐ CODE pro V
nostics according to nostics according to
DP standard SIMO‐ DPV1 SIMOCODE DP
CODE DP
6 0x0B Same as 3UF-50 diag‐
7 0x81 nostics
8 0x04
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Startup param‐
eter block active
7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency
start executed
7.3 Event: HW test OK 10.3 Event: HW test OK • No fault - HW fault
basic unit
• No fault - Module
fault
• No fault - tempora‐
ry components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free —
7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 —
8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning: Ext. fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > Warning - Unbalance
40 % 40 %
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC / PCS (inter‐
vened)
8.3 Warning: Sensor short 11.3 Warning: Sensor short Warning - Thermistor
circuit circuit short circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling down 11.4 Event: Cooling down Status - Cooling down
period active period active period active
8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - Test position
(TPF)
8.6 Free 11.6 Free —
8.7 Free 11.7 Free —
9.0 Warning: Ground fault 12.0 Warning: Ground fault • Warning internal
ground fault or
• Warning external
ground fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning - Overload

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 169
3UF50 compatibility mode
11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data

Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Equivalent in SIMO‐

Device-specific diag‐ Device-specific diag‐ CODE pro V
nostics according to nostics according to
DP standard SIMO‐ DPV1 SIMOCODE DP
CODE DP
9.2 Warning: Overload + 12.2 Warning: Overload + Warning - Overload +
unbalance unbalance unbalance
9.3 Warning: I1 response 12.3 Warning: I1 response Warning - Warning lev‐
level overshot level overshot el I >
9.4 Warning: I1 response 12.4 Warning: I1 response Warning - Warning lev‐
level undershot level undershot el I <
9.5 Warning: I2 response 12.5 Warning: I2 response —
level overshot level overshot
9.6 Warning: I2 response 12.6 Warning: I2 response —
level undershot level undershot
9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - Thermis‐
tor overload
• Warning - Thermis‐
tor open circuit
• Warning - TM warn‐
ing T >
• Warning - TM sen‐
sor fault
• Warning - TM out of
range
10.0 Trip: Ground fault 13.0 Trip: Ground fault • Fault - internal
ground fault or
• Fault - ext. ground
fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + unbal‐ 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbal‐ Fault - overload + phase
ance ance failure
10.3 Trip: I1 response level 13.3 Trip: I1 response level Fault - trip level I >
overshot overshot
10.4 Trip: I1 response level 13.4 Trip: I1 response level Fault - trip level I <
undershot undershot
10.5 Trip: I2 response level 13.5 Trip: I2 response level —
overshot overshot
10.6 Trip: I2 response level 13.6 Trip: I2 response level —
undershot undershot

SIMOCODE pro
170 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
3UF50 compatibility mode
11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data

Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Equivalent in SIMO‐

Device-specific diag‐ Device-specific diag‐ CODE pro V
nostics according to nostics according to
DP standard SIMO‐ DPV1 SIMOCODE DP
CODE DP
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Fault - thermistor
overload
• Fault - thermistor
short circuit
• Fault - thermistor
open circuit
• Fault - TM trip T >
• Fault - TM sensor
fault
• Fault - TM out of
range
11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Fault - feedback (FB)
ON
11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Fault - feedback (FB)
OFF
11.2 Trip: Stalled rotor 14.2 Trip: Stalled rotor Fault - stalled rotor
11.3 Trip: Stalled positioner 14.3 Trip: Stalled positioner Fault - stalled position‐
er
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - double 1
11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - end position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - antivalence
12.0 Trip: ESB 15.0 Trip: ESB Fault - ext. fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault - Operational Pro‐
tection Off (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - power failure
(UVO)
12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Fault - ext. fault 1
12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Fault - ext. fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - Test Position
Feedback (TPF)
12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Fault - execution ON
command
12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - execution STOP
command
13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - parameteriza‐
tion
13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 —
13.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 16.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 —
13.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 16.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 —
13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - configuration er‐
ror

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 171
3UF50 compatibility mode
11.3 Diagram of diagnostics data

Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Equivalent in SIMO‐

Device-specific diag‐ Device-specific diag‐ CODE pro V
nostics according to nostics according to
DP standard SIMO‐ DPV1 SIMOCODE DP
CODE DP
13.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 16.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5
13.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 16.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6
13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - hardware fault
basic unit
14 - 15 Number of overload Number of overload
trips trips
16 - 17 I of the overload trip Last trip current
[% / IE)]
18 - 19 Operating hours [10 h] Motor operating hours

SIMOCODE pro
172 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting 12
12.1 Mounting

12.1.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and the decoupling module
You can attach these system components as follows:
• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools
• Snap-on mounting of basic units (no tools required) onto current measuring modules of
45 mm and 55 mm in width (up to 100 A or 115 A (UM+))) with integrated standard
mounting rail
• Screw fixing with fixing lugs (article number: 3RP1903 or 3ZY1311-0AA00 for
SIMOCODE pro S) and screws on a flat surface. These fixing lugs are only suitable for basic
units, expansion modules and the decoupling module!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 173
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RQWR VWDQGDUG PRXQWLQJ UDLOV

6,02&2'( SUR & 6,02&2'( SUR 9 ([SDQVLRQ PRGXOHV
ZLWK LQFUHDVHG LQVWDOODWLRQ GHFRXSOLQJ PRGXOH
GHSWK

6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RQWR D FXUUHQW PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH

HJ D PP ZLGH FXUUHQW PHDVXULQJ PRGXO
ZLWK %86,02&2'(SUR&

6FUHZ DWWDFKPHQW

53 53

PP PP

Figure 12-1 Mounting basic unit, expansion modules or the decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro C/V

SIMOCODE pro
174 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

=<$$

Figure 12-2 Mounting of basic unit and multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro S

12.1.2 Mounting the bus terminal

Sequence for mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-1 Mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Step Description
1 Screw the two PROFIBUS cables to the bus terminal as shown
2 Attach the bus terminal to the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit as shown.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 175
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

8)$$

*1
5'
FOLF

Figure 12-3 Mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

12.1.3 Mounting of digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

See Manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and connection."

SIMOCODE pro
176 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

12.1.4 Mounting of current measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:
• Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw
attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on a level
surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current measuring modules and current /
voltage measuring modules! For current measuring modules up to 25 A you will require an
additional 25 mm spacer.
• Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Rail-mounting or screw attachment
• Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw mounting.

8)$$ $ XS WR $ 8)$$$XSWR$
8)$$ $ XS WR $
6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ

PP ZLGWK PP ZLGWK

6FUHZ DWWDFKPHQW
59% PP VSDFHU 59%

8)$$ 8)%$ 8)%$

$ XS WR $ $ XS WR $ $ XS WR $
6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RU 6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RU VFUHZ DWWDFKPHQW
6FUHZ DWWDFKPHQW VFUHZ DWWDFKPHQW

Figure 12-4 Mounting the current measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 177
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

12.1.5 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:
• Current / voltage measuring modules up to 115 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw
attachment with mounting lugs (article number: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current / voltage measuring
modules (and current measuring modules)! For current / voltage measuring modules up to
25 A you will require an additional spacer, 25 mm in length.
• Current / voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw
attachment.
• Current / voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw mounting

Note
Current / voltage measuring modules with a current setting of up to 115 A can be connected to
the basic unit mechanically and installed as a unit (behind one another).
Larger current / voltage measuring modules can only be mounted separately.

8)[$$ $ WR $ 8)[$$ $WR$

8)[$$ $WR$
VQDSRQPRXQWLQJ

ZLGWK PP ZLGWK PP

PP VSDFHU
59% 59%
VFUHZPRXQWLQJ

Figure 12-5 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules UM+ with through-hole technology

SIMOCODE pro
178 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

8)$$ $ XS WR $ 8)$$

8)$$ $ XS WR $ $ XS WR $
6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ

PP ZLGWK PP ZLGWK

6FUHZ DWWDFKPHQW
59% PP VSDFHU 59%

Figure 12-6 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules UM with through-hole technology

8)$$ 8)%$ 8)%$

$ XS WR $ $ XS WR $ $ XS WR $
6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RU 6QDSRQ PRXQWLQJ RU VFUHZ DWWDFKPHQW
VFUHZ DWWDFKPHQW VFUHZ DWWDFKPHQW

Figure 12-7 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules UM with bus connection system

12.1.6 Mounting of the operator panel and operator panel with display
The operator panels are designed for installation in the front panels of motor control centers, for
example, or in control cabinet doors.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 179
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

To install, proceed as follows:

Table 12-2 Sequence for installing the operator panel / operator panel with display

Step Description
1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions (see figure
"Mounting the operator panel" or figure "Mounting the operator panel with display").
2 Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four screws on the securing brackets.

2SHUDWRU SDQHO 0RXQWLQJ EUDFNHW [ 1P

&XWRXW

)URQW SDQHO

VZLWFKJHDU
FDELQHW GRRU
HWF

Figure 12-8 Mounting the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro
180 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.1 Mounting

2SHUDWRU SDQHO ZLWK GLVSOD\ 0RXQWLQJ EUDFNHW

[ 1P

&XWRXW

)URQW SDQHO
VZLWFKJHDU FDELQHW GRRU
HWF

Figure 12-9 Mounting the operator panel with display

WARNING
Tightening torque of the screws
To ensure that the panel will function correctly and is sealed to comply with IP54, the tightening
torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the seal must be
properly fitted.

Note
Only one connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with display to
SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter An overview of system components (Page 63)). Additional wiring
for the power supply or ground is not required.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 181
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

12.2 Wiring, connecting

12.2.1 Wiring basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Removable terminals
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable terminals. You do
not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!

5HPRYDEOH WHUPLQDOV
%DVLF XQLWV ([SDQVLRQ PRGXOHV
GHFRXSOLQJ PRGXOH

' '

& &

$ $
$ & ' &RGLQJ
Figure 12-10 Removable terminals for basic units, expansion modules, or the decoupling module,
SIMOCODE pro C/V

Note
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!

SIMOCODE pro
182 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

8 9
DEFG

Figure 12-11 Removable terminals for SIMOCODE pro C and pro V basic units

2
1
2 1

Figure 12-12 Removable terminals for basic unit and multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 183
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

%DVLF XQLW ([SDQVLRQ PRGXOHV

GHFRXSOLQJ PRGXOH

'
' &
&

$ $

$ & ' &RGLQJ

Figure 12-13 Removable terminals for SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP basic units, expansion modules
and decoupling module

Cables
The conductor cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table shows conductor
cross sections, stripped lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the removable
terminals:

Table 12-3 Conductor cross sections, stripped lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the basic units
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 mm TORQUE:
7 to 10.3 lb.in
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Stripped lengths Conductor cross section
10 +1 Solid 2x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
10 Finely stranded 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
with / without end 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
sleeve

SIMOCODE pro
184 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Table 12-4 Conductor cross sections, stripped lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the basic unit SIMOCODE pro S

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

PZ1 / Ø 4.5 mm TORQUE:
5.2 to 7.0 lb.in
0.6 to 0.8 Nm
Stripped lengths Conductor cross section
10 +1 Solid 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
10 +1 Finely stranded with 2x 0.5 to 1.0 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
end sleeve

10 +1 Finely stranded with‐ -

out end sleeve

PROFIBUS 2x 0.34 mm2 / 1x 0.34 mm2

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 185
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB basic units

The following table show the assignment of the removable terminals of the SIMOCODE pro C/
pro V PB basic units:

Table 12-5 Assignment of the removable terminals, SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB basic units

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals 287 ,1 ,1 7
1 Common potential for relay outputs 1 and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
287 9 ,1 ,1 7
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3 ˽
5 Digital input IN4
6,02&2'( 352
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
7 Relay output OUT3 '(9,&(
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4 %86
9 Digital input IN1
*(1)$8/7
10 Digital input IN2
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals

352),%86'3
7(67
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1
5(6(7
A2 Supply voltage terminal 2
A PROFIBUS DP terminal A
B PROFIBUS DP terminal B
SPE 1) System shielding

$ $ $ % 63(

Note
Connect SIMOCODE pro via terminal SPE with the maximum possible cross-section and with as
short a cable as possible to the functional ground of the control cabinet, e.g. to the grounded
mounting plate of the control cabinet.

SIMOCODE pro
186 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Assignment of the removable terminals, SIMOCODE pro S basic units

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals of the SIMOCODE pro S
basic unit:

Table 12-6 Assignment of the removable terminals, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
IN+ 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1
A2 Supply voltage terminal 2
A PROFIBUS DP terminal A
B PROFIBUS DP terminal B
SPE 1) System shielding
IN1 Digital input IN1
IN2 Digital input IN2
IN3 Digital input IN3
Lower terminals
T1 Thermistor connection 1 (binary PTC)
T2 Thermistor connection 2 (binary PTC)
IN4 Digital input IN4
13 Common potential for relay outputs 1
and 2
14 Relay output OUT1

24 Relay output OUT2

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 187
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-7 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the basic unit

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Common potential for relay out‐
puts 1 and 2
287 ,1 ,1 7 287 ,1 ,1 7
2 Relay output OUT1
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3 287 9 ,1 ,1 7 287 9 ,1 ,1 7
5 Digital input IN4
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3 6,02&2'(352931*3 6,02&2'(352931*3
7 Relay output OUT3
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4 '(9,&( !V '(9,&( !V
8)

8)
9 Digital input IN1 %86 V %86 V
10 Digital input IN2 *(1)$8/7 *(1)$8/7
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC) 3257 3257
Lower terminals 3257 3257
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1 7(67 7(67
A2 Supply voltage terminal 2 5(6(7 5(6(7
31/$1

31/$1
PORT 1 PROFINET connection 1
PORT 2 1) PROFINET connection 2
SPE 2))
System shielding

$ $ 63( $ $ 63(

1) Not available for SIMOCODE pro V PN GP 3UF7011-1AB00-2 and 3UF7011-1AU00-2 basic

units
2)

SIMOCODE pro
188 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP basic units

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-8 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the basic unit

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals 287 ,1 ,1 7
1 Common potential for relay outputs 1 and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
287 9 ,1 ,1 7
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4
6,02&2'(352931
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
'(9,&( !V
7 Relay output OUT3

8)
%86 V
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
*(1)$8/7
9 Digital input IN1
3257
10 Digital input IN2
3257
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

Lower terminals 7(67
5(6(7
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1

31/$1
A2 Supply voltage terminal 2
PORT 1 PROFINET connection 1

PORT 2 PROFINET connection 2
SPE 1) System shielding

$ $ 63(

Power supply to the inputs of the basic unit

There are three possibilities for powering the inputs:
a): 24 V DC internal
b): 24 V DC external. Input 3 is the reference potential, i.e. three inputs are available.
c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for a basic unit with 24 V DC supply voltage!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 189
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

D E F
9'&LQWHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH 9'&H[WHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH 9'&H[WHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH

%DVLFXQLWb%8 %DVLFXQLWb%8 %DVLFXQLWb%8

%8LQSXWV %8LQSXWV %8LQSXWV

,1

,1 ,1

,1 ,1 ,1

,1 ,1
FDQQRWEHXVHG ,1
,1 ,1
,1

$
9 '&
$

2QO\SRVVLEOHIRUEDVLFXQLWZLWK9'&
VXSSO\YROWDJH

Figure 12-14 24 V DC to supply the inputs, basic units SIMOCODE pro C / pro 'V PB pro V MB RTU / pro V S

D E F
9'&LQWHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH 9'&H[WHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH 9'&H[WHUQDOLQSXWVXVDEOH

%DVLFXQLWb%8 %DVLFXQLWb%8 %DVLFXQLWb%8

%8LQSXWV %8LQSXWV %8LQSXWV

,1 ,1 ,1
FDQQRWEHXVHG
,1 ,1 ,1

,1 ,1 ,1

,1
,1 ,1

$
9 '&
$

2QO\SRVVLEOHIRUEDVLFXQLWZLWK9'&
VXSSO\YROWDJH

Figure 12-15 24 V DC to supply the inputs, basic units SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP

All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs do not influence
each other.

Wiring sequence of the removable terminal of the SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-9 Wiring of the removable terminals of the SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units

Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the PROFIBUS DP cable shield to the SPE / PE terminal.
3 Connect the equipment shield to the SPE 1) terminal.

SIMOCODE pro
190 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Note
The A / B terminals are an alternative to the 9-way SUB-D connection! Baud rates of up to
1.5 Mbit / s 1) are possible.

Note
1) Baud rates > 1.5 Mbit / s
At baud rates > 1.5 Mbit / s, the "Bus" fault is generated and the "Bus" LED lights up.

Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for SIMOCODE pro S basic units
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-10 Wiring of the removable terminals on the basic units

Step Description
1 Insulate the PROFIBUS cable as shown below.
2 Screw the SPE cable to the bus terminal as shown below.
3 Connect the PROFIBUS cables A and B and the SPE cable to terminals A, B, and SPE 1) as shown below.

CAUTION
SPE connection
Connect the SPE cable to the SPE terminal or alternatively to the bus connection terminal with
a ring cable lug.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 191
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

10 +1 37 ±3 10

1
2

Figure 12-16 Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for SIMOCODE pro S basic units

Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP / pro V PN GP basic
units
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-11 Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit

Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 Connect the equipment shield to the SPE 1) terminal.

DANGER
Hazardous voltage. Can cause death or serious injury
To ensure touch protection and degree of protection IP20 for SIMOCODE pro S, screw in all
screws which are not used for conductor clamping and close the terminal covers.

SIMOCODE pro
192 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Connection examples SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB / pro V MR / pro S basic unit

37& D

7 7
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 9

287
'HYLFH
287
%XV

*HQ )DXOW

287

352),%86 '3

$ $ $ % 63(
PD[ 0%G
9'&
99$&'&

Figure 12-17 Connection example SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 193
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

37& D

7 7
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

287
'HYLFH
287
%XV

*HQ )DXOW

352),%86 '3

$
$ $ % 63(
9'& 0D[ 0%G
99$&'&

Figure 12-18 Connection example SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Note
Only three inputs can be used
With an external 24 V DC supply, only three inputs can be used (see section "Power supply to the
inputs of the basic unit" above).

Note
Baud rates PROFIBUS DP
Baud rates up to 1.5 Mbits are possible via bus terminals A/B.

SIMOCODE pro
194 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Connection examples for SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP basic units

37&
D

7 7
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 9

'(9,&(
287
%86
287
*(1)$8/7

3257

3257
287

$ $ 63(
9'&
99$&'&

Figure 12-19 Connection examples for SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP basic units

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 195
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the digital module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-12 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
287
20 Common potential for relay outputs 1 and 2
21 Relay output OUT1
22 Relay output OUT2 ,1 ,1

23 Digital input IN1

24 Digital input IN2
25 N / M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
26 Digital input IN3
27 Digital input IN4
SPE 1) System shielding

5($'<

,1 ,1 63(

Power supply to the digital module inputs

There are two possibilities for powering the inputs:
a) Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
b) Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC / DC input supply

SIMOCODE pro
196 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

9 '& H[WHUQDO 9 XS WR 9 $&'& H[WHUQDO

'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0 'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0

'0 ,QSXWV '0 ,QSXWV

10 10
a
,1 ,1

,1 ,1

Figure 12-20 Power supply to the digital module inputs

Digital module connection example

a $&

'&
ದ
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 10

5HDG\
287

287

63(

Figure 12-21 Digital module connection example

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 197
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the multifunction module

Table 12-13 Assignment of the removable terminals, multifunction module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
IN1 Digital input IN1
IN2 Digital input IN2
IN3 Digital input IN3
SPE 1) System shielding
IN- Ground for IN1 to IN4
IN4 Digital input IN4
C1 Terminal 1, 3UL23 residual current trans‐
former
C2 Terminal 2, 3UL23 residual current trans‐
former
Lower terminals
T1 Input T1, temperature sensor
T2 Input T2, temperature sensor
T3 Input T3, temperature sensor
13 Common potential for relay outputs 1 and 2
14 Relay output OUT1
24 Relay output OUT2

SIMOCODE pro
198 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Connection example for multifunction module

/
/
/
1

∼ $&

,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

287
5HDG\
& 287

8/
&

63(

7 7 7 63(

ϑ ZLUHWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUV
ZLUHWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUV
6KLHOGHGFDEOHUHFRPPHQGHG

Figure 12-22 Connection example for multifunction module

Safety information on installing the 3UL23 residual current transformer:

See Chapter 14.2.5 in the Manual 3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54397927).

NOTICE
Routing the connecting cables / using shielded cables
To avoid interference injection, which could result in incorrect measurements, route these
connecting lines parallel and twisted, if possible, or use shielded cables.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 199
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the ground-fault module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-14 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the ground-fault module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
&
40 Input C1 residual current transformer
43 Input C2 residual current transformer
Lower terminals &
SPE 1) System shielding

5($'<
(0
8)ದ$$ದ

*<<00'' ([[

63(

NOTICE
Types of ground-fault module
The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL22 residual current transformer.
The 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL23 residual current transformer.

SIMOCODE pro
200 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Ground-fault module connection example

/
/
/
1

=
8/RU8/
=
&DEOH VKLHOGLQJ UHFRPPHQGHG

& &

5HDG\

63(

Figure 12-23 Ground-fault module connection example

The output signal of the transformers 3UL22/3UL23 is connected to terminals C1 and C2 of the
corresponding ground-fault module.
Information on installing the residual current transformer 3UL23: See Manual 3UG4/3RR2
Monitoring Relay (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54397927), Chapter
13.2.5.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 201
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the temperature module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-15 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
777
50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
51 Input T3, temperature sensor 2
52 Input T3, temperature sensor 3 777
53 Input T2, temperature sensor 1
54 Input T2, temperature sensor 2
55 Input T2, temperature sensor 3
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
SPE 1) System shielding

5($'<
70
8)ದ$$ದ

*<<00'' ([[

7 63(

You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.

• 2-wire temperature sensors: Connect a jumper between the T2 terminals and T3 terminals.
• 3-wire temperature sensors: Assign terminals 56 and 57 twice when three sensors are used.

SIMOCODE pro
202 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Temperature module connection example

[ PD[ [ PD[

˽ ˽
&DEOH VKLHOGLQJ UHFRPPHQGHG

7 7 7 7 7 7

7 7 7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7 7 7

7 7 7
7 7 7

5HDG\

7 7

63(

17& WHPSHUDWXUH VHQVRU

17& W\SH % .$

4 .6 5

-
Figure 12-24 Temperature module connection example

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 203
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the analog module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-16 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
,1 ,1
30 Analog input IN1+
31 Analog input IN2+
33 Analog input IN1+ ,1 ,1
34 Analog input IN2+
Lower terminals
36 Analog output OUT+
37 Analog output OUT+
SPE 1) System shielding

5($'<
$0
8)ದ$$ದ

*<<00'' ([[

287 63(

SIMOCODE pro
204 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Analog module connection example

/
[ PD[

SRWHQWLDOIUHH FXUUHQW VRXUFH HJ LVRODWLRQ DPSOLILHU
, ,1 P$ P$

,1 ,1
,1 ,1

,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

5HDG\

287 287
63( &DEOH VKLHOGLQJ UHFRPPHQGHG IRU XS WR P
DQG IRU RXWVLGH RI WKH VZLWFKJHDU FDELQHW
&DEOH VKLHOGLQJ QHFHVVDU\ IRU RYHU P

5/
, 287 $ P$

5/ 2KP

Figure 12-25 Analog module connection example

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 205
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment of the decoupling module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-17 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the decoupling module

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
—
Lower terminals
SPE 1) System shielding

5($'<
'&0
8)ದ$$ದ

*<<00'' ([[

63(

SIMOCODE pro
206 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Decoupling module connection example

5HDG\

Figure 12-26 Decoupling module connection example

Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling module
Connect the equipment shield to the SPE terminal.

12.2.2 Wiring digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Safety guidelines
See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and connection."

WARNING
Loss of safety function is possible
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit!

Note
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 207
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F Local

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 12-18 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local, 24 V DC
version and 110 to 240 V UC version.

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
60, 66 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60)
and 2 (66)
61, 67 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO
62, 68 Relay enabling circuit 2, NO
Y12, Y22 Sensor input channel 1, channel 2
T1, T2 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC,
pulsed)
Y33 Start button (start after rising and fall‐
ing edge)
Y34 Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential for sen‐
sor inputs, 3UF7320-1AU00-0 only)
1 Cascading input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC,
static)
SPE 1) System shielding

SIMOCODE pro
208 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 209
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F PROFIsafe

Table 12-19 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F PROFIsafe,
24 V DC version and 110 to 240 V UC version.

Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
80, 86 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80)
and 2 (86)
81, 87 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO
82, 88 Relay enabling circuit 2, NO
83 (IN1) Digital module, inputs 1, 2, 3
85 (IN2)
89 (IN3)
84 Power supply, diigital module, inputs
1 to 3, 24 V DC
90 (T) Feedback circuit supply (FBC) 24 V DC
91 (FBC) Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential inputs,
only 3UF7320‑1AU00-0)
1 Cascading input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC,
static)
SPE 1) System shielding

SIMOCODE pro
210 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Digital module DM-F Local connection example

DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels, monitored start

WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

1(2=('$J/J*6(
&ODVV&&$TXLFNUHVSRQVH
4 1:+*
67$57

< 7 < < 7 < 7 0

5($'<
&+
'(9,&(
287
,1
6DIHW\/RJLF
6) &+

287

'LJLWDO0RGXOH2XWSXW
287

$ $ 63(

/ 1
4 4 4 4

Figure 12-27 Connection example for "DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start"

For further connection examples: See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection example

WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 211
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

4 1(2=('$J/J*6(
&ODVV&&$TXLFNUHVSRQVH
67$57 1:+*
4

,1 ,1 ,1 9 )%& 7

5($'<
&+
'(9,&(
287 6DIHW\/RJLF
6) &+

287
'LJLWDO0RGXOH2XWSXW
287

$ $ 63(

/ 1
4 4 4 4

Figure 12-28 Block diagram of DM-F PROFIsafe

Connection examples fail-safe digital module DM-F

See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/50564852).

12.2.3 Wiring of current measuring modules

Selection
Select the appropriate current measuring module according to the motor current:
• Through-hole connection up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through the
feed-through openings.
• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens contactors.

SIMOCODE pro
212 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

The following table shows the various current measuring modules:

Table 12-20 Current measuring modules

Current measuring module Version

3UF7100-1AA00-0; 0.3 to 3 A Through-hole connection
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0; 2.4 to 25 A
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0; 10 - 100 A
Ø feed-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7103-1AA00-0; 20 to- 200 A

Ø feed-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7103-1BA00-0; 20 to 200 A Bus connection system

Conductor cross section: 16 to 95 mm²,
AWG 5 to 3/0

3UF7104-1BA00-0; 63 to 630 A
Conductor cross section: 50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

L1
L2
L3
N

L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

M
3~

Figure 12-29 Main circuit connection

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 213
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Note
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring module and correct routing
direction!
Please note the information in the Operating Instructions. You will also find the Operating
Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)

12.2.4 Wiring of current / voltage measuring modules

Selection
Select the appropriate current / voltage measuring module according to the motor current.
• Through-hole connection up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through the
feed-through openings.
• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens contactors.

SIMOCODE pro
214 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

The following table shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:

Table 12-21 Current / voltage measuring modules

1) Current / voltage measuring module UM Version

2) 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module UM+
3) 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module UM+ for ATEX dry-run‐
ning protection
1) 3UF7110-1AA00-0; 0.3 - 3 A Through-hole connection
2) 3UF7110-1AA01-0; 0.3 - 4 A
3) 3UF7120-1AA01-0; 0.3 - 4 A
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
1) 3UF7111-1AA00-0; 2.4 - 25 A
2) 3UF7111-1AA01-0; 3 - 40 A
3) 3UF7121-1AA01-0; 3 - 40 A
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
1) 3UF7112-1AA00-0; 10 - 100 A
2) 3UF7112-1AA01-0; 10 - 115 A
3) 3UF7122-1AA01-0; 10 - 115 A
Ø feed-through openings: 14 mm

1) 3UF7113-1AA00-0; 20 - 200 A
2) 3UF7113-1AA01-0; 20 - 200 A
3) 3UF7123-1AA01-0; 20 - 200 A
Ø feed-through openings: 25 mm
1) 3UF7113-1BA00-0; 20 - 200 A Bus connection system
2) 3UF7113-1BA01-0; 20 - 200 A
3) 3UF7123-1BA01-0; 20 - 200 A
Conductor cross section: 16 to 95 mm²,
AWG 5 to 3/0
1) 3UF7114-1BA00-0; 63 - 630 A
2) 3UF7114-1BA01-0; 63 - 630 A
3) 3UF7124-1BA01-0; 63 - 630 A
Conductor cross section: 50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 215
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

L1
L2
L3
N

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

T1 T2 T3

M
3~

Safety guidelines

WARNING
1) Short-circuit proof wiring or line protection recommended

Note
Acquisition of the line supply voltage
A voltage tap between the circuit breaker or fuse and the contactor is recommended for
acquisition of the line supply voltage.
Thus, when the motor is shut down, its operable state can be derived from the presence of the
supply voltage.

Note
Measurement of voltage or power-related variables
Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 of a current / voltage measuring module to the clamps (L1,
L2, L3) of the removable terminal with a 3-core cable. The supply cables may require additional
cable protection, for example via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.

Note
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current / voltage measuring module and correct routing
direction!
Please note the information in the Operating Instructions. You will also find the Operating
Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)

SIMOCODE pro
216 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Removable terminals
The following tables show conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening torques of
conductors and pin assignments of the removable terminals of the current / voltage measuring
modules:

Table 12-22 Conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening torques of conductors of the 2nd generation 45 mm and
55 mm current / voltage measuring modules

Removable termi‐ Screwdriver Tightening torque

nals
ISO 2380- TORQUE:
A 0.6 x 3.5 (8WA2803) 4.4 to 5.3 lb.in
0.5 to 0.6 Nm
Stripped lengths Conductor cross section
8 Solid 1x 0.25 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x AWG 24 to 14
2x 0.25 - 1 mm2 / 2x AWG 24 to 18
8 Finely stranded with end
sleeve

Table 12-23 Conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening torques of conductors of the 2nd generation 120 mm and
145 mm current / voltage measuring modules

Removable termi‐ Screwdriver Tightening torque

nals
PZ 2 / ∅ 5 ... 6 mm TORQUE:
7 to 10.3 lb.in
0.8 ... 1.2 Nm
Stripped lengths Conductor cross section
10 Solid 1x 0.5 - 4 mm2 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 / 2x AWG 20 to 14
10 Finely stranded with end 1x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
sleeve 2x 0.5 - 1.5 mm2 / 2x AWG 20 to 16

Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring modules

L1, L2, L3: Terminals for connecting the 3-wire cable of the main circuit

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 217
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Table 12-24 Conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening torques of conductors of the 1st generation current /
voltage measuring modules

Removable termi‐ Screwdriver Tightening torque

nals
PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 mm TORQUE:
7 to 10.3 lb.in
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Stripped lengths Conductor cross section
10 Solid 1x 0.5 - 4 mm2 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 / 2x AWG 20 to 14
10 Finely stranded with / with‐ 1x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
out end sleeve 2x 0.5 - 1.5 mm2 / 2x AWG 20 to 16

Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the 1st generation current / voltage
measuring modules

%RWWRP 8SSHU

L1, L2, L3: Terminals for connecting the 3-wire cable of the main circuit

12.2.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing

transformer)

Functional principle
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The secondary cables of the
current transformer are looped through the three feed-through openings of the current
measuring module, and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external current
transformer is the primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.

Note
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the current transformer must
be within the setting range of the current measuring module used!

SIMOCODE pro
218 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

0DLQ FLUFXLW 6HFRQGDU\ FLUFXLW

/ / /

.
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ %DVLF XQLW
. PRGXOH 8) 8)
/

0 8) FXUUHQW WUDQVIRUPHU

Figure 12-30 Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer

Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:

Primary current (external current transformer)

Transformation ratio =
Secondary current x number of loops n
(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)

In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not need to be converted,
even when an interposing transformer is used, since SIMOCODE pro only outputs the
proportional value, based upon the parameterized current setting Is.

Requirements for an interposing current transformer

• Secondary current: 1 A
• Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
• Transformer rating: Recommended ≥ 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary current and cable
length
• Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10
• Accuracy class: 1

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 219
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

Example 1
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7100-1AA00-0 current measuring module, current setting
0.3 A to 3 A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at rated load and is, therefore,
within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used
– The current setting Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.

0DLQ FLUFXLW 6HFRQGDU\ FLUFXLW

/ / /

.
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ
.
PRGXOH 8) %DVLF XQLW
. $GMXVWPHQW UDQJH 8)

/ $ $

0 8) FXUUHQW WUDQVIRUPHU

3ULPDU\ FXUUHQW DW 6HFRQGDU\ FXUUHQW $ 6HWFXUUHQW,V$

QRPLQDO ORDG $

Figure 12-31 Example (1 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer

Example 2
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7100-1AA00-0 current measuring module, current setting 0.3 to 3
A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at rated load and is,
therefore, not within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used.
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the secondary cables
through the feed-through openings of the current measuring module. Double-looping
results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
– The current setting Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.

SIMOCODE pro
220 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.2 Wiring, connecting

0DLQ FLUFXLW 6HFRQGDU\ FLUFXLW

/ / /
'RXEOHORRSLQJ WKURXJK RI WKH VHFRQGDU\ FDEOHV

.
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ
.
PRGXOH 8) %DVLF XQLW
. $GMXVWPHQW UDQJH 8)

/ $ $

0 8) FXUUHQW WUDQVIRUPHU

3ULPDU\ FXUUHQW DW 6HFRQGDU\ FXUUHQW [$ 6HW FXUUHQW ,V$

QRPLQDO ORDG $

Figure 12-32 Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer

Note
If the SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit as from version *E03* is used, the current setting does not
have to be converted but is the same as the nominal primary current.
By additionally entering the transformation ratio of the current transformer (interposing
transformer), conversion will be performed automatically in the device.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 221
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3 System interfaces

12.3.1 Information about the system interfaces

Information about the system interfaces

• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the system interfaces.
The system interfaces are provided on the front and bottom of the devices.
• Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system components.
• The PC cables, addressing plugs, and memory modules can be plugged directly into the
system interface.
• The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have two system
interfaces:
– Bottom/left: For outgoing connecting cable to the current or current / voltage measuring
module.
– Front side: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or operator
panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
• Current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules have one system
interface:
– Bottom or front: For incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.
• Expansion modules have two interfaces on the front:
– Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion module or
SIMOCODE pro S/SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or operator panel,
and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
• Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or basic unit.
– Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current / voltage measuring
module.
• Operator panels have two system interfaces:
– Front side: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or basic
unit.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!

SIMOCODE pro
222 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

See also
Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover (Page 232)

12.3.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module,

current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules

Examples of connection of system components to the system interface and system structure
Close system interfaces not in use with the system interface cover (see Closing the system
interfaces with the system interface cover (Page 232).

WARNING
System interface on the operator panels (degree of protection IP54):
To ensure degree of protection IP 54
• press the cover into the socket as far as it will go when it is used for the first time!
• When fastening the operator panel with the screws supplied, do not apply an excessive
tightening torque.

The following figure shows an example for SIMOCODE pro C/V of connecting system
components to the
system interfaces:

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 223
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

%DVLF XQLWV %8SUR&9 ([SDQVLRQ PRGXOHV '0 $0 (0 70

,QFRPLQJ IURP
ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOH
2XWJRLQJ WR ವ EDVLFXQLWSUR9
ವ FXUUHQW PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH
ವ GHFRXSOLQJ PRGXOHRQO\SUR9

2XWJRLQJ WR 2XWJRLQJ WR
ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOHRQO\SUR9 ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOH
ವ RSHUDWRU SDQHO ವ RSHUDWRU SDQHO
&RQQHFWLRQPHPRU\PRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJSOXJ3&FDEOH &RQQHFWLRQPHPRU\PRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJSOXJ
3&FDEOH
'LJLWDOPRGXOHV'0) /RFDO 'HFRXSOLQJPRGXOH'&0
'0) 352),VDIH
,QFRPLQJ IURP
ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOH
,QFRPLQJ IURP
ವ EDVLF XQLWSUR9
ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOH
ವ EDVLF XQLWSUR9

2XWJRLQJ WR 2XWJRLQJWRFXUUHQWYROWDJH PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH

ವ H[SDQVLRQ PRGXOH
ವ RSHUDWRU SDQHO
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ PRGXOHV ,0 2SHUDWRU SDQHO 23

,QFRPLQJ IURP ,QFRPLQJ IURP

EDLVFXQLW ವ XSVWUHDP H[SDQVLRQ
PRGXOH
ವ EDVLFXQLW

&XUUHQWYROWDJH PHDVXULQJ PRGXOHV80

,QFRPLQJ IURP
EDVLFXQLWSUR9

Figure 12-33 Example of system interfaces - SIMOCODE pro C/V with system component IM, UM+

The following figure shows an example for SIMOCODE pro S of connecting system components
to the system interfaces:

SIMOCODE pro
224 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

%DVLF XQLW %8SUR63% 0XOWLIXQFWLRQPRGXOH00

2XWJRLQJ WR ,QFRPLQJ IURPEDVLFXQLW

FXUUHQW PHDVXULQJPRGXOH

2XWJRLQJ WR 2XWJRLQJ WRRSHUDWRUSDQHO

ವ PXOWLIXQFWLRQPRGXOH &RQQHFWLRQPHPRU\PRGXOH
ವ RSHUDWRU SDQHO DGGUHVVLQJSOXJ3&FDEOH
&RQQHFWLRQPHPRU\PRGXOH
DGGUHVVLQJSOXJ3&FDEOH

&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ PRGXOHV ,0 2SHUDWRU SDQHO 23

,QFRPLQJ IURP ,QFRPLQJ IURP

EDVLFXQLW EDVLFXQLW

Figure 12-34 Example of system interface - SIMOCODE pro S

The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V system installation:

%DVLFXQLW%8 &XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ

PRGXOH,0
([SDQVLRQ PRGXOHV

2SHUDWRUSDQHO23

Figure 12-35 Example of SIMOCODE pro V installation

The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro S system installation:

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 225
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

%DVLFXQLW%8 &XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ

0XOWLSOHIXQFWLRQPRGXOH00 PRGXOH,0

2SHUDWRUSDQHO23

Figure 12-36 Example of SIMOCODE pro S installation

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:

Table 12-25 Connecting to the system interface

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
2 System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.

SIMOCODE pro
226 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

([DPSOH6,02&2'( SUR &

&DWFKHV &RORUFRGLQJ

6\VWHPLQWHUIDFHVRQWKH
IURQWVLGHDQERWWRP &DWFKHV

([DPSOH6,02&2'( SUR 6

&DWFKHV &RORUFRGLQJ

6\VWHPLQWHUIDFHFRYHU

6\VWHPLQWHUIDFHVRQWKH &DWFKHV
IURQWVLGH
Figure 12-37 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interfaces

Safety guidelines

Note
Only a current / voltage measuring module may be connected to the right-hand system interface
of the decoupling module. Memory modules, addressing plugs or PC cables will not be
recognized there.

Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram)!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 227
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
See System Manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and
connection."

12.3.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display

Versions and safety notices

The operator panel has two system interfaces:
• Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated operator panel.
The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module is always connected here.
• Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator panel.
Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed again after use. These
can be:
– Memory module
– Addressing plug
– PC cable for connecting a PC / PG
– Cover (if the system interface is not in use).

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!

SIMOCODE pro
228 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the operator
panel with display
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-26 Connecting system components to the system interface

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
The incoming connecting cable is connected on the rear.
2 System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.

Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park positions" (see figure
below).

Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram)!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 229
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

)URQW

&RYHU 3DUN SRV

5HDU

&DWFKHV

&RORU FRGLQJ

&RQQHFWLQJ FDEOH

Figure 12-38 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro
230 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

)URQW

&RYHU

3DUN SRVLWLRQ

5HDU

Figure 12-39 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 231
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover

Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover

Figure 12-40 Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover

SIMOCODE pro
232 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3.6 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket

PROFIBUS DP connection
The PROFIBUS DP can be connected to the basic unit.

System PROFIBUS DP via Sub-D PROFIBUS DP via terminals A/B

SIMOCODE pro C 12 Mbaud 1.5 Mbaud
SIMOCODE pro S - 1.5 Mbaud
SIMOCODE pro V 12 Mbaud 1.5 Mbaud

Note
The 9-way SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A / B terminals!

Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V basic units
Proceed as follows:

Table 12-27 Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit

Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP interface.

([DPSOH 6,02&2'( SUR &

SROH
68%' SOXJ

352),%86 '3 LQWHUIDFH

SROH 68%' VRFNHW
352),%86 '3 FDEOH

Figure 12-41 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-way SUB-D socket

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 233
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3.7 Ethernet cable to RJ45 socket (PROFINET and EtherNet/IP)

The ETHERNET cable is connected to the basic unit.

NOTICE
Ethernet connector
Connect using only Industrial Ethernet connectors, e.g.
• Siemens IE FC RJ45 PLUG 180 2x2, RJ45 connector (10/100MBIT/S) with robust metal
housing and Fast Connect connection method, for IE FC Cable 2x2 180° cable outlet, order
number 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 or
• Siemens IE FC RJ45 PLUG 90 2x2, RJ45 connector (10/100MBIT/S) with robust metal
housing and Fast Connect connection method, for IE FC Cable 2x2 90° cable outlet, order
number 6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0.

Sequence for connecting ETHERNET to the basic unit

Table 12-28 Connecting the ETHERNET cable to the basic unit pro V

Step Description
1 Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet interface 1 and/or Ethernet interface 2

The following connection options are available:

• with connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 on interface 1 and/or interface 2 (left)
• with connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 on interface 1 (right).

Figure 12-42 Connecting the Ethernet cable to the basic unit pro V

SIMOCODE pro
234 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

12.3.8 Modbus RTU connection to the SIMOCODE pro device

Connecting Modbus RTU to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit

Modbus RTU can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit both via the connecting
terminals as well as via the sub-D connector. The maximum data transfer rate for both
connection methods is 57,600 bps.

NOTICE
9-pin sub-D connection
The 9-way sub-D connection is an alternative to the A/B terminals!

Connecting Modbus RTU to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit via the device terminals
Terminal assignment:

Terminal Modbus signal

A D0 or DA
B D1 or DB
SPE Cable shielding

Connecting Modbus RTU to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit via the sub-D connector
The pin assignments of the 9-pin sub-D socket for SIMOCODE pro correspond to the assignments
defined for PROFIBUS DP. The sub-D connector has the following assignments:

Pin Modbus signal

8 D0 or DA
3 D1 or DB
5 GND

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 235
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.3 System interfaces

Figure 12-43 Connecting the 9-pin sub-D connector to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU basic unit

Figure 12-44 PIN assignments 9-pin sub-D socket

SIMATIC Industrial Communication 6ES7972* RS485 connectors can be used to connect

Modbus RTU to the sub-D interface thanks to the identical pin assignments to PROFIBUS DP (see
RS485 bus connector (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/WW/Catalog/Products/
9300041?tree=CatalogTree) in the Industry Mall).

NOTICE
Using the PROFIBUS DP connector
When the PROFIBUS DP connector is used, the bus terminator does not conform to the Modbus
specification.
Possible functional constraints resulting from the use of the PROFIBUS DP bus terminator with
a MODBUS TCP are the user's responsibility.

You can find recommendations for a suitable layout of the serial communication bus in the
document MODBUS over Serial Line - Specification and Implementation Guide - V1.02 (http://
www.modbus.org/docs/Modbus_over_serial_line_V1_02.pdf) on the Internet.

SIMOCODE pro
236 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.4 Configuration guidelines

12.4 Configuration guidelines

12.4.1 Configuration guidelines on PROFIBUS DP

Definition
The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.

PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation guidelines

In the case of electric PROFIBUS networks, note also the PROFIBUS DP / FMS installation
guidelines defined by the PROFIBUS user organization. These contain important information
about cable routing and the commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.

Publisher:
PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe / Germany
Phone: ++49 721 965 85 90
Fax: ++49 721 965 85 89
Internet: PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com)
Guideline: Order no. 2.111
See also Manual "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286)."

Application of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in MCC motor feeders.
It provides correct bus termination, even when MCC plug-in units have been removed. The bus
termination module can also be utilized when a standard SUB-D plug cannot be used for the last
device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can be connected to either a 220 / 230 V,
380 / 400 V, 115 / 120 V or 24 V AC supply. The 3UF1900‑1KB00 type can be used for a 24 V DC
supply.

Note
Use of SIMOCODE pro S basic units
In particular, when using SIMOCODE pro S basic units, use the bus termination module for
connecting a PROFIBUS segments.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 237
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.4 Configuration guidelines

Figure 12-45 Bus termination module

12.4.2 Configuration guidelines on PROFINET

PROFINET installation guidelines

Please also note the PROFINET installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS user organization. These
contain important information about planning, installing, and commissioning PROFINET
networks.

Publisher:
PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe / Germany
Phone: +49 (721) 965-8590
Fax: +49 (721) 965-8589
Internet: PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International Home (http://www.profibus.com)

PROFINET installation guidelines:

• PROFINET planning
Version: 1.04
Order No.: 8.061
Language: German
• PROFINET installation
Version: 1.0
Order No.: 8.071
Language: German

SIMOCODE pro
238 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.4 Configuration guidelines

• PROFINET commissioning
Version: 1.01
Order No.: 8.081
Language: German
• PROFINET commissioning
Checklist version: 1.01
Order No.: 8.091
Language: German

For an overview of the structure and configuration of Industrial Ethernet networks with
SIMATIC NET: See also "Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual" system manual (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 239
Mounting, wiring, connecting
12.4 Configuration guidelines

SIMOCODE pro
240 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting 13
13.1 General information about commissioning and service

Safety guidelines

WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
Can cause electric shock and burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the system and the device from the power supply.

Note
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions (supplied with the
devices):

Table 13-1 SIMOCODE pro operating instructions

Device Article No. Operating instructions

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-3BA1
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-2BA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Multifunction module 3ZX1012-0UF76-1AA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Initialization module 3ZX1012-0UF70-2AA1
You will also find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 241
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.1 General information about commissioning and service

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing:
• SIMOCODE pro is already installed and wired
• The motor is switched off.

Parameterization methods
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
• With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved from a basic unit.
The memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is
connected to the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic
unit will be automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be
downloaded to the basic unit from the memory module by pressing the TEST / RESET button
briefly.
• With the SIMOCODE ES software via serial or USB interface: The PC / PG is connected to the
system interface with a PC cable.
• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP. For this purpose,
the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
• With the initialization module in which the parameters have already been saved from a basic
unit. The initialization module is permanently installed in the switchboard in a Motor
Control Center (MCC). If a withdrawable unit with a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit into the MCC and the power supply returns to the basic unit, it will automatically
be parameterized by the initialization module.

Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and has the factory setting
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
– The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.
– The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether the parameters
(e.g. the set current) are correct for the new application. Change these accordingly, if
necessary.

SIMOCODE pro
242 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2 Commissioning

13.2.1 Commissioning with PROFIBUS

13.2.1.1 PROFIBUS commissioning steps

Please observe the information in Chapter General information about commissioning and
service (Page 241).
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:

Table 13-2 Commissioning the basic unit

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Proceed to Step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. For more information, see Chapter Diagnostics
via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFIBUS) (Page 245). Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the PROFIBUS DP address. For more
information, see Chapter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 244).
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization, e.g. with a PC on which SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal) software is installed. For this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable
(see the figure below).
Notice
With SIMOCODE pro C use the system interface on the front and with SIMOCODE pro S use the right-hand
system interface.
4 Start SIMOCODE ES.

3& FDEOH
2UGHU 1R 8)$$

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 243
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Figure 13-1 Connecting a PC to the basic unit

13.2.1.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Note
This setting cannot be made if the TEST / RESET button has been blocked.

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
3 Briefly press the TEST / RESET button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
4 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-4 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the USB interface of the PC/PG and the system interface of the basic unit to the Sirius USB PC cable.
It may be necessary to install a device driver for the parameterization cable when using the USB PC cable for the
first time.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green.
SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4a Setting the address of a device configured in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) (as started in steps 2 and 3):
Under "Parameters → Fieldbus interface", set the "Station address" to the required address and then download
the parameterization to the device.
4b Setting the address of a SIMOCODE device without integration in the current project:
In the project navigator, open "Online access" via "Online & Diagnostics". Here, the device currently connected
to the serial interface can be accessed using "COM<x> [SIRIUS PtP] → Update accessible devices". If the serial
interface COM<x> should indicate a protocol other than SIRIUS PtP, you can change this via the context menu
(right mouse button) → Properties. There, under "Parameters → Fieldbus interface", set the "Station address"
to the required address and then download the change into the device again.
5 After the parameters have been transferred to the basic unit, the message confirming successful downloading
appears under "Info → General" in the status window.

SIMOCODE pro
244 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter "Safety-related tripping" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

13.2.1.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFIBUS)
The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Table 13-5 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults

Device Device status Green Device ON -
Green – flicker‐ Internal fault Send the basic unit in for repair
ing
Yellow Memory module or addressing -
plug recognized, TEST/RESET but‐
tons control the memory module
or addressing plug
Yellow – flashing Memory module / addressing plug _
read in; factory settings restored
(duration: 3 s)
Yellow – flicker‐ Memory module programmed (du‐ -
ing ration: 3 s)
Red Incorrect parameterization (also Parameterize again, then switch the
GEN. FAULT on) control voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective (also Replace the basic unit!
GEN. FAULT on)
Red – flashing Memory module, addressing plug Reprogram/replace the memory mod‐
or expansion modules defective (al‐ ule, replace the expansion modules
so GEN. FAULT on - flashing)
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage is
connected/switched on
Bus Bus status Off Bus not connected or bus fault Connect the bus or check the bus pa‐
rameters
Green – flashing Baud rate recognized / communica‐ -
tion with PC / programming device
Green Communication with PLC/PCS -
GEN. FAULT Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g., overload
Red – flashing Fault pending; reset has not been Clear the error and press Reset;
saved Configuration error: Parameterize again
and reset, or switch the control voltage
off and on again
Off No fault -

13.2.1.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/50564852).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 245
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2.2 Commissioning with PROFINET

13.2.2.1 PROFINET commissioning steps

Please observe the information in Chapter General information about commissioning and
service (Page 241).
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:

Table 13-6 Commissioning the basic unit

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "PORT 1 / PORT 2" when the PROFINET cable is connected (lighted or flashing).
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. For more information, see Chapter Diagnostics
via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFINET) (Page 250). Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available to PROFINET, you must set the IP parameters and the PROFINET
device names. For more information, see Chapter Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name
(Page 247).
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization, e.g. with a PC on which SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal) software is installed. For this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable
(see the figure below).
4 Start SIMOCODE ES.

Figure 13-2 Connecting a PC to the basic unit

SIMOCODE pro
246 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2.2.2 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name on a plant-specific basis

The setting of IP parameters and the PROFINET device name is a mandatory step for
communication via PROFINET.
These parameters can be set in different ways, depending on the needs of the plant
configuration.
A detailed description of these possible approaches can be found in the Chapter "Configuration
of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as IO Device" in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) via PC cable
Proceed as follows:

Table 13-7 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) via PC cable

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 247
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Step Description
3 1st option: Create new project 2nd option: Do not create a new project
• In the Project view, create a new project via • In the portal view, click on the button "Online & Di‐
"Project → New" agnostics"
• Add a new device by double-clicking the button "Add new • Click "Accessible devices". The "Accessible devices"
device" in the project navigator and select the application window opens
in the device wizard. The selected application corre‐ • Click the "Start search" button
sponds to the description in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
• Select a station
Application examples (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743959).
• Check the device configuration and adapt it to the actual
configuration, if applicable
• Select the communication settings under "Parame‐
ters → PROFINET parameters" and set the IP parameters
and the device name
• Under "Parameters → Motor protection", set the current
setting and, if applicable, other parameters
• Adapt other parameters in the parameter editor if neces‐
sary
• Save the project and transfer the device parameters to the
device
4 Select the type of the PG/PC interface (SIRIUS PtP in this case)
5 Select the PG/PC interface via which the USB PC cable is con‐
nected to the computer.
6 Click on the "Start search" button and load the parameteriza‐
tion into the device.
After successfully transferring the parameters into the device
(see message in inspector window), the device is ready to
operate.
7 Select a suitable station. You can show the following devices/
stations:
• devices with the same addresses
• all compatible stations
• accessible stations
8 Click the "Connect..." button.
9 Open the "PROFINET parameters" dialog box in the parameter editor
10 Activate/deactivate "Overwrite IP parameters in device" and set the IP address, subnet mask, and router as appropriate.
The IP parameters are configured with SIMOCODE ES and transferred to the device. In this case, the "Overwrite IP
parameters in device" checkbox must be selected. Choose the IP parameters to match the configuration in the auto‐
mation system. If the IP parameters are assigned by the IO controller in the automation system, no setting is necessary
here and the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" checkbox must not be selected 1)
11 Enter the IP address.
12 Activate the checkbox "Use router" if you want to use a router
13 Enter the IP address (gateway) of the router
14 Select the device name to match the configuration in the automation system
15 Activate the "Overwrite device name in device" checkbox if you want to transfer the device name to the device.

SIMOCODE pro
248 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Step Description
16 If necessary, select the "Web server activated" checkbox
17 If necessary, select the "OPC-UA server activated" checkbox
18 Select the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox if you want to synchronize the unbuffered real-time clock of SIMO‐
CODE pro V PN using the NTP procedure.
19 Enter the NTP server address when the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox is selected.
20 Enter a value for the time shift: -1440 min to +1440 min (default value: 0 min)
21 Enter a value for the cyclic update interval when the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox is selected: 10 to 86400 s
(default value: 10 s)
22 Load the data to the basic unit via "Online → Load to device" or click the corresponding button in the menu bar

Note
Initial transfer of device name
The initial transfer of the device name must take place via the SIMOCODE pro system interface,
since the device cannot be reached via PROFINET as address settings are missing.

Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter "Safety-related tripping" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

13.2.2.3 Setting the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Setting the time with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

If the internal realtime clock of the devices is not automatically synchronized via NTP, you can
make the setting manually with SIMOCODE ES.
To do so, follow these steps:
Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Step Description
1 Go online, e.g. via "Online & Diagnostics" → Accessible devices
2 • In the project navigator, double-click "Commissioning".
• Click on "Command"
• Choose "Set time (=PC time in UTC)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 249
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFINET)
The basic unit and the operating panel have LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Table 13-8 Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults

Device Device sta‐ Green Device ON _
tus Green – flicker‐ Internal fault Send the basic unit in for repair
ing
Yellow Memory module recognized, TEST/RESET _
buttons control the memory module
Yellow – flashing Memory module read in; factory settings _
configured (duration: 3 s)
Yellow – flicker‐ Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s) _
ing
Red Device defective (also GEN. FAULT on) Replace the basic unit!
Red – flashing Memory module or expansion modules de‐ Reprogram/replace the memory
fective (also GEN. FAULT on - flashing) module, replace the expansion
modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply volt‐
age is connected/switched on
Green - flashing PE energy saving mode active _
Bus Bus status Off No communication with the IO Controller of Connect the bus or check PROFI‐
the PLC/PCS via PROFINET NET parameters (IP parameters,
device name)
Green Communication with the IO Controller of the _
PLC/PCS via PROFINET is active
GEN. Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g., overload
FAULT Red – flashing Fault pending; reset has not been saved Clear the error and reset.
Configuration error: Parameter‐
ize again and reset, or switch the
control voltage off and on again
Off No fault _
PORT1 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection
basic unit) and the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location active _
PORT2 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection
basic unit) and the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location active _

SIMOCODE pro
250 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2.3 Commissioning with Modbus

13.2.3.1 Commissioning with Modbus RTU

Commissioning sequence of the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit

Table 13-9 Commissioning sequence of the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the "Device" LED should light up green.
2 Connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below)
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization with a PC on which
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) is installed
4 If automatic baud rate detection is activated, the "Bus" LED flashes green as soon as the
setting selected by the controller is found.
When the controller exchanges data with the device, the "Bus" LED lights up green.

86%3& FDEOH
2UGHU 1R 8)$$

Figure 13-3 Connecting a PC to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU basic unit

Software for configuring and commissioning

SIMOCODE ES V14 + SP1 (or a later version) is required for full configuring and commissioning.
Here, you can choose between:
• SIMOCODE ES Basic: text-oriented configuration of SIMOCODE
• SIMOCODE ES Standard: configuration of SIMOCODE using graphically interconnectable
function blocks.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 251
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Note
The SIMOCODE ES Premium software does not have more functionality than
SIMOCODE ES Standard for SIMOCODE pro Modbus devices, but it can nevertheless be used for
commissioning.

The functional principle of SIMOCODE ES software is described in the online help. A "Getting
Started" is available on the internet in a multimedia format to help you become more familiar
with the software in the initial fundamental steps: Guided Tour (https://
www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/tia-portal/tia-portal-framework/tabcardpages/
Pages/guided-tour.aspx)

Device addressing
As supplied, the default setting for the device address 126. This must be reassigned when
commissioning the devices.

Setting the Modbus RTU address via addressing plug

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-10 Setting the Modbus RTU address via addressing plug

Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered. Addresses from 1 to 247 can be assigned.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position. 1)
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
3 Briefly press the "TEST/RESET" button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED
flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

Note
Labeling for the address "128"
Labeling for the address "128" is not available on the addressing plug, that is, the unlabeled
switch corresponds to the address "128".

SIMOCODE pro
252 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Setting the Modbus RTU address with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-11 Setting the Modbus RTU address with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES
3 Select "Online → Go online" or click the "Go online" button

Communication parameters
The following Modbus communication parameters can be set in the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
software under "Parameters → Modbus":

Figure 13-4 Modbus settings

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 253
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

• Baud rate: The baud rate of SIMOCODE pro V Modbus can be set in the range from 0.3 - 57.6
kbps. The parameter setting "auto" activates automatic baud rate detection with which the
device autonomously determines the setting selected by the controller. Automatic baud rate
search encompasses baud rates in the range from 4.8 ... 57.6 kbps.
Note
Automatic baud rate detection
Use of this function is only possible when the "Watchdog" function is activated.
Idle time:
Messages begin and end with a transmission break of at least 3.5 characters. The shortest
idle time depends on the baud rate. The following table shows the default values:

Bits per second (bps) Shortest idle time (ms)

300 128
600 64
1200 32
2400 16
4800 8
9600 4
19200 2
57600 2

• Baud rate (detected): Information about the detected baud rate, if automatic baud rate
detection (baud rate = auto) is set.
• Modbus address: Setting the Modbus address for the SIMOCODE device. The address can be
set in the range from 1 - 247. As supplied, the address for SIMOCODE pro V devices is set to
the default value of 126
• Port configuration: The number of stop bits and the selected parity of the Modbus interface
can be set here. The following settings are possible:
– 8E1 - 1 stop bit, even parity
– 8O1 - 1 stop bit, odd parity
– 8N2 - 2 stop bits, no parity
– 8N1 - 1 stop bit, no parity

SIMOCODE pro
254 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

• Wait time / wait time (default value): The time duration of the pause between a received
request and the reply from SIMOCODE pro can be set with the "Wait time" and "Wait time
(default value)" parameters. If the default value of the Modbus specification is to be used,
selection of the "Wait time (default value)" parameter is recommended. The "Wait time"
parameter is available for free setting. The setting is made in ms. The smallest settable value
corresponds to the default value of the Modbus specification. If longer wait times are
required, these can be defined using the "Wait time" parameter.
• Watchdog / Watchdog time: Monitoring of the bus communication can be activated with
these parameters. This is necessary when automatic baud rate detection is selected, or if the
SIMOCODE device were to experience a fault if the bus communication fails. If the watchdog
is activated, SIMOCODE monitors whether a valid read or write access to the device occurs
within the set watchdog time. If this is not the case, SIMOCODE begins a new search for a
valid baud rate if automatic rate detection is set. In addition, a "Fault - bus" is generated if the
"Watchdog → Bus monitoring" parameter is also activated.

Bus and controller monitoring on Modbus

With the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit, both the bus communication and the controller
function can be monitored. The functions "Bus monitoring" and "PLC / PCS monitoring" are
available for this purpose.
The functionality differs slightly from that described for SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS.
• Bus monitoring: With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if
– "Bus monitoring" is active
– In the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1 = 1 and S2 = 1), cyclic data access to
Modbus registers between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted for longer than the
set bus monitoring time, e.g. as the result of an interruption of the Modbus connection.
– The "Status - bus o. k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging
data with the PLC, "Status - Bus o. k." is set to "1".
• PLC / PCS monitoring: With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated
if
– "PLC/PCS monitoring" is active
– The input "PLC/PCS monitoring - input" switches to logic zero when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1). "PLC/PCS monitoring - input" is
connected preferably with the bit "Cyclic receive - bit 0.7".
– The status "PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is in cyclic data
exchange with the PLC, and the input "PLC/PCS monitoring" is set, "PLC/PCS in Run" is set
to "1".
You can find the further description of the "Watchdog" function block (PLC/PCS monitoring) in
Chapter "Watchdog" (PLC/PCS monitoring) in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 255
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

13.2.4 Commissioning with EtherNet/IP

13.2.4.1 EtherNet/IP commissioning steps

Please observe the information in Chapter General information about commissioning and
service (Page 241).
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:

Table 13-12 Commissioning the basic unit

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "PORT 1 / PORT 2" when the Ethernet cable is connected (lighted or flashing).
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. For more information, see Chapter Diagnostics
via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel with EtherNet/IP (Page 259). Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available to EtherNet/IP, you must set the IP parameters and the device
name. For more information, see Chapter Setting IP parameters and EIP device name (Page 256).
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization, e.g. with a PC on which SIMOCODE ES
software is installed. For this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure
below).
4 Start SIMOCODE ES.

Figure 13-5 Connecting a PC to the basic unit

13.2.4.2 Setting IP parameters and EIP device name

Setting IP parameters and device name on a plant-specific basis

For communication via EtherNet/IP it is mandatory to set the IP parameters and the device name.

SIMOCODE pro
256 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

These parameters can be set in different ways, depending on the needs of the plant
configuration.

Setting IP parameters and EtherNet/IP device name with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable
Proceed as follows:

Table 13-13 Setting IP parameters and EtherNet/IP device name with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface
2 Start SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
3 1st option: Create new project 2nd option: Do not create a new project
• In the Project view, create a new project via • In the portal view, click on the button "Online & Di‐
"Project → New" agnostics"
• Add a new device by double-clicking the button "Add new • Click "Accessible devices". The "Accessible devices"
device" in the project navigator and select the application window opens
in the device wizard. The selected application corre‐ • Click the "Start search" button
sponds to the description in the manual SIMOCODE pro -
• Select a station
Application examples (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743959).
• Check the device configuration and adapt it to the actual
configuration, if applicable
• Select the communication settings under "Parameters →
Ethernet parameters" and set the IP parameters and the
device name
• Under "Parameters → Motor protection", set the current
setting and, if applicable, other parameters
• Adapt other parameters in the parameter editor if neces‐
sary
• Save the project and transfer the device parameters to
the device
4 Select the type of the PG/PC interface (SIRIUS PtP in this case)
5 Select the PG/PC interface via which the USB PC cable is con‐
nected to the computer.
6 Click on the "Start search" button and load the parameteriza‐
tion into the device.
After successfully transferring the parameters into the device
(see message in inspector window), the device is ready to
operate.
7 Select a suitable station. You can show the following devices/
stations:
• devices with the same addresses
• all compatible stations
• accessible stations
8 Click the "Connect..." button.
9 Open the "Ethernet parameters" dialog box in the parameter editor

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 257
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Step Description
10 Select "Use BOOTP/DHCP" if the IP parameters are obtained from a DHCP server and assigned to the IO Device.
If the DHCP mode is selected, SIMOCODE pro immediately receives an IP address if the DHCP server is available in the
same network. Otherwise the device searches for an IP address. If SIMOCODE pro finds no IP address when setting up
an online connection or during a loading operation, because no DHCP server is available in the network, SIMOCODE ES
assigns the device a temporary IP address. If the DHCP mode is selected, SIMOCODE pro accepts this temporary address
as if it came from a DHCP server. There are two options for deactivating a temporary IP address again:
• Restart the device by means of "Commissioning → Command → Restart/Cold start"
• Switch the device off and on again. After the restart, the device runs in the DHCP mode and looks for an IP address
again.
11 Activate/deactivate "Overwrite IP parameters in device" and set the IP address, subnet mask, and router as appropriate.
The IP parameters are configured with SIMOCODE ES and transferred to the device. In this case, the "Overwrite IP
parameters in device" checkbox must be selected. Choose the IP parameters to match the configuration in the auto‐
mation system. If the IP parameters are assigned by the IO controller in the automation system, no setting is necessary
here and the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" checkbox must not be selected 1)
12 Enter the IP address.
13 Activate the checkbox "Use router" if you want to use a router
14 Enter the IP address (gateway) of the router
15 Select the EtherNet/IP device name to match the configuration in the automation system.
16 Activate the "Overwrite device name in device" checkbox if you want to transfer the device name to the device.
17 If necessary, select the "Web server activated" checkbox
18 Select the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox if you want to synchronize the unbuffered real-time clock of SIMO‐
CODE pro V EIP using the NTP procedure.
19 Enter the NTP server address when the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox is selected.
20 Enter a value for the time shift: -1440 min to +1440 min (default value: 0 min)
21 Enter a value for the cyclic update interval when the "Activate NTP synchronization" checkbox is selected: 10 to 86400 s
(default value: 10 s)
22 Load the data to the basic unit via "Online → Load to device" or click the corresponding button in the menu bar

Note
Initial transfer of device name
The initial transfer of the device name must occur via the SIMOCODE pro system interface, since
the device is not yet accessible via EtherNet/IP due to the missing address settings.

13.2.4.3 Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Setting the timer with SIMOCODE ES

If the internal realtime clock of the devices is not automatically synchronized via NTP, you can
make the setting manually with SIMOCODE ES.
To do so, follow these steps:

SIMOCODE pro
258 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.2 Commissioning

Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES
2 Establish an online connection.
3 Set the device-internal real time clock via "Commissioning → Command → Set time (= PC time in UTC)"

13.2.4.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel with EtherNet/
IP
The basic unit and the operating panel have LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Table 13-14 Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults

Device Device sta‐ Green Device ON _
tus Green flickering Internal fault Send back the basic unit!
Yellow Memory module recognized, TEST/RESET _
buttons control the memory module
Yellow flashing Memory module read in; factory settings _
configured (duration: 3 s)
Yellow flickering Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s) _
Red Device defective (also GEN. FAULT on) Replace the basic unit!
Red – flashing Memory module or expansion modules de‐ Reprogram/replace the memory
fective (also GEN. FAULT on - flashing) module, replace the expansion
modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply volt‐
age is connected/switched on
Green flashing PE energy saving mode active _
Bus Bus status Off No communication with a controller active Connect the bus or check Ether‐
net parameters (IP parameters,
device name)
Green flashing Communication with a controller active (e.g. _
Rockwell Automation controller)
GEN. Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g., overload
FAULT Flashing red Fault pending; reset has not been saved _
Off No fault _
PORT1 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection
basic unit) and the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location active _
PORT2 Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
(only on Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection
basic unit) and the wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location active _

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 259
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

13.3 Service

13.3.1 Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance - general information

Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and unforeseen costs.
Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance, for example, to avoid production
losses due to plant downtimes. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are always
kept in perfect working order.

Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available that can, for example, be read out with
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) under Commissioning → Service Data / Statistical Data. For
example, based on "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts," you can decide whether
motor and / or motor contactors should be replaced.

SIMOCODE pro
260 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Figure 13-6 Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 261
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

13.3.2 Backing up and saving parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This particularly
applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module

Note
This function will not be available if the TEST / RESET button has been disabled.

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-15 Saving the parameters into the memory module

Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST / RESET" button for approx. 3 seconds. The
parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data transfer, the "Device"
LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit

Note
This function will not be available if the TEST / RESET button has been disabled.

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-16 Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit

Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx.
10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST / RESET" button. The parameters will be
transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flashes yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Note
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory
module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.

SIMOCODE pro
262 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Saving parameters from the basic unit to a SIMOCODE ES file

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-17 Saving parameters to a SIMOCODE ES file

Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Create a new project via "Create new project".
4. Switch to the project view.
5. Go online, e.g. via "Online & Diagnostics" in the project navigator
6. Open the "Online access" menu in the project navigator and select the suitable interface by
double-clicking it.
7. Double-click on "Update accessible devices".
8. Select "Online → Upload device as new station (hardware and software) ...".
9. Save the project.

Note
This function will not be available if the TEST / RESET button has been disabled.

Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-18 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Open a project.
4. Select Online → Extended online connection.
5. Select the type of the PG/PC interface (SIRIUS PtP or PN/IE).
6. Select the PG/PC interface.
7. Click the "Start search" button. A search is made for compatible stations.
8. Select a station.
9. Load the parameters to the device via "Online → Load to device".

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 263
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

13.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components

Safety guidelines

WARNING
Replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched off
before replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules.

Note
Please observe the information contained in the Operating Instructions!
You will also find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man)

Note
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the components!

Replacing the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-19 Replacing the basic unit

Step Description
1. Save the parameters. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up and saving parameters (Page 262).
2. Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
3. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.
4. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5. Dismantle the basic unit.
6. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic unit.
7. Mount the new basic unit.
8. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
9. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
10. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11. Save the parameters into the basic unit. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up and saving parameters
(Page 262).
12. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

SIMOCODE pro
264 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-20 Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Step Description
1. Switch off the main power for the feeder and switch off the power supply for the basic unit and the DM-F.
2. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.
3. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4. Remove the expansion module or decoupling module.
5. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new expansion module or decoupling module.
6. Install the new expansion module or decoupling module.
7. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

Replacing a DM-F
Proceed as follows:

Table 13-21 Replacing a DM-F

Step Description
1 First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for the basic unit and the DM-F.
2 Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4 Dismantle the DM-F.
5 Withdraw the removable terminals from the new DM-F.
6 Mount the new DM-F.
7 Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8 Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9 DM-F PROFIsafe only:
Set the DIP switches for the PROFIsafe address according to the configuration in the F-controller (see Chapter "Con‐
figuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and integrating it into the fail-safe automation system" in the manual Manual Fail-safe
Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
10 Switch on the power supply for the DM-F and the basic unit.
11 DM-F Local only
Configure the DM-F Local accordingly (see Chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local" in manual Manual Fail-safe Digital
Modules SIMOCODE pro (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
12 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 265
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Proceed as follows:

Table 13-22 Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Remove the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below (current / voltage measuring modules only)
4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module (see Chapter Mounting of current measuring modules (Page 177) and Chapter Mounting the
current / voltage measuring modules (Page 178)).
6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the feed-hole openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current / voltage measuring modules only).
8 Connect the cable to the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

SIMOCODE pro
266 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

8 9
DEFG

Figure 13-7 Replacing current/voltage measuring modules

Replacing a 1st generation current/voltage measuring module (UM) with a 2nd generation current/
voltage measuring module (UM+)

The following table shows which 2nd generation current/voltage measuring module replaces a
1st generation current/voltage measuring module:

1st generation current/voltage measuring module 2nd generation current/voltage measuring module

3UF7110-1AA00-0, Is = 0.3 to 3 A → 3UF7110-1AA01-0, Is = 0.3 to 4 A

3UF7111-1AA00-0, Is = 2.4 to 3 A → 3UF7110-1AA01-0, Is = 0.3 to 4 A
3UF7111-1AA00-0, Is = 3.0 to 25 A → 3UF7111-1AA01-0, Is = 3 to 40 A
3UF7112-1AA00-0, Is = 10 to 100 A → 3UF7112-1AA01-0, Is = 10 to 115 A
3UF7113-1AA01-0, Is = 20 to 200 A → 3UF7113-1AA00-0, Is = 20 to 200 A
3UF7113-1BA01-0, Is = 20 to 200 A → 3UF7113-1BA00-0, Is = 20 to 200 A
3UF7114-1BA01-0, Is = 20 to 200 A → 3UF7114-1BA00-0, Is = 20 to 200 A

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 267
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Note
Conversion to a 2nd generation current/voltage measuring module
Depending on the previous parameterization of the SIMOCODE basic unit, the Device LED and
the General Fault LED may flash red when downloading a parameterization with a 2nd
generation current / voltage measuring module.
This behavior can be corrected with a reset. The device LED changes to green; the Gen. Fault LED
goes out.
After a reset, the basic unit is in the UM+ mode. The device LED changes to green; the Gen. Fault
LED goes out.

13.3.4 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel, proceed as follows:

Table 13-23 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

Step Description
1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator panel from the front panel or
switchgear cabinet door.
2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or cabinet door measure 91.5 + 0.5 mm (width) and
54.5 + 0.5 mm (height) (see figure).
3 Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see figure).
4 Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.
5 Position the operator panel in the adapter.
6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
7 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket screws (see figure and safety infor‐
mation!).

SIMOCODE pro
268 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

[

Figure 13-8 Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)

Figure 13-9 Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 269
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Note
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel is not compatible with SIMOCODE DP 3UF5, and
vice versa.

13.3.5 Restoring factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.

Restoring the factory settings with the TEST / RESET button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):

Table 13-24 Restoring the factory settings with the TEST / RESET button

Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2 Press the TEST / RESET button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4 Release the TEST / RESET button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the TEST / RESET button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the TEST / RESET button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the TEST / RESET button again after approx. two seconds.
8 The factory setting is restored.

Note
If any of the steps stated above are not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to normal
operation.

Note
This function is always active, irrespective of the "TEST / RESET keys disabled" parameter.

Restoring the factory settings with the software SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC / PG via PROFIBUS DP or via the system
interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.

SIMOCODE pro
270 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):

Table 13-25 Restoring the factory settings with the software SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Step Description
1 Go online, e.g. via "Online → Connect online".
2 In the Project navigation view, select "Online accesses → COM [Sirius PtP] → Update accessible
stations → SIMOCODE → Commissioning → Command".
3 Click on the "Factory settings" button. The factory setting is restored.
4 "Factory settings OK" is displayed in the inspector window.

13.3.6 Firmware update of device components

You can use this function to update the firmware of the following SIMOCODE pro basic units. You
can download the firmware versions on the Support page:
• Firmware update for SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units from product version *E15* (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767656)
• Firmware update for SIMOCODE pro V MR basic units from product version *E03* (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109771740)
• Firmware update for SIMOCODE pro V PN basic units from product version *E08* (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109749989)
• Firmware update for SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic units (https://support.industry.siemens.com/
cs/de/en/view/109756912)

Note
The parameterization of the device is retained after the firmware has been updated.

NOTICE
Connection to the device
The connection by USB PC cable or Ethernet must not be interrupted during the update
procedure.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 271
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

Requirements:
• The basic unit must be connected to SIMOCODE ES via online connection, USB PC cable (PtP)
or Ethernet.
• The supply voltage must be present at the basic unit at the start of and during the firmware
update.
• A firmware update is only possible if
– The motor is in the "off" state and there is no motor current
– The control station is in "Local manual" status
– The device is not protected by a password

Firmware update
You can perform the firmware update as follows:
• for the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units, via the SIRIUS PC USB cable (SIRIUS PtP)
with the assistance of the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software, all versions
Basic / Standard / Premium V15 or higher or Professional V16 or higher.
• for the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic units: via Ethernet with the assistance of the
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software, all versions Basic / Standard / Premium V13 or higher or
Professional V16 or higher.

WARNING
Risk of impermissible system states.
The installation of the firmware update switches the basic unit into "station failure" state. This
state can affect the operation of an online process or a machine.
Unexpected operation of a process or a machine can lead to fatal or severe injuries and/or to
property damage.
Before installing the firmware update, ensure that the basic unit is not involved in an active
process.

Update procedure:
1. Select the module in the device configuration
2. Select the "Online & diagnostics" command from the shortcut menu
3. Select the "Firmware update" group from the "Functions" folder.
4. Click the "Browse" button to select the path to the firmware update files.
5. Select the firmware file from the folder into which you previously unpacked the download
file. The table in the "Firmware update" area lists those modules under "Suitable for modules
with" for which an update is possible with the selected firmware file.
6. Click the "Run update" button. If the module can interpret the selected file, the file is
downloaded to the module
Updating the firmware

SIMOCODE pro
272 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.3 Service

The "Run firmware after update" check box is always selected. When the loading process is
complete, the module works with the new firmware.

Note
Avoid interrupting the firmware update
If you interrupt a firmware update, the device is not ready for use. In this case, the "BUS" and
"GEN FAULT" LED indicators flash alternately and the "DEVICE" LED lights up red.

Note the following behavior during the firmware update:

The "BUS" and "GEN FAULT" LED indicators flash alternately and the "DEVICE" LED lights up red.
Checking the behavior following the firmware update
After the firmware update, check the firmware version of the basic unit that has had the
firmware updated.

13.3.7 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 273
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

13.4 Troubleshooting

13.4.1 Error buffer

SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer in which the 21 most recent errors / faults and "Power - On"
events are recorded with a time stamp. Time stamps are based upon the operating hours of the
device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the length of time for which the device is supplied with control supply
voltage.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a time stamp.
• Error/Fault: The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer; the incoming error (rising edge) is
always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.
• Power on: If the most recent entry is "Power - On," this is not logged multiple times. Instead,
the error number is used as a power-on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be deleted by
frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
This data is displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)".
Example:

SIMOCODE pro
274 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Figure 13-10 Example of event logging using the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Example:
The most recent "power-on" event was logged at a device operating time of 17 days, 21 hours
and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power - On", the device was operating (supplied

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 275
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min. The "Number of starts >" fault was logged at a device operating
time of 18 days, 22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24h 46min after the most recent "Power - On."
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are logged
for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:
• Time
• Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
– Number:
Line 1 200 or 202
Line 2 201 or 203
– Text:
Line 1 "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 -> 1" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 -> 1"
Line 2 "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 -> 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 -> 0."
The current DIP switch position of the "DM-F Local" and/or the "DM-F PROFIsafe" is displayed
under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event".
See also Chapter "Data record 72 - Error buffer" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

13.4.2 Event memory

In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event buffer

Note
This event memory is supported by the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from firmware
version V3.0.
The following events are stored:
• last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"
• last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"
• Initialization module read in
• Initialization module written.

See also Chapter "Data record 73 - Event buffer" in the manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

SIMOCODE pro
276 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

13.4.3 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Table 13-26 Alarm, fault, and system events

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Analog mod‐ An open circuit has occurred in the Check the measured value sensor Reset 64
ule 1/2 open cir‐ analog value measuring circuit. and the measuring circuit.
cuit
Startup parame‐ The startup parameter block pre‐
ter block active vents transfer of SIMOCODE pro pa‐
rameters that can be transferred
from the IO controller during start‐
up.
The block may not be set if
SIMOCODE pro is integrated in
STEP7 via the SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM). 2)
Antivalence Only for positioner control func‐ Limit switch defective, open circuit Tripped
tion: The change-over contacts of limit switch
the limit switch do not issue an an‐
tivalent signal.
Configuration er‐ The configured unit configuration • Check whether all the config‐ Clear the Tripped 3
ror does not match the actual configu‐ ured components are available fault; re‐
ration. set
• Check the actual configuration
with "Configuration".
Execution STOP The motor feeder could not be • The contactor contact is welded Clear the Tripped 9
command turned off after a STOP command fault; re‐
• Parameter execution time is
was issued. set
too short
• The "open" end position has
not been reached during the
parameterized runtime (only
for the "Positioner" and "Sole‐
noid valve" control functions).
Execution ON The motor feeder could not be • Main circuit is interrupted Reset Tripped 8
command turned on after an ON command is (fuse, circuit breaker)
issued.
• The motor contactor or contac‐
tor control is defective
• Parameter execution time is
too short.
Trip level cos The power factor cos phi has under‐ Please check the application that is Tripped 44
phi < shot the trip level. Possible cause: being driven by the motor.
The motor is being operated with‐
out a load.
Trip level I < un‐ The maximum current has under‐ Please check the application that is Tripped 41
dershot shot the trip level. being driven by the motor.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 277
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Trip level I > over‐ The maximum current has overshot Please check the application that is Tripped 40
shot the trip level. being driven by the motor.
Trip level P < un‐ The active power of the motor has Please check the application that is Tripped 43
dershot undershot the trip level. being driven by the motor.
Trip level P > The active power of the motor has Please check the application that is Tripped 42
overshot overshot the trip level. being driven by the motor.
Trip level U < un‐ The voltage in the motor feeder has Check the motor feeder. Tripped 45
dershot undershot the trip level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped
Trip level 0/4 - The measured value at the analog Check the measuring station. Tripped 47
20 mA < under‐ input has undershot the trip level.
shot
Trip level 0/4 - The measured value at the analog Check the measuring station. Tripped 46
20 mA > over‐ input has overshot the trip level.
shot
Operational Pro‐ An "Operational Protection Reset Tripped; 19
tection Off Off (OPO)" signal is pending. A for posi‐
(OPO) switched-on motor feeder has been tio‐
switched off. The feeder cannot be ners QE1
switched on while the OPO signal is or QE2
active. switched
on until
end posi‐
tion is
reached -
depend‐
ing upon
configura‐
tion
Motor operating The configured limit value for mo‐ Please adopt the maintenance
hours > tor operating hours monitoring has measures intended for the feeder.
been exceeded.
Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has Please check the application that is Reset Tripped 48
exceeded the threshold for stalled being driven by the motor.
rotor protection. Possible cause:
The motor is blocked.
Stalled position‐ The torque switch has activated be‐ • The positioner may be blocked. Counter Tripped 12
er fore or without the respective limit • com‐
Acknowledge the fault by re‐
switch. mand
leasing with the "OPEN/
"OPEN /
CLOSED" counter command. CLOSED!"
• Please check the positioner ap‐
plication and the limit switches.

SIMOCODE pro
278 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
DM-F feedback The DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe • Check the wiring of the feed‐ Rectify Tripped
circuit has detected a fault in the feedback back circuit the fault
circuit (the feedback circuit must be such that
• Check the contact blocks in the
closed as the enabling circuit is the feed‐
feedback circuit.
switched on); the "SF" (general back cir‐
fault) LED on the front of the DM-F cuit is
Local or DM-F PROFIsafe is flashing closed.
red.
DM-F safety-rela‐ The DM-F has tripped the enabling The motor cannot be switched on Acknowl‐ Tripped 66
ted tripping circuit for safety reasons. again until the enabling circuits of edge
the DM-F are closed again. with "Re‐
set", if au‐
to-reset is
not ac‐
tive.
DM-F test re‐ The enabling circuits of the DM- The function of the enabling circuit Please ap‐
quirement F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe have not relay contacts can only be tested ply the
been opened and closed again when they are switched. Perform a mainte‐
within the configured time period. function test. nance
measures
prescri‐
bed for
this sce‐
nario.
DM-F wiring DM-F module wiring fault (short- • Check the wiring of the sensor Reset Tripped 67
circuit to ground in the sensor cir‐ circuits / feedback circuit
cuit/feedback circuit); the "SF" (gen‐
• Rectify the fault.
eral fault) LED on the front of the
DM-F Local is illuminated red.
DM-FL actual The actual configuration of the DM- Check whether the effective config‐
and set configu‐ F Local does not correspond to the uration of the DM-F Local corre‐
ration different parameterized set configuration. sponds to the parameterized set
configuration. Correct the effective
configuration by changing the DIP
switch settings or adjusting the set
configuration by means of param‐
eterization if required.
DM-FL simulta‐ The DM-F Local has detected a dis‐ Check the switching elements in Rectify Tripped
neity crepancy error in the two-channel the sensor circuit. the fault
sensor circuit. by open‐
ing or
closing
the sen‐
sor in‐
puts.
DM-FL configura‐ The DM-F Local is in "configuration Complete the configuration (see
tion mode mode"; the "DEVICE" LED on the manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules
front of the DM-F Local is illumina‐ SIMOCODE pro Safety", Chapter
ted yellow. 7.4) 3).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 279
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
DM-FL cross cir‐ Cross circuit in sensor circuit of DM- • Check the wiring of both sensor Reset Tripped 68
cuit F Local; the "SF" (general fault) LED circuits for cross circuiting
on the front of the DM-F Local is il‐
• Rectify the fault.
luminated red.
DM-FL waiting The DM-F LOCAL is in the "Waiting Perform the startup test by actuat‐
for start-up test for start-up test" status. ing the sensor in the sensor circuit.
DM-FP Prm error The parameter settings of the PRO‐ Check the communication / PROFI‐
FIsafe profile are incorrect or the set safe parameters of SIMOCODE pro
PROFIsafe address is not identical to that were set on the IO controller.
the configured address.
Double 0 Both torque switches have activa‐ • Open circuit torque switch. Tripped 13
ted simultaneously. The motor • Torque switch is defective.
feeder has been turned off.
Double 1 Both limit switches have activated Limit switch defective Tripped 14
simultaneously.
End position Except positioner 5 control func‐ Counter Tripped 15
tion: The state of the limit switches com‐
has changed without a command mand
(positioner has left the end position "OPEN /
without a command). CLOSED!"
External ground External ground-fault monitoring Please check the motor connection Reset Tripped 29
fault has responded. An impermissibly cable for damage.
high residual current is flowing.
External fault 1, A signal is pending at the input Check the motor feeder. Tripped 56, 57,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 58, 59,
3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function. 60, 61
Required func‐ At least one parameterized func‐ Activate only the functions that are
tion is not sup‐ tion is not supported by the version supported by the version of the ba‐
ported of the basic unit. sic unit.
Hardware fault 6) The SIMOCODE pro basic unit hard‐ Replace the basic unit. See Chap‐ Clear the Tripped 0
ware is defective. ter Replacing SIMOCODE pro com‐ fault.
ponents (Page 264).
Initialization The initialization module is com‐ Deactivate write protection of the
module write- pletely write-protected. initialization module
protected
Initialization The initialization module is com‐ Deactivate write protection of the
module write- pletely or partially write-protected. initialization module
protected, pa‐ Reparameterization of SIMO‐
rameter changes CODE pro is denied because the in‐
not allowed itialization module is write-protec‐
ted.

SIMOCODE pro
280 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Initialization Reparameterization has been rejec‐ • Select a parameterization with
module - identifi‐ ted because the initialization mod‐ identical addressing and I&M
cation data ule is write-protected. data
write-protected
• Deactivate the partial write pro‐
tection of the initialization
module
Initialization The parameters of the initialization
module read in module were read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization The reparameterization was accep‐
module pro‐ ted in the initialization module.
grammed
Initialization The initialization module has been
module cleared cleared and is now back in the as-
delivered condition.
Internal ground Internal ground-fault monitoring Please check the motor connection Reset Tripped 28
fault has responded. An impermissibly cable for damage.
high residual current is flowing.
No start permit‐ The permissible number of starts in Reset Tripped
ted the monitoring timeframe has
been attained. The next start
should not be carried out until the
interlocking time has expired.
Module fault At least 1 SIMOCODE pro module is • Connecting cable defective or Clear the Tripped 1
not ready for use. incorrectly connected fault; re‐
set
• Module defective. Replace the
module. See Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 264).
Module supply Supply voltage on the DM-F Local is • The terminals are not wired Clear the Tripped
voltage is not too low or not present. properly fault; re‐
present set
• Module defective. Replace the
module. See Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 264).
Power failure The power failure lasted longer Clear the Tripped 18
(UVO) than the set power failure time. fault; re‐
set
Just one start The start after the next one should
possible not be carried out until the inter‐
locking time has expired.
Parameter is in‐ The parameter data is incorrect. The designation of the incorrect Clear the Tripped 4
correct ("General parameter can be found via the fault; re‐
fault" category) number (byte No.) in Chapter "Ta‐ set
bles" in the manual "Parameteriz‐
ing SIMOCODE pro" 4).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 281
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Parameter is in‐ The parameter data transferred to Check the parameter data (data re‐
correct ("Event" the unit is incorrect. Errors in the cords 130 - 135) that has been
category) parameter data can occur, for ex‐ transmitted to the device for cor‐
ample, if the device has not been rect content.
parameterized with SIMOCODE ES See Chapter "Data formats and da‐
(TIA Portal). ta records" in the manual "SIMO‐
CODE pro - Communication" 5).
Parameter You attempted to change at least Many parameters can only be
changes not al‐ one parameter that cannot be changed if the motor feeder is
lowed in the cur‐ changed in the current operating switched off and not in "Remote"
rent operating state. mode. The following parameters
state can always be changed: See Chap‐
ter "Data formats and data records"
in the manual "SIMOCODE pro -
Communication" 5).
Wrong pass‐ SIMOCODE pro parameters are pro‐ Please use the correct password for
word tected by a password. An attempt changing the parameters. If you do
has been made to change the pa‐ not know the password, new pa‐
rameters without entering the pass‐ rameters can only be entered after
word. the factory settings have been re‐
stored. For a description of how to
restore the factory settings, see
Chapter Restoring factory settings
(Page 270).
Phase unbal‐ The limit value for phase unbalance Check the motor feeder and the Reset Tripped 25
ance has been exceeded. Phase unbal‐ motor.
ance can cause an overload. Possi‐
ble causes:
• Phase failure
• Fault in the motor windings.
Feedback The current flow in the motor feed‐ • The main circuit has been inter‐ Reset Tripped 11
(FB) OFF er has been interrupted without the rupted (fuse, circuit breaker,
motor feeder being turned off. main switch).
• The motor contactor or contac‐
tor control is defective
Feedback (FB) Current is flowing in the motor feed‐ • Contactor contacts have been Clear the Tripped 10
ON er without the motor feeder being manually activated fault; re‐
switched on set
• Contactor has not been switch‐
ed on via SIMOCODE
Test Position Current is flowing in the motor feed‐ The main circuit is not interrupted Reset Tripped 17
Feedback (TPF) er although the motor feeder is in in test operation.
the test position (TPF).
Memory module The parameters of the memory
read in module were read into SIMOCODE.
Memory module The memory module was cleared
cleared and is now back in as-delivered
state.

SIMOCODE pro
282 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Memory module The reparameterization was accep‐
programmed ted in the memory module.
Memory module The memory module is completely Deactivate write protection of the
write-protected write-protected. memory module.
Status - cooling The motor feeder has been switch‐ The motor can only be switched on
down period ac‐ ed off due to overload. again after the cooling down peri‐
tive od has expired.
Status - DM-F en‐ Shows the status of the enabling
abling circuit circuit:
• closed or
• tripped
Status - emer‐ The thermal memory has been The motor can be switched on
gency start exe‐ cleared with the function "Emer‐ again immediately after an over‐
cuted gency start". load trip.
Status - test posi‐ The motor feeder is in the test posi‐ 17
tion (TPF) tion (TPF). The main circuit has
been interrupted and the feeder
can be "cold started".
Stop time > The configured limit value for mo‐ Please adopt the maintenance
tor stop time monitoring has been measures intended for the feeder.
exceeded. If possible, switch on the feeder.
Fault - bus Bus communication has been or is Check the bus connection (plugs, Reset, au‐ Tripped 5
being interrupted. cables, etc.). to-reset
Fault - PLC/PCS The PLC that controls the feeder Check the operating state of the Reset, au‐ Tripped 6
was or is in STOP mode. PLC. to-reset
Fault antiva‐ The limit switches are not reporting • Limit switch open circuit Counter Tripped 16
lence any antivalent signals. • Please check the positioner ap‐ com‐
mand
plication and the limit switches.
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
Fault - EM open A short circuit has occurred in the Check the wiring to the 3UL23 re‐ Reset Tripped 38
circuit wiring to the 3UL23 residual cur‐ sidual current transformer
rent transformer.
Fault - EM short- A short-circuit has occurred in the Check the wiring to the 3UL23 re‐ Reset 39
circuit wiring to the 3UL23 residual cur‐ sidual current transformer
rent transformer.
Fault end posi‐ Positioner/solenoid valve has left Acknowledge the fault by releasing Reset; Tripped 15
tion the end position without a com‐ with the counter command "OPEN/ counter
mand being issued. The motor feed‐ CLOSED". com‐
er has been turned off. mand
Fault - temporary One of the following components is Replace the defective compo‐ Clear the Tripped 2
components defective: nents. See Chapter Replacing SI‐ fault; re‐
(e.g. memory • Memory module MOCODE pro components set
module) (Page 264).
• PC cable.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 283
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Temperature The temperature trip level has been Check the temperature measuring Tripped 35
module 1/2 - trip overshot. station.
level exceeded
Temperature The temperature warning level has Check the temperature measuring
module 1/2 - been exceeded. station.
warning level ex‐
ceeded
Temperature Temperature sensor is delivering Check the temperature sensor. Reset Tripped 37
module 1/2 out impermissible values.
of range
Temperature Either a short circuit or an open cir‐ Check the temperature sensor and Clear the Tripped 36
module 1/2 sen‐ cuit has occurred in the tempera‐ the sensor cable. fault; re‐
sor fault ture sensor circuit. set
Test trip The motor feeder has been checked Reset Tripped 65
and switched off by a test trip.
Thermistor trip Thermistor protection response. Please check the motor and the ap‐ Reset, au‐ Tripped 31
level The temperature of the motor is too plication that is being driven by the to-reset
high. motor. The motor cannot be
switched on again until the tem‐
perature has reached the reset
point of the thermistor.
Thermistor open An open circuit has occurred in the Check the thermistor sensor cable Clear the Tripped 33
circuit thermistor sensor cable. and the thermistor. fault; re‐
set
Thermistor short A short circuit has occurred in the Check the thermistor sensor cable Clear the Tripped 32
circuit thermistor sensor cable. and the thermistor. fault; re‐
set
Dry-running – Dry-running of the pump was pre‐ Make sure that the minimum flow
pump vented by switching off the pump rate specified for the pump is not
motor. Possible causes: undershot and that the monitored
• The permissible limit value of limit value of the active power Pmin
has been set correctly.
the minimum flow rate Qmin of
the pump was undershot or
• The set limit value of the active
power Pmin of the pump motor is
not correct.

SIMOCODE pro
284 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Dry-running pro‐ An error was detected in the meas‐ 1. Repeat the teach-in process.
tection – error ured value acquisition of the active 2. Check the power supply.
power of the pump motor or the
teach-in process was interrupted 3. Check the current/voltage
with a timeout. The pump motor measuring module; replace the
was switched off. defective component.
Possible causes:
• Timeout during teach-in process
• Unbalance in voltage or current
of at least 30%
• Fault in current/voltage measur‐
ing module
Overload The motor feeder has been overloa‐ Please check the motor and the ap‐ Reset, au‐ Tripped 26
ded. plication that is being driven by the to-reset
motor. The motor can be switched
on again after the cooling down
period has expired or after an emer‐
gency start.
Overload and un‐ There is a load unbalance on the Check the motor feeder and the Reset, au‐ Tripped 27
balance motor feeder phases. Possible cau‐ motor. The motor can be switched to-reset
ses: on again after the cooling down
• Phase failure period has expired or after an emer‐
gency start.
• Fault in the motor windings.
Prewarning over‐ The motor feeder is in overload op‐ Please check the motor and the ap‐
load (I > 115 %) eration. If this condition continues plication that is being driven by the
to persist, the motor feeder will trip motor.
within a short period of time due to
overload.
Warning level The power factor cos phi has under‐ Please check the application that is
cos phi < shot the warning level. being driven by the motor.
Possible cause: The motor is being
operated without a load.
Warning level I< The maximum current has under‐ Please check the application that is
undershot shot the warning level. being driven by the motor.
Warning level I> The maximum current has overshot Please check the application that is
overshot the warning level. being driven by the motor.
Warning level P< The active power of the motor has Please check the application that is
undershot undershot the warning level. being driven by the motor.
Warning level P> The active power of the motor has Please check the application that is
overshot overshot the warning level. being driven by the motor.
Warning level U< The voltage in the motor feeder has Check the motor feeder.
undershot undershot the warning level. Possi‐
ble causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 285
Commissioning, service, troubleshooting
13.4 Troubleshooting

Event (alpha‐ Description Troubleshooting Acknowl‐ Contac‐ Error

betical) edg‐ tor con‐ No. 1)
ment / trol
fault rec‐
tification
Warning level The measured value at the analog Check the measuring station.
0/4 - 20 mA < un‐ input has undershot the warning
dershot level.
Warning level The measured value at the analog Check the measuring station.
0/4 - 20 mA > input has overshot the warning lev‐
overshot el.
Permissible num‐ The permissible number of starts in Reset Tripped 52
ber of starts ex‐ the monitoring timeframe has al‐
ceeded ready been exceeded. The next
start should not be carried out until
the interlocking time has expired.

1) See also "Error number" in Chapter "Data record 72 - Error buffer" in the manual SIMOCODE pro
- Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960).

Note
2) Parameter block
On devices in the as-delivered condition or after the factory settings have been restored, the
parameter block is not active!

3) SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/

en/50564852)
4) Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743958)
5) SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743960)
6) If SIMOCODE pro restarts the basic unit after a hardware fault into the normal operating mode
(device LED lights up green) by means of a power cycle, no hardware replacement is necessary.

SIMOCODE pro
286 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas 14
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor
protection)

14.1.1 Module integration

The motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection) are implemented in
the following modules:
• 3UF70 basic units
• 3UF71 current / voltage measuring modules
• 3UF73 digital modules
• 3UF76 multifunction modules.

14.1.2 Information and standards

Information and standards

Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)
The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of the SIMOCODE pro system
comply with the requirements for overload protection of explosion-proof motors of the
following types of protection:
• Ex d "flameproof enclosure" according to DIN EN 60079-1
• Ex e "increased safety" according to DIN EN 60079-7
• Ex p "pressurization" according to DIN EN 60079-2
• Ex t "dust ignition protection by enclosure" according to DIN EN 60079-31
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully observe the following
notes and standards:
• IEC 60079-14 / EN 60079-14 / DIN VDE 0165-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (except mines)
• IEC 60079-17 / EN 60079-17 / DIN VDE 0165-10-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (except mines)
• DIN EN 50495 Safety devices required for the safe functioning of equipment with respect to
explosion risks

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 287
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

• VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines

• National implementation of Directive 1999/92/EC
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Equipment Group I, Category "M2" (mining) and
Equipment Group II, Category 2 in the area "G and D" (areas in which explosive gas, vapor, mist
and air mixtures as well as flammable dust are present):
Marking:
• BVS 06 ATEX F001 *)
• II (2) G [Ex eb Gb][Ex db Gb][Ex pxb Gb]
• II (2) D [Ex tb Db][Ex pxb Db]
• I (M2) [Ex db Mb]
*)

Note
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with certificate numbers BVS
04 ATEX F 003.

The devices are suitable for protecting motors in potentially explosive areas in accordance with
the above standards.

WARNING
Use in hazardous locations
The components of SIMOCODE pro are not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.
The device is only allowed to be installed in a control cabinet with the minimum degree of
protection of IP 4x.
If you have any questions, ask your explosion protection specialist.

WARNING
Qualified personnel required
All work involved in connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out
by qualified, responsible personnel.
Failure to follow proper procedures may result in personal injury and damage to property.

SIMOCODE pro
288 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.3 Installation and commissioning – motor protection functions (overload

protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.3.1 Operating Instructions

NOTICE
SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions
Please observe the SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions (enclosed with the devices).
You can find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro listed in Chapter General
information about commissioning and service (Page 241) or at Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man) in the Industry Online Support.

14.1.3.2 Setting the rated motor current

Notes/example
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or design test certificate of
the motor).

NOTICE
Trip class / tripping characteristic
Pay attention to the trip class or the tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Choose the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected even with a blocked rotor.
The motor, cables, and contactor must be dimensioned for the selected trip class.

NOTICE
Setting the "response" of the overload protection
Set the response of the overload protection to "Trip"!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 289
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

Example of a tripping characteristic with 3UF710* current/voltage measuring modules and

3UF711*-1AA00-0 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules
Motor 500 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA / Is = 5.5:

E
E
E
E
TE = 11 s E

IA/Is = 5.5
Figure 14-1 Tripping conditions of the Ex e motor, selected: CLASS 10E when using a 3UF710* current
measuring module

The latest tripping characteristics for SIMOCODE pro can be found in the Industry Online Support
(Tripping characteristics 3UF7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/search?
search=3UF7&type=Characteristic&lc=en-WW)).

NOTICE
Tripping characteristic
The type of tripping characteristic is dependent on the configured measuring module.
If a 3UF711*-1AA00-0 1st generation current / voltage measuring module is configured in a
parameter assignment, although a 3UF711*-1AA01-0 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring module is used, then the tripping characteristic remains that of the 1st generation
current / voltage measuring module.
If only the hardware of the measuring module is replaced, this does not result in any change to
the tripping behavior.

SIMOCODE pro
290 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.3.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input

On 3UF70, you can use temperature sensor type A with a characteristic according to IEC 60947-8
(DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures apply.

Figure 14-2 Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)

Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures will result
based on the TNF (rated response temperature of the sensor):

Table 14-1 Tripping and restart temperatures

Tripping temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors TNF +4 K TNF -7 K
6 sensors TNF -5 K TNF -20 K

The temperatures listed are limit values.

CAUTION
Response setting
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Trip"!

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 291
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.3.4 Sensor circuit wiring

NOTICE
Installing the measuring circuit cables
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. It is not permissible to use the cores
of the motor supply cable or other main supply cables.
Shielded control cables should be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interference is
expected as a result of power cables routed in parallel.

Maximum cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables:

Table 14-2 Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables

Cable cross section Cable lengths (single) at the thermistor input

Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection1)
2.5 mm2 2800 m 250 m
1.5 mm 2
1500 m 150 m
0.5 mm2 500 m 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to these maximum cable lengths.

NOTICE
Evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable
Evaluating the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is recommended.
If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, when commissioning or after
modifications / maintenance work (assembly, disassembly) of the system, the sensor resistor
must be measured using a suitable measuring instrument.

14.1.3.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1

Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged overcurrent protection
devices.

NOTICE
Fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum fuse protection of
the contactor for type of coordination 2.

SIMOCODE pro
292 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.3.6 Cable protection

NOTICE
Cable cross sections
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning the cross
sections!
Choose a sufficient cable cross section, especially for heavy-starting motors CLASS 20E to
CLASS 40E (see Chapter Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V for 1st generation current / voltage measuring module
(Page 343))

14.1.3.7 Test

Testing - general information

SIMOCODE pro offers users a convenient method of checking the complete motor protection
chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as contactors, circuit breakers, thermistors). This can be
used, for example, for testing according to IEC 60079-17 or VDE 0118 The test encompasses a
full function test. For this purpose, all three test phases are to be carried out (hardware test,
current feedback, motor protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the
"TEST / RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Tripping currents do not need to
be injected in order to carry out testing.

Test phases
• Phase 1: Hardware test / lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated,
including the lamp control. Contactor controls remain unchanged.
• Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 s to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault:
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes if no main current is flowing
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers; if main current is flowing in all three phases (exception:
with a "1-phase load" in one phase).
• Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.
The contactor control can only be shut down by means of the "Test 1" function block and in the
"Local 1-3" operating mode, using the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic device / operator panel.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 293
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST / RESET" button is pressed
for the required length of time:

Table 14-3 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing

Test phase Status Without main current With main current

OK Fault *)
OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
<2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Un‐ Unchanged Unchanged
changed
Show QL *)
Results of the hardware test / lamp test
2 to 5 s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deacti‐ Unchanged Deactivated
vated
Relay test
>5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deacti‐ Deactivated Deactivated
vated
LED lighted / switch‐ LED flashing LED flickering LED off
ed on
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

14.1.3.8 Further safety guidelines

WARNING
Safety information for DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules
Pay attention to the safety notes in the Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

CAUTION
Using relay outputs for the protection function
For the protection function, only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit, of a monostable
digital module 3UF730, of a multifunction module 3UF76, or of a fail-safe expansion
module 3UF732/3UF733 may be used, and only if connected to the corresponding contactor
controls "QE" of the control function!

SIMOCODE pro
294 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

WARNING
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.
The device is only allowed to be installed in a control cabinet with the minimum degree of
protection of IP 4x.
If installed in hazardous areas, there must be no ignition hazard from the 3UF7. Appropriate
measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).

WARNING
Electrical isolation required
For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control supply, galvanic isolation must be ensured
with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to DIN EN 61558-2-6.

Note
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.

14.1.3.9 Ambient conditions

Permissible ambient temperature range:
• Storage / transportation: -40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; BBD: 0 °C to +60 °C

14.1.3.10 Safety values

In a system with SIMOCODE pro basic units and current measuring modules, the functionality of
the SIMOCODE pro motor protection and control device is suitable for use in safety functions up
to safety integrity level SIL1.
This applies to the "low demand mode of operation" with a three-year test cycle for safety
functions as well as for the "high demand mode of operation".
• SFFSIMOCODE ≥ 60 %
• PFHMax, SIMOCODE ≤ 3 * 10-6 1/h
• PFD3a ≤ 3*10-2
• HFT = 0 (single-channel system)
• TUL = 20 years
The failure rate was specified for a maximum ambient temperature of 60 °C.
The requirements demanded of SIL 1 are fulfilled with a reserve of 70% for sensors and actuators.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 295
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.1 Motor protection functions (overload protection, thermistor protection)

14.1.4 Maintenance and repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.

WARNING
Repairs
Repairs to the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

14.1.5 Warranty

Note
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
instructions from the operating instructions.
You can find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro listed in Chapter General information
about commissioning and service (Page 241) or at Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man) in the Industry Online Support.

14.1.6 Further information

You will find further information on the Internet:
• Internet (https://www.siemens.com/simocode)
• Information and Download Center (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16027/cat)
• Product Information System (ProdIS) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)
• Service and support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)
• ATEX (https://www.siemens.com/sirius/atex)
• Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert)

SIMOCODE pro
296 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power

monitoring

14.2.1 Module integration

The function "dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by means of active power
monitoring" is implemented in the following modules:
• Basic units with PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X:
– 3UF7010-1A.00-0 from *E16*
– 3UF7011-1A.00-0 from *E13*
– 3UF7013-1A.00-0 from *E04*
• 3UF712 current/voltage measuring modules
You must to use a combination of both modules to realize this function.

14.2.2 Information and standards

Information and standards

Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring – type of
ignition protection b
Monitoring systems against dry running are one of the elements required to ensure the safe
operation of centrifugal pumps in hazardous areas.
SIMOCODE pro is a safety, controlling or regulating device intended to work autonomously.
SIMOCODE pro corresponds to the requirement level for a b1 ignition protection system for
centrifugal pumps that are suitable for pumping flammable media and are installed in hazardous
areas.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 297
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Overall ignition protection concept
According to the overall ignition protection concept for the centrifugal pump, further
independent monitoring devices may be necessary, depending on the requirement level, to
avoid ignition sources in the event of expected and/or rare malfunctions. Failure of this "dry-
running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring" device for control of
ignition sources is regarded as a rare malfunction.

With SIMOCODE pro the dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps (non-electrical device)
works by active power monitoring and shutdown of the motor if a minimum flow rate is
undershot. This corresponds to the following type of ignition protection: Control of ignition
sources b, ignition protection system b1, e.g. according to DIN EN 80079‑37
SIMOCODE pro is registered for dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power
monitoring according to both ATEX and IEC Ex.
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully observe the following
notes and standards:
• IEC 60079‑14 / EN 60079‑14 / DIN VDE 0165‑1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres ‑ Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 60079‑17 / EN 60079‑17 / DIN VDE 0165‑10‑1 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres ‑ Explosive atmospheres. Electrical installations inspection and maintenance
(other than mines)
• DIN EN 50495 Safety devices required for the safe functioning of equipment with respect to
explosion risks
• VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
• DIN EN ISO 80079‑36 Explosive atmospheres - Part 36: Non-electric equipment for use in
explosive atmospheres - Basic method and requirements
• DIN EN ISO 80079‑37 Explosive atmospheres - Part 37: Non-electrical equipment for
explosive atmospheres - Non-electrical type of protection constructional safety ''c'', control of
ignition sources ''b'', liquid immersion ''k''
• DIN EN 1127‑1 Explosive atmospheres - Explosion prevention and protection - Part 1: Basic
concepts and methodology

SIMOCODE pro
298 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

• DIN EN 13237 Potentially explosive atmospheres – Terms and definitions for equipment and
protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
• DIN EN 15198 Methodology for the risk assessment of non-electrical equipment and
components for intended use in potentially explosive atmospheres
• National implementation of Directive 1999/92/EC
Marking on the nameplate of the SIMOCODE pro device with meaning with regard to the
possible applications of the centrifugal pumps to be protected in hazardous areas:
• PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X
• IECEx PTB 18.0004 X
• I (1G/M2) [Ex h Ga/Mb]
• II (1/2) G [Ex h Ga/Gb]
• II (1G/2D) [Ex h Ga/Db]

Explanation of marking:
Notes regarding the term "device":
• The electrical device to be marked (SIMOCODE pro) is installed in the non-hazardous area.
• The marking refers to the requirements for the non-electrical device (centrifugal pump) to be
protected, which is installed in the hazardous area or in which a hazardous area may be
present.
• The protection function of the SIMOCODE pro device is achieved by monitoring/avoiding
ignition sources on the device to be protected (centrifugal pump) by preventing dry running.
All valid device combinations (see Module integration (Page 297)) are permitted:
• For explosion protection outside of the equipment (centrifugal pump)
– Under Equipment Group I, Equipment category M2 (mining) for mines endangered by
firedamp
– Under Equipment Group II, Equipment category 2G (potentially explosive gas
atmospheres, zone 1)
– Under Equipment Group II, Equipment category 2D (potentially explosive dust
atmospheres, zone 21)
• For explosion protection within the equipment (centrifugal pump). In this case, approval
relates to both stated Equipment Groups and Equipment category 1G (potentially explosive
gas atmospheres, zone 0).

Explanation of approval for explosion protection within the equipment (centrifugal

pump):
In practice, very rarely zone 0 (gas/vapor/mist) will be present inside the pump, but possibly
zone 2, sometimes also zone 1. These use cases are covered by the approval for zone 0. For
requirements according to zone 2 and zone 1, SIMOCODE pro can be used as the sole safety
device to protect against dry running - depending on the overall protection concept of the
operator. For requirements according to zone 0, SIMOCODE pro can be used as a building block
in addition to other independent safety devices - here too, depending on the overall protection
concept of the operator.
The devices/modules are also marked with the following warning:

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 299
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

"WARNING – this enclosure contains equipment forming part of an ignition protection

system in accordance with ISO 80079‑37."

NOTICE
Monitoring equipment required
Take steps to ensure that the system cannot operate without any additional monitoring
equipment required by the overall ignition protection concept.

NOTICE
Points to observe
To ensure that SIMOCODE pro is used as intended for dry-running protection for centrifugal
pumps by active power monitoring in hazardous areas, observe the stipulations from this
manual as well as the stipulations from the manuals provided by the manufacturers of the
centrifugal pump and the motor.

The devices are suitable for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power
monitoring in hazardous areas in accordance with the above standards.
Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health) are
not required.

14.2.3 Installation and commissioning – dry-running protection for centrifugal

pumps by means of active power monitoring

14.2.3.1 Operating Instructions

SIMOCODE pro
300 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Operating instructions from the manufacturer of the centrifugal pump and the
manufacturer of the motor used to drive the pump
Observe the operating instructions from the manufacturer of the centrifugal pump that is to be
protected against dry running as well as those from the manufacturer of the motor used to
drive the pump

14.2.3.2 General information on installation and commissioning

NOTICE
Information provided by the pump manufacturer
Observe all information provided by the pump manufacturer concerning installation /
mounting / preconditions for commissioning.

NOTICE
Setting the motor's rated current
Set the motor's rated current IE (see nameplate) correctly in SIMOCODE pro.
The automatic zero point measurement at I < 0.1*IE can lead to unintended shutdowns if IE is
set too high.

14.2.3.3 Special conditions for commissioning and operation

NOTICE
Commissioning and operation of the centrifugal pumps to be protected
You must commission and operate the centrifugal pumps that are to be protected in
accordance with the pump manufacturer's stipulations.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 301
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Suitability of the device for control of ignition sources
The device for control of ignition sources is suitable for centrifugal pumps with progressive
flow characteristics with sufficient distance between the active powers PMIN at the minimum
flow rate QMIN and POPT at the operating point QOPT with PMIN / POPT < 0.80.

CAUTION
Setting the required switching levels
Set the dry-running protection by active power monitoring to the required switching level and
check that it is working correctly.
The equipment may not be used as a device for control of ignition sources for monitoring the
liquid filling of a centrifugal pump installed in a potentially explosive atmosphere until the
combination pump/motor/shutdown has been successfully tested.

NOTICE
Checking the set parameter values
Check the parameter values that have been set with respect to their suitability for the
protection function in terms of avoiding dry running when required (following any changes in
the pump or system characteristics, e.g. as a result of changing the operating medium or of
intervention in the plant configuration). Correct the parameter values where necessary.
To determine the active power from which the trip level is derived, you must either use the
same 3UF7 system, with which the shutdown function is realized, or an identical system with
the same functionality. External measuring equipment is not permitted for determining the
active power.

NOTICE
Monitoring limit values
Make sure that the pump is shut down when the limit values for monitoring are reached.

CAUTION
No automatic restart
Take steps to ensure that the drive motor cannot automatically restart.
Acknowledge any fault manually once it has been remedied.

NOTICE
Periodic function tests
Test the device for control of ignition sources in accordance with the operating instructions on
a periodic basis to make sure it is working correctly (see sections Test (Page 305) and Periodic
tests (Page 308)).

SIMOCODE pro
302 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

14.2.3.4 Setting the parameters

Example
Set the following parameters in SIMOCODE pro:
• Trip level: PTRIP threshold value for active power monitoring to prevent dry running:
PTRIP < (lower limit): 0 - 750000 W (default setting: 0)
• Delay time for preventing incorrect tripping caused by short undershooting of the PTRIP
threshold value during operation: tV,TRIP: 0 - 10 s (default setting: 0.5 s, incrementally: 0.1 s)
• Start-up bridging time for preventing incorrect tripping caused by short undershooting of
the PTRIP threshold value during start-up of the centrifugal pump (depending on the
procedure used to open the pressure-side shut-off valve): tBRIDGE : 0 - 60 s (default setting: 0 s,
incrementally: 0.5 s). During the start-up bridging time, the dry-running protection function
is suppressed. If the trip level is still undershot after expiry of tBRIDGE , then the delay time tV,TRIP
starts to run from this instant.
Parameters can be entered directly in SIMOCODE ES.
To determine the trip level, you must perform an active power measurement with a
corresponding 3UF7 system beforehand (either with the same system, which is also used for
monitoring, or with an identical system with the same functionality). You will find the
parameters in the project for the respective SIMOCODE pro device in the parameter editor under
"Dry-running protection". You must upload the parameters manually to the device.
However, we recommend a "teach-in" to determine and enter the parameters. This must be
carried out with the medium being pumped. You can initially carry out the teach-in with water
during the cold commissioning of the production plant. However, it is essential that you repeat
the procedure with operating medium under operational conditions.
SIMOCODE ES engineering software will support you when carrying out the teach-in by
providing a dry-running wizard.
To start the wizard, go to the online view and open the commissioning editor for the respective
SIMOCODE device in the project. You will find the wizard there under "Dry running wizard".

Note
Teach-in procedure
The teach-in procedure as well as that for direct entry of the parameters is described in the
chapter "Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps" in the manual Parameterizing
SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

Note
Log file
For verification purposes, we recommend generating a log file (see Chapter "Dry-running
protection of centrifugal pumps" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958)) after setting the parameters
(whether done as a teach-in or by means of direct entry using SIMOCODE ES).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 303
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Note
Activating the dry-running protection function
This function is deactivated in the as-delivered state.
The function is activated following a successful run-through with the wizard. The response of
the dry-running protection at PTRIP < (lower threshold) is set to "Trip".

Note
Default setting for response
The response of the dry-running protection at PTRIP < (lower threshold) is preset to "Trip".

Note
Setting the warning level
You have the option of configuring an additional warning level for undershooting of active
power using the "Active power monitoring" function (see Chapter "Active power monitoring" in
the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109743958)). This becomes effective before the trip level PTRIP is undershot.
However, this warning level is of no relevance with respect to approval for use in hazardous
areas.

NOTICE
Manufacturer's instructions on the centrifugal pump
Observe the manufacturer's instructions for the centrifugal pump, which must be protected
against dry running, in particular the characteristic curve which supplies the information on
the minimum flow rate and possible information for the procedure during startup and
shutdown of the pump / motor.

14.2.3.5 Line protection

NOTICE
Cable / conductor cross sections
Avoid impermissible maximum cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning the cross
sections!
Choose a sufficient cable cross section, especially for heavy-starting motors CLASS 20E to
CLASS 40E (see Chapter Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V for 1st generation current / voltage measuring module
(Page 343))

SIMOCODE pro
304 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

14.2.3.6 Test

General system tests

SIMOCODE pro offers you a method of checking the dry-running protection chain (incl. actuators
such as contactors, circuit breakers). Use this, for example, to carry out the test according to
IEC 60079‑17 or VDE 0118.
The test encompasses a full function test. For this purpose, all 3 test phases are to be carried out
(hardware test, current feedback, motor protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried
out using the "TEST / RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. It is not necessary
to load the test variable (active power) to check if the measured values are correct.

Note
Must be carried out periodically
You must repeat the general system tests at least every 3 years (cf. IEC 60079-17, Section 4.4.2).

Test phases of the general system test

The hardware is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated, including the lamp control. Contactor
controls remain unchanged.
• Phase 1: Hardware test / lamp test (0 s to 2 s)
• Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 s to 5 s): If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is
triggered. If there is no fault:
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes if no main current is flowing
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all 3 phases (exception: with a
"1-phase load" in one phase).
• Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s): If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are
deactivated. The contactor control can only be shut down by means of the "Test 1" function
block and in the "Local 1-3" operating mode, using the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic
unit / operator panel.
The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST / RESET" button is pressed
for the required length of time:

Test Status Without main current With main current

phase OK Fault *) OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
<2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Un‐ Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
changed
Show QL *)
Results of the hardware test / lamp test

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 305
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Test Status Without main current With main current

phase OK Fault *) OK Fault
2‑5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Un‐ Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
changed
Relay test
>5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactiva‐ Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
ted
LED lights up / ac‐ LED flashing LED flickering LED off
tivated
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

System test with operating medium

A system test with operating medium is an integral part of any commissioning procedure (e.g.
after changes to parameter settings) and of the "General system test". It might also be required
at shorter intervals if demanded by statutory regulations.

Note
Automation
If you wish to reduce the amount of manual intervention, you can store appropriate sequences
in your process control system for (partially) automated running of the system test with
operating medium.

• Checking a potential drift:

– Set the same operating conditions (medium, flow rate, temperature, pressures, etc.) as
for the previous test.
– Measure the active power (at least two measured values, e.g. POPT and PMIN).
– Compare the measured values with those from the previous test.
– Eliminate any causes of deviation.

SIMOCODE pro
306 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

• Checking the effectiveness of shutdown:

– If not yet done: First enter the relevant values for plant configuration for the trip level of
the active power monitoring PTRIP and for the delay time for ongoing operation tV,TRIP.
– If necessary, carry out a teach-in to determine the trip level (see Chapter "Dry-running
protection for centrifugal pumps" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958)).
– Set the start-up bridging time tBRIDGE to 0 s.
– Start the centrifugal pump filled with operating medium; the pressure-side shut-off valve
must be closed. The "dry-running protection" function must shut down the pump
immediately.
– Set a sufficiently large value for the start-up bridging time tBRIDGE – coordinated with the
procedure used when starting up the centrifugal pump.
– Start the centrifugal pump filled with operating medium.
– Begin by setting a sufficiently high flow rate for ongoing operation.
– Reduce the pump's flow rate incrementally until the active power value detected by
SIMOCODE pro falls below the trip level. The time span during which the flow-rate
remains at a certain value for the active power at each step must be longer than the delay
time tV,TRIP that has been set. After undershooting the trip level PTRIP, the pump must shut
down once the delay time tV,TRIP has expired. The system's response (shutdown and delay
time) must correspond to the preset parameter values.

14.2.3.7 Further safety information

WARNING
Electrical isolation required
For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control supply, you must ensure galvanic isolation
with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to DIN EN 61558‑2‑6.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 307
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Note
SIMOCODE pro is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.

14.2.3.8 Environmental conditions

Permissible ambient temperature range:
• Storage / transport: -40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; OPD: 0 °C to +60 ℃.

14.2.3.9 Safety values

14.2.4 Periodic tests

You must regularly test the functional safety of the device for control of ignition sources using
the "Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by means of active power monitoring"
function. The procedure corresponds to that for commissioning and is described in section Test
(Page 305).

Note
Calibration of active power measurement
Active power measurement is calibrated just once prior to shipment of the equipment.
It is not necessary to repeat calibration during the equipment's lifetime when used in hazardous
areas for dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by means of active power monitoring.

SIMOCODE pro
308 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

14.2.5 Maintenance and repair

These devices are maintenance-free.

WARNING
Repairs
Repairs to the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

14.2.6 Warranty

Note
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
information from the operating instructions.
You can find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro listed in Chapter General information
on installation and commissioning (Page 301) or at Operating Instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man) in the Industry Online Support.

14.2.7 More information

You will find further information on the Internet:
• Internet (https://www.siemens.com/simocode)
• Information and Download Center (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16027/cat)
• Product Information System (ProdIS) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/
requests)
• Service and Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)
• ATEX (https://www.siemens.com/sirius/atex)
• Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 309
Safety and commissioning information for Ex areas
14.2 Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

SIMOCODE pro
310 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data 15
15.1 Common technical data

Common technical data

Standards EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/
EN 60947-5-1, ISO EN 80079-36, ISO EN 80079-37
Test verification documents See Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert)
Permiss. ambient temperature
In operation -25 to +60°C 1)
For storage and transport -40 to +80°C 2)
at installation altitude above MSL
≤ 2000 m
≤ 3000 m Max. +50 °C (no protective separation)
≤ 4000 m Max. +40 °C (no protective separation)
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529)
All components (except current measuring IP20 5)
modules with bus connection, operator
panel and door adapter)
Current measuring modules with bus con‐ IP00
nection
Operator panel (front) and door adapter IP54
(front) with cover
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
• General • 1-6 Hz / 15 mm; 6-500 Hz / 2 g
• SIMOCODE pro S basic unit and SIMO‐ • 1-6 Hz / 15 mm; 6-500 Hz / 1 g
CODE pro S multifunction module as‐
sembled on a current measuring mod‐ • 1-6 Hz / 15 mm; 6-500 Hz / 1 g
ule
• SIMOCODE pro V basic unit assembled
on a current / voltage measuring module
Shock resistance (sine pulse) acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
• General
• SIMOCODE pro S basic unit and SIMO‐ • 15 g / 11 ms
CODE pro S multifunction module as‐ • 15 g / 11 ms
sembled on a current measuring mod‐
ule
• 15 g / 11 ms
• SIMOCODE pro V basic unit assembled
on a current / voltage measuring module
Mounting position Any
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 311
Technical data
15.1 Common technical data

Common technical data

EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1 Corresponds to degree of severity 3
• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1, SN 27095,
NE21
• DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1
Conducted interference, burst according to 2 kV (power ports)
IEC C 61000-4-4 Surge suppressor is required for inductive loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference immission, high- 10 V
frequency according to IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted interference immission, surge 2 kV (line to earth)
according to IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV (line to line)
Electrostatic discharge, ESD according to 8 kV (air discharge)
IEC 61000-4-2 4) 6 kV (contact discharge) 3)
Radiated interference immission according 10 V/m
to IEC 61000-4-3
This is a Class A product. This product can DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
cause radio interference if used in a do‐ (corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
mestic environment. Therefore, the user
may need to implement suitable counter‐
measures.
Conducted and radiated interference emis‐
sion
Protective separation according to All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other according to IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-1 i.e. dimensioned with double creepage distance and air clearance.
Notice
The notes of the test report, No. A0258 "Protective Separation" must be observed.
3UF793 connecting cable:
Rated voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V

1) for operator panel with display 3UF721 0 - 60 °C

2) for operator panel with display 3UF721 -20 - 70 °C
3) for operator panel with display 3UF721 4kV
4) 3UF7020: Operator input during operation only on the front
5) Danger
Hazardous voltage. Can cause death or serious injury
To ensure touch protection and degree of protection IP20 for SIMOCODE pro S, screw in all screws which are not used for
conductor clamping and close the terminal covers.

SIMOCODE pro
312 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB /

pro V MR basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units
Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted us‐
ing additional push-in lugs
Cabinet mounting basic unit SIMOCODE pro S Minimum distance to be maintained
(3UF7020) • from cabinet rear wall for series mounting at side: 0 mm
• from grounded parts at side: 2 mm
Display
Red / green / yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
"TEST/RESET" button • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module or addressing plug
System interfaces
Front, right-hand side (pro S) For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory
module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the system
interface for parameterization purposes.
Bottom, front (pro C, pro V) Connection of a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring
module
Front, left-hand side (pro S) Connection of a current measuring module
PROFIBUS DP interface
Interface (physical) RS485

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 313
Technical data
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units
Connection technology 1) 9-way sub D socket (12 Mbit)
Pin assignment acc. to DIN EN 61158-2
Terminals (1.5 Mbit)
Connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or a 9-pole sub
D socket.

Pin assignment:
1: n. c.: Reserved
2: n. c.: Reserved
3: BUS B: Data line B
4: RTS: Transmission request
5: P-: Ground
6: P+: Supply voltage
7: n. c.: Reserved
8: BUS A: Data line A
9: n. c.: Reserved
-: SHIELD: Shield over connector housing
Load rating 5 V DC on PROFIBUS DP: Max. 100 mA
Support for the transfer rates defined by the PROFIBUS DP standard:
9.6 Kbit / s, 19.2 Kbit / s, 45.45 Kbit / s, 93.75 Kbit / s, 187.5 Kbit / s,
500 Kbit / s, 1500 Kbit / s, 3000 Kbit / s, 6000 Kbit / s, 12000 Kbit / s.
Note
The 5 V power supply is only sufficient to power the bus termination mod‐
ule, not any other loads.
Supported data transfer rates for Modbus RTU:
300 baud, 600 baud, 1,200 baud, 2,400 baud, 4,800 baud, 9,600 baud,
19,200 baud (default), 57,600 baud
Rated control supply voltage Us (according to 110 V to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
DIN EN 61131-2)
Warning
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV
or PELV power supply unit!
Operating range 0.85 x Us to 1.1 x Us 0.8 x Us to 1.2 x Us
Power consumption

SIMOCODE pro
314 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units
SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000) / pro S (3UF7020). SIMOCODE pro C basic unit:
Measurement conditions: Room temperature, 5.3 VA / 2.9 W 2.3 W
combination of basic unit, current acquisition
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit:
module and operator panel, each with 2 LEDs
switched on and active inputs and outputs, active 4.7 VA / 2.5 W 2.1 W
thermistor, and 1.5 MBd bus transmission rate
SIMO‐ SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit:
CODE pro V PB (3UF7010) / pro V MR (3UF7012): 8.3 VA / 3.6 W 2.6 W
Measurement conditions: Room temperature,
SIMOCODE pro V MR basic unit:
combination of basic unit, current/voltage acquis‐
ition modules and operator panel with display, 8.3 VA / 3.6 W 2.6 W
each with 2 LEDs switched on and active inputs
and outputs, active thermistor, and 1.5 MBd bus
transmission rate
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Power failure backup time (longer power fail‐ SIMOCODE pro C
ures lead to shutdown of the relay outputs 24 V DC Typ. 50 ms
(monostable))
110 V to 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro S Typ. 50 ms
SIMOCODE pro V - 24 V DC Typ. 50 ms
SIMOCODE pro V - 110 V - Typ. 200 ms
240 V AC/DC
Relay outputs
Number Monostable relay outputs:
3 (SIMOCODE pro C, pro V)
2 (SIMOCODE pro S)
Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable via internal
signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs connected to common potential, one
separate relay output, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star
or delta contactor or operating state status information.)
Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary • 6 A fuse inserts, operational class gG; 10 A quick-response
contacts (relay outputs) (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current 5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
Rated switching capacity • AC-15:
6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
• DC-13:
2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 315
Technical data
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs connected to common potential that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control sta‐
tion, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-assignable to control
functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary)
Total cold resistance ≤ 1.5 kOhm
Response value 3.4 kOhm to 3.8 kOhm
Return value 1.5 kOhm to 1.65 kOhm
Sensor short-circuit response value < 9 ohm
Cable lengths (single), conductor cross sections: 250 m: 2.5 mm2
150 m: 1.5 mm2
50 m: 0.5 mm2
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring (for 3UF7010-1A.00-0 basic unit)
Trip level – active power 0 - 750000 W (default setting: 0)
Delay time during pump operation 0 s ... 10 s
Start-up bridging time when starting pump 0 s ... 60 s
Connection of SIMOCODE pro C / pro V basic units
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 lb.in to 10.3 lb.in 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2 x0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
- PROFIBUS cable 2 x 0.34 mm2 AWG 22
Connection of SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 5.2 lb.in to 7.0 lb.in
0.6 Nm to 0.8 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.0 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
- PROFIBUS cable 2 x 0.34 mm2 / 1 x 0.34 mm2
AWG 22

SIMOCODE pro
316 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.2 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S / pro V PB / pro V MR basic units

Note
Bus termination module
The bus termination module is powered by a voltage of max. 5 V.
The current drawn for the bus termination module is limited.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 317
Technical data
15.3 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units

15.3 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP /

pro V EIP basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units
Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted us‐
ing additional push-in lugs
Mounting position Any
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Yellow: "Memory module detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
Green "PORT1" LED • Continuous light: Ethernet connection available
• Flashing: Station flash test
Green "PORT2" LED • Continuous light: Ethernet connection available
• Flashing: Station flash test
"TEST/RESET" button • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module
System interfaces
Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory
module or a PC cable can also be connected to the system interface for
parameterization purposes.
Bottom Connection of a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring
module
ETHERNET interface
Connection system 2 x RJ45 (LAN)
Transmission rate Max. 100 Mbit/s
Number of interfaces according to PROFINET 2
1 (SIMOCODE pro V PN GP 3UF7011-1A.00-2 basic units)
PROFINET conformity class B
Protocols supported PROFINET IO, PROFIsafe, LLDP, SNMP, Address Resolution Protocol (ARP),
HTTP, HTTPS, OPC UA Server, NTP
Autonegation Yes
Autosensing Yes
MRP/MRRP redundancy procedure Yes
No (SIMOCODE pro V PN GP 3UF7011-1A.00-2 basic units)
PROFINET IO system redundancy Yes
PROFIenergy measured values Yes
PROFIenergy shutdown Yes

SIMOCODE pro
318 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.3 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units
Rated control supply voltage Us (according to 110 V to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
DIN EN 61131-2)
Warning
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV
or PELV power supply unit!
Operating range 0.85 x Us to 1.1 x Us (startup) 0.85 x Us to 1.2 x Us (startup)
0.85 x Us to 1.1 x Us (operation) 0.80 x Us to 1.2 x Us (operation)
Power consumption
SIMOCODE pro V PN (3UF7011) and SIMO‐ SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit:
CODE pro V EIP (3UF7013): 8.3 VA / 4.8 W 3.9 W
Measurement conditions: Room temperature,
SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit:
combination of basic unit, current/voltage acquis‐
ition module and operator panel with display, 8.3 VA / 4.8 W 3.9 W
each with 2 LEDs switched on and active inputs
and outputs, active thermistor, and 100 MBd bus
transmission rate
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Power failure backup time (longer power fail‐ • 24 V DC Typ. 20 ms
ures lead to shutdown of the relay outputs • 110 V to 240 V AC/DC
(monostable))
Relay outputs
Number 3 monostable relay outputs
Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable via internal
signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs connected to common potential, one
separate relay output, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star
or delta contactor or operating state status information.)
Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary • 6 A fuse inserts, operational class gG; 10 A quick-response
contacts (relay outputs) (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current • 5A
• 6 A at max. +50 °C
Rated switching capacity • AC-15:
6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
• DC-13:
2 A/24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts according B300/R300
to UL
Electrical durability (operating cycles) Typical: 100 000
Mechanical durability (operating cycles) Typical: 10 000 000

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 319
Technical data
15.3 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units

Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs connected to common potential that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control sta‐
tion, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-assignable to control
functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary)
Total cold resistance ≤ 1.5 kOhm
Response value 3.4 kOhm to 3.8 kOhm
Return value 1.5 kOhm to 1.65 kOhm
Sensor short-circuit response value < 9 ohm
Cable lengths (single), conductor cross sections: 250 m: 2.5 mm2
150 m: 1.5 mm2
50 m: 0.5 mm2
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring (for 3UF7011-1A.00-0 and 3UF7013-1A.00-0
basic units)
Trip level – active power 0 - 750000 W (default setting: 0)
Delay time during pump operation 0 s ... 10 s
Start-up bridging time when starting pump 0 s ... 60 s
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 lb.in - 10.3 lb.in; 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro
320 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring modules

15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current /
voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules

Mounting
Current setting Is = 0.3 A - 4 A; 3 A - Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional
40 A; 10 A - 115 A push-in lugs
(3UF71..-1AA0.-0)
Current setting Is = 20 A to 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails, screw attachment onto the
(3UF71.3-1.A01-0) mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
Current setting Is = 63 A to 630 A Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
(3UF71.4-1BA01-0)
System interface for main circuit For connection to a basic unit
Current setting Is 3UF7110-1AA01-0: 0.3 A - 4 A 3UF7113-1AA01-0: 20 A to 200 A
3UF7111-1AA01-0: 3 A - 40 A 3UF7113-1BA01-0: 20 A to 200 A
3UF7112-1AA01-0: 10 A - 115 A 3UF7114-1BA01-0: 63 A to 630 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui (at pol‐ 690 V
lution degree 3)
Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V
Rated impulse withstand volt‐ 6 kV
age Uimp
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Type of current Three-phase
Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit 1)
Typical voltage measuring range
Line-to-line voltage / voltage be‐ 110 V - 690 V
tween lines (e.g.: UL1L2)
Phase voltage (e.g.: UL1) 65 V to 400 V
Operating range 0.12 x Iu ≤ Is ≤ 10 x Io
Accuracy 7) at 25°C, 50/60 Hz for the following voltage ranges and limited current ranges
of the voltage measurement ± 1.5%
Valid for voltage range:
• Line-to-line voltage UL in the range 0.85 x 110 V - 1.1 x 690 V
• Phase voltage UL in the range 0.85 x 65 V - 1.1 x 400 V
of the current measurement ± 1.5%
Valid for limited current range: 3UF7110-1AA01-0: 0.25 A - 8 A 3UF7113-1AA01-0: 15 A - 400 A
3UF7111-1AA01-0: 2.25 A - 80 A 3UF7113-1BA01-0: 15 A - 400 A
3UF7112-1AA01-0: 7.5 A - 230 A 3UF7114-1BA01-0: 47 A - 1260 A
Temperature drift of current meas‐ 3UF7110-1AA01-0: 0.02% / K 3UF7113-1AA01-0: 0.01% / K
urement 3UF7111-1AA01-0: 0.01% / K 3UF7113-1BA01-0: 0.01% / K
3UF7112-1AA01-0: 0.01% / K 3UF7114-1BA01-0: 0.01% / K
of the cos phi measurement ± 1.5% 8)
(cos phi ≥ 0.5)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 321
Technical data
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules

of the apparent power measure‐ ± 3%
ment (cos phi ≥ 0.5)
of the active power measurement ± 5%
(cos phi ≥ 0.5)
of the energy measurement ± 5%
(cos phi ≥ 0.5)
of the frequency measurement ± 1.5%
(cos phi ≥ 0.5)
of the ground-fault detection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Annex T
• in the range 30% - 120% Is • ± 10% (Class CI-A)
• in the range 15% - 30% Is • ± 25% (Class CI-B)
Accuracy at 25°C, 50/60 Hz for extended current ranges 2 x Io < Is < 8x Io
Temperature drift of current measurement
• 3UF7110-1AA01-0 0.02% / K
• 3UF7111-1AA01-0, 3UF7112-1AA01-0, 3UF7113-1AA01-0, 3UF7113-1BA01-0, 0.01% / K
3UF7114-1BA01-0
Current measuring accuracy ± 3% (typically)
Accuracy of the cos phi measurement (cos phi ≥ 0.5) ± 5% (typically)
Accuracy of the apparent power measurement (cos phi ≥ 0.5) ± 5% (typically)
Accuracy of the active power measurement (cos phi ≥ 0.5) ± 10% (typically)
Accuracy of the energy measurement (cos phi ≥ 0.5) ± 10% (typically)
Note on voltage measurement
Caution
Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may require additional cable protection.
Feed-through opening Diameter Design of cable insulation
Current setting 0.3 A - 4 A; 3 A - 40 A 7.5 mm 6 kV according to IEC 60947-1
Current setting 10 A - 115 A: 14.0 mm 6 kV according to IEC 60947-1
Current setting 20 A to 200 A: 25.0 mm 6 kV according to IEC 60947-1
Bus connection
Current setting Is 20 A to 200 A 63 A to 630 A
Connection screw M8x25 M10x30
Tightening torque 10 Nm to 14 Nm 14 Nm to 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug 16 mm - 95 mm
2 2) 3)
50 mm2 - 240 mm 2) 4)
Stranded with cable lug 25 mm2 - 120 mm 2) 3) 70 mm2 - 240 mm 2) 4)
AWG cable 4 kcmil - 250 kcmil 1/0 kcmil to 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement
45 mm / 55 mm modules 120 mm / 145 mm modules
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 4.4 lb.in - 5.3 lb.in TORQUE: 7 lb.in - 10.3 lb.in
0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections

SIMOCODE pro
322 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules

- Solid 1 x 0.25 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x AWG 24 to 14 1 x 0.5 mm2 -
2 x 0.25 mm - 1 mm / 2 x AWG 24 to 18
2 2 4 mm2 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x 0.5 mm2 -
2.5 mm2 / 2 x AWG 20 to 14
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 1 x 0.5 mm2 -
2.5 mm2 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
2 x 0.5 mm2 -
1.5 mm2 / 2 x AWG 20 to 16
1) You will find more information at SIMOCODE pro (https://www.siemens.com/simocode).
2) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19 box terminal.
3) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
4) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 and when
connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.

Technical data of the current measuring modules or the 1st generation current / voltage measuring modules
Mounting
Current set‐ Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using ad‐
ting Is = 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A; 10 A to ditional push-in lugs
100 A
(3UF7100*, 3UF7101*, 3UF7102*,
3UF7110.0-0, 3UF7111.0-0, 3UF7112.0-0)
Current setting Is = 20 A to 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails, screw attachment onto
(3UF7103*, 3UF7113.0-0) the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
Current setting Is = 63 A to 630 A Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
(3UF7104*, 3UF7114.0-0)
System interface for main circuit For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module
Current setting Is 3UF7100*0-0, 3UF7110*0-0: 0.3 A - ´3 A 3UF7103*0-0,
3UF7101*0-0, 3UF7111*0-0: 2.4 A - 25 A 3UF7113*0-0: 20 A to 200 A
3UF7102*0-0, 3UF7112*0-0: 10 A - 3UF7104*0-0,
100 A 3UF7114*0-0: 63 A to 630 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui (at pollution de‐ 690 V 1)
gree 3)
Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6 kV 2)
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Type of current Three-phase
Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit 3)
Operating range 0.1 x Iu ≤ Is ≤ 10 x Io
Accuracy of current measuring (ranging ± 3% (typically)
from 1 x minimum current setting Iu to 8 x
maximum current setting Io)
Typical voltage measuring range

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 323
Technical data
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the current measuring modules or the 1st generation current / voltage measuring modules
Line-to-line voltage / voltage between lines 110 V - 690 V (depending on the setting, either the line-to-line voltage/phase-to-
(e.g.: UL1L2) ground voltage or the phase voltage is displayed)
Phase voltage (e.g.: UL1) 65 V to 400 V
Voltage measuring accuracy in the range ± 3% (typically)
from 230 V to 400 V
Accuracy of cos phi measurement (in the ± 5% (typically)
nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 to 0.8)
Accuracy of apparent power measurement ± 5% (typically)
(in the nominal load range)
Notes on voltage measurement
Current / voltage measuring modules must be Caution
used with a decoupling module in certain Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may require additional
types of power system. See the table in Chap‐ cable protection.
ter Decoupling module (DCM) for 1st genera‐
tion current/voltage measuring modules (e.g.
3UF711.1AA00-0) (Page 133).
Feed-through opening Diameter Design of cable insulation
Current setting 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A 7.5 mm 6 kV according to IEC 60947-1
Current setting 10 A to 100 A: 14.0 mm 6 kV according to IEC 60947-1
Current setting 20 A to 200 A: 25.0 mm UM: 6 kV, IM: 8 kV according to
IEC 60947-1
Bus connection
Current setting Is 20 A to 200 A 63 A to 630 A
Connection screw M8x25 M10x30
Tightening torque 10 Nm to 14 Nm 14 Nm to 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug 16 mm - 95 mm
2 2) 4) 5)
50 mm2 - 240 mm 2) 4) 6)
Stranded with cable lug 25 mm - 120 mm
2 2) 4) 5)
70 mm2 - 240 mm 2) 4) 6)
AWG cable 6 kcmil to 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil to 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 lb.in - 10.3 lb.in
0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 2 x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro
324 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules and the current / voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the current measuring modules or the 1st generation current / voltage measuring modules
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 2 x AWG 20 to 16
1) for 3UF7103 or 3UF7104 to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 or 3UF7104 to 8 kV
3) You will find more information at SIMOCODE pro (https://www.siemens.com/simocode) and in Chapter Short-circuit pro‐
tection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V for 1st generation current / voltage
measuring module (Page 343)
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19 box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 and when
connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
7) Valid for float values
8) A current range of 0.4 - 8 A is necessary for the 3UF7110-1AA01-0 version

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 325
Technical data
15.5 Technical data of the decoupling module

15.5 Technical data of the decoupling module

Technical data of the decoupling module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
• Green "READY" LED
System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an expan‐
sion module, the right interface is exclusively for connection
to a current / voltage measuring module.
Connection cross sections
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro
326 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

15.6.1 Technical data of the digital modules

Technical data of the digital modules

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using
additional push-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current
measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator
panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the type)
• Function Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via internal signal
conditioning), relay outputs all with connection to common potential, freely-
assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star or delta contactor or operating
state status information).
• Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxil‐ • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
iary contacts (relay outputs) • Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current • 5A
• 6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated switching capacity
AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V to 240 V AC / DC,
depending on the type), connected to common potential for measuring proc‐
ess signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated switches, limit
switches, ...), freely-assignable to control functions.
• 24 V DC:
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 327
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the digital modules

• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC:
Cable lengths (single) 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF / km)
Input characteristic —
Connection Removable terminal block with screw connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2 AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

15.6.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules
Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional
push-in lugs
Enclosure width 45 mm
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring
module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel
Rated control supply volt‐ • 24 V DC
age Us (according to • 110 V to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz
DIN EN 61131-2)
Operating range • 24 V DC: 0.8 to 1.2 x Us
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Power consumption DM-F LOCAL:
• 24 V DC: 3 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 9.5 VA/4.5 W
DM-F PROFIsafe:
• 24 V DC: 4 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 11.0 VA/5.5 W
Protective separation according Between relay enabling circuits / relay outputs and electronics
to IEC 60947-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand volt‐ 4 kV
age Uimp
Mains buffering time • 24 V DC: typically 20 ms at 0.8 x Us
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: typically 20 ms at 0.85 x Us, typically 200 ms at 230 V
Relay outputs 2 monostable relay outputs
• Number • Common potential connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner by a
relay enabling circuit
• Function • Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions

SIMOCODE pro
328 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules
Electrical service life of relay out‐ 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)
puts
Relay enabling circuits
• Number 2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits
• Function Fail-safe normally open contacts
• Stipulated short-circuit protec‐ Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate for each relay enabling
tion for relay enabling cir‐ circuit
cuits / relay outputs
• Rated uninterrupted current of 5A
relay enabling circuits
• Rated switching capacity of re‐ AC-15: 3 A / AC 24 V; 3 A / AC 120 V; 1.5 A / AC 230 V
lay enabling circuits DC-13: 4 A / DC 24 V; 0.55 A / DC 60 V; 0.22 A / DC 125 V; 0.11 A / DC 250 V
• Electrical service life of relay en‐ 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)
abling circuits
• Switching rate of the relay ena‐ 2000/h
bling circuits
Connection Removable terminals with screw connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

15.6.3 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

LEDs on DM-F LOCAL Color Meaning
"READY" OFF System interface not connected / supply voltage too low / device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON / system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Flashing green Self-test
Yellow Configuration mode
Flashing yellow Configuration error
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 329
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

"IN" OFF Input not active
Green Input active
Flashing green Fault detected (e.g., cross circuit at input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (wiring error, cross-circuit, configuration error)
Flashing red Group fault (feedback circuit fault, simultaneity condition not satisfied)
"1" OFF Cross-circuit detection Off
Yellow Cross-circuit detection On
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"2" OFF NC contact/NO contact
Yellow NC contact/NC contact
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"3" OFF 2 x 1-channel
Yellow 1 x 2-channel
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"4" OFF Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 50 ms
Yellow Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 10 ms
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"5" OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"6" OFF Cascading input 1, automatic start
Yellow Cascading input 1, monitored start
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"7" OFF With startup testing
Yellow Without startup testing
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"8" OFF Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow No automatic starting after power failure
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
DIP switch for setting safety functions
"SET / RESET" button • Application of parameters set via DIP switch
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)

SIMOCODE pro
330 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

Inputs with safety relay 2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)
function • Supply via terminal T1 and T2 with cross-circuit detection or external supply (static +24 V DC)
without cross-circuit detection
• Functions parameterizable via DIP switch
1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)
• For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a safety-related trip
• Supply via terminal T1 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)
• For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay
• Supply via terminal T3 (static +24 V DC)
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)
• For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch normally-closed contacts
• Supply via terminal T2 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
Cable length (single) 1500 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

15.6.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module

Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

LED display DM-F PROFI‐ Color Meaning
safe
"READY" OFF System interface not connected / supply voltage too low / device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON / system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (PROFIsafe not active, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring error,
device defective)
"1" Yellow PROFIsafe address 1
"2" Yellow PROFIsafe address 2
"3" Yellow PROFIsafe address 4
"4" Yellow PROFIsafe address 8
"5" Yellow PROFIsafe address 16
"6" Yellow PROFIsafe address 32

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 331
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

"7" Yellow PROFIsafe address 64
"8" Yellow PROFIsafe address 128
"9" Yellow PROFIsafe address 256
"10" Yellow PROFIsafe address 512
DIP switch for setting the PROFIsafe address
"SET / RESET" button • Displays the set PROFIsafe address
• Application of the set PROFIsafe address (restart of the module)
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)
Inputs binary • 3 inputs (83, 85, 89) 24 V DC
• Supply via terminal 84 or external supply
(static +24 V)
• Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring process signals (e.g., local con‐
trol station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), freely assignable to control functions
Input with safety relay • 1 feedback circuit input (91/FBC) 24 V DC
function • For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch contacts
• Supply via terminal 90/T
Cable length (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

15.6.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F
PROFIsafe
See "Technical Data" in the Manual "SIMOCODE pro Safety" fail-safe digital modules (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

15.6.6 Technical data of the analog module

Technical data of the analog module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using addition‐
al push-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring mod‐
ule or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connection type: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
• Channels 2 (passive)

SIMOCODE pro
332 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the analog module

• Parameterizable measuring 0/4 mA to 20 mA
ranges
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables of
30 m or longer
• Max. input current (destruc‐ 40 mA
tion limit)
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Input resistance 50 ohms
• Conversion time 150 ms
• Resolution 12 bits
• Open-circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA to 20 mA
• Isolation of the inputs from No
the device electronics
Outputs:
• Channels 1
• Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA to 20 mA
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables of
30 m or longer
• Max. output voltage 30 V DC
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Max. output load 500 ohms
• Conversion time 25 ms
• Resolution 12 bits
• Short-circuit proof Yes
• Isolation of the outputs from No
the device electronics
Connection:
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 333
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

15.6.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0

Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interface For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion mod‐
ule, a current measuring module or a current / voltage meas‐
uring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 residual current transformer with rated 0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A
fault currents IN
• Iground fault ≤ 50 % IN No tripping
• Iground fault ≥ 100 % IN Tripping
Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms to 500 ms, additional delay possible
Connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections
- Connection cross sections, solid: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Connection cross sections, finely stranded with ferrule: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

15.6.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0

Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0

SIMOCODE pro
334 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0

Max. cable length 70 m 140 m 210 m 300 m 550 m
Connectable residual cur‐ 35 mm to 210 mm
rent transformer 3UL23 1)
- feed-through diameter
Type of current to be AC and pulsating DC (type A)
monitored
Measurable line frequen‐ 16 Hz to 400 Hz
cy
Response value current 0.03 A to 40 A
(settable)
Measuring accuracy (rel‐ ±5 %
ative) ground-fault mod‐
ule
Measuring accuracy (rel‐ ±2.5 %
ative) transformer 3UL23
Reaction time (maximal) 100 ms

Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sec‐
tions
• Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
end sleeve 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

1) Technical data residual current transformer 3UL23: See Manual 3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54397927).

15.6.9 Technical data of the temperature module

Technical data of the temperature module

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 335
Technical data
15.6 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the temperature module

• PT100 1 mA (typical)
• PT1000 / KTY83 / KTY84 / NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit detection / short-circuit detection / measuring
range:
• PT100 / PT1000 Open circuit, short-circuit; measuring range: -50 °C to +500 °C
• KTY83-110 Open circuit, short-circuit; measuring range: -50 °C to +175 °C
• KTY84 Open circuit, short-circuit; measuring range: -40 °C to +300 °C
• NTC Short-circuit; measuring range: +80 °C to +160 °C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (T20) < ±2 K, ±1 digit
Deviation due to ambient temperature (as % of measured val‐ 0.05 per K deviation from T20
ue)
Isolation of the inputs from the device electronics No
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro
336 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.7 Technical data of the multifunction module

15.7 Technical data of the multifunction module

Technical data of the multifunction module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional
push-in lugs
Cabinet mounting Minimum distance to be maintained
• from cabinet rear wall for series mounting at side: 0 mm
• from grounded parts at side: 2 mm
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connection to a SIMOCODE pro S basic unit or an operator panel
Digital module function
Control circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand volt‐ 4 kV
age Uimp
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V to 240 V AC / DC, depending on the
type), connected to common potential for measuring process signals (e.g. local control
station, key-operated switches, limit switches, ...), freely-assignable to control functions.
• 24 V DC:
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC:
Cable lengths (single) 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF / km)
Input characteristic —
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable relay outputs (depending on the type)
• Function Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via internal signal conditioning),
relay outputs all with connection to common potential, freely-assignable to control func‐
tions (e.g. line, star or delta contactor or operating state status information).
• Stipulated short-circuit pro‐ • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
tection for auxiliary contacts • Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
(relay outputs)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated uninterrupted current • 5A
• 6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated switching capacity
AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Ground-fault module function

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 337
Technical data
15.7 Technical data of the multifunction module

Technical data of the multifunction module

Connectable 3UL23 residual cur‐ 35 mm to 210 mm
rent transformer - feed-through
diameter
Type of current to be monitored AC and pulsating DC (type A)
Measurable line frequency 16 Hz to 400 Hz
Response value current (setta‐ 0.03 A to 40 A
ble)
Measuring accuracy (relative) ±5 %
ground-fault module
Measuring accuracy (relative) ±2.5 %
transformer 3UL23
Reaction time (maximal) 100 ms
Temperature module function
Sensor circuit
Versions of the cable shielding • Up to 30 m, cable shielding recommended
for the sensor circuit • From 30 m, cable shielding necessary
Versions of the cable shielding
for the sensor circuit
Conversion time 500 ms
Type of connection 2-wire or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor circuit
• PT100 1 mA (typical)
• PT1000 / KTY83 / KTY84 / NT 0.2 mA (typical)
C
Measuring range open circuit
detection / short-circuit detec‐
tion
• PT100 / PT1000 -50 °C ... +500 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• KTY83-110 -50 °C to +175 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• KTY84 -40 °C to +300 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• NTC +80 °C to +160 °C (short circuit)
Measuring accuracy at an ambi‐ < ±2 K, ±1 digit
ent temperature of 20 °C (T20)
Deviation due to ambient tem‐ 0.05 per K deviation from T20
perature (as % of measured val‐
ue)
Isolation of the inputs from the No
device electronics
Connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 5.2 LB.IN to 7.0 LB.IN
0.6 Nm to 0.8 Nm
• Connection cross sections

SIMOCODE pro
338 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.7 Technical data of the multifunction module

Technical data of the multifunction module

- Solid 2 x0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
- Finely stranded with end 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.0 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
sleeve

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 339
Technical data
15.8 Technical data of the operator panels

15.8 Technical data of the operator panels

15.8.1 Technical data of the operator panel

Technical data of the operator panel

Mounting Installation in a cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface cover.
LED displays
• Red / green / yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red blocked: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing green: "No connection to basic unit"
• Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light /
• Flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals
Buttons
• Test / Reset • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module or addressing plug
• Control buttons • For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug, or a PC cable for param‐
eterization purposes
• Rear face For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion module

15.8.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display

Technical data of the operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro
340 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.8 Technical data of the operator panels

Technical data of the operator panel with display

• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
• 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback on the switching state,
e.g. ON, OFF, CCW, CW)
Display Graphic display of current measured values, operating and diagnostics data or status
information.
Buttons
• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
• Arrow keys • Navigation in the display menu
• Softkeys • Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test, reset, operation of memory
module and addressing plug
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug, or a PC cable for parameteriza‐
tion purposes
• Rear face Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module

Note
Product version of the operator panel with display
• For use with the SIMOCODE pro V PN/pro V EIP basic units, an operator panel with display
version *E07* or higher is required
• For use with the SIMOCODE pro V MB basic unit, an operator panel with display
version *E09* or higher is required.

Note
Usage restrictions concerning the operator panel with display
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit: The operator panel with display can only be used with
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit from version *E03*.
• SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP basic unit: An operator panel with display from version *E07*
is required for use with these basic units.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro PN basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• In combination with the SIMOCODE pro MR basic unit, version *E09* or higher is required
when using the operator panel with the 3UF7210-1AA00-0 display.
• When using the "Dry-running protection" function, the following operator panels with
display are necessary:
– 3UF7210-1AA00-0: ≥ E12
– 3UF7210-1AA01-0: ≥ E03
– 3UF7210-1BA00-0: ≥ E04
– 3UF7210-1BA01-0: ≥ E03

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 341
Technical data
15.9 Technical data of the compartment identification

15.9 Technical data of the compartment identification

Technical data of the initialization module

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 902-0AA00-0
Ambient temperature -25 to +80 °C
Rated voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V

Technical data of the Y connecting cable

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 931-0CA00-0, 3UF7 932-0CA00-0,
3UF7 937-0CA00-0
Lengths of system cable / open end of cable
3UF7 931-0CA00-0 0.1 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 932-0CA00-0 0.5 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 937-0CA00-0 1.0 m / 1.0 m

SIMOCODE pro
342 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V for 1st
generation current / voltage measuring module

15.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-
circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V for 1st generation current /
voltage measuring module

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and
690 V
You will find selection tables for fuseless and fused motor feeders in the following manuals:
• Configuration Manual Load Feeders – Configuring the SIRIUS Modular System (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188)
• Configuration Manual Configuring SIRIUS Innovations UL - Selection Data for Fuseless and
Fused Load Feeders (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/53433538)
The manufacturer's declarations can be found in the Industry Online Support:
Declarations, manufacturer (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109741638)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 343
Technical data
15.11 Typical reaction times

15.11 Typical reaction times

15.11.1 Typical reaction times of the SIMOCODE pro C/V device series

Table 15-1 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro C device series

Component Time inputs Time processing Time outputs

Basic unit: Set delay time 30 ms 10 ms
Thermistor: 400 ms -
PROFIBUS: 30 ms 30 ms
Current measurement: 200 ms -
Internal ground fault: 300 ms ... 600 ms + set delay -

Table 15-2 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V device series 1)

Component Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Out‐

puts
Basic unit: Set delay time 5 ms 10 ms
Thermistor: 400 ms -
PROFIBUS, PROFINET: 5 ms 5 ms
when using UM when using UM+ 2), 4)
Current measurement: 300 ms 200 ms -
Voltage measurement: 300 ms 200 ms -
Active power / cos phi: 1000 ms 200 ms -
Internal ground fault: 300 ms ... 600 ms 3)
200 ms ... 600 ms 3)
-
Ground-fault module / external 100 ms 3) -
ground fault
Digital modules:
• 24 V DC version 15 ms + delay time 25 ms
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC version 50 ms + delay time 25 ms
Analog module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature module 500 ms -
DM-F Local ≤ 75 ms + delay time 30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + delay time 30 ms

1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module + 2 expansion
modules
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is set:
• SIMOCODE pro C: Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
• SIMOCODE pro V: Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms.

SIMOCODE pro
344 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.11 Typical reaction times

For the data from and to the PLC, you must also add the times for bus execution time, IM/CP
cycles, and PLC-CPU cycle.
You will find the corresponding information in the device descriptions.
2) 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules
3) + set delay
4) Existing values are valid in compatibility mode

15.11.2 Typical response times of SIMOCODE pro S device series

Table 15-3 Typical reaction times of the SIMOCODE pro device series

Component/control function Time inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic unit: Set delay time 30 ms 10 ms
Thermistor: 400 ms -
PROFIBUS: 30 ms 30 ms
Current measurement 300 ms -
Internal ground fault 300 ms ... 600 ms + set delay -
Multifunction module
• 24 V-DC version 30 ms + delay time 40 ms
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC version 65 ms + delay time 40 ms
Ground-fault module function 100 ms + set delay -
Temperature module function 500 ms -
Star-delta starter - typical switchover time 100 to 150 ms 1)
-
from star to delta

1) QE2 and QE3 must be parameterized to the outputs of the basic unit.
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is set:
Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
In the case of the data from and to the PLC, you must also add the times for bus runtime, IM/CP
cycles, and PLC-CPU cycle.
You will find the corresponding information in the device descriptions.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 345
Technical data
15.11 Typical reaction times

15.11.3 Typical reaction times of the Modbus RTU device series

Component Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Out‐

puts
Basic unit: Set delay time 5 ms 10 ms
Thermistor: 400 ms -
Modbus RTU: 5 ms 5 ms
Current measurement: 300 ms -
Voltage measurement: 300 ms -
Active power / cos phi: 1000 ms -
Internal ground fault: 300 ms ... 600 ms + set delay -
Ground-fault module / external 100 ms + set delay -
ground fault
Digital modules:
• 24 V DC version 15 ms + delay time 25 ms
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC version 50 ms + delay time 25 ms
Analog module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature module 500 ms -
DM-F Local ≤ 75 ms + delay time 30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + delay time 30 ms

1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module + 2 expansion
modules
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is set:
Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms.
For the data from and to the PLC, you must also add the times for bus execution time, IM/CP
cycles, and PLC-CPU cycle.
You will find the corresponding information in the device descriptions.

SIMOCODE pro
346 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Technical data
15.12 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support

15.12 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support

Technical data sheet

You can also find the technical data of the product at Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/).
1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the
Enter key.
2. Click the "Technical data" link.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 347
Technical data
15.12 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support

SIMOCODE pro
348 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
CAx data, dimension drawings 16
16.1 CAx data
You can find the CAx data in the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/).
1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the
Enter key.
2. Click the "CAx data link.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 349
CAx data, dimension drawings
16.1 CAx data

SIMOCODE pro
350 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations

Table A-1 Guide to the abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
AM Analog module
AS Alarm switch
ATEX "Atmosphère explosible" according to ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU
AWG American Wire Gauge
Acycl. Acyclic
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator Panel with Display for SIMOCODE pro
BP Basic Performance
OPO Operational Protection Off
CPU Central Processing Unit
DCM Decoupling module
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP Dual In-Line Package
DM Digital module
DM-F Fail-safe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)
DM-FL Digital Module Failsafe Local
DM-FP Digital Module Failsafe PROFIsafe
TO Torque open
TC Torque closed
DP Distributed peripherals
DS Data record
DTM Device Type Manager
EEx European Norm EXplosion-proof: Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for
use in hazardous areas.
EIP EtherNet/IP
ex Explosion-proof
EM Ground-fault module
EMF Electromotive force
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
F-CPU Fail-safe CPU (controller)
FMS Fieldbus Message Specification
BU Basic unit
BU0 SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
BU1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
BU2 1st generation SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit (for UM)

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 351
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
BU2+ 2nd generation SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit (for UM+)
BU2_MR 1st generation SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU basic unit (for UM)
BU2_MR+ 2nd generation SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU basic unit (for UM+)
BU3 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit
BU3 GP SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit
GP General Performance
GSD Device master data
HFT Hardware failure tolerance
HP High Performance
AUXS Auxiliary switch
I&M Identification and Maintenance
InM Initialization module
IT Isolation-Terre (isolation ground)
IM Current measuring module
MM Multifunction module
MR Modbus RTU
NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OB Organization block
OM Object Manager for PROFIBUS DP slaves for integration into STEP 7
OSSD Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE) that is connected to the machine
control system and that switches to the OFF state if the sensor part is tripped during operation
for the intended purpose.
PB PROFIBUS
PCS Process Control System
PDM Process Device Manager
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PFD Probability of failure of demand: Probability of dangerous failure of a safety function on demand
PFDavg Average probability of failure of demand: Average probability of dangerous failure of a safety
function on demand
PFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Average probability of hazardous failure occurring
each hour
PG Programming device
PL Performance Level
PCS Process Control System
PN PROFINET
PROFIBUS Process fieldbus
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
PZ Pozidriv
FB Feedback
FO Feedback open
TPF Test position feedback
FC Feedback closed
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
GF, CF Group fault, control function

SIMOCODE pro
352 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SFF Safe failure fraction
PLC Programmable logic controller
Th Thermistor
TM Temperature module
DRP Dry-running protection
TOFDT Total one fault delay time (maximum response time when error is present)
TWCDT Total worst case delay time (maximum response time in error-free state)
UM 1st generation current/voltage measuring module
UM+ 2nd generation current/voltage measuring module
TUL Useful lifetime
UM+_TL 2nd generation current/voltage measuring module for dry-running protection
UVO Undervoltage off
LC Local control
Cycl. Cyclic

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 353
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

SIMOCODE pro
354 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer
(standardized 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the
"0/4 to 20 mA monitoring" function block via the analog module.

Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the hardware-based allocation of the PROFIBUS DP
address to a basic unit without a PC / PG.

Analog module (AM)

The analog module provides a way of optionally extending the basic unit with analog inputs and
outputs (0/4 - 20 mA). This makes it possible to measure and monitor any process variables that
can be mapped onto a 0/4 to 20 mA signal. The automation system has free access to the
measured process variables.

Application data unit (ADU)

Modbus application data unit.

ATEX
French abbreviation for "atmosphère explosible" (explosive atmosphere).
Synonym for the ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU.

Basic unit (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are
always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro.
Versions:
• SIMOCODE pro C basic unit: Basic component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series for
PROFIBUS DP. It contains the essential motor control and motor protection functions.
• Basic unit pro S: Basic component of the SIMOCODE pro S device series for PROFIBUS DP. It is
used in combination with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel.
• SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit: Basic component for PROFINET. It is used in combination
with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel.
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit: Basic component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series for
PROFIBUS DP. It contains all functions and requirements regarding motor protection, motor
control, diagnostics, and monitoring.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 355
Glossary

• SIMOCODE pro V basic unit Modbus RTU: Basic component of the

SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU device series for Modbus RTU. It contains all functions and
requirements regarding motor protection, motor control, diagnostics, and monitoring.
• SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit: Basic component of the SIMOCODE pro V PN device series for
PROFINET. It contains all functions and requirements regarding motor protection, motor
control, diagnostics, and monitoring.
• SIMOCODE pro V EtherNet/IP basic unit: Basic component of the SIMOCODE pro V EherNet/IP
device series. It contains all functions and requirements regarding motor protection, motor
control, diagnostics, and monitoring.

Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and indicates the number of transmitted
bits per second (baud rate = bit rate). For example, with PROFIBUS DP, baud rates between
9.6 kbaud and 12 Mbaud are possible.

Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are connected. It has two defined ends.
With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire cable (copper cable) or a fiber optic cable.

Bus segment
PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus segment has at least two stations, one
of which must be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to a bus segment.

Cascading input
Safe, 1-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F LOCAL and DM-F PROFIsafe. Internally, this
input is evaluated like a sensor signal. If no voltage is present, the safety relay trips the enabling
circuits (outputs) in a safety-related way.

Class
Unit for the trip class. Indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip at a
current that is 7.2 times the value of the current setting Is in a cold state (motor protection
according to IEC 60947). If Class 10E is set for SIMOCODE pro, for example, it is ensured that the
(cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds if a current occurs that is 7.2 times the current
setting. The trip class can be set to eight different settings ranging from Class 5E to Class 40E.

Class 1 master
Active station on PROFIBUS DP. It is characteristically used for cyclic data exchange with other
stations. Typical Class 1 masters include PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

SIMOCODE pro
356 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

Class 2 master
Optional station on PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2 masters include:
• PC/PG with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
• PDM (PCS7)
• PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power management).

Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the individual basic units with their current
measuring modules and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator panels. They are
available in various versions and lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.15 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m;
round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 2.5 m).
Notice
Maximum length of connecting cables:
The total length of all cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system interfaces of the basic
unit!

Contactor
Electromagnetically operated low-voltage switch with only one position of rest; it cannot be
manually operated. Contactors can energize, carry, and deenergize currents in a circuit under
normal operating conditions, including operational overload. The contact system consists of
main and auxiliary contacts (NC, NO). Depending on the size of the contactor, the main contacts
can switch several hundred amps while the auxiliary contacts are only rated for control currents
of a few amps.

Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct-on-line starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders. They are characterized by the following important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on / switch-off process (no current flows in the main circuit without
the ON command)
• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the ON status
• Tripping if a fault occurs.

Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The "Control
Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these
different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows parallel administration of up to four different

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 357
Glossary

control stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control commands can be
transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.
• PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control and monitoring station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal).
• Operator panel / operator panel with display, control commands are issued via the buttons of
the operator panel / operator panel with display in the switchgear cabinet door.

Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can be
reset. This is usually 5 minutes. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time extend
the specified time correspondingly.

Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application
is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate
significantly. The power factor (cos phi) is measured by evaluating the phase displacement
between the voltage and current in a phase.

Current measuring module (IM)

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units. The current measuring
module must be selected according to the current setting to be monitored (rated operating
current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and
630 A, with intermediate transformers up to 820 A.

Current limit monitoring

Current/voltage measuring module (UM, UM+)

The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows use of a current/voltage measuring module instead of
a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage
measuring modules also enable:
• Monitoring of voltages up to 690 V
• Calculation and monitoring of power and power factor (cos phi)
• Monitoring of the phase sequence.
Special current/voltage measuring modules (DRP) are available for dry-running protection for
centrifugal pumps by means of active power monitoring.

SIMOCODE pro
358 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

Cyclic redundancy check for checking Modbus RTU transmission errors

Decoupling module
A module for connection between a current/voltage measuring module and the basic unit at the
system interface when voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-grounded
networks.

Device master data (GSD file)

Information on the input and output range, as well as the consistency of the cyclically
transmitted data is defined in the device data file (GSD file), tested with the configuration
telegram from the device and, if appropriate, declared to be valid. The GSD file is used for
integrating the device into SIMATIC S7 or any DP standard master system (automation system).

Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name because the
IP address is permanently assigned to the device name. In the case of PROFINET, this method was
chosen because names are easier to handle than complex IP addresses.
Assignment of a device name for a specific IO device is comparable to setting the PROFIBUS
address on a DP slave.
An IO device does not have a device name when it is delivered. It can only be addressed by an
IO controller once a device name has been assigned to it, e.g. for transmission of the
configuration data (including the IP address) during startup or for exchanging useful data in
cyclic operation.

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and
outputs on SIMOCODE pro V as required. Up to two digital modules can be connected to one
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit. All types can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can
thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs.

DIP switch
Small switch used to make certain basic settings. The abbreviation stands for Dual In-line
Package, a device package with two parallel rows of electrical connection pins.

DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules

The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules are used as safety relays in
EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with EN 418 and in safety circuits in accordance with
EN 60204 (11.98):
DM-F Local digital module:
For applications that require local safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 359
Glossary

DM-F PROFIsafe digital module:

For applications that require decentralized safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF
buttons. A fail-safe SIMATIC controller applies the logical connection between the EMERGENCY
OFF button and DM-F PROFIsafe digital module.
See manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety".

Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an
easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast parameterization.

DP master
A master that works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50170 standard, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS. Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every
DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

DP slave/DP standard slave

A slave that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the
EN 50170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is an information technology communication
protocol. It enables assignment of the network configuration to clients by a server. DHCP was
defined in RFC 2131 and was assigned the UPD ports 67 and 68 by the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority.

Emergency start
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This
allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be used
to:
• Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip
• Influence the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model.

EMERGENCY STOP
Shutdown in case of an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850).
An action in an emergency that is intended to stop a process or motion that would result in a
hazard.

SIMOCODE pro
360 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

EMERGENCY STOP command device

Contact block ("EMERGENCY STOP" mushroom pushbutton according to EN EN 418 (ISO 13850),
cable-operated switch with positive opening contacts according to EN 60204-1) that causes the
process, machine or plant to be stopped when actuated in hazardous situations. This must have
positive-opening contacts, be easy to reach and be tamper-proof.

EMERGENCY STOP device

Protective device that is operated in response to an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850),
EN 60204-1.

Enabling circuit
An enabling circuit is used to generate a safety-related output signal. From an external
viewpoint, enabling circuits act as NO contacts (however, in terms of functionality, safety-
related opening is always the most important aspect). A single enabling circuit, that is internally
redundantly configured in the safety relay (two-channel) can be used for Category 3/4 according
to EN 954‑1 (ISO 13849-1).

EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol, often simply called EIP) is a real-time Ethernet that is
used mainly in automation engineering. EtherNet/IP was developed by Allen-Bradley (belongs
to Rockwell Automation) and was later handed over to the Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association (ODVA) as an open standard. In 1998, a working group of ControlNet International
designed a process for basing the already-published application protocol, Common Industrial
Protocol, on Ethernet. Based on this process, EtherNet/IP was published as an open industrial
standard in March 2000. ControlNet International (CI), the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association
(ODVA) and the Industrial Ethernet Association (IEA) were involved.
Besides PROFINET and Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based fieldbus that is currently
widely spread.

Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the basic units. The following
expansion modules are available:
• Digital module (DM)
• Analog module (AM)
• Ground-fault module (EM, EM+)
• Temperature module (TM)
• Multifunction module (MM).
All expansion modules are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and
removable terminals.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 361
Glossary

F_WD_Time
Monitoring time in the fail-safe PROFIsafe option. A valid, current safety message frame must be
received from the F-CPU within this monitoring time. Otherwise, the PROFIsafe option goes to
the safe state.

Factory settings
The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a device to the default settings to which
they were set at the factory. The factory settings can be restored using either the "TEST / RESET"
button on the basic unit or via SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal).

Feedback circuit
A feedback circuit is used to monitor controlled actuators (e.g., relays or contactors with
positively driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be activated if the feedback circuit is
closed.
Note:
The NC contacts of the relays to be monitored are connected in series and integrated into the
feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a contact in the enabling current path is welded, the safety
relay can no longer be activated because the feedback circuit remains in the open position.

Field/field level
The field or field level of an automation system contains the individual sensors and actuators, as
opposed to the control level, which is located above it in the hierarchy.

Fieldbus
Industrial communication system that connects a large number of field devices such as probes
(sensors), actuators and drives to a control device.

Function block
Defined group of functions that can be freely parameterized by the user and connected to other
function blocks to create a complete feeder-specific logic system. This means conventional wired
control circuits containing auxiliary relays, time relays, etc. can be completely replaced.

Function code (FC)

Identification of a function

Ground-fault module (EM, EM+)

The ground-fault module and the multifunction module enable implementation of a powerful
external ground fault monitoring system in conjunction with the 3UL22 (3UF7 500-1AA00-0)
and 3UL23 (3UF7 510-1AA00-0) residual current transformers. In addition to the internal

SIMOCODE pro
362 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

ground-fault monitoring function which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro can
be extended by an additional and more precise external ground-fault monitoring system.

Ground-fault monitoring
SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation
current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible residual
current or ground fault. There is a difference between internal and external ground-fault
monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring
modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems that are either
grounded solidly or with low impedance. The basic unit uses the total current to detect a
possible residual current / ground-fault current.
External ground-fault monitoring:
The external ground-fault monitoring using residual current transformer and ground-fault
module is normally used for power systems that are grounded with high impedance, or in cases,
in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example, for condition
monitoring. The ground-fault module (EM) or the multifunction module (MM) evaluates rated
fault currents using an externally connected summation current transformer (e.g. 3UL23).

GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD (General Station Description) file that
contains all the necessary information for configuration. You can use a GSD file to integrate a
PROFINET device in exactly the same way as a PROFIBUS device into an automation system
(SIMATIC S7 environment or any DP standard master system).
In the case of PROFINET IO, the GSD file is in XML format. The structure of the GSD file conforms
to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.

I&M data
Identification and maintenance data.
Information stored in a module that helps you to check the plant configuration, to locate
hardware modifications in a plant, or to remedy faults in a plant. I&M data can be used to identify
modules uniquely on the network.

I/O
The term I/O devices is used in automation engineering to refer to peripheral devices, for
example, devices that are connected to centralized controls.

Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro protects and controls the motor feeder, independently of the automation
system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 363
Glossary

feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to the communication bus. This can easily be connected later, if required.

Initialization module
Memory module permanently installed in the switchboard or the motor control center in which
the device parameters of intelligent switching devices are stored.
The initialization module is used in motor control centers with a withdrawable design in which
all functions concerning the motor feeder are fitted in an exchangeable withdrawable module.
The initialization module can be permanently installed in the switchboard and enables backup
of all parameters of a system and completely automatic transmission to a new system, e.g.
device replacement.

IP address
To enable a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet, this device also
requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP address is made up of 4 decimal
numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255. The decimal numbers are separated by a
decimal point.
The IP address is made up of
• The address of the (sub)net and
• The address of the node (generally called the host or network node)

IT system
The IT system (FR Isolé Terre) is a specific type of ground connection for increased fail-safe
protection in case of insulation faults.

Local Human Machine Interface (HMI) for SIRIUS devices

Human Machine Interface for a SIRIUS device or for several SIRIUS devices

Logic modules
Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions are implemented using logic
modules.

Low voltage
All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity that are within a range whose upper limit
in AC systems is generally 1000 V.

MAC address
Each PROFINET device is assigned a globally unique device identification at the factory. This 6-
byte-long device identifier is the MAC address.

SIMOCODE pro
364 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

The MAC address is divided up as follows:

• 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and
• 3 bytes device identifier (consecutive number).
The MAC address can generally be read from the front on the device, e.g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0.

Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent by the master to the
addressed station (slave) and responded to by the slave.

Media redundancy
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports media redundancy according to the Media Redundancy Protocol
(MRP). This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g.
HW Config with STEP 7.

Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and is used for fast reading in or out
of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Note
The SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units up to product version *E08* only
support the 3UF7900-0AA00-0 memory module. The basic units SIMOCODE pro S and
SIMOCODE pro V (PB as from product version *E09*) also support the memory module
3UF7910-0AA00-0.

Modbus address table

Data with similar properties are combined in one of four address tables: Discrete inputs, coils,
input register, holding register

Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is a standard protocol for network communication and uses
the electrical RS485 connection for serial data transmission between Modbus devices in the
network.
Modbus RTU uses a master/slave network in which the entire communication is triggered by only
one master device while the slaves can only respond to the request of the master. The master
sends a request to a slave address and only this slave address responds to the command
(exception: broadcast frames to slave address 0 which are not acknowledged by the slaves).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 365
Glossary

Monitoring functions
The following monitoring functions
• Ground-fault monitoring
• Current limit monitoring
• Voltage monitoring
• Cos phi monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
• Operation monitoring
• Temperature monitoring (analog)
Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor protection and motor control. They can
be active or not, according to the control function selected.

Monitoring the number of starts

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.

Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:
• Overload protection
• Unbalance protection
• Stalled rotor protection
• Thermistor protection.

Motor stop time monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for too long.

Multifunction module
Universal module of the SIMOCODE pro S device series with the following functions:
• Digital module function with four digital inputs and two monostable relay outputs
• Ground fault module function with the possibility of implementing powerful external
ground-fault monitoring in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual-current transformer
• Temperature module function with one input for connecting an analog PT100, PT1000,
KTY83, KTY84 or NTC temperature sensor.

SIMOCODE pro
366 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

Network Time Protocol

Implementation of a TCP/IP protocol for time synchronization in networks. The NTP procedure
uses hierarchical time synchronization, that is, an external clock (e.g. SICLOCK TM or a PC in the
network) is used for synchronization.

Octet
Sequence of bytes. Octet n: string of n bytes.

Offset
A reference within an address table.

OPC Unified Architecture (UA)

OPC Unified Architecture (UA) is the next generation technology of the OPC Foundation for
secure and reliable data transfer and defines access to industrial communication networks.

OPC UA client
An OPC UA client is a user program that accesses process data via the OPC UA interface. Access
to the process data is made possible by the OPC UA server.

OPC UA server
The OPC server provides the OPC client with a wide range of functions with which it can
communicate via industrial networks. SIMOCODE pro V PN provides extensive process data via
OPC UA.

Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.

Operation monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of startups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

Operational Protection Off (OPO)

The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe position and
switches the motor off.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 367
Glossary

Operator panel with display (OPD)

The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative to the standard operator
panel (OP). It displays the current measured values, operating and diagnostic data, status
information for the motor feeder at the switchgear cabinet and the device-internal error log. It
also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and facilitates access to the
system interface from outside the cabinet. Its keys can be used to control the motor and to
navigate the display menu.

Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It contains all the
status LEDs that are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and the external system
interface.

Organization block
Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user
program. The order in which the user program is processed is specified in the organization
blocks.

Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings ranging from CLASS 5E to
CLASS 40E.

Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when tripped
under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the
thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is erased and a new cold start is possible. This means that
many startups can be performed in a short space of time.

PC cable
The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC to the system interface of a basic
unit for device parameterization.
Note
PC cable variant
For SIMOCODE pro V PN, a serial PC cable 3UF7940-0AA00-0 as from product version *E02* or
a USB PC cable 3UF7941-0AA00-0 can be used.

PELV
Protective Extra-Low Voltage. Protective measure against electric shock (formerly referred to as
"protective extra low voltage with safe isolation").

SIMOCODE pro
368 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

In contrast to an SELV circuit, live parts and exposed conductive parts of the equipment may be
grounded and connected to the protective conductor. Safe isolation means that the primary
circuit of the transformer must be separated from the secondary circuit by double or reinforced
insulation. PELV is used whenever operational reasons dictate that live conductors of the low
voltage or bodies of the equipment must be grounded. This is the case, for instance, if
equipotential bonding is necessary to prevent sparking in containers or hazardous areas.
However, owing to the chassis ground, dangerous leakage currents can flow through the body
regardless of the low voltage if a fault occurs in the higher-level power system.
Use of power supply units according to IEC 60536, protection class III (SELV or PELV):
See Chapters "Safety-related tripping", "Fail-safe digital modules (DM-F)", and "DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules".

Performance Level (PL)

Defined by standard EN ISO 13849-1 as "a discrete level specifying the ability of safety-related
control parts to execute a safety function under anticipated conditions." Five performance levels
are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of the probability of a dangerous failure per hour. PL "e"
corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.

Performance Level (PL)

Pozidriv (PZ)
Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.

Process Automation (PA)

Automation of continuous production processes. For instance, it controls production processes
in the chemical industry or in water supply systems.

PROFIBUS
Process Fieldbus, a European process and fieldbus standard defined in the PROFIBUS standard
(EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS). It specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical
characteristics of a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-compatible automation systems and field
devices at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP (= Distributed Peripherals),
FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological
Functions) protocol.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 369
Glossary

PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation guidelines

The PROFIBUS DP / FMS installation guidelines published by the PROFIBUS User Organization
must be complied with when installing PROFIBUS networks. These contain important
information about cable routing and the commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.

PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP (distributed I/Os - decentralized peripherals) protocol. The
main task of PROFIBUS DP is to manage the fast, cyclic data exchange between the central DP
devices and the I/O devices.

PROFIBUS DP interface
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection
on the basic units).

PROFIBUS DPV1
Extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, receive
and test data.

PROFIenergy
Profile for power management in production plants.
PROFIenergy uses the PROFINET communication protocol. It controls the power consumption of
automation equipment in production via a PROFINET network.

PROFINET
PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the open Industrial Ethernet Standard from Profibus &
Profinet International (PI) for automation.
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
• PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus
• Industrial Ethernet, the communications bus for the cell level.
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.

PROFINET IO controller
Device via which the connected IO devices are addressed. This means the IO controller
exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the
controller on which the automation program runs.

PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers.

SIMOCODE pro
370 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

PROFINET IO Supervisor
PG/PC for commissioning and diagnostics.

PROFIsafe
The PROFIBUS safety profile specifies communication between fail-safe I/O devices and fail-safe
controllers. It is based on the standards for safety-related applications as well as on the
experience of PLC users and manufacturers who are members of PROFIBUS International (PI).
The PROFIBUS safety profile has TÜV and BIA (Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the
German Social Accident Insurance) certification. The newest version of the PROFIsafe
specification is the Profile for Safety Technology V1.11 specification, published in 07/2001.

Programmable logic controller (PLC)

Controller whose functionality is stored in the control equipment as a software program. The PLC
comprises a CPU, memory, input/output modules, and an internal bus system. The I/O and the
programming language are oriented toward control engineering needs.

Programming device
A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial purposes. Its distinguishing feature is the
special hardware and software for SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.

Protection functions
The protection functions
• Overload protection
• Unbalance protection
• Stalled rotor protection
• Thermistor protection
• Dry-running protection
operate alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background." They can be active or not,
according to the control function selected.

Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV)

Protective measure against electric shock (formerly referred to as "protective extra low voltage
with safe isolation").
In contrast to an SELV circuit, live parts and exposed conductive parts of the equipment may be
grounded and connected to the protective conductor. Safe isolation means that the primary
circuit of the transformer must be separated from the secondary circuit by double or reinforced
insulation. PELV is used whenever operational reasons dictate that live conductors of the low
voltage or bodies of the equipment must be grounded. This is the case, for instance, if
equipotential bonding is necessary to prevent sparking in containers or hazardous areas.
However, owing to the chassis ground, dangerous leakage currents can flow through the body
regardless of the low voltage if a fault occurs in the higher-level power system.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 371
Glossary

Protocol data unit (PDU)

Consists of function code and the data

Record
Record.

RT communication
As a motor management system, SIMOCODE pro V PN does not have any time-critical
communication functions itself but it does support the PROFINET hardware RT used. The
integrated 2-port switch is therefore used to forward RT data.

SELV
Safety extra low voltage Low electric voltage that offers significant protection against electric
shock due to its low value and insulation. For certain requirements, the highest voltage must be
defined below 50 V AC or 120 V smoothed DC, especially if direct contact with live parts is
permissible. At a nominal voltage of 120 V, the greatest peak value in a smoothed DC system is
140 V, and at a nominal voltage of 60 V it is 70 C.
Use of power supply units according to IEC 60536, protection class III (SELV or PELV):

SFB
System function block A block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like
a function block (FB) in the user program if required.

SFC
System function:
A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like a function (FC) in
the user program if required.

Shared device
Shared device is the function with which an IO device is used simultaneously by two or more IO
controllers.
Use of this function depends on whether the automation system supports the function. It is
configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g. with STEP 7 HW Config.

SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Measure, defined in IEC 61508, for the safety-related performance of an electrical or electronic
control device.

SIMOCODE pro
372 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

The IEC standard defines four SIL levels SIL1 to SIL4, which are defined as the safety
implementations of electrical and electronic equipment. The SIL value describes the specified
safety function in the event of a fault.

SIMATIC
Name of products and systems for industrial automation from Siemens AG.

SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro using the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager)
software. The following options exist:
• SIMATIC PDM as a standalone program
• PDM integrated in STEP 7

SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave with the following characteristics:
• It supports the S7 model (diagnostic interrupts, process interrupts)
• It can be parameterized

SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)

Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE pro object manager are installed on
a PC/PG, SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This enables simple and
universal SIMATIC S7 configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system. It contains:
• The diagnostics and driver modules corresponding to the diagnostics and driver concept of
SIMATIC PCS 7
• The elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for operating and monitoring.
Service packs and hot fixes:
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual updating and improvement. You can download the
current service packs and hot fixes in the Industry Online Support.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Network protocol for monitoring and controlling network elements (e.g. switches).

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 373
Glossary

Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent by the master to the
addressed station (slave) and responded to by the slave.

Stalled rotor protection

If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current threshold), a
defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case, for example,
the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection. The stalled rotor
protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10E after
10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as premature
aging of the motor.

Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be activated according to need and, as
applicable, individually set for each motor feeder. They are already available, work
independently of the selected control function and can be used/activated as optional additions.

Station
A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master, slave.

Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available, which can be read out, for example, with
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) under Commissioning → Service Data / Statistical Data.

STEP7
The basic STEP 7 software is the standard tool for the SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7, and
SIMATIC WinAC automation systems.

Stop category 0
Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the power to the machine's drive
elements.

System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or on the operator panel/operator
panel with display from soiling or to seal it.

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an
analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor measuring circuits
(two-wire or three-wire systems) can be connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully

SIMOCODE pro
374 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Glossary

integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also available for a higher-level
automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, bearings, coolant or gearbox oil. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor
types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with solid, liquid, or gaseous media.

Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).

Terminal block
Insulating part comprised of one or more terminals, insulated from one another, for mounting
on a strip.

Test Position Feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However,
the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.

Thermistor protection
SIMOCODE pro V provides the option of connecting thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for
monitoring the motor temperature.

TN-C system
In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combiné) 1 wire is used simultaneously as a protective
earth (PE) and neutral wire (N).

TN-S system
In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Séparé) the neutral wire and the protective earth are led
separately from the transformer up to the appliance.

Trip class
See "Class".

Unbalance protection
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A
definable and delayable response can be triggered when an adjustable limit has been overshot.
If the phase unbalance is more than 50 %, the tripping time is also automatically reduced in
accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors increases
in asymmetrical conditions.

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 375
Glossary

Universal Current (UC)

Universal current. Property of devices that can be operated with both AC and DC.

USB PC cable
The USB-PC cable is used to connect the USB interface of the PC to the system interface of a basic
unit for device parameterization.

Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage

Voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or
a one-phase network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for AC) or readiness to
start. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely
parameterized and delayed. Voltage measurement is performed using current/voltage
measuring modules.

Win SIMOCODE-DP converter

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE-DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into
SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.

Y connecting cable
Connecting cable with which a connection can be made via the system interface from a
SIMOCODE pro basic unit to both an initialization module and a current measuring module.

SIMOCODE pro
376 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Index

" B
"Park position" for memory module, 85, 88 Backing up and saving parameters, 262
"SET/RESET" button DM-F Local, 330 Basic unit commissioning, 246, 256
"SET/RESET" button DM-F PROFIsafe, 332 Basic units, 24, 63
"TEST/RESET" button, 81, 313, 318 Baud rate, 254
"TEST/RESET" DM-F button, 139 Baud rate (detected), 254
Baud rates, 51
Box terminal blocks, 77
0 Bus and controller monitoring on Modbus, 255
Bus connecting terminal, 77
0/4-20 mA limits, 118
Bus connection current measuring modules / current/
voltage measuring modules, 322, 324
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, 212, 214
3 Bus termination module, 77, 237
3UF50 compatibility mode, 51, 167 Buttons of the operator panel, 340
Buttons of the operator panel with display, 341

A
Accessories, 74
C
Active power limits, 118 Cabinet mounting, 313
Active power monitoring, 39, 46 Cable cross sections, 293
Acyclic services, 51 Cable length (single) DM-F Local, 331
Adapt display settings, 119 Cable length (single) DM-F PROFIsafe, 332
Addressing plug, 75, 83, 164, 222, 228 Cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables, 292
Alarm, fault, and system events, 277 Calculation modules (calculators), 55
Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment Catalog IC 10, 63
identification, 160 Certificates, 11, 296, 309
Alarms according to DPV1, 51 Characteristic curve of a type A sensor, 291
Ambient conditions, 295 Circuit breaker, 40, 50
Analog module, 26, 70 Circuit breaker control (MCCB), 81
Analog module (AM), 137, 141 Clear initialization module data, 154
Analog module connection example, 205 Clear memory module, 121
Analog module 1/2 open circuit, 277 Color coding of connecting cable, 227
Analog multiplexer, 55 Color coding of the connecting cable, 229
Antivalence, 277 Commands, 107, 154
Application description Saving Energy with SIMATIC Commands, operator panel with display, 102
S7 and ET200 S, 11 Commissioning, 289, 300
Applications of SIMOCODE pro, 37 Commissioning and service compartment
Assignment of the removable terminals, identification, 159
SIMOCODE pro S basic units, 187 Commissioning sequence of the
ATEX, 296, 309 SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit, 251
Autoactivation of compartment identification, 153 Commissioning the basic unit, 243
Automatic baud rate detection, 51 Commissioning the initialization module, 159
Common technical data, 311, 312
Communication, 40, 106

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 377
Index

Communication on PROFIBUS / Modbus, operator Connection conductor basic unit, 320

panel with display, 98 Connection conductor SIMOCODE pro S basic
Communication on PROFINET/EtherNet/IP, operator unit, 316
panel with display, 99 Connection conductors analog module, 333
Communication parameters, 253 Connection conductors digital modules, 328
Communication through PROFIBUS, 40 Connection conductors digital modules DM-F, 329
Communication via EtherNet/IP, 42 Connection conductors for voltage measurement
Communication via Modbus, 41 current measuring modules / current/voltage
Communication via PROFINET, 41 measuring modules, 322, 324
Compartment identification, 149 Connection conductors ground-fault module, 334,
Conductor cross sections, 184 335
Conductor cross sections, stripped lengths, and Connection conductors multifunction module, 338
tightening torques of the cables Connection conductors SIMOCODE pro C / pro V basic
for the basic units SIMOCODE pro C and units, 316
pro V, 184 Connection conductors temperature module, 336
for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 185 Connection cross sections decoupling module, 326
Conductor cross sections, stripped lengths, and Connection example for "DM-F Local with cross-circuit
tightening torques of the cables of the 1st generation detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels, monitored start", 211
current / voltage measuring modules, 218 Connection example for multifunction module, 199
Conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening Connection examples fail-safe digital module DM-
torques of conductors of the 2nd generation 120 mm F, 212
and 145 mm current / voltage measuring Connection examples for
modules, 217 SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP basic units, 195
Conductor cross-sections, stripped lengths, tightening Connection examples
torques of conductors of the 2nd generation 45 mm SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB / pro V MR / pro S basic
and 55 mm current / voltage measuring unit, 193
modules, 217 Connection of connecting cables to the system
Configuration error, 277 interface, 226
Configuration information for using an operator panel Contacting of the initialization module, 152
with display and/or a decoupling module, 145 Control circuit digital modules, 327
Configuration instructions for the use of fail-safe Control circuit ground-fault module, 334
expansion modules, 147 Control circuit multifunction module, 337
Connecting a PC to the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU Control circuit of the analog module, 332
basic unit, 251 Control functions, 59
Connecting cable, 74, 164, 222, 312 Control of a soft starter, 81
Connecting cables to the system interface of the Cos phi, 127
operator panel, 230 Cos phi limits, 118
Connecting cables to the system interface of the Cos phi monitoring, 39, 46
operator panel with display, 231 Counters, 55
Connecting Modbus RTU to the Cover, 83
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit, 235 Current limit monitoring, 39, 45
Connecting Modbus RTU to the Current limits, 117
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit via the device Current measuring modules, 66
terminals, 235 Current notes on operational safety, 18
Connecting Modbus RTU to the Current settings, 117
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit via the sub-D Current / voltage measuring modules, 128, 215
connector, 235 Current/voltage measuring module, 26
Connecting the ETHERNET cable to the basic Current/voltage measuring modules, 67, 68
unit pro V, 234 Cyclic services, 51
Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit
and to the current measuring module or to the
current / voltage measuring module, 158

SIMOCODE pro
378 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Index

Display of all pending status information, 122

Display of all pending warnings, 122
D Display of measured values in the measured values
display, 110
Dahlander reversing starter, 40
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant
Dahlander starter, 40, 50, 81
information on the statistics/maintenance
Deactivation of the compartment identification, 153
display, 113
Debouncing time, 138
Display of the operator panel with display, 341
Decoupling module, 127, 133
Display settings, 107
Decoupling module (DCM), 69
Display settings, operator panel with display, 101
Decoupling module connection example, 207
Displays of the operator panel with display, 89, 106
Decoupling module in different power systems, 134
Displays the current status of all device I/Os, 115
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529), 311
DM-F DIP switch settings, 138
Delta configurations, 135
DM-F feedback circuit, 279
Device addressing, 252
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 137
Device I/Os, 106
DM-F safety-related tripping, 279
Device I/Os, operator panel with display, 99
DM-F system interfaces, 139
Device replacement, 164
DM-F test requirement, 279
Device series, 9, 24
DM-F wiring, 279
Device startup when the "initialization module"
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 137
parameter is activated, 153
DM-FL actual and set configuration different, 279
Diagnostics data, 40, 57
DM-FL configuration mode, 279
Diagnostics via LED display, 250, 259
DM-FL cross-circuit, 280
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on
DM-FL simultaneity, 279
the operator panel, 245
DM-FL waiting for start-up test, 280
Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local
DM-FP Prm error, 280
or DM-F PROFIsafe, 245
Door adapter, 75, 165
Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50
Double 0, 280
compatibility mode, 169
Double 1, 280
Diagram of the receive and send data in 3UF50
Dry-running – pump, 284
compatibility mode, 168
Dry-running protection – error, 285
Digital module
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps, 43
DM-F Local, 48
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by
DM-F PROFIsafe, 48
active power monitoring, 316, 320
Digital module (DM), 138
Dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps by
Digital module connection example, 197
means of active power monitoring, 39, 59, 297
Digital module DM-F Local connection example, 211
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection
example, 211
Digital module function multifunction module, 337
E
Digital modules, 69 Electrical life of the relay outputs digital modules DM-
Digital modules (DM), 137 F, 329
Digital modules, fail-safe, 69 EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1, 312
Dimension drawing initialization module, 161 Emergency start, 54
Dimension drawing Y connecting cable, 161 End position, 280
DIP switch DM-F PROFIsafe, 332 Environmental conditions, 308
DIP switch DM-F LOCAL, 330 Error buffer, 107
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter), 33, 39, 50, 81 Ethernet connector, 234
Disclaimer of liability, 11 ETHERNET interface, basic unit, 318
Display, 313 EtherNet/IP, 52
Display elements of the operator panel with Evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor
display, 89 cable, 292
Display of all pending faults, 123 Event memory, 107, 276

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 379
Index

Event memory, operator panel with display, 104 Ground-fault module function multifunction
Example of a tripping characteristic with 3UF710* module, 337
current/voltage measuring modules and Ground-fault monitoring, 39, 45
3UF711*-1AA00-0 1st generation current/voltage
measuring modules, 290
Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 H
operator panel, 268
Hardware fault, 280
Execution ON command, 277
High Performance units, 24
Execution STOP command, 277
Expansion modules, 61, 137
External fault, 54, 280
External ground fault, 280
I
External ground-fault monitoring, 45 Identification, 107
Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE
pro components, 124
F Identification, operator panel with display, 104
Idle time, 254
Factory settings, 122, 270
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual system
Fail-safe digital module DM-F, 139
manual, 239
Fault - bus, 283
Industry Online Support, 11
Fault - EM open circuit, 283
Information and Download Center, 11, 296, 309
Fault - PLC/PCS, 283
Information and standards, 287, 297
Fault - temporary components, 283
Initialization module, 74, 164
Fault antivalence, 283
Initialization module cleared, 160, 281
Fault end position, 283
Initialization module identification data write
Fault memory, operator panel with display, 104
protection off, 154
Fault message, 10
Initialization module programmed, 160, 281
Fault - EM short-circuit, 283
Initialization module read in, 160, 281
Faults, 107
Initialization module write protection for identification
Faults, operator panel with display, 104
data on, 154
Fault-tolerant S7-400H systems manual, 11
Initialization module write protection off, 154
Feedback OFF, 282
Initialization module write protection on, 154
Feedback ON, 282
Initialization module write-protected, 160, 280
Feed-through opening current measuring modules /
Initialization module write-protected, parameter
current/voltage measuring modules, 322, 324
changes not allowed, 160, 280
Firmware update, 271
Initialization module - identification data write-
Flashing, 55
protected, 281
Flicker, 55
Initialization module identification data write-
Frequencies, 311
protected, 160
Frequency, 127
Input characteristic DM-F Local, 331
Frequency measurement, 130
Input characteristic DM-F PROFIsafe, 332
Full motor protection, 39
Inputs (binary), 316, 337
Further information, 296
Basic unit, 320
DM-F PROFIsafe, 332
Inputs (binary) digital modules, 327
G Inputs of the analog module, 332
General performance units, 24 Inputs with safety relay function DM-F Local, 331
Ground fault limits, 118 Inputs with safety relay function DM-F
Ground-fault detection, 26 PROFIsafe, 332
Ground-fault module, 70 Installation, 289, 300
Ground-fault module (EM), 137, 142 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP, 237
Ground-fault module connection example, 201 Installing the measuring circuit cables, 292

SIMOCODE pro
380 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Index

Interface configuration, 254 Maximum configuration with expansion modules

Interface covers, 74 when using an operator panel/operator panel with
Internal ground fault, 281 display, a 1st generation current/voltage measuring
Internal ground-fault monitoring, 26, 45 module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V-
Internet, 11, 296, 309 PB basic units (3UF7010-1Ax00-0) with a 24 V DC or
110 V - 240 V AC/DC supply, 145
Maximum configuration with expansion modules
J when using an operator panel/operator panel with
display, a 2nd generation current/voltage measuring
Just one start possible, 281
module and a SIMOCODE pro V-PB basic unit with a
product version earlier than
E15 / SIMOCODE pro V Modbus basic unit with product
L version E01, 146
Labeling for the address "128", 252 Measured curves, 39
Labeling strips, 76, 83, 87 Measured values display, 106, 110
LED display, 313, 318 Measured values, operator panel with display, 92
LED display decoupling module, 326 Measurement functions, 59
LED display digital modules, 327 Measuring current with an external current
LED display DM-F PROFIsafe, 331 transformer (interposing transformer), 218
LED display ground-fault module, 334 Memory module, 74, 83, 164, 222, 228
LED display multifunction module, 337 Memory module cleared, 282
LED display of the analog module, 332 Memory module programmed, 283
LED display temperature module, 335 Memory module read in, 282
LED displays of the operator panel, 340 Memory module type, 164
LED displays of the operator panel with display, 340 Memory module write protection off, 122
LEDs for device diagnostics (DEVICE, BUS, GEN. Memory module write protection on, 122
FAULT), 81 Memory module write-protected, 283
LEDs for device diagnostics basic unit / operator Menu navigation OPD, 91
panel, 250, 259 Messages, 107, 154
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics, 139 Messages, operator panel with display, 103
LEDs on DM-F LOCAL, 329 Modbus address, 254
LICENSE CONDITIONS AND COPYRIGHT NOTICES, 20 Modbus RTU, 51
Limit monitor, 55 Modification of selected device parameters via the
Limit monitor limit, 118 operator panel with display, 86
List of abbreviations, 351 Module fault, 281
Loading parameters from the initialization Module supply voltage is not present, 281
module, 152 Modules, 63
Monitoring
PLC/PCS, 54
M Monitoring additional process variables via the analog
module, 47
Main display, 106
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted
Main display, operator panel with display, 92
limit monitors, 45, 47
Main entry, 63
Monitoring functions, 60
Main menu, operator panel with display, 91
Monitoring operating hours, stop time, and number of
Mains buffering time
starts, 46
Basic unit, 319
Monitoring the number of starts, 39
Maintenance, 296, 309
More information, 309
Manual Collection, 9
Motor control, 39
Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
Motor control function, 80
Safety, 11
Motor operating hours, 278
Maximum configuration with expansion
Motor protection and motor control status, 112
modules, 145

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 381
Index

Motor protection functions, 287 Operator panel, 26, 65, 83

Motor stop time monitoring, 39 Operator panel adapter, 75, 165
Motor temperature monitoring, 43 Operator panel with display, 26, 66, 86
Mounting, 313 Operator panel with display (OPD) timing chart, 91
Mounting basic unit, expansion modules or the Outputs of the analog module, 333
decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro C/V, 174 Overload, 285
Mounting current measuring modules / current/ Overload and unbalance, 285
voltage measuring modules, 321, 323 Overload protection, 39, 43
Mounting decoupling module, 326 Overload relay, 39, 50, 81
Mounting digital modules, 327
Mounting digital modules DM-F, 328
Mounting lugs, 173, 177, 178 P
Mounting of basic unit and multifunction module,
Parameter changes not allowed in the current
SIMOCODE pro S, 175
operating state, 282
Mounting of the basic unit, 318
Parameter is incorrect ("Event" category), 282
Mounting of the operator panel with display, 340
Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)"
Mounting operator panels (OP), 180
software, 153
Mounting position, 311, 318
Parameterization methods, 242
Mounting temperature module, 335
Parameters, 106, 117
Mounting the current measuring modules, 177
Saving from basic unit to SIMOCODE ES file, 263
Mounting the initialization module in the
Saving from memory module to basic unit, 262
switchboard, 156
Saving to the memory module, 262
Mounting the operator panel, 180, 340
Parameters, operator panel with display, 100
Mounting the operator panel adapter, 269
PC cable, 222
Mounting the operator panel with display, 181
PC cable for connecting a PC / PG, 228
Mounting, wiring, and interfaces of digital modules
Performance characteristics, 39
DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe, 176
Performance Level, 48, 139
Multifunction module, 71
Periodic tests of the device for control of ignition
Multifunction module (MM), 144
sources, 308
Permissible ambient temperature, 311
Permissible number of starts exceeded, 286
N Phase failure protection, 39, 43
No start permitted, 281 Phase sequence, 127
Non-volatile elements, 55 Phase sequence detection, 47
Phase unbalance, 282
Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro C / pro V PB basic
O units, 186
Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP basic
OPC UA, 52
units, 189
Operating data, 40, 56
Pin assignment for SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic
Operating hours monitoring, 39
unit, 188
Operating instructions, 11, 241
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the
Operating Instructions, 289, 300
1st generation current / voltage measuring
Operating instructions and other manuals, 11
modules, 218
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y-
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the
Link, 51
2nd generation current / voltage measuring
Operational Protection Off, 54
modules, 217
Operational Protection Off (OPO), 278
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the
Operator controls and display elements, system
basic unit, 188, 189
interfaces basic units, 81
Pole-changing reversing starter, 39
Operator controls of the operator panel with
Pole-changing starter, 39, 50, 81
display, 90
Positioner, 40, 50

SIMOCODE pro
382 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Index

Positioner control, 81 Recycling and disposal, 12

Power consumption, 314 Relay enabling circuits digital modules DM-F, 329
Power consumption DM-F digital modules, 328 Relay outputs, 315
Power failure (UVO), 281 Basic unit, 319
Power failure backup time basic unit, 315 Relay outputs digital modules, 327
Power failure back-up time digital modules DM- Relay outputs DM-F digital modules, 328
F, 328 Relay outputs multifunction module, 337
Power failure monitoring (UVO), 54 Removable terminals, 217
Power supply to the digital module inputs, 196 Removable terminals for basic unit and multifunction
Power supply to the inputs of the basic unit, 189 module, SIMOCODE pro S, 183
Preventive maintenance, 260 Removable terminals for basic units, expansion
Prewarning overload, 285 modules, or the decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro C/
Product Information System (ProdIS), 296, 309 V, 182
PROFIBUS DP, 51 Repair, 296, 309
PROFIBUS DP connection, 233 Replacing a 1st generation current/voltage measuring
PROFIBUS DP interface, 51, 313 module with a 2nd generation current/voltage
PROFIBUS DP services, 51 measuring module, 267
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-way SUB-D socket, 233 Replacing a 1st generation current/voltage measuring
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation module (UM) with a 2nd generation current/voltage
guidelines, 237 measuring module (UM+), 267
PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V., 238 Replacing a decoupling module, 265
PROFINET, 51 Replacing a DM-F, 265
PROFINET installation guidelines, 238 Replacing the basic unit, 264
PROFINET IO, 51 Replacing the current measuring module, 266
Program memory module, 121 Replacing the current/voltage measuring
Programming manual PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS module, 266
DP to PROFINET IO, 11 Replacing the expansion modules, 265
Protection functions, 59 Required function is not supported, 280
Protective separation acc. to IEC 60947-1 digital Requirements for an interposing current
modules, DM-F, 328 transformer, 219
Protective separation according to IEC 60947-1, 312 Reset, 54, 122
Pulse width modulator, 55 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via
Push-in lugs for screw mounting, 76 commands, 121
Residual current transformer, 26
Response, 10
R Restart, 122
Restoring the factory settings with the software
Rail mounting, 177, 178
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 270
Rated control supply voltage Us, 314
Reversing starter, 39, 50, 81
Rated control supply voltage Us digital modules DM-
F, 328
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp, 315, 319
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp digital
S
modules DM-F, 328 Safety functions, 60
Rated insulation voltage Ui, 315, 319 Safety guidelines, 227
Rated insulation voltage Ui, digital modules DM- Safety Integrity Level, 48, 139
F, 328 Safety-related tripping, 48
Rated motor current, 289 Safety-related tripping "Local", 54
Read and adapt main display, 108 Safety-related tripping "PROFIsafe", 51
Read memory module, 121 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the
Reading out statistical data, 260 basic unit, 263
Reading out the device-internal error buffer, 123 Saving parameters onto the initialization
Reading out the device-internal event memory, 123 module, 153

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 383
Index

Screw mounting, 173, 177, 178 SIMOCODE pro C, 9, 24, 63

Selection and ordering data, 63, 77 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit, 80
Selection tables for fuseless and fused motor SIMOCODE pro S, 9, 24, 63
feeders, 343 SIMOCODE pro V EIP, 65
Sensor circuit multifunction module, 338 SIMOCODE pro V EIP (EtherNet/IP), 10
Sensor circuit of the temperature module, 335 SIMOCODE pro V MR, 64
Sensor circuit wiring, 292 SIMOCODE pro V MR (Modbus RTU), 10
Sensor measuring circuits, 46 SIMOCODE pro V PB, 64
Sensor types, 143 SIMOCODE pro V PB (PROFIBUS), 9
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic SIMOCODE pro V PN, 65
unit, 233 SIMOCODE pro V PN (PROFINET), 9
Sequence for mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro V PN GP, 64
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 175 SIMOCODE pro V PN GP basic unit, 80
Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for SIMOCODE pro V PN GP (PROFINET), 10
SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP / pro V PN GP basic SIMOCODEpro V PN GP, 24
units, 192 Single-phase systems, 136
Service and support, 296 Snap-on mounting, 173
Service and Support, 309 Soft reversing starter, 40
Service data, 40, 56 Soft starter, 40, 50
Set time (= PC time), 122 Soft starter with reversing contactor, 50
Setting IP parameters and device name on a plant- Software, 77
specific basis, 256 Software for configuring and commissioning, 251
Setting IP parameters and EtherNet/IP device name Solenoid valve, 40, 50
with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable, 257 Solenoid valve control, 81
Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name on a Stalled positioner, 278
plant-specific basis, 247 Stalled rotor, 278
Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name with Stalled rotor protection, 39, 43
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) via PC cable, 247 Standard functions, 54
Setting the DM-F DIP switches, 139 Standards, 311
Setting the Modbus RTU address via addressing Star networks, 134
plug, 252 Star-delta reversing starter, 39, 50
Setting the Modbus RTU address with Star-delta starter, 39, 50, 81
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 253 Startup parameter block active, 277
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 244 testing, 294
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing Statistics/Maintenance, 106
plug, 244 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via display, 95
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 244 Status - cooling down period active, 283
Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F Status display, 106
PROFIsafe, 245, 249 Status display for fieldbus communication, 114
Setting the rated motor current, 289 Status DM-F enabling circuit, 283
Setting the time with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), 249 Status emergency start executed, 283
Setting the timer with SIMOCODE ES, 258 Status motor protection/motor control, operator panel
Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1, with display, 94
type of coordination 2, 292 Status test position (TPF), 283
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders Stop time >, 283
for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and Storage clips for labeling strips, 88
690 V, 343 Stripped lengths, 184
Signal conditioning, 55 Support Request, 19
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 80 System interface
SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic unit, 81 Connection of cables, 229

SIMOCODE pro
384 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Index

Connection of system components, 229 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro C / pro S /
Operator panel, 228 pro V PB / pro V MR basic units, 313, 314, 315, 316
Operator panel with display, 228 Technical specifications of the SIMOCODE pro V PN /
System interface analog module, 332 pro V PN GP / pro V EIP basic units, 318, 319, 320
System interface cover, 165, 223, 228 Temperature limits, 118
System interface ground-fault module, 334 Temperature module, 46, 71
System interface main circuit current measuring Temperature module (TM), 143
modules / current/voltage measuring modules, 321, Temperature module connection example, 203
323 Temperature module function multifunction
System interface multifunction module, 337 module, 338
System interface temperature module, 335 Temperature module 1/2 - trip level exceeded, 284
System interfaces, 82, 222, 313 Temperature module 1/2 - warning level
System interfaces decoupling module, 326 exceeded, 284
System interfaces digital modules, 327 Temperature module 1/2 out of range, 284
System interfaces digital modules DM-F Local and DM- Temperature module 1/2 sensor fault, 284
F PROFIsafe, 228 Temperature monitoring, 39, 46, 143
System interfaces DM-F digital modules, 328 Temperature sensor, 26
System interfaces of basic unit, 318 Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F
System interfaces of the operator panel, 340 Local, 208
System interfaces of the operator panel with Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F
display, 341 PROFIsafe, 210
System manual SIMATIC PROFINET System Terminal assignment of the analog module, 204
Description, 11 Terminal assignment of the decoupling module, 206
Terminal assignment of the digital module, 196
Terminal assignment of the ground-fault
T module, 200
Terminal assignment of the multifunction
Technical data of the 2nd generation current / voltage
module, 198
measuring modules, 321, 322, 323
Terminal assignment of the temperature
Technical data of the analog module, 332, 333
module, 202
Technical data of the current measuring modules or
Terminal covers, 76
the 1st generation current / voltage measuring
Test, 54, 122
modules, 323, 324, 325
Test phases, 293
Technical data of the decoupling module, 326
Test Position Feedback (TPF), 54, 282
Technical data of the digital modules, 327, 328
Test trip, 284
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module, 329,
Test verification documents, 311
330, 331
Thermistor motor protection, 39
Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary), 316
digital modules, 328, 329
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary), 320
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital
Thermistor open circuit, 284
module, 331, 332
Thermistor protection, 43
Technical data of the ground-fault module
Thermistor short circuit, 284
3UF7510-1AA00-0, 334, 335
Thermistor trip level, 284
Technical data of the ground-fault
Third-party software components, 19
module 3UF7500-1AA00-0, 334
Through-hole connection up to 200 A, 212, 214
Technical data of the initialization module, 162, 342
Tightening torques, 184
Technical data of the multifunction module, 337, 338,
Time stamping, 54
339
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS, 51
Technical data of the operator panel, 340
Timers, 55
Technical data of the operator panel with display, 340,
Transformation ratio current transformer, 219
341
Trip class, 289
Technical data of the temperature module, 335, 336
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 278
Technical data of the Y connecting cable, 162, 342

SIMOCODE pro
System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 385
Index

Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 278 Win SIMOCODE-DP converter, 167
Trip level cos phi <, 277 Wiring basic units, expansion modules, decoupling
Trip level I < undershot, 277 module, 182
Trip level I > overshot, 278 Wiring digital modules DM-F Local and DM-
Trip level P < undershot, 278 F PROFIsafe, 207
Trip level P > overshot, 278 Wiring of current / voltage measuring modules, 214
Trip level U < undershot, 278 Wiring of current measuring modules, 212
Tripping characteristic, 130, 289 Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for
Tripping conditions of the Exe motor, selected: SIMOCODE pro S basic units, 191
CLASS 10E when using a 3UF710* current measuring Wiring sequence of the removable terminal of the
module, 290 SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units, 190
Truth tables, 55 Wiring the initialization module, 156
Type of ignition protection b, 297 Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit, 192
Types of basic units, 79 Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion
Types of current measuring modules, 125 modules and the decoupling module, 207
Types of protection EEx d, EEx e and EEx n, 287 Working range DM-F digital modules, 328
Typical hardware configurations, 35 Working range of basic unit, 314, 319
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro C, 344 Wrong parameter, 281
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro S, 345 Wrong password, 282
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V, 344

Y
U Y connecting cable, 75
Unbalance protection, 39, 43
USB PC cable, 75, 163
USB-to-serial adapter, 75, 163

V
Variants of current / voltage measuring modules, 127
Voltage limits, 117
Voltage monitoring, 39, 46, 127

W
Wait time, 255
Wait time (default value), 255
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 286
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 286
Warning level cos phi <, 285
Warning level I< undershot, 285
Warning level I> overshot, 285
Warning level P< undershot, 285
Warning level P> overshot, 285
Warning level U< undershot, 285
Warnings, 107
Warnings, operator panel with display, 103
Watchdog, 255
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring), 54
Watchdog time, 255
Web server, 52, 53

SIMOCODE pro
386 System Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1

Function blocks 2
Software for
Industrial Controls parameterization, control, 3
diagnostics and testing

Motor management and Parameters 4

control devices
Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro List of abbreviations A
Operating Manual

06/2021
A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Siemens AG A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Smart Infrastructure Ⓟ 06/2021 Subject to change All rights reserved
Electrical Products
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Important notes................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support ......................................................................................... 9
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app................................................................................. 11
1.4 Support Request ................................................................................................................ 12
1.5 Security information .......................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Current information about operational safety ..................................................................... 14
1.7 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 15
2 Function blocks.................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Function blocks - input and output types, structure ............................................................ 17
2.2 Function blocks - overview ................................................................................................. 20
3 Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing........................................................ 29
3.1 Software packages............................................................................................................. 29
3.2 Software components........................................................................................................ 34
4 Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 35
4.1 Motor protection................................................................................................................ 35
4.1.1 Motor protection functions................................................................................................. 35
4.1.2 Overload protection ........................................................................................................... 37
4.1.2.1 Description of overload protection functions ...................................................................... 37
4.1.2.2 Set current Is1 ................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.2.3 Set current Is2 ................................................................................................................... 39
4.1.2.4 Application example .......................................................................................................... 40
4.1.2.5 Further overload protection parameters.............................................................................. 41
4.1.3 Unbalance protection......................................................................................................... 50
4.1.4 Stalled rotor protection ...................................................................................................... 50
4.1.5 Thermistor protection ........................................................................................................ 51
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring ........................... 53
4.3 Motor control..................................................................................................................... 71
4.3.1 Control stations ................................................................................................................. 71
4.3.1.1 Description of functions of control stations......................................................................... 71
4.3.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors ................................................................................ 74
4.3.1.3 Enables and enabled control command .............................................................................. 76
4.3.1.4 Control station settings ...................................................................................................... 78
4.3.2 Control functions ............................................................................................................... 79
4.3.2.1 Overview and description of control functions.................................................................... 79
4.3.2.2 Application selection, settings and definitions of control functions...................................... 85
4.3.2.3 "Overload relay" control function ........................................................................................ 90
4.3.2.4 "Direct starter" control function .......................................................................................... 91

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 3
Table of contents

4.3.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function .................................................................................... 93

4.3.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function ........................................................ 95
4.3.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function .................................................................................... 97
4.3.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function.................................................................... 100
4.3.2.9 Control function "Dahlander starter"................................................................................. 104
4.3.2.10 Control function "Dahlander reversing starter" .................................................................. 106
4.3.2.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function ........................................................................... 109
4.3.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function ............................................................ 112
4.3.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function...................................................................................... 115
4.3.2.14 "Positioner" control function............................................................................................. 117
4.3.2.15 "Soft starter" control function........................................................................................... 121
4.3.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function ..................................................... 124
4.3.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions ............................................................................................................. 127
4.4 Monitoring functions ....................................................................................................... 129
4.4.1 Ground fault monitoring .................................................................................................. 129
4.4.1.1 Ground-fault monitoring .................................................................................................. 129
4.4.1.2 Limits of fault current measurement................................................................................. 131
4.4.1.3 Internal ground-fault monitoring when using a 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring module........................................................................................................... 133
4.4.1.4 Internal ground-fault monitoring when using a current measuring module or a 1st
generation current / voltage measuring module ............................................................... 135
4.4.1.5 External ground-fault monitoring with a 3UF7500 ground-fault module and 3UL22
differential current transformer ........................................................................................ 135
4.4.1.6 External ground-fault monitoring with a 3UF7510 ground-fault module and 3UL23
residual current transformer............................................................................................. 136
4.4.2 Current limit monitoring .................................................................................................. 138
4.4.2.1 Description of functions of current limit monitoring.......................................................... 138
4.4.2.2 I> (upper limit) ................................................................................................................ 139
4.4.2.3 I< (lower limit)................................................................................................................. 141
4.4.3 Voltage monitoring .......................................................................................................... 142
4.4.4 Cos phi monitoring .......................................................................................................... 145
4.4.5 Active power monitoring.................................................................................................. 146
4.4.6 0/4 - 20 mA monitoring.................................................................................................... 149
4.4.7 Operation monitoring ...................................................................................................... 152
4.4.7.1 Operation monitoring ...................................................................................................... 152
4.4.7.2 Operating hours monitoring............................................................................................. 153
4.4.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring ............................................................................................. 153
4.4.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts ...................................................................................... 154
4.4.8 Temperature monitoring (analog) .................................................................................... 155
4.4.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ........................................................................ 158
4.4.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions .................................................................................. 159
4.5 Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 160
4.5.1 Overview of outputs ........................................................................................................ 160
4.5.2 Basic unit outputs ............................................................................................................ 161
4.5.3 Operator panel LEDs ........................................................................................................ 163
4.5.4 Digital module outputs .................................................................................................... 166
4.5.5 Analog module output ..................................................................................................... 168
4.5.6 Cyclic Send ...................................................................................................................... 172
4.5.7 Acyclic Send..................................................................................................................... 174
4.5.8 OPC-UA send ................................................................................................................... 175

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

4 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Table of contents

4.6 Inputs.............................................................................................................................. 177

4.6.1 Overview of inputs........................................................................................................... 177
4.6.2 Basic unit inputs .............................................................................................................. 179
4.6.3 Operator panel buttons.................................................................................................... 180
4.6.4 Digital module inputs....................................................................................................... 182
4.6.5 Temperature module inputs ............................................................................................. 185
4.6.6 Analog module inputs...................................................................................................... 187
4.6.7 Cyclic Receive .................................................................................................................. 189
4.6.8 Acyclic Receive................................................................................................................. 190
4.6.9 OPC UA Receive ............................................................................................................... 191
4.7 Analog value recording .................................................................................................... 192
4.7.1 Analog value recording description of functions ............................................................... 192
4.7.2 Measured curve, function block and analog value recording application example.............. 192
4.8 Standard functions........................................................................................................... 194
4.8.1 Overview of standard functions........................................................................................ 194
4.8.2 Test / Reset....................................................................................................................... 195
4.8.3 Test position feedback (TPF) ............................................................................................. 199
4.8.4 External fault ................................................................................................................... 201
4.8.5 Operational Protection Off (OPO)...................................................................................... 203
4.8.5.1 Response to positioner control function ........................................................................... 203
4.8.5.2 Response to other control functions ................................................................................. 205
4.8.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO) ....................................................................................... 205
4.8.7 Emergency start............................................................................................................... 207
4.8.8 Safety-related tripping ..................................................................................................... 208
4.8.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring).............................................................. 214
4.8.10 Timestamping.................................................................................................................. 215
4.9 Logic modules ................................................................................................................. 218
4.9.1 Overview of logic modules ............................................................................................... 218
4.9.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O....................................................................................................... 219
4.9.3 Truth table for 2I / 1O....................................................................................................... 222
4.9.4 Truth table for 5I / 2O....................................................................................................... 223
4.9.5 Counter ........................................................................................................................... 224
4.9.6 Timer............................................................................................................................... 225
4.9.7 Signal conditioner............................................................................................................ 229
4.9.8 Non-volatile elements ...................................................................................................... 232
4.9.9 Flashing........................................................................................................................... 235
4.9.10 Flickering......................................................................................................................... 236
4.9.11 Limit monitor................................................................................................................... 237
4.9.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2 .............................................................................. 241
4.9.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4 .............................................................................. 245
4.9.14 Analog multiplexer .......................................................................................................... 247
4.9.15 Pulse width modulator ..................................................................................................... 249
A List of abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 253
A.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 253
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 255

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 5
Table of contents

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

6 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
1.1 Important notes

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s (default: 0) — —

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 7
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Brief description of the responses:

Further information
Please read the operating instructions of the respective components. You can find the operating
instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating instructions (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/man).
You can find further information on the Internet:
• SIMOCODE pro (https://www.siemens.com/simocode)
• Information and Download Center (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16027/catl)
• Siemens Industry Online Support (SIOS) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)
• Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16027/cert)

Recycling and disposal

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

8 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 9
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

10 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

Android iOS

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 11
Introduction
1.4 Support Request

1.4 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

12 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.5 Security information

1.5 Security information

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 13
Introduction
1.6 Current information about operational safety

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

14 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

1.7 Recycling and disposal

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 15
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

16 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks 2
2.1 Function blocks - input and output types, structure
See also Chapter Function blocks - overview (Page 20).

Properties
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for the administration of
various control stations, for the set control function, or for motor protection. Every function
block has a name and can be equipped with inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs are used
for the internal connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the setup of a device-
internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.
The following table shows the possible input types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:

Table 2-1 Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro

Input Example
Plugs (binary) Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary plugs. These are connected to binary
sockets via software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal).
Plugs (analog) Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog plugs. These are connected via soft‐
ware to analog sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal).
Example: 2-byte word for cyclic send data.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Inputs" function block. Control devices and auxil‐
iary switches are normally connected there.
Control data from the communica‐ e. g. from the DP master to SIMOCODE pro
tion bus

The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:

Table 2-2 Output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro

Output Example
Sockets (binary) Function blocks in the basic units may have binary sockets. These sockets are assigned
to binary plugs in the software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal).
Sockets (analog) Function blocks in the basic units may have analog sockets. These sockets are assigned
to analog plugs in the software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with SIMO‐
CODE ES (TIA Portal).
Example: 2-byte word, max. current I_max.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output" function block. The contactors, for exam‐
ple, are connected here.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 17
Function blocks
2.1 Function blocks - input and output types, structure

Message data to the communication e. g from SIMOCODE pro to the DP master

bus
Binary terminal block Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not assigned to a function block (fault,
status, other), e.g. "Status - Device o. k. (in the CFC editor)

Analog terminal block Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not assigned to a function block, e.g.
"Phase Unbalance" (in the CFC editor).

Diagram of basic structure

The following function block diagram (example) shows the basic structure of SIMOCODE pro
with its external inputs and outputs and internally stored function blocks:

6,02&2'( SUR H[WHUQDO 6,02&2'( SUR LQWHUQDO

,QSXWV 2XWSXWV
WHUPLQDOV 6RFNHWV 3OXJV 6RFNHWV 3OXJV WHUPLQDOV
%8 ,QSXWV )XQFWLRQ %ORFN $ %8 2XWSXWV

,1 6WDQGDUG IXQFWLRQ 287

,1 )XQFWLRQ %ORFN & 287

,1 287

,1
6WDQGDUG IXQFWLRQ

&\FOLF
)XQFWLRQ %ORFN % &\FOLF
5HFHLYH 6HQG
%LW %LW
7R '3
&RQWURO )XQFWLRQ
)URP '3 %LW %LW 0DVWHU
0DVWHU )XQFWLRQ %ORFN '
'3 %LW %LW '3

/RJLF )XQFWLRQ

352),%86 '3 352),%86 '3

Figure 2-1 Basic structure of SIMOCODE pro

Connecting plugs with sockets

Note
The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at the factory with the
binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.
The internal wiring (connection between plugs and sockets) is determined by the selected
application. 1)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

18 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks
2.1 Function blocks - input and output types, structure

Note
When you have already installed external wiring, but have not yet parameterized SIMOCODE pro:
If you press a button now, the contactors will not be energized. 1)

1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES (TIA
Portal), all links and interlocks for the reversing starter will be set up in the basic unit.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 19
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

2.2 Function blocks - overview

Overview of the function blocks (alphabetical)

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Analog value recording See Analog value record‐
ing (Page 192)

Analog module 1/2 output See Analog module out‐

put (Page 168)

Analog module 1/2 inputs See Analog module in‐

puts (Page 187)

Analog multiplexer See Analog multiplexer

(Page 247)

Acyclic send byte 0 (1) See Acyclic Send

(Page 174)

Acyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3) See Acyclic Receive

(Page 190)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

20 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Operator panel LED See Operator panel LEDs
(Page 163)

Operator panel buttons See Operator panel but‐

tons (Page 180)

Operation monitoring See Operation monitor‐

ing (Page 152)

Flashing 1 (2, 3) See Flashing (Page 235)

Operational Protection See Operational Protec‐

Off (OPO) tion Off (OPO) (Page 203)

Calculator 1 See Calculators (calcula‐

tion modules) 1, 2
(Page 241)

Calculator 2 See Calculators (calcula‐

tion modules) 1, 2
(Page 241)

Calculators 3, 4 See Calculators (calcula‐

tion modules) 3, 4
(Page 245)

Digital module 1 (2) outputs See Digital module out‐

puts (Page 166)

Digital module 1 (2) inputs See Digital module in‐

puts (Page 182)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 21
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Digital module 1 (2) inputs, See Digital module in‐
DM-F = DM-F Local or DM- puts (Page 182)
F PROFIsafe

Extended protection See Motor control

(Page 71)

Extended control See Motor control

(Page 71)

External fault 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) See External fault

(Page 201)

Flicker 1 (2, 3) See Flickering (Page 236)

Basic unit outputs, SIMO‐ See Basic unit outputs

CODE pro C/V basic units (Page 161)

Basic unit outputs, SIMO‐ See Basic unit outputs

CODE pro S basic unit (Page 161)

Basic unit inputs See Basic unit inputs

(Page 179)

Limit monitor 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) See Limit monitor

(Page 237)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

22 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Emergency start See Emergency start
(Page 207)

Non-volatile ele‐ See Non-volatile ele‐

ment 1 (2, 3, 4) ments (Page 232)

OPC UA send data 0 (1) See OPC-UA send

(Page 175)

OPC UA receive data 0 (1, 2/3) See OPC UA Receive

(Page 191)

Pulse width modulator See Pulse width modula‐

tor (Page 249)

Reset 1 (2, 3) See Test / Reset

(Page 195)

TPF (test position feedback) See Test position feed‐

back (TPF) (Page 199)

Protection/Control See Motor control

(Page 71)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 23
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Signal condition‐ See Signal conditioner
ing 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) (Page 229)

Safe tripping, DM-F Local See Safety-related trip‐

ping (Page 208)

Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe See Safety-related trip‐

ping (Page 208)

Control stations See Control stations

(Page 71)

Current limits See Current limit moni‐

toring (Page 138)

Test 1 (2) See Test / Reset

(Page 195)

Thermistor See Thermistor protec‐

tion (Page 51)

Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) See Timer (Page 225)

Temperature module 1/2 in‐ See Temperature module

puts inputs (Page 185)

Dry-running protection by ac‐ See Dry-running protec‐

tive-power monitoring tion of centrifugal pumps
by active power monitor‐
ing (Page 53)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

24 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Monitoring 0/4-20 mA (ana‐ See 0/4 - 20 mA monitor‐
log module 1, 2) ing (Page 149)

Cos phi monitoring See Cos phi monitoring

(Page 145)

Ground-fault monitoring with See External ground-

ground-fault mod‐ fault monitoring with a
ule 3UF7500 3UF7500 ground-fault
module and 3UL22 differ‐
ential current transform‐
er (Page 135)
Ground-fault monitoring with See External ground-
ground-fault mod‐ fault monitoring with a
ule 3UF7510 3UF7510 ground-fault
module and 3UL23 resid‐
ual current transformer
(Page 136)

Power monitoring See Active power moni‐

toring (Page 146)

Monitoring interval for man‐ See Monitoring interval

datory testing for mandatory testing
(Page 158)
Voltage monitoring See Voltage monitoring
(Page 142)

Temperature monitoring 1/2 See Temperature moni‐

toring (analog)
(Page 155)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 25
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Undervoltage off (UVO) See Power failure moni‐
toring (UVO) (Page 205)

Truth table 3I/ See Truth table for 3I / 1O

1O (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11) (Page 219)

Truth table 2I/1O (7, 8) See Truth table for 2I / 1O

(Page 222)

Truth table 5I/2O (9) See Truth table for 5I / 2O

(Page 223)

Watchdog See Watchdog (Bus mon‐

itoring, PLC/PCS monitor‐
ing) (Page 214)

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) See Counter (Page 224)

Time stamp See Timestamping

(Page 215)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

26 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Function block View in SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) Section

Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/9, See Cyclic Send
10/10) (Page 172)

Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3, See Cyclic Receive

4/5) (Page 189)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 27
Function blocks
2.2 Function blocks - overview

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

28 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics
and testing 3
3.1 Software packages

Software overview
With the communication-capable switching devices, the user-friendliness of the
parameterization software and good system integration (in other words, the ability to integrate
optimally and quickly into the most diverse plant configurations and process automation
systems) also play an important role alongside the device functionalities and the hardware
configuration.
For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suitable software tools for consistent, time-
saving parameter assignment, configuring and diagnostics:
• SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) for totally integrated commissioning and service
• SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library for total integration into PCS 7

SIMOCODE ES in the TIA Portal

SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) is the central software for configuration, commissioning, operation
and diagnostics of SIMOCODE pro with PROFIBUS, PROFINET, EtherNet/IP and Modbus RTU.
SIMOCODE ES Version V16 is available as a powerful successor to Version 2007, which is based
on the central engineering framework Totally Integrated Automation Portal (TIA Portal).
SIMOCODE ES V16 is integrated seamlessly when further TIA Portal-based software such as
STEP 7 or WinCC is available, thus enabling users to achieve a consistent, efficient and intuitive
solution for all automation tasks.
However, use of SIMOCODE ES V16 as stand-alone software also provides these advantages.
You can choose between two versions of SIMOCODE ES:
• SIMOCODE ES Basic
• SIMOCODE ES Professional
From V15, the powerful SIMOCODE ES Basic tool for commissioning or maintenance personnel
is available for downloading free of charge in the Siemens Industry Online Support.
SIMOCODE ES Professional is a perfect tool for engineers or configuration engineers due to its
extended scope of functions and integrated graphic editor. Unlike the Basic version,
SIMOCODE ES Professional also permits parameter assignment and diagnostics via PROFIBUS/
PROFINET/Ethernet. The display of all operating, service and diagnostic data supplies important
information about the current state of the motor and plant at all times – everywhere on
PROFIBUS/PROFINET/Ethernet.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 29
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
3.1 Software packages

More information
• Industry Mall (see Parameter assignment, configuration and visualization for SIRIUS (https://
mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Products/10026777))
• Industry Mall (see Technical specifications (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
ps/16716/td))
• Software download:
– SIMOCODE ES V16 (TIA Portal), basic functional scope including Professional Trial License
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109771523)
– SIMOCODE ES V15.1 (TIA Portal), basic functional scope including Premium Trial License
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763898)
– SIMOCODE ES 2007 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750623).

SIMOCODE ES V16 Basic Professional

Access via the local interface on the device ✓ ✓
Parameter assignment in list form ✓ ✓
Parameter assignment via expert list - ✓
Bulk engineering - ✓
Working with libraries ✓ ✓
Printing of parameters in list form ✓ ✓
Operator control ✓ ✓
Diagnostics ✓ ✓
Test ✓ ✓
Service data ✓ ✓
Analog value recording 1)
✓ ✓
Trend display of measured values - ✓
Parameter assignment with convenient graphical display - ✓
Parameter assignment via the integrated graphic editor (CFC-based) - ✓
Printing of diagrams - ✓
Parameter comparison - ✓
Access via PROFIBUS / PROFINET / Ethernet - ✓
Teleservice via MPI - ✓
Routing 2)
- ✓
Firmware update basic units 1) ✓ ✓

1) For SIMOCODE pro V

2) See Requirements for using the routing function with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109738745)

Working with libraries

Users can create copy templates for SIMOCODE pro device configuration and can manage them
in global or project libraries.
This way, individual modules, diagrams and complete device configurations can be saved as
reusable elements for frequently occurring tasks.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

30 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
3.1 Software packages

Integrated graphic editor

The graphic editor is part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. It is based on the Continuous Function
Chart (CFC) and adds a powerful tool to the parameterizing interface that enables easy
parameterization of devices by drag & drop. Furthermore, all the parameters can also be edited
directly in the graphic editor. Extremely compact documentation of all configured parameters is
possible, as is the graphic online presentation of the configured device functions including all
signal states during operation.

Online functions for commissioning and diagnostics

To this end, SIMOCODE ES provides powerful functions for commissioning and diagnostics of
motor feeders. Besides a detailed display of status information and the causes of faults, all
available measurement and statistics data can be retrieved online. Access to the fault and event
memory and also to analog values recorded on the device, e.g. current or voltage, is also
possible.

Trend display of measured values

With this online function, SIMOCODE ES can present the trends of different measured values. It
is thus possible, for example, to record and evaluate the startup behavior of a motor or its
behavior in different load conditions.

Integration into the central engineering framework

When using other TIA Portal-based software such as STEP 7 or WinCC, for example, the
configuration for devices and networks for all components used is created in a standardized
environment.

Teleservice via MPI

The Professional version supports the use of MPI Teleservice (comprising the Teleservice
software and various Teleservice adapters) for remote diagnostics of the devices. This facilitates
diagnostics and maintenance, and it shortens response times for service purposes.

SIMOCODE ES 2007
SIMOCODE ES 2007 is the previous version of the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software for
SIMOCODE pro. It only includes the basic units for PROFIBUS and PROFINET.
SIMOCODE ES 2007 provides the SIMOCODE pro motor management system with a user-friendly
and clear user interface with which to configure, operate, monitor and test SIMOCODE pro in the
field or from a central location via PROFIBUS. By displaying all operating, service and diagnostic
data, SIMOCODE ES supplies important information on whether maintenance work is required
or, in the event of a fault, helps prevent faults or localize and rectify them once they have
occurred.
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing parameters online (even during
operation).
In addition, the graphical editor enables extremely ergonomic and user-friendly
parameterization by dragging and dropping: Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be linked
graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can be described in detail and device
parameterization can be documented graphically using comments. This speeds up
commissioning and simplifies plant documentation. The optimized user interface and
integrated graphic editor are used to assign parameters.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 31
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
3.1 Software packages

Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, teleservice via MPI, STEP 7 object
manager.
The following software packages are available:
• SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
• SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
• SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium
See also Software components (Page 34) for more information.
You will find a demo version and the latest updates on the Internet: SIMOCODE ES 2007 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750623)

OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager

The OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager is a component of SIMOCODE ES 2007. When
SIMOCODE ES and OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC / programming device, SIMOCODE ES
can be called directly from STEP 7 V5.x hardware configuration. This enables simple and
universal SIMATIC S7 configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library is used to simply and conveniently integrate
SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function
block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks that correspond to the diagnostic and
driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 and the elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for
operating and monitoring. The application is integrated by graphic interconnection using the
CFC Editor.
Signal processing and technological functions of the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library
are based on the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (Driver Blocks, Technological Blocks) and are
optimized for SIMOCODE pro. Users who until now have configured motor feeders in
conventional technology via signal blocks and motor or valve blocks can thus easily change to
the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library allows the user to run the required engineering software
on one engineering station (single license) including the runtime software for executing the AS
modules in one automation system (single license). If the AS blocks are to be used in additional
automation systems, the corresponding number of runtime licenses are required, which are
supplied without a data medium.

Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual updating and improvement.
You can download the current service packs and hot fixes from SIMOCODE pro (https://
www.siemens.com/simocode) → Download Software.

Note
Observe the respective system versions!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

32 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
3.1 Software packages

GSD file
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a standard slave into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP master
system (automation system). The latest version is on the Internet at GSD file (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14280/dl). Further information on integrating DP
slaves can be found in the automation system documentation.

Win SIMOCODE-DP converter

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE-DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into
SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
See SIMOCODE ES 2007 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750623).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 33
Software for parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
3.2 Software components

3.2 Software components

Selection and ordering data: See Catalog IC10 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109771990).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

34 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters 4
4.1 Motor protection

4.1.1 Motor protection functions

Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection", "Stalled Rotor
Protection", and "Thermistor Protection" are described in the following Chapters:
Overload protection (Page 37)
Unbalance protection (Page 50)
Stalled rotor protection (Page 50)
Thermistor protection (Page 51).

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload protection,"
"Unbalance protection," and "Stalled rotor protection") with optional parameter settings and
events.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 35
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO

2YHUORDG 3URWHFWLRQ
4(
6HW FXUUHQW , V 4(
7ULSSLQJ 4(
7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR
DFWLYH 4(
4(
7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR
SULPDU\

7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR
VHFRQGDU\

6HW FXUUHQW , V

&XUUHQW IURP 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR

FXUUHQW DFWLYH
(YHQW:DUQLQJ)DXOW
PHDVXULQJ
PRGXOH 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR 2YHUORDG
SULPDU\ 2YHUORDG SKDVH IDLOXUH
3UHZDUQLQJ RYHUORDG
7UDQVIRUPDWLRQ UDWLR
VHFRQGDU\ &RROLQJ GRZQ SHULRG DFWLYH
3DXVH WLPH DFWLYH
&ODVV

5HVSRQVH DW SUHZDUQLQJ OHYHO VHH

WDEOH
UHVSRQVH
7LPH WR WULS DQDORJ
([WHQGHG SDUDPHWHUV 7KHUPDO PRWRU PRGHO DQDORJ

5HVHW PDQXDO DXWR 5HPDLQLQJ FRROLQJ GRZQ SHULRG

DQDORJ
7\SH RI ORDG SK SK /DVW WULS FXUUHQW DQDORJ

3DXVH WLPH

&RROLQJ GRZQ SHULRG

VHH
5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO WDEOH
UHVSRQVH

8QEDODQFH 3URWHFWLRQ

VHH
8QEDODQFH SURWHFWLRQ OHYHO WDEOH 8QEDODQFH
UHVSRQVH

6WDOOHG 5RWRU 3URWHFWLRQ

VHH
6WDOOHG URWRU SURWHFWLRQ OHYHO WDEOH 6WDOOHG URWRU
UHVSRQVH

Figure 4-1 "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," and
"Stalled Rotor Protection")

1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing transformers with

SIMOCODE pro V PB, version *E03* and higher
2) If tripped due to overload

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

36 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Adjustable responses "Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," and "Stalled Rotor Protection"

Response Prewarning level "over‐ Trip level "overload pro‐ Level "unbalance" Level "stalled rotor
load protection" tection" protection"
deactivated X X X X
signal X X X X
warn X X X X
trip — X X X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) — 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Note
Deactivate Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-phase!

4.1.2 Overload protection

4.1.2.1 Description of overload protection functions

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings ranging from Class 5E to
Class 40E. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the
motor, improving utilization of the motor capacity. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model" and
time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an overload
trip, the remaining cooling down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current is saved in
the case of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or two
speeds (Is1 and Is2).
The rated motor current is usually set with set current Is1. This value can be found on the type
plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value.
The set current Is2 is only required for motors with two speeds to guarantee the suitable
overload protection for the higher speed too. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.

4.1.2.2 Set current Is1

Setting ranges for current setting ls1

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 37
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Current setting Is1 when using a current measuring module or a 1st generation current / voltage
measuring:
• 0.3 to 3 A (default: 0.3)
• 2.4 to 25 A
• 10 to 100 A
• 20 to 200 A
• 63 to 630 A
Current setting Is1 when using a 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module:
• 0.3 to 4 A (default: 0.3)
• 3 to 40 A
• 10 to 115 A
• 20 to 200 A
• 63 to 630 A

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer. Activate the checkbox if you wish
to use this option. The parameterized current setting continues to correspond here to the actual
rated motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and
the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.

Note
This parameter is only available when using SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit above version *E03*.

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).

Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

38 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

4.1.2.3 Set current Is2

Setting ranges for current setting Is2

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.
Current setting Is2 when using a current measuring module or a 1st generation current / voltage
measuring module:
• 0.3 to 3 A (default: 0.3)
• 2.4 to 25 A
• 10 to 100 A
• 20 to 200 A
• 63 to 630 A
Current setting Is1 when using a 2nd generation current / voltage measuring module:
• 0.3 to 4 A (default: 0.3)
• 3 to 40 A
• 10 to 115 A
• 20 to 200 A
• 63 to 630 A

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized current setting
continues to correspond here to the actual rated motor current and does not have to be
converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and
the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.

Note
This parameter is only available when using SIMOCODE pro V PB above version *E03*.

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 39
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).

Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set for
each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers is/are
used for each speed.

4.1.2.4 Application example

Example 1:
Rated motor current: 700 A.
A 3UF18 68‑3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is looped once through a current measuring
module (0.3 A to 3 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 1; Is = 700 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
• Set current Is1: 700 A
• Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 820
• Is1 Transformation ratio secondary: 1

Example 2:
Rated motor current: 225 A.
A 3UF1868‑3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is looped twice through a current measuring
module (0.3 A to 3 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 2; Is = 225 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
• Set current Is1: 225 A
• Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 820
• Is1 Transformation ratio secondary: 2

Example 3:
The motor cable is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3 to 3 A, for a motor
with a rated current of 0.25 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 1 : 2; Is = 0.25 A

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

40 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Settings (primary and secondary)

• Set current Is1: 0.25 A
• Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 1
• Is1 Transformation ratio secondary: 2

4.1.2.5 Further overload protection parameters

Class
The Class (trip class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from cold
at 7.2 times the current setting Is (motor protection to IEC 60947). SIMOCODE pro meets the
requirements of tolerance band E according to IEC / EN 60947-4-1 in respect of the accuracy of
the tripping times. Please note that with startups > "Class 10E", the permissible AC3 current of
the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must select a larger contactor.

Overload characteristics for 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules (e.g.
3UF7110-1AA01-0) and dry-running protection (e.g. 3UF712.-1.A01-0)
The following graph shows the trip classes 5E, 7E, 10E (d), 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 35E and 40E for
3-pole balanced loads:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 41
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

10000
Time-current characteristics with three

Tripping time [s]

pole load based on cold state at any
5000 setting:
3UF71.0-1AA01-0 UM+ 0.3-4 A
3UF71.1-1AA01-0 UM+ 3-40 A
3UF71.2-1AA01-0 UM+ 10-115 A
3UF71.3-1AA01-0 UM+ 20-200 A
3UF71.3-1BA01-0 UM+ 20-200 A
3UF71.4-1BA01-0 UM+ 63-630 A
1000 with three pole load and current higher
then 3 times of current setting the
tolerance of the tripping time
500
is ± 20 % according to IEC 60079-14

100

CLASS
40(
35(
30(
10 25(
20(

15(
5
10(

7(
5(

0,5

0,1
0.6 0.8 1 1.5 2 5 10 15 20
Ie
Figure 4-2 Trip classes for 3-pole loads, 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules

The following graph shows the trip classes 5E, 7E, 10E (d), 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 35E, and 40E for
2-pole loads:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

42 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

10000

Tripping time [s]

Time-current characteristics with two
pole load based on cold state at any
5000 setting:
3UF71.0-1AA01-0 UM+ 0.3-4 A
3UF71.1-1AA01-0 UM+ 3-40 A
3UF71.2-1AA01-0 UM+ 10-115 A
3UF71.3-1AA01-0 UM+ 20-200 A
3UF71.3-1BA01-0 UM+ 20-200 A
3UF71.4-1BA01-0 UM+ 63-630 A
1000 with two pole load and current higher
then 3 times of current setting the
tolerance of the tripping time
500 is ± 20 % according to IEC 60079-14

100

10
CLASS
40(
35(
30(
5
25(
20(

15(

10(

7(
1
5(

0,5

0,1
0.6 0.8 1 1.5 2 5 10 15 20
Ie
Figure 4-3 Trip classes for 2-pole loads, 2nd generation current / voltage measuring modules

Overload characteristics for current measuring modules, 1st generation current / voltage
measuring modules (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA00-0) and 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring modules in compatibility mode (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA01-0)
The following graph shows the trip classes 5E, 10E (d), 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 35E and 40E for 3-
pole balanced loads:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 43
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

E
E
E
E
E

Figure 4-4 Trip classes for 3-pole balanced loads, current measuring modules and 1st generation
current / voltage measuring modules

The following graph shows the trip classes 5E, 10E (d), 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 35E, and 40E for 2-
pole loads:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

44 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

E
E
E
E
E

Figure 4-5 Trip classes for 2-pole loads, current measuring modules and 1st generation current / voltage
measuring modules

Note
Type of tripping characteristic
If a 1st generation 3UF711*-1AA00-0 current / voltage measuring module is configured in a
parameterization, but a 2nd generation 3UF711*-1AA01-0 current / voltage measuring module
is used, the tripping characteristic remains that of the 1st generation current / voltage
measuring module.
Merely replacing the measuring module hardware does not change the tripping behavior.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 45
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Note
Tripping characteristics
The latest tripping characteristics for SIMOCODE pro can be found in Siemens Industry Online
Support (SIOS) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps). Enter the search term
"3UF7" and filter for "characteristic" in the search area.

Response to overload
The SIMOCODE pro response to overload can be additionally adjusted here.
Further information: See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes
(Page 7) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Motor protection functions (Page 35).

Note
With motors for Ex e applications, the response must remain set to "trip"!

Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can be
reset. This is usually 5 minutes. The thermal memory (motor model – see below) is deleted after
the cooling down period elapses. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Range: 60 to 6553.5 s (default: 300 s).

Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

"At operating temperature" state

In the "at operating temperature" state, the tripping times are reduced by the factors listed in the
table. These factors apply to 3-pole balanced loads, Class 5E to Class 40E.

Table 4-1 Factors for trip times at operating temperature for 2nd generation current/voltage measuring modules

x Is Preload as a percentage of the current setting Is

20 40 60 80 100
2 0.97 0.89 0.75 0.54 0.24
3 0.97 0.88 0.73 0.51 0.22
4 0.97 0.88 0.72 0.51 0.22
5 0.97 0.88 0.72 0.51 0.21
6 0.96 0.87 0.72 0.50 0.21
7.2 0.96 0.88 0.72 0.50 0.22
8 0.97 0.87 0.72 0.50 0.22
9 0.98 0.87 0.72 0.51 0.21

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

46 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

x Is Preload as a percentage of the current setting Is

10 0.97 0.87 0.74 0.50 0.21

When the rated motor current (Ie) is at 100%, the value "thermal motor model" is 79% in a steady
state, and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.

Table 4-2 Factors for trip times at operating temperature for current measuring modules and 1st generation current/voltage
measuring modules and 2nd generation current/voltage measuring modules in compatibility mode.

x Is Preload as a percentage of the current setting Is

0 20 40 60 80 100
2 1 0.88 0.74 0.58 0.40 0.19
4 1 0.85 0.69 0.52 0.35 0.16
6 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.34 0.15
7.2 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.33 0.15
8 1 0.84 0.67 0.51 0.33 0.15

For the 1st generation, the following applies:

When the rated motor current (Is) is at 100%, the value "thermal motor model" is 87% in a steady
state and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.

Example of 1st generation devices:

You have operated and switched off a motor with current setting 100 % Is.
You immediately switch the motor back on. This causes an overload trip with 2 x Is, Class 10E.
• Tripping time in cold state: approximately 40 s (acc. to tripping characteristic)
• Factor for tripping time with preload 100 % Is: 0.19 (see Table)
• Reduced tripping time: 0.19 x 40 s = 7.6 s.

Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when tripped
under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the
thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is erased and a new cold restart is possible. This means that
many startups can be performed in a short space of time.
The following schematic shows the cooling down response with and without pause time:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 47
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Motor
ON

OFF
t
Thermal memory (motor model)
Without pause time

100 % Trip level

Overload trip

With pause time

100 % Trip level

No overload trip

Pause time t
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
elapses
Figure 4-6 Cooling down response with and without pause time

Note
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

Pause time: 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 0)

Load type
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load. For a 1-phase
type of load, the internal ground-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must be
deactivated. Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

Load type 1-phase, 3-phase (default)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

48 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Note
Decoupling module
When using a 1st generation current / voltage measuring module a decoupling module may be
necessary.
See table "Decoupling module requirements for star networks" in Chapter 8.6 "Decoupling
module (DCM) for 1st generation current/voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF711.1AA000)"
in SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Delay prewarning
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) defines the length of time for which the prewarning level
(1.15 x Is) must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro will execute the desired
response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an
unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Is.

Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto," the "Overload," "Overload + Unbalance," and
"Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically:
• If the cooling time has expired
• If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting value
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:
• "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit
• "TEST/RESET" button on operator panel
• Standard functions "Reset"
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using
reset via bus.

Reset: Manual, Auto (default: manual).

WARNING
Unexpected restart of the motor
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor restart
may cause personal injury or damage to property.

See also
Tripping characteristics 3UF7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/search?
search=3UF7&type=Characteristic&lc=en-WW)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 49
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

4.1.3 Unbalance protection

Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A
definable and delayable response can be triggered when an adjustable limit has been overshot.
If the phase unbalance is more than 50 %, the tripping time is also automatically reduced in
accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors increases
in asymmetrical conditions.

Phase balance formula

The phase unbalance is calculated using the following equation:

PD[>,PD[,DYJ@>,PLQ,DYJ@ ,,,

3KDVHXQEDODQFH ,DYJ
,DYJ

Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react is set here.

Level: 0 to 100 % (default: 40 %)

Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase unbalance:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7) and Table
"Responses" in Chapter Motor protection functions (Page 35).

Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before SIMOCODE pro
executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response.

Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).

4.1.4 Stalled rotor protection

Description
If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current threshold), a
defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case, for example,
the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection. The stalled rotor
protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10E after
10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as premature
aging of the motor.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

50 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Level
When the stalled rotor level is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the selected
response.
Level: 0 to 1020 % of ls (default: 0).

Note
Rounding
Intermediate values are automatically rounded.

Response
You can define the response to overshoot of the stalled rotor level here: See also "Tables of
responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7) and Table "Responses" in
Chapter Motor protection functions (Page 35).

Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the length of time that the stalled rotor level must be
permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is
made, there will be no response. Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).

4.1.5 Thermistor protection

Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary PTC
thermistors which can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
Thermistor protection is used in the case of:
• Motors with high switching frequencies
• Converter operation
• Motors with heavy starting
• Intermittent duty and/or braking operation
• Restricted air supply
• Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearing of the motor.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 51
Parameters
4.1 Motor protection

Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (abruptly) when the temperature limit is
reached.

5 4(
7KHUPLVWRU
4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
υ
4(

5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO 6HH 4(

7
7DEOH
7KHUPLVWRU
LQSXW (YHQW
7KHUPLVWRU WULS OHYHO
%8
7 6HH 7KHUPLVWRU VKRUW FLUFXLW
5HVSRQVH WR VHQVRU IDXOW
7DEOH
7KHUPLVWRU RSHQ FLUFXLW

Figure 4-7 Thermistor function block (thermistor protection)

Response
• Overtemperature:
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response to violation of the trip level for
overtemperature.
Note
With motors for Ex e applications, the response must be set to "trip"!

• Sensor fault (sensor circuit fault): Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case
of a short circuit or open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.

Table 4-3 "Thermistor protection, binary" response

Response Trip level Sensor fault

deactivated — X
signal X X
warn X X (d)
trip X (d) X

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

52 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power

monitoring

Description
With the function shown here, you can implement dry-running protection for centrifugal pumps
with a radial-flow impeller, even in hazardous areas, by active-power monitoring. You can use
this protection function either alone or in addition to the general "active-power monitoring"
described in Chapter Active power monitoring (Page 146). The general function "active-power
monitoring" is not approved for use in hazardous areas. SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor
the state of a device or system via the active power. By monitoring the active power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn about the flow rate from the active power level. As the flow
rate (delivery rate) decreases, the active power decreases in centrifugal pumps with a radial-
flow impeller (progressive delivery characteristic). For dry-running protection, the motor and
therefore the pump is disconnected when the active power falls below a minimum value. In
addition to avoiding damage to the pump, SIMOCODE pro can contribute, in particular, to
explosion protection of centrifugal pumps that handle flammable media or are installed in
hazardous areas. In this case, the explosion protection conforms with type of protection b by
"control of ignition sources", ignition protection system b1, e.g. acc. to DIN EN 80079‑37. The
response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching the freely selectable trip level can be delayed. A startup
bridging time can also be parameterized.
The protective function "dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active-power
monitoring" requires the use of a basic unit combined with a current/voltage measuring module
and is implemented in the following device types:
Basic units with PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X:
• 3UF7010-1A.00-0 (from product version *E16*)
• 3UF7011-1A.00-0 (from product version *E13*)
• 3UF7013-1A.00-0 (from product version *E04*)
• Current/voltage measuring modules: 3UF712.-1.A01-0.

Note
Use exclusively with the control function "direct starter" (direct-on-line starter)
The function "dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active-power monitoring" can be
used exclusively with the control function "direct starter" (direct-on-line starter).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 53
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

&XUUHQWYROWDJH %DVLFXQLW
PHDVXUHPHQWPRGXOH &RQWDLQVQHZILUPZDUHIRUWKH
GU\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ

GU\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQ
6SHFLDOW\SHH[WHQGHGZLWK
6,02&2'(SUR9 6WDUWEXWWRQHWF

0DLQIXVH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 7HVWRQGU\UXQQLQJ
RQWKHEDVLFXQLWYLD *HQHUDWLQJWKH

352),%86 &RPPXQLFDWLRQ VLJQDOIRURII

352),VDIH
352),1(7
352),VDIH
23&8$

(WKHU1HW,3

7KHUPLVWRUPRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
0RWRUFRQWDFWRU

4 VLJQDOIRURII
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH6,02&2'(SUR9 RQGU\UXQQLQJ
FRPSRQHQWVLQDQRQKD]DUGRXVDUHD RQPRWRUFRQWDFWRU

,QVWDOODWLRQRISXPSDQG
GULYHPRWRULQDKD]DUGRXVDUHD 4

When the motor contactor is closed, the function "dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps
by active-power monitoring" is activated. In the current/voltage measuring module, the
measured values for the active power are calculated from the rms values of the measured
currents and voltages of the 3 phases and transferred to the basic unit. There, the measured
values are compared with the stored trip level. If the system is not in the start-up bridging phase,
the delay time starts on undershooting. If the undershooting is pending for the entire delay time,
after the delay time expires a signal for "motor off" is generated and sent to the motor contactor.
This disconnects the motor from the line power supply. At the same time, the error message "dry-
run pump" appears.

NOTICE
Interposing transformers are not permissible
Use of interposing transformers in conjunction with the function dry-running protection is not
permissible.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

54 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Note
Measuring range of the current / voltage measuring module
The measuring range of the current/voltage measuring module selected for the "dry-running
protection of centrifugal pumps by active-power monitoring" function must include the currents
both at the minimum delivery flow rate QMIN / PMIN / IMIN and at the operating point QOPT / POPT / IOPT
(as well as the rated motor current IN).
If necessary, you can modify the use range of a module by mounting multiple primary windings
(see Chapter "Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing
transformer)") in the SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957)).

Note
An additional warning threshold can be set
You can optionally configure an additional warning threshold for undershooting the active
power using the function "active-power monitoring" (see Active power monitoring (Page 146))
which will give an alarm before the trip level PTRIP is undershot.
However, this warning threshold is not part of the approval for use in hazardous areas.

4(
4(
4(
'U\UXQQLQJSURWHFWLRQ 7ULSSLQJ
4(
4(
7ULSOHYHO3

$FWLYH SRZHU IURP 5HVSRQVH ZKHQ 3 VHH (YHQW

&XUUHQWYROWDJH WDEOHV 7ULS OHYHO 3
PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH
'HOD\ ZKHQ 3

6WDUWXSEULGJLQJWLPH

Fig. 4‑37 Function block "dry-running protection"

Trip level PTRIP

For dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring, a trip level can be
parameterized for the lower limit:
Trip level:
• PTRIP < (lower limit): 0 - 750000 W (default setting: 0)

Trip level active status

The trip level is active only if the motor is running (the criterion being contactor control), the
start-up procedure has been completed, and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 55
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Response to trip level PTRIP < (lower limit):

Here, you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the set trip level is undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important information" in
SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Table 4-4 "Trip level" response for dry-running protection by active-power monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signal -
Warn -
Trip X
Delay (ongoing operation, including regular switch-off) 0 to 10 s (default: 0.5 s, in steps of: 0.1 s)
Start-up bridging (starting operation) 0 to 60 s (default: 0 s, in steps of: 0.5 s)

Note
Delay time
The delay time (ongoing operation, including regular switch-off) is used to increase reliability by
avoiding false tripping (e.g. due to measured-value noise or transient voltage dips) or on
undershooting PTRIP on regular switch-off of the pump and prior closure of the shut-off valve on
the discharge side.
Specify a startup bridging time if the trip level PTRIP is undershot while the pump is starting
(depending on the procedure for opening the shut-off valve on the discharge side).

Reset
You must acknowledge the faults with a reset signal, after checking and remedying the fault
where applicable.
• "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit
• "TEST/RESET" button on operator panel
• Standard function "Reset"
For this purpose, you must connect the inputs "reset input" (connector) to the corresponding
sockets, e.g. on reset via the bus.

Application areas
SIMOCODE pro can be used for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps with a sufficiently
progressive pump characteristic curve (sufficiently steep). This chapter provides some example
pump characteristic curves for various types of impeller. A characteristic curve is progressive
when the active power P increases continuously as the flow rate Q increases (see radial-flow
impeller; in practice, most centrifugal pumps have a radial-flow impeller).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

56 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

A pump characteristic curve is progressive when the ratio of the active power PMIN with the
minimum flow rate QMIN to the active power POPT at the optimum flow rate (operating point) QOPT
meets the following condition:
PMIN / POPT < 0.80
This condition is met on nearly all centrifugal pumps with an radial-flow impeller.

NOTICE
Test before installation of SIMOCODE pro for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps
Before installing SIMOCODE pro for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps, check
whether the condition for a sufficiently progressive pump characteristic curve is met based on
the medium-specific pump characteristics of the pump manufacturer. For approximation, you
can assume that the ratio of the pump shaft outputs (PP,MIN / PP,OPT) is similar in magnitude to the
ratio of the active powers (PMIN / POPT).

NOTICE
Coordination of the "pump + motor" combination is required
Coordinate the "pump + motor" combination in a suitable way.
In particular, you must not overdimension the motor too much.
In the partial load range, the efficiency of the motor decreases disproportionately. The
characteristic of the pump + motor combination is therefore less steep.

Example types of impeller, example pump characteristic curve

1 2 3 4

Figure 4-8 Example types of impeller of centrifugal pumps (source: SIHI Group)

① Vane-type impeller
② Radial-flow impeller
③ Mixed-flow impeller
④ Axial-flow impeller (propeller)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 57
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

1 2 3 4

4
Figure 4-9 Example pump characteristic curve for different types of impeller of centrifugal
pumps (source: SIHI Group)

① Vane-type impeller
② Radial-flow impeller
③ Mixed-flow impeller
④ Axial-flow impeller

SIMOCODE pro can be used, in particular, also for dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps
that handle flammable media or are installed in a hazardous area.

WARNING
Ex applications
Before using SIMOCODE pro for Ex applications check whether the Ex approvals of
SIMOCODE pro cover the relevant use case (see SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957), Chapter "Safety and
commissioning information for Ex areas" and the labeling on the device).

NOTICE
Example evaluation of ignition hazard assessment
You will find information on the possible contribution of SIMOCODE pro to the Ex protection
concept for centrifugal pumps in the example ignition hazard assessment at the end of this
chapter.

Note
Sealing system
For centrifugal pumps that are monitored for dry running with SIMOCODE pro, there are no
restrictions with respect to the sealing system. For example, simple and double-acting
mechanical seals, magnetic drive pumps, and canned motor pumps are conceivable.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

58 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Parameter input
The parameters used for the "dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power
monitoring" function
• PTRIP: Trip value for the active power on undershooting (trip level)
• tV,TRIP: Delay time for tripping during ongoing operation
• tBRIDGE: Start-up bridging time
can be set either by direct input into the device via the engineering software SIMOCODE ES or
via the menu-guided input sequence during teach-in with the wizard (see separate description
in this chapter). With direct input you additionally have to set the "Behavior" parameter manually
to "Trip". With teach-in this is done automatically after leaving the last dialog window.
At the start of the wizard, you open the commissioning editor in the project for the SIMOCODE
device in question in the online view. You will find the wizard there under "dry-running
protection".

NOTICE
The conditions for sufficient distance from dry running and a sufficiently progressive
pump characteristic curve must be met
If you enter the trip level directly via the engineering software, you must take the following
measures:
• Check that the conditions for sufficient distance of the trip level from the dry-run state
(PTrip > 1.1*PMIN) are met.
• Check by active power monitoring that the conditions for a sufficiently progressive pump
characteristic curve (PMIN / POPT < 0.80) are met
• Manually check that the permissible range of current (IU < I < IO) and voltage
(93 V < U < 794 V) have been met using the respective 3UF7 system
External measuring equipment is not approved for determining the operating point
parameters.

NOTICE
Access/authorization concept for input or modification of parameter values
When using SIMOCODE pro for Ex applications, ensure a suitable access/authorization concept
for input or modification of parameter values.

The method of operation of the parameters is illustrated in the following figure and described in
the following sections.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 59
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

$FWLYHSRZHU3 6WDUWLQJEXIIHUWLPH7%5,'*(Vൺ

QRVKXWGRZQRIWKHPRWRU 6KRUWWLPHIDXOW
HJYROWDJHGLS
ൺQRVKXWGRZQRIWKHPRWRU

2SHUDWLRQ /HQJWK\IDXOW
HJFORVHGYDOYH
ൺVKXWGRZQRIWKHPRWRU

3 75,3

0RWRURII
2SHQLQJWKHYDOYH
6WDUWLQJDJDLQVW
SDUWLDOO\RSHQHGYDOYHRQWKHGLVFKDUJHVLGH

7LPHW
6WDUWVXSSUHVVLRQV GHOD\WLPHWY75,3bV
ൺQRVKXWGRZQ

Figure 4-10 Method of operation of the parameters used for dry-running protection of centrifugal
pumps by active-power monitoring

Parameter trip value PTRIP

No simple mathematical relation can be stated between the flow rate of a centrifugal pump and
the active power on the motor. The influencing factors include material data and installation and
operating and ambient conditions.
However, for a certain installed arrangement of the pump, motor, and surrounding plant, a
phenomenological, reproducible relationship can be established between the flow rate Q and
the active power P. If the operating points are not sufficiently known, the ratios can be
determined at the operating point (QOPT/POPT) and at the minimum flow rate (QMIN / PMIN)
specified by the pump manufacturer as part of a so-called teach‑in (see separate description in
this chapter).
Via the menu-guided input sequence (dry-running protection wizard), you can set the trip level
for the active power PTRIP (trip value) during the teach‑in. It is formed from the measured active
power PMIN at minimum flow rate QMIN multiplied by factor 1.1. This factor is used to establish a
sufficient distance between the active power at the trip level and in the dry running state, taking
account of the measurement uncertainties.
Alternatively, direct input of the trip value is also possible. Procedure:
• Read off the active power POPT at the operating point
• Read off the active power PMIN at minimum flow rate, set PTRIP ≥ 1.1 PMIN
– Read off an alternative active power Pa at alternative flow rate Qa below Popt during
ongoing operation and derive the trip value while meeting the
condition Popt > Ptrip > 1.1*Pa at Pa ≥ Pmin.
• Manually check for sufficient scope for progression of the active power characteristic
(PMIN / POPT < 0.80)
• Set PTRIP ≥ 1.1*PMIN.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

60 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Partial load operating states of the pump.
When defining the trip level, consider any potential partial load operating states of the pump.

Parameter delay time tV,TRIP

The delay time tV,TRIP during ongoing operation of the centrifugal pump (including switch-off) is
used to increase the reliability by avoiding false tripping on transient undershooting of the trip
value during ongoing operation (e.g. due to measured-value noise or transient voltage dips).
With parameter tV TRIP, false tripping is also avoided on regular switch-off of the pump. Depending
on the procedure for closing the shutoff valve on the discharge side, the trip level P TRIP may
possibly be undershot.

WARNING
Preventing back flow of the content of the pipe on the discharge side
Prevent back flow of the content of the pipe on the discharge side with suitable measures.
Reason: Back flow of pumps with permanent-magnet motors can result in a generator effect
with the danger of sparking on the terminal board.

NOTICE
Signal "motor off" is pending
As soon as the signal "motor off" is pending (the criterion being contactor control), the dry-
running protection no longer triggers a fault.

NOTICE
Delay time
Select the delay time tV,TRIP to be sufficiently short so that the dry-running protection function
is retained for the specific "pump + motor" system.

Start-up bridging time parameter tBRIDGE

SIMOCODE pro is suitable for the dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps during ongoing
operation.

Note
Minimum active power threshold
During start-up, the following effect can occur: Undershooting a minimum active power
threshold by starting the pump against a (partially opened) valve on the discharge side.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 61
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Start-up bridging time tBRIDGE
Provide a start-up bridging time tBRIDGE against false tripping during which the dry-running
protection by active power monitoring is deactivated due to active-power.
If the trip level is still undershot after expiry of tBRIDGE , then the delay time tV,TRIP starts to run from
this instant.
As part of a safety assessment, you must decide whether additional measures for dry-running
protection are required based on the start-up bridging time tBRIDGE for starting and how they
should be handled (e.g. organizationally or by devices).

NOTICE
Manufacturer specifications
Note any data of the manufacturer of the centrifugal pump on the length of the starting
operation against a (partially opened) valve on the discharge side.

The following effects may also occur during starting of the pump:
• Transient (< 1 s) undershooting of the active power threshold because starting is performed
based on active power = 0 and based on electrical effects (e.g. inertia of the motor contactor).
False trips are avoided by a start-up override of 500 ms that is permanently in the device and
cannot be modified.
• Transient (< 1 s) starting overcurrent (inrush) during which no dry running can be detected
by undershooting a minimum active power threshold. Does not result in false tripping and is
therefore non-critical in respect of the Ex protection because of the short duration.

Logging of the set parameter values

After input or modification of parameter values, we recommend recording the defined numeric
values, including the time of input, and archiving the log file. This is important, in particular,
when using SIMOCODE pro as part of a an Ex protection concept.
To generate a log file, use the print function of SIMOCODE ES. The log file also contains the
parameters set for the "dry-running protection" function.

Note
Log reset
If you modify the dry-running parameters without using a wizard, an existing log from a wizard
is reset.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

62 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Checking and changing the set parameter values

If necessary, check and correct the set parameter values for suitability for the dry running
protection function. This applies, in particular, to the trip value PTRIP. Checking may be necessary,
for example, in the following cases:
• After changes (e.g. impeller replacement) or repairs on the pump, on the pump motor or on
the surrounding plant (pipes, valves, vessels, etc. in the intake path and in the discharge path)
• On changing the medium being pumped
• On changes to the operating conditions
• At regular intervals, in accordance with legal requirements (e.g. test cycle for Ex protection)

NOTICE
Measuring devices
Ensure that the measuring devices used are functioning correctly when inspected (e.g. flow
meter). Calibrate them, if necessary.

Procedure for teach‑in using the dry running protection wizard

Requirements:
Perform the teach‑in with the real medium to be pumped under real operating conditions (e.g.
temperatures, pressures).
Requirements:
• The starting phase of the pump must have been completed.
• As a prerequisite in the plant, we recommend flow rate measurement on the discharge side.

Note
Automation
To reduce manual interventions, you can store the relevant sequences for a (partially)
automated teach-in in your process control system, if required.

Note
Password protection must have been deactivated
If password protection is activated, you must deactivate it.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 63
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

Note
Setting a temporary trip level
In teach‑in, the plant is temporarily operated with minimum flow rate QMIN, which results in
minimum active power PMIN.
To avoid false tripping, but still ensure basic protection against dry running, you should set a
temporary trip level before teach‑in, the value of which is smaller than the expected minimum
active power PMIN.
We recommend the following settings:
• Temporary trip level: At least 30% above the pump shaft power at zero delivery (see pump
characteristic curve)
• Delay time tV,TRIP = 0 or as short as possible
As the trip level, enter this value by direct input using the SIMOCODE ES engineering software
and transfer the change to the device. You will find the parameters in the project for the
SIMOCODE pro device in question in the parameter editor under the respective SIMOCODE
parameters "Parameters → Dry-running protection".

WARNING
Using and resetting the temporary trip level
The temporary trip level only provides basic protection and does not provide dry-running
protection for applications in hazardous areas.
Reset this temporary trip level before resuming production if the teach‑in sequence is not
completed!

WARNING
Qualified personnel required
The teach-in has to be carried out by qualified responsible specialist personnel.
Failure to follow proper procedures results in personal injury and damage to property.

WARNING
Information provided by the pump manufacturer
The manufacturer's instructions must be observed.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

64 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

NOTICE
Device parameterization during starting (only affects system in which SIEMENS process
controls are used)
If the startup parameter block is deactivated (for PROFINET, "Fieldbus interface→ Startup
parameter block" has the default setting "deactivated"), the SIMOCODE pro device parameters
are stored in the CPU of the automation system and transferred to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS
or PROFINET when the system starts. Parameters that were transferred directly to the device
during the teach-in would then be overwritten.
Therefore ensure before teach-in starts that the startup parameter block is activated and
effective in the device.
If you want to use the device parameterization during startup nevertheless, proceed as follows:
• Compile the control hardware after completion of the teach-in and load it into the CPU. In
this way, the SIMOCODE pro device parameters with the up-to-date settings for the dry-
running protection function are loaded into the CPU
• Now deactivate the startup parameter block in the SIMOCODE pro device parameters and
transfer this change to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit. This procedure ensures that the device
parameters transferred to SIMOCODE pro during system startup contain the up-to-date
settings for the dry-running protection function.

NOTICE
Use of a memory module
If a memory module is used, you must ensure that the parameter settings are updated on the
memory module after the teach-in process.

Performing the "teach-in" with the dry-running protection wizard

The procedure of a teach-in is illustrated in the example pump characteristic curve (see below).
Flow rate measurement on the discharge side is assumed.
At the start of the menu-guided input sequence, open the commissioning editor in the project
for the SIMOCODE device in question in the online view. You will find the wizard there under "dry-
running protection".

NOTICE
Time monitoring of the teach-in
The teach-in is monitored by a timer in the device's firmware, which becomes active when
inactivity is detected.
If the system remains at the same dialogue window for a period of 10 min and if simultaneously
the timer is not reset manually SIMOCODE pro goes into the fault condition; an error message
to that effect is displayed and the motor is switched off.
You can restart the timer manually at any time during ongoing operation in each dialogue
window of the wizard with the "Reset Timer" button.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 65
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

First start the pump (according to the instructions provided in the documentation of the pump
manufacturer) and ensure that the pump has attained operating conditions (especially
temperature).
Next, perform the following steps as you are prompted in the input sequence:
1. Starting the dry-running protection wizard: Start the dry-running protection wizard in the
online view of the commissioning editor of SIMOCODE ES
2. Check the currently active settings during teach-in: After the wizard has been started, the
parameters of the dry-running protection function currently active in the device are
displayed:
– Response
– Trip level
– Tripping delay time
– Start-up bridging time
Check the settings for use of a temporary trip level (see instruction "Setting a temporary trip
level" at the beginning of this chapter)

NOTICE
Changing the currently active setting
You can only change the currently active setting by entering the parameters directly in the
engineering software. Close the dry-running protection wizard to do this.
Remember that the pump is still in operation (limited by the timer that monitors during
inactivity).

3. Setting the flow rate to the operating point Qopt: Set the optimum flow rate within your plant
configuration and manually enter the numeric value for the operating point QOPT that you can
read off from the flow rate measuring device on the discharge side (SIMOCODE pro records
the associated active power POPT).
4. Setting of the flow rate to QMIN: Set the minimum flow rate within your plant configuration
and manually enter the numeric value for the minimum flow rate QMIN that you can read off
the flow rate measuring device on the discharge side (SIMOCODE pro records the associated
active power PMIN).
5. Display of the calculated trip level: The trip value determined by the system PTRIP = 1,1*PMIN for
the active power is displayed.
6. Setting of the delay times:
– Enter the delay time tV,TRIP for ongoing operation of the centrifugal pump (default
value: 0.5 s)
– Enter the start-up bridging time tBRIDGE (default value: 0 s)
7. Display of the summary, checking and activation of the dry-running protection function:
Check the displayed parameter values (PTRIP, tV,TRIP, tBRIDGE) for the dry-running protection by
active-power monitoring and the set values pairs POPT / QOPT and PMIN / QMIN.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

66 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

After confirmation, the input sequence is exited and the modified parameter values are activated
in the device by the teach-in.

NOTICE
Delivery flow rate must be sufficiently large
Before activation of the parameter values, make sure that the delivery flow rate is sufficient at
this instant.
This avoids unwanted tripping.

NOTICE
Tests performed by the device
In SIMOCODE pro, the preconditions for the use of the function "dry-running protection" are
checked during the teach-in. A check is made to see whether the following conditions are met:
• Progressive pump characteristic curve (PMIN / POPT < 0.80)
• Current in the permissible range (IU < I < Io)
• Voltage in the permissible range (93 V < U < 794 V)
If one of the above conditions is not met, an error message is output. In this case you must
• close the dry-running protection wizard
• eliminate the error and then restart the dry-running protection wizard
• if necessary also restart the pump beforehand.
Check the determined absolute values for POPT and PMIN for plausibility irrespective of this (where
applicable by comparing the pump characteristics). Determine the cause for obvious deviations
before activating the dry-running protection function.

NOTICE
Checks in case of manual direct input of the trip level
If you entered the trip level manually with the engineering software, check for the following
conditions:
• the conditions for a sufficiently progressive pump characteristic curve
• the conditions for sufficient distance of the trip level from the dry-run state
• the conditions for the permissible range of current and voltage

Note
Log file
For documentation purposes, we recommend generating and printing out a log file after
parameter setting by teach-in.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 67
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

(ƞ1,2,3 < ƞ,max)

Hmin ƞ3 ƞ2
ƞ1
ƞ,max
Hopt ƞ1
ƞ2

H[m]

Q[m³/h]

P opt

P[kW]

P min

Qmin Q[m³/h] Qopt

Figure 4-11 Example monitoring parameters for the teach‑in illustrated in the characteristic curve of a
centrifugal pump with a radial-flow impeller for water at a speed of 1450 rpm (example);
source: KSB SE & Co. KGaA

Alternatives when a flow measurement is missing on the discharge side

If no stationary flow rate measurement is provided, we recommend the following alternatives,
for example:
• Mobile flow rate measurement by ultrasound in clamp‑on technology (calibration required)
• Determine the flow rate via level change in a vessel
• Procedure as for hydraulic acceptance tests for centrifugal pumps acc. to DIN EN ISO 9906

Ignition hazard assessment acc. to ISO 80079‑36 for centrifugal pumps in hazardous areas –
prevention of an ignition source from becoming active with the help of dry-running protection by
active power monitoring with SIMOCODE pro (example illustration)
According to the data in DIN EN ISO 80079‑37, Chapter 1 and Chapter 4, for non‑electrical
devices (centrifugal pumps in this case) for use in explosive atmospheres, an ignition hazard
assessment must be performed according to DIN EN ISO 80079‑36 (protection by control of
ignition sources "b"). For each individual identified ignition hazard, suitable protection measures
must be defined depending on the fault conditions to be considered. This ignition hazard
assessment must be performed by the manufacturer of centrifugal pumps that are approved for
use in hazardous areas.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

68 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

As the plant operator, you are responsible for use of devices as intended, in particular in
hazardous areas, considering the influencing factors of the environment.
The following exemplary ignition hazard assessment according to DIN EN ISO 80079‑36 is an
example illustration and documentation for centrifugal pumps. It refers exclusively to ignition
hazards that can be reduced by the use of SIMOCODE pro for dry-running protection by active-
power monitoring and lists the control measures required for this. It does not purport to be
complete. As the plant operator, you must adapt, detail, and expand this ignition hazard
assessment to the local conditions in any case.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 69
70
Parameters

serial no. 1 2 3 4

Ignition hazard Assessment of the frequency of occurrence without application of an additional measure Measures applied to prevent the ignition source becoming effec-tive Frequency of occurrence incl. measures applied

a b a b c d e a b c a b c d e f
Potential Description / basic cause In normal during during Not Reasons for assessment Description of the measure applied Basis Technical documentation In normal During during Not Resulting Necessary
ignition source (Which conditions originate which operation foresee- rare mal- relevant (citation of standards, technical (evidence including relevant features operation foreseeabl rare mal- relevant EPL in restrictions
ignition hazard?) able function rules, experimen-tal results) listed in column 1) e function respect of
mal- this ignition

Figure 4-12
function hazard

1.1 Hot surface power losses dissipated as heat The maximum surface temperature of the pump has Monitoring of minimum flow by Control Products ch. 6.5.1 of ISO 80079-37 EU-type examination certificate /
been defined by the pump supplier in the course of (e.g. SIMOCODE pro) (by monitoring if the Certificate of Conformity (CoC)
a type-examination for worst case conditions during active power falls below a minimum value); trip according to IEC Ex; Manual Collection
X X Gb T...
normal operation. criteria have been defined according to the SIMOCODE pro; SIL Verification Report
operating manual for the pump (Dekra Exam) con-cerning functional
safety; instructions according to the
1.2 flow and temperature monitoring, failure of operating manual for the pump
monitoring devices cannot be ex-cluded (rare
X malfunction) X Ga T...

1.3 temperature of the pumped medium in The maximum surface temperature was defined in a
conjunction with hydraulic losses of the type test of the manufacturer in the most
pump as well as power dissipation of the unfavorable conditions, but in normal operation The
motor X permissible temperature of the medium to be X Gb T…
pumped is defined in the operating instructions.

1.4 Flow rate and temperature monitoring, failure of

monitoring equipment cannot be excluded (rare
X fault) X Ga T…

active power monitoring

1.5 pump is operating against a closed valve In normal operation the pump will not operate
or a down-stream blockage (continuous against closed valve or downstream blockage. This
opera-tion + shut-down) case is only relevant for anticipated malfunctions.
X X Gb T…

1.6 Flow and temperature monitoring, Failure of

monitoring devices cannot be ex-cluded (rare
X malfunction) X Ga T…

1.7 mechanical Impeller hits casing (in case of malfunction Formation of sparks inside pump - only relevant if Monitoring of permanent liquid filling inside pump
spark without or with only little liquid) simultaneously too less liquid is present during operation by Control Product (e.g.
X SIMOCODE pro) (by monitoring if the active X Ga T…
power falls below a minimum value); avoidance
1.8 Loose metal parts in the medium being of simultaneous occur-rence of an effective
pumped (in case of a fault without liquid or ignition source and an explosive atmosphere
X X Ga T…
with just a little liquid)

Impeller rubs against casing (in case of

4.2 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active power monitoring

malfunction without or with only little liquid)

1.9 X X Ga T…

Unintended ingress of particles from Monitoring of permanent liquid filling inside pump
outside (in case of malfunction without or during operation by Control Product (e.g.
with only little liquid) SIMOCODE pro) (by monitoring if the active
power falls below a minimum value); avoidance
X of simultaneous occur-rence of an effective X Ga T…
1.10
ignition source and an explosive atmos-phere;
prevention of ingress of particles from outside,
e.g. installation of a strain-er, operator's respon-
sibility.

Electrical Backflow of liquid through the pump Pump is operating as electric generator; Monitoring of minimum flow by Control Products
sources caused by “slurping mode” (repeated electro-magnetic induc-tion of voltage at terminal (e.g. SI-MOCODE pro) (by monitoring if the
periods of incomplete conveying of liquid box of motor; formation of sparks by flashover active power falls below a minimum value); trip
rests) after emptying of a ves-sel criteria have been defined according to the
1.11 X operating manual for the pump; application of a X Gb T…
motor with adequate type of protection (e.g. Ex
d, Ex e)

Resulting EPL including all existing ignition hazards Gc bis Ga T...

to EN ISO 80079‑36 - Representation of the possible contribution of SIMOCODE pro to

Example ignition hazard assessment for centrifugal pumps in hazardous areas according

prevent an ignition source from becoming active with the help of dry-running protection by

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3 Motor control

4.3.1 Control stations

4.3.1.1 Description of functions of control stations

Control stations - overview

Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The "Control
Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these
different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows parallel administration of up to four different
control stations. Dependent on the set control function, up to five different control commands
can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
Control stations can be:
• Local in the direct vicinity of the motor; control commands via pushbuttons.
• PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN], switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
• PC or PC/OPC UA [HMI], control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV, OPC UA or PROFINET with the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the
control cabinet door.
Examples of control commands:
• Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
• Motor CCW (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor CW (ON >) for a reversing starter
• Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (e.g. binary
inputs on the basic unit, control bits from the bus, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to five different control commands can come from each control station. Up to five plugs (plug
ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) are available on the function block for each control station. The
number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct starter, for
example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 71
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Control stations
• Control station - local control: In this case, the command devices are usually in the
immediate vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of
the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally the
function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs – BU Inputs, DM Inputs) for the
control commands to take effect.
Note
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor
down safely if an open circuit occurs in the supply cable, for example. The precondition is that
the control station is active.

3XVKEXWWRQ %8 ,QSXWV
/RFDO FRQWURO
21 VWDWLRQ >/&@ 5HOHDVHV

,1
21 21

,1
2))
,1 2))
21 !

,1
21 !!

3/&3&6
21 5HOHDVHV

• PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN] control station: This control station is primarily intended for
control commands from the automation system (PLC / PCS) via the cyclic receive telegram of
the bus. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets,
typically with cyclic receive, for the control commands to take effect.

ON >>

PLC/PCS Releases
Cyclic Receive ON <<
Bit 0.0
PLC ON < ON
OFF
DP Number: 16 OFF
ON >

ON >>
Bit 1.7

PC
ON << Releases

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

72 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

• PC or PC/OPC UA [HMI] control station: This control station is primarily intended for
switching commands on an arbitrary PC that, along with the automation system, is used as
a second master on PROFIBUS DP or that, as a client, accesses the data made available by
SIMOCODE pro, as server, via OPC UA. The control commands are sent via the Acyclic receive
telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1 or are transferred using a client-server connection via
OPC UA.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via
communication bus, its control commands automatically take effect via the PC [DPV1] or
"PC PC/OPC UA" control station. At the same time, the enabled commands for this control
station also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.

$F\FOLF 5HFHLYH
3& >'39@
%LW 21 5HOHDVHV
3&
21
21

2))
'3 1XPEHU
2))
21 !

21 !!
%LW

2S SDQHO >23@

• Control station - operator panel: This control station is primarily intended for control
commands issued via the buttons on the 3UF72 operator panel, which is mounted in a
control cabinet door, for example. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be
connected to any sockets (normally to the function block for the buttons of the operator
panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take effect.
Note
Control functions with two speeds
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button
must be used as a speed changeover button for control functions with two speeds and two
directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/<<>>".

Note
"Operator panel [OP]" control station
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to SIMOCODE pro via
the system interface, its control commands automatically take effect via the "Operator
panel [OP]" control station. At the same time, the enabled commands for this control station
also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 73
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

23 EXWWRQV 2S SDQHO >23@

!!! 5HOHDVHV
2SHUDWRU 21 21
SDQHO
2))
2))
21 !

21 !!

4.3.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors

Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different
operating modes available for selection:
• Local 1
• Local 2
• Local 3
• Remote / Automatic: In this operating mode, the system must communicate via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g. local and
PLC / PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control stations
selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two
control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every operating mode, it
can be stipulated if "ON commands" and / or "OFF commands" are to be accepted. The operating
modes are controlled in such a way that only one operating mode is active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:

Table 4-5 Operating modes

Operating mode Description

Key-operated switch operation, e.g. Local 1 Only local control inputs are permitted! All other
control stations are disabled.
Manual operation, e.g. Local 3 Only operator panel control commands and local
control commands can be issued.
Remote operation, e.g. remote / automatic Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted; on‐
ly OFF commands are permitted locally.

The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The
remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch operation
has priority over all other operating modes.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

74 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Mode selector
The S1 / S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1," "Local 2,"
"Local 3," and "Remote/Automatic." To do this, plugs S1 and S2 must be connected to any sockets
(e.g. device inputs, communication bus control bits, etc.).
The table below shows the operating modes depending on the signal states of mode selectors
S1 and S2:

Table 4-6 Operating modes depending on S1 and S2

Input Operating mode

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote / Automat‐
ic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1

The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the switch
authorizations for the individual control stations:
• Local control [LC]
• PLC/PCS [DP] or PLC/PCS [PN]
• PC [DPV1] or PC/OPC-UA [HMI]
• Operator panel (OP)
Only the following are active:
• the operating mode set by plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations" function block and
• the enables selected there.
Example of a dynamic mode selection as a function of time:

.H\RSHUDWHG 5HPRWH RSHUDWLRQ 0DQXDO RSHUDWLRQ 5HPRWHRSHUDWLRQ .H\RSHUDWHG

VZLWFK VZLWFK

/RFDO 5HPRWH /RFDO 5HPRWH /RFDO

7LPH W
Figure 4-13 Example - mode selection

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 75
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.1.3 Enables and enabled control command

Enables
Enables, which have to be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands for
each control station in every operating mode. That is, depending on the mode, it is possible to
define for each control station whether it is permitted to switch the motor on only, off only, or
on and off. The relevant checkbox is selected in the "Control stations" dialog box in
SIMOCODE ES.

Diagram of enables and enabled control command

The following diagram shows the "Control Stations" function block and the operating modes:

&RQWURO VWDWLRQV

0RGH VHOHFWRU
6
$FWLYDWLRQ RI UHOHDVHV IRU
6
FRQWUROFRPPDQGV21DQG
/RFDO /RFDO /RFDO 5HPRWH 2))LQ6,02&2'((6
/RFDO FRQWURO
21 5HOHDVHV
VWDWLRQ >/&@
21 21 (QDEOHG
2))
2)) 'LVDEOHG
21 !
21 !!

3/&3&6
21 5HOHDVHV
21 21
2)) 7R WKH FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ
2)) 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
21 ! 21
21 !! (QDEOHG 21
&RQWURO 2))
21 3& FRPPDQG
5HOHDVHV 21 !
21 21 21 !!
2))
2))
21 !
21 !!

2S SDQHO
!!! >23@ 5HOHDVHV
21 21
2))
2))
21 !
21 !!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

76 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Example of enabled commands

The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating
mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:

Figure 4-14 Example of enabled commands

In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode via
the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 77
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.1.4 Control station settings

Table 4-7 Control station settings

Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via any signal (any sockets, but typically device inputs). The
ON << "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
PLC/PCS Activates the control station via any signal (any sockets, but typically control bits from
ON << the bus).
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
PC Activates the control stations via any signal (any sockets, but typically control bits from
ON << the bus).
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
Operator panel [OP] Activates the control stations via any signal (any sockets, but typically buttons on the
<>/<<>> operator panel)
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
Mode selector For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1, Local 2, Local 3 and remote with
S1 any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from/via the bus.).
S2

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

78 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.2 Control functions

4.3.2.1 Overview and description of control functions

Control functions - overview

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:

Table 4-8 Control functions

Control function SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB, V MR, V PN, V EIP
Overload relay (Page 90) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter (direct-on-line start‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er) (Page 91)
Reversing starter (Page 93) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Circuit breaker (Page 95) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter (Page 97) — ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta reversing starter — — — ✓
(Page 100)
Dahlander starter (Page 104) — — — ✓
Dahlander reversing (Page 106) — — — ✓
Pole-changing starter (Page 109) — — — ✓
Pole-changing reversing starter — — — ✓
(Page 112)
Solenoid valve (Page 115) — — — ✓
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — — — ✓
(Page 117)
Soft starter (Page 121) — ✓ ✓ ✓
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ — — — ✓
tor (Page 124)

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders.
They are characterized by the following important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on / switch-off process
• Monitoring the ON / OFF status
• Tripping if a fault occurs.
SIMOCODE pro monitors these statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input, which
is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring
modules.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 79
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

All the necessary interlocks and logic operations for the respective applications are already
implemented in the control functions. Control functions include:
• Plugs for control commands ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >> that are usually connected with
the "Enabled control command" sockets.
• Auxiliary control inputs (plugs), e.g. Feedback ON
• Sockets for
– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
– Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
– Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>."
– Faults, e.g. "Fault - feedback (FB) ON," "Fault - antivalence."
• Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON / OFF, etc.
• A logic component with all necessary interlocks and connections for the control function.
• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active "at a
higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are independent
functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions. Detailed
description: See Chapter Motor protection (Page 35).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

80 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Control function schematic

The following schematic shows a general view of the control function ("Protection/Control"
function block):

3OXJV RI WKH FRQWURO FRPPDQGV

DUH XVXDOO\FRQQHFWHGZLWKWKH
(QDEOHGFRQWUROFRPPDQGVRFNHWV

&RQWUROFRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRUFRQWUROV
&RQWURO VWDWLRQV
21 21 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO 4(

21 21 4(
&RQWURO IXQFWLRQ
2)) 2)) 4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
21 ! 21 ! 4(

21 !! 21 !! 4(
'LVSOD\V
(QDEOHG 6HWWLQJV ODPSFRQWURO
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 4/(
ವ&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 21
ವ$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV 4/( 21
4/$
$X[ FRQWURO LQSXWV 2))
)% 21 4/(!
21 !
)& 4/(!!
21 !!
)2 4/6
)DXOW
$EEUHYLDWLRQV 7& 6WDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ
21 HJ352),%86'3
)%21)HHGEDFN21 72
21
)&)HHGEDFN&/26(' 2))

21 !
)2)HHGEDFN23(1
21 !!

7&7RUTXH&/26(' 3RV RSHQLQJ

727RUTXH23(1 3RV FORVLQJ

Figure 4-15 "Protection/Control" function block

**) See also Chapter Motor protection (Page 35)

Contactor controls
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and
taking the specified control function into consideration including all corresponding interlocks,
feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE
contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital modules
and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE contactor controls
is directly dependent on the set control function.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 81
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Lamp controls and status information:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls. They
are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The number of
usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified control
function.
Feeder status feedback:
• Status information, e.g. "Status ON <": These are transmitted, for example, via bus to the
automation system and signal the status of the feeder there.
• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE <": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp or a
pushbutton lamp for status display
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE ... / QLA lamp outputs show a different
response (e.g. flashing).

• In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally indicate the following:
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Saving change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

82 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Extended status and fault messages

• Additional status information:
– Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present during the start
process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for Class 10E).
Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Solenoid valve" control functions.
– Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation,
the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed.
– Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander starter," "Pole-changing starter," and "Star-
delta" control functions, the signal is present after changeover until the specified time has
elapsed.
• Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Feedback CLOSED (FC)
– Feedback OPEN (FO)
– Torque CLOSED (TC)
– Torque OPEN (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/
or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the
selected control function.
• Additional fault information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the corresponding limit
switch. The positioner may have stalled.
– Double 0: Both torque switches have responded ("positioner" control function only)
– Double 1: Both limit switches have responded.
– End position: Positioner or valve has left the end position without receiving a control
command
– Antivalence: The changeover contacts of the limit switches do not issue an antivalent
signal ("Positioner 5" control function only).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 83
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

([WHQGHG &RQWURO 6WDWXV 6WDUW DFWLYH

6WDWXV LQWHUORFNLQJ WLPH DFWLYH

6HWWLQJV )% &/26('

ವ7LPLQJV )% 23(1
ವ2SHUDWLQJ PRGH
74 &/26('
ವ6WDUGHOWD
74 23(1

)DXOW ([HFXWLRQ 21 FRPPDQG

)DXOW ([HFXWLRQ 6723 FRPPDQG

)DXOW )% 21

)DXOW )% 2))

6WDWXV &KDQJHRYHU SDXVH DFWLYH

7ULS 6WDOOHG SRVLWLRQHU

7ULS 'RXEOH

7ULS (QG SRVLWLRQ

7ULS $QWLYDOHQFH

Figure 4-16 "Extended control" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

84 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.2.2 Application selection, settings and definitions of control functions

Application selection
If you select and load a preset application via the "Add new device" command (e.g. the reversing
starter) in SIMOCODE ES, all protective functions, links and interlocks for the reversing starter are
set up in the basic unit. These can be flexibly adapted and expanded.

Figure 4-17 Application selection with SIMOCODE ES

Depending on the basic unit used, you can choose from among the following control functions:

Table 4-9 Application selection

Control function Short Description Further information

Overload relay SIMOCODE pro responds like See "Overload relay" control function
an overload relay. (Page 90)
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) Switching motor on and off See "Direct starter" control function
(Page 91)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 85
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Control function Short Description Further information

Reversing starter Control of direction of rota‐ See "Reversing starter" control function
tion of motors (forward, re‐ (Page 93)
verse)
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Switches a circuit breaker on See "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" con‐
and off (e.g. 3WL, 3VA) trol function (Page 95)
Star-delta starter To limit the starting current, See "Star-delta starter" control function
SIMOCODE pro initially starts (Page 97)
a motor with a star-connected
stator winding and then
switches it to delta.
Star-delta reversing starter Star-delta starter with both di‐ See "Star delta reversing starter" control func‐
rections of rotation (forward, tion (Page 100)
reverse)
Dahlander starter Control of motors with only See Control function "Dahlander starter"
one stator winding in two (Page 104)
speed steps (fast, slow)
Dahlander reversing starter Dahlander starter with both See Control function "Dahlander reversing
directions of rotation (clock‐ starter" (Page 106)
wise, counter-clockwise)
Pole-changing starter Control of motors with two See "Pole-changing starter" control function
stator windings in two speed (Page 109)
steps (fast, slow)
Pole-changing reversing starter Pole-changing starter with See "Pole-changing reversing starter" control
both directions of rotation function (Page 112)
(forward, reverse)
Solenoid valve Control of a solenoid valve See "Solenoid valve" control function
(Page 115)
Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Activation of positioners or See "Positioner" control function (Page 117)
actuators. Versions 1 to 5
Soft starter Control of the 3RW soft starter See "Soft starter" control function (Page 121)
Soft starter with reversing contactor Control of the 3RW soft start‐ See "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
er, including an additional re‐ control function (Page 124)
versing contactor

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

86 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Parameters for control functions

Table 4-10 General settings and definitions

Parameter Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >> Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets of the "Con‐
trol Station" function block. From there, the control commands come from the
different control stations. The number of active inputs depends on the control
function chosen. With a direct starter, for example, only the inputs "ON >" and
"OFF" are active.
Default setting: Connected
FB ON 1) Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with
"Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact
from the contactor is not required for signaling. Depending on the control func‐
tion chosen, this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Sta‐
tus ‑ ON <<, ‑ ON <, ‑ ON >, ‑ ON >>" signals.
"No motor current flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact
from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA
display and the "Status - OFF" signal.
Default setting: Status - Motor current flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve" control functions
that are normally connected with the inputs of the basic unit or the digital mod‐
ules and are used to query the present status of the torque switch and the limit
switches that are hard-wired to the inputs.
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting): The control command on the corresponding
plug of the control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>" is saved. It can only
be revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding control
station. An auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is not required. Motor
feeders are usually operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated: Depending on the control function chosen, non-maintained com‐
mand mode acts on the plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,
ON >>". A control command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting): Change-over commands for switching from
one direction of rotation / rotational speed to the other are only implemented
with a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time / change-over pause has
elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.
• Activated: Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rota‐
tion / rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF"
once the interlocking time / change-over pause has elapsed. If the selected
direction / speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized
interlocking time / change-over pause, the selection is signaled by flickering
QLE displays. Your selection can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".
Separating DM-FL/FP function from control • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules
function also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control
is always tripped, too. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping via the DM‑F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is not tripped.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not
affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 87
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Parameter Description
Load type You can select from the following:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (e.g. heater): Since overcurrent generally does not flow during
start-up on a resistive load, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this
case, the startup override does not occur for the "signal," "warn," and "trip‐
ping" functions.
Feedback time 1) SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON. If the
status of FB ON changes - without a corresponding switching command - "Fault
- Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.
Default setting: 0.5 s
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined
period of time, e.g. in the case of network switchover.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks whether FB
ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON"
control command being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (FB) ON" is
issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been
rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks whether
FB ON = 1. If no current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the
"OFF" control command being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (FB) OFF"
is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated.
Execution time 1) SIMOCODE pro monitors the switch-on and switch-off process. The switch-on or
switch-off process must be completed within this time.
Default setting: 1.0 s
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to detect
current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault mes‐
sage "Fault - Execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates
the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to
detect current in the main circuit after expiry of the execution time. Otherwise,
the fault message "Fault - Execution OFF command" will be issued. The contactor
controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors
from switching on at the same time. Changing from one direction of rotation to
the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.
Default setting: 0 s.
Change-over pause With the control functions "Dahlander starter" and "Pole-changing starter",
switching from FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time configured.
In the "Star-delta" control function, the change-over pause extends the time be‐
tween switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by
the time configured.
Default setting: 0.00 s

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

88 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Parameter Description
Max. star time With the "Star-delta starter" and the "Star-delta reversing starter" control func‐
tions:
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s.
Default setting: 20 s.
Current measuring module built into the With control function "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter":
delta circuit or the supply cable The current setting and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on
the installation location of the current measuring module:
• in delta circuit (default): current setting Is is reduced to Irated x 1/√3
• In supply cable: current setting

Behavior of "feedback message ON" 1)

4(
6ZLWFK 21 21 7ULSSLQJ

2)) 2))

9ROWDJH IDLOXUH
)% 21 HJ SXOVDWLQJ FXUUHQW

2))

(7 )7 (7 )7

(7 ([HFXWLRQ WLPH

)7 )HHGEDFN WLPH
Figure 4-18 Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON

Note
Behavior with a current less than 12 % of Is
At a current less than 12% of the motor's rated current Ie, the "Current I_max (% of Ie)' and
"Current I_Lx (% of Ie)" is indicated as 0 %. Equally, the binary "Status - Motor current flowing"
signal remains set to logical zero.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 89
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following signals are also output:
• A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
• A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
• The "Status - General fault" signal
• The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.

4.3.2.3 "Overload relay" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state overload relay. Control
commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. Control stations and inputs of the control
function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays. When the
control voltage is applied, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor control; it
remains active until it is deactivated by the fault message of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to any relay output that switches off the contactor
coil of the motor contactor in case of overload.

Schematic

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4(
2YHUORDG UHOD\
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
/RDG W\SH
'LVSOD\V
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV IXQFWLRQ IURP
)% 21 FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ 4/6
)DXOW

)HHGEDFN 21

Figure 4-19 Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

90 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-11 Overload relay settings

Overload relay Description

FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control functions
(Page 85))
Separate fail-safe func‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules affects the SIMO‐
tion from control func‐ CODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This setting is selected
tion for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMO‐
CODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not
affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an overload trip (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.

Note
Monitoring the number of starts is not possible for this control function.

4.3.2.4 "Direct starter" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.

Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 91
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4(
21
'LUHFW VWDUWHU
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
'LVSOD\V ODPSV
IXQFWLRQ IURP
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ
4/$
/RDG W\SH 2))

4/(!
)HHGEDFN WLPH 21
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV
([HFXWLRQ WLPH
)% 21
4/6
)DXOW

6WDWXV

2))

21!

)HHGEDFN 21

Figure 4-20 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-12 Direct starter settings

Direct starter (direct-on- Description

line starter)
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command OFF" socket
ON > Control command ON
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode • Activated

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

92 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Direct starter (direct-on- Description

line starter)
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects the
from control function SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This setting
is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled
by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does
not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control func‐
tions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)

4.3.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor
(forwards and backwards).

Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counterclockwise, i.e. reverse)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates internal contactor controls QE1 and QE2.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes contactor controls QE1 and QE2 to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the "OFF" control command
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Changing from
one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 93
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4( 5,*+7
5HYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU
21 4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ /()7
2)) 1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQGPRGH
21 !
&KDQJHRYHU
FRPPDQG6DYLQJ 'LVSOD\V
4/(
21
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQIURP 4/$ 2))
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ
4/(!
21 !
/RDG W\SH
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV
)% 21
)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/6
)DXOW
([HFXWLRQ WLPH
6WDWXV
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH 21

2))

21 !

)HHGEDFN 21 ,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH

([WHQGHG FRQWURO
DFWLYH

Figure 4-21 Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-13 Reversing starter settings

Reversing starter Description

ON < Control command ON <, counter-clockwise
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command OFF" socket
ON > Control command ON >, clockwise
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode • Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

94 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Reversing starter Description

Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects
control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMO‐
CODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)

4.3.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VA) on and off with this control
function. The circuit breakers are then connected to the bus via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
• Stop with "OFF" activates contactor control QE3 for a pulse of 400 ms.
• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms when the circuit
breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter pulse" is set.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "ON connection"
of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
2. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "OFF
connection" of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 95
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input that is connected to the auxiliary switch (AUXS) of the circuit
breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS) of the circuit
breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard function.

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4( PV 21
&LUFXLW EUHDNHU
4( PV 2))
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
2)) 1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQGPRGH
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
'LVSOD\V
IXQFWLRQ IURP
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ

/RDG W\SH 4/$ 2))

)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/(!

21
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV ([HFXWLRQ WLPH
)% 21
$X[LOLDU\ VZLWFK $6 4/6
)DXOW

6WDWXV
2))

21 !
)HHGEDFN 21

Figure 4-22 Schematic of the "Circuit breaker" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-14 Circuit breaker settings

Circuit breaker Description

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

96 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Circuit breaker Description

Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects
control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMO‐
CODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control once the set feedback time
has elapsed. The feedback time should therefore be set higher than the motor off time of the
motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)

4.3.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function

Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the line supply.
In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the motor with a star-connected stator
winding and then switches it to delta.

Control commands
• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then
immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (line contactor)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 97
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates QE1 contactor control again, before
connecting QE2 contactor control (delta contactor). SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to
delta:
• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply cable: I < 90 % Is
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.

Safety guidelines

Note
It is recommended that contactor controls QE* are wired to the relay outputs of the basic unit.

Note
if the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit is used, an additional multifunction module is required for this
control function.
The typical change-over time from star to delta is between 100 ms and 150 ms.

Note
Spurious tripping can occur if you use the internal ground-fault detection for star-delta
connections. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Note
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3 times
smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/√3
Is = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A

Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause. Reason: For
motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the line voltage plus motor
EMF might result in a very high delta starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The
motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

98 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4(
6WDU FRQWDFWRU
6WDUGHOWD VWDUWHU
4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ 'HOWD FRQWDFWRU
2)) 1RQPDLQWDLQHG
4(
FRPPDQGPRGH 1HWZRUN FRQWDFWRU
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH 'LVSOD\V
IXQFWLRQIURP
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ
/RDG W\SH 4/$ 2))
)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/(!
21
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV ([HFXWLRQ WLPH
)% 21
4/6
)DXOW
&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
0D[ 6WDWXV
VWDU WLPH

7UDQVIRUPHU
2))
PRXQWHG
21 !

)HHGEDFN 21 &KDQJHRYHU SDXVH

([WHQGHG FRQWURO DFWLYH

Figure 4-23 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-15 Star-delta starter settings

Star-delta starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
(Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON
(Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command ON >" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status -
current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules affects
control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects
the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 99
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Star-delta starter Description

Load type You can select from the following:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0.00 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 s (default: 20 s)
Current measuring module instal‐ The current setting and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on the
led 1) installation location of the current measuring module:
• In delta circuit: Current setting Is is reduced to In x 1/√3 (default)
• In supply cable: Current setting Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Note
1) If a current / voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected in the
supply cable!
It is also necessary to select "Line-to-line voltage" under "Device configuration → Voltage
display".

4.3.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star-delta
operation.

Control commands
• CW rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (line contactor, clockwise rotation)
• Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star
contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control (line contactor,
counter-clockwise rotation)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, QE3, and QE4.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

100 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates contactor control QE1 before connecting
contactor control QE2 (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to delta:
• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply cable: I < 90 % Is
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the OFF control command.
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from
one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time."
Startup is always performed in star mode

Safety guidelines

Note
It is recommended that the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls are wired to the relay outputs of the
basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.

Note
Spurious tripping can occur if you use the internal ground-fault detection for star-delta
connections. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 101
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4(
6WDUGHOWD 6WDU FRQWDFWRU
21 UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU
4(
'HOWD FRQWDFWRU
2)) 0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
1RQPDLQWDLQHG 4(
5,*+7 1HWZRUN FRQWDFWRU
21 ! FRPPDQG PRGH
&KDQJHRYHU 4(
/()7 1HWZRUN FRQWDFWRU
FRPPDQG 6DYLQJ
'LVSOD\V
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH 4/(
21
IXQFWLRQ IURP
4/$
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ 2))

$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV /RDG W\SH 4/(!

21 !
)% 21 )HHGEDFN WLPH
4/6
)DXOW
([HFXWLRQ WLPH

,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH 6WDWXV

21
&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
0D[ 2))
VWDU WLPH
21 !
7UDQVIRUPHU
PRXQWHG &KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
)HHGEDFN 21
DFWLYH
([WHQGHG FRQWURO
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH

DFWLYH

Figure 4-24 Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection / Control"
function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-16 Star-delta reversing starter settings

Star-delta reversing starter Description

Voltage display (in the device Select "Line-to-line voltage"
configuration)
Motor control → Control function:
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command OFF" socket

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

102 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Star-delta reversing starter Description

ОN > Control command ON >
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command ON >" socket
ON < Control command ON <
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command ON <" socket
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode • Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects
control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMO‐
CODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control func‐
tions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 s (default: 20 s)
Current measuring module in‐ The current setting and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on the in‐
stalled 1) stallation location of the current transformer / current measuring module:
• in delta circuit (default): Current setting Is is reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: Current setting Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Note
1) If a current / voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected in the
supply cable!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 103
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.2.9 Control function "Dahlander starter"

Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro connects the stator winding via the contactors so that
there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.

Control commands
• SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
• FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor, FAST) and
then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (line contactor, FAST).
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) and on change-over from "FAST" → "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
• Via the "OFF" control command
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being switched on at the same
time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" → "SLOW" to
give the motor enough time to run down.

Note
Two current settings must be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer
rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module
within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The current setting Is1 or Is2 must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see Chapter Overload
protection (Page 37).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

104 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4(
)$67
'DKODQGHU
4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ 6/2:
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG 4(
6WDU FRQWDFWRU )$67
21 ! FRPPDQGPRGH
&KDQJHRYHU
21 !! FRPPDQG6DYLQJ
'LVSOD\V
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQIURP
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ 4/$ 2))

$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV /RDG W\SH 4/(!

21 !
)% 21 4/(!!
21 !!
)HHGEDFN WLPH
4/6
)DXOW
([HFXWLRQ WLPH
6WDWXV

&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH 2))

21 !

21 !!
)HHGEDFN 21
&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
([WHQGHG FRQWURO
DFWLYH

Figure 4-25 Schematic of the "Dahlander starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-17 Settings for Dahlander starters

Dahlander starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command OFF" socket
ОN > Control command ON > (SLOW)
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command ON >" socket
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST)
Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control command ON >>" socket
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket, usually with "Status - current flowing" socket
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode • Activated

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 105
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Dahlander starter Description

Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting):
from control function • A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro control func‐
tion, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This setting is selected for applications
where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does
not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Saving change-over com‐ • Deactivated (default setting)
mand • Activated
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control func‐
tions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0.00 s)

4.3.2.10 Control function "Dahlander reversing starter"

Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands
• RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates contactor control QE2 (CW-SLOW)
• RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates contactor control QE3 (star contactor FAST)
and then immediately activates contactor control QE1 (CW-FAST)
• LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE4 (CCW-SLOW)
• LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates contactor control QE3 (star contactor FAST) and
then immediately activates contactor control QE5 (CCW-FAST)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message causes
the contactor control to be deactivated.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

106 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from
one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time."

Switching the speed

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST"→"SLOW" to give
the motor enough time to run down.

Safety guidelines

Note
You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be
implemented with bistable relay outputs.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 107
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

21 4(
5,*+7 )$67
'DKODQGHU
21 UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU 4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ 5,*+7 6/2:
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG 4(
6WDU FRQWDFWRU )$67
21 ! FRPPDQGPRGH
4(
&KDQJHRYHU /()7 6/2:
21 !! FRPPDQG6DYLQJ
4(
/()7 )$67
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQIURP 'LVSOD\V
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ 4/(
21
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV /RDG W\SH
4/(
)% 21 21
)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/$ 2))
([HFXWLRQ WLPH
4/(!
21 !
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH
4/(!!
&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH 21 !!

4/6
)DXOW
6WDWXV
21

2))

21 !

)HHGEDFN 21 21 !!

&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
([WHQGHG FRQWURO
DFWLYH
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH

DFWLYH

Figure 4-26 Schematic of the "Dahlander starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-18 Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter

Dahlander reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (Connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command OFF" socket)
ON Control command ON > (CW, SLOW) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command ON >" socket)
ON >> Control command ON >> (CW, FAST) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command ON >>" socket)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

108 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Dahlander reversing starter Description

ON < Control command ON < (CCW, SLOW) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command - ON <" socket)
ON << Control command ON << (CCW, FAST) (connection with any socket, usually with "En‐
abled control command ON <<" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status
- current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from con‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
trol function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping
directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SI‐
MOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0.00 s)

4.3.2.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW).

Control commands
• SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
• FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates QE1 contactor control (FAST)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 109
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Switching the speed

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST"→"SLOW" to give
the motor enough time to run down.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

110 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

4(
)$67
3ROHFKDQJLQJ VWDUWHU
4(
6/2:
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
&KDQJHRYHU
21 !! FRPPDQG 6DYLQJ
'LVSOD\V

6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQIURP
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ 4/$ 2))

$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV /RDG W\SH 4/(!

21 !
)% 21 4/(!!
)HHGEDFN WLPH 21 !!
4/6
([HFXWLRQ WLPH )DXOW

6WDWXV

&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
2))

21 !

21 !!
)HHGEDFN 21

&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
([WHQGHG FRQWURO
DFWLYH

Figure 4-27 Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function
block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-19 Pole-changing starter settings

Pole-changing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command - OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON > (SLOW) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled
control command - ON >" socket)
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled
control command - ON >>" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status
- current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 111
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Pole-changing starter Description

Separate fail-safe function from con‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
trol function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping
directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SI‐
MOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0.00 s)

4.3.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function

Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands
• RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)
• RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates contactor control QE1 (CW-FAST)
• LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE4 (CCW-SLOW)
• LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" activates contactor control QE5 (CCW-FAST)
• Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations. Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled
control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message causes
the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the "OFF" control command
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from
one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time."

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

112 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Switching the speed

Change-over pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being switched on
simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" can be used to delay switching from "FAST"→"SLOW"
to give the motor enough time to run down.

Safety guidelines

Note
At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.

Note
Two current settings must be set for the pole-changing starter:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer
rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module
within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The current setting Is1 or Is2 must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see Chapter Overload
protection (Page 37).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 113
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV 3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

21 4(
3ROHFKDQJLQJ 5,*+7 )$67
21 UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU 4(
5,*+7 6/2:
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG
21 ! FRPPDQG PRGH

&KDQJHRYHU 4( /()7 6/2:

21 !! FRPPDQG 6DYLQJ
4(
/()7 )$67
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQ IURP 'LVSOD\V
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ 4/(
21
/RDG W\SH
4/(
)% 21 21

)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/$ 2))

([HFXWLRQ WLPH 4/(!

21 !
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH
4/(!!
21 !!
&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH
4/6
)DXOW

6WDWXV
21

2))

21 !

21 !!

&KDQJHRYHU SDXVH DFWLYH

)HHGEDFN 21 ([WHQGHG FRQWURO
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH DFWLYH

Figure 4-28 Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function, "Protection / Control"
function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-20 Pole-changing reversing starter settings

Pole-changing reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command - OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON > (CW, SLOW) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command ON >" socket)
ON >> Control command ON >> (CW, FAST) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command ON >>" socket)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

114 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Pole-changing reversing starter Description

ON < Control command ON < (CCW, SLOW) (connection with any socket, usually with "Ena‐
bled control command - ON <" socket)
ON << Control command ON << (CCW, FAST) (connection with any socket, usually with "En‐
abled control command ON <<" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status
- current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from con‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
trol function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping
directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SI‐
MOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 - 55 s (default: 0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default: 0.00 s)

4.3.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can use this function to control a solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is brought
into the corresponding end position using the control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE".
SIMOCODE pro must be informed via corresponding limit switches (FC, FO) when the end
position has been reached.

Control commands
• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the solenoid
valve into the "CLOSED" position.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 115
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Safety guidelines

Note
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module is not necessary.

Note
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO = 1 and FC = 1), the solenoid valve is
immediately switched off via the fault message "Fault - Double 1" (= "CLOSED").
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the valve is switched
off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault" (="CLOSED").

Note
Fault - Execution OFF command is issued if the "OPEN" end position is not reached in the
parameterized time.
Fault - Execution ON command is issued if the "CLOSED" end position is not reached in the
parameterized time.

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4( 23(1
6ROHQRLG YDOYH

2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
'LVSOD\V
IXQFWLRQ IURP
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ

([HFXWLRQ WLPH 4/$

&/26(

4/(!
23(1
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV
)% 21
4/6
)DXOW
)&
6WDWXV
)2

$EEUHYLDWLRQV
2))
)&)HHGEDFN&/26('
21 !

)&
)2)HHGEDFN23(1 ([WHQGHG FRQWURO
)2

Figure 4-29 Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

116 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-21 Solenoid valve control function settings

Solenoid valve Description

OFF Control command OFF (CLOSED) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON (OPEN) (connection with any socket, usually with socket "Enabled control
command - ON >")
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode • Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules is also effected
from control function by the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does
not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)

4.3.2.14 "Positioner" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners / actuators with this function. The positioner is moved
into the corresponding end position with the "OPEN" and "CLOSED" control commands and is
deactivated via its limit switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active). The response of the
limit / torque switches must be passed to SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.

Control commands
• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates contactor control QE1 until "End position OPEN" is reached
(Feedback OPEN)
• CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE2 until "End position CLOSED" is
reached (Feedback CLOSED)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls. The drive remains in the present position.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 117
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Function schematic

7RUTXH VZLWFK
72 7&

0RWRU VKDIW ZLWK VSULQJV

DW WKH EHJLQQLQJ DQG HQG
23(1 &/26(' )&
)2 /LPLW VZLWFK

3RVLWLRQHU

*HDU

23(1 &/26('

Figure 4-30 Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners

Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is
switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the "OFF" control command.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from
one direction of travel to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Note
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated limit switch when the
torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is connected! In this case, the positioner is
switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault - stalled positioner." If both limit switches
respond simultaneously (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is switched off immediately with the
fault message 'Fault - double 1'. If both torque switches respond at the same time (FO=0 and
FC=0), the positioner is immediately switched off with the fault message "Fault - double 0." If the
end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the positioner is switched
off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault."

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

118 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4( 23(1
3RVLWLRQHU
21
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ 4(
&/26('
2)) 1RQPDLQWDLQHG
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
IXQFWLRQIURP 'LVSOD\V
FRQWUROIXQFWLRQ 4/(
&/26('

/RDG W\SH 4/$ 6WRS

4/(!
)HHGEDFN WLPH 23(1
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV
)% 21 ([HFXWLRQ WLPH

,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH
4/6
)& )DXOW

)2 6WDWXV
21
7& &/26('

2))
72 6723

21 !
23(1

$EEUHYLDWLRQV 3RVLWLRQHU FORVHV

3RVLWLRQHU RSHQV
)%21)HHGEDFN21
)&
([WHQGHG FRQWURO

)&)HHGEDFN&/26(' )2

7&
)2)HHGEDFN23(1
72

7& 7RUTXH&/26('
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH DFWLYH
727RUTXH23(1

Figure 4-31 Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 119
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:

Table 4-22 Types of positioner control

Type TC FC FO TO
Tripping Torque closed Limit closed Limit open Torque open
Positioner 1 — X X —
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or
FC (CLOSED).
Positioner 2 X X X X
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC
(CLOSED) and response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)
Positioner 3 X X X —
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN). After
reaching end position (CLOSED), the respective
torque switch TC must also respond after the limit
switch FC has responded.
Positioner 4 — X X X
After reaching the end position FC (CLOSED). After
reaching end position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch FO must also respond after the limit
switch TO has responded.
Positioner 5 Antivalent active Antivalent active
After reaching the end position or the torque. The
valve actuator is monitored either just with the
limit switches or just with the torque switches. The
switches are implemented as change-over con‐
tacts and are checked for antivalence. In the case
of non-antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and TC=0),
SIMOCODE pro detects an open circuit and deacti‐
vates the positioner with the fault message "Fault
- Antivalence"

Note
The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to the inputs of the basic
unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the limit switches must be 1-active.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

120 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-23 Positioner control function settings

Positioner Description
ON < Control command ON < (CLOSED) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled
control command - ON <" socket)
OFF Control command STOP (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command - OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON (OPEN) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled con‐
trol command - ON >" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status
- current flowing" socket)
FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSED" (connection with any socket, usually with
the socket of an input to which the limit switch is wired.)
FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with any socket, usually with the
socket of an input to which the limit switch is wired.)
TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSED" (connection with any socket, usually with the
socket of an input to which the torque switch is wired.)
TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with any socket, usually with the
socket of an input to which the torque switch is wired.)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from con‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules is also
trol function effected by the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping
directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SI‐
MOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)

4.3.2.15 "Soft starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW soft
starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to the bus.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 121
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates contactor controls QE1 and QE4.
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates contactor control QE4. When the signal "Feedback ON" has
expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run
down via the soft starter.
• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an
acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor.
2. Assign contactor control QE4 to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft starter
is to be controlled.
3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4. Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.
5. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
6. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time" parameter in
SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the soft run-down time of the soft starter.

Note
If the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit is used, an additional multifunction module is required for
this control function.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

122 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4(
1HWZRUN FRQWDFWRU
6RIW VWDUWHU

0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG 4( PV
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH 4(
21
IXQFWLRQ IURP
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ 'LVSOD\V
/RDG W\SH 4/$ 2))

4/(!
)HHGEDFN WLPH 21 !
$X[LOLDU\ FRQWURO LQSXWV
([HFXWLRQ WLPH
)% 21
4/6
)DXOW

6WDWXV
2))

21 !
)HHGEDFN 21

Figure 4-32 Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-24 Soft starter settings

Soft starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control
command OFF" socket)
ОN > Control command ON (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control com‐
mand ON >" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket , usually with
socket "Status - current flowing")
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from con‐ • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
trol function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping
directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SI‐
MOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 123
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Soft starter Description

Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time At least ≥ soft run-down time
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)

4.3.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter including an
additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to
the bus. SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation of the motor (forwards and
backwards).

Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates contactor controls QE1 and QE4 (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates contactor controls QE2 and QE4 (counterclockwise, i.e. reverse).
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates contactor control QE4. When the "Feedback ON" signal is no
longer issued, contactor control QE1 / QE2 is deactivated 3 s later to leave enough time for
a soft run-down via the soft starter.
• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an
acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
Description of functions of control stations (Page 71)). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be
connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:
• Via the "OFF" control command
• Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from
one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

124 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor (right).
2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor (left).
3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft
starter should be controlled.
4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5. Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.
6. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
7. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.

Schematic

&RQWURO FRPPDQGV &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ&RQWURO
4(
6RIW VWDUWHU ZLWK 5,*+7
21 UHYHUVLQJ FRQWDFWRU 4(
0RWRU SURWHFWLRQ /()7
2))
1RQPDLQWDLQHG 4( PV
FRPPDQG PRGH
21 !
&KDQJHRYHU 4(
FRPPDQG 6DYLQJ 21
'LVSOD\V
6HSDUDWH IDLOVDIH
4/(
IXQFWLRQ IURP 21
FRQWURO IXQFWLRQ 4/$ 2))
/RDG W\SH
)HHGEDFN 4/(!
21 !
)% 21
)HHGEDFN WLPH 4/6
)DXOW

([HFXWLRQ WLPH 6WDWXV

21
,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH

2))

21 !
)HHGEDFN 21 ,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH
([WHQGHG FRQWURO
DFWLYH

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 125
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Figure 4-33 Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function, "Protection /
Control" function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Table 4-25 Soft starter with reversing contactor settings

Soft starter with reversing con‐ Description

tactor
ОN > Control command ON > (clockwise) (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled
control command - ON >" socket)
OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket, usually with "Enabled control com‐
mand OFF" socket)
ON < Control command ON < (counterclockwise) (connection with any socket, usually with
"Enabled control command - ON <" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket, usually with "Status -
current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Saving change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also af‐
control function fects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault mes‐
sages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly
affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMO‐
CODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-rela‐
ted tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can choose between:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter Application selection, settings and definitions of control
functions (Page 85))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Execution time ≥ Soft run-down time
Range 0 to 6553.5s (default: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

126 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

4.3.3 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions

Table 4-26 Active control stations of control functions

Designation / control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ОN > ON >>
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Direct starter 1) 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter 2) - CCW OFF CW -
Dahlander starter 2) - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Pole-changing starter 2)
- - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Solenoid valve 2)
- - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 2)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 2 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 3 2)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 4 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 5 2)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Soft starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ - CCW OFF CW -
tor 2)

Table 4-27 Contactor control with control functions

Designation / control function Control station

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - Active - -
Direct starter 1) 2) 3)
ON - - - -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) CW CCW - - -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) ON pulse - OFF pulse - -
Star-delta starter 2) 3) Star contactor Delta contactor Line contactor - -
Star-delta reversing starter 2) Star contactor Delta contactor RIGHT line LEFT line contac‐ -
contactor tor
Dahlander starter 2) FAST SLOW Star contactor - -
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 2) CW-FAST CW-SLOW Star contactor CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
FAST
Pole-changing starter 2) FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing starter 2)
CW-FAST CW-SLOW - CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 127
Parameters
4.3 Motor control

Designation / control function Control station

Solenoid valve 2) OPEN - - - -
Positioner 1 2)
OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 2 2)
OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 3 2) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 4 2)
OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 5 2) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Soft starter 2) 3)
ON line contac‐ - Reset ON command -
tor
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ RIGHT line con‐ LEFT line con‐ Reset ON command -
tor 2) tactor tactor

Table 4-28 Lamp control with control functions

Designation / control function Lamp control

QLE << (ON <<) QLE < (ON <) QLA (OFF) QLE < (ON >) QLE >> (ON >>)
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Direct starter 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter 2) - CCW OFF CW -
Dahlander starter 2)
- - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Pole-changing starter 2)
- - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Solenoid valve 2)
- - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 2)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 2 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 3 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 4 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 5 2)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Soft starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ - CCW OFF CW -
tor 2)

1) SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

2) SIMOCODE pro V basic units
3) SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

128 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.1 Ground fault monitoring

4.4.1.1 Ground-fault monitoring

Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to:
• Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
• Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
• Perform maintenance to meet all demands.
In particular, ground-fault monitoring is used in conjunction with 3UL23 residual current
transformers to monitor systems where environmental conditions increase the chance of fault
currents.

Internal ground-fault monitoring

SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation
current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible residual
current or ground fault.
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring
modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems that are either
grounded solidly or with low impedance.

NOTICE
Star-delta connection
Spurious tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

External ground-fault monitoring

The external ground-fault monitoring is normally used in the following cases:
• in cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
• in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example, for
condition monitoring.
With ground-fault detection using the residual current transformer 3UL23, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value to define freely selectable warning
and trip levels in a wide range 30 mA to 40 A.
Method of operation:
The main conductors and, if present, the neutral conductor to which the load is connected, are
routed through the opening of the residual current transformer 3UL23. Its secondary winding
is connected to the ground-fault module.
If an insulation fault occurs, for example, a residual current arises between the incoming and the
outgoing currents that the ground-fault module evaluates via the residual current transformer.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 129
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

For maximum plant availability, the ground-fault module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the residual
current transformer 3UL23 were developed with the following design goals:
• High measuring accuracy: The ground-fault module in conjunction with the residual current
transformer 3UL23 achieves a measuring accuracy of ±7.5 %. This enables set limit values to
be monitored very precisely. Spurious tripping caused by measuring errors is minimized. The
combination of ground-fault module and residual current transformer 3UL23 is designed so
that a warning or alarm is triggered at the latest upon exceeding the set limit values. To
achieve this, slightly higher residual currents than those actually measured are displayed and
compared with the set limit values. The measuring accuracy is -15 % to 0 % of the value
displayed. This takes into account the measuring accuracy of monitoring relay and residual
current transformer.
• Settable prewarning and trip levels: The threshold levels for the residual current are defined
over a very wide range of 30 mA to 40 A. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a
prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized, including a delay.
• Permanent self-monitoring: The permanent self-monitoring of the ground-fault
module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the connected transformer ensures reliable monitoring of
the function. The connected 3UL23 residual current transformer is also permanently
monitored for open-circuit or short-circuit. This means cyclic manual tests to verify the
function are obsolete.
• Settable active status and delay times of the residual current protection. Depending on the
application, the monitoring function can be active permanently, only when the motor is
running, or only after the motor has started. This permits the suppression of residual currents
that are only measured during motor starting due to high starting currents. Short-term
residual currents or immitted interference can be easily suppressed by means of the
adjustable tripping delay time.
Use of the residual current transformers 3UL22 and 3UL23:
• Use the residual current transformer 3UL23 to detect residual currents with the ground-fault
module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0. The residual current transformer 3UL23 is suitable for detecting
pure AC residual currents and AC residual currents with a pulsating DC component.

Note
Precondition for using a 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, with at least product
version *E10* (from 09/2013) or a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit with at least product
version E04*.

• Use the 3UL22 residual current transformer to detect residual currents with the
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module.

Note
Only monitoring of the residual current trip level possible
With this combination, it is only possible to monitor a trip level of the residual current. Measured
values are then not available for the residual current.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

130 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Note
Precondition for using a 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit, at least version *E02*
or later (from 04/2005).

DANGER
No personal or fire protection!
The ground-fault modules 3UF75* monitor that devices and systems are functioning correctly.
They are not suitable for personal protection or protection from fires.

4.4.1.2 Limits of fault current measurement

In the event of increasing primary currents, imbalances in the cable routing and current loads in
individual cables increasingly cause what appear to be residual currents that are detected by the
evaluation units. Spurious tripping may therefore occur if excessively low monitoring limit
values have been set at high primary currents. Because of these tolerances in the configuration,
the measuring accuracy no longer corresponds to the stated range of ±7.5 %. To avoid spurious
tripping, we recommend setting the limit values to the minimum values listed in the following
graphic, depending on the applicable primary current.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 131
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Minimum adjustable parameters trip level earth fault protection for all transformer sizes at 50/60 Hz

Minimum adjustable limit IႣ [mA]

Rated current [A]

If monitoring is required within limit values that are lower than those recommended, we
recommend the use of delay times, particularly if spurious tripping occurs exclusively during
motor startup. If delay times do not lead to the desired result, the use of shield sleeves may
considerably lower the minimum possible monitoring limit.
You will find more information in Chapters "2.5.2 Installation specifications" and
"2.5.3 Optimization options" in the Manual 3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16367/man).
The monitored current waveforms also have a strong influence on the measuring accuracy. In
the case of loads with generalized phase control, deviations from the measuring accuracy can
occur when monitoring for high residual current limits. The cause of this is the extreme
difference between the monitored rms values and the peak values of the residual current. The
more extreme the generalized phase control, the shorter the time during which current flows,
and the lower the resulting rms value. To achieve and monitor a high rms value in such a case,
an extremely high peak value of the residual current is necessary. In the case of high currents,
current transformers tend towards saturation in which a further increase in current on the
primary side does not result in an equivalent increase on the secondary side. In the case of
extreme peak values of the residual current, the measuring accuracy suffers as a result of this
principle. Due to the great difference between the peak value and the rms value, monitoring for
lower limits is useful.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

132 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.1.3 Internal ground-fault monitoring when using a 2nd generation current / voltage
measuring module

Settings
You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring the
ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will respond.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

4(
4(
4(
&XUUHQW IURP 7ULSSLQJ
4(
FXUUHQWYROWDJH (DUWKIDXOWPRQLWRULQJ
4(
PHDVXULQJPRGXOH
(YHQW,QWHUQDOHDUWKIDXOW
,QWHUQDOHDUWKIDXOW
5HVSRQVH GHOD\
(YHQW:DUQLQJLQWHUQDOHDUWKIDXOW
(DUWKIDXOWFXUUHQW

([WHUQDOHDUWKIDXOW

Figure 4-34 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring the
ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will respond.
The lowest value for internal ground-fault monitoring that can be set as the warning and trip
level is 10% of the set rated motor current Is.

Trip level 10 to 120 % of ls in steps of 1% (default: 30)

Warning level 10 to 120 % of ls in steps of 1% (default: 30)

Two use cases are distinguished depending on the effective motor current through the
measuring module:
• Normal stationary use case up to 1.2 x rated motor current Is: Residual currents greater than
the value of the set trip/warning levels are detected. Ground-fault monitoring fulfills the
accuracy requirements of IEC 60947-1 Class CI-B.
• Temporary starting or overload operation greater than 1.2 x rated motor current Is:
Responsiveness in the overload range of > 1.2 x rated motor current is reduced to reduce false
tripping. Residual currents > I_trip_level + 12.5% x (I_max - 120% x Is) are detected.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 133
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

The following levels of accuracy apply to motor currents in the range from 20% x Iu to 120% x Is:
• I_Fault_Rated in the range 30% to 120% x Is: Accuracy of the detected residual current with
warning or trip level: ±10% according to IEC 60947-1, Annex T, Class CI-A
• I_Fault_Rated in the range 15% to 30% x Is: Accuracy of the detected residual current with
warning or trip level: ±25% according to IEC 60947-1, Annex T, Class CI-B
• I_Fault_Rated in the range 10% to 15% x Is: No type testing according to IEC 60947-1

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-29 Response to "trip level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-30 Response to "warning level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X
signal X (d)
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.1 s)

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current:

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default: 5 %

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

134 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.1.4 Internal ground-fault monitoring when using a current measuring module or a 1st
generation current / voltage measuring module

Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond to an internal ground fault:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

4(
&XUUHQW IURP 4(
6XPPDWLRQ FXUUHQW 4(
(DUWKIDXOW PRQLWRULQJ 7ULSSLQJ
WUDQVIRUPHU 4(
(DUWKIDXOW PRGXOH 4(
,QWHUQDO HDUWK IDXOW 5HVSRQVHGHOD\
6HH 7DEOH UHVSRQVH
(YHQW ([WHUQDO
HDUWK IDXOW
([WHUQDO HDUWK IDXOW
(DUWK)DXOWFXUUHQW
/DVW(DUWK)DXWO7ULSSLQJ&XUUHQW
Figure 4-35 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 4-31 "Internal ground-fault monitoring" response

Response Internal ground fault

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

You can activate internal ground-fault monitoring by parameterization. It covers two different
operating conditions:
• Normal operation up to 2 x Is. The actual operating current must be smaller than twice the
current setting Is. Residual currents of > 30 % of the current setting Is are detected.
• Start-up or overload operation to 2 x Is. The actual operating current is greater than 2x the
current setting Is. Residual currents of > 15 % of the effective motor current will be detected.

4.4.1.5 External ground-fault monitoring with a 3UF7500 ground-fault module and 3UL22
differential current transformer

Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond to an external ground fault.
You will find more information in Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
Important notes (Page 7).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 135
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4(
4(
(DUWKIDXOW PRQLWRULQJ 4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
&XUUHQW IURP 4(
5HVLGXDOFXUUHQW ,QWHUQDO HDUWK IDXOW
WUDQVIRUPHU (YHQW ([WHUQDO
(DUWKIDXOW PRGXOH HDUWK IDXOW
5HVSRQVHGHOD\
([WHUQDO HDUWK IDXOW 6HH 7DEOH 5HVSRQVHGHOD\
(YHQW :DUQLQJ
H[WHUQDO HDUWK IDXOW
Figure 4-36 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 4-32 "External ground-fault monitoring" response

Response External ground fault

deactivated -
signal X (d)
warn X
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s) 1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

If the response is set to "signal", the message "External ground fault" is generated for a ground
fault.
If the response is set to "warn", the message "Warning external ground fault" is generated for a
ground fault.

4.4.1.6 External ground-fault monitoring with a 3UF7510 ground-fault module and 3UL23
residual current transformer

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

136 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4(
4(
(DUWKIDXOW PRQLWRULQJ 4(
7ULSSLQJ 4(
&XUUHQWIURP 4(
UHVLGXDOFXUUHQW
,QWHUQDO (DUWK )DXOW
WUDQVIRUPHU
(YHQW([WHUQDO(DUWK)DXOW
HDUWKIDXOWPRGXOH
5HVSRQVH GHOD\
([WHUQDO(DUWK)DXOW VHH WDEOH UHVSRQVHGHOD\
(YHQW:DUQLQJ([WHUQDO(DUWK)DXOW
(DUWK)DXOWFXUUHQW
/DVW(DUWK)DXWO7ULSSLQJ&XUUHQW

Figure 4-37 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Trip level, warning level

Trip level: 30 mA ... 40 A in 10 mA increments (default: 1000 mA)

Warning level: 30 mA ... 40 A in 10 mA increments (default: 500 mA)

Trip level activity, warning level

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level / warning level will be active:

• Always (on) Trip level / warning level is always active, regardless

of whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level is only active when the
motor is running
• when the motor is on, except TPF, with Trip level / warning level is only active when the
startup override (run+) motor is running and starting has been completed

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-33 Response to "trip level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Trip level

signal X (d)
warn —
trip X

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 137
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Response Trip level

delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s) 1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-34 Response to "warning level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.1 s) 1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current:

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default: 5 %

Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a sensor fault. Open circuit and short-
circuit to 3UL23 residual current transformer are recognized as sensor faults.

Response Sensor fault

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip X

4.4.2 Current limit monitoring

4.4.2.1 Description of functions of current limit monitoring

Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload protection.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

138 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely selectable upper
and lower current limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and
delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.
The motor current is measured using current measuring modules or the current / voltage
measuring modules.

4(
4(
&XUUHQW OLPLWV 4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
4(
7ULS OHYHO ,!

5HVSRQVH ZKHQ ,! 6HH

(YHQW
WDEOHV
7ULS OHYHO ,!
'HOD\ ZKHQ ,!
&XUUHQW ,BPD[ IURP
&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ
&XUUHQW RU :DUQLQJ OHYHO ,!
PRGXOH RU
&XUUHQWYROWDJH 6HH
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ ,! WDEOHV (YHQW
PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH
:DUQLQJ OHYHO ,!
'HOD\ ZKHQ ,!

7ULS OHYHO ,

6HH (YHQW
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ ,
WDEOHV 7ULS OHYHO ,
'HOD\ ZKHQ ,

:DUQLQJ OHYHO ,
6HH (YHQW
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ , WDEOHV
:DUQLQJ OHYHO ,
'HOD\ ZKHQ ,

+\VWHUHVLV

8SSHU OLPLW
/RZHU OLPLW
Figure 4-38 "Current Limits" function block

4.4.2.2 I> (upper limit)

Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I > (upper limit), two different response levels can be
parameterized and monitored: I> (upper limit) trip level, I> (upper limit) warning level

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 139
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring
responds.

Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the startup procedure has
been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the trip level is undershot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-35 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I >

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-36 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I >

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I> (upper limit):

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default: 5 %

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

140 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.2.3 I< (lower limit)

Trip level / warning level

When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response levels (trip level / warning
level) can be parameterized and monitored:
• I< (lower limit) trip level
• I< (lower limit) warning level
If the current of the phases (Imax) drops below the response level, the current limit monitor
responds.

Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the startup procedure has
been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the trip level is undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-37 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I <

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is undershot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-38 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I <

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 141
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits I< (lower limit):

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default: 5 %

4.4.3 Voltage monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or
a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching
a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measurement is performed using current / voltage measuring modules. This is based on
the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.

Note
Please note that only phase voltages are available with SIMOCODE pro V PB basic units up to
version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be calculated from the phase voltage
using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage * 1.73.
From version *E07* onward, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can be used as the basis
for monitoring.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

142 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4(
4(
4(
9ROWDJH PRQLWRULQJ 7ULSSLQJ
4(
4(
7ULS OHYHO 8

7ULS OHYHO DFWLYLW\

6HH
5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO (YHQW
WDEOHV
7ULS OHYHO 8
9ROWDJH 8PLQ
7ULS GHOD\
YLD
&XUUHQWYROWDJH
PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH
:DUQLQJ OHYHO 8

:DUQLQJ OHYHO DFWLYLW\

6HH
5HVSRQVH DW ZDUQLQJ OHYHO (YHQW
WDEOHV
:DUQLQJ OHYHO 8
:DUQLQJ GHOD\

+\VWHUHVLV

+\VWHUHVLV IRU YROWDJH FRV SKL SRZHU

Figure 4-39 "Voltage Monitoring" function block

Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and signal the
further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the
fuses in the main circuit.

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level). If the current of
one or more phases undershoots the response level or the warning level, voltage monitoring
responds.

Trip level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default: 0)

Warning level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default: 0)

Trip level activity, warning level

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level / warning level will be active:

• Always (on)1) Trip level / warning level is always active, regardless

of whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) (default) Trip level / warning level always effective, regardless
of whether the motor is running or at a standstill;
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 143
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level only active if the motor is
ON and not in the test position
1) When using the SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit (product version *E03* and higher) with a
current/voltage measuring module

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is undershot. See also
"Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-39 "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is undershot. See also
"Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-40 "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1% (de‐
fault: 5 %)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

144 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.4 Cos phi monitoring

Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application
is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate
significantly. The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active power
does, particularly in the low-end performance range of a motor. Therefore, power factor
monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between no-load operation and faults, e.g.
a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip level or warning level is undershot, a signal is
generated or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.

4(
4(
&RV SKL PRQLWRULQJ 4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
4(
7ULS OHYHO

&RV SKL IURP 6HH (YHQW

5HVSRQVH
WDEOHV
&XUUHQWYROWDJH 7ULS OHYHO FRV SKL
PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH 'HOD\

:DUQLQJ OHYHO
6HH
5HVSRQVH (YHQW
WDEOHV
:DUQLQJ OHYHO FRV SKL
'HOD\

+\VWHUHVLV

+\VWHUHVLV IRU YROWDJH FRV SKL SRZHU
VHH 9ROWDJH 0RQLWRULQJ IXQFWLRQ EORFN
Figure 4-40 "Cos Phi Monitoring" function block

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level / warning level) for cos phi
monitoring.

Trip level 0 to 100 % (default: 0 %)

Warning level 0 to 100 % (default: 0 %)
0 % = cos phi = 0.00
50 % = cos phi = 0.50
100 % = cos phi = 1.00

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 145
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the startup procedure has
been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the set trip level is undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-41 "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the set warning level is undershot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-42 "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

4.4.5 Active power monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power. For
example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn from the
active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a motor is a
precise reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in increased wear
of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for
example, be a sign of no-load motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro allows two-phase active power monitoring for freely selectable upper and lower
limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a prewarning or trip level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
The active power is measured by means of current / voltage measuring modules.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

146 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4(
3RZHU PRQLWRULQJ 4(
4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
7ULS OHYHO 3! 4(
6HH (YHQW
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ 3!
WDEOHV
7ULS OHYHO 3!
'HOD\ ZKHQ 3!

:DUQLQJ OHYHO 3!
$FWLYH SRZHU IURP
&XUUHQWYROWDJH 6HH
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ 3! WDEOHV
(YHQW
PHDVXULQJ PRGXOH
:DUQLQJ OHYHO 3!
'HOD\ ZKHQ 3!

7ULS OHYHO 3
6HH
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ 3 WDEOHV (YHQW
7ULS OHYHO 3
'HOD\ ZKHQ 3

:DUQLQJ OHYHO 3
6HH
5HVSRQVH ZKHQ 3 WDEOHV
(YHQW
:DUQLQJ OHYHO 3
'HOD\ ZKHQ 3

+\VWHUHVLV

8SSHU OLPLW
/RZHU OLPLW
+\VWHUHVLV IRU YROWDJH FRV SKL SRZHU
VHH 9ROWDJH 0RQLWRULQJ IXQFWLRQ EORFN
Figure 4-41 "Power Monitoring" function block

Trip level, warning level

With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.

Trip level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000 kW)
• P < (lower limit)
Warning level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000 kW)
• P < (lower limit)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 147
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the startup procedure has
been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored variable
overshoots/undershoots the set trip level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
notes (Page 7).

Table 4-43 "Trip level" response for active power monitoring

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored variable
overshoots/undershoots the set warning level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
notes (Page 7).

Table 4-44 "Warning level" response for active power monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

148 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.6 0/4 - 20 mA monitoring

Description
With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring and monitoring
further process variables as desired. For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a
pump against dry operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be
switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter must be cleaned.

0RQLWRU P$ 4(

4(
7ULS OHYHO P$ ! 4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
7ULS OHYHO DFWLYLW\
4(
5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO
6HH (YHQW
WDEOHV
7ULS GHOD\ 7ULS OHYHO
P$ !
0DUNLQJ WULS OHYHO

:DUQLQJ OHYHO P$ !

:DUQLQJ OHYHO DFWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH DW ZDUQLQJ OHYHO

6HH
(YHQW
WDEOHV
:DUQLQJ GHOD\ :DUQLQJ OHYHO
P$ !
$QDORJ LQSXW RI WKH 0DUNLQJ ZDUQLQJ OHYHO
DQDORJ PRGXOH
$0 ,QSXW
7ULS OHYHO P$

7ULS OHYHO DFWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO

7ULS GHOD\
6HH (YHQW
WDEOHV
0DUNLQJ WULS OHYHO 7ULS OHYHO
P$
:DUQLQJ OHYHO P$

:DUQLQJ OHYHO DFWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH DW ZDUQLQJ OHYHO

:DUQLQJ GHOD\ 6HH

WDEOHV (YHQW
0DUNLQJ ZDUQLQJ OHYHO :DUQLQJ OHYHO
P$

+\VWHUHVLV

Figure 4-42 "0/4 to 20 mA monitoring" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 149
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer

(standardized 0/4-20 mA output signal). The analog signals are routed via the analog module to
the 0/4-20 mA (AM1) and 0/4-20 mA (AM2) monitoring function blocks (AM2 only in
conjunction with the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic units).

Trip level, warning level

With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.

Trip level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 ... 23.6 mA / 4.0 … 22.9 mA (default: 0.0 / 4.0
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit) mA)
Warning level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 ... 23.6 mA / 4.0 … 22.9 mA (default: 0.0 / 4.0
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit) mA)

Trip level activity, warning level

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level / warning level will be active:

• Always (on) Trip level / warning level is always active, regard‐

less of whether the motor is running or at a stand‐
still
• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level / warning level is always active regard‐
less of whether the motor is running or at a stand‐
still, with the exception of "TPF," i.e. motor feeder
is in the test position
• If motor is on, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level only active if the motor is
ON and not in the test position
• If motor is on except TPF, with startup Trip level / warning level is only active when the
override (run+) motor is running, the startup procedure has been
completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected

Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit)
Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored variable
overshoots/undershoots the set trip level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
notes (Page 7).

Table 4-45 "Trip level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

Response Trip level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

150 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Response Trip level

trip X
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit)
Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored variable
overshoots/undershoots the set warning level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
notes (Page 7).

Table 4-46 "Warning level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

Response Warning level

deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
trip —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

Marking
The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the Faults / Warnings online
dialog. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0/4 to 20 >"; range: maximum 10
characters.

Note
Changing the marking of Ethernet and PROFINET connections
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and reestablishes
them afterward.

Hysteresis for 0/4 to 20 mA

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:

Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15 % in steps of 1 % (default: 5 %)

Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for
example, by free limit monitors.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 151
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.7 Operation monitoring

4.4.7.1 Operation monitoring

Motor operation monitoring - use

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of startups in a defined time frame to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors
caused by running or being stopped for too long.
If an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be generated that indicates
maintenance or replacement of the motor in question is required. After the motor has been
replaced, the operating hours and stop times can be reset, for example.
To avoid excessive thermal loads and premature wear of the motor, it is possible to limit the
number of motor startups for a specifiable period. The number of still possible starts is available
in the SIMOCODE pro for further processing.
The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by prewarnings.

Note
Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored completely
in the device and/or transmitted to the automation system via the communication bus.

4(
7ULSSLQJ
4(
2SHUDWLRQ PRQLWRULQJ 4(
4(
2SHUDWLQJ KRXUV 4(

2SHUDWLQJ KRXUV OHYHO 6HH

WDEOH
5HVSRQVH (YHQW
2SHUDWLQJ KRXUV !

0RWRU VWRS WLPH

0RWRU VWRS WLPH OHYHO
&RQWURO 6HH
WDEOH
IXQFWLRQV 5HVSRQVH (YHQW 0RWRU VWRS WLPH !

1XPEHU RI VWDUWV
3HUPLVVLEOH VWDUWV
3HUPLVVLEOH VWDUWV

7LPH UDQJH IRU VWDUWV

(YHQW
5HVSRQVH DW RYHUVKRRW 6HH
WDEOH 1XPEHU RI VWDUWV !
6HH -XVW RQH VWDUW SRVVLEOH
5HVSRQVH DW SUHZDUQLQJ
WDEOH

,QWHUORFNLQJ WLPH 1R VWDUW SRVVLEOH

Figure 4-43 "Operation Monitoring" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

152 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Response

Table 4-47 "Operation monitoring" response

Response Operating hours moni‐ Stop time monitoring - Number of starts - over‐ Number of starts - pre‐
toring - level level shoot warning
deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)
signal X X X X
warn X X X X
trip — — X —

4.4.7.2 Operating hours monitoring

Motor operating hours monitoring - use

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.

Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.

Level 0 to 1193046 hours (default: 0 h)

Active status
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running
or not (operating state "ON").

Response
You can define the response to overshoot here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7) and Table
"Responses" in Chapter Operation monitoring (Page 152).

4.4.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring

Motor stop time monitoring - use

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that these
are always operated alternately. This prevents long motor stop times and reduces the risk of non-
availability.
The motor stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an interrupt,
thus initiating connection of the motor.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 153
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Level
The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring
function responds.

Level 0 to 65535 hours (default: 0 h)

Active status
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running
or not (operating state "ON").

Response
You can define the response to overshoot of the permissible stop time here:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Important notes (Page 7) and Table "Response
of operation monitoring" in Operation monitoring (Page 152).

4.4.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts

Number of starts monitoring - use

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is also particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.
The schematic below illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of starts:

6WDUW ZLWKLQ WKH WLPH IUDPH

7LPH IUDPH ([DPSOH
VWDUWV DOORZHG

3UHZDUQLQJ 2YHUVKRW
Figure 4-44 Monitoring the number of starts

Permissible starts
The maximum permissible number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for starts"
commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has been
executed, the "Just one start possible" pre-warning is generated.

Permissible 1 to 255 (default: 1)

starts:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

154 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is only
available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number of
available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - Actual value".

Time range 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default: 00:00:00)

for starts:

Active status
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running
or not (operating state "ON").

Response to overshoot
You can define the response to overshoot of the number of starts within the time range for starts
here:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7) and Table
"Responses" in Chapter Operation monitoring (Page 152).

Response to pre-warning
You can define the response after the penultimate start here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7) and Table
"Responses" in Chapter Operation monitoring (Page 152).

Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible start,
this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response to overshoot -
tripping" has been set. "Fault - No. of starts >" will be displayed and the set interlocking time
activated.

Interlocking 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default: 00:00:00)

time

4.4.8 Temperature monitoring (analog)

Schematic and characteristic curve

Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and gearbox
temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as NTC, KTY
83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: Separate levels for
warning and tripping temperature can be set.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 155
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module.

7HPSHUDWXUH PRQLWRULQJ
4(
4(
7ULS OHYHO 7ULSSLQJ
4(

5HVSRQVH DW WULS OHYHO 6HH 4(

7DEOH 4(
5HVSRQVH
0DUNLQJ
(YHQW
0D[ WHPSHUDWXUH RI DOO
VHQVRU PHDVXULQJ FLUFXLWV 7HPSHUDWXUH PRGXOH
RI WKH WHPSHUDWXUH PRGXOH :DUQLQJ OHYHO 7ULS OHYHO 7!

5HVSRQVH DW ZDUQLQJ OHYHO 6HH 7HPSHUDWXUH PRGXOH

7DEOH :DUQLQJ OHYHO 7!
5HVSRQVH
0DUNLQJ

+\VWHUHVLV

Figure 4-45 "Temperature Monitoring" function block

Settings

Table 4-48 "Temperature monitoring" settings

Temperature Description
Trip level T > -273° - 65262°C (default: -273°)
Response to trip level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and
Chapter Important notes (Page 7))
Marking for trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: Maximum 10 characters
Warning level T > -273° - 65262°C (default: -273°)
Response to warning level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and
Chapter Important notes (Page 7))
Marking warning level T > No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: maximum 10 characters.
Hysteresis 0° to 255°C in steps of 1°C (default: 5°C)

Trip level activity, warning level

The trip level / warning level is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or
not (operating state "ON").

Response
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

156 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the
temperature has overshot the warning level / trip level.

Table 4-49 "Overtemperature" response

Response Warning level T > Trip level T >

deactivated X (d) —
signal X X (d)
warn X —
trip — X

Note
With motors for Ex e applications, the response must be set to "trip"!

Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault must
be set in the Temperature module inputs (TM1 / 2 inputs) function block if temperature
monitoring is used.

Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable number
of free limit monitors can be connected to the temperature module inputs (TM1 / 2 inputs)
function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the
temperature monitoring function block.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 157
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

4.4.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling
circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew every time the enabling circuit
closes. This function supports you in complying with test intervals that require verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts perform safety-
related tripping. Whether the relay contacts of the enabling circuit actually open or not, can only
be established via a change in the switching state of the contacts.
The "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function supports the system operator in the
monitoring of the time that has elapsed since the last connection of the enabling circuit.
When the adjustable limit has been reached, the set reaction follows (deactivated, signal, warn;
see response). This is logged in the event memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in
detecting faults by conducting regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on
regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be
safety-related.

Note
The function "Time until test" is not a safety-related function

0RQLWRULQJ LQWHUYDO
IRU PDQGDWRU\ WHVWLQJ

5HVSRQVH 7LPH XQWLO WHVW

,QWHUYDO IRU PDQGDWRU\ WHVWLQJ 7HVW UHTXLUHG

Figure 4-46 "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function block

Response
You can set the response here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Table 4-50 "Safety-related tripping" response

Response
deactivated X
signal X
warn X
trip —

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

158 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.4 Monitoring functions

Test interval
Adjustable limit value for the interval for mandatory testing:

Test interval: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0)

4.4.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for monitoring functions:

0HDVXUHG
YDOXH

7ULSOHYHO! +\VWHUHVLV

:DUQLQJOHYHO! +\VWHUHVLV

:DUQLQJOHYHO +\VWHUHVLV
7ULSOHYHO +\VWHUHVLV

7LPH

6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO!

7LPH

6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO!

7LPH

6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO!
7LPH

6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO!
7LPH

7KHK\VWHUHVHVDUHDOZD\VEDVHGRQWKHUHVSHFWLYHO\VHWUHVSRQVHOHYHO
H[FHSWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
7KHWULSDQGZDUQLQJOHYHOHYHQWVFDQDOVREHGHOD\HGLQGLYLGXDOO\

Figure 4-47 The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions

TL = Trip level (trip)

WL = Warning level (warn)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 159
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

4.5 Outputs

4.5.1 Overview of outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. They are the external SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, the
outputs are represented as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned to
any functions or events via connections.
Outputs include:
• Output terminals , located on the outside of basic unit, digital modules, and on the analog
module
• LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different statuses
• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the various types of output:

6,02&2'( SUR

3OXJV 2XWSXW 2XWSXW WHUPLQDOV

6,02&2'( SUR

3OXJV 2XWSXW /(' RSHUDWRU SDQHO

6,02&2'( SUR

3OXJV 2XWSXW '3 352),%86 '3

Figure 4-48 General representation of the various output types

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

160 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Scope and application

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying states or signaling via the
communication bus. The system provides different types of output depending on the device
series and the expansion modules in use:

Table 4-51 Outputs

Outputs SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Basic unit outputs (BU Out‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
puts)
Operator panel LEDs (OP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
LED)
Digital module 1 outputs — ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(DM1 Outputs)
Digital module 2 outputs — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(DM2 Outputs)
Analog module output — — — ✓ 2) ✓ 2) ✓ ✓
(AM1 output/AM2 output)
Acyclic send data (Acyclic ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
send)
OPC-UA send — — ✓ — — ✓ —
Cyclic send data (Cyclic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
send)

1) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 outputs are on the multifunction module.
2) only AM1 output available

4.5.2 Basic unit outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with two or three relay outputs. You can, for
example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the
function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the QE contactor controls
of the control function). The "BU Outputs" function block consists of:
• Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
• Three relays
• Output terminals.
In total, one function block "BU outputs" is available on the pro C, pro S, and pro V basic units.

Schematic
The following schematics show the "BU Outputs" function block:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 161
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

%8 2XWSXWV
7HUPLQDO QXPEHUV
2XW

2XW

2XW

2XWSXW WHUPLQDOV

Figure 4-49 "BU Outputs" function block, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V

6,02&2'( SUR6
%8 2XWSXWV
7HUPLQDO QXPEHUV
2XW

2XW

2XWSXW WHUPLQDOV

Figure 4-50 Function block "BU outputs," SIMOCODE pro S

Application examples
• Activation of the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can, for example, define which
relay output is used for activating the motor contactor in the motor feeder. To do this,
connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor activation of the control
function.
• Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can define, for example, which relay
outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps / LEDs that display the operating states of the
motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW...). To do this, connect the desired relay output to the
respective "QE..." contactor activation of the control function. These are provided specially
for activating lamps and LEDs. In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls
automatically signal the following using a 2-Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE... / QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs. By
referring to Table "Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions," you can determine which QE outputs are required for
which control function.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

162 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Settings

Table 4-52 Basic unit output settings

BU outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal (any socket , e.g. device inputs, PRO‐
FIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually from the QE contactor controls.

Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Application selection, settings and
definitions of control functions (Page 85).

4.5.3 Operator panel LEDs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely assignable LEDs.
The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used to display any status. For this, the inputs
(plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the
sockets for the status information of the control function).

Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and
configured in the device configuration!

The "OP LED" function block consists of:

• Four plugs, "OP LED green 1" to "OP LED green 4," corresponding to the green LEDs. The green
LEDs are optically / mechanically allocated to the buttons on the operator panel. They
normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.
• Three plugs, "OP LED yellow 1" to "OP LED yellow 3," corresponding to the yellow LEDs.
• Four green LEDs.
• Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
One "OP-LED" function block is available for the SIMOCODE pro C, pro S, pro V, pro V MR, pro V PN
and pro V EtherNet/IP basic units.

LEDs of the operator panel

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the LEDs:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 163
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

UHHQ UHHQ UHHQ UHHQ

7(67
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1 )$8/7

<HOORZ <HOORZ <HOORZ

Figure 4-51 LEDs of the operator panel

LEDs of the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the LEDs:

*UHHQ

Figure 4-52 LEDs of the operator panel with display

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:

23 /('
/('

*UHHQ

<HOORZ

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

164 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Figure 4-53 Schematic of the "OP LED" function block

Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the operator panel with
display. Status information can be read out here directly via the display. While it is still possible
to connect the corresponding three plugs via the software, they remain non-functional.

Application examples
• Displaying operating states:
You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating states (Fault, ON, OFF,
FAST, SLOW...). To do this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL." lamp control of the
control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected with the QL outputs. By referring to Table Active
control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control
functions (Page 127), you can determine which QL outputs are required for which control
functions.
• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.

Settings

Table 4-53 Operator panel LED settings

OP LED Description
Green 1 to Green 4 The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. "motor" operating state
feedback).
Yellow 1 to Yellow 3 1) The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. displays for status,
events, faults).
1) No function when using the operator panel with display

Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Application selection,
settings and definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 165
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

4.5.4 Digital module outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks, which are each
equipped with two relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM Outputs" function blocks) must be
connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).

Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) or
multifunction modules (MM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!

Each function block has:

• Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
• Two relays
• Output terminals.
The following are available:
• a "DM1 Outputs" function block on the pro S basic unit 1)
• two function blocks "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" on the basic units pro V.
Note
1) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 outputs are on the multifunction module.

Note
In addition to the two jointly-switched fail-safe enabling circuits, the fail-safe DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two standard relay outputs, the common
potential of which is switched off for safety reasons via an enabling circuit.
From a logical connection point of view, the standard relay outputs are always switched. The
state of the fail-safe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:

'0 2XWSXWV '0 2XWSXWV

2XW 2XW

2XWSXW WHUPLQDOV 2XWSXW WHUPLQDOV

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

166 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Figure 4-54 Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs" / "DM2 Outputs" function blocks

Application examples
• Activation of the motor contactor in the motor feeder:
You can, for example, define which relay output is to be used for activating the main
contactor in the motor feeder. To do this, connect the desired relay output to the
respective "QE" contactor control of the control function.
• Activation of lamps for displaying operating states:
You can define, for example, which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/
LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW ...). To do
this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the control
function.
• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the QE outputs. By
referring to Table Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions (Page 127), you can determine which QE outputs are
required for which control functions.

Settings

Table 4-54 "DM1 / DM2 Outputs" settings

"DM1 / DM2 Outputs" Description

Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks via
any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.
usually from the QE contactor controls.)

Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Application selection,
settings and definitions of control functions (Page 85).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 167
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

4.5.5 Analog module output

Description
You can use analog modules 1 and 2 to expand the SIMOCODE pro V High Performance Basic Unit
with one analog output in each case. The corresponding function blocks "AM1 Output" and
"AM2 Output" (AM2 Output only in conjunction with the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic
units) allow every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA
signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the function block is activated via the
"Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer value between 0 and 65535, an
equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent to the output terminals of the
analog module.

Note
The "AM1 Output" and "AM2 Output" function blocks can only be used if the analog module (AM)
is connected and configured in the device configuration.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 Output" function block:

$02XWSXW
DVVLJDQDORJYDOXH
6WDUWYDOXH
(QGYDOXH
ಹP$ 6LJQDO

Figure 4-55 Function block "AM1 - output"

Settings

Table 4-55 "Analog module output" settings

Signal/value Range
Assigned analog output value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
Output signal 0 to 20 mA (default) or 4 … 20 mA
Start value of value range 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
End value of value range 0 to 65535 (default: 0)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

168 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Note
Passive inputs
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each
input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the
output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a
current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End
value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the
maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

Application examples
1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor current range
The motor current ranges from 0 to 8 A. The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, the
present phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max)
are represented as a percentage of the parameterized current setting Is in accordance with the
selected range:
• 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Is
• 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Is
• The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1 % (see measured
values in data record 94, manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960)).

PRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$

HQWLUHUDQJH
PRWRUFXUUHQWRI,H
,1 ,H $

$, 1

W>V@

Figure 4-56 Application example: Motor current output - entire range

As a result,
• The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
• The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 169
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

$02XWSXW

$VVLJQHG
287
DQDORJ RXWSXW YDOXH 6WDUW YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH

0D[ FXUUHQW ,BPD[

(QG YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH 287

P$ 2XWSXW VLJQDO

Figure 4-57 Application example: Motor current output - output values to function block AM output

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 to 20 mA:

• 0 % motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
• 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 to 20 mA:
• 0 % motor current: 4 mA at the analog module output
• 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current range (overload
range)
The motor current ranges from 0 to 8 A. The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). However, only the
overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be displayed on an instrument via the analog module output. In
SIMOCODE pro, the present phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3,
max. current I_max) are represented as a percentage of the parameterized current setting Is in
accordance with the selected range:
• 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Is
• 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of Is
• The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1 % (see measured
values in data record 94, manual SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960)).

PRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$

3DUWLDOUDQJHRIWKHPRWRUFXUUHQW
2YHUORDGUDQJHಹGH,H
,1 ,H $

$, 1

W>V@

Figure 4-58 Application example: Motor current output - Overload range

As a result,
• The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 100
• The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

170 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

$02XWSXW

$VVLJQHG
287
DQDORJ RXWSXW YDOXH 6WDUW YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH

0D[ FXUUHQW ,BPD[

(QG YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH 287

P$ 2XWSXW VLJQDO

Figure 4-59 Application example: Motor current output - output value to function block AM1 output

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 to 20 mA:

• 100 % motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
• 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 to 20 mA:
• 100 % motor current: 4 mA at the analog module output
• 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

Note
(relating to examples 1 and 2):
In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the current setting Is. When
using the analog module output to display the present motor current on a connected pointer
instrument, the present motor current is always indicated as a percentage of the current setting.
If the selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer instrument can
display a percentage (% of Is) and an absolute value (e.g. in A).
In the case of motors / control functions with two speeds and, thus, two current settings (e.g.
pole-changing starters or Dahlander starters), the motor current is only shown on the pointer
instrument as a percentage of the present current setting Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the
two speeds (slow or fast) currently applies.

3) Output of any analog value from the automation system cyclically via the
communication bus
One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation system to SIMOCODE pro
via PROFIBUS; two words (2 times 2 bytes) can be transmitted via PROFINET. Any value can be
output as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word to the analog
module output. If the transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to 27648), this must be taken into
consideration when parameterizing:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 171
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

$02XWSXW

$VVLJQHG
287
DQDORJ RXWSXW YDOXH 6WDUW YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH

&\FOLF 5HFHLYH

(QG YDOXH RI YDOXH UDQJH 287

ZRUG F\FO IURP WKH 3/&
P$ 2XWSXW VLJQDO

Figure 4-60 Output of an analog value from the automation system

As a result,
• The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
• The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 27648.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 to 20 mA
• 0: 0 mA at the analog module output
• 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 to 20 mA
• 0: 4 mA at the analog module output
• 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.

4.5.6 Cyclic Send

Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred cyclically
to the automation system via the communication bus.
"Cyclic send" function blocks consist of
• 16 bits (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 9 words (= 18 bytes, for up to 9 analog values, freely parameterizable).
A total of nine "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 4/9, 10/19, 2-5, 6-9, 10-13, 14-17) are
available.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

172 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic send" function blocks:

&\FOLF6HQG &\FOLF6HQG &\FOLF6HQG

%LW %LW %\WH
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW &\FOLF6HQG

%\WH

&\FOLF6HQG &\FOLF6HQG
%\WH %\WH
%\WH
%\WH

&\FOLF6HQG

%\WH

&\FOLF6HQG

%\WH
%\WH
%\WH &\FOLF6HQG
%\WH
%\WH
%\WH

Figure 4-61 Schematic of the "Cyclic send" function blocks

Cyclic PROFIBUS DP services

Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every DP cycle.
The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends
the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Cyclic services for PROFINET / EtherNet/IP

The cyclic send data is exchanged between the IO Device / adapter (SIMOCODE pro) and the
IO Controller / scanner (automation system). The IO Controller sends the cyclic receive data to
SIMOCODE pro in each case. In response, SIMOCODE pro returns the cyclic send data.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 173
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Cyclic send data settings

The cyclic send data is divided up into the following ranges:
• Byte 0/1, bit 0 - bit 7: For assignment of the bits with any signals (e.g. device inputs, events,
faults)
• Bytes 2-19: For assignment with any analog values (length: 2 bytes, e.g. maximum
current I_max in %, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers) or floating-point
values (length: 4 bytes, only with current/voltage measuring module UM+, e.g. maximum
current I_max in A).
The number of available bytes depends on the basic type selected:
• Basic type 1 1): Bytes 2-9
• Basic type 2 2): Byte 2/3
• Basic type 3 3): Bytes 2-19
1) For all SIMOCODE pro V devices
2) For all SIMOCODE devices
3) For all SIMOCODE pro V PN(GP) devices and SIMOCODE pro V EIP devices
Byte 0 of the send data is already pre-assigned; byte 2/3 is pre-assigned with the max. current
I_max.
See also "Telegram description and data access" in the manual "SIMOCODE pro - Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743960)".

4.5.7 Acyclic Send

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information
to the PLC / PC via acyclic services. The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the
information to be transferred acyclically to the automation system via the communication bus.
The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective sockets.
The Acyclic Send function blocks consist of:
• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One output each to the communication bus
There are two "Acyclic send" function blocks.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

174 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic send" function blocks:

$F\FO6HQG $F\FO6HQG
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW

Figure 4-62 Function block "Acyclic send"

Acyclic services
Acyclic send data will only be transferred on request. The information (two bytes) can be found
in data record 203. This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of the communication bus.

Settings

Table 4-56 Acyclic send data settings

Acyclic send data Description

Byte 0 to 1, Bit 0 to bit 7 Setting and resetting of bits by means of any signal (any socket, e.g. device
inputs, send data, status information, events, etc.)

4.5.8 OPC-UA send

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send," it is possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information via
OPC UA.
With the "OPC UA Send" function block, you can specify which information is to be transferred.
The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective sockets.
The "OPC-UA send" function blocks each consist of eight bits (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for
binary information).
A total of two "OPC-UA Send" function blocks are available.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 175
Parameters
4.5 Outputs

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OPC-UA Send" function blocks:

23&8$6HQG 23&8$6HQG
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW

Figure 4-63 "OPC-UA send" function blocks

Settings

Table 4-57 OPC-UA Send Data settings

OPC-UA Send Data Description

Bytes 0 to 1, bits 0 to 7 Setting and resetting of bits by means of any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs,
send data, status information, events, etc.)

Note
Data record 203 can still be read by every master (PLC or PC) as acyclic send data.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

176 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

4.6 Inputs

4.6.1 Overview of inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within
SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks
and can be assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital modules
• Buttons on operator panels (one Test / Reset button, four freely parameterizable buttons),
and basic units (one Test / Reset button)
• Temperature module inputs
• Analog module inputs
• Inputs of the communication bus

Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various input types:

6,02&2'( SUR

,QSXW WHUPLQDOV ,QSXW

6RFNHWV

6,02&2'( SUR

%XWWRQV
&RQWURO FRPPDQGV ,QSXW
6RFNHWV
7HVW5HVHW

6,02&2'( SUR

352),%86 '3 '3 ,QSXW

6RFNHWV

Figure 4-64 General representation of the input types

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 177
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Scope and application

Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated
switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via appropriate
connections. The system has different inputs depending upon the device series:

Table 4-58 Inputs

Inputs SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN V EIP
Basic unit inputs (BU In‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
puts)
Operator panel buttons ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(OP Buttons)
Digital module 1 inputs — ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(DM1 Inputs)
Digital module 2 inputs — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(DM2 Inputs)
Temperature module in‐ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
puts (TM Inputs)
Analog module inputs — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(AM Inputs)
Acyclic receive (Acycl. re‐ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
ceive)
Cyclic receive (Cycl. re‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ceive)
Ethernet - OPC-UA Receive — — — — — ✓ —

1) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the inputs and the temperature input are on the
multifunction module.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

178 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

4.6.2 Basic unit inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs connected to common
potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the inputs.
These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of
the "BU Inputs" function block.
The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:
• Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets "BU
Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control Stations"
function block
• A socket for the "TEST / RESET" button:
The function of the "TEST / RESET" button is generally dependent upon the operating state of
the device:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST / RESET" button (e.g. operation of the
memory module and of the addressing plug).
See also Chapter Test / Reset (Page 195).
There is 1 "BU Inputs" function block.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:

%DVLF XQLW %8

7HUPLQDO
%8 ,QSXWV
QXPEHUV

,1

,1

,1

,1

%XWWRQ
7HVW5HVHW %8 7HVW5HVHW EXWWRQ

Figure 4-65 Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 179
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Application examples
The inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the start and stop buttons of the local
control station, which can then be assigned to the "Local Control Station" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate function blocks such as
"Reset" or "External Fault."

Power supply to the inputs

See Chapter on "Wiring basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module" in
SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Settings

Table 4-59 "Basic unit inputs" settings

Inputs Description
Debounce time You can set a debounce time for the inputs, if required. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
(default: 16 ms)

4.6.3 Operator panel buttons

Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 as well as the "TEST / RESET" button. Correspondingly,
the "OP Buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.

Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and
configured in the device configuration!

Note
The operator panel with display does not have a Test / Reset button. The allocated functions can
be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status
signal will then be available at the "OP Test / Reset Button" socket.

• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4: Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for
the motor feeder. Control commands can be, for example:
– Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor CCW (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor CW (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

180 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

However, buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands, and
can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of the respective function
block socket in SIMOCODE pro.
• "TEST / RESET" button. Operator control block: The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is
generally assigned to fixed functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests.
– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be picked off at the corresponding
socket of the function block and assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also chapters Test / Reset (Page 195) as well as "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" and
"Backing up and saving parameters" in the SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957).

Operator panel buttons

The following figure shows the front view of the operator panel and the buttons:

%XWWRQ %XWWRQ %XWWRQ %XWWRQ %XWWRQ 7HVW5HVHW

7(67
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1 )$8/7

Figure 4-66 Operator panel buttons

Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following figure shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the buttons:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 181
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

%XWWRQ

Figure 4-67 Buttons on the operator control block with display

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP buttons" function block:

%XWWRQ 23 %XWWRQV 23 %XWWRQ

%XWWRQ 23 %XWWRQ

%XWWRQ
23 7HVW5HVHW EXWWRQ
7HVW5HVHW

Figure 4-68 Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block

1) For menu-assisted operation on the operator panel with display

4.6.4 Digital module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the
sockets of the "DM Inputs" function blocks.

Note
"DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) or a
multifunction module (MM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

182 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:

• Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the sockets
"DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control Stations"
function block
The following are available:
• A function block "DM1 Inputs" on the SIMOCODE pro S multifunction module
• Two function blocks "DM1 inputs" and "DM2 inputs" on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" function blocks:

'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0 'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0

7HUPLQDO '0 ,QSXWV '0 ,QSXWV

QXPEHUV
,1 ,1

,1 ,1

,1 ,1

,1 ,1

Figure 4-69 Schematic of the "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" function blocks

The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe digital
module:

'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0

'0 ,QSXWV

,QSXW

< 6WDUW

)HHGEDFN
<
&DVFDGH
<
6HQVRU
<
6HQVRU

Figure 4-70 Schematic of the "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe digital module

Table 4-60 Inputs, "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe digital module

Input Description
Input 1 - Ready to switch on - logical linking of sensor inputs 1 and 2 and the cascading input, consideration
also of discrepancy or cross-fault errors
Start Start: Start input state (Y33)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 183
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Input Description
Feedback Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34):
1 - closed, 0 - open
Cascading Cascading input state (1)
Sensor 1 Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor 2 Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22)

The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe
digital module:

'LJLWDO PRGXOH '0

'0 ,QSXWV

,QSXW

)HHGEDFN

Figure 4-71 Schematic "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module

Table 4-61 Inputs, "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module

Input Description
input 1 IN1 (84) state
input 2 IN2 (85) state
input 3 IN3 (89) state
Feedback Feedback circuit state FBC (91):
1 - closed, 0 - open
Sensor 1 —
Sensor 2 —

Application examples
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on basic unit to be
increased in increments. The high-performance SIMOCODE pro V devices can thus be extended,
for example, to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned
accordingly, the input signals can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as
"Reset" or "External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an external
speed monitor, signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has been undershot.

Power supply to the inputs

See "Description of system components → Digital module" and "Description of system
components → Fail-safe digital modules" in SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

184 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Settings

Table 4-62 "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" settings

Inputs Description
Debounce time You can set a debounce time for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default: 16 ms). These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input
supply.
The values are approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/
DC.

Note
Delays for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable" or
"bistable" is set for digital module 1.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, then the debouncing time cannot be set.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, then the debouncing times are set using the DIP switch on the
front of the DM-F Local.

Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules)

• If digital module1 is a DM-F Local, it is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay outputs
and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
• If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, it is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay
outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
Detailed information on fail-safe digital modules: See "Description of system components → Fail-
safe digital modules" in SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/
cs/ww/en/view/109743957).

4.6.5 Temperature module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM1 Inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding to the
three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature (in K) of the three
measuring circuits can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog
socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured temperatures.
Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the sensor
measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and / or transmitted cyclically
to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.

Note
The "TM1 Inputs" function block can only be used if the temperature module (TM) or the
multifunction (MM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 185
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:

,QSXWV 70 ,QSXWV

5 37.7<
7
0D[ WHPSHUDWXUH
7
6HQVRU W\SH 7HPSHUDWXUH
X 5DQJH
7 7HPSHUDWXUH .
5HVSRQVH DW VHQVRU IDXOW
5 17& 7 2XW RI UDQJH 7HPSHUDWXUH

7
1XPEHU RI DFWLYH VHQVRUV (YHQW
X 7
6HQVRU IDXOW

7 2XW RI UDQJH
7HUPLQDO
QXPEHUV 7

Figure 4-72 Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block

Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors to a temperature module.
You can connect a 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensor to a multifunction module.
See "Wiring basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module" in SIMOCODE pro –
System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957) for further
information.

Application examples
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
• Motor windings
• Motor bearings
• Motor coolant temperature
• Motor gearbox oil temperature
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be monitored
independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.

Settings

Table 4-63 Temperature module input settings

Temperature module Description

Sensor type PT100 (default), PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) to sensor fault/out of range Deactivated, signal, warn (default), trip

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

186 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

Temperature module Description

Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors (default)
1) see Table "Sensor fault / Out of range response"

Table 4-64 "Sensor fault / Out of range" response

Response Sensor fault/Out of range

deactivated X
signal X
warn X (d)
trip X
delay —

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

4.6.6 Analog module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM1 Inputs" function block with two analog sockets, corresponding to
the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective analog value of each input can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional binary socket of the function block
represents the status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed
internally and / or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function
blocks.

Note
The "AM1 Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog module (AM) has been
connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 Inputs" function block:

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 187
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

$0 ,QSXWV

,QSXWV

,1 ,QSXW VLJQDO

,1 5HVSRQVH DW ,QSXW 5DQJH

2SHQ FLUFXLW ,QSXW
,1
7HUPLQDO (YHQW
$FWLYH LQSXWV
QXPEHUV ,1 2SHQ FLUFXLW

Figure 4-73 Schematic of the "AM1 Inputs" function block

Application examples
Typical applications are:
• Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.

Settings

Table 4-65 Analog module input settings

Analog module Description

Input signal 0 to 20mA (default), 4 to 20 mA
Response to open circuit Signal, warn (default), tripping
Active inputs 1 input (default), 2 inputs

Notes

Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.

Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each
input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the
output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a
current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End
value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the
maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

188 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

4.6.7 Cyclic Receive

Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks, you can specify which cyclic data from the automation
system will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC / PCS binary
control commands. Connection with the "Control stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will
allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET / EtherNet/IP. Direct connection of
the analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for example, the cyclic
output of the value sent via the communication bus at the output of the analog module.
The "Cyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
• 16 bits (byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely programmable) for basic type 1.
Overall there are four "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 4/5).

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic receive" function blocks:

&\FOLF5HFHLYH &\FOLF5HFHLYH

%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW

&\FOLF5HFHLYH &\FOLF5HFHLYH
$QDORJ9DOXH $QDORJ9DOXH

Figure 4-74 Function schematic of cyclic receive data

Cyclic services
The cyclic data is exchanged between master and slave in every communication cycle. The
master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic Receive) to SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro
responds by sending the cyclic send data (Cyclic Send) to the master.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 189
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

4.6.8 Acyclic Receive

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data acyclically to SIMOCODE pro
via PROFIBUS DP. With the "Acyclic receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic
information from the PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. With the "Acyclic
receive" function block, you can specify which information will be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
• Eight bits each (byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable).
Overall there are three "Acyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic receive" function blocks:

$F\FOLF 5HFHLYH $F\FOLF 5HFHLYH

%\WH %\WH
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
'3 )URP 352),%86 '3 %LW '3 )URP 352),%86 '3 %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW

$F\FOLF 5HFHLYH
'3 %\WH

$QDORJ YDOXH

%8 ZLWK EDVLF W\SH RQO\

Figure 4-75 Function schematic of acyclic receive data

Acyclic services
Acyclic data are transferred only on request.
The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202. This data record can be written by
every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection
monitoring is activated every time the data record is received. The content of the data record is
deleted after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

190 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.6 Inputs

4.6.9 OPC UA Receive

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive," it is possible to transfer further data to SIMOCODE pro via OPC-UA.
With the "OPC UA Receive" function block, you can specify which information will be further
processed in SIMOCODE pro. For this, you only have to link the sockets of the "OPC-UA Receive"
function blocks to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks consist of:
• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable).
A total of three "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3) are provided.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks:

23&8$5HFHLYH 23&8$5HFHLYH

%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW
%LW %LW

23&8$5HFHLYH
$QDORJ9DOXH

Figure 4-76 Schematic of the "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 191
Parameters
4.7 Analog value recording

4.7 Analog value recording

4.7.1 Analog value recording description of functions

The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record any analog values (2 bytes /
1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time. For example, you can use this function block
to record the characteristic curve of the motor current during motor startup.
The recording is made directly in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and independently
of the communication bus or the automation system. Every analog value present at the
"Allocated analog value" analog socket is recorded and saved. Recording starts on the basis of the
edge (positive / negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to
60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is indirectly
determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence
before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire sampling
time. In addition, with SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into a *.csv file for
further processing, for example, in MS Excel.

4.7.2 Measured curve, function block and analog value recording application
example

Measured curve

$OORFDWHGDQDORJYDOXH
HJPRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[>@

WLPH

3UHWULJJHU>@ 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@

6DPSOLQJWLPH 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@

7ULJJHULQSXW 7ULJJHUHGJH SRVLWLYH

WLPH

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

192 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.7 Analog value recording

Figure 4-77 Analog value recording of measured curve

The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a new trigger signal is
sent to the trigger input.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:

$QDORJ YDOXH UHFRUGLQJ

7ULJJHU LQSXW

7ULJJHU HGJH
$VVLJQHG
DQDORJ YDOXH 6DPSOLQJ UDWH

3UHWULJJHU

Figure 4-78 Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block

Settings

Table 4-66 "Analog value recording" settings

Signal / value Range

Trigger input Activate analog value recording with any signal (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, current flowing)
Allocated analog value Any value (1 word / 2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge positive (default) / negative
Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s, in steps of 0.1 s (default: 0.1 s)
Pre-trigger 0 to 100 % in steps of 5 % (default: 0 %)

Application example
Record the motor current when the motor starts / sampling time = 12 s / pre-trigger = 25 % (3 s):

$QDORJ YDOXH UHFRUGLQJ

0RWRU FXUUHQW IORZLQJ

7ULJJHU HGJH
3RVLWLYH

V 6DPSOLQJ UDWH

0D[ FXUUHQW ,BPD[

3UHWULJJHU

Figure 4-79 Application example of the analog value recording

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 193
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

4.8 Standard functions

4.8.1 Overview of standard functions

Description
So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored in SIMOCODE pro,
and can be used as required.
These function blocks may contain:
• Plugs
• Sockets in the form of status information
• Setting values, e.g. the response when an external fault occurs ("signal," "warn," or "trip").

Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard
function:

3OXJ
6WDQGDUG )XQFWLRQ
6RFNHW Q

3OXJ Q 6HWWLQJ YDOXH

Figure 4-80 General representation of the function block of a standard function

Scope and application

These function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used as
optional supplements. They are ready to use and only require activating by connecting the
plug(s) of the respective function block. Depending on the device series, the system offers
several different function blocks for such standard functions.

Table 4-67 Function blocks

Standard function block SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN, V EIP
Test 2 2 2 2 2 2
Reset 3 3 3 3 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1 1 1 1 1
External fault 4 4 4 6 6 6
Operational Protection Off (OPO) — — — 1 1 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — — — 1 1 1

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

194 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Standard function block SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MR V PN, V EIP
Emergency start 1 1 1 1 1 1
Watchdog (PLC / PCS monitoring) 1 1 1 1 1 1
Time stamping — — — 1 — —
Safety-related tripping — — — 1 1

4.8.2 Test / Reset

Test / Reset description

The function of the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit or operator panel is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device:
• Reset function: If a fault occurs
• Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the TEST / RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test / Reset tripping via
the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.
In total, two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2," are provided, each function block having a
slightly different function:
• Test 1: Tests / trips the output relays
• Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 195
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test / Reset" function blocks:

7HVW5HVHW IXQFWLRQ EORFNV

7HVW
7HVW

5HVHW &RQWURO IXQFWLRQV

5HVHW

5HVHW
5HVHW

%8 7(675(6(7 EXWWRQ
7HVW5HVHW EXWWRQV EORFNHG

23 7(675(6(7 EXWWRQ

Figure 4-81 "Test / Reset" function blocks

1) The operator panel with display does not have a "TEST/RESET" button. The respective
functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys.

Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
• Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the
overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the system can be reset immediately. Tripping
only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote."

Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
• Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the internal
function blocks "Reset 1," "Reset 2," and "Reset 3."
• Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

196 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

There are three function blocks "Reset 1" to "Reset 3."

All reset inputs (sockets) have equal priority (or function).

Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function. The test function
comprises the following steps:
• Lamp / LED test (test function activated for < 2 s)
• Test of the device functionality (test function activated for 2 to 5s)
• Switching off the QE (test function activated for > 5 s). The QE can only be switched off using
the "Test 1" function block and in the "Local 1-3" operating mode using the "TEST/RESET"
button on the basic unit / operator panel.

Test phases
The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST / RESET" button is pressed
for the required length of time:

Table 4-68 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing

Test phase State Without main current With main current

OK Fault 1)
OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
< 2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL
Results of the hardware test / lamp test
2 to 5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
> 5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lighted/switched on LED flashing LED flickering LED off
1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 197
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Test settings

Table 4-69 Test settings

Test 1 to 2 Description
Input Activation of the "Test" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs,
communication bus control bits, etc.).
Test / Reset buttons blocked The blue TEST/RESET buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually
intended for acknowledging faults and for performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "TEST/RESET keys disabled". These can then be
used for other purposes.

Acknowledgment of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
• Faults can only be acknowledged
– if the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– if there is no "ON" control command pending.
• A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and / or if an "ON"
control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault. Saving
a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the operator panel. The
LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
• A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user has previously
acknowledged the fault)
• Auto reset of an overload trip or thermistor trip if motor protection reset = Auto (an automatic
acknowledgment is issued here after expiry of the cooling down period). The motor cannot
start immediately since reset cannot be performed when an ON command is pending.
• If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically. However, a
configuration fault will be generated (exception: operator panel, if parameterized
accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general fault to be
acknowledged automatically.
• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all
related faults are acknowledged automatically. The motor cannot start immediately since
parameters cannot be entered if an ON command is pending.
• If a parameter of a function is changed from "trip" to "warn", or to "signal" or "deactivated",
all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
• For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset."

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

198 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Reset settings

Table 4-70 Reset settings

Reset 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation of the "Reset" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, com‐
munication bus control bits, etc.).
TEST/RESET buttons blocked The blue Test / Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually intended for
acknowledging faults and for performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "TEST/RESET keys disabled". These can then be used for other
purposes. On the operator panel with display, the buttons are disabled via a menu function
(default: not disabled).

4.8.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description
You can carry out the "Cold run" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function
block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the respective
socket. The activated test position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
• one plug
• a "Status - test position" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
• one "Fault - test position feedback error" socket. It is set when
– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total, one "Test Position Feedback" function block is available.

Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE / QLA sockets of the control function are activated,
to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a flashing button LED, for example.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:

6WDWXV
73) 7HVW SRVLWLRQ

,QSXW
7\SH 7ULS
7HVW SRVLWLRQ IHHGEDFN IDXOW

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 199
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Figure 4-82 "Test Position Feedback" function block

Cold run
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However,
the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via the socket on the
function block.
Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the line voltage on the primary current
side can be implemented, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor
feeder that is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the
"Test position feedback (TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When using current / voltage
measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary. The "TPF" function
block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage Monitoring" function block).
Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see Chapter Description of
functions of control stations (Page 71)), enabling the current-free status to be tested.
If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off by
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)."

Fault message "Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" and acknowledgment

Note
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.

Acknowledge with "Reset."

Settings

Table 4-71 Test Position Feedback (TPF) settings

Test Position Feedback (TPF) Description

Input Activation of the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block by any signal (any sockets,
e.g. device input)
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

200 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

4.8.4 External fault

Description
The "External Fault 1 to 6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or external
devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the
inputs (plugs) of the External Fault function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device
inputs, communication bus control bits, etc.). External faults can also be "marked" in
SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction. Example: monitoring
the rotational speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of:
• two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
• one "Event - external fault" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
The following are available:
• four "External Faults 1 to 4" function blocks for the pro C and pro S basic units
• six "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:

([WHUQDO )DXOW ([WHUQDO )DXOW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW
([W IDXOW ([W IDXOW
$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH
5HVHW 5HVHW
5HVHW 5HVHW

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

([WHUQDO )DXOW ([WHUQDO )DXOW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW
([W IDXOW ([W IDXOW
$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH
5HVHW 5HVHW
5HVHW 5HVHW

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

([WHUQDO )DXOW ([WHUQDO )DXOW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW
([W IDXOW ([W IDXOW
$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH
5HVHW 5HVHW
5HVHW 5HVHW

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

Figure 4-83 "External Fault" function blocks

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 201
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Special reset options:

A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, Test /
Reset buttons, OFF command reset). Furthermore, Auto-Reset can also be activated. See table
below.

Settings

Table 4-72 "External Fault" settings

External fault 1 to 6 Description

Input Activation of the "External Fault" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets, e.g. device
inputs, communication bus control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)
Active status Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:
• Always (default): Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• Only when motor on: Evaluation only if motor is switched ON.
Response Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the following
table and Chapter Important notes (Page 7)).
Reset Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, communi‐
cation bus control bits, etc.)
Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional reset types:
• Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator panel
with display, via the menu (panel reset) (default)
• Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)
• Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the
activation signal)
• OFF command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
Marking 1)
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Speed >," e.g. with SIMO‐
CODE ES. Range: maximum 10 characters.

1) Certain special characters are not displayed on the operator panel with display when
assigning a name for the external faults.

Note
Changing the marking of all Ethernet and PROFINET connections
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active.
A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and reestablishes them afterward.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

202 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

"External fault" response

Table 4-73 "External fault" response

Response External fault

trip X
warn X
signal X (d)
deactivated —

4.8.5 Operational Protection Off (OPO)

4.8.5.1 Response to positioner control function

Description of Operational Protection Off (OPO)

The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block returns the positioner to a safe position.
To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to an appropriate socket (e.g. device inputs,
communication bus control bits, etc.).
The "Operational Protection Off" function block consists of
• one plug
• one "Status - OPO" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
• one "Fault - OPO Fault" socket. It is set when the respective, safe end position has been
reached.
In total, one "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block is available for the pro V basic
units.
The following table shows the basic operating principle:

Table 4-74 Basic operating principle of Operational Protection Off (OPO) for the "Positioner" control function

OPO Initial position when OPO is pending

Positioner is open Positioner opens Positioner Positioner closes Positioner is closed
stop/OFF
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized re‐ Fault reset: With Fault reset: With Fault reset: With — —
sponse "Positioner close command close command close command
closes"
Positioner closes Positioner closes Positioner closes Positioner closes
Parameterized "Posi‐ — — Fault reset: With Fault reset: With Fault reset: With
tioner opens" re‐ open command open command open command
sponse
Positioner opens Positioner opens Positioner opens Positioner opens

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 203
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block:

2SHUDWLRQDO 3URWHFWLRQ 2))

6WDWXV
232 2SHUDWLRQDO SURWHFWLRQ 2)) 232
,QSXW
3RVLWLRQHU UHVSRQVH
7ULS
7\SH
2SHUDWLRQDO SURWHFWLRQ 2)) 232

Figure 4-84 "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block

Settings

Table 4-75 Operational Protection Off settings

Operational Protection Off (OPO) Description

Input Activation of the "Operational Protection Off" function block by the monitored signal (any
sockets, e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Positioner response Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when activated via the
input:
• CLOSE: Positioner runs to the end position in the "CLOSED" direction (default).
• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position
Type Specification of the input logic
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)

Safety guidelines

Note
A "Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO"
command attempts to run the positioner to the end position if it is approaching or has already
reached this end position.

Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is performed while
"Operational protection Off (OPO)" is active.

Note
The "Fault - Operational protection Off (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged by the open
or closed control command, depending on the present "OPO" end position.

Note
Acknowledgment is performed even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

204 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via the communication bus.

4.8.5.2 Response to other control functions

For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:
• Motor in operation: The motor is switched Off with a "Fault - Operational Protection Off
(OPO)" fault.
• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)" fault only
occurs when an "ON command" is issued.

4.8.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is performed
via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs of
SIMOCODE pro.
Sequence (see timing charts below):
1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been
operated/the input has been activated (UVO).
2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its previous
state considering the signals of the control stations. This can either take place immediately
or with a time delay (restart time delay).
3. If the "power failure time" elapses before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault (UVO
fault).
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not interrupted.
In total, one "Power Failure Monitoring" function block is available for the pro V basic units.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block:

892
7ULS
3RZHU IDLOXUH 892
,QSXW 7\SH

3RZHU IDLOXUH WLPH

$FWLYDWLRQ
5HVWDUW WLPH GHOD\ ([WHUQDO SRZHU IDLOXUH PRQLWRULQJ

Figure 4-85 "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 205
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

892

W
3RZHU IDLOXUH 3RZHU IDLOXUH
WLPH WLPH
4(

)DXOW )DXOW

Figure 4-86 Power failure monitoring (UVO) sequence charts

Settings

Table 4-76 Power failure monitoring settings

Power failure monitoring Description

(UVO)
Input (activation) Activation of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block by the monitored signal (any
socket, e.g. device inputs, communication bus control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:
• Deactivated (default setting)
• No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control supply voltage is main‐
tained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate voltage
relay.
Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails. If the line voltage is restored within the power failure
time, all drives which were running prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.
If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain disconnected
and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line voltage has been
restored, this fault message can be acknowledged with "Reset".
Range:
• 0 to 25.5 s in increments of 0.1 s
• 26 to 255 s, in increments of 1 s
• 256 to 2550 s in increments of 10 s.
Restart time delay The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart simultaneously. (Line voltage
would otherwise dip again.)
Range: 0 to 255 s (default: 0 s)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

206 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

4.8.7 Emergency start

Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This
allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be used
to:
• enable an immediate reset and restart after an overload trip
• delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.

NOTICE
Thermal overload of the motor possible!
If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading of the
motor!

Since the emergency start is "edge-triggered", this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:
• Using the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) of the function block must
be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, communication bus control bits, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
• one plug
• one "Status - emergency start executed" socket. It is set when an emergency start has been
executed.
Overall, there is one "Emergency start" function block available.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:

6WDWXV
(PHUJHQF\ VWDUW (PHUJHQF\ VWDUW
H[HFXWHG
,QSXW

7KH (PHUJHQF\ VWDUW H[HFXWHG VLJQDO LV WULJJHUHG E\ WKH HGJH LQSXW DQG UHVHW
ZKHQ WKH FXUUHQW IORZV

Figure 4-87 Emergency Start function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 207
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Settings

Table 4-77 Emergency start settings

Emergency start Description

Input Activation of the "Emergency Start" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, com‐
munication bus control bits, etc.).

4.8.8 Safety-related tripping

Description

Note
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-
safety-related signals.

Note
Please note that the safety-related tripping function block does not itself represent a safety-
related function.
The safety function of the DM-F Local is determined exclusively by the setting of the DIP switch
on the module.
The safety function of the DM-F PROFIsafe is determined by the fail-safe program in the F-CPU.

Further information: See Manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
The DM-F Local Safety-related tripping function block consists of 3 sockets:
• Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F LOCAL is ON.
• Event - safety-related tripping: A safety-related tripping has been performed.
• Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The DM-F PROFIsafe Safety-related tripping function block consists of 3 sockets:
• Event - PROFIsafe active: Fail-safe communication between the F-CPU and the DM-
F PROFIsafe is active.
• Event - safety-related tripping: A safety-related tripping has been performed.
• Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
There is 1 "Safety-related tripping" function block each for SAFETY (Local) and PROFIsafe on the
SIMOCODE pro V High Performance basic units.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

208 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block:

6DIH 7ULSSLQJ

5HVSRQVH '0) /RFDO RN

',3 VZLWFK 352),VDIH DFWLYH

6DIH WULSSLQJ

(QDEOLQJ FLUFXLW

Figure 4-88 "Safe Tripping" function block

SET / RESET button on DM-F Local

6(75(6(7 EXWWRQ

Figure 4-89 SET / RESET button

See ManualSIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/

WW/view/en/50564852).

DANGER
Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.
In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are connected
without pressing the Start button.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 209
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local

Table 4-78 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Switch setting OFF / ON

1 With /without cross-circuit detection
2 1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC evaluation
3 2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel
4 Debounce time for sensor inputs 50 ms /
10 ms
5 Sensor input automatic start / monitored
start
6 Cascading input automatic start / moni‐
tored start
7 With / without startup testing
8 With automatic starting / without auto‐
matic starting after power failure

Note
The target setting of the DIP switches in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (can be made using the
mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit on download but does not affect the function of
the DM‑F Local digital module. The desired function is thus saved as soon as the
parameterization has been created.
You must set the effective parameterization via the DIP switches on the front of the DM-F Local
(see table below and/or the manual "SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital modules (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)"). The basic unit compares the
target setting (from the download) with the actual setting on the DM‑F Local. If these differ,
"Configuration deviation" is output!

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

210 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Description of the settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local

Table 4-79 Description of the settings of the DIP switches, DM-F Local

DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With/without cross-circuit detection Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. The sensors must be
connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 - Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1
terminal test signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at the
terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the Y12, Y33
or the Y22, Y34 terminals is not identical to the test signals T1, T2.
Cross-circuit detection must be deactivated if electronic sensors such as light arrays or
laser scanners are connected. The DM-F Local now no longer monitors the sensor
inputs for cross-circuit detection. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are
already monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor itself.
If "Without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1, T2 are
deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the Y12, Y22, Y33, and Y34 inputs,
the DM-F LOCAL expects a +24 V DC signal from the same current source as the one
from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of DM-
F LOCAL-1AB00) or from T3 (static +24 V DC).
In the case of the DM-F LOCAL-1AU00 device version, it is imperative to connect the T3
terminal to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation between the
input circuit and the sensor power supply.
1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC evalua‐ In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC / NC),
tion sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC / NO), as are frequently used for magnet‐
ically-operated switches, can also be evaluated. In this case, ensure that the NC contact
is connected to Y12 and the NO contact to Y22.
2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel • 2 sensors with one contact each (2x 1-channel) (NC / NC). It is expected that both
sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.
• 1 sensor with two contacts each (1x 2-channel) (NC / NC). The system expects both
contacts to be simultaneously open.
Debounce time for sensor inputs Any change in the sensor signal during the debounce time is not evaluated.
50 ms / 10 ms • Debounce time 50 ms: Changes in the switch position of strongly bouncing con‐
tacts are suppressed (e.g. position switches on heavy protective doors).
• Debounce time 10 ms: The shorter debounce time permits faster tripping in the
case of bounce-free sensors (e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic start / moni‐ • Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as
tored start soon as the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1 have
been fulfilled. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.
• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as
soon as the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1 have
been fulfilled and the start button at terminal Y33 has subsequently been actuated
(start with the falling edge).
Cascading input automatic start / • Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as
monitored start the switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static
+24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).
• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as
soon as the starting condition at cascading input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon
as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the start button at terminal
Y33 has subsequently been actuated (start with the falling edge).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 211
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With / without startup testing After a power failure, startup testing requires that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are
actuated once by the system operator.
With automatic starting / without au‐ The DM-F Local can be parameterized in such a way that the enabling circuits auto‐
tomatic starting after power failure matically switch to the operative position after a power failure, i.e. without actuation
of the start button Y33.
Prerequisites:
• Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start."
• The starting condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input has been
fulfilled.
• Valid actuation of the start button prior to the power failure, i.e. the enabling
circuits were in the operative position.

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe)

Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe, set the PROFIsafe address as follows:

Table 4-80 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe)

Switch setting Value

1=2 0
1
2 = 21 2
3=2 2
4
4 = 23 8
5 = 24 16
6=2 5
32
7 = 26 64
8 = 27 128
9 = 28 256
10 = 2 9
512

If 1 DIP switch is at ON, the respective value is active. If more than 1 DIP switch is at ON, the
respective values must be added.
• Briefly press the SET / RESET button. LEDs 1 to 10 indicate the current PROFIsafe address.
• Setting the PROFIsafe address:
– Switch off the supply voltage
– Set the DIP switch configuration
– Switch on the supply voltage again.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

212 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

6(75(6(7 EXWWRQ

Figure 4-90 SET / RESET button

"Safety-related tripping" response

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe.

Note
The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-related
disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!

Table 4-81 "Safety-related tripping" response

Response Safety-related tripping

trip X (d)
Deactivated X
signal X
warn X

Note
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control function"
has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode," only
"deactivated", "signal," or "warn" can be set as the response, not "trip."

"Safety-related tripping" reset

Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledgment of SIMOCODE pro faults caused by
safety-related tripping.

Reset: Manual (default), Auto

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 213
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

4.8.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via communication bus,
as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.

Bus monitoring
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if
• "Bus monitoring" is active.
• In the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1 = 1 and S2 = 1), cyclic data transfer
between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g. by interruption of the bus
connection.
• "Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging data
with the PLC, "Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1".

PLC / PCS monitoring

With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated if
• "PLC / PCS monitoring" is active.
• For example, the PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status or the PROFINET switches to the
"Hold/Stop" status when in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
The "Status - PLC / PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in the "CLEAR" state,
for example, "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic receive - bit 0.7" bit, the
status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.

Schematic

:DWFKGRJ 3/&3&6 PRQLWRULQJ

%XV3/& IDXOW 5HVHW

&\FOLF FRPPXQLFDWLRQ 6WDWXV 3/&3&6 LQ 5XQ
%XV PRQLWRULQJ 6WDWXV %XV RN %XV LV DFWLYH

7ULS %XV
3/&3&6 PRQLWRULQJ
7ULS 3/&3&6
3/&3&6 PRQLWRULQJ ,QSXW %XV UHVSRQVH
OHYHO VHQVLWLYH

Figure 4-91 "Watchdog (PLC / PCS Monitoring)" function block

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

214 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

NOTICE
PROFIBUS DP
"Bus monitoring" and "PLC / PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP slave watchdog
function is activated in the DP master system.

Settings

Table 4-82 Watchdog settings

Watchdog Description
PLC / PCS monitoring - Input Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal (any
sockets, e.g. the communication bus control bits, etc.)
Bus monitoring • Activated (default): If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message
is generated and must be acknowledged
• Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k." infor‐
mation can be evaluated at any time.
PLC / PCS monitoring • Activated (default): If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" fault
message is generated and must be acknowledged.
• Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status - SPS/PLS in Run"
information can be evaluated at any time.
Bus/PLC fault - reset You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or
manually.
Range: Manual / Auto (default: manual).

"Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response

Table 4-83 "Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response

Response Bus fault PLC/PCS fault

Fault X (d) X (d)
warn - -
signal - -
deactivated X X

4.8.10 Timestamping

Description
SIMOCODE pro V PB can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision
(10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signals will be recorded.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 215
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Possible areas of application are:

• Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
• Analysis of system-wide interrelationships
• Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes

Requirements
To use SIMOCODE pro V time stamping, the DP master being used must support time
synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master connections for SIMATIC S7-400), or a
master clock must be used (e.g. SICLOCK).

Process in STEP 7
Time-of-day synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V is activated in STEP 7 HW Config in the slave
properties under "Time Synchronization".

Note
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the clock master.

For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time stamped information is analogous to transmission with
SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2. Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further
processing of time stamped information in the CPU, to transmit time stamped messages from
the "Standard Library → Miscellaneous Blocks" library.

Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave from STEP 7 HW Config.
In DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master – integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro – LADDR2 contains the
diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro. For all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain
the same address as LADDR.

In contrast to the STEP7 online help for the FB62, when integrating via GSD, the slot number of
the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages, and with Slot 0 for special messages.
You will find further information about the FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

216 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.8 Standard functions

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timestamping" function block:

7LPHVWDPSLQJ
DFWLYHRN
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW

7LPHVWDPSLQJDFWLYH

Figure 4-92 "Timestamping" function block

The "Timestamping" function block comprises eight "Timestamping - input 0 to input 7" plugs.
Overall, there is one "Timestamping" function block available.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 217
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

4.9 Logic modules

4.9.1 Overview of logic modules

Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and supply
binary or analog output signals according to their internal logic components. Logic modules can
contain:
• Plugs
• An internal logic component
• Sockets
• Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

3OXJ
/RJLF PRGXOH
6RFNHW Q
/RJLF FRPSRQHQW
3OXJ Q
6HWWLQJ YDOXH

Figure 4-93 General representation of a logic module

Scope and application

You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your application. These can
be used, for example, to implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter
functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:

Table 4-84 Freely-programmable logic modules

Logic module SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MB RTU V PN V EIP
Truth tables 3 inputs / 1 output 3 4 8 6 6 8 8
Truth table 2 inputs / 1 output — 2 2 2 2 2 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs — — 1 1 1 1 1
Timer 2 2 6 4 4 6 6
Counter 2 2 6 4 4 6 6
Signal conditioning 2 4 6 4 4 6 6
Non-volatile elements 2 2 4 4 4 4 4

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

218 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Logic module SIMOCODE pro

BP GP HP
C S V PN GP V PB V MB RTU V PN V EIP
Flashing 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Flicker 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Limit monitor — — 6 4 4 6 6
Calculation modules (calculators) — — 4 2 1) 2 4 4
Analog multiplexer — — 1 — — 1 1
Pulse width modulator — — 1 — — 1 1
1) Only for basic unit SIMOCODE pro V PB from version *E03*

4.9.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O

Description
The truth table for 3I / 1O consists of
• Three plugs
• one logic component
• one socket
You can choose which of the eight possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated for.
The following are available:
• three truth tables (1 to 3) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
• four truth tables (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
• six truth tables (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• eight truth tables (1 to 6, 10, 11) for the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) and pro V EtherNet IP basic
units.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 219
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2 7UXWK 7DEOH ,2

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2 7UXWK 7DEOH ,2

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2 7UXWK 7DEOH ,2

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2 7UXWK 7DEOH ,2

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW

Figure 4-94 "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules

Example
You want to implement the following circuit:

&LUFXLW 7UXWK WDEOH LQSXW FRQGLWLRQV FRORUHG LQ JUD\

6 6 6 4
,QSXW ,QSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW
6 6

4 VZLWFKHV ZLWK
6 RU 6 DQG 6
RU
6 DQG 6 DQG 6

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

220 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Figure 4-95 Example of a truth table

Circuit and parameterization

/
&LUFXLW 1
4

%8 ,QSXWV %8 2XWSXWV
%8

6 ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2
2XW
6 ,QSXW 2XWSXW

6 ,QSXW

3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ ZLWK 6,02&2'( (6 6HW ELWV IRU

RXWSXW VLJQDOV

&RQQHFW LQSXWV LH

&RQQHFWLQJ SOXJV ZLWK VRFNHWV

Figure 4-96 Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I / 1O

Settings

Table 4-85 Settings for truth table 3I/1O

Truth table for 3I / 1O Description

Inputs 1 to 3 Activation of the truth table by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, communication bus
control bits, etc.)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 221
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

4.9.3 Truth table for 2I / 1O

Description
The truth table for 2I / 1O consists of:
• Two plugs
• one logic component
• one socket.
You can choose which of the four possible input conditions an output signal should be generated
for.
In total, two truth tables (7 to 8) are available.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 2I / 1O" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2 7UXWK 7DEOH ,2
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW

Figure 4-97 "Truth Table for 2I / 1O" logic modules

Example
You want to implement the following circuit:

&LUFXLW

7UXWK WDEOH LQSXW FRQGLWLRQV FRORUHG LQ JUD\

6 6 4
6 6 ,QSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

4 4 VZLWFKHV ZLWK
6 RU 6

Figure 4-98 Example of truth table 2I / 1O

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

222 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Settings

Table 4-86 Settings for truth table 2I/1O

Truth table for 2I / 1O Description

Inputs 1 to 2 Activation of the truth table by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, communication bus
control bits, etc.)

4.9.4 Truth table for 5I / 2O

Description
The truth table for 5I / 2O consists of:
• five plugs
• one logic component
• Two sockets.
You can choose which of the 32 possible input conditions a maximum of two output signals
should be generated for.
In total, one truth table 9 is available for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 5I / 2O" logic modules:

,QSXW
7UXWK 7DEOH ,2

,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW

2XWSXW
,QSXW

,QSXW

Figure 4-99 "Truth Table for 5I / 2O" logic modules

Settings

Table 4-87 Settings for truth table for 5I / 2O

Truth table 9 (5I / 2O) Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication
bus, etc.)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 223
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

4.9.5 Counter

Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the plugs "+" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with
"Reset".
The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be
transmitted to the automation system.
• Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit).
• Plug –: Reduces the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
• Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
The counter consists of
• three plugs (input +, input – and reset)
• one logic component
• one socket
• One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between 0 and the limit.
The value is retained even in the event of a power failure.
The following are available:
• two counters (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C and pro S basic units
• four counters (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• six counters (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) and pro V EIP basic units.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counters" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
&RXQWHU &RXQWHU

,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW ,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW

5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH 5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH

/LPLW /LPLW

,QSXW ,QSXW
&RXQWHU &RXQWHU

,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW ,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW

5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH 5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH

/LPLW /LPLW

,QSXW ,QSXW
&RXQWHU &RXQWHU

,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW ,QSXW ದ 2XWSXW

5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH 5HVHW $FWXDO YDOXH

/LPLW /LPLW

Figure 4-100 "Counter" logic modules

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

224 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on
• The input delay
• The device cycle time.

Note
The actual value remains the same
• During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
• If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Settings

Table 4-88 Counter settings

Counters 1 to 6 Description
Input + Increments actual value by 1
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication bus,
etc.)
Input - Decrements the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication bus,
etc.)
Reset Reset the actual value to 0 (count value and output).
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication bus,
etc.)
Limit Value that can be reached when counting and at which the counter issues an output signal.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)

4.9.6 Timer

Description
The timer consists of:
• two plugs (input and reset)
• one socket
• one "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be
transmitted to the automation system.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 225
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:
• With closing delay
• With closing delay with memory
• With OFF delay
• With fleeting closing
The following are available:
• two timers (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic units
• four timers (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• six timers (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V PN and pro V EIP basic units.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timers" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
7LPHU 7LPHU
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

7\SH 7\SH
5HVHW 5HVHW
$FWXDO YDOXH $FWXDO YDOXH
9DOXH 9DOXH

,QSXW ,QSXW
7LPHU 7LPHU

2XWSXW 2XWSXW

7\SH 7\SH
5HVHW 5HVHW
$FWXDO YDOXH $FWXDO YDOXH
9DOXH 9DOXH

,QSXW ,QSXW
7LPHU 7LPHU

2XWSXW 2XWSXW

7\SH 7\SH
5HVHW 5HVHW
$FWXDO YDOXH $FWXDO YDOXH
9DOXH 9DOXH

Figure 4-101 "Timer" logic modules

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Note
The response of the plugs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely changed to level-active
for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit from version *E05* and higher and the SIMOCODE pro V PB
basic unit from version *E03* and higher. Use of an unchanged parameter file utilizing
integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such basic units are used. For
example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer input, the timer function is automatically restarted
after the timer reset occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing"
there is no change in the response.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

226 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Output response of the timer

For
• SIMOCODE pro C basic unit up to version *E05*
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit up to version *E03*

:LWK FORVLQJ GHOD\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W
2XWSXW

:LWK FORVLQJ GHOD\ ZLWK PHPRU\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W
2XWSXW

:LWK RSHQLQJ GHOD\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W
2XWSXW

)OHHWLQJ FORVLQJ

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W
2XWSXW

Figure 4-102 Output response of timers (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit before version *E05* and
SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit before version *E03*)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 227
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Output response of the timer

For
• SIMOCODE pro C basic unit from version *E05*
• SIMOCODE pro V PB basic unit from version *E03*
• SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
• all other SIMOCODE pro V basic units

:LWK FORVLQJ GHOD\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W
2XWSXW

:LWK FORVLQJ GHOD\ ZLWK PHPRU\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W W
2XWSXW

:LWK RSHQLQJ GHOD\

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W

2XWSXW

)OHHWLQJ FORVLQJ

,QSXW

5HVHW

7LPH
W W W
2XWSXW

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

228 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Timer settings

Table 4-89 Timer settings

Timers 1 to 6 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication bus, etc.)
Reset Resetting the actual value to 0.
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication bus, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range: With closing delay (default), closing delay with memory, with OFF delay, with fleeting closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output
response (type).
Range: 0 to 6553.5, unit 100 ms (default: 0)

4.9.7 Signal conditioner

Description
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioning type:
• Non-inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioning consists of:
• two plugs (input and reset)
• one logic component
• one socket
The following are available:
• two signal conditionings (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
• four signal conditionings (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S, pro V PB, and pro V MR basic units
• six signal conditionings (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) and pro V EIP basic units.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 229
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioning" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU 6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

5HVHW 5HVHW
7\SH 7\SH

,QSXW ,QSXW
6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU 6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

5HVHW 5HVHW
7\SH 7\SH

,QSXW ,QSXW
6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU 6LJQDO &RQGLWLRQHU
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

5HVHW 5HVHW
7\SH 7\SH

Figure 4-103 "Signal conditioning" logic modules

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

230 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Types of signals / output responses

/HYHO QRW LQYHUWHG

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

/HYHO LQYHUWHG

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

(GJH ULVLQJ ZLWK PHPRU\

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

(GJH IDOOLQJ ZLWK PHPRU\

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

Figure 4-104 Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioning

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 231
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "inverting" type of signal:

Table 4-90 NOR function

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1 (LQJDQJ $XVJDQJ
1
0
0
1
0
0
5HVHW
ุ
1 1 0
NOR switch

Settings

Table 4-91 Signal conditioning settings

Signal conditioning 1 to 6 Description

Input Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication
bus, etc.)
Reset Resetting the signal conditioning to 0.
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the communication
bus, etc.)
Type Different output responses.
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

4.9.8 Non-volatile elements

Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioning. However, these output signals are
retained after a power supply failure.
If an input signal is pending, the non-volatile element issues an output signal according to the
selected type:
• Non-inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element consists of
• two plugs (input and reset)
• one logic component
• one socket

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

232 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

The following are available:

• two non-volatile elements (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic units
• four non-volatile elements 1 to 4 for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile element" logic modules:

,QSXW ,QSXW
1RQYRO (OHP 1RQYRO (OHP
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

5HVHW 5HVHW
7\SH 7\SH

,QSXW ,QSXW
1RQYRO (OHP 1RQYRO (OHP
2XWSXW 2XWSXW

5HVHW 5HVHW
7\SH 7\SH

Figure 4-105 "Non-volatile Element" logic modules

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 233
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Types of signals / output responses

/HYHO QRW LQYHUWHG

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

/HYHO LQYHUWHG

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

(GJH ULVLQJ ZLWK PHPRU\

9ROWDJH IDLOXUH

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

(GJH IDOOLQJ ZLWK PHPRU\

9ROWDJH IDLOXUH

,QSXW

5HVHW

2XWSXW

Figure 4-106 Types of signals / output responses of non-volatile elements

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

234 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "inverting" type of signal:

Table 4-92 NOR function

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1 (LQJDQJ $XVJDQJ
1
0
0
1
0
0
5HVHW
ุ
1 1 0

Settings

Table 4-93 Non-volatile element settings

Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 Description

Input Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the commu‐
nication bus, etc.)
Reset Resetting the signal conditioning to 0.
Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the commu‐
nication bus, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory, edge falling with
memory

4.9.9 Flashing

Description
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its socket,
which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make
the LEDs on the operator panel flash, for example. The logic module consists of:
• one plug
• one logic component
• one socket
In total, 3 "Flashing" logic modules (1 to 3), are available.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 235
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:

)ODVKLQJ )ODVKLQJ

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

)ODVKLQJ

,QSXW 2XWSXW

Figure 4-107 "Flashing" logic modules

Settings

Table 4-94 Flashing settings

Flashing 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, events, status, etc.)

4.9.10 Flickering

Description
You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator-panel
LEDs, for example.
The "Flicker" function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz when an input
signal is present.
The function block consists of:
• one plug
• one logic component
• one socket
A total of three logic modules, "Flicker" (1 to 3), are available.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

236 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flicker" logic modules:

)OLFNHULQJ )OLFNHULQJ

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

)OLFNHULQJ

,QSXW 2XWSXW

Figure 4-108 "Flicker" function blocks

Settings

Table 4-95 Flicker settings

Flicker 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. events, etc.)

4.9.11 Limit monitor

Description
With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes / 1 word) can be monitored for limit
overshooting or limit undershooting The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In
addition, limit monitors can be "marked" according to their function.
Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module
(Temperature 1 to 3) for overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
• one analog plug
• one logic component
• one socket
The following are available:
• four limit monitors (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V PB and pro V MR basic units
• six limit monitors (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) and pro V EIP basic units

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 237
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:

/LPLW 0RQLWRU /LPLW 0RQLWRU

7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW

,Q S X W /LPLW YDOXH ,Q S X W /LPLW YDOXH
/LPLW /LPLW

$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

/LPLW 0RQLWRU /LPLW 0RQLWRU

7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW

,Q S X W /LPLW YDOXH ,Q S X W /LPLW YDOXH
/LPLW /LPLW

$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

/LPLW 0RQLWRU /LPLW 0RQLWRU

7\SH (YHQW 7\SH (YHQW

QSXW /LPLW YDOXH ,Q S X W /LPLW YDOXH
/LPLW /LPLW

$FWLYLW\ $FWLYLW\

5HVSRQVH 5HVSRQVH

0DUNLQJ 0DUNLQJ

Figure 4-109 "Limit Monitor" logic modules

Response

Table 4-96 Limit monitor response

Response Limits 1 to 6
trip —
warn —
signal X (d)
deactivated —
delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important notes (Page 7).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

238 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on:
• the operating state of the motor
• the TPF function
• the parameterized "active status":
– ON
– ON+
– RUN
– RUN+
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "active status" parameters.

$FWLYLW\
&ODVV WLPH

2)) 6WDUW 0RWRU LV UXQQLQJ 2))

1RW ZLWK 73) 21

1RW ZLWK 73) 581

7LPH
73) 7KHUH LV WHVW SRVLWLRQ IHHGEDFN WKH PRWRU IHHGHU LV LQ WKH WHVW
SRVLWLRQ LH LWV PDLQ FLUFXLW LV LVRODWHG IURP WKH QHWZRUN +RZHYHU WKH
FRQWURO YROWDJH LV FRQQHFWHG
Figure 4-110 Active status of limit monitor

Settings

Table 4-97 Limit monitor settings

Limit monitor Description

Input Analog plug of the limit monitor for linking to the analog value to be monitored (2 bytes), e.g.
maximum current I_max, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.
Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting (default) or undershooting.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 239
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Limit monitor Description

Active status Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:
• ON, i.e. always (default) evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running
• ON+, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running Exception:
"TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position
• RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test position (TPF).
• RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the startup procedure is finished (i.e. the
"Start active" message is no longer active) and there is no test position feedback (TPF);
example: Cos phi monitoring
Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor - Delay"
parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot before the "Event -
Limit" output is set.
Range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Marking 1)
No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: max. 10
characters.

NOTICE
Changing the marking (PROFINET)
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and reestablishes
them afterward.

Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the analog
values connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the unit of the limit
value to be set. The units and ranges of all relevant analog values can be found in chapters "Data
record 94 - Measured values" and "Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data" in the manual
SIMOCODE pro - Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743960).

Table 4-98 Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro

Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1K 0 - 65535
Operating hours 1s 0 - 4294967295
Motor stop time 1h 0 - 65535
Active power 1W 0 - 4294967295
Apparent power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295
Timer actual value 100 ms 0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current I_max) 1 % of Is 0 - 65535
Analog module inputs — 0 to 27648 (S7 format)

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

240 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) must be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a
maximum temperature of 200 °C.

4.9.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

Description
The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in SIMOCODE pro V basic units
are capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values featured in
SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, for example:
• Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
• Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
• Conversion of the 0/4 to 20mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels, pressures,
and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes / 1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a defined
formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators, operators,
offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word) at the analog
socket of the logic module for further processing.
Each calculator consists of:
• one analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)
• one logic component
• one analog socket

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 241
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculators" logic modules:

&DOFXODWRU

,QSXW &RXQWHU

'HQRPLQDWRU 2XWSXW

2IIVHW 5DQJH

&DOFXODWRU

2SHUDWLQJ PRGH
,QSXW
&RXQWHU 2XWSXW

'HQRPLQDWRU 5DQJH

,QSXW
2SHUDWRU

2IIVHW

&RXQWHU

'HQRPLQDWRU

Figure 4-111 "Calculators" logic modules

Modes for calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operation mode"
parameter:
• Operating mode 1: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2
using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators,
denominators, offsets, operators). The result is available as an analog value (1 word / 2 bytes)
at the output of the function block for further processing.
• Operating mode 2: The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a
double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is
calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified
parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as
1 word /2 bytes. In mode 2, it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power,
apparent power) and to display them (2 bytes / 1 word).

Settings

Table 4-99 Calculator settings

Calculator Description
Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes / 1 word)°; Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word); range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Numerator Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Denominator Range: 0 - 255, increment 1

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

242 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Calculator Description
Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Numerator 1 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Numerator 2 1)
Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 1) Range: -128 to +127, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Operation mode 1 or 2
Calculator 2 - Operator1) +, -, *, /
1) Only relevant for operating mode = 1

Note
Special aspect
If the numerator and/or the denominator have the value "0", these values are treated as "1" inside
the device.

Calculator formulas

&DOFXODWRU

,QSXW 2XWSXW
&RXQWHU

,QSXW 2IIVHW
'HQRPLQDWRU

&DOFXODWRU

,QSXW 2XWSXW
&RXQWHU &RXQWHU

,QSXW 2SHUDWRU ,QSXW 2IIVHW

,QSXW 'HQRPLQDWRU 'HQRPLQDWRU

2SHUDWLQJ PRGH

&DOFXODWRU
,QSXW
+LJK &RXQWHU 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW LQSXW 2IIVHW

/RZ 'HQRPLQDWRU

2SHUDWLQJ PRGH

Figure 4-112 Calculator formulas

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 243
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Examples of calculators

Example 1 - Calculator
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C

70 ,QSXWV &DOFXODWRU

0D[ WHPSHUDWXUH
,QSXW r&
8QLW .
6HQVRU W\SH

5HVSRQVH DW VHQVRU IDXOW

2XW RI UDQJH

1XPEHU RI DFWLYH VHQVRUV

Figure 4-113 Example 1 - Calculator

Example 2 - Calculator
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F

70 ,QSXWV &DOFXODWRU

0D[ WHPSHUDWXUH
,QSXW r)
8QLW .
6HQVRU W\SH

5HVSRQVH DW VHQVRU IDXOW

2XW RI UDQJH

1XPEHU RI DFWLYH VHQVRUV

Figure 4-114 Example 2 - Calculator

Example 3 - Calculator
Conversion of motor current I_max from % to A (e.g. current setting Is = 3.36 A) (only possible
for motors with one rotational speed)

&DOFXODWRU

0D[ FXUUHQW ,BPD[ ,QSXW $

8QLW

Figure 4-115 Example 3 - Calculator

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

244 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

4.9.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4

Description
Using the "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks (for SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) and
pro V EIP basic units only), analog values can be processed according to the following
arithmetic:
Output = Input 1 [Operator 1] Input 2 [Operator 2] Input 3 [Operator 3] Input 4.
You can connect the corresponding analog signals to the 4 inputs "Calculator 3/4 - Inputs 1 to 4".
As operators "Calculator 3/4 - Operator 1 to 3," you can choose one of the four standard operators
("+", "-", "*," or "/").
With "Calculator 3/4 - Priority 1 to 3," you can specify the processing sequence (high, medium,
low). You must clearly define a priority for each operator. The priority determines the processing
sequence comparable to the placement of a term inside parentheses.
Example:
Output = I1 OP1 I2 OP2 I3 OP3 I4, where
• OP1 = "*"; Medium,
• OP2 = "+"; High,
• OP3 = "-"; Low
Associated equation: Output = (I1 * (I2 + I3)) - I4.
If you interconnect the input to the device-internal analog output data element "Output 1 - Fixed
level", the input is assigned the constant "Const x" (x = 1 - 4). In this case, the respective edit
field for the constant is activated. You can enter a value between 0 and 65535.
The "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks each consist of:
• Four analog plugs
• One analog socket
• Logic.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 245
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" logic modules:

&DOFXODWRU &DOFXODWRU

,QSXW 2XWSXW ,QSXW 2XWSXW

,QSXW ,QSXW
,QSXW ,QSXW
,QSXW ,QSXW
&RQVWDQW &RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW &RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW &RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW &RQVWDQW
$GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU $GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU
$GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU $GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU
$GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU $GGLWLRQ 2SHUDWRU
+LJK 3ULRULW\ +LJK 3ULRULW\
0HGLXP 3ULRULW\ 0HGLXP 3ULRULW\
/RZ 3ULRULW\ /RZ 3ULRULW\

Figure 4-116 "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks

Settings Calculator 3, 4

Table 4-100 Settings Calculator 3, 4

Calculators 3, 4 Description
Input Any analog value
Output Calculated analog value
Constant 1 to 4 Any analog value; range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
Operator 1 to 3 • "+": Addition
• "-": Subtraction
• "*": Multiplication
• "/": Subtraction
Priority 1 to 3 • Priority 1: high (default), medium, low
• Priority 2: medium (default), low
• Priority 3: Low

Note
Special aspect
If the numerator and/or the denominator have the value "0", these values are treated as "1" inside
the device.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

246 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Formula Calculators 3, 4
Input 1 [Operator 1] Input 2 [Operator 2] Input 3 [Operator 3] Input 4 = Output

4.9.14 Analog multiplexer

Description
The analog multiplexer (for SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) /pro V EIP basic units only) outputs one of
4 possible analog values at the inputs 1 to 4, depending on control signals S1 and S2.
If you interconnect the input to "Fixed level," the input is assigned the constant "Const x"
(x = 1 ... 4). In this case, the respective edit field for the constant is activated. You can enter a
value between 0 and 65535.
The "Analog Multiplexer" function block consists of:
• two digital plugs (control signal 1 and 2)
• Four analog plugs (Input 1 to 4)
• One analog socket
• Logic.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the Analog Multiplexer logic module:

$QDORJ0XOWLSOH[HU

&RQWUROIXQFWLRQ6 2XWSXW
&RQWUROIXQFWLRQ6
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
,QSXW
&RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW
&RQVWDQW

Figure 4-117 Analog multiplexer function block

Settings Analog Multiplexer

Table 4-101 Settings Analog Multiplexer

Analog multiplexer Description

Control signal S1 to S4 Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, control bits from the
communication bus, etc.)
Input 1 to 4 Any analog value or "Fixed level"

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 247
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Analog multiplexer Description

Output Output value according to panel (see below)
Constant 1 to 4 Any analog value; range: 0 to 65535

Table 4-102 Analog multiplexer panel

S1 S2 Output
0 0 = Input 1
0 1 = Input 2
1 0 = Input 3
1 1 = Input 4

Analog multiplexer example

Pressing an operator panel button multiple times will output the maximum motor current and
the three phase currents one after the other (e.g., via the output of the analog module):

Figure 4-118 Analog multiplexer example

• Pressing the OP button 1x: Phase current IL1

• Pressing the OP button 2x: Phase current IL2
• Pressing the OP button 3x: Phase current IL3
• Pressing the OP button 4x: Maximum motor current I_max.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

248 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

4.9.15 Pulse width modulator

Description

The pulse width modulator (PWM) (for SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) /pro V EIP basic units only)
modulates the analog input value into a digital output signal "PWM Output" with a variable duty
factor that is proportional to the analog input value.
If you interconnect the input to "Fixed value," the input is assigned the parameterized constant
"Input (const)." In this case, the edit field for the constant is activated. You can enter a value
between 0 and 65535.
The "Pulse Width Modulator" function block consists of:
• one analog plug (input)
• One digital socket (PWM output)
• Logic.

Schematic

3XOVH:LGWK0RG3:0

,QSXW 2XWSXW
&RQVWDQWLQSXW
0LQLPXPLQSXW
0D[LPXPLQSXW
V 7LPHSHULRG

Figure 4-119 "Pulse width modulator" function block

Settings Pulse Width Modulator

Pulse width modulator Description

Input Activation by any analog signal or "Fixed value"
Constant input Any constant; range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
Input Minimum Any constant; range 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
Input Maximum Any constant; range 1 to 65535 (default: 65535)
PWM duration 0.2 - 6553.5 s (default: 2)

Pulse width modulator formulas

• Length of 1-signal = PWM period * (PWM Input - PWM Input Minimum)/(PWM Input
Maximum - PWM Input Minimum)
• Length of 0-signal = PWM period - Length of 1-signal.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 249
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Note
Signal duration
The shortest signal duration for 0 and 1 is 0.1 s in each case.
If a duration for the 1 signal that is shorter than 0.1 s results from calculation, the output will
remain permanently 0, while for a duration for the 0 signal shorter than 0.1 s the output remains
permanently 1.

Example - Pulse width modulator

A load will be switched on and off with a duration of 60 minutes, dependent on a measured value
(e.g., temperature).
• If the measured value exceeds a maximum value of 50 °C (323°K), the load will be switched
on permanently, and if it falls below 20 °C (293°K), it will be switched off permanently.
• If the measured value falls within the range between the minimum and maximum value, the
On duration will be proportional to the measured value.

• Duration: 60 min (3600 s)

• Lower limit: 20°C (293 K)
• Hi limit: 50°C (323 K).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

250 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

W2QPLQ W2IIPLQ

'XUDWLRQPLQ

• At 20°C (293 K): OFF

• At 30°C (303 K): 20 min ON and 40 min OFF
• At 40°C (313 K): 40 min ON and 20 min OFF
• At 50°C (323 K): ON.

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 251
Parameters
4.9 Logic modules

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

252 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 253
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

254 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Index
Acyclic send data settings, 175
Acyclic services, 175, 190
" Adjustable responses "Overload Protection,"
"Unbalance Protection," and "Stalled Rotor
"At operating temperature" state, 46
Protection", 37
"Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response, 215
Analog module, 150
"DM1 / DM2 Outputs" settings, 167
Analog module input settings, 188
"External fault" response, 203
Analog module inputs, 20, 178, 187
"Internal ground-fault monitoring" response, 135
Analog module output, 20, 161, 168
"Safety-related tripping" reset, 213
Analog multiplexer, 20
"Safety-related tripping" response, 213
Analog multiplexer example, 248
"Sensor fault / Out of range" response, temperature
Analog multiplexer panel, 248
module inputs, 187
Analog terminal block, 18
"Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I
Analog value recording, 20, 192
>, 140
Analog value recording of measured curve, 192
"Warning level" response for monitoring current limits
Application selection, 85
I >, 140
Automatic acknowledgement of faults, 198
Auto-Reset, 202
0
0/4 - 20 mA monitoring, 149 B
Basic unit inputs, 22, 178, 179
Basic unit inputs settings, 180
A Basic unit output settings, 163
Acknowledgment of faults, 198 Basic unit outputs, 161
Active control stations of control functions, 127 Basic unit outputs, SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units, 22
Active power monitoring, 146 Basic unit outputs, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 22
Active status motor operating hours monitoring, 153, Binary terminal block, 18
154 Bus monitoring, 214
Active status trip level, warning level, 0/4 to 20 mA
monitoring, 150
Active status trip level, warning level, active power C
monitoring, 148
Calculator, 241
Active status trip level, warning level, ground-fault
Calculator 4, 245
monitoring, 137
Calculator formulas, 243
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring
Calculator settings, 242
current limits I< (lower limit), 141
Calculator 1, 21
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring
Calculator 2, 21
current limits I> (upper limit), 140
Calculator 3, 245
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring
Calculators 3, 4, 21
temperature, 156
CFC, 31
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring
Change-over pause, 88, 98, 102, 103, 104, 106, 107,
voltage, 143
109, 110, 112, 113, 115
Active status, number of starts monitoring, 155
Changing the marking of all Ethernet and PROFINET
Acyclic receive, 178, 190
connections, 202
Acyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3), 20
Circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I /
Acyclic send, 174
1O, 221
Acyclic send byte 0 (1), 20
Circuit breaker, 79, 96, 97, 127
Acyclic send data, 175

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 255
Index

Circuit breaker settings, 96 Digital module 1 inputs, 178

Class, 41 Digital module 2 inputs, 178
Class time, 50 Digital module inputs, 182
Cold run, 200 Digital module outputs, 166
Connecting plugs with sockets, 18 Digital module 1 (2) inputs, 21
Contactor control with control functions, 127 Digital module 1 (2) inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-
Contactor controls, 81 F PROFIsafe, 22
Control commands, 93, 95, 97, 100, 104, 106, 109, Digital module 1 (2) outputs, 21
112, 115, 117, 122, 124 Direct starter (direct-on-line starter), 79, 85, 92, 93,
Control function Dahlander reversing starter, 106 127
Control function Dahlander starter, 104 Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) control
Control function settings for Dahlander reversing function, 91
starter, 108 Disclaimer of liability, 8
Control functions, 79 Dry-running protection by active-power
Control of lamps for displaying operating states, 162 monitoring, 24
Control station local control, 72, 78 Dry-running protection of centrifugal pumps by active
Control station operator panel, 73 power monitoring, 53
Control station PC, 73, 78
Control station PLC/PCS, 72, 78
Control station settings, 78 E
Control stations, 24, 72
EEx e applications, 52, 157
Cooling down period, 46
Emergency start, 23, 195, 207
Cos phi monitoring, 145
Emergency start settings, 208
Cos phi monitoring, 25
Enabled command - example, 77
Counter settings, 225
Enables, 76
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 26
Ethernet - OPC-UA Receive, 178
Counters, 224
Ex e applications, 46
Cross-circuit detection, 211
Example - Pulse width modulator, 250
Current limit monitoring, 139
Example monitoring parameters for the teach‑in
Current limits, 24
illustrated in the characteristic of a centrifugal pump
Current measuring module installed in delta / in the
with a radial-flow impeller for water at a speed of
supply cable, 89, 100, 103
1450 rpm (example); Q, 68
Current notes on operational safety, 14
Example of a truth table for 3I / 1O, 220
Current setting Is2, 39
Example of truth table 2I/1O, 222
Current threshold, 50
Example pump characteristic curve for different types
Cyclic PROFIBUS DP services, 173
of impeller of centrifugal pumps, 58
Cyclic receive, 178, 189
Example types of impeller of centrifugal pumps, 57
Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/5), 27
Examples of calculators, 244
Cyclic send, 172
Examples of typical units and ranges in
Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/9, 10/10), 27
SIMOCODE pro, 240
Cyclic send data, 173, 174
Execution time, 88, 93, 95, 97, 100, 103, 106, 109,
Cyclic services, 189
112, 115, 117, 121, 124, 126
Cyclic services for PROFINET / EtherNet/IP, 173
Extended control, 22, 84
Extended protection, 22
Extended protection ("overload protection,"
D "unbalance protection," and "stalled rotor
Dahlander reversing starter, 79, 86, 108, 109, 127 protection"), 36
Dahlander starter, 79, 86, 105, 106, 127 Extended status and fault messages, 83
Debounce time for inputs, 185 external fault, 201
Delay prewarning, 49 External fault, 194, 202
Diagram of enables and enabled control External fault 1(2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 22
command, 76 External ground-fault monitoring, 129

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

256 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Index

External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22

residual current transformer), 135
External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL23 I
summation current transformer), 133, 136
Ignition hazard assessment acc. to ISO 80079‑36 for
centrifugal pumps in hazardous areas – prevention of
an ignition source from becoming active with the help
F of dry-running protection by active power monitoring
Factors for trip times at operating temperature for 2nd with SIMOCODE pro (example illustration), 68
generation current/voltage measuring modules, 46 Input types, 177, 178
Factors for trip times at operating temperature for Inputs, 177
current measuring modules and 1st generation Inputs, DM1 Inputs function block as a DM-F Local fail-
current/voltage measuring modules and 2nd safe digital module, 183
generation current/voltage measuring modules in Inputs, DM1 Inputs function block as DM-F PROFIsafe
compatibility mode., 47 fail-safe digital module, 184
Fault feedback message, 88 Interlocking time, 88, 93, 95, 103, 109, 115, 121,
Fault message, 8 126
Fault message "Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" Interlocking time, number of starts monitoring, 155
and acknowledgment, 200 Internal ground-fault monitoring, 129, 135
Feedback ON, 87
Feedback time, 88, 93, 95, 97, 100, 103, 106, 109,
112, 115, 121, 124, 126 K
Flashing, 235
Key-operated switch operation, 74
Flashing settings, 236
Flashing 1 (2, 3), 21
Flicker, 236
Flicker settings, 237
L
Flicker 1 (2, 3), 22 Lamp control with control functions, 128
Formula Calculators 3, 4, 247 Lamp controls, 82
Function block, 17 Lamp test, 197
Level motor operating hours monitoring, 153
Level motor stop time monitoring, 154
G Limit monitor, 237
Limit monitor response, 238
Graphic editor, 31
Limit monitor settings, 239
Ground-fault monitoring, 135
Limit monitor 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 22
Ground-fault monitoring with ground-fault
Load type, 48, 88, 91, 93, 95, 97, 100, 103, 106, 109,
module 3UF7500, 25
112, 115, 121, 124, 126
Ground-fault monitoring with ground-fault
Locking the contactor, 87
module 3UF7510, 25
Log file, 67
GSD file, 33
Logic modules, 218

H M
Hardware test, 197
Main entry, 127
Hysteresis for current limits I>, 140
Manual Collection, 7
Hysteresis for monitoring functions, 159
Manual operation, 74
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power, voltage
Marking, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 151
monitoring, 144
Max. star time, 89, 100, 103
Hysteresis ground-fault current, 134, 138
Mode selector, 75, 78
Hysteresis, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 151
Modes for calculator 2, 242
Hysteresis, monitoring current limits I< (lower
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 86
limit), 142

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 257
Index

Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) control Outputs, 160

function, 95 Overload, 127
Monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), 141 Overload characteristics for 2nd generation current /
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing, 25, 158 voltage measuring modules (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA01-0)
Monitoring of current limits I> (upper limit), 139 and dry-running protection (e.g.
Monitoring the number of starts, 154 3UF712.-1.A01-0), 41
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA (analog module 1, 2), 25 Overload characteristics for current measuring
Motor operating hours monitoring response, 153 modules, 1st generation current / voltage measuring
Motor operation monitoring response, 153 modules (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA00-0) and 2nd
Motor stop time monitoring, 153 generation current / voltage measuring modules in
Motor stop time monitoring response, 154 compatibility mode (e.g. 3UF7110-1AA01-0), 43
Overload relay, 79, 85
Overload relay control function, 90
N Overload relay settings, 91
Overtemperature, 52, 157
Non-maintained command mode, 87, 92, 94, 96, 99,
103, 105, 109, 111, 115, 117, 121, 123, 126
Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules), 185
Non-volatile element, 232
P
Non-volatile element settings, 235 Panel reset, 202
Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4), 23 Parameter delay time tV, TRIP, 61
NOR function, 232, 235 Parameter trip value PTRIP, 60
Number of starts, 154 Parameters for control functions, 87
Number of starts - overshoot, 153 Pause time, 47
Number of starts - prewarning, 153 Permissible starts, number of starts monitoring, 154
Phase balance formula, 50
Phase unbalance, 50
O PLC / PCS monitoring, 214
PLC / PCS monitoring, 214
OFF command reset, 202
Plugs, analog, 17
OM SIMOCODE pro, 32
Plugs, binary, 17
OPC UA Receive, 191
Pole-changing reversing starter, 79, 86, 114, 115,
OPC UA receive data 0 (1, 2/3), 23
127
OPC UA send data 0 (1), 23
Pole-changing reversing starter control function, 112
OPC-UA send, 175
Pole-changing reversing starter settings, 114
OPC-UA Send Data, 176
Pole-changing starter, 79, 86, 111, 112, 127
OPC-UA send, 161
Pole-changing starter control function, 109
Operating hours monitoring, 153
Pole-changing starter settings, 111
Operating modes, 74
Positioner, 79, 120, 204
Operation monitoring, 21, 152
Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5), 86
Operational Protection Off, 194
Positioner control, 120
Operational Protection Off (OPO), 203
Positioner control function, 117
Operational Protection Off settings, 204
Positioner 1, 127
Operational Protection Off (OPO), 21
Positioner 2, 127
Operator panel [OP] control station, 78
Positioner 3, 127
Operator panel buttons, 21, 178, 180
Positioner 4, 127
Operator panel LED, 21, 163
Positioner 5, 127
Operator panel LED settings, 165
Power failure monitoring (UVO), 194, 205
Output modes, 161
Power failure time, 206
Output of the effective motor current
Power monitoring, 25
Entire range, 169
Pre-trigger, 192
Part of range, 170
Pre-warning level, 49
Output response of the timer, 227
PROFIBUS DPV1, 190

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

258 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Index

Protection/Control, 23, 81 Response to warning level, monitoring voltage, 144

PTC, 51 Response, monitoring temperature, 156
PTC thermistor, 51 Restart time delay, 206
Pulse width modulator, 23 Reversing starter, 79, 86, 94, 95, 127
Pulse width modulator formulas, 249 Reversing starter control function, 93
Reversing starter settings, 94

R
Recycling and disposal, 8
S
Relay test, 197 Safe tripping, DM-F Local, 24
Remote operation, 74 Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe, 24
Remote reset, 202 Safety-related tripping, 195, 208
Reset, 49, 194 Saving change-over command, 87, 94, 103, 106, 109,
Reset bus / PLC fault, 215 111, 115, 126
Reset function, 196, 197 Screw terminals, 17
Reset settings, 199 Sensor circuit fault, 52
Reset 1 (2, 3), 23 Sensor fault, 52
Residual current, 135 Separate fail-safe function from control function, 91,
Resistive load, 88 93, 95, 97, 99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 117, 121,
Response, 7 123, 126
Response - Monitoring interval for mandatory Separating DM-FL/FP function from control
testing, 158 function, 87
Response to other control functions, OPO, 205 Set current Is1, 37
Response to overshooting the number of starts, SET/RESET button DM-F Local, 209
number of starts monitoring, 155 Setting ranges for current setting Is2, 39
Response to sensor fault, ground-fault Setting ranges for current setting ls1, 37
monitoring, 138 Settings for analog module output, 168
Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA> (upper limit), Settings for Dahlander starters, 105
0/4 to 20 mA< (lower limit), 0/4 to 20 mA Settings for DM1 / DM2 inputs, 185
monitoring, 151 Settings for external fault, 202
Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), Settings for power failure monitoring (UVO), 206
0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit), 0/4 to 20 mA Settings for truth table 2I/1O, 223
monitoring, 150 Settings for truth table 3I/1O, 221
Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit), Settings for truth table for 5I / 2O, 223
active power monitoring, 148 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe), 212
Response to trip level, cos phi monitoring, 146 Settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local, 210
Response to trip level, ground-fault monitoring, 134, Signal conditioning, 229
137 Signal conditioning settings, 232
Response to trip level, monitoring current limits I< Signal conditioning 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 24
(lower limit), 141 SIMATIC S7, 33
Response to trip level, monitoring current limits I> SIMOCODE ES, 202
(upper limit), 140 SIMOCODE ES 2007, 31
Response to trip level, monitoring voltage, 144 SIMOCODE ES in the TIA Portal, 29
Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library, 32
limit), active power monitoring, 148 Sockets (analog), 17
Response to warning level, cos phi monitoring, 146 Sockets (binary), 17
Response to warning level, ground-fault Soft run-down time, 126
monitoring, 134, 138 Soft starter, 79, 86, 127
Response to warning level, monitoring current limits Soft starter control function, 121, 123
I< (lower limit), 141 Soft starter with reversing contactor, 79, 86, 126,
Response to warning level, monitoring current limits 127
I> (upper limit), 140

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 259
Index

Soft starter with reversing contactor control Thermistor protection, 51

function, 124 Time range for starts, 154
Soft starter with reversing contactor settings, 126 Time range for starts, number of starts
Software, 29 monitoring, 155
Solenoid valve, 79, 86, 117, 127 Time stamp, 26
Solenoid valve control function, 115 Time stamping, 195, 215
Solenoid valve control function settings, 117 Time synchronization via PROFIBUS, 216
Stalled rotor level, 50 Timer settings, 229
Stalled rotor protection, 50 Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 24
Standard function blocks, 194, 195 timers, 225
Standard functions, 194 TPF (test position feedback), 23
Star-delta connection, 101, 129 Transformation ratio active, 38, 39
Star-delta reversing starter, 79, 86, 102, 103, 127 Transformation ratio primary, 38, 39
Star-delta reversing starter control function, 100 Transformation ratio secondary, 38, 40
Star-delta reversing starter settings, 102 Trend display, 31
Star-delta starter, 79, 86, 99, 100, 127 Trip class, 41, 43
Star-delta starter control function, 97 Trip classes for 2-pole loads, 2nd generation
Star-delta starter settings, 99 current / voltage measuring modules, 43
Start-up bridging time parameter tBRIDGE, 61 Trip classes for 2-pole loads, current measuring
Startup override, 88, 150 modules and 1st generation current / voltage
State of status LED, 197 measuring modules, 45
Status information, 82 Trip classes for 3-pole balanced loads, current
Summation current evaluation, 135 measuring modules and 1st generation current /
Switching from star to delta, 98, 101 voltage measuring modules, 44
Switching the direction of rotation, 93, 101, 107, 112, Trip classes for 3-pole loads, 2nd generation
124 current / voltage measuring modules, 42
Switching the direction of travel, 118 Trip level activity, warning level, cos phi
Switching the speed, 104, 107, 110, 113 monitoring, 146
Trip level PTRIP, 55
Trip level, warning level, 0/4 to 20 mA
T monitoring, 150
Trip level, warning level, active power
Teach‑in procedure for using the dry running
monitoring, 147
protection wizard, 63
Trip level, warning level, ground-fault
Teleservice, 31
monitoring, 133, 137
Temperature module input settings, 186
Trip level, warning level, monitoring voltage, 143
Temperature module inputs, 178, 185
Trip level, warning, level, cos phi monitoring, 145
Temperature module 1/2 inputs, 24
Tripping characteristics, 46
Temperature monitoring, 156
Tripping time, 41, 43
Temperature monitoring settings, 156
Truth table 2I/1O (7, 8), 26
Temperature monitoring 1/2, 25
Truth table 3I/1O (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11), 26
Temperature sensors, 156
Truth table 5I/2O (9), 26
Test, 194
Truth table for 2I / 1O, 222
Test / Reset, 195
Truth table for 3I / 1O, 219
Test interval, monitoring interval for mandatory
Truth table for 5I / 2O, 223
testing, 159
Types of positioner control, 120, 121
Test phases, 197
Types of signals / output responses of non-volatile
Test Position Feedback (TPF), 194, 199
elements, 234
Test settings, 198
Types of signals / output responses of the signal
Test 1 (2), 24
conditioning, 231
Testing, 196
Thermal motor model, 46
Thermistor, 24, 51

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

260 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Index

U
Unbalance level, 50
Unbalance protection, 50
Undervoltage off (UVO), 26

V
Voltage monitoring, 25, 142

W
Watchdog, 26, 214
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring), 195
Watchdog settings, 215
Win SIMOCODE-DP converter, 33
Working with libraries, 30

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005 261
Index

Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

262 Operating Manual, 06/2021, A5E40507630002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1

Application examples 2
Example circuits control
functions 3
Industrial Controls
Further application
examples 4
Motor management and
control devices
SIMOCODE pro - Application List of abbreviations A
examples
Application Manual

06/2021
A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Siemens AG A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Smart Infrastructure Ⓟ 06/2021 Subject to change All rights reserved
Electrical Products
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Important notes................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support ......................................................................................... 9
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app................................................................................. 11
1.4 Support Request ................................................................................................................ 12
1.5 Security information .......................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Current information about operational safety ..................................................................... 14
1.7 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 15
2 Application examples .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Level monitoring................................................................................................................ 17
2.2 Dry-running of pumps........................................................................................................ 19
3 Example circuits control functions ...................................................................................................... 25
3.1 Purpose, steps, preconditions............................................................................................. 25
3.2 Control functions ............................................................................................................... 26
3.3 Overload relay ................................................................................................................... 27
3.3.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR ............................... 27
3.3.2 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ......................................... 28
3.3.3 "Overload relay" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................... 29
3.3.4 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S ............................................................. 30
3.3.5 "Overload relay" plan - SIMOCODE pro S.............................................................................. 31
3.4 Direct starter...................................................................................................................... 32
3.4.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR ................................. 32
3.4.2 "Direct starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ........................................... 33
3.4.3 "Direct starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR.................................................. 34
3.4.4 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S .................................................... 35
3.4.5 "Direct-on-line starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro S .................................................................... 36
3.5 Reversing starter................................................................................................................ 37
3.5.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR............................ 37
3.5.2 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ..................................... 38
3.5.3 "Reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ................................................................ 39
3.5.4 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S .......................................................... 40
3.5.5 "Reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro S .......................................................................... 41
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)............................................................................. 42
3.6.1 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB,
pro V MR............................................................................................................................ 42
3.6.2 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP..... 43
3.6.3 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V....................... 44
3.6.4 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S....................... 45

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 3
Table of contents

3.6.5 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram - SIMOCODE pro S................................. 46
3.7 Star-delta starter ................................................................................................................ 47
3.7.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V PB,
pro V MR............................................................................................................................ 47
3.7.2 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro
V EIP .................................................................................................................................. 48
3.7.3 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro V .............................. 49
3.7.4 Circuit diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro S ............ 50
3.7.5 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro S .............................. 51
3.7.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR............................................................................................ 52
3.7.7 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro V
PN, pro V EIP ...................................................................................................................... 53
3.7.8 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro V ................... 54
3.7.9 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro S..... 55
3.7.10 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro S ................... 56
3.8 Star-delta reversing starter ................................................................................................. 57
3.8.1 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR....................... 57
3.8.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP....................... 58
3.8.3 "Star-delta reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ........................................................... 59
3.9 Dahlander starter............................................................................................................... 60
3.9.1 "Dahlander starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR.................................... 60
3.9.2 "Dahlander starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ................................... 61
3.9.3 "Dahlander starter" diagram – SIMOCODE pro V.................................................................. 62
3.10 Dahlander reversing starter ................................................................................................ 63
3.10.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR..................... 63
3.10.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP..................... 64
3.10.3 "Dahlander reversing starter" diagram – SIMOCODE pro V ................................................... 65
3.11 Pole-changing starter......................................................................................................... 66
3.11.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR............................... 66
3.11.2 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP .............................. 67
3.11.3 "Pole-changing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V................................................................... 68
3.12 Pole-changing reversing starter .......................................................................................... 69
3.12.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR................ 69
3.12.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP................ 70
3.12.3 "Pole-changing reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V .................................................... 71
3.13 Solenoid valve ................................................................................................................... 72
3.13.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ......................................... 72
3.13.2 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ......................................... 73
3.13.3 "Solenoid valve" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ............................................................................. 74
3.14 Positioner .......................................................................................................................... 75
3.14.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................. 75
3.14.2 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............................................. 76
3.14.3 "Positioner 1" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ................................................................................. 77
3.14.4 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................. 78
3.14.5 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............................................. 79
3.14.6 "Positioner 2" plan, SIMOCODE pro V .................................................................................. 80
3.14.7 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................. 81

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

4 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Table of contents

3.14.8 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............................................. 82
3.14.9 "Positioner 3" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ................................................................................. 83
3.14.10 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................. 84
3.14.11 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............................................. 85
3.14.12 "Positioner 4" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ................................................................................. 86
3.14.13 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR ............................................. 87
3.14.14 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............................................. 88
3.14.15 "Positioner 5" plan - SIMOCODE pro V ................................................................................. 89
3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) .............................................................. 90
3.15.1 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR............................................................................................ 90
3.15.2 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP............................................................................................ 91
3.15.3 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V ..... 92
3.15.4 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
SIMOCODE pro S ................................................................................................................ 93
3.15.5 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro S..... 94
3.16 Soft starter (3RW405, 3RW407) ......................................................................................... 95
3.16.1 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PB,
pro V MR............................................................................................................................ 95
3.16.2 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP ............... 96
3.16.3 "Soft starter" plan (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE pro V ............................... 97
3.17 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) ........................ 98
3.17.1 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,
3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR............................................................................. 98
3.17.2 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,
3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP............................................................................. 99
3.17.3 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
SIMOCODE pro V.............................................................................................................. 100
3.18 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405, 3RW407).................................................. 102
3.18.1 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE
pro V PB, pro V MR ........................................................................................................... 102
3.18.2 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE
pro V PN, pro V EIP ........................................................................................................... 103
3.18.3 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407) plan - SIMOCODE pro V ........... 104
3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads......................................................................................... 105
3.19.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR .............. 105
3.19.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP .............. 106
3.19.3 "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads" plan ................................................................... 107
4 Further application examples............................................................................................................ 109
A List of abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 111
A.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 111
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 113

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 5
Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

6 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
1.1 Important notes

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s (default: 0) — —

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 7
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Brief description of the responses:

Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

8 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 9
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

10 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

Android iOS

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 11
Introduction
1.4 Support Request

1.4 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

12 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.5 Security information

1.5 Security information

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 13
Introduction
1.6 Current information about operational safety

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

14 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

1.7 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 15
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

16 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Application examples 2
2.1 Level monitoring

Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference
value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value) is
measured by the fill level indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks below
a specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until the
reference value is re-attained. The pump is then switched off.

Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:
• Locally: Local control [LC] station for manual switching on and off (by visual contact)
• in the switchboard, cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for manual switching
on and off
• At automation level: Control station PLC / PCS (DP) for remote-controlled switching on and
off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
• Via SIMOCODE pro, by means of internal fill-level or limit value monitoring

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 17
Application examples
2.1 Level monitoring

Schematic

3/&3&6 &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

13( a +] 9 3/&3&6 >'3@
/ 352),%86 '3
/
/
1 )LOOOHYHO LQGLFDWRU
3(
/
// /ದ

4 &RQWURO VWDWLRQ
)
/RFDO FRQWURO VWDWLRQ >/&@

6 6
/LTXLG FRQWDLQHU

&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ $ $ ,1 ,1 9 ,Q ,Qದ &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

PRGXOH ,0 $QDORJ PRGXOH $0 2SHUDWRU SDQHO
%DVLF XQLW %8

6\VWHP &RQQHFWLQJ FDEOH

LQWHUIDFH

7 7 287 2XW 2XWದ

'LVSOD\
4
1/ದ 0RWRU FXUUHQW
4
8QLW RI , V

3XPS
3( 2SWLRQDO
8 9 :
/DSWRS ZLWK
7
0 7KHUPLVWRU 6,02&2'( (6
˽
a
7

Figure 2-1 Schematic of a typical application example

Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
• Motor current of the pump is measured by the current measuring module.
• Analog value of the fill-level sensor is acquired by the analog modules.
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and /or transferred via
PROFIBUS DP to the PLC / PCS.
Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the actual motor current to a
connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be connected to the
operator panel so that further process data can be locally evaluated.

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

18 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

2.2 Dry-running of pumps

Description
A centrifugal pump in radial design that conveys a flammable pumping medium and/or is
located in a hazardous area (Ex zone) is monitored for dry running and is switched off if dry
running is about to begin. Conclusions can be drawn about the delivery flow rate by recording
and monitoring the active power of the pump motor for undershoot. It is important in this case
that the pump has a sufficiently progressive, i.e. rising characteristic curve. This means that the
ratio from active power at minimum flow rate and optimum flow rate PMIN / POPT must be < 0.8,
which applies to the majority of centrifugal pumps used in the chemicals industry.
The SIMOCODE pro-basic unit itself is located in a switchboard/control panel outside the Ex zone.
The integrated monitoring device in SIMOCODE pro V prevents hazardous states that may arise
from dry running of the pump. In this case, the explosion protection conforms with type of
protection b by "control of ignition sources", ignition protection system type b1, e.g. acc. to DIN
EN 80079‑37

Configuration
The following SIMOCODE pro components are required as a minimum:
• One of the following basic units with PTB 18 ATEX 5003 X:
– 3UF7010-1A.00-0 from *E16*
– 3UF7011-1A.00-0 from *E13*
– 3UF7013-1A.00-0 from *E04*
• One of the following current/voltage measuring modules for dry-running protection:
– 3UF7120-1AA01-0 (DRP)
– 3UF7121-1AA01-0 (DRP)
– 3UF7122-1AA01-0 (DRP)
– 3UF7123-1AA01-0 (TLS)
– 3UF7123-1BA01-0 (DRP)
– 3UF7124-1BA01-0 (DRP)
The measuring range must include the currents both at the minimum delivery flow
rate QMIN / PMIN / IMIN and at the operating point QOPT / POPT / IOPT (as well as the rated motor
current IN).

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 19
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

4 2

Figure 2-2 Schematic diagram

① Motor feeder with SIMOCODE pro

② Pump with motor
③ Flow rate Q [m3/h]
④ Active power P [kW]
Settings in SIMOCODE ES:
The following settings must be made in SIMOCODE ES:
• The "direct starter" (direct-on-line starter) control function must be set under "Device
configuration"
• The commissioning editor must have been switched to online mode
• Under "Motor protection → Overload protection", the load type must be switched to "three
phase"
• Under "Motor protection → Overload protection", the transformation ratios must be set as
follows when check box "Transformation ratio - active" is selected:
– Transformation ratio - primary: 1
– Transformation ratio - secondary: >0
• Password protection must be deactivated. If password protection is activated, you must
deactivate it.
• The startup parameter block under "PROFINET parameters" in the parameter editor must be
activated

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

20 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

Other requirement:
If you are using an initialization module, it must not be write-protected.

Configuring
Configuring of the "Direct starter" control function and of overload protection for the direct
starter are carried out as described under Direct starter (Page 32).

NOTICE
It may be necessary to loop the cables twice through the current/module measuring
module
If the rated motor current of the pump motor is in the lower range of the smallest current/
voltage measuring module 3UF7120-1AA01-0, you have to loop the cables twice through the
current/voltage measuring module and set the transmission ratios as follows:
Transformation ratio primary: 1
Transformation ratio secondary: 2
Example:
Settings for rated motor current 0.3 A and cables looped-through twice:
• Set current: 0.3 A
• Transformation ratio active
• Transformation ratio primary: 1
• Transformation ratio secondary: 2

The following procedures are possible for configuration of the dry-running protection:
1. Determine and set the parameters of the dry-running protection function using the
SIMOCODE ES Dry-Running Protection Wizard:
A teach-in to establish PMIN can be carried out to determine the ratios at the operating point
(QOPT / POPT) and at the minimum flow rate (QMIN / PMIN) specified by the pump manufacturer. This
is supported by SIMOCODE ES in commissioning mode by means of the Dry-Running Protection
Wizard. For this, you need the operating points for the optimum and minimum flow rate from
the pump characteristic curve or in accordance with the specifications of the pump
manufacturer. These operating points are approached during teach-in by activating a control
device and the active power absorbed by the pump motor during the process is measured and
recorded by SIMOCODE.
The steps to be carried out for setting the trip level and the bridging time for startup and the
delay during ongoing operation are described in detail in the chapter "Dry-running protection of

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 21
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

centrifugal pumps by active-power monitoring" in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

NOTICE
Basic protection for dry running required
Provide basic protection for dry running for the period of teach-in.
You can create this basic protection by activating the dry-running protection function with
temporary parameters for trip level, delay and start-up bridging time by directly entering the
parameters.

2. Directly enter the parameters of the dry-running protection function with SIMOCODE ES
Alternatively you can also determine the necessary parameters without using the Dry-Running
Protection Wizard and directly set them in SIMOCODE ES:
In this case it is important that you determine the active power of the pump motor at minimum
flow rate for the trip level PMIN with the same SIMOCODE device that also performs the dry-
running protection function.
Direct entry of the parameters is also used to specify temporary parameters that already enable
basic protection during the teach-in sequence for dry-running protection.

Operation
• Starting the pump with pump dry-running protection function active:
– The requirements for starting the pump must be fulfilled beforehand
– Monitoring of the active power for undershooting the trip level is active after expiry of the
set start-up bridging time.
• Operation of the pump with pump dry-running protection function active:
– During operation of the pump, continuous monitoring of the active power is carried out
with the set trip level.
– Undershooting this level causes the pump to be switched off with "Fault ‑ Dry running
pump" after expiry of the set delay
• Switching off the pump with pump dry-running protection function active:
– The requirements for switching off the pump must be fulfilled.
– When the pump is switched off, undershoot of the trip level is not monitored.
• Checking the pump dry-running protection function:
– To check the function for dry-running protection of the pump you have to approach the
operating point that corresponds to the minimum flow rate.
– Undershooting this level must cause the pump to be switched off with "Fault ‑ Dry running
pump" after expiry of the set delay

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

22 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

Further possible application cases for using the "dry-running protection" function:
• Operation of the pump at flow rate equal to zero (e.g. with closed valve on discharge side)
In this state, the trip level of active power is also undershot and the pump is switched off.
• Conveying of gas bubbles and cavitation: Cause reduction in flow rate and active power. If the
trip level of active power is undershot in the process this causes the pump to be switched off.

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 23
Application examples
2.2 Dry-running of pumps

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

24 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Example circuits control functions 3
3.1 Purpose, steps, preconditions

Purpose of example circuits

The example circuits should:
• Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function using SIMOCODE pro.
• Help you modify these examples for your respective application.
• Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps
• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching
devices and control and signaling devices)
• Implementation / activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control and evaluation
of the SIMOCODE pro inputs / outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).
• Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of SIMOCODE pro with a
PLC: see function circuit diagrams and the "Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for
predefined control functions" tables in the SIMOCODE pro system manual.

Prerequisites
• Load feeder / Motor is present
• PLC / PCS with bus interface is present
• The main circuit is already connected
• PC / PG is present
• SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to restore the basic factory
settings in Section "Restoring factory settings" in the SIMOCODE pro – System Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957)

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 25
Example circuits control functions
3.2 Control functions

3.2 Control functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:

Table 3-1 Control functions

Control function SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

26 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Example circuits control functions
3.3 Overload relay

3.3 Overload relay

3.3.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

4 SYS
I>

3 1 2 6 7 A1 A2

OUT3
1L1
1N

-Q1
-F12

C 1,6A

7
1 3 6

OUT2
2 5
OUT1

-X19
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2 A2
230V AC
I>

1 1 2 A1 24V
8
2L1
2N

5
-F11

C 1A

IN4
Test/reset
Gen.fault
Device
BUS

4
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

IN3

Mains contactor
PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU

SIMOCODEpro C/V/MBR

B 10
A 20 B
B
IN2

A 19 A
18
Basic Unit

SPE/PE
9
-X19

X9
IN1

T2
PTC

T1
-A10

CT
/.2
PE
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

PE /.2
M PE
I> I> I>

1 5 6 L3 T3 5 6 4 3 W
2 3 4 L2 T2 3 4 5 2 V 3 AC
3 1 2 L1 T1 1 2 6 1 U
PE

-Q1
L1
L2
L3

Current measurement
-X1

-X1

-X2
/.5

-M1
N

-Q1

-T10

Figure 3-1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 27
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1

28
L2 2N 1N
L3

3.3.2
N
PE

Figure 3-2
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19
3.3 Overload relay

-F11 -F12

1
1
-Q1

1
3
5
I> I>

2
C 1A C 1,6A
2

I> I> I>

2
4
6
Example circuits control functions

-A10

A1
A2

X9
PN1
PN2

SPE/PE
1
6

-T10 230V AC

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP
Device
BUS
SYS

SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP

CT
Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset
BU

Current measurement
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
24V

T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
A1

-Q1

1
3
5
A2

-Q1
/.5

2
4
6

"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro EIP

6
5
4
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

1
2
3
-X2
Mains contactor

/.2
PE

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC
"Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.3 Overload relay

3.3.3 "Overload relay" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

Figure 3-3 "Overload relay" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 29
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

30
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.3.4
L3
N

Figure 3-4
PE PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2
3.3 Overload relay

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

1
1
-Q1

6
4
2
I> I>

2
C 1A C 1,6A

2
I> I> I>

5
3
1
Example circuits control functions

-A10

A1
A2

A
B

SPE/PE
13

-T10 PROFIBUS DP 230V AC

L1
L2
L3
Device
BUS
SYS

SIMOCODEpro S

CT
Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset
BU
PTC OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
14
24

"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S

T1
T2
IN1
IN3
IN4
IN+

IN2
A1

-K1

1
3
5
A2

-K1
/.5

2
4
6
"Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S

6
5
4
5

-X1 -X19

1
2
3
-X2
PE
/.2 Mains contactor

U
W
V

-M1
M PE
3 AC

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.3 Overload relay

3.3.5 "Overload relay" plan - SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-5 "Overload relay" plan, SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 31
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

32
L1 2L1 1L1

3.4
L2 2N 1N

3.4.1
L3

Figure 3-6
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2
3.4 Direct starter

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-Q -F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
I > I > I > I> I>
Example circuits control functions

C 1A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Direct starter

-A10

A
B

X9
SPE/PE
A1
A2
6

1
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device
BUS SYS ON OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SIMOCODEpro C/V/MBR RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10
A1
-Q2

1
3
5
A2
-Q2

"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

/.4

2
4
6

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

1
2
3
-X2 Motor contactor

Local
On

13
21
-S11 -S12
Local

/.2

14
Off

PE
"Direct starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

U
V
W
-M1
M PE
3 AC

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.4.2
L3

Figure 3-7
N
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I > I > I > I> I>
C 1A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
-A10

PN1
PN2

X9
SPE/PE
A1
A2
1
6
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BUS ON OFF TEST/
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP
SYS

CT
SYS

RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
A1

"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

-Q2

1
3
5
A2

-Q2
/.4

2
4
6

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

1
2
3
-X2 Motor contactor

Local
"Direct starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

13
21

-S11 -S12
Local

/.2

22

14 Off

U
V
W
-M1
M PE
3 AC

33
3.4 Direct starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.4 Direct starter

3.4.3 "Direct starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

Figure 3-8 "Direct starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

34 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.4.4
L3

Figure 3-9
N
PE PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

6
4
2
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I > I > I > I> I>
C 1A C 1,6A

5
3
1
2
2
-A10

A
B

SPE/PE
A1
A2
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP 230V AC
Device

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BUS ON OFF TEST/
SYS

CT
SYS

SIMOCODEpro S RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2

"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
14
24

IN1
IN3
IN4
IN+

IN2
A1
-Q2

1
3
5
A2

-Q2
/.4

2
4
6

=DOL

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8
5

-X1 -X19
"Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S

1
2
3
-X2 Motor contactor

Local
On

13
21

-S11 -S12
Local

/.2

22

14 Off

U
V
W
-M1
M PE
3 AC

35
3.4 Direct starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.4 Direct starter

3.4.5 "Direct-on-line starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-10 "Direct starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

36 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1

3.5
L2 2N 1N

3.5.1
L3
N

Figure 3-11
PE
PROFIBUS, Modbus R'TU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-Q -F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I> I> I> I> I>
C 1A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Reversing starter

-A10

A
B
A1
A2
1

X9
SPE/PE
6
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BUS ON< ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SYS

SIMOCODEpro C/V/MBR RESET

Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10
A1
-Q2 -Q3 A1

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2

A2
-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8
6
7

-X1 -X19

Motor contactor

1
2
3
-X2 Run signal - right

Motor contactor
Run singal - left

13
21
-S11 -S12 -S13 13
Local

/.2

14
14

Off

PE
Local

U
V
W

Run signal - right
-M1
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR

M PE
3 AC Local
Run signal - left

37
3.5 Reversing starter
Example circuits control functions
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

38
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.5.2
L3
N

Figure 3-12
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19
3.5 Reversing starter

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1
I> I> I> I> I>
Example circuits control functions

C 1A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
-A10

PN1
PN2
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
1
6
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
BUS ON< ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SYS

SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP RESET

Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2

"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8
6
7

-X1 -X19

Motor contactor

1
2
3
-X2 Run signal - right

Motor contactor
Run singal - left

13
21
13

-S11 -S12 -S13

Local

/.2
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

14
14

Off

PE
Local

U
V
W

Run signal - right
-M1
M PE
3 AC Local
Run signal - left

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.5 Reversing starter

3.5.3 "Reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V

Figure 3-13 "Reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 39
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

40
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.5.4
L3
N

Figure 3-14
PE
PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19
3.5 Reversing starter

-F11 -F12

6
4
2
1
1
I> I> I> I> I>
Example circuits control functions

C 1A C 1,6A

5
3
1
2
2
-A10

A
B
A1
A2
13

SPE/PE
-T10 -A12

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP 230V AC
Device
BUS ON< ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SYS

SIMOCODEpro S RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
14
24

IN1
IN3
IN4
IN+

IN2

"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S

A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2

A2
-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S

6
5
4
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19

Motor contactor

1
2
3
-X2 Run signal - right

Motor contactor
Run singal - left

13
21
13

-S11 -S12 -S13

Local

/.2

22

14
14

Off

PE
Local

U
V
W

Run signal - right
-M1
M PE
3 AC Local
Run signal - left

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.5 Reversing starter

3.5.5 "Reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-15 "Reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 41
-Q1

42
X1.3
X1.5

1
3
5
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

3.6
M
L1 2L1 1L1

3.6.1

X1.4
X1.6
L2 2N 1N

/.4
L3 I> I> I>

4
2
6

Figure 3-16
N

X20.1
X20.2
X20.5

X20.3
X20.4
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

X1.1

A
B
A
B
/.2
/.4

X1.2
/.3

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19

-Q1 -F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
M
Example circuits control functions

I > I > I > I> I>

/.6

2
4
6
2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
pro V PB, pro V MR
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

-A10

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
-T10 -A11
Profibus DP, Modbus RTU

L1
L2
L3
230V AC
Device
BUS Device ON OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SIMOCODEpro C/V/MBR RESET
SYS
Gen.fault
Basic Unit BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1

Current measurement
IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10

X1.4
X1.4
-Q1 -Q1

X20.3
X20.4
X20.5
/.6 /.6 -Q1

X1.1
X1.1
/.6

M
3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

X20.1
7

1
2
3
C4
C5
C1
-X2 -X19

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) on

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) o

Checkback signal

13
21
Circuit breaker closed via auxiliary switch AUX feedback signal
-S11 -S12
Checkback signal

"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR
Circuit breaker tripped via alarm switch TAS X1.1/X1.4 feedback signal

Local Control
ON

Local Control
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C,

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
-Q1

X1.3
X1.5

1
3
5
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
M
L1 2L1 1L1

3.6.2

X1.4
X1.6
L2 2N 1N

/.4
L3 I> I> I>

4
2
6

Figure 3-17
N

X20.1
X20.2
X20.5

X20.3
X20.4
PE

X1.1
/.2
/.4

X1.2
PROFINET IO, EtherNet IP

/.3

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19

-Q1 -F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
M

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I > I > I > I> I>
/.6

2
4
6
2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
pro V PN, pro V EIP

-A10

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
-T10 6 -A11
PROFINET IO

L1
L2
L3
230V AC
Device
BUS Device ON OFF TEST/

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP

CT
SYS

RESET
SYS

Gen.fault
Basic Unit BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
IN1

Current measurement
IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
2
3
7

9
4
5
8

T1
T2
10

X1.4
X1.4
-Q1 -Q1
X20.3
X20.4
X20.5

/.6 /.6 -Q1

X1.1
X1.1
/.6

X20.1
7

1
2
3
C4
C5
C1

-X2 -X19

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) on

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) o

Checkback signal

13
21

Circuit breaker closed via auxiliary switch AUX feedback signal

"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
-S11 -S12
Checkback signal
22

14
Circuit breaker tripped via alarm switch TAS X1.1/X1.4 feedback signal

Local Control
ON

Local Control
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE

43
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

3.6.3 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V

Figure 3-18 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

44 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
-Q1

X1.3
X1.5

1
3
5
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
M
L1

3.6.4
2L1 1L1

X1.4
X1.6
L2 2N 1N

/.4
L3 I> I> I>

4
2
6

Figure 3-19
N

X20.1
X20.2
X20.5

X20.3
X20.4
PE PROFIBUS

X1.1

A
B
A
B
/.2
/.4

X1.2
/.3

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19

-Q1 -F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I > I > I > I> I>

/.6

2
4
6
2
2
C 1A C 1,6A

-A10

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

-T10 -A11

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP 230V AC
Device
BUS ON OFF TEST/

CT
SYS

SIMOCODEpro S RESET
SYS

Gen.fault
Basic Unit BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
14
24

IN1
IN3
IN4
IN+

IN2

X1.4
X1.4
-Q1 -Q1
X20.3
X20.4
X20.5

/.6 /.6 -Q1

X1.1
X1.1
/.6

"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S

X20.1
7

1
2
3
C4
C5
C1

-X2 -X19

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) on

Circuit-breaker (MCCB) o

Checkback signal
13
21

Circuit breaker closed via auxiliary switch AUX feedback signal

-S11 -S12
Checkback signal
22

Circuit breaker tripped via alarm switch TAS X1.1/X1.4 feedback signal

Local Control
ON

Local Control
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S

45
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.6 3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

3.6.5 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram - SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-20 "3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram, SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

46 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1

3.7
L2 2N 1N

3.7.1
L3
N

Figure 3-21
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
Star-delta starter

-A10

A
B
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
6

1
-A11
-T

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP 230V AC
Device

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BUS ON OFF TEST/

SYS
SYS

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

PTC Operator Panel

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
-X2 -X2 -X19 C1

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta),

Star contactor

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR
-S11 -S12
Local
22

14

On
-M1
Local
W1 W2 Off
V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

47
3.7 Star-delta starter
Example circuits control functions
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

48
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.7.2
L3
N

Figure 3-22
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19
3.7 Star-delta starter

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1
I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I>
Example circuits control functions

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
pro V PN, pro V EIP

-A10

PN1
PN2
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
1
-T 6 -A11

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO 230V AC
Device
BUS ON OFF TEST/
SYS

SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP

SYS

CT
RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21
Star contactor

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
-S11 -S12
Local
22

14

On
-M1
Local
W1 W2 Off
V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

PE
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.7 Star-delta starter

3.7.3 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-23 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 49
50
3.7.4

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
3.7 Star-delta starter

L1 2L1 1L1 1L1

pro S

L2 2N 1N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-24
/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19
Example circuits control functions

-F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I> I>

2
2
2

C 1A C 1,6A C 1,6A

-A10

A
B
A1
A2
13
13

SPE/PE
Profibus DP 230V AC

L1
L2
L3
Device Device
BUS

SYS
SYS
SYS

CT
SIMOCODE pro S Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset Multifunction module
BU
ϑ

Current measurement
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN-

T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3

14
24
IN-
14

IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN +
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21
Star contactor
-S11 -S12

14
Local
On
-M1
Local
W1 W2
Off
V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2 *) An electrical/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro S

Circuit diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.7 Star-delta starter

3.7.5 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-25 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 51
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

52
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.7.6
L3
N

Figure 3-26
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19
3.7 Star-delta starter

-F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
-Q

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I>
Example circuits control functions

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A

-A10

A
B
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
-T10 6 -A11

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device
BUS ON OFF TEST/
SYS
SYS

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault RESET
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

PTC Operator Panel

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21
Star contactor
-S11 -S12
Local
22

14

On
-M1

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR
Local
W1 W2 Off
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -

V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.7.7
L3
N

Figure 3-27
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A

-A10

PN1
PN2
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
1
6

-A11
-T

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO 230V AC
Device

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BUS ON OFF TEST/
SYS

SIMOCODE pro V PN / pro V EIP

SYS

CT
RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

PTC Operator Panel

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21

Star contactor
-S11 -S12
Local
22

14

On
-M1

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
Local
W1 W2 Off
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -

V1 M V2 /.2
U1 3 AC U2 PE *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

53
3.7 Star-delta starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.7 Star-delta starter

3.7.8 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro
V

Figure 3-28 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

54 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.7.9

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-29

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19
SIMOCODE pro S

-F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I> I>

2
2
2

C 1A C 1,6A C 1,6A

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

-A10

A
B
A1
A2
13
13

SPE/PE
Profibus DP 230V AC

L1
L2
L3
Device Device
BUS

SYS
SYS
SYS

CT
SIMOCODE pro S Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset Multifunction module
BU
PTC OUT1 OUT2 ϑ OUT1 OUT2

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T1
T2
T3

14
24
IN-
14

IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN +
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

*)
-Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q4 -Q3 -Q2
/.5 /.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6

1
2
3
5
6
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor

Delta contactor

13
21
Star contactor
-S11 -S12

14
Local On

-M1
Local Off
W1 W2
V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

PE
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -

"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro S

55
3.7 Star-delta starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.7 Star-delta starter

3.7.10 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro
S

Figure 3-30 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

56 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /

3.8
/ 1 1
/

3.8.1
1
3( 352),%860RGEXV578

$
%
$
%

Figure 3-31
3(

'
'
'
'

$
$
$
$
$
; ;

$
) ) 21 21! 2)) 7(67

6<6
4 5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

,! ,! ,!
2SHUDWRUSDQHO

,! ,!

&$ &$

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

$
$

$
%

;
63(3(
1

352),%86'30RGEXV578 9$& 10
4 4 'HYLFH 287 287
6<6

%86

6<6
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR

&7
6<6

*HQIDXOW 6,02&2'(SUR90%5

5HDG\
%DVLF8QLW 7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDO0RGXOH
37&

9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 287 287 287 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

9
4
5
8
2
3

7
7

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

/
/
/
7
Star-delta reversing starter

$
$
$
$

%8 4 4 4 4 4 4

$
$

7
7
7

&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW

&
&
&
&
&

; ; ;

0DLQVFRQWDFWRU $QHOHFWURQLFPHFKDQLFDOLQWHUORFNLVUHFRPPHQGHGIRU44
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

6 6 6 /HIW

"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
0
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
: :
9 0 9

/RFDO
8 $& 8
5LJKW

3(

/RFDO
/HIW

/RFDO
2II
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR
3.8 Star-delta reversing starter

57
Example circuits control functions
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9

58
/ / /
/ 1 1
/

3.8.2
1
3(

Figure 3-32
352),1(7,2(WKHU1HW,3

'
'
'
'

5-
; ;

$
) ) 21 21! 2)) 7(67

6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

,! ,! ,!
2SHUDWRUSDQHO

,! ,!

&$ &$
3.8 Star-delta reversing starter
Example circuits control functions

$
$

31

$

;
63(3(

352),1(7,2(WKHU1HW,3 9$& 10
4 4 'HYLFH 287 287
6<6

%86

6<6
SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP

&7
6<6

*HQIDXOW 6,02&2'(SUR931(,3

5HDG\
%DVLF8QLW 7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDO0RGXOH
37&

9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 287 287 287 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

7
7

/
/
/
7

$
$
$
$

%8 4 4 4 4 4 4

$
$

7
7
7

&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW

&
&
&
&
&

; ; ;

0DLQVFRQWDFWRU $QHOHFWURQLFPHFKDQLFDOLQWHUORFNLVUHFRPPHQGHGIRU44
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

6 6 6 /HIW

"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
0
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
: :
9 0 9

/RFDO
8 $& 8
5LJKW

3(

/RFDO
/HIW

/RFDO
2II
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.8 Star-delta reversing starter

3.8.3 "Star-delta reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-33 "Star-delta reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 59
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

60
L1 2L1 1L1

3.9
L2 2N 1N

3.9.1
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

Figure 3-34
A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
A2
A4
-X1 -X19
3.9 Dahlander starter

-F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
-Q

I > I > I >

I> I>

2
4
6
2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
Example circuits control functions

Dahlander starter

X9
-A10

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6

1
-A11

L1
L2
L3
-T10 Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device
BUS EIN>> EIN> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
RESET
SYS
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset DEVICE GEN.FAULT
BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

C urrent measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
5
3
1
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

-Q3 -Q2
*) -Q4 -Q3 -Q2 -Q4
/.4 /.4 /.5

A2
A2
A2

2
4
6
6
4
2
2
4
6

"Dahlander starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

1
2
3
6
5
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
-X2 -X2 -X19
Mains contactor
Fast

Mains contactor

Slow

13
21
-S11 -S12 -S13 13 Star contactor

Fast

14
14

Local
-M1
Fast
W2

W1
"Dahlander starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

V2 M V1 Local

/.2
3 AC Slow
U2 U1 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4

PE
Local

Off

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.9.2
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-35
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
-Q

I > I > I >

I> I>

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

2
4
6
2
2
C 1A C 1,6A

X9
-A10

SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6

-A11

L1
L2
L3
-T10 PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
BUS EIN>> EIN> OFF TEST/
SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP

CT
SYS

RESET
SYS

Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset DEVICE GEN.FAULT

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

BU
PTC Operator Panel
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

C urrent measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
4
5
8
2
3
7

9
10

T1
T2

1
3
5
5
3
1
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

-Q3 -Q2
*) -Q4 -Q3 -Q2 -Q4
/.4 /.4 /.5
A2
A2
A2

2
4
6
6
4
2
2
4
6

"Dahlander starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro PN, pro V EIP

1
2
3
6
5
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor
Fast

Mains contactor

Slow
13
21
13

-S11 -S12 -S13 Star contactor

Fast
22

14
14

Local
-M1
Fast
W2

W1
V2 M V1 Local
"Dahlander starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

/.2

3 AC Slow
U2 U1 *) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4
PE

PE
Local

Off

61
3.9 Dahlander starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.9 Dahlander starter

3.9.3 "Dahlander starter" diagram – SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-36 "Dahlander starter" diagram, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

62 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.10

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
3.10.1
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-37
PE

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
A2
A4
-X1 -X19
-A12
<>/<<>> ON< ON> OFF TEST/ Mains contactor

SYS
RESET
-F11 -F12 DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Fast

1
3
5
1
1
-Q Right
Operator Panel
Mains contactor
I > I > I > Slow
I> I>

2
4
6
Right

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
Star contactor

A1
A1

-Q42 -Q22 Fast

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

1
/.7

A2
A2

Mains contactor
Slow
Left

-A11 Mains contactor

X9
-A10

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10 Fast

L1
L2
L3
230V AC
Dahlander reversing starter

PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU Device N/M OUT1 OUT2 Left

BUS

SYS
SYS2

SYS1

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Local
Test/reset
Ready

BU Basic Unit Digital Module Off

PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
Local
7

9
4
5
8
2
3
23
24

T1
T2
26
27

Slow

10
Right

Local
Fast
Right

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
5
3
1
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

-Q22 -Q41 -Q42 -Q3 -Q21 -Q41 -Q3

-Q21 Local
/.7 /.5 /.6 /.6

A2
A2

A2
/.5 Slow

2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
6
4
2
2
4
6
Left
/.5

Local
Fast
1

Left

1
2
3
4
5
6
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
B4
B5
B3
B2
B1

-X2 -X2 -X19 -X19

13
13
13
13

-S11 -S12 -S13 -S14 -S15

14
14
14
14

-M1

W2 W1
V2 M V1

/.2
3 AC
U2 U1

"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR
3.10 Dahlander reversing starter

63
Example circuits control functions
64
3.10.2

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-38
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
3.10 Dahlander reversing starter

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
Example circuits control functions

-X1 -X19
-A12
<>/<<>> ON< ON> OFF TEST/ Mains contactor

SYS
RESET
-F11 -F12 DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Fast

1
3
5
1
1
-Q Right
Operator Panel
Mains contactor
I > I > I > Slow
I> I>

2
4
6
Right

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
Star contactor
A1
A1

-Q42 -Q22 Fast

1
/.7
A2
A2

Mains contactor
Slow
Left

-A11 Mains contactor

X9
-A10

PN2

SPE/PE
PN1
A1
A2
1
6
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10 Fast

L1
L2
L3
230V AC N/M
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP Device OUT1 OUT2 Left
BUS
SYS
SYS2

SYS1

CT
SIMOCODE pro V PN / EIP Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP Local

Test/reset
Ready

BU Basic Unit Digital Module Off

PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
Local

9
4
2
3
7

5
8
23
24

T1
T2
10
26
27

Slow
Right

Local
Fast
Right

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
5
3
1
1
3
5
A1
A1
A1

-Q22 -Q41 -Q42 -Q3 -Q21 -Q41 -Q3

-Q21 Local
/.7 /.5 /.6 /.6
A2
A2

/.5

2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
6
4
2
2
4
6
Slow
Left
/.5

Local
Fast
1

Left

1
2
3
4
5
6
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
B4
B5
B3
B2
B1

-X2 -X2 -X19 -X19

13
13
13
13

-S11 -S12 22 -S13 -S14 -S15

14
14
14
14

-M1

W2 W1
V2 M V1

/.2
3 AC
U2 U1

"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram – SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Example circuits control functions
3.10 Dahlander reversing starter

3.10.3 "Dahlander reversing starter" diagram – SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-39 "Dahlander reversing starter" diagram, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 65
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

66
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.11
L3

3.11.1
N
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

Figure 3-40
PE

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
-Q
3.11 Pole-changing starter

I> I> I>

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2
Example circuits control functions

C 1A C 1,6A

-A10

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
-T10 -A11

L1
L2
L3
Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device
BUS ON>> ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR RESET
Pole-changing starter

Gen.fault SYS
Basic Unit Device BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
5
3
1
A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3
-Q2 -Q3

A2
A2

/.4 /.4

2
4
6
6
4
2

"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

1
2
3
6
5
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor
Fast

Mains contactor
Slow

13
21
13
-S11 -S12 -S13

14
14

-M1 Local
Fast

W2 W1
V2 M V1 Local

/.2
U2 3 AC U1 Slow
"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

PE
Local
Off

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE
3.11.2

Figure 3-41
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

1
3
5
1
1
-Q

I> I> I>

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A

-A10

PN1
PN2

X9
SPE/PE
A1
A2
1
6

-T10 -A11

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
BUS ON>> ON> OFF TEST/
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

CT
SYS

RESET
SYS

Gen.fault
Basic Unit Device BUS GEN.FAULT

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

Test/reset
BU
PTC Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
10

1
3
5
5
3
1
A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3
-Q2 -Q3
A2
A2

/.4 /.4

2
4
6
6
4
2

"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

1
2
3
6
5
4
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1

-X2 -X2 -X19

Mains contactor
Fast

Mains contactor
13 Slow
21
13

-S11 -S12 -S13

14
14

-M1 Local
Fast

W2 W1
V2 M V1 Local
/.2

U2 3 AC U1 Slow
PE

PE
Local
"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Off

67
3.11 Pole-changing starter
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.11 Pole-changing starter

3.11.3 "Pole-changing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-42 "Pole-changing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

68 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.12

3.12.1
MR
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-43
PE

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

A5
A1
A3
-X1 -X19 -A12

Mains contactor
<>/<<>> ON< ON> OFF TEST/
Fast

SYS
RESET
-F11 -F12 DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Right

1
3
5
1
1
-Q
Operator Panel Mains contactor
I > I > I >
Slow
Right

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2

C 1A C 1,6A
Mains contactor

A1
A1

-Q32 -Q22 Slow
1

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

/.7 Left

A2
A2

Mains contactor
Fast
-A10 Left
-A11

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2

X9
6
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC N/M Local
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Off
SYS2

SYS
SYS1

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODE pro V/MBR
Local
Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset
BU Digital module Slow
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Right

T1
T2
T3
Pole-changing reversing starter

9
4
5
8
2
3
23
24
26
27

T1
T2
10
Local
Fast
Right

Local

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
5
3
1
Slow

A1
A1
-Q21 -Q22 -Q31 -Q32 -Q21 -Q31 Left
/.5 /.7 /.5 /.6

2
4
6
6
4
2

2
4
6

2
4
6
A2
A2
Local

Fast
Left
/.5

1
2
3
4
5
6
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
B4
B5
B3
B2
B1

-X2 -X2 -X19 -X19

13
21
13
13
13

-S11 -S12 -S13 -S14 -S15

14
14
14
14

-M1
W1 W2

V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2

"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V
3.12 Pole-changing reversing starter

69
Example circuits control functions
70
3.12.2
EIP
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-44
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2

1
2
3
D1
D2
D3
D4

RJ 45
Example circuits control functions

-X1 -X19 -A12

Mains contactor
3.12 Pole-changing reversing starter

<>/<<>> ON< ON> OFF TEST/

Fast

SYS
RESET
-F11 -F12 DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Right

1
3
5
1
1
-Q
Operator Panel Mains contactor
I > I > I >
Slow
Right

2
4
6
I> I>

2
2

C 1A C 1,6A

A1 Mains contactor
A1

-Q32 -Q22 Slow
1
/.7 Left
A2
A2

Mains contactor
Fast
-A10 Left
-A11

SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2

X9
1
6
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M Local
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Off
SYS2

SYS
SYS1

SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

CT
Gen.fault SIMOCODE pro V/PN/EIP
Local
Ready

Basic Unit Test/reset

BU Digital module Slow
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Right

T1
T2
T3
9
4
5
8
2
3
7
23
24
26
27

T1
T2
10
Local
Fast
Right

Local

1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
5
3
1
Slow

A1
A1

-Q21 -Q22 -Q31 -Q32 -Q21 -Q31 Left

/.5 /.7 /.5 /.6

2
4
6
6
4
2

2
4
6

2
4
6
A2
A2

Local

Fast
Left
/.5

1
2
3
4
5
6
C4
C5
C3
C2
C1
B4
B5
B3
B2
B1

-X2 -X2 -X19 -X19

13
21
13
13
13

-S11 -S12 -S13 -S14 -S15

14
14
14
14

-M1
W1 W2

V1 M V2

/.2
U1 3 AC U2

"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.12 Pole-changing reversing starter

3.12.3 "Pole-changing reversing starter" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-45 "Pole-changing reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 71
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

72
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.13
L3

3.13.1
N

Figure 3-46
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2

3
2
1
7
1
2
3
4
3.13 Solenoid valve

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12

1
-Q

3
5
1
1
I> I> I> I> I>
Example circuits control functions

C 1A C 1,6A

2
6
2
2

4
Solenoid valve

-A10

A
B
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
6
-A12
Profibus DP 230V AC
Device
BUS SYS OPEN CLOSE TEST/

CT
SYS
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR RESET
Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
PTC Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
10
A1
-Q2

"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

1
3
5
A2
-Q2

2
4
6
/.4

6
5
4
8
11
12
10
9
8
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

Mains contactor

1
2
3
N
-X2
Local
On

13
21
13
13
"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

/.2
-S11 -S12 -RMZ -RMA Local

PE
Off

14
14
14

1
2
Feedback

PE
Limit switch
Close
-Y1
Feedback
limit switch
Open

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
3.13.2

Figure 3-47
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
7
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19

-F11 -F12
-Q

1
3
5
1
1

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I> I> I> I> I>
C 1A C 1,6A

2
6
2
2

4
-A10

PN1
PN2
A1
A2

X9
SPE/PE
1
6 -A12
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
BUS OPEN CLOSE TEST/
SYS

CT
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP
SYS

RESET

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

Gen.fault
Basic Unit DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset
PTC Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
-Q2 A1

1
3
5
A2

-Q2

"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

2
4
6
/.4

6
5
4
8
11
12
10
9
8
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

Mains contactor

1
2
3
N
-X2
Local
On

13
21
13
13

/.2
-S11 -S12 -RMZ -RMA Local

PE
Off
22

14
14
14
"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

1
2
PE
Feedback
Limit switch
Close
-Y1

Feedback
limit switch
Open
3.13 Solenoid valve

73
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.13 Solenoid valve

3.13.3 "Solenoid valve" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-48 "Solenoid valve" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

74 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.14

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

3.14.1
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-49
PE

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Positioner

/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19

-A12 Mains contactor

Open
-Q1 -F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST-/

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

1 Local

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

/.7 Closed

Local
-A10 Open
-A11

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
PE
25
20
21
22

1
-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINBUS DP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Feedback
SYS2

SYS1

CT
SYS
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V Limit switch

Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital Module
BU Closed
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

T1
T2
T3
Feedback

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

Limit switch

10
Open

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2
-Q2 -Q3

/.4 /.4

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4
1

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3

"Positioner 1" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

-X2

13
13
13
21
13

-RMZ -RMA -S11 -S12 -S13

"Positioner 1" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

/.2
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC

75
3.14 Positioner
Example circuits control functions
76
3.14.2
3.14 Positioner

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-50
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
Example circuits control functions

RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19

-A12 Mains contactor

Open
-Q1 -F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST-/

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

1 Local
/.7 Closed

Local
-A10 Open
-A11

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Feedback
SYS2

SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP SYS1

CT
SYS
Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP Limit switch
Ready

Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital Module

BU Closed
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

T1
T2
T3
Feedback

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

Limit switch
Open

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
-Q2 -Q3
A2

/.4 /.4

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4
1

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3

"Positioner 1" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

-X2

13
13
13
21
13

-RMZ -RMA -S11 -S12 -S13

"Positioner 1" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

/.2
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.14 Positioner

3.14.3 "Positioner 1" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-51 "Positioner 1" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 77
78
3.14.4
3.14 Positioner

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-52
PE
/.2
Example circuits control functions

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
Open
-Q1 -F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

1 Local
/.7 Closed

-A10 Local
-A11 Open

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
25
20
21
22

X9
6
PE

1
-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFIBUS DP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2 Feedback
BUS
SYS2

Torque switch

SYS
SYS1

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro V Closed
Ready

Test/reset 230V AC Digital Module

BU
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Feedback

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
7 Limit switch

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

10
Closed

Feedback
Limit switch
Open

A1
-Q2 -Q3 A1 Feedback
Torque switch

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2

-Q2 -Q3 Open

/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

/.4
1

"Positioner 2" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

"Positioner 2" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
21

-DMZ -RMZ -RMA -DMA

-S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3.14.5

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-53

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
Open
-Q1 -F11 -F12 SYS CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

1 Local
/.7 Closed

-A10 Local
-A11 Open

SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
25
20
21
22

X9
1
6
PE

-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2 Feedback
BUS
SYS2

Torque switch
SYS
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP
SYS1

CT
Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP
Basic Unit Closed
Ready

Test/reset 230V AC Digital Module

BU
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Feedback

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
Limit switch

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
23
24
26
27

Closed

Feedback
Limit switch
Open

A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3 Feedback

Torque switch

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2

-Q2 -Q3 Open

/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

/.4
1

"Positioner 2" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

"Positioner 2" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
21

-DMZ -RMZ -RMA -DMA

-S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC

79
3.14 Positioner
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.14 Positioner

3.14.6 "Positioner 2" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-54 "Positioner 2" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

80 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.14.7

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-55
PE

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
Open
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/
SYS
-Q RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

1 Local
/.7 Closed

Local
-A10 Open
-A11

A
B
A1
A2
6

X9
SPE/PE
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFIBUS DP 230V AC N/M Feedback
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Torque switch

SYS
SYS2

CT
SYS1

SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault Closed

SIMOCODEpro V
Basic Unit
Ready

Test/reset
BU 230V AC Digital Module
PTC Feedback
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
Limit switch

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
Closed
7

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

10
Feedback
Limit switch
Open

A1
A1

-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2

-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4
1

"Positioner 3" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2
"Positioner 3" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

13
13
13
21
13

21
-DMZ -RMZ -RMA -S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W
-M1

M PE
3 AC

81
3.14 Positioner
Example circuits control functions
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1

82
L2 2N 1N
L3
N

3.14.8
PE

Figure 3-56
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
3.14 Positioner

-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
Open
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/

SYS
-Q RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT Mains contactor
Closed
Operator Panel
I> I> I> I> I> Local
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Stop

1 Local
/.7 Closed
Example circuits control functions

Local
-A10 Open
-A11

PN1
PN2
A1
A2
6

X9
SPE/PE
1
PE
25
20
21
22
-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M Feedback
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Torque switch

SYS
SYS2

CT
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

SYS1
Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP Closed
Basic Unit

Ready
Test/reset
BU 230V AC Digital Module
PTC Feedback
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
Limit switch

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
Closed

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
23
24
26
27

Feedback
Limit switch
Open

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2
-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4
1

"Positioner 3" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
-DMZ -RMZ -RMA -S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W
-M1

M PE
3 AC
"Positioner 3" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.14 Positioner

3.14.9 "Positioner 3" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-57 "Positioner 3" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 83
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

84
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PROFINBUS, Modbus RTU

3.14.10
PE

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-58
PE
/.2
3.14 Positioner

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/
Open
-Q

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Mains contactor
Operator Panel Closed
I> I> I> I> I>
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Local
Stop
1
/.7
Example circuits control functions

Local
Closed
-A10
-A11

A
B
A1
A2
6

X9
SPE/PE
PE
25
20
21
22
-T10 Local

L1
L2
L3
PROFIBUS DP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2 Open
BUS

SYS
SYS2

SYS1

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V

Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital module
BU
Feedback
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
Limit switch

7
23
24
26
27

9
4
5
8
2
3

T1
T2
Closed

10
Feedbackl
Limit switch
Open

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3
Feedback

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2
-Q2 -Q3 Torque switch
/.4 /.4 Open

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4

"Positioner 4" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
-RMZ -RMA -DMA -S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W
-M1
M PE
3 AC
"Positioner 4" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE 3.14.11

Figure 3-59
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains contactor
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/
Open
-Q

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Mains contactor
Operator Panel Closed
I> I> I> I> I>
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Local

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Stop
1
/.7
Local
Closed
-A10
-A11

PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6

X9
SPE/PE
PE
25
20
21
22

-T10 Local

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M
Device OUT1 OUT2 Open
BUS

SYS
SYS2

SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

SYS1

CT
Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP

Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital module
BU
Feedback
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

T1
T2
T3
Limit switch

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

23
24
26
27

T1
T2
10
Closed

Feedbackl
Limit switch
Open

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3
Feedback

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2
-Q2 -Q3 Torque switch
/.4 /.4 Open

2
4
6

2
4
6

/.4

"Positioner 4" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
-RMZ -RMA -DMA -S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W
-M1
M PE
3 AC
"Positioner 4" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

85
3.14 Positioner
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.14 Positioner

3.14.12 "Positioner 4" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-60 "Positioner 4" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

86 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.14.13

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

Figure 3-61

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

PE
/.2

3
2
1
1
2
3
4

18
19
20
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains Contactor
Open
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/

SYS
RESET

1
3
5
1
1
-Q BUS GEN.FAULT
Mains Contactor
Operator Panel Closed
I> I> I> I> I>
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Local

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

Stop
1
/.7
Local
-A10 Closed
-A11

SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
25
20
21
22

X9
6
PE
-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFIBUS DP 230V AC N/M Local
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Open
SYS2

SYS
SYS1

CT
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V
Ready

Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital module

BU Feedback
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Torque switch/

T1
T2
T3
7

9
4
5
8
2
3
Limit switch

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

10
Closed

Feedback
Torque switch/

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3 Limit switch
Open

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2

-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

/.4
1

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

"Positioner 5" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2
"Positioner 5" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

13
13
13
21
13

21
21

-DMZ/ RMZ -DMA/RMA

-S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC

87
3.14 Positioner
Example circuits control functions
88
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3

3.14.14

Figure 3-62
N
PE

PE
3.14 Positioner

PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19
-A12 Mains Contactor
Open
-F11 -F12 CLOSE OPEN STOP TEST/

SYS
-Q RESET

1
3
5
1
1
BUS GEN.FAULT
Mains Contactor
Operator Panel Closed
I> I> I> I> I>
C 1,6A C 1,6A

2
4
6
2
2
Local
Stop
1
Example circuits control functions

/.7
Local
-A10 Closed
-A11

SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
25
20
21
22

X9
1
6
PE
-T10

L1
L2
L3
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC N/M Local
Device OUT1 OUT2
BUS Open
SYS2

SYS
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

SYS1

CT
Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN/EIP

Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset 230V AC Digital module
BU Feedback
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

Current measurement
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Torque switch/

T1
T2
T3

9
4
5
8
2
3
7
Limit switch

T1
T2
10
23
24
26
27

Closed

Feedback
Torque switch/

A1
A1
-Q2 -Q3 Limit switch
Open

1
3
5
1
3
5
A2
A2
-Q2 -Q3
/.4 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6

/.4

"Positioner 5" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro VP N, pro V EIP

6
5
4
13
14
15
16
17
6
7
11
12
10
9
8

-X1 -X19 -X19

1
2
3
-X2

13
13
13
21
13

21
21
-DMZ/ RMZ -DMA/RMA
-S11 -S12 -S13

/.2
22
22
22

14
14
14
14

U
V
W

-M1
M PE
3 AC
"Positioner 5" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.14 Positioner

3.14.15 "Positioner 5" plan - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-63 "Positioner 5" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 89
90
3.15

3.15.1
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-64
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
Example circuits control functions

/.2
-X10

1
2
3
4
-X9 Line contactor

A
B
-Q1

1
3
5
-F11 -F12 -F13

1
1
1
oﬀ Soft starter
I > I > I >
Start

2
4
6
'A
'B
I> I> I>

2
2
2
Soft starter
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A Reset

11
-Q11

Busstecker auf Sub-D

SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

/.4 Soft starter

3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

-A10 Fault

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6

1
12

L1
L2
L3
-T10 230V AC
PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU Device

2
3
BUS

CT
SYS
Local control
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault

SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

On
Test/reset

/.2
/.2
BU Basic Unit

Current acquisition
PTC -A11
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V

T1
T2
T3
ON> TEST/
OFF
Local control
RESET

7
SYS

9
4
5
8
2
3
Off

T1
T2
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

1
3
5
-Q1
Operator Panel
/.4

/.5
/.6

2
4
6
2
3

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
IN
A1
A1
230VAC -Q1 -Q11
-Q1
3RW40

A2
A2
3RW402/ OVERLOAD

on
BYPAS
3RW403/

3RW404

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24

-X10

8
9
7
6
5
Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

13
21
-S11 -S12

/.2
PE
22

U
V
W
-M1 M PE

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52),

3 AC
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3.15.2

Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N

Figure 3-65

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45
-X10

1
2
3
4
Line contactor
-Q1

1
3
5
-F11 -F12 -F13

1
1
1
Soft starter
I > I > I >
Start

2
4
6
I> I> I>

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

2
2
2
Soft starter
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A Reset

11
-Q11
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

/.4 Soft starter

-A10 Fault

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
12

L1
L2
L3
-T10 PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
2
3

BUS Local control

CT
SYS
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP

SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

Gen.fault On
Basic Unit Test/reset
/.2
/.2

Current acquisition
PTC -A11
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3

24V
Local control

T1
T2
T3
TEST/
ON OFF

RESET
SYS

9
4
5
8
2
3
7 Off

T1
T2
10
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

1
3
5
-Q1
Operator Panel
/.4

/.5
/.6

2
4
6
2
3

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
IN
A1
A1
230VAC -Q1 -Q11
-Q1
3RW40

A2
A2

3RW402/ OVERLOAD

on
BYPAS
3RW403/

3RW404

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24

-X10

8
9
7
6
5

13
21
-S11 -S12

/.2
PE
22

U
V
W
-M1 M PE

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52),

3 AC
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

91
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

3.15.3 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -

SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-66 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

92 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
3.15.4

Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N PROFIBUS

A
B
A
B
PE

Figure 3-67

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

PE
/.2
-X10

A5
A1
A3
-X19

1
2
3
4
SIMOCODE pro S

-Q1

1
3
5
-F11 -F12 -F13

1
1
1
I > I > I >

2
4
6
I> I> I>

2
2

SIMOCODE pro S
11 2
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

-Q11
/.4

2 12
3
/.2
/.2

A1
A2
13

A
B

SPE/PE
13

L1
L2
L3
-T10 230V AC Ready
PROFIBUS DP Device
BUS

SYS
SYS
SYS

CT
SIMOCODE pro S Gen.fault
Basic Unit Test/reset Multifunction module
BU

Current acquisition
PTC OUT1 OUT2 ϑ OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

T1
T2
T3
14
15

T1
T2
T3

14
24

T1
T2
IN-

IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN+
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

1
3
5
-Q1
/.4

/.5
/.6

2
4
6
2
3

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
IN
A1
A1
230VAC -Q1 -Q11
-A1
3RW40

A2
A2
3RW402/ OVERLOAD

on
BYPAS
3RW403/

3RW404

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24

-X10
14
13
12
11

8
9
7
6
5
10

Line contactor Local control on

Soft starter Local control off

13
21
-S11 -S12 Start

/.2
Soft starter

PE
22
Reset

U
V
W
-M1 M
Soft starter
PE Fault
3 AC

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52),

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -
3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

93
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.15 Soft starter (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

3.15.5 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52) -

SIMOCODE pro S

Figure 3-68 "Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro S

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

94 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1

3.16
L2 2N 1N

3.16.1
L3

Figure 3-69
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

A
B
A
B

PE
/.2
-X10

1
2
3
4
-X9

A
B
-Q1 /LQHFRQWDFWRU

1
3
5
-F11 -F12 -F13

1
1
1
oﬀ

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

I > I > I >
6RIWVWDUWHU

2
4
6
6WDUW

'A
'B
I> I> I>

2
2
2
6RIWVWDUWHU
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A

2
3
5HVHW

Sub-D bus connector

/.2
/.2
-A10
6RIWVWDUWHU

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6

1
)DXOW
-A11

L1
L2
L3
-T10 PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU 230V AC
Device
BUS ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
RESET

SYS
/RFDOFRQWURO
Gen.fault

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODEpro V/MBR DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Basic Unit Test/reset 2Q
BU

Current acquisition
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

T1
T2
T3
/RFDOFRQWURO
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

9
4
5
8
2
3

10
2II

T1
T2

1
3
5
-Q1
/.4

/.5
/.6

2
4
6
2
3
Soft starter (3RW405, 3RW407)

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
2
3
+ - +

A1
E1
230VAC -Q1 -A1R
24vdc

IN
-Q1 Fern
3RW40 Reset

A2
E2
3RW405/ OVERLOAD

on
BYPAS

3RW407

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24

-X10

8
9
7
6
5

13
21
-S11 -S12

/.2
PE
22

14
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407),

U
V
W

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR
-M1 M PE
3 AC

95
3.16 Soft starter (3RW405, 3RW407)
Example circuits control functions
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

96
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.16.2
L3

Figure 3-70
N
PE

PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
RJ 45
-X10
EIP

1
2
3
4
-Q1 /LQHFRQWDFWRU

1
3
5
-F11 -F12 -F13

1
1
1
I > I > I >
6RIWVWDUWHU

2
4
6
6WDUW
Example circuits control functions

I> I> I>

2
2
2
6RIWVWDUWHU
3.16 Soft starter (3RW405, 3RW407)

C 1A C 1,6A C 3A

2
3
5HVHW

/.2
/.2
-A10
6RIWVWDUWHU

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
)DXOW
-A11

L1
L2
L3
-T10 PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP 230V AC
Device
BUS ON> OFF TEST/

CT
SYS
RESET

SYS
SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP /RFDOFRQWURO
Gen.fault
DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT 2Q
Basic Unit Test/reset
BU

Current acquisition
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Operator Panel
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

T1
T2
T3
/RFDOFRQWURO

9
4
5
8
2
3
7
2II

T1
T2
10

1
3
5
-Q1
/.4

/.5
/.6

2
4
6
2
3

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
2
3
+ - +

A1
E1
230VAC -Q1 -A1R
24vdc

IN
-Q1 Fern
3RW40 Reset

A2
E2
3RW405/ OVERLOAD

on
BYPAS

3RW407

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24

-X10

8
9
7
6
5

13
21
-S11 -S12

/.2
PE
22

U
V
W

"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
-M1 M PE
3 AC
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.16 Soft starter (3RW405, 3RW407)

3.16.3 "Soft starter" plan (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407) - SIMOCODE pro V

Figure 3-71 "Soft starter" plan (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 97
98
3.17

3.17.1
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
3RW52)

N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

Figure 3-72
A
B
A
B

PE.
Example circuits control functions

/.2
-X10

1
2
3
4
-X9 1HW]VFK¾W]

A
B
-Q1 -F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1
5HFKWV

A1
oﬀ -Q11
1HW]VFK¾W]
I > I > I > /LQNV

2
4
6
A2
I> I> I>

2
2
2

'B
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A 6DQIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW

L1
L2
L3
-T10

Busstecker auf Sub-D

6DQIWVWDUWHU

11
-Q11
-A10 5HVHW

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
PE
25
20
21
22

BU /.6 -A11
230V AC N/M

12
PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU Device OUT1 OUT2 6DQIWVWDUWHU

Stromerfassung
T1
T2
T3
BUS

CT
SYS
SYS2

SYS1
SIMOCODEpro V PB/MBR Gen.fault 6W¸UXQJ
Test/reset
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR

Ready
Grundgerät 230V AC Digitalmodul
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 9RU2UW
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V
5HFKWV

9
4
5
8
2
3

1
3
5
1
3
5
7

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

-Q2 -Q1

2
3
/.5 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
9RU2UW
$XV

/.2
/.2

3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

/.6
/.6
9RU2UW
-A12

2
3
/LQNV
EIN>> EIN> AUS TEST/

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
RESET
SYS

DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

230VAC
-Q1 Bedienbaustein

START
3RW40

A1
A1
3RW402/ OVERLOAD -Q1 -Q2

on
BYPAS
3RW403/
3RW404, 3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

A2
A2
3RW404

13
23
95
96
98
3.17 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24
-X10

8
9
7
6
5

/.2
PE.
13
21
13
-S11 -S12 -S13

U
V
W
22

14
14
-M1 M PE
3 AC

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403,
Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
3.17.2

Control Voltage: 24 V DC or 110-240 V AC/DC

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1: 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE

Figure 3-73

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

PE.
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
-X10

RJ 45
1
2
3
4
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
-Q1 -F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1
&:

A1
-Q11
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
I > I > I > &&:

2
4
6
A2
I> I> I>

2
2
2
C 1A C 1.6A C 3A 6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

L1:
L2
L3
-T10
6RIWVWDUWHU

11
-Q11
-A10 5HVHW

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
PE
25
20
21
22

BU /.6 -A11
230 V AC N/M

12
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP Device OUT1 OUT2 6RIWVWDUWHU

Current acquisition
T1
T2
T3
BUS

CT
SYS
SYS2

SYS1

SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP Gen.fault SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP )DXOW

Test/reset
Ready

Basic unit 230 V AC Digital module

PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 /RFDOFRQWURO
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24 V
&:

1
3
5
1
3
5
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
23
24
26
27

-Q2 -Q1
2
3

/.5 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
/RFDOFRQWURO
2II
/.2
/.2

/.6
/.6

3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

/RFDOFRQWURO
-A12

2
3
&&:
ON> ON> OFF TEST/

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
2
3
RESET
SYS

DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

230 VAC
-Q1

START
Control block
3RW40

A1
A1

3RW402/ OVERLOAD -Q1 -Q2

on
BYPAS
3RW403/
3RW404, 3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

A2
A2

3RW404

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24
-X10

8
9
7
6
5

/.2
PE.
13
21
13
-S11 -S12 -S13

U
V
W
22

14
-M1 M 14
PE
3 AC

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403,
3.17 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

99
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.17 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

3.17.3 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404,
3RW52) - SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

100 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Example circuits control functions
3.17 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52)

Figure 3-74 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52),
SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 101
102
3.18

3.18.1
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3
N
PE PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

Figure 3-75
A
B
A
B

PE.
Example circuits control functions

/.2
-X10

1
2
3
4
-X9

A
B
-Q1 -F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1
1HW]VFK¾W]

E1
oﬀ -A1R 5HFKWV
Fern
I > I > I > Reset 1HW]VFK¾W]

2
4
6
E2
I> I> I>

2
2
2

'A
'B
/LQNV
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A

2
3
6DQIWVWDUWHU

L1
L2
L3
-T10
6WDUW

/.2
/.2

Busstecker auf Sub-D

-A10

X9
SPE/PE
A
B
A1
A2
6
PE
25
20
21
22 6DQIWVWDUWHU

1
BU -A11
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

230V AC N/M
5HVHW
PROFIBUS DP Device OUT1 OUT2

Stromerfassung
T1
T2
T3
BUS

CT
SYS
SYS2

SYS1
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V 6DQIWVWDUWHU
Test/reset

Ready
Grundgerät 230V AC Digitalmodul 6W¸UXQJ
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

24V

1
3
5
1
3
5
9
4
5
8
2
3
7

3.18 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405, 3RW407)

9RU2UW

T1
T2
23
24
26
27

-Q2 -Q1
5HFKWV
/.5 /.4

2
4
6
2
4
6
9RU2UW

/.5
/.5
$XV
-A12

2
3
ON>> ON> OFF TEST/
9RU2UW

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
2
3
RESET
SYS

DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

/LQNV
230VAC + - +
24vdc

IN
-Q1 Bedienbaustein
3RW40

A1
A1
3RW405/ OVERLOAD -Q1 -Q2

on
BYPAS

3RW407

A2
A2

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24
-X10

8
9
7
6
5

/.2
PE.
13
21
13
-S11 -S12 -S13

U
V
W
22

14
14
-M1 M PE
3 AC

Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405, 3RW407)

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) -

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407),

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC
1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V
L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N

3.18.2
L3
N

Figure 3-76
PE

PE.
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP

/.2
-X10

RJ 45
1
2
3
4
-Q1 -F11 -F12 -F13

1
3
5
1
1
1
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

E1
-A1R 5LJKW
Fern
I > I > I > Reset 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

2
4
6
E2
I> I> I>

2
2
2
/HIW
C 1A C 1,6A C 3A

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

2
3
6RIWVWDUWHU

L1
L2
L3
-T10 6WDUW

/.2
/.2
-A10

X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
25
20
21
22
BU -A11 6RIWVWDUWHU
230V AC N/M 5HVHW
PROFINET IO,EtherNet/IP Device OUT1 OUT2

Current measurement
T1
T2
T3
BUS

CT
SYS
SYS2

SYS1
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP Gen.fault SIMOCODEpro V PN / pro V EIP 6RIWVWDUWHU

Ready
Basic Unit Test/reset
230V AC Digital Module )DXOW
PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

24V

1
3
5
1
3
5
/RFDO

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
10
23
24
26
27
-Q2 -Q1 5LJKW
/.5 /.4

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

2
4
6
2
4
6
/RFDO

/.5
/.5
2II
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

-A12

2
3
ON>> ON> OFF TEST/
/RFDO

1L1
3L2
5L3
A1
A2
1
2
3
RESET
SYS

DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT

/HIW
230VAC + - +
24vdc

IN
-Q1 Operator Panel
3RW40

A1
A1
3RW405/ OVERLOAD -Q1 -Q2

on
BYPAS

3RW407

A2
A2

13
23
95
96
98

2T1
4T2
6T3
14/24
-X10

8
9
7
6
5

/.2
PE.
13
21
13
-S11 -S12 -S13

U
V
W
22

14
14
-M1 M PE
3 AC

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407) -
3.18 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405, 3RW407)

103
Example circuits control functions
Example circuits control functions
3.18 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405, 3RW407)

3.18.3 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407) plan - SIMOCODE
pro V

Figure 3-77 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" plan (3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

104 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Example circuits control functions
3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads

3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads

3.19.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V
MR

Hauptschütz

Vor-Ort

Vor-Ort
Aus
Ein

RESET
TEST/
OFF

GEN.FAULT

Bedienbaustein
ON

BUS
DEVICE
-A12

SYS

SYS
6 7 6
OUT3
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

1/N AC 50Hz 230V

4
I>

3 1 2 1 3 5
OUT2
1L1
1N

-F12

C 1,6A

2 A1 A2
OUT1

1/N AC 50Hz 230V

-Q1

2 A2
230V AC
I>

1 1 2 A1 24V
8 8
2L1
2N

5 9
-F11

C 1A

IN4
Test/reset
Gen.fault
Device
BUS
PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU

4 10
PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU

IN3
SIMOCODEpro V/MBR

B 10 12 21 22
A
20 B
Grundgerät

B
IN2

19 A
-S12

A
18 SPE/PE

9 11 13 14
-X19

X9
-X19
IN1

-S11

T2
PTC
-A10

CT T1

SYS1
Entkoppelmodul
1)
SIMOCODEpro V
Ready
PE SYS2
/.2
-A13

PE
7 8 N /.2
I > I > I >

1 5 6 L3 T3 5 6 4 3 PE PE
M
1~

2 3 4 L2 T2 3 4 5 2 N
3 1 2 erfassung 1 2 6 1 L
L1 Strom-/Spannungs- T1
2
#2,5mm
#2,5mm 2

-Q1
PE
L1
L2
L3

-X1

-X2
/.4

-M1
UL1
UL2
UL3
N

-T4
-Q1

Figure 3-78 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR

1) A decoupling module is not necessary for 2nd generation current / voltage measuring
modules

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 105
106
3.19.2
EIP
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC

1/N AC 50Hz 230V 1/N AC 50Hz 230V

L1 2L1 1L1
L2 2N 1N
L3

modules
N
PE

Figure 3-79
PE
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP
Example circuits control functions

/.2
RJ 45

3
2
1
7
1
2
3
4
-X1 -X19
3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads

Hauptschütz
-F11 -F12

1
1
-Q1

1
3
5
Vor-Ort
I> I>
Ein

2
2
C 1A C 1,6A
I > I > I >

2
4
6
#2,5mm 2 Vor-Ort
#2,5mm 2
Aus
-A13
-A10

PE
X9
SPE/PE
PN1
PN2
A1
A2
1
6
-T4

L1
L2
L3
230V AC -A12
PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP Device

1)
BUS ON OFF TEST/

SYS1
CT
SYS
RESET

SYS2
SYS

UL1 SIMOCODE pro V PN/EIP Gen.fault

DEVICE BUS GEN.FAULT
Test/reset

Ready
UL2 BU Grundgerät

Entkoppelmodul
UL3 PTC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Bedienbaustein

Strom-/Spannungs-
erfassung
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

SIMOCODEproVPN/EIP
24V

9
4
5
8
2
3
7

T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
10
A1
-Q1

1
3
5

-Q1 A2
/.4

2
4
6

6
5
4
8
11
12
10
9
8
5
6
7

-X1 -X19

-X2

1
2
3
N
13
21
-S11 -S12

/.2
22

L
N
PE
-M1
M

1~

"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP

1) A decoupling module is not necessary for 2nd generation current / voltage measuring
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples
Example circuits control functions
3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads

3.19.3 "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads" plan

Figure 3-80 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" plan, SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 107
Example circuits control functions
3.19 Direct starter for 1-phase loads

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

108 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Further application examples 4
Further application examples for the SIMOCODE pro motor management system are available in
Service and Support (SIMOCODE pro application examples (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/search?search=SIMOCODE&type=ExampleOfUse&lc=en-
WW)). To view them, check the box "Application example":

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 109
Further application examples

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

110 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 111
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

112 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Index
"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram,
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 69
" "Pole-changing reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE
pro V, 71
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE
diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB, pro V MR, 42
pro V PN, pro V EIP, 67
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram,
diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 43
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 66
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
"Pole-changing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 68
diagram, SIMOCODE pro S, 45
"Positioner 1" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram,
pro V EIP, 76
SIMOCODE pro C, pro V, 44
"Positioner 1" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 77
"3VA molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" diagram,
"Positioner 2" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
SIMOCODE pro S, 46
pro V EIP, 79
"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram,
"Positioner 2" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB,
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 64
pro V MR, 78
"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram,
"Positioner 2" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 80
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 63
"Positioner 3" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
"Dahlander reversing starter" diagram, SIMOCODE
pro V EIP, 82
pro V, 65
"Positioner 3" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB,
"Dahlander starter" circuit diagram,
pro V MR, 81
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 60
"Positioner 3" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 83
"Dahlander starter" diagram, SIMOCODE pro V, 62
"Positioner 4" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
"Dahlander" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro PN,
pro V EIP, 85
pro V EIP, 61
"Positioner 4" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB,
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram,
pro V MR, 84
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 106
"Positioner 4" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 86
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram,
"Positioner 5" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro VP N,
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 105
pro V EIP, 88
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" plan, SIMOCODE
"Positioner 5" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB,
pro V, 107
pro V MR, 87
"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S, 35
"Positioner 5" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 89
"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V
pro V EIP, 33
PN, pro V EIP, 38
"Direct starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE
pro V PB, pro V MR, 32
pro S, 40
"Direct starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro S, 36
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
"Direct starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB,
pro V PB, pro V MR, 37
pro V MR, 34
"Reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V, 39
"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S, 30
"Reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE pro S, 41
"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram
pro EIP, 28
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE
"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
pro V PN, pro V EIP, 99
pro V PB, pro V MR, 27
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram
"Overload relay" plan, SIMOCODE pro S, 31
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52),
"Overload relay" plan, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V PB,
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 98
pro V MR, 29
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram
"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram,
(3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PN,
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 70
pro V EIP, 103

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 113
Index

"Soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit diagram "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta),
(for example, 3RW405, 3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PB, SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, 49
pro V MR, 102 "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" diagram cable), SIMOCODE pro S, 56
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), "Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in supply
SIMOCODE pro V, 101 cable), SIMOCODE pro V, 54
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" plan (3RW405,
3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V, 104
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402, C
3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro S, 93
Circuit breaker, 26
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402,
Control station local control, 17
3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V PB,
Current notes on operational safety, 14
pro V MR, 90
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (example 3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V PN,
pro V EIP, 91
D
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, Dahlander starter, 26
3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 95 Direct starter (direct-on-line starter), 26
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW405, Disclaimer of liability, 8
3RW407), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 96
"Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro S, 94 E
"Soft starter" diagram (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
Example circuits, 25
3RW404, 3RW52), SIMOCODE pro V, 92
"Soft starter" plan (for example, 3RW405, 3RW407),
SIMOCODE pro V, 97
"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PN,
F
pro V EIP, 73 Fault message, 8
"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V PB,
pro V MR, 72
"Solenoid valve" plan, SIMOCODE pro V, 74 M
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram,
Manual Collection, 7
SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 58
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit diagram,
SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 57
"Star-delta reversing starter" plan, SIMOCODE
O
pro V, 59 Overload relay, 26
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring
in delta), SIMOCODE pro S, 50
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring P
in delta), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 48
Pole-changing starter, 26
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring
Positioner, 26
in delta), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 47
Pump, 17
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring
in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro S, 55
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring
in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V PN, pro V EIP, 53
R
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring Recycling and disposal, 8
in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V PB, pro V MR, 52 Response, 7
"Star-delta starter" plan (current measuring in delta), Reversing starter, 26
SIMOCODE pro S, 51

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

114 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Index

S
Soft starter, 26
Soft starter with reversing contactor, 26
Solenoid valve, 26
Star-delta reversing starter, 26
Star-delta starter, 26

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005 115
Index

SIMOCODE pro - Application examples

116 Application Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508055002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1

Communication 2

Tables, data records 3

Industrial Controls
List of abbreviations A
Motor management and
control devices
SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual

06/2021
A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Important notes................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support ......................................................................................... 9
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app................................................................................. 11
1.4 Support Request ................................................................................................................ 12
1.5 Security information .......................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Current information about operational safety ..................................................................... 14
1.7 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 15
2 Communication ................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 PROFIBUS communication.................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Data transfer...................................................................................................................... 18
2.1.3 Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe .................................................................. 20
2.1.4 Telegram description and data access................................................................................. 20
2.1.4.1 Cyclic data ......................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms............................................................................................... 21
2.1.4.3 Structure of the slave diagnostics ....................................................................................... 22
2.1.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in DP master systems ............................................................ 31
2.1.5.1 Slave operating modes....................................................................................................... 31
2.1.5.2 Preparing the data transfer................................................................................................. 31
2.1.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software .............. 31
2.1.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7 HW
Config................................................................................................................................ 33
2.1.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro .................................... 33
2.1.5.6 Compatibility of SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V ...................................................... 34
2.1.6 Evaluating diagnostics data................................................................................................ 35
2.1.6.1 Evaluating diagnostics data................................................................................................ 35
2.1.6.2 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD ................................................................................... 35
2.1.6.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES ................................... 36
2.1.7 Data records ...................................................................................................................... 37
2.1.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS........................................................................................... 37
2.1.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium...................................................................................................... 37
2.1.8.2 SIMATIC PDM ..................................................................................................................... 38
2.1.8.3 Parameter data during startup............................................................................................ 38
2.1.9 Timestamping/time synchronization................................................................................... 39
2.2 PROFINET communication.................................................................................................. 40
2.2.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 40
2.2.2 Data security in automation ............................................................................................... 42
2.2.3 Data transfer...................................................................................................................... 44
2.2.4 Communication via PROFINET IO........................................................................................ 45
2.2.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC) ......................................... 46

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 3
Table of contents

2.2.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN via GSD......................................................................... 49

2.2.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro ................. 50
2.2.8 Configuring SIMOCODE pro V PN ports ............................................................................... 51
2.2.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device.......................... 51
2.2.10 Identification data for PROFINET IO..................................................................................... 53
2.2.11 Shared device .................................................................................................................... 54
2.2.12 Media redundancy ............................................................................................................. 55
2.2.13 System redundancy............................................................................................................ 55
2.2.14 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................ 61
2.2.15 Data records ...................................................................................................................... 71
2.2.16 PROFIenergy ...................................................................................................................... 72
2.2.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet ................................................................... 75
2.3 Modbus communication .................................................................................................... 88
2.3.1 Modbus RTU communication ............................................................................................. 88
2.3.1.1 Modbus RTU - general ........................................................................................................ 88
2.3.1.2 Supported data transfer rates for RTU ................................................................................. 88
2.3.1.3 Assignment of SIMOCODE data to Modbus addresses with Modbus RTU.............................. 88
2.3.1.4 Modbus RTU data transfer .................................................................................................. 89
2.3.1.5 Modbus RTU telegram format............................................................................................. 90
2.3.1.6 Modbus RTU function codes ............................................................................................... 90
2.3.1.7 Modbus RTU error codes .................................................................................................. 100
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication.............................................................................................. 102
2.4.1 Important notes............................................................................................................... 102
2.4.2 Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 102
2.4.3 Data security in automation ............................................................................................. 103
2.4.4 Data transmission ............................................................................................................ 104
2.4.5 Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file ........................................................................................ 104
2.4.6 Setting up the IP address .................................................................................................. 105
2.4.7 Address Collision Detection (ACD) .................................................................................... 106
2.4.8 Parameterizing the device ................................................................................................ 107
2.4.9 Integrating SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC) ........................................... 108
2.4.10 Integration and commissioning in Rockwell Studio 5000................................................... 108
2.4.11 Ethernet/IP Device Level Ring functionality ....................................................................... 109
2.4.12 EtherNet/IP system redundancy ........................................................................................ 110
2.4.13 Web diagnostics............................................................................................................... 110
2.4.14 Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure........................................................... 112
2.4.15 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)................................................................. 113
3 Tables, data records ........................................................................................................................... 115
3.1 Tables general ................................................................................................................. 115
3.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions ............................................................................................................. 115
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions ..................... 118
3.2.1 Overload relay ................................................................................................................. 118
3.2.2 Direct starter.................................................................................................................... 119
3.2.3 Reversing starter.............................................................................................................. 120
3.2.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ................................................................................. 121
3.2.5 Star-delta starter .............................................................................................................. 122
3.2.6 Star-delta reversing starter ............................................................................................... 123
3.2.7 Dahlander starter............................................................................................................. 124
3.2.8 Dahlander reversing starter .............................................................................................. 125

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

4 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Table of contents

3.2.9 Pole-changing starter....................................................................................................... 126

3.2.10 Pole-changing reversing starter ........................................................................................ 127
3.2.11 Solenoid valve ................................................................................................................. 128
3.2.12 Positioner ........................................................................................................................ 129
3.2.13 Soft starter ...................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor ................................................................................ 132
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records.......................................................................................... 134
3.3.1 PROFIBUS tables............................................................................................................... 134
3.3.1.1 Abbreviations and specifications....................................................................................... 134
3.3.1.2 Socket assignment table - digital ...................................................................................... 135
3.3.1.3 Socket assignment table - analog ..................................................................................... 141
3.3.1.4 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics ....................................................................... 144
3.3.2 PROFIBUS data records ..................................................................................................... 148
3.3.2.1 PROFIBUS data records - general....................................................................................... 148
3.3.2.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics ............................................................................ 150
3.3.2.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording ........................................................................... 152
3.3.2.4 Data record 67 - Process image output ............................................................................. 153
3.3.2.5 Data record 69 - Process image input................................................................................ 154
3.3.2.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer............................................................................................. 154
3.3.2.7 Data record 73 - Event memory........................................................................................ 155
3.3.2.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics .................................................................................. 155
3.3.2.9 Data record 94 - measured values..................................................................................... 162
3.3.2.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data..................................................................... 163
3.3.2.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 ..................................................................... 165
3.3.2.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary) ................................................ 172
3.3.2.13 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 .............................................................. 178
3.3.2.14 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary).......................................... 186
3.3.2.15 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 2 .............................................................. 188
3.3.2.16 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2 .............................................................. 189
3.3.2.17 Data record 139 - Marking................................................................................................ 190
3.3.2.18 Data record 160 - Communication parameters.................................................................. 191
3.3.2.19 Data record 165 - Identification ........................................................................................ 191
3.3.2.20 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive ...................................................................................... 192
3.3.2.21 Data record 203 - Acyclic send.......................................................................................... 193
3.3.2.22 Data record 224 - Password protection ............................................................................. 193
3.3.2.23 I&M data.......................................................................................................................... 194
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records.......................................................................................... 198
3.4.1 PROFINET tables............................................................................................................... 198
3.4.1.1 OPC UA variables ............................................................................................................. 198
3.4.1.2 Abbreviations and specifications....................................................................................... 208
3.4.1.3 Socket assignment table - digital ...................................................................................... 209
3.4.1.4 Socket assignment table - analog ..................................................................................... 215
3.4.2 PROFINET data records ..................................................................................................... 219
3.4.2.1 PROFINET data records - general....................................................................................... 219
3.4.2.2 Data record 63 - Analog value recording ........................................................................... 221
3.4.2.3 Data record 67 - Process image output ............................................................................. 222
3.4.2.4 Data record 69 - Process image input................................................................................ 222
3.4.2.5 Data record 72 - Error buffer............................................................................................. 223
3.4.2.6 Data record 73 - Event memory........................................................................................ 224
3.4.2.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics .................................................................................. 224
3.4.2.8 Data record 94 - measured values..................................................................................... 233

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 5
Table of contents

3.4.2.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data..................................................................... 234

3.4.2.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 ..................................................................... 236
3.4.2.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary) ................................................ 244
3.4.2.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 .............................................................. 247
3.4.2.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary).......................................... 255
3.4.2.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 2 .............................................................. 257
3.4.2.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2 .............................................................. 263
3.4.2.16 Data record 139 - Marking................................................................................................ 266
3.4.2.17 Data record 140 - Marking 2............................................................................................. 267
3.4.2.18 Data record 165 - Identification ........................................................................................ 267
3.4.2.19 Data record 224 - Password protection ............................................................................. 268
3.4.2.20 I&M data.......................................................................................................................... 268
3.5 Modbus data tables.......................................................................................................... 272
3.5.1 General information......................................................................................................... 272
3.5.1.1 Memory image ................................................................................................................ 272
3.5.1.2 Byte arrangement ............................................................................................................ 273
3.5.1.3 Specifications................................................................................................................... 273
3.5.2 Modbus RTU data tables................................................................................................... 274
3.5.2.1 Process image output - command data ............................................................................. 274
3.5.2.2 Process image input - monitoring data.............................................................................. 274
3.5.2.3 Measured values .............................................................................................................. 275
3.5.2.4 Display and statistical data ............................................................................................... 277
3.5.2.5 Device diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 278
3.5.2.6 Error memory .................................................................................................................. 286
3.5.2.7 Event memory ................................................................................................................. 287
3.5.2.8 Trace data........................................................................................................................ 288
3.5.2.9 I&M0 - device identification .............................................................................................. 288
3.5.2.10 I&M1 data........................................................................................................................ 289
3.5.2.11 I&M2 - Installation date.................................................................................................... 289
3.5.2.12 I&M3 - Comment ............................................................................................................. 290
3.5.2.13 Basic device parameter 1.................................................................................................. 290
3.5.2.14 Extended device parameters 1.......................................................................................... 297
3.5.2.15 Marking ........................................................................................................................... 309
3.6 EtherNet/IP data tables..................................................................................................... 311
3.6.1 Supported objects............................................................................................................ 311
3.6.2 Identity object ................................................................................................................. 311
3.6.3 Message Router object ..................................................................................................... 313
3.6.4 Assembly object............................................................................................................... 313
3.6.5 Connection Manager object ............................................................................................. 322
3.6.6 Device Diagnosis object ................................................................................................... 322
3.6.7 Measurement object ........................................................................................................ 323
3.6.8 Statistical Data object....................................................................................................... 325
3.6.9 Motor Parameter object ................................................................................................... 327
3.6.10 TCP/IP Interface object...................................................................................................... 328
3.6.11 Ethernet Link object ......................................................................................................... 329
A List of abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 331
A.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 331
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 333

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

6 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction 1
1.1 Important notes

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 ... 25.5 s (default: 0) — —

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 7
Introduction
1.1 Important notes

Brief description of the responses:

Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

8 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 9
Introduction
1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

10 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

Android iOS

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 11
Introduction
1.4 Support Request

1.4 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request online form to send your
question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

12 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.5 Security information

1.5 Security information

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 13
Introduction
1.6 Current information about operational safety

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

14 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

1.7 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 15
Introduction
1.7 Recycling and disposal

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

16 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication 2
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

2.1.1 Definitions

PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals). The main task of
PROFIBUS DP is to manage the fast, cyclic data exchange between the central DP master and the
I/O devices.

PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of
parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.

DP master
A master with characteristics to EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS with the DP protocol is referred
to as the DP master.

Class 1 master
A Class 1 master is an active station on PROFIBUS DP. It is characteristically used for cyclic data
exchange with other stations. Typical Class 1 masters include PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP
connection.

Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters include:
• PC / PG devices with the SIMOCODE ES software
• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
• PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).

DPV1 slave
A slave operated on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol that behaves in accordance
with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS is referred to as a DPV1 slave.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 17
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

GSD
Device master data (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a standardized format. The use of
device master data simplifies the configuration of the DP slave in a DP master system.

OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD to integrate SIMOCODE pro into
STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES (if it is installed) for parameterization
within STEP7.

SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning and maintenance of
devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and for configuring networks and PCs.

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

A SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into STEP7. It is connected via OM
SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnosis interrupts, hardware interrupts).

Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.

Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.

PROFIsafe
PROFIsafe is a safety profile developed and tested according to IEC 61508 for the widely used
field bus protocols PROFIBUS and PROFINET. The PROFIsafe profile defines how failsafe protective
devices (e.g. EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton) will be connected to programmable controllers by
means of PROFIBUS.

2.1.2 Data transfer

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the data transfer options:

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

18 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

&ODVV PDVWHU &ODVV PDVWHU

6,0$7,& 6 ZLWK 352),%86 '3 FRPPXQLFDWLRQ SURFHVVRU 3& RU SURJUDPPLQJ GHYLFH ZLWK
6,02&2'( (6

0D[LPXP RI WZR FODVV

PDVWHUV SRVVLEOH

'DWD WUDQVIHU WR FODVV PDVWHU

GHSHQGLQJ RQ WKH VODYH RSHUDWLQJ
PRGH VHH &KDSWHU 6ODYH 352),%86 '39VWDQGDUGH[WHQVLRQ3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ
RSHUDWLQJ PRGHV GLDJQRVWLFV UHFHLYLQJ VHQGLQJ WHVWLQJ YLD 352),%86'39

3&SURJUDPPLQJ GHYLFHV ZLWK

6,02&2'( (6
3DUDPHWHUL]LQJ GLDJQRVWLFV UHFHLYLQJ
VHQGLQJ WHVWLQJ YLD V\VWHP LQWHUIDFH

Figure 2-1 Options for data transfer

Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is transmitted
depending on the master and slave operating modes:

&ODVV PDVWHU &ODVV PDVWHU PD[

3/& &38
&\FOLF ,2 $F\FOLF $F\FOLF $F\FOLF

3& RU 3&6
HJ 6,02&2'( (6

3/&

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ SURFHVVRU
&RQILJXUDWLRQ *6'

6WDUWXS
SDUDPHWHU
EORFN

6,02&2'( SUR
8)
'LDJQRVWLFV $ODUPV 3DUDPHWHU
'DWD UHFRUGV 'DWD UHFRUGV
'39
&\FOLF VHQG GDWD
&\FOLF UHFHLYH GDWD '39 '39

Figure 2-2 Communication principle

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 19
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

2.1.3 Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe

SIMOCODE pro V as from version *E07* in conjunction with a fail-safe control (F-CPU) and the
SIMOCODE pro expansion module DM-F PROFIsafe supports fail-safe shutdown of motors by
means of data transmission via the PROFIsafe profile.
You will find more information on using this function in the manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe
digital modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

2.1.4 Telegram description and data access

2.1.4.1 Cyclic data

Cyclic data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the DP slave once every DP cycle.
The PROFIBUS DP master module sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro. SIMOCODE pro
responds by sending the message data to the master module.
The program of the PLC accesses the following cyclically:
• send data at the inputs
• receive data at the outputs.
The length of the cyclic data which is to be transferred is set when SIMOCODE pro is integrated
into the DP master system. This is achieved by selecting the basic type which in turn determines
the structure and the length of the cyclic data.
The following basic types are available:
• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master.

Table 2-1 Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:

Designation Length Designation Information

Basic type 1 4 bytes of receive data Cyclic receive - bits 0.0 to 1.7 GG SIMOCODE pro S, pro V PB
Cyclic receive - analog value
Basic type 2 2 bytes of receive data Cyclic receive - bits 0.0 to 1.7 GG SIMOCODE pro C, pro S
PROFIsafe 5 bytes of receive data 1 bit net data, assigned per‐ BU SIMOCODE pro V
manently to the relay ena‐
bling circuits

Table 2-2 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Designation Length Designation Information

Basic type 1 10 bytes of send data Cyclic send - bits 0.0 to 1.7 GG SIMOCODE pro S, pro V PB
Cyclic send – analog input
1 to 4

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

20 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Designation Length Designation Information

Basic type 2 4 bytes of send data Cyclic send - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU SIMOCODE pro C, pro S
and pro V
Cyclic Send – analog input 1 BU SIMOCODE pro V
PROFIsafe 4-byte inputs No user data

The cyclic data content (digital / analog information) is set by parameterization, e.g. with the
SIMOCODE ES software.
The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control function) is selected
when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software is launched (see Chapter Assignment of
cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions (Page 118)).

2.1.4.2 Diagnostics data and alarms

Diagnostics data and interrupts - overview

Diagnostics data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This
information simplifies troubleshooting.
Unlike cyclic data, the diagnostics data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
• Standard diagnostics
• Status information
• Channel-related diagnostics
• DPV1 process and diagnostic interrupts.

Configuring diagnostic response

In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the transmission of diagnostics
data or interrupts to the PLC:
• Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
• Diagnostics for process faults:
In the case of events identified as "S" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the "Data
record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to the PLC.
• Diagnostics for process warnings:
In the case of events identified as "W" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the "Data
record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to the PLC.
• Diagnostics for process events:
In the case of events identified as "M" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the "Data
record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to the PLC.

Setting with SIMOCODE ES

Set the response in dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters >Diagnosis .

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 21
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

2.1.4.3 Structure of the slave diagnostics

Standard diagnostics/extended diagnostics

%\WH
%\WH 6WDWLRQ VWDWXV WR
%\WH
6WDQGDUG
%\WH 0DVWHU 352),%86 DGGUHVV GLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH +LJK E\WH 0DQXIDFWXUHU

V
%\WH /RZ E\WH LGHQWLILFDWLRQ

%\WH
%\WH
,GHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH

6WDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ

%\WH

%\WH
&KDQQHOUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
G\QDPLF Q
%\WH
$GYDQFHG
GLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
&KDQQHOUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH
G\QDPLF Q
%\WH

%\WH Q

'LDJQRVWLF DODUP WHPSRUDU\

%\WH Q

%\WH Q

3URFHVV DODUP WHPSRUDU\

%\WH Q
Figure 2-3 Structure of the slave diagnostics

The diagnostics telegram has a maximum length of 62 bytes.

Station status - definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

22 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Station status 1

Table 2-3 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause / corrective measure

0 The DP master cannot address the DP slave. Check the following:
• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set
on the DP slave?
• Is the bus connection plug connec‐
ted?
• Is the DP slave connected to the pow‐
er supply?
• Is the RS485 repeater correctly con‐
figured?
1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer. The DP slave is still starting up.
Wait until the startup is completed.
2 The configuration data transferred from the DP master to the DP slave Check that the correct station type and
does not match the DP slave configuration. the correct DP slave configuration have
been entered in the configuring soft‐
ware.
3 External diagnostics data exists (group diagnostics indication). Evaluate the identifier-related diagnos‐
tics, the status information and / or the
channel-related diagnostics. Bit 3 is reset
as soon as all faults have been rectified.
The bit will be set again when there is a
new diagnostics message in the bytes of
the aforementioned diagnostics.
4 The function you requested is not supported by the DP slave. Check the configuration.
5 The DP master cannot interpret the response from the DP slave. Check the bus configuration.
6 The DP slave type does not match the software configuration. Enter the correct station type in the con‐
figuring software.
7 The DP slave has been parameterized by another DP master (not by the The bit is always 1, for example, if you
DP master which has access to the DP slave at the moment). access the DP slave with the PG or anoth‐
er DP master. The "Master PROFIBUS ad‐
dress" diagnostic byte contains the PRO‐
FIBUS address of the DP master that as‐
signed parameters to the DP slave.

Station status 2

Table 2-4 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1)

Bit Meaning
0 The DP slave must be parameterized again.
1 A diagnostic message is pending. The DP slave will not operate until the fault is rectified (static diagnostics
message).
2 The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is configured.
3 Response monitoring is enabled for this DP slave.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 23
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Bit Meaning
4 The DP slave has received a "FREEZE" control command. 1)
5 The DP slave has received a "SYNC" control command. 1)
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is updated only if another diagnostic message also changes.

Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnostics.

Table 2-5 Structure of station status3

Bit Meaning
0 to 7 Bits are always "0".

Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of this DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the "Master PROFIBUS
address" diagnostic byte,
• that has parameterized the DP slave and
• that has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is stored in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Manufacturer's ID - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type.

Table 2-6 Structure of the manufacturer ID

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro

Identifier-related diagnostics - definition

Identifier-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

24 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Identifier-related diagnostics - configuration

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH [

/HQJWK RI LGHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV

LQFOXGLQJ E\WH E\WHV
&RGH IRU LGHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH [ *6'

,GHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV LV QRW DYDLODEOH

,GHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV LV DYDLODEOH

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH [ 20 6,02&2'( SUR

,GHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV LV QRW DYDLODEOH

,GHQWLILFDWLRQUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV LV DYDLODEOH
Figure 2-4 Configuration of identifier-related diagnostics

Status information - definition

The status information communicates the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is operated downstream from a Y-Link (module for connecting single-channel
DP slaves to S7-400H), the so-called H_STATUS is also signaled (see Fig. "Structure of H_STATUS").

Status information - configuration

The status information is configured as follows:

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 25
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH [

/HQJWK RI WKH VWDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ

LQFOXGLQJ E\WH E\WHV

%\WH [ 6WDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ

%\WH [ 6ORW QXPEHU *6' [
20 6,02&2'( SUR [
%\WH [

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH

'HWDLOHG VWDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ

%\WH
Figure 2-5 Configuration of status messages

You will find the detailed messages in Chapter Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
(Page 144).
The H_STATUS has the following structure:

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

26 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH

/HQJWK RI +B67$786 LQFOXGLQJ E\WH

&RGH IRU GHYLFHUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH

[( 6ZLWFKLQJ E\ '3 PDVWHU

[) +B67$786

%\WH [ $OZD\V
%\WH 1RW UHOHYDQW
%\WH 1RW UHOHYDQW

%\WH +B67$786

'HDFWLYDWHG
$FWLYDWHG
+DUGZDUH IDXOW
'DWD H[FKDQJH
0DVWHU VWDWH FOHDU
%DXG UDWH GHWHFWHG

%\WH [ $OZD\V

%\WH [ $OZD\V
Figure 2-6 Structure of H_STATUS

Channel-related diagnostics - definition

Channel-related diagnostics is a detailed version of the identifier-related diagnostics. It supplies
information about the device faults of SIMOCODE pro.

Channel-related diagnostics - configuration

Channel-related diagnostics is configured as follows:

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 27
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH [ [

[ *6'
[ 20 6,02&2'( SUR
&RGH IRU FKDQQHOUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLFV

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH

,QSXWRXWSXW FKDQQHO

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH

(UURU W\SH RU WDEOH EHORZ

&KDQQHO W\SH
% 1R VSHFLDO FKDQQHO W\SH

%\WH WR 1H[W FKDQQHOUHODWHG GLDJQRVWLF PHVVDJH

E\WH $OORFDWLRQ DV IRU E\WH WR
Figure 2-7 Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics

The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes, is either missing (if
there is no channel-related diagnostics) or is available once or twice.

Fault types
The diagnostic message is output on channel 0.

Table 2-7 Fault types

No. Fault type Meaning / cause

F9 01001: Error • Internal fault / device fault Precise information:
• Error during self-test See Chapter Data record 92 -
Device diagnostics
F16 10000: Parameterization er‐ • Incorrect parameter value
(Page 155).
ror

Interrupts - diagnostic interrupt

Device faults or parameter errors are interrupt sources for diagnostic interrupts.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic interrupt, the OB 82 diagnostic interrupt will be
started in the SIMATIC S7.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

28 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Diagnosis interrupt - structure

The diagnostic interrupt has the following structure:

%\WH Q [

/HQJWK RI WKH GLDJQRVWLF DODUP

LQFOXGLQJ KHDGHU E\WH E\WHV

%\WH Q [ 'LDJQRVWLF DODUP

%\WH Q [ 6ORW QXPEHU *6' [
20 6,02&2'( SUR [
%\WH Q [
%LW QXPEHU
%\WH Q

&RQWHQWV RI GDWD UHFRUG

%\WH Q

Q
Figure 2-8 Structure of the diagnostic interrupt

The first byte of the block for diagnostic interrupt can be shifted by 3 or 6 bytes depending on the
number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
You will find a description of the information contained in data record 1 in Chapter Detailed
messages of the slave diagnostics (Page 144).

Interrupts - hardware interrupt

Process faults, warnings, and status information are interrupt sources for hardware interrupts.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a hardware interrupt, the hardware interrupt OB 40 will be started
in the SIMATIC S7.

Hardware interrupt - structure

The hardware interrupt has the following structure:

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 29
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

%LW QXPEHU
%\WH Q [

/HQJWK RI WKH SURFHVV DODUP

LQFOXGLQJ KHDGHU E\WH E\WHV

%\WH Q [ 3URFHVV DODUP

%\WH Q [ 6ORW QXPEHU *6' [
20 6,02&2'( SUR [
%\WH Q [
%LW QXPEHU
%\WH Q

'HWDLOHG VWDWXV LQIRUPDWLRQ

%\WH Q

Q
Figure 2-9 Structure of the hardware interrupt

The first byte of the block for hardware interrupts can be shifted by 3 or 6 bytes depending on
the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
The detailed messages can be found in Chapter "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics" in
Chapter Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Page 144).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

30 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

2.1.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in DP master systems

2.1.5.1 Slave operating modes

The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes with which SIMOCODE pro
can be operated on the class 1 master:

Table 2-8 Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro integrated as Class 1 master

Non-vendor-specific DP Non-vendor-specific DP S7 master
master, without DPV1 inter‐ master, with DPV1 inter‐
rupts rupts
DPV1 slave via GSD • Cyclic data exchange • Cyclic data exchange • Cyclic data exchange
• Standard diagnostics • Standard diagnostics • Standard diagnostics
• Status information • Status information • Status information
• Parameterization during • Hardware and diagnostic • Hardware and diagnostic
starting (SIMOCODE pro C interrupts interrupts
basic unit only) • Parameterization during • Parameterization during
• Acyclic writing and read‐ starting (SIMOCODE pro C starting (SIMOCODE pro C
ing of DPV1 data records basic unit only) basic unit only)
(if supported by the mas‐ • Acyclic reading and writ‐ • Acyclic reading and writ‐
ter) ing of DPV1 data records ing of DPV1 data records
S7 slave via OM SIMO‐ — — • Cyclic data exchange
CODE pro • Standard diagnostics
• Hardware and diagnostic
interrupts
• Parameterization during
startup
• Acyclic reading and writ‐
ing of DPV1 data records

2.1.5.2 Preparing the data transfer

The precondition for communication with a master class 1 (PLC) is integration according to table
"Slave modes of SIMOCODE pro" and the setting for the PROFIBUS DP address.
You will find information about setting the address in Chapter "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address"
in Chapter "Commissioning and service" in the system manual.

2.1.5.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into your system as a standard slave via the GSD file.
You can download the GSD file from GSD file (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/113630) (switching devices).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 31
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:

• SI0180FD.GSG (German)
• SI0180FD.GSE (English).
• SI0180FD.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro S:
• SI0181A7.GSG (German)
• SI0181A7.GSE (English)
• SI0181A7.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
• SI1180FD.GSG (German)
• SI1180FD.GSE (English)
• SI1180FD.GSF (French).

Note
If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g. time stamping), your
configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev. 5 such as STEP7 V5.3 and higher.

The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 and SIMOCODE pro
from the hardware catalog.

Table 2-9 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software

Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 and higher

1 Start STEP7 and select "Options" > "Install New GSD File" in HW Config.
2 In the dialog box that then opens, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK" → the field device will
be displayed in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Other field devices > Switching
devices > SIMOCODE pro."
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C", "SIMOCODE pro S" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4 For SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V only.
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V can be integrated into two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2) (see
Chapter Cyclic data (Page 20)). The default setting is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1," delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only in conjunction with the fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Insert the "PROFIsafe" module in the second position in addition to "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2."
You will find more information about using the DM-F PROFIsafe in the manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital
modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

32 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 and higher

5 Check the set DP interrupt mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 interrupts on the properties
page of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and interrupts (see Chap‐
ter Evaluating diagnostics data (Page 35) and Chapter "Timestamping" in the operating manual (standard
functions)).
6 For SIMOCODE pro C only:
It is possible to set the device parameters, which are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every
startup, in the object properties of the DP slave under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see
Chapter Parameter data during startup (Page 38)).

2.1.5.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7
HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM object into the STEP7 HW Config when
version 6.0 + SP1 or higher of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is installed. This
requires the PDM option "Integration in STEP7."
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object in the STEP7
HW Config from the hardware catalog.

Table 2-10 SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config

Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 and higher

1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config."
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate to the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching Devices" directory in the
hardware catalog.
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)," "SIMOCODE pro S (PDM)," or "SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
For SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V only.
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V can be integrated into two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2) (see
Chapter Cyclic data (Page 20)). The default setting is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1," delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only in conjunction with the fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Insert the "PROFIsafe" module in the second position in addition to "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2."
You will find more information about using the DM-F PROFIsafe in the manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital
modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
4 Check the set DP interrupt mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 interrupts on the properties
page of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and interrupts (see Chap‐
ter Evaluating diagnostics data (Page 35) and Chapter "Timestamping" (standard functions) in the operating
manual).
5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on the slave symbol (see Chapter Parameter
data during startup (Page 38)).

2.1.5.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advantages of SIMOCODE ES
and parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the STEP7 HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in
the scope of supply of the "SIMOCODE ES Premium" software.
Install the software accordingly.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 33
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

The following table describes how to insert SIMOCODE pro into STEP7 HW Config from the
hardware catalog.

Table 2-11 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

Step STEP7
1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config."
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate through the hardware
catalog to directory "PROFIBUS DP → Switching Devices → Motor Management
System"
3 Enter SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro V
(basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
For SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V only.
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V can be integrated into two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2) (see
Chapter Cyclic data (Page 20)).
Enter the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as the module.
Only in conjunction with the fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Enter the desired basic type "Basic type 1 - PROFIsafe" or "Basic type 2 - PROFIsafe" as the module.
You will find more information about using the DM-F PROFIsafe in the manual SIMOCODE pro fail-safe digital
modules (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
4 Start the SIMOCODE ES software to generate the device parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Param‐
eters" in the object properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are incorporated in STEP7 and
automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during startup (see Chapter Parameter data during startup
(Page 38)).

If SIMOCODE pro has been integrated as an S7 slave, you can utilize the routing functionality
provided by SIMOCODE ES Premium.
A prerequisite for the availability of this function is that an online connection can be established
(for example via Industrial Ethernet) between the PC on which SIMOCODE ES is installed and the
SIMATIC controller that supports routing.
In this manner, you can use routing to access all SIMOCODE pro devices connected to the
controller.

2.1.5.6 Compatibility of SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro C each have their own gsd file (see Integration of
SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software (Page 31)).
It is nevertheless possible to replace a SIMOCODE pro C basic unit with a SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit.
SIMOCODE pro S basic units can be addressed with unchanged functionality by configuring with
a SIMOCODE pro C gsd file. SIMOCODE pro C parameter settings using output 3 of the basic unit
are changed in such a way when using SIMOCODE pro S that output 1 of the multifunction
module is used instead of output 3 of the basic unit.
For configurations that use the new functions of the SIMOCODE pro S multifunction module
(additional inputs and outputs, ground fault detection, temperature measurement),
configuring using the SIMOCODE pro S gsd file is absolutely necessary.
The same applies when integrating into STEP 7 via the Object Manager of SIMOCODE pro C.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

34 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

2.1.6 Evaluating diagnostics data

2.1.6.1 Evaluating diagnostics data

The way in which the diagnostics data is read out depends in which DP master system you have
integrated SIMOCODE pro and the method of integration used (see Chapter Integration of
SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software (Page 31)).

2.1.6.2 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD

DP master with DPV1 interrupt support (DPV1 interrupt mode)(e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300 / 400 DP
master systems)
In a DP master system with DPV1 interrupt support, the diagnostics data is transferred and
evaluated by means of diagnostic and hardware interrupts.
These interrupts must be enabled in the PROFIBUS configuring tool for this purpose (diagnostic
interrupts, hardware interrupts).
Using the configuring tool, you can define the DP interrupt mode in which the integration took
place in the DP slave properties and specify whether interrupts are enabled. In SIMATIC STEP7,
this is carried out in HW Config via the properties of the DP slave.
• Behavior and sequence in STEP7: Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt
(OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every time a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a
hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered every time a new process fault / warning / status
information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40 has not been programmed, the CPU switches to
"STOP" mode.
• Interrupts from a DPV1 slave, received with STEP7: The interrupt is read directly in OB 82 or
OB 40 with SFB 54 "RALRM." The data range addressed with SFB 54 by means of the "AINFO"
parameter contains the interrupt information described in Section "Diagnostic interrupt -
structure" and in the Section "Hardware interrupt - structure." The first byte which is read
corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of FB "RALRM" as defined in the
"PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to
IEC 61131-3" standard.

You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

DP master without DPV1 interrupt support (DPV0 interrupt mode) (e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300 / 400
DP master systems)
SIMOCODE pro diagnostics data can be evaluated via device-specific diagnostics (status
information) and channel-related diagnostics (as part of extended diagnostics, see
Chapter Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 22)) in DP master systems without DPV1
interrupt support.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 35
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

Using the configuring tool, you can define the DP interrupt mode in which the integration took
place in the DP slave properties.
Device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults, warnings and status
information which are recorded by the process via SIMOCODE pro. Information concerning
hardware faults is transmitted via channel-related diagnostics.
• Behavior and sequence in STEP7: OB 82 is started in the CPU every time a new device or
process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 has not been programmed,
the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
• Readout of the slave diagnostics data with STEP7: You can determine which DP slave has
supplied diagnostics data by evaluating the start information in OB 82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR"
variable). OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds here to the diagnostics address of the slave that is
configured in HW Config. The diagnostics data itself is read, for instance, in the cyclic part of
the user program with SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG." The diagnostics data that is read with SFC 13 has
the structure described in Chapter Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 22). For further
information on SFC 13, please refer to the STEP7 Online Help system.

2.1.6.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES

Diagnostic interrupt/hardware interrupt

The diagnostics data concerning diagnosis alarms and process interrupts is transmitted and
evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave.

DP masters operated in DP mode "DPV1" (e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300/400 DP master systems)
Behavior and sequence in STEP7:
Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every time
a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered every time
a new process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40 has not been
programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
Interrupts from a DPV1 slave, received with STEP7:
The interrupt is read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with SFB 54 "RALRM."
The data range addressed with SFB 54 by means of the "AINFO" parameter contains the interrupt
information described in Section "Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 22)". The first byte
which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information on SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

DP masters operated in DP mode "S7-compatible" (e.g. all early SIMATIC S7-300/400 DP master
systems)
Behavior and sequence in STEP7:
Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every time
a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered every time
a new process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40 has not been
programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

36 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

You will find information about the device fault in the start information of OB 82 in the
"OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable. The start information of OB 40 contains the
"OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable, which in turn contains the data of the hardware interrupt that is
described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 22)"). Reading
the entire diagnosis can then be initiated, for example, from OB 40, while the complete
diagnostic record 92 is being read in the cyclic user program with the SFC 52 "RD_REC", for
example.
You will find further information on SFB 59 in the STEP7 online help.

2.1.7 Data records

Records - general information

Data records contain additional information about the DP slave that can be read and, in some
cases, written.
Access is effected via acyclic DPV1 services for reading and writing these records. Operation,
monitoring, and parameterization is possible, for example, by SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these services as long as they are supported by your DP master. You will find an
overview of the records provided by SIMOCODE pro in Chapter PROFIBUS data records
(Page 148).
Unlike when cyclic I/O data is accessed, special function blocks must be called in the PLC to access
DPV1 data records in the user program.

Access to data records in STEP7

Read and write access to the data records takes with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC"
and SFB 53 "WRREC".
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online help.

2.1.8 Parameterization via PROFIBUS

2.1.8.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium

With SIMOCODE ES Premium you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro devices which are
connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a central location. Parameter data which has
been previously created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.

Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5612 (PCI) or CP 5622 (PCI-
Express)) is required to execute online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g. transfer of SIMOCODE pro
parameters.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 37
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

The system connections for PROFIBUS mentioned above are operated in conjunction with
SIMOCODE ES Premium as master class 2 and use acyclic DPV1 communication functions for
communication with SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro has been integrated as an S7 slave, you can utilize the routing functionality
provided by SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for the availability of this function is that an
online connection can be established (for example via Industrial Ethernet) between the PC on
which SIMOCODE ES is installed and the SIMATIC controller that supports routing. In this
manner, you can use routing to access all SIMOCODE pro devices connected to the controller.

Note
The startup parameter block (Device Parameters > Bus Parameters) must always be set for this
form of parameterization to avoid the device parameters from being overwritten by any existing
parameter data during startup.

2.1.8.2 SIMATIC PDM

The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) is available to you for parameterizing
functionality comparable to that of SIMOCODE ES Professional via PROFIBUS for SIMOCODE pro.
The PDM options "Integration in STEP7" provides the following functions in addition:
• "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and manual
transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during startup!)
• "Routing via S7 stations." Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a
central engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a data
record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE / PB link), beyond the boundaries of different networks
where required.

Note
The startup parameter block (Device parameters > Bus parameters) must always be set for this
form of parameterization to avoid the device parameters from being overwritten by any existing
parameter data during startup.

You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the Manual SIMATIC Process Control
System PCS 7 SIMATIC PDM (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
57355963).

2.1.8.3 Parameter data during startup

Parameter data is transferred to the unit on the PROFIBUS DP each time SIMOCODE pro is started
up.
Either standard parameters only or standard and device-specific parameters (SIMOCODE pro
parameters) are transferred, depending on the master module used and the type of integration
into the DP master system. The parameters are stored in the PLC or the DP master and
automatically transferred to the DP slave when the system is started up.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

38 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.1 PROFIBUS communication

You can set the device-specific parameters

• with the configuration tool with loaded GSD (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit only), e.g. with
STEP7-HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The SIMOCODE pro
parameters are created by configuring the device-specific parameters on the slave properties
page.
• in the SIMOCODE ES software with integration of SIMOCODE pro into STEP7-HW Config as an
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C,
SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V. You can start the SIMOCODE ES software for easy
configuration of the parameterization from STEP7 HW Config using the button in the
"Parameter" tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Note
To allow device parameterization during startup, the startup parameter block (Device
parameters > Bus parameters) must not be set.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters stored in the DP
master. Any parameters already in the device will be overwritten.

2.1.9 Timestamping/time synchronization

See Chapter "Timestamping" (standard functions) in the manual Parameterizing SIMOCODE pro
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743958).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 39
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.1 Definitions

GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET devices are described in a GSD (General Station Description) file
that contains all the necessary information for the configuration. Just as with PROFIBUS, you can
link a PROFINET device into an automation system using a GSD file: PROFINET GSD (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/38702563)
In the case of PROFINET IO, the GSD file is in XML format. The structure of the GSD file conforms
to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.

IO Device
Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers.
As a field device, the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit functions as a PROFINET-IO device.

MAC address
Each PROFINET device is assigned a globally unique device identifier at the factory. This 6-byte
long device identifier is the MAC address.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

40 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

The MAC address is divided up as follows:

• 3 bytes manufacturer's ID and
• 3 bytes device identifier (consecutive number).
The MAC address can generally be read from the front on the device, e.g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0

OPC Unified Architecture (UA)

OPC Unified Architecture (UA) is the next generation technology of the OPC Foundation for safe
and reliable data transfer and defines access to industrial communication networks.

OPC UA client
An OPC UA client is a user program that accesses process data via the OPC UA interface. Access
to the process data is made possible by the OPC UA server.

OPC UA server
The OPC server provides the OPC client with a wide range of functions with which it can
communicate via industrial networks. SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) provides extensive process data
via OPC UA.

PROFINET
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
• PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus
• Industrial Ethernet, the communications bus for the cell level.
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET. PROFINET was
defined as an Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International (PROFIBUS
Nutzerorganisation e. V.).

PROFINET IO controller
Device via which the connected IO devices are addressed. That means the IO controller
exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the
controller on which the automation program runs.

PROFINET IO Supervisor
PG/PC for commissioning and diagnostics.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 41
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.2 Data security in automation

Introduction
The topic of data security and access protection (security) is becoming more and more important
in industrial environments. Increased networking of entire industrial plants, vertical integration
and networking of the levels within a company, and new technologies, such as remote
maintenance, are resulting in more increased requirements for protection of the industrial plant.
Security is the generic term for all protection measures
• Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized accessing of data
• Loss of integrity due to data manipulation
• Loss of availability due to destruction of data
To provide protection from manipulation in sensitive plant and production networks, it is not
enough to apply data security solutions for offices to industrial applications without any
adaptation.

Requirements
The special requirements of communication in an industrial environment (e.g. communication
in real time) result in additional requirements for security in industrial use:
• Protection against interaction between automated cells
• Protection of network segments
• Protection from unauthorized access
• Scalability of the security functionality
• No influence on the network structure.

Threats
Threats can arise from external and internal manipulation. Loss of data security is not always
caused by deliberate actions.
Internal threats arise due to:
• Technical faults
• Operating errors
• Errors in programs.
This internal hazards are compounded by external threats. The external hazards do not differ
from the known threats in the office environment:
• Computer viruses and computer worms
• Trojan horses
• Unauthorized access
• Password phishing.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

42 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Password phishing means attempting to get a user to divulge access data and passwords by
masquerading as a different identity in an e-mail.

Precautions
The most important precautions against manipulation and loss of data security in an industrial
environment are:
• Filtering and verification of data traffic through virtual private networks (VPN). A virtual
private network is used to exchange private data in a public network (e.g. the Internet). The
most common VPN technology is IPsec. IPsec is a collection of protocols based on the IP
protocol at the network layer.
• Segmentation into protected automation cells. The aim of this concept is to protect devices
in the network through security modules. A group of protected devices forms a protected
automation cell. Only security modules in the same group or the device protected by you can
be interchanged.
• Authentication (identification) of the networked devices. The security modules identify
themselves to each other via a secure (encrypted) channel using authentication procedures.
This prevents access to a protected segment by unauthorized persons from outside.
• Encryption of the data traffic. The confidentiality of the data is ensured by encrypting the data
traffic. For this purpose, every security module is given a VPN certificate which includes the
encryption key.

Guidelines on information security in industrial automation

VDI guideline
The VDI/VDE Association of German Engineers "Measurement and Automation" has published
with the VDI guideline "VDI/VDE 2182 Sheet 1, IT Security for Industrial Automation - General
Model" a guideline in implementation of a security architecture in the industrial environment.
The guideline is found under "VDI guidelines" on the VDI home page: VDI guidelines (http://
www.vdi.eu/engineering/vdi-standards)

PROFINET Security Guideline

The PROFIBUS & PROFINET user organization supports you with building up safety standards in
your company with the PROFINET Security Guideline. These guidelines are found under
downloads on the home page of the PROFIBUS & PROFINET user organization: PI - PROFIBUS &
PROFINET International Home (http://www.profibus.com)

Security information
See Security information (Page 13).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 43
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.3 Data transfer

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows an overview of the communication functions supported by
SIMOCODE, which are described in the following sections:

SPS PC PC / HMI PC
SIMOCODE ES OPC UA Client Web Browser
(TIA)

IO Controller 3

IO Supervisor

1 2 5 6

Ethernet / PROFINET

,1 ,1 7

4
287

287 ,1 ,1 7

6,02&2'(352931

IO Device '(9,&( !V

%86 V

OPC UA Server *(1)$8/7

3257
3257
System interface
7(67

Web Server 5(6(7

31/$1

8)$%

PC
$ $ 3(
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)
Figure 2-10 Communication functions as exemplified by SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)

1 Communication between PLC (IO controller) and SIMOCODE pro (IO device) via
PROFINET / Ethernet
2 Communication between PC with parameterization software SIMOCODE ES and
SIMOCODE pro via PROFINET
3 Communication between PC with parameterization software SIMOCODE ES Premium and
SIMOCODE pro via SIMATIC S7 (SIMOCODE pro integrated into SIMOCODE ES (TIA-Portal))
4 Communication between PC parameterization software SIMOCODE and SIMOCODE pro via the
SIMOCODE pro system interface (point-to-point via RS 232 or USB)
5 Communication between PC or HMI with OPC UA Client and SIMOCODE pro via Ethernet/
OPC UA
6 Communication between PC with a web browser and SIMOCODE pro via TCP/IP and HTTP

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

44 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.4 Communication via PROFINET IO

SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) offers communication functions via PROFINET IO with the following
features:
• Integrated switch with 2 ports (applies to devices with 2 ports)
It is possible to build PROFINET bus and ring topologies without additional switches.
The integrated 2-port switch supports functions for port diagnostics if this functions are used by
the automation system.
• Device replacement without removable medium/programming device
This is a function that permits replacement of a device (e.g. in case of a device defect) by a new
device with factory settings without the help of PCs or programming devices without a memory
module.
• Shared device
Shared device is the function with which an IO device is used simultaneously by two or more IO
controllers.
This function can be used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital module. An
automation system communicates with SIMOCODE pro via PROFINET IO and performs the
standard control tasks while a second fail-safe automation system via PROFINET IO can be used
for safety-related tripping using the PROFIsafe profile.
Use of this function depends on whether the automation system supports the function. It is
configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g. with STEP 7 HW Config.
• Media redundancy
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports media redundancy according to the Media Redundancy Protocol
(MRP). This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g.,
HW Config with STEP 7.
• System redundancy
SIMOCODE pro V PN product version *E05* and higher and SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) support a
redundant-system connection with two S7-400H CPUs. This provides for a communication link
(Application Relation) between each IO device and each of the two H CPUs. The communication
link can be set up by means of a freely selectable topological connection.
This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g., HW
Config with STEP 7.
• RT communication
As a motor management system, SIMOCODE pro V PN does not have any time-critical
communication functions itself but it does support PROFINET hardware RT used. The integrated
2-port switch can therefore be used to forward RT data.
• Support for PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy, a protocol defined by the PROFINET User Organization, lays the foundations for a
vendor-neutral, universal system for flexible, short-term, and intelligent shutdown of individual
loads or whole production units.
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports the functions defined in the protocol in the form of a switchgear
with switching and measuring functions

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 45
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

You will find more information in the system manual "SIMATIC PROFINET System Description"
(see System manual SIMATIC PROFINET System Description (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127)).

2.2.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

I/O configurations
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) supports a number of I/O configurations, which define the structure
and length of the I/O data that are cyclically transferred between the IO controller (PLC) and the
IO device (SIMOCODE pro). In the case of SIMOCODE pro, these configurations are termed Basic
types.

Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)

The following basic types are available:
• Basic type 1, 4 bytes:

Figure 2-11 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 1, 4 bytes

• Basic type 2, 2 bytes:

Figure 2-12 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 2, 2 bytes

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

46 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

• Basic type 3, 6 bytes

Figure 2-13 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 3, 6 bytes

• PROFIsafe, 1 F-DO
Permanently assigned to the fail-safe relay enable circuits of the DM-F PROFIsafe, length 5 bytes.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 47
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro V PN

• Basic type 1, 10 bytes

Figure 2-14 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 1, 10 bytes

• Basic type 2, 4 bytes

Figure 2-15 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 2, 4 bytes

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

48 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

• Basic type 3, 20 bytes

Figure 2-16 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 3, 20 bytes

• PROFIsafe
No useful data, length 4 bytes.

2.2.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN via GSD

Using the GSD, integration into the PROFINET-IO system and device diagnostics are possible. For
parameterization of the device function of SIMOCODE pro, use the SIMOCODE ES software.
Integrate the GSD for SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) into the configuration tool of your automation
system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config). The GSD is available for downloading at the following link:
PROFINET GSD (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/38702563).

Note
GSD for SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)
Different GSDs are available for 1-port/2-port devices.

After installation of the GSD, you will find SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) in the hardware catalog of
STEP7 V5 under "Hardware Catalog → Additional Field Devices → PROFINET IO → Switching
Devices → Siemens AG → Motor Management System." Insert the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) into
the PROFINET IO system.
After insertion of SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP), configure one of the three possible basic types in Slot
1 of the IO device inserted in this way (see figures about "Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro" and
"Cyclic data of SIMOCODE pro").
If SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) is used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital
module, additionally configure the I/O configuration for PROFIsafe in slot 2.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 49
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro

Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro

In addition to integration via GSD, with SIMATIC S7 controllers from Siemens it is possible to
integrate SIMOCODE pro V PN in STEP 7 V5 using the "Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro V PN"
software in STEP 7 as part of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA).
The advantage is that the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software can be called directly from
STEP 7 HW Config and can be used for developing SIMOCODE pro V PN device parameters.
The SIMOCODE pro device parameters are stored in the STEP 7 project. After transmission of the
hardware configuration, the device parameters are available in the form of start-up parameter
data records in the CPU and are automatically transmitted during start-up.
The necessary OM SIMOCODE pro V PN software is part of SIMOCODE ES. During installation of
SIMOCODE ES, select the "Integration in STEP 7" installation option to use the described
function.
When the hardware is being configured, SIMOCODE pro V PN is integrated by selecting
SIMOCODE pro in the hardware catalog from STEP 7 HW Config under "PROFINET IO → Switching
Devices → Motor Management System".
Insert the SIMOCODE pro V PN into the PROFINET IO system.
Select one of the three possible basic types (see Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the
automation system (PLC) (Page 46), figures "Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro" and "Cyclic data from
SIMOCODE pro").

Note
Changing the slot
It is only possible to change the slot by selecting another SIMOCODE type!

When using SIMOCODE pro V PN in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital
module, select the relevant configuration with PROFIsafe.

Module replacement without exchangeable medium/PC

Note
Precondition for module replacement without exchangeable medium/PC
The use of this function depends whether the IO controller and the neighboring IO devices
support this function.

Assuming the basic device has been integrated and parameterized using either the
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) hardware catalog (Detecting and Monitoring – SIRIUS Monitoring and Control
Devices) or SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal), and the topology (partner port) has been configured, the

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

50 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

IO controller can automatically restore the device name, the IP configuration, and then the
complete device parameterization of the replaced device.

Note
Do not use a memory module or initialization module!
To use this function, you do not have to and indeed must not use of a memory module or an
initialization module!

For further information, see Chapter "Restoring factory settings" in SIMOCODE pro – System
Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957).

2.2.8 Configuring SIMOCODE pro V PN ports

Configuring the ports

SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) has two RJ45 ports labeled 1 and 2 on the front. In the configuration
tool of the automation system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config), the settings for topology, diagnostics and
other options of the two ports X1P1 and X1P2 are defined.

2.2.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device

Device name and IP parameters

The precondition for PROFINET IO communications is setting and configuring the IO device
name and IP parameters.
The device name and the IP parameters can be assigned in different ways:
• Assigning device names using the configuration tool of the automation system
• Configure device names with SIMOCODE ES parameterization software and download to the
device.

Assigning device names using the configuration tool of the automation system
The device name is assigned during the commissioning phase by the configuration tool of the
automation system (e.g. STEP 7) or with the SIMOCODE ES configuration software and
transmitted into the IO device via Ethernet. For transmission, the basic unit must be connected
and accessible via the Ethernet interface. Using the MAC address (e.g. 00-0E-8C-BD-1F-27)
printed on the front of the basic unit, the device can be accessible via LAN. In this case, the
"Overwrite device name in device" parameter set with the SIMOCODE ES parameterization
software under "PROFINET Parameters → Station" must not be active.
1. Device is given a technological name as part of configuration by the user (device name here:
Motor-1). STEP 7 automatically assigns an IP parameter
2. The user assigns the device name to an IO device based on the MAC address and transfers this
in the Online & Diagnostic functions of SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 51
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

3. The user loads the configuration into the IO controller

4. IO controller assigns the IP parameters during start-up based on the device name

Configuring device names with SIMOCODE ES parameterization software and

downloading to the device
In this case, the device name must be configured under "PROFINET Parameters → Station" and
the "Overwrite device name in device" parameter must be active.

Note
Transferring the device parameters
It is always possible to transfer the device parameters via the system interface.
If the PROFINET IO device name has already been configured in a different way, the device
parameters can be transferred via PROFINET, too.

Note
Assignment of the device name
The device name can be assigned with the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software in the
Online & Diagnostic Functions. This function is not identical with parameterization with the
"PROFINET parameter" dialog box. Unlike in this dialog box, under "PROFINET
Parameters → Station," the "Overwrite device name in device" parameter must not be active.

Note
Changing the device name
Every change to the device name with SIMOCODE ES in the "PROFINET Parameters" dialog box
requires a restart of the communication interface. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and
PROFINET links and reestablishes them afterward.

1. Device is given a technological name (device name here: Motor-1)

2. Configuration is loaded into the IO controller
3. Configuration of device names and IP parameters with SIMOCODE ES:
a) Device name "Motor-1" is configured with SIMOCODE ES and is transferred into the device
via the system interface / PROFINET
b) Device name and IP parameter are configured with SIMOCODE ES and are transferred into
the device via the system interface / PROFINET

Transferring IP parameters
The IP parameters, consisting of IP address, subnet mask, and router can also be assigned in
various ways and transferred to the IO Device.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

52 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Possibilities for this are:

• The IO Controller assigns the IP parameters to the IO Device. In this case, the "Overwrite IP
parameters in device" parameter set with the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software
under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must not be active.
Note
Deleting IP parameters
IP parameters assigned by the IO controller are stored non-retentively in the device, i.e. they
are deleted again when the supply voltage is switched off.

• The IP parameters are configured with SIMOCODE ES parameterization software and

transferred to the device. In this case, the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter
under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must be active.
Note
Transferring the device parameters
It is always possible to transfer the device parameters via the system interface.
If the PROFINET IO device name has already been configured in a different way, the device
parameters can be transferred via PROFINET, too.

Note
Assigning the IP parameters
The IP parameters can be assigned with the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software in the
Online & Diagnostic Functions. This function is not identical with the parameterization of the
IP parameters with the "PROFINET Parameters" dialog box. Unlike in this dialog box, under
"PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters," the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter
must not be active.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Every change to the IP parameter with SIMOCODE ES in the "PROFINET Parameters" dialog
box requires a restart of the communication interface.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

2.2.10 Identification data for PROFINET IO

Brief description of the identification data

Identification data are information that is stored in the PROFINET IO device and supports the user
with the following activities:
• Checking the system configuration
• Locating modified system hardware
• Troubleshooting a system.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 53
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

With the identification data, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) can be uniquely identified online.
The identification data can be edited with the configuration tool of the automation system (e.g.
STEP 7) and with SIMOCODE ES and transferred to the device or read out of the device.
In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed on the "Module status" and "Properties ..." tab
cards and loaded into the modules with "Load module identification data ..." with menu item
"Target System." It is possible to transfer data already in the device into the configuration with
"Load module identification data into the programming device" when configuring via GSD file
(see STEP 7 Online Help on this function).
You can also assign the identification data with SIMOCODE ES. You will find this under
"Identification." Only I&M 1 to I&M 3 can be changed.
The following identification data records are supported:
• I&M 0: Identification (device identification); read only
• I&M 1: Tag (plant identifier, location designation)
• I&M 2: Installation Date
• I&M 3: Descriptor (comment).

2.2.11 Shared device

Shared device provision

PROFINET IO provides the shared device function. Shared device enables access by two IO
controllers to one IO device. Input and output data can be flexibly assigned to different IO
controllers.
This function can only be used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe expansion
module. While one controller accesses the standard I/O data via an IO controller and performs
the routine control, the fail-safe program is processed in a separate, fail-safe controller that is
responsible for safety-related tripping via PROFIsafe.

Shared device configuration

The I/O data is assigned to the IO controllers in the configuration tool of the automation system
(e.g. STEP 7 HW Config).

Note
Shared device function
The system redundancy function is not available when the "Shared Device Function" is used.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

54 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.12 Media redundancy

Media redundancy support

The media redundancy protocol manages a redundant network. The data that are exchanged
between IO controller and IO device are transmitted via two different paths.
If both Ethernet ports are used, the function enables communication to be maintained even if
one of the two transmission channels fails.

Settings for media redundancy

In the configuration tool of the automation system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config), the settings for
media redundancy in the properties of Slot X1 of the relevant PN-IO devices. In particular, the
MRP domain is assigned and the role is defined that will be taken over in the MRP by the device.
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) supports ring redundancy in the role as a client.

Information material for media redundancy

You will also find useful information about "Ring redundancy with the Media Redundancy
Protocol (MRP)" under Ring redundancy with the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109739614)

2.2.13 System redundancy

System redundancy with H CPUs

The redundant-system connection via PROFINET provides a communication link (Application
Relation) between each SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) IO device and each of the two H CPUs. The
communication link can be set up by means of a freely selectable topological connection, i.e. the
topology of a plant does not indicate whether or not SIMOCODE pro PN (GP) is interfaced via a
redundant-system connection. In addition to operation as a redundant system, the SIMOCODE
pro V PN (GP) can also be operated on H CPUs as a so-called "non-redundant IO device". In this
mode, only one of the two CPUs establishes a communication link to the IO device. The
disadvantage of operating an IO device as a non-redundant device is that it will fail in the event
of failure of the CPU to which it is linked.

Note
Firmware version of the H CPU
System redundancy is supported with H CPU firmware version V6.0.3 and higher.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 55
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

SIMOCODE pro V PN with system redundancy

The diagram below illustrates a configuration with two redundant-system
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) basic units. This topology offers particular advantages. The entire
system can remain in operation if a line break occurs anywhere in the configuration. One of the
two SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) communication links always remains operational. The
SIMOCODE pro V PN units then function like non-redundant devices.

Figure 2-17 S7-400 H system with redundant I/Os

① S7-400H system
② SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a redundant IO device

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

56 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

PN/IO with non-redundant I/Os

The following diagram illustrates an example of a topographical configuration with one switch.
Two IO devices are connected as non-redundant units and the other three IO devices as
redundant-system units.

Figure 2-18 S7-400 H system with redundant and non-redundant I/Os

① S7-400H system
② SCALANCE (e.g. X400)
③ SIMOCODE pro as a redundant IO device
④ SIMOCODE pro as a non-redundant IO device

Maximum number of IO devices

You can connect a maximum number of 256 IO devices to the two integrated PN/IO interfaces.
The station numbers range from 1 to 256 and must be unique at both the PN/IO interfaces, i.e.
they must not be assigned to a station more than once.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 57
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Configuring system redundancy with PROFINET IO

Requirements
In the example below, you will configure a redundant-system PROFINET configuration with
redundant I/Os as discussed in diagram "S7-400 H system with redundant I/Os" in the previous
chapter.
The PROFIBUS elements have been excluded from this example. Please refer to manual Fault-
tolerant S7-400H systems (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1186523)
for basic instructions on configuring H systems.

Procedure
Set up a new H station in the SIMATIC Manager and open "HW Config" for the station.
1. Insert a rack 400 (e.g. UR2-H) for redundant controllers.
2. Insert a CPU 400-H PN/DP (e.g. CPU 417-5H PN/DP).
3. Network the Ethernet interface in the normal way and set the IP parameters.
4. Configure a power supply module and the H-Sync modules.
5. Copy the station that you have set up: To do this, select the station and then select command
Edit → Copy followed by command Edit → Paste.
6. Configure SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a redundant IO device by dragging the IO devices in
the normal way to one of the two IO systems. The modules will be connected as redundant
units (to both PROFINET lines) as standard.

Figure 2-19 SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a redundant I/O unit in HW Config

There are two methods by which you can connect SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a non-redundant
IO device:
• Configure a SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a redundant IO device as described above and then
navigate to the tab card labeled "Redundancy" in the module properties dialog. By activating
the checkbox, you can assign the IO device to a single IO system and thus to a single CPU.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

58 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Figure 2-20 "Redundancy" tab card in module properties screen

Configure the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) specifically as a non-redundant IO at the relevant IO

system.

Figure 2-21 SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) connected as a non-redundant device

Note
H systems and separate subnets
IO devices are connected as redundant units only if the two PROFINET I/O systems of the H
system are in the same subnet. As an alternative, each CPU can be networked with a different
subnet. In this case, the IO devices will always be connected as non-redundant units.

Note
Shared device function
The system redundancy function is not available when the "Shared Device Function" is used.

Note
Product version of SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit
System redundancy is supported by product version *E05* and higher of SIMOCODE pro V PN
with firmware version V1.2.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 59
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Possible topologies
You can also combine PROFINET-based system redundancy with other PROFINET functions.
System redundancy with media redundancy:

3
2

2
2

3 3

Figure 2-22 Sample configuration for system redundancy with MRP

① S7-400H system
② SCALANCE X400 (non-redundant IO device)
③ SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) (non-redundant/redundant-system IO device)
④ SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) (MRP, non-redundant/redundant-system IO device)

Note
Response monitoring time of IO devices
RT communication is interrupted (station failure) if the reconfiguration time setting of the ring
is higher than the response monitoring time setting of the IO devices.
For this reason, make sure that the response monitoring time of the IO devices is set to a high
enough value. This also applies to IO devices configured with MRP outside the ring.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

60 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

2.2.14 Diagnostics

Diagnosis - Overview
When an error occurs, the defective IO device generates a diagnostics alarm and sends it to the
IO controller. To respond to errors with a defined (programmed) response, this alarm calls a
corresponding part in the user program (e.g. in the case of SIMATIC S7: organization block OB 82
for the diagnostics alarm).
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) provides the diagnostics as channel diagnostics data records. Channel
diagnostics data records are generated as an alarm for
• Selected messages (see Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 224), PNIO
diagnostics column, marked with "1")
• Warnings
• Faults
• Device faults.

Diagnostic status
The channel diagnostics is transmitted with different diagnostics states:
• Maintenance required:
• Maintenance demand (maintenance requested):
All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "warn" configured as their response are
transmitted with this diagnostics status.
• Failure:
All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "trip" configured as their response are transmitted
with this diagnostics status.

Configuring the diagnostics response

The diagnostics response is configured with the SIMOCODE ES configuration software. The
global enable of the diagnostics can be set for the following events under "PROFINET
Parameters → Diagnostics":

Diagnostics for process events

Selected diagnostics events are transmitted with the "maintenance required" diagnostics status.
See also Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 224), diagnostics events marked "1"
in the "PNIO diagnostics" column.

Diagnostics for process warnings

All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions in which the response has been configured with "warn"
are transmitted with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics status.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 61
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Diagnostics for process faults

All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "trip" configured as their response are transmitted
with the "fault" diagnostics status.

Diagnostics for device faults

Diagnostics events that can occur in connection with defective hardware or incorrect
parameterization are also transmitted with the "fault" diagnostics status.
The response of the different monitoring functions can be configured individually. Depending on
the function, the following can be selected by configuration:
• Deactivated: There is no response. No diagnostics are produced.
• Signaling: The diagnostics event is entered in data record 92 and is displayed in the "Faults/
Warnings/Events" online dialog box of SIMOCODE ES. No diagnostics alarm is triggered.
• Warning: A diagnostics alarm is generated with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics
status.
• Tripping: A diagnostics alarm is generated with the "fault" diagnostics status.

Evaluating diagnostics with SIMATIC S7 300/400 and STEP 7 V5

Diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

In the online display of STEP 7 HW Config, after selection of the corresponding module (in this
case: SIMOCODE pro V PN), the status of the module is determined with the "module status"
function.
The following statuses are represented in the overview:

Table 2-12 Module statuses in diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

Symbol represen‐ Status in HW Config Online Possible cause with SIMOCODE

tation in HW Con‐
fig Online
Module does not exist SIMOCODE shut down or not accessible
on the bus
Module defective Fault is pending
Maintenance required Warning is pending
Maintenance required Event it pending
OK None

The detailed diagnostics is displayed as follows on the "IO device diagnostics" tab card under
"Channel-specific diagnostics":

Table 2-13 Detailed diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

Slot Channel No. Error

1: I/O module 0 Error text, e.g. "Execution of ON com‐
mand"

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

62 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Diagnostics in the STEP 7 user program

With PROFINET IO, you can perform diagnostics in the user program via system function
modules.
Possibilities of diagnostics evaluation in the S7 user program:
PROFINET IO uses a non-manufacturer-specific structure for data records with diagnostics
information. Diagnostics information are only formed for defective components. Two ways in
which you can evaluate the diagnostics of SIMOCODE pro V PN via PROFINET are shown below.
You will find more information and detailed examples in the programming manual "PROFINET IO
- from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO" (https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
19289930), Chapter 8 "Diagnostics in the STEP 7 User Program."
Evaluating diagnostics alarms with SFB 54 "RALRM" in OB 82
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) as a diagnostics-capable IO device detects both internal faults (e.g. of
hardware components) and events relating to the motor feeder and generates a diagnostics
alarm to which you can respond using an alarm OB.
Initial information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information for the fault event.
You can then obtain detailed information on the error event in this error OB with the SFB 54
"RALRM" (read supplementary alarm information).

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 54 "RALRM" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Alarm processing
On process warnings, process faults, and device faults, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) makes
diagnostic interrupt requests to the CPU (on both the raised and the cleared event). The
precondition is that the diagnostics response has been enabled for these events in the device
parameterization (see Section "Configuring the diagnostics response" above).
The operating system calls the OB 82 based on the diagnostics request. The local variables of
OB 82 contain the logical base address and four bytes of diagnostics data about the
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) device in question.
If you have not programmed OB 82, the CPU will switch to the "STOP" status.
Reading diagnostics data records with SFB 52 "RDREC" in OB 1
With SFB 52 "RDREC," you read the data record with number INDEX from the
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) IO Device addressed by means of ID. ID contains the logical address
with which SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7 HW Config.
Example:
If you want to obtain diagnostic information with the 0xE00A diagnostics data record for the
pending faults from SIMOCODE pro V PN at the device level, INDEX = W#16#E00A.
With the MLEN variable, you specify the maximum number of bytes to be read. For this reason,
you select the target area RECORD to be at least the same size as MLEN.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 63
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

The "true" value of the VALID output parameter indicates that the data record has been
successfully transferred to the target area RECORD. In this case, the output parameter LEN has
the length of the read data in bytes.
If an error occurs during data record transmission, this will be displayed in the "ERROR" output
parameter. In case of an error, "ERROR = true" is set and the error data will be contained in the
"STATUS" output parameter.

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 52 "RDREC" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
Complete diagnostics information from SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)
Note that reading the diagnostics data records 0xCXXX only ever provides the pending
diagnostics.
You can evaluate the complete diagnostics information of SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) by reading
data record 92 (0x005C).

You will find more information and detailed examples in Chapter 8 of the programming manual
"PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930).

Addressing levels
PROFINET IO defines different addressing levels via which diagnostics information of the IO
devices can be accessed. You will find more information in Chapter 5 of the programming
manual "PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO" (https://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930).
Diagnostics information from SIMOCODE pro V PN is evaluated at the addressing level for the
slot.

Overview of the diagnostics data records

Table 2-14 Diagnostics data records at slot level

Diagnostics data record No. Diagnostic status

0xC010 Maintenance required
0xC011 Maintenance demand
0xC00A Fault
0xC00C All (maintenance required, maintenance demand,
fault)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

64 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Example:
• Reading the diagnostics data record 0xC00C provides all pending diagnostics information
(maintenance required, maintenance demand, fault).
• Reading the diagnostics data record 0xC011 provides all pending diagnostics information
with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics status at slot level.

Structure of the diagnostics data records

Data blocks, diagnostics data records

In the following description, the main structure of the diagnostics data records at slot level
(0xC010, 0xC011, 0xC00A) is described with the individual data blocks:

Table 2-15 Data blocks, diagnostics data records

BlockType 2 bytes
BlockLength 2 bytes
BlockVersion 2 bytes
API (Application Process Identifier) 4 bytes
SlotNumber 2 bytes
SubslotNumber 2 bytes
ChannelNumber 2 bytes
ChannelProperties 2 bytes
USI (User Structure Identifier) 2 bytes
Number of repeats = number of entries
ChannelNumber 2 bytes
ChannelProperties 2 bytes
ChannelErrorType 2 bytes

Data block "BlockType"

Table 2-16 Data block "BlockType"

BlockType Meaning
0x0010 Diagnostics data record
0x0001 Alarm transport channel 1
0x0002 Alarm transport channel 2

Data block "BlockLength"

In the "BlockLength" data field, the number of the following bytes of the diagnostics data record
is coded. This is the length of the diagnostics data record without the number of bytes for the
data fields "BlockType" and "BlockLength," which each have a length of 2 bytes.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 65
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Data block "BlockVersion"

Table 2-17 Data block "BlockVersion"

BlockVersion Value Meaning

BlockVersionHigh 0x01 First value of the version number,
0x01
BlockVersionLow 0x01 Version number, always 0x01 in
the case of SIMOCODE pro

Data block "API"

API (Application Process Identifier): SIMOCODE pro uses the standard API 0.

Data blocks "SlotNumber," "SubslotNumber"

As a compact PROFINET IO Device, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) has the following structure:

Table 2-18 Data blocks "SlotNumber," "SubslotNumber"

Designation SlotNumber SubslotNumber

Head module 0x0000 0x0001
- Interface 0x8000
- Port 1 0x8001
- Port 2 0x8002
I/O module 0x0001 0x0001
PROFIsafe 1)
0x0002 0x0001

1) Only in conjunction with fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe expansion module

Data block "ChannelNumber"

Table 2-19 ChannelNumber

ChannelNumber Meaning
0x0000 - 0x7FFF Manufacturer-specific
0x8000 Submodule

Data block "ChannelProperties"

Table 2-20 ChannelProperties

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
.Type
.Acc.
.Qualifier
.Specifier
.Direction

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

66 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Data block "ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 -7)"

Table 2-21 ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 - 7)

Value Meaning
0 If ChannelNumber has the value 0x8000
1 1 bit
2 2 bits
3 4 bits
4 8 bits
5 16 bits
6 32 bits
7 64 bits

Data block "ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit 8)"

Table 2-22 ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit 8)

Value Meaning
0 No channel error group signal
1 Channel error group signal (more than one channel affected)

Combination of ChannelProperties.Qualifier (bit 9/10) and ChannelProperties.Specifier

(bit 11/12)

Maintenance Maintenance Specifier Bit 12/11 Meaning Diagnostics in user pro‐

Required Bit 9 Demanded grams SIMATIC S7 300
Bit 10 and SIMATIC S7 400
0 0 00 All lower-level diagnostics Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
are no longer pending terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82
01 Diagnostics active Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records
with SFB52
10 Diagnostics no longer ac‐ Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
tive terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82
11 Status signal - only possible Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
for manufacturer-specific terrupts with SFB54 in the
errors OB82

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 67
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Maintenance Maintenance Specifier Bit 12/11 Meaning Diagnostics in user pro‐

Required Bit 9 Demanded grams SIMATIC S7 300
Bit 10 and SIMATIC S7 400
0 1 00 Reserved -
01 Maintenance required is ac‐ Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
tive terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records
with SFB52
10 Maintenance required no Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
longer active terrupts with SFB54 in the
11 Maintenance required no OB82
longer active - all others still
active

Combination of ChannelProperties.Qualifier (bit 9/10) and ChannelProperties.Specifier

(bit 11/12) (continued)

Maintenance Maintenance Specifier Bit 12/11 Meaning Diagnostics in user pro‐

Required Bit 9 Demanded grams SIMATIC S7 300
Bit 10 and SIMATIC S7 400
1 0 00 Reserved -
01 Maintenance demand is ac‐ Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
tive terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records
with SFB52
10 Maintenance demand no Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
longer active terrupts with SFB54 in the
11 Maintenance demand no OB82
longer active - all others still
active
1 1 00 Reserved -
01 Graded diagnostics is active Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
terrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records
with SFB52
10 Graded diagnostics no lon‐ Evaluation of diagnostic in‐
ger active terrupts with SFB54 in the
11 Graded diagnostics no lon‐ OB82
ger active - all others still ac‐
tive

Data block "ChannelProperties.Specifier (Bit 11/12)"

Table 2-23 ChannelProperties.Specifier (bit 11/12)

Value Meaning Diagnostics in user programs SIMATIC S7 300 and

SIMATIC S7 400
00 Reserved -
01 Pending diagnostics Evaluation of diagnostic interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records with SFB52

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

68 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Value Meaning Diagnostics in user programs SIMATIC S7 300 and

SIMATIC S7 400
10 Cleared event and no further events Evaluation of diagnostic interrupts with SFB54 in the
11 Cleared events, but other events remain OB82

Data block "ChannelProperties.Direction (bits 13 - 15)"

Table 2-24 ChannelProperties.Direction (bit 13 - 15)

Value Meaning
000 Manufacturer-specific
001 Input
010 Output
011 Input/Output
100 - 111 Reserved

Data block "ChannelErrorType"

The ChannelErrorType does not indicate the "Fault" status. For this purpose, there is the PNIO
diagnostics status for the raised alarm: Maintenance Required, Maintenance Demanded, Failure.

Table 2-25 ChannelErrorType

ChannelError‐ Meaning
Type
0x0009 Error 1)
0x0010 Parameterization error 1)
Error of the PROFINET interface
0x8000 Data transmission not possible
0x8001 Incorrect neighborhood
0x8002 Loss of redundancy
0x8003 Loss of synchronization (bus end)
0x8004 Loss of clock synchronization (device end)
0x8005 Slave-to-slave traffic connection error
0x8008 Error in network component
0x8009 Timebase error
Device diagnostics
0x1000 Execution ON command
0x1001 Execution stop command
0x1002 Feedback (FB) ON
0x1003 Feedback (FB) OFF
0x1004 Stalled positioner
0x1005 Double 0
0x1006 Double 1
0x1007 End position
0x1008 Antivalence
0x100A Cold start (TPF)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 69
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

ChannelError‐ Meaning
Type
0x100B Power failure (UVO)
0x100C Operational protection OFF (OPO)
0x1021 Unbalance
0x1022 Overload
0x1023 Overload + Loss of phase
0x1024 Thermistor overload
0x1025 Thermistor short circuit
0x1026 Thermistor open circuit
0x1027 Internal ground fault
0x1028 EM/EM+ External ground fault
0x1029 EM+ open circuit
0x1030 TM2 out of range
0x102A EM+ short circuit
0x102B TM1 trip level T>
0x102C TM1 sensor error
0x102D TM1 out of range
0x102E TM2 trip level T>
0x102F TM2 sensor error
0x1040 Trip level I>
0x1041 Trip level I<
0x1042 Trip level P>
0x1043 Trip level P<
0x1045 Trip level cos phi<
0x1047 Trip level U<
0x1048 AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA>
0x1049 AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA<
0x104A AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA>
0x104B AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA<
0x104C Stalled rotor
0x1055 Test trip
0x1057 Number of starts>
0x105B AM1 open circuit
0x105C AM2 open circuit
0x105D DM-F safety-related tripping
0x1061 DM-F wiring
0x1062 DM-F cross circuit
0x1070 External fault 1
0x1071 External fault 2
0x1072 External fault 3
0x1073 External fault 4
0x1074 External fault 5
0x1075 External fault 6

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

70 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

1) Further details of the cause of error can be obtained by reading data record 92 "Device
diagnostics."

Data block "User Structure Identifier (USI)"

Table 2-26 User Structure Identifier (USI)

USI Meaning
0x0000 - 0x7FFF Manufacturer-specific diagnostics
0x8000 Channel diagnostics
0x8002 Extended channel diagnostics
0x9000 - 0x9FFF Profile-specific

Example of the diagnostics data records

The following example shows the content of the data record 0xC010 with the pending fault
"execution of ON command":

Table 2-27 Content of data record 0xC010 for the pending fault "execution ON command"

BlockType 0x0010: Diagnostics data record

BlockLength 0x0016: Block length 22 bytes
BlockVersion 0x0101: always 0x0101 in the case of SIMOCODE
API 0x00000000: always 0 in the case of SIMOCODE
SlotNumber 0x0001: Slot 1 - I/O address
SubslotNumber 0x0001: Sub-slot 1
ChannelNumber 0x8000: Submodule
ChannelProperties 0x0800: Pending diagnostics
USI (User Structure Identifier) 0x8000: Channel diagnostics
ChannelNumber 0x0000: always 0 in the case of SIMOCODE
ChannelProperties 0x6804: Pending diagnostics
ChannelErrorType 0x1000: Execution ON command

2.2.15 Data records

Reading and writing data records in the STEP7 user program

With SFB 52 "RDREC," you read the data record with number INDEX from the
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) IO Device addressed by means of ID.
ID contains the logical address with which SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) was configured in STEP 7 HW
Config.
Example:
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) was configured in STEP 7 HW Config with basic type 2 (I address 0 / O
address 0).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 71
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

You want to read data record 94 - measured values.

SFB "RDREC"
INDEX: W#16#005E Data record 94 - measured val‐
ues (0x005E)
ID: DW#16#0 Logical address 0
LEN: W#16#00AC Data record length
172 bytes (0x00AC)
With SFB 53 "WRREC," you read the data record with number INDEX into the SIMOCODE
pro V PN (GP) IO device addressed by means of ID.
ID contains the logical address with which SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) was configured in STEP 7 HW
Config.
Example:
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) was configured in STEP 7 HW Config with basic type 2 (I address 16 / O
address 16).
You want to write data record 95 - service data/statistical data (data record length 148
bytes (0x0094)).

SFB "WRREC"
INDEX: W#16#005F Data record 95 - service data/
statistical data (0x005F)
ID: DW#16#F Logical address 16
LEN: W#16#0094 Data record
length 148 bytes (0x0094C)

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 52 "RDREC" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

An overview of the data records is provided in Chapter PROFINET data records (Page 219).

2.2.16 PROFIenergy

PROFIenergy - definition
PROFIenergy, a protocol defined by the PROFINET User Organization, lays the foundations for a
vendor-neutral, universal system for flexible, short-term, and intelligent shutdown of individual
loads or whole production units.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

72 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

PROFIenergy - functions supported

With the PROFIenergy data record index 0x80A0, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) supports the
following PROFIenergy functions of device class type 3 "Switching and measuring devices
without their own energy-saving level":

Table 2-28 PROFIenergy - functions supported

Service Service-ID Meaning

Start_Pause 0x01 Switching off the motor in "remote" mode
End_Pause 0x02 Possible to switch on the motor again
Query_Modes 0x03 Energy-saving modes
- list of modes - Query the supported energy-saving
- get mode modes
- Read out the energy-saving mode
PEM_Status 0x04 Read out of the PROFIenergy status
PE_Identify 0x05 Read out of the supported PROFIenergy
services
Query_Measurement 0x10 Measured values
- get measurement list - Query the list of supported measured
- get measurement values values
- Read out the supported measured val‐
ues

Start_Pause
The "Start_Pause" command result in direct shutdown of the motor and activation of the OFF
command. This command only affects the control station PLC/PCS [PN] on the precondition that
the commands of this control station are enabled in the relevant mode. It therefore only has an
effect if the control commands of this control station are also active. The "PE command
Start_Pause pending" status is output.
If the motor is already switched off, the "PE energy-saving mode active" status is output. In this
status, the LED "device" flashes green on the basic unit.

Note
Command "Start_Pause"
Use of this function is not meaningful in conjunction with the "overload" control function
because this does not need any control station for routine switch-off and switch-on.

Minimum pause time

A pause time is transferred with the "Start_Pause" command. SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) executes
this command if the pause time is greater than the minimum pause time configured in the
device. The minimum pause time of the motor is configured with the SIMOCODE ES software
under "PROFIenergy." The minimum pause time is preset to the smallest possible value 0.1 s. You
can increase the minimum pause time if executing the command in longer pauses is convenient
for technological reasons.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 73
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

End_Pause
The "End_Pause" command results in the stop command being canceled at the PLC/PCS control
station and the motor being switched on again via enabled control stations.

Note
Command "End_Pause"
The command to switch on has to be output again because subsequent automatic switch-on is
not performed.

Note
Switching on the motor in the paused condition
If the PLC/PCS control station is disabled, the motor can also be switched on in the paused
condition.

Query_Measurement
Depending on the use of the current measuring or the current-voltage measuring module, the
following measured values are supported:

Table 2-29 Query_Measurement

Measurement-ID PROFIenergy identifier SIMOCODE pro identifi‐ Unit

er
4 Voltage (a-b) Voltage U_L12 V V
5 Voltage (b-c) Voltage U_L31 V V
6 Voltage (c-a) Voltage U_L31 V V
7 Current (a) Phase current I_L1 A A
8 Current (b) Phase current I_L2 A A
9 Current (c) Phase current I_L3 A A
33 Current average (abc) Average phase current A
I_L A
34 Active power (total) Active power P W
36 Apparent power (total) Apparent power S VA
37 Power factor (total) Cos phi -
200 Active energy im‐ Energy W Wh
port (total)

Function blocks for SIMATIC S7

The application description "Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 and ET200 S" (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454), which also contains an example
program for using PROFIenergy functions, is available on the Internet service portal of Siemens
AG, Industry Automation and Drives Technologies. You can also make use of the blocks from the
example to implement PROFIenergy functions in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

74 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

In the application description in Chapter 4.2 "FB 815 PE_START_END functionality," you will find
the description of the block with which the "PE_START_Pause" or "PE_END_Pause" commands
can be directly transferred to an IO device.
With the FB 815 "PE_START_END" function block, you can transfer the "START_Pause" or
"END_Pause" commands directly to SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP).
For use of further functions, in Chapter 4.3 "FB 816 PE_CMD functionality" you will find a
universal function block with which you can transfer further commands of the PROFIenergy
profile (e.g. Query_Modes, PEM_Status, PE_Identify, Query_Measurement).
You will also find the structure of the command and response data of the FB 816 in Chapter 4.4
"Response Data" of the application description "Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 and ET200 S."

2.2.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

OPC basics
The OPC Foundation (an interest group of renowned manufacturers for definition of standard
interfaces) has defined numerous software interfaces over the past years to standardize the
flow of information from the process level to the management level. In the past, the various OPC
specifications have been drawn up in line with the different requirements within an industrial
application.
Based on the experience of these classic OPC interfaces, the OPC Foundation has defined a new
platform with the name OPC Unified Architecture (UA). The aim of this new standard is generic
description and standardized access to all information that has to be exchanged between
systems and/or applications.
What is OPC?
In the past, OPC was a collection of software interfaces for data exchange between PC
applications and process devices. These software interfaces were defined according to the rules
of Microsoft COM (component object model) and can therefore be easily integrated on
Microsoft operating systems. COM or DCOM (Distributed COM) provides the functionality of
interprocess communication and organizes information exchange between applications,
including across computer boundaries (DCOM).
An OPC client (COM client) can therefore exchange information with an OPC server (COM server)
using mechanisms of the Microsoft operating system.
The OPC server provides process information of a device at its interface. The OPC client connect
to the server and can access the data offered.
The consequence of using COM or DCOM is that the OPC server and clients can only run on a
Windows PC or in the local area network and usually have to implement communication with the
corresponding automation system via proprietary protocols. This practice, in particular, results
in additional communication and software layers that increase the configuration effort and
complexity.
To resolve the above restrictions in practice and to meet the additional requirements, the OPC
Foundation has defined a new platform with the name OPC Unified Architecture, which provides
a standardized basis for exchanging information between components and systems. OPC-UA

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 75
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

will also be available as an IEC 62541 standard and will thus form the basis for other international
standards.
To summarize, OPC-UA offers the following features:
• Use of open and non-platform-specific protocols for network communication.
• Internet access and communication through firewalls.
• Integrated access control and security mechanisms at the protocol and application level.
OPC UA Client
variables
OPC UA Client
variables

Internet

Industrial Ethernet

OPC UA Server
SIMOCODE pro
287 ,1 ,1 7

287 ,1 ,1 7

'(9,&( !V
6,02&2'(352931

receive bits
8)

%86 V

send bits
*(1)$8/7
3257
3257
7(67
5(6(7
31/$1

8)$%

$ $ 3(

data records

Figure 2-23 Block diagram of OPC-UA

Configuring the SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC UA server - Requirements

Activating the OPC UA server

In the default setting, the OPC UA server is not active. For activation, the parameter "PROFINET
Parameters → OPC UA Server Activated" must be set.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the "Activate OPC UA server" parameter requires that the communication
interface be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Note
Firmware version of SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit
OPC UA is supported by SIMOCODE pro V PN from firmware version V1.2.2, product
version *E07*.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

76 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Setting the IP parameters

To enable a link to be established via OPC-UA, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) must have valid IP
parameters.
Example of the URL of the SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC UA server:
opc.tcp://192.168.0.2:4840, where 192.168.0.2 is the IP address of SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP).
The IP parameters, consisting of IP address, subnet mask, and router can be configured with
SIMOCODE ES and transferred to the device.
If SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) does not obtain these parameters in another way (e.g. from the
controller via PROFINET IO), the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter must be activated
under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters."

Note
If the IP parameters are changed during an active OPC-UA connection under "Online
access → Accessible nodes → Online & Diagnostics → Functions → Assign IP address", then a
restart is necessary with Commissioning → Command → Restart/Cold start.

Connecting to the SIMOCODE pro OPC UA server

Introduction
An OPC UA client can access process values in the hierarchical namespace of the
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)-OPC UA server.
To enable this, the OPC UA server and the OPC UA client authorize each other by exchanging
certificates. You can additionally encrypt the data traffic.
The SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)-OPC UA server classes every certificate of an OPC UA client as
"trustworthy" by default.

Note
Configuring the connection on the client side
You can obtain information directly from the manufacturer of the software that is to access the
data of the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)-OPC UA server via OPC UA.

Supported OPC UA services of the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) OPC UA server

SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) supports the following OPC UA services:
• SecurityPolicy:
– None
– Basic128Rsa15
• MessageSecurityMode:
– None
– Sign&Encrypt.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 77
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Explanation of security settings:

The following table shows the security functions supported by the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)
OPC UA server, which have to be set in the connection configuration of the OPC UA client:

Table 2-30 Security functions that have to be set in the connection configuration of the OPC UA client

Security Policy MessageSecurityMode

None 1)
None
Basic128Rsa152 SignAndEncrypt 2)

1) Exchange of certificates is deactivated

2) The data packets are signed and encrypted with the certificates.

Note
When using the MessageSecurityMode "SignAndEncrypt", the connection timeout effective in
the OPC UA Client must be set to at least 15 s.

DANGER
Unsecured connection between the client and the server possible!
Use the setting "none" for test purposes only.
During productive operation, use the following settings for secure communication between
the client and server:
• Security Policy: Basic128Rsa15
• Message Security Mode: SignAndEncrypt.

Note
Requirement for certificate exchange in SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)
The precondition for certificate exchange in SIMOCODE pro V PN is the presence of a valid time
(see Section "Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure" below).

Access to SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)-OPC UA variables

The OPC-UA server integrated into SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) provides the following structured
objects in its address space to which the client can have read access and, in some case, write
access. The precondition for write access is a secure connection with Security Policy
"Basic128Rsa15" and Message Security Mode "SignAndEncrypt."

Table 2-31 Access to SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP)-OPC UA variables

Tag Designation Read / write

Diagnostics Device diagnostics Read
Diagnostic events
Diagnostic status
Diagnostic trips
Diagnostic warnings

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

78 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Tag Designation Read / write

Measured values Measured values Read
Statistics Display and statistical data Read
Acyclic receive Receive data (OPC UA Receive) Read / write
Analog value Analog value
Bit 0.0 - 1.7 Digital receive data
Acyclic send Send data (OPC UA Send) Read
Bit 0.0 - 1.7 1)
Digital send data

1) The current assignment of the OPC UA send data is displayed as it was configured in
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP).
You will find a detailed description of each variable in Chapter OPC UA variables (Page 198)
Write access is only possible via a secure connection.

Table 2-32 Quantities and update interval

Maximum number of clients Max. 2

Maximum number of monitored terms 160
Maximum number of subscriptions 2
Shortest update interval for subscriptions 100 ms

Configuring the OPC UA receive and send data with SIMOCODE ES

OPC UA Receive
The bit information that is to be transferred via OPC UA Receive to SIMOCODE pro is also assigned
by configuring with SIMOCODE ES.
OPC-UA variables (write):
• Receive data byte 0, bits 0-7
• Receive data byte 1, bits 0-7
• Receive data byte 2/3
Data to SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP):

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 79
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Figure 2-24 OPC UA Receive 0, 1, 2/3 function blocks

Example:
The motor is to be switched on and off via the control station "PC/OPC UA."
OPC UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 → Motor ON<
OPC UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.1 → Motor OFF
OPC UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.2 → Motor ON>

Figure 2-25 Example of OPC UA motor control

Note
Write access
Write access is only possible if a secure connection is used with Security policy "Basic128Rsa15"
and with Message security mode "SignAndEncrypt."

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

80 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Note
Non-maintained command mode
Do not use the "non-maintained command mode" for motor control with OPC UA!

Connection monitoring
The OPC UA connection is monitored over time. The monitoring time is set by the OPC UA client
and is in the range of 10 s to 100 s. If the OPC UA connection is terminated, the OPC UA control
variables set by this OPC client will be deleted in SIMOCODE pro only after this time has expired.
In SIMOCODE pro, no fault is triggered.
If failure of the OPC UA connection of SIMOCODE pro is to be monitored, this can be done as
follows:

WARNING
The drive cannot be controlled.
Can result in death, serious injury, or property damage.
If the connection is interrupted, the drive cannot be controlled while the OPC-UA connection
monitoring time is active.
Take suitable safety measures to avoid personal injury or property damage.

Example:
Makes sure that Bit 0.7 is set statically at the client end. If the connection is interrupted, this will
activate the "PLC/PCS" fault in "remote" mode (mode selector S1=1, S2=1).

Figure 2-26 Example of connection monitoring

OPC UA send
The bit information that is to be transferred to the client via OPC UA Send is also defined by
configuring with SIMOCODE ES.
OPC-UA variables (read):
• Send data byte 0, bits 0-7
• Send data byte 1, bits 0-7

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 81
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Data from SIMOCODE PRO V PN (GP):

Figure 2-27 OPC UA Send 0, 1 function blocks

Example:
The feedback of the switching state of the motor is transferred to the client via OPC UA. When
selecting the variables in the OPC UA client, the assigned status signals are then as follows:

Figure 2-28 Configuration of OPC UA Send in SIMOCODE ES

Figure 2-29 Representation in the object directory of the SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC UA server (see also
table below)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

82 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Configuration of OPC UA Send in SIMOCODE ES Representation in the object directory of the SIMO‐
CODE pro V PN-OPC UA server
OPC UA Send - Bit 0.0: "Status ON<" Acyclic Send → Status - On <
OPC UA Send - Bit 0.1: "Status Off" Acyclic Send → Status - Off
OPC UA Send - Bit 0.2: "Status ON>" Acyclic Send → Status - On >
... ...
OPC UA Send - Bit 0.3: "Not connected" Acyclic Send → Not connected
OPC UA Send - Bit 1.7: "Not connected" Acyclic Send → Status - On <

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the configuration of the OPC UA send data requires that the communication
interface be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Web diagnostics (web server)

SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) offers you with the web diagnosis the possibility of calling the following
information of the motor feeder from a PG/PC using an HTTP client:
• Status information
• Faults, warnings, events
• Measured values
• Service and statistical data
• Error buffer, error protocol.
The following functions for controlling the motor feeder is available for authorized users after
log-on with user name and password:
• Receive (switching the motor on and off, not available in non-maintained command mode)
• Acknowledging faults
• Execution of the test function.
Number of web server connections: One connection is supported.
Web diagnostics are available in Chinese, Russian, English and German.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 83
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Activating the web server:

The default setting of the web server is "not active." To activate it, the "PROFINET
Parameters →Web Server Activated" parameter must be active.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the configuration of the web server requires that the communication interface
be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Setting the IP parameters:

To enable a link to be established via the web, SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) must have valid IP
parameters. You can find out how to make these settings in Chapter Configuration of further
properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device (Page 51).

Configuration of the user name and password:

If the functions are to be used to control the motor feeder, a user must additionally be
configured with the user name and password. User name and password must not contain any
blanks. Configuration is performed under "PROFINET Parameters → OPC UA server / web server"

Note
Control station PC/OPC UA
The control via the web uses the SIMOCODE pro control station PC/OPC UA [HMI], for which the
configured enabled commands are then active.

Web browser
You need a web browser to access the HTML pages in the SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP).
The following web browsers are suitable for communication with SIMOCODE pro etc.:
• Internet Explorer (recommended version: Version 11)
• Firefox (recommended version: Version 56)
• Google Chrome (recommended version: Version 62)
• Opera (recommended version: Version 49.0)

Note
Connection to a web client
Connection to a web client is supported.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

84 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Settings of the web browser for access to the information

Check the following settings, which are a precondition for access to the information made
available via the web:
• To load the diagnostics data, Javascript must be activated in the Internet browser.
• The browser must support frames.
• Cookies must be permitted.
• The browser should be set in such a way that whenever it accesses a page, it automatically
loads the current data from the server.
In the Internet Explorer, you will find these settings with menu "Tools" → "Internet Options" →
"General" tab card → "Temporary Internet Files" group box → "Settings" button.
To use a firewall in your PG/PC, the following port must be enabled for use of the web diagnostics:
"http Port 80/TCP" or, in the case of secure connections, "https Port 443/TCP".

Logging on to the web server

You can only use functions for controlling the motor feeder after you have logged on to the web
server with user name and password. Only then are the buttons with a controlling function
active.
The log-on dialog box is only available via a secure https connection.
Certificates:
To enable the web browser to access the web server via an https connection, certificates are
mutually exchanged. On each change of the SIMOCODE pro V PN IP address, a unique certificate
with a validity of two years is created for this purpose.
You can also install a CA certificate with a validity up to 2037 via the integrated web server as
follows: Click the "Download certificate" link in the header of the home page and open or install
the CA certificate.

Note
Installing the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate
You only have to install the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate once for the web client inquestion and
it then applies to all SIMOCODE pro V PN devices.
If you do not install the CA certificate, the web browser will signal a certificate error when the
connection is established to SIMOCODE pro V PN.

Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure

SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) has a non-battery-backed realtime clock that can be synchronized via
the NTP procedure.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is the implementation of a TCP/IP protocol for time synchronization
in network. The NTP procedure uses hierarchical time synchronization, that is, an external clock
(e.g. SICLOCK TM or a PC in the network) is used for synchronization.
The device transmits time-of-day queries to the configured NTP server at configured time
intervals. Using the responses of the server, the time of day of the non-battery-backed clock is

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 85
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

synchronized in SIMOCODE pro. This ensures that a synchronized time of day is available shortly
after the supply voltage is switched on.
The NTP synchronization is configured with the SIMOCODE ES configuration software under
"PROFINET Parameters → NTP procedure/synchronization."
The following settings are also made:
• NTP server address: Enter the NTP server address when the "Activate NTP synchronization"
checkbox is selected.
Note
Adoption of the NTP server address
The NTP server address is not adopted until the device has been restarted after the supply
voltage has been switched off and on again.

• Cyclic update interval: Time interval in seconds at which synchronization of the time of day
with the NTP server is performed
• Time shift: Time difference in minutes between UTC time (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated)
and the time in the device.
Examples:
• Time shift for CET (Central European Time): +60 min
• Time shift for CST (Central Standard Time, North America): -360 min.
If an NTP server address has not been configured or a server was not found on the network, you
can also set the time of day using SIMOCODE ES. To do this, proceed as follows:
Mark the relevant SIMOCODE device in the project navigation window and then select "Connect
online" to establish a direct connection to the device. Expand the list of device settings by
clicking on the arrow on the left of the SIMOCODE device: You can now select
"Commissioning → Set time (= PC time in UTC)" to download the time of day of your PC to the
SIMOCODE device.

Note
Command execution
Commands are executed immediately.

If a valid time of day is available (either synchronized by NTP or set via SIMOCODE ES), the entries
in the error buffer / error protocol (i.e. log) will be additionally displayed with the time of day. In
addition, the "Clock set (NTP)" and "Clock synchronized (NTP)" messages are displayed.

Note
Access using OPC UA
A valid time of day is necessary to be able to use the "Sign" and "SignAndEncrypt" OPC-UA
Security Modes.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

86 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.2 PROFINET communication

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is a network protocol for monitoring and controlling network elements (e.g. switches).
SIMOCODE pro V PN (GP) supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported. R/
W objects can be changed with SNMP tools and are stored in the basic unit.
After replacement with a new basic unit from the factory or a basic unit that has undergone a
general reset, the R/W objects will be in the factory settings.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 87
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

2.3 Modbus communication

2.3.1 Modbus RTU communication

2.3.1.1 Modbus RTU - general

Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is a standard protocol for network communication and uses
the electrical RS485 connection for serial data transmission between Modbus devices in the
network.
Modbus RTU uses a master/slave network in which the entire communication is triggered by only
one master device while the slaves can only respond to the request of the master. The master
sends a request to a slave address and only this slave address responds to the command
(exception: broadcast frames to slave address 0 which are not acknowledged by the slaves).

2.3.1.2 Supported data transfer rates for RTU

SIMOCODE pro supports the following data transfer rates in Modbus RTU mode:
• 300 baud
• 600 baud
• 1,200 baud
• 2,400 baud
• 4,800 baud
• 9,600 baud
• 19,200 baud (default setting)
• 57,600 baud.

2.3.1.3 Assignment of SIMOCODE data to Modbus addresses with Modbus RTU

All SIRIUS data are available in datasets or in the process image:
• System datasets
• Datasets specific to a device subfamily
• Product-specific datasets.
To be addressable via Modbus, the data in these datasets or in this process image are converted
to Modbus data formats.

Data access to Data type according to Modbus nomenclature

Read-only bits Discrete inputs
Read/write bits Coils
Read-only datasets and words (16-bit) Input registers
Read/write datasets and words Holding registers

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

88 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

1 coil corresponds to 1 bit.

1 register corresponds to 1 word (2 bytes).

2.3.1.4 Modbus RTU data transfer

Principle of Modbus RTU data transfer

In contrast to cyclic/acyclic data transfer in the PROFIBUS bus system, the data are transferred
linearly using the Modbus protocol.
The master is an automation system (PLC). The slave is a SIMOCODE pro device.
The master takes the initiative in the data transfer. SIMOCODE pro works as a slave and supplies
the corresponding feedback signals to the bits/registers called up by the master, or it accepts the
bits/registers written by the master into the internal SIMOCODE memory.
The master sends requests to one or more slaves. The slave processes the requests of the master
and responds within a certain time with an acknowledgment, or with the requested data, or an
error code if applicable. The requests contain the function code and additional data. The data
can only be transferred between the master and a slave. Requests cannot be transferred
between slaves. A slave cannot transfer any information, e.g. alarms, autonomously to the
master. This always requires continuous polling of the corresponding bit by the master.

Data transfer options with Modbus RTU

The following figure shows the data transfer options:

'DWDWUDQVIHUWRFODVVPDVWHU
GHSHQGLQJRQWKHVODYHRSHUD
WLQPRGHVHH&KDSWHU
6ODYHRSHUDWLQJPRGHV

3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHVHJZLWK
6,02&2'((6
3DUDPHWHUL]LQJGLDJQRVWLFVUHFHLYLQJ
VHQGLQJWHVWLQJYLDV\VWHPLQWHUIDFH

Figure 2-30 Options for data transfer

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 89
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

2.3.1.5 Modbus RTU telegram format

The data exchange "Master → Slave" and/or the corresponding response "Slave → Master" begins
with the slave address, followed by the function code. Following this, the data are transferred.
The structure of the data field depends on the function code used. The CRC check is transmitted
at the end of the frame. The response frame from the slave to the master contains the same slave
address and the same function code. The data area is filled according to the requested data.

Slave address Function code DATA CRC-CHECK

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

• Slave address: This address is used to address a defined slave on the bus. Standard address:
1 to 247
• Function code: Defines the slave function desired by the frame
• DATA = frame data: Function-code-dependent administration data and net data. When
transferring the register data, the high byte is always transferred first, followed by the low
byte, in accordance with the Modbus specification.
• CRC CHECK = frame checksum: The end of the frame is identified by the CRC-16 checksum of
two bytes in length,

End of frame
The end of frame is recognized when no transmission takes place during the time period
required for the transmission of three and a half characters (3.5 times character delay time) (see
Modbus Protocol Reference Guide).

Exception responses
On recognition of an error in the request frame from the master (illegal register address, for
example), the slave sets the highest value bit in the function code of the response frame (that
is, the requested function code + 80h). This step is followed by transmission of a byte with the
exception code that describes the cause of the error.
For details: See Modbus RTU error codes (Page 100).

2.3.1.6 Modbus RTU function codes

General

Definition of function code

The function code defines the meaning of the message frame. The frame structure is also
defined by the function code.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

90 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Overview of the function codes

The table below provides an overview of the supported function codes. Which of these are
supported by SIMOCODE pro depends on the start address (see Section Modbus RTU data tables
(Page 274)).

Table 2-33 Overview of the function codes

Function Designation according to Modbus specification

code (decimal/
hexadecimal)
01 / 0x01 Read Coils
(Page 92)
02 / 0x02 Read Discrete Inputs
(Page 92)
03 / 0x03 Read Holding Registers
(Page 93)
04 / 0x04 Read Input Registers
(Page 93)
05 / 0x05 Write Single Coil
(Page 94)
06 / 0x06 Write Single Register
(Page 95)
15 / 0x0F Write Multiple Coils
(Page 96)
16 / 0x10 Write Multiple Registers
(Page 97)
23 / 0x17 Read/Write Multiple Registers
(Page 98)
43 / 0x2B Read Device Identification
(Page 99)

Access to memory areas

In SIMOCODE pro, only two memory areas are used, one each for addressing the bit information
and the register information.
The function codes for bit information (01, 02, 05, 15) thus always access the bit memory area.
The function codes for register information (03, 04, 06, 16, 23) always access the register
memory area.
The distinction as to whether information is read-only (r) or read/writeable (r/w), can be seen
from the dataset tables (see Section Modbus RTU data tables (Page 274)).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 91
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

'LVFUHWH,QSXWVUHDGRQO\
6,02&2'(LQWHUQDOPHPRU\ 2IIVHW [ 'DWD
[ 'DWD
[ 'DWD

[)))) 'DWD

&RLOVUHDGDQGZULWH
2IIVHW [ 'DWD
[ 'DWD
%LW0HPRU\ [ 'DWD
55:

[)))) 'DWD

02'%865HTXHVW
,QSXW5HJLVWHUVUHDGRQO\
2IIVHW [ 'DWD
[ 'DWD
5HJLVWHU0HPRU\ [ 'DWD
55:

[)))) 'DWD

+ROGLQJ5HJLVWHUVUHDGDQGZULWH
2IIVHW [ 'DWD
[ 'DWD
[ 'DWD

6,02&2'(0RGEXV6HUYHU
[)))) 'DWD

Figure 2-31 Memory areas used in SIMOCODE pro

Function codes 01 - Read Coils and 02 - Read Discrete Inputs

Function
These functions enable the Modbus master system to read individual bits from the
SIMOCODE pro bit memory area.
Functions codes 01 and 02 behave in the same way here and supply an identical feedback signal.
A valid offset from the bit memory area is expected as the start address. Up to 2000 bits can be
read per frame.
If a number that is not equal to a multiple of eight bits is called up, the remaining bits are filled
with zeros. The number of bytes n always refers to the number of fully returned bytes.

Note
Start address and number of coils
The start address and the number of coils must be within the valid range.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

92 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of bits CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number of bytes n Bit status CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

Example
Reading in of the SIMOCODE pro device statuses from slave number 16. The device statuses start
from offset 0x1C08 and are 16 bits in length.

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of bits CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x01 0x1C08 0x000F 0x....

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number of bytes n Bit status CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x01 0x02 0x3C08 0x....

In the example, the following status information is returned:

• Device ok
• Bus ok
• PLC/PCS ok
• Current flowing ok
• Motor on>
See also Device diagnostics (Page 278) for more information.
The returned bytes contain the bits in the following order:
Byte 1: 0x3C == address 0x1C0F - 0x1C08
Byte 2: 0x08 == address 0x1C17 - 0x1C10

Function codes 03 - Read Holding Register and 04 - Read Input Registers

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to read registers from the SIMOCODE pro
register memory area.
Functions codes 03 and 04 behave in the same way here and supply an identical feedback signal.
A valid offset from the register memory area is expected as the start address. Up to 125 registers
per frame can be read.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 93
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of regis‐ CRC

ters
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number of bytes Register value CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte n registers 2 bytes

Example: Reading in of the SIMOCODE pro current measured values from slave number 16. The
current measured values start from offset 0x0807 and comprise 3 registers.

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of regis‐ CRC

ters
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x03 0x8007 0x00 0x03 0x ....

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number of bytes Register value CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 3 regis‐ 2 bytes
ters (6 bytes)
0x10 0x03 0x06 0x0064 0x0064 0x 0x ....
0064

In the example, the measured values of the current motor current in phases 1, 2 and 3, each with
100 % (0x0064) of the rated motor current, are returned as the feedback signal.

Function code 05 - Write Single Coil

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to write an individual bit from the
SIMOCODE pro bit memory area.
A valid address from the bit memory area is expected as the start address. The selected address
must be designated as writable (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables (Page 274),
"Access" column).
0000h for a logical zero and FF00h for a logical one are accepted as data. Any other value is
impermissible and given a negative acknowledgment.

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

94 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

Example
Controlling a motor connected to SIMOCODE pro from slave address 16 (assuming the
assignment of the process image corresponds to the default settings). For this purpose, bit
address 00 0x02 (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables (Page 274)) is controlled with
logical one. This bit address lies within the process image output that can be accessed both by
bit access and by register access.

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x05 0x00 0x02 0xFF 0x00 0x....

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x05 0x00 0x02 0xFF 0x00 0x....

Function code 06 - Write Single Register

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to write an individual register from the
SIMOCODE pro register memory area.
A valid address from the register memory area is expected as the start address. The selected
address must be designated as writable (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables
(Page 274), "Access" column).
Typical SIMOCODE parameters that can be written via Modbus RTU are the motor protection
parameters (e.g. rated motor current, trip class, as well as delay times of the function blocks).

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x06 0x419A 0x0258 0x....

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x06 0x419A 0x0258 0x....

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 95
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Example:
The cooling down period of the motor on SIMOCODE with slave address 16 is to be reset. To this
end, the new cooling down period value of 600 s is loaded into SIMOCODE.
The register address for the cooling down period is 0x419A. Cooling down period in seconds:
600 s = 0x0258.

Function code 15 - Write Multiple Coils

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to write several bits from the SIMOCODE pro
bit memory area.
A valid address from the bit memory area is expected as the start address. The selected address
must be designated as writable (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables (Page 274),
"Access" column).
When writing several bits, they must be marked as a "writable" coherent block. A bit area that is
interrupted by read-only bits cannot be written to as a block.

Request message frame

Slave address Function Start address Number of Number of Data CRC

code bits bytes
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes n bytes n bytes 2 bytes

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of bits CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

Example
Several output bits in the area of the PIQ (process image output) of the SIMOCODE pro with slave
address 16 are to be written via Modbus. Using these bits, the motor is usually switched on and
off, "Remote/Manual" mode selected, or a reset command output.
In the case shown, the motor is to be started and "Remote" mode activated for a SIMOCODE
device operated as a direct-on-line starter (see Chapter "Example circuits" in the manual
SIMOCODE pro - application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743959)):

Offset Meaning State

0x0001 Motor off 0
0x0002 Motor on 1
0x0003 Test function 0
0x0004 Emergency start 0
0x0005 Remote 1

Value to be transferred: 00010010b = 0x12

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

96 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of Bytes Data CRC
bits
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x0F 0x0001 0x0005 0x01 0x12 0x....

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of bits CRC

1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x0F 0x0001 0x0005 0x....

Function code 16 - Write Multiple Registers

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to write several registers from the
SIMOCODE pro register memory area.
A valid address from the register memory area is expected as the start address. The selected
addresses must be designated as writable (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables
(Page 274), "Access" column).
Typical SIMOCODE parameters that can be written via Modbus RTU are the motor protection
parameters (e.g. rated motor current, trip class) and the warning and trip levels, as well as delay
times of the function blocks.
When writing several registers, they must be marked as a "writable" coherent block. A register
area that is interrupted by read-only registers cannot be written to as a block.

Request message frame

Slave address Function Start address Number of Number of Data CRC

code registers bytes
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte n x 2 bytes 2 bytes

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of regis‐ CRC

ters
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes

Example
The rated motor current of the SIMOCODE pro with slave address 16, stored as a double word,
is to be changed via Modbus. For this purpose, the new rated motor current of 10 A is to be
written to the device. The expected value is the rated motor current in units of 10 mA, that is,
10 A = 10,000 mA = 1000 x 10 mA = 03E8h x 10 mA.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 97
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Request message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of Number of Data CRC
registers bytes
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte n x 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x10h 0x41A8 0x0002 0x04 0x0000 0x 0x....
03E8

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Start address Number of regis‐ CRC

ters
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10h 0x10 0x41A8 0x0002 0x....

Function code 23 - Read/Write Multiple Registers

Function
This function enables the Modbus master system to write and read several registers from
SIMOCODE using a single function call. The write operation is the first executed operation here.
This function is the typically used function call for outputting cyclic data in SIMOCODE and for
reading back inputs or device statuses.
A valid address from the register memory area is expected as the start address. The selected
address must be designated as writable (see the tables in Section Modbus RTU data tables
(Page 274), "Access" column).

Request message frame

Slave ad‐ Function Start ad‐ Number of Start ad‐ Num‐ Number Da‐ CRC
dress code dress read regis‐ dress ber of of ta (write
operation ters (read write op‐ regis‐ bytes (w access)
access) eration ters N ( rite ac‐
write ac‐ cess)
cess)
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Nx2byt 2 bytes
es

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number of bytes N Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Nx2 bytes 2 bytes

Example
Writing the outputs and reading back the input signals of the SIMOCODE pro device. To do this,
register 0x0000 in the PIQ (process image output) is written, and at the same time, 4 registers
from 0x0400 in the PII (process image input) are read. Slave address of the SIMOCODE
pro = 16 (10h).
The register written to SIMOCODE here is to start the motor in clockwise rotation in "Remote"
mode (24h).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

98 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

In this example, it must be noted that the requested function "Start motor clockwise" is not
returned in the same cycle as the new status. This is due to the ON command execution time in
SIMOCODE and the delay of the contactors. Not until a few communication cycles later will the
feedback signal of the PII also begin with 0x0024.

Note
Read/Write Multiple Registers
The FC23 can only access the PII/PIQ.

Request message frame

Slave ad‐ Function Start ad‐ Number Start ad‐ Number Number Da‐ CRC
dress code dress read of regis‐ dress of regis‐ of ta (write
operation ters (read write op‐ ters N ( bytes (w access)
access) eration write ac‐ rite ac‐
cess) cess)
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Nx2byte 2 bytes
s
0x10 0x17 0x04 0x00 0x0004 0x00 0x0 0x00 0x 0x02 0x00 0x
0 01 24

Response message frame

Slave address Function code Number_bytes Data CRC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Nx2 bytes 2 bytes
0x10 0x17 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Note
"Read/Write Multiple Registers" function
The "Read/Write Multiple Registers" function cannot be used for writing parameter values via
Modbus.
Writing of parameter values results in an execution time in SIMOCODE for writing parameters to
the internal memory during which this SIMOCODE cannot respond to a communication request
and/or the command "Read/Write Multiple Registers" cannot be concluded.

Function code 43 - Read Device Identification

Function
The function "43/14 (0x2B/0x0E) Read Device Identification" enables identification of the
addressed device configuration.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 99
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Modbus identification data

The Modbus identification data are a representation of the device I&M0 data.

Table 2-34 Assignment of the I&M0 for Modbus identification

Modbus object ID SIRIUS device infor‐ Type Mandatory/optional Assignment of I&M0

mation
Manufacturer SIEMENS AG ASCII string Mandatory Name of manufacturer
Article number MLFB ASCII string Mandatory
FW version Vx.x ASCII string Mandatory Software revision
Internet address of the Device-specific ASCII string Optional -
manufacturer
Device family Device-specific ASCII string Optional -
Device subfamily Device-specific ASCII string Optional -
Name of the user Device-specific ASCII string Optional

2.3.1.7 Modbus RTU error codes

Exception responses

Operating principle
On recognition of an error in the request frame from the master (illegal register address, for
example), the slave sets the highest value bit in the function code of the response frame (that
is, the requested function code + 80h). This step is followed by transmission of a byte with the
exception code that describes the cause of the error.

Typical exception code frame

The exception code frame from the slave has the following structure, for example: slave
address 5, requested function code 5, exception code 2.
Response frame from slave:

Slave address Function code Error code CRC

05H 85H 02H 0x....

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

100 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.3 Modbus communication

Error codes supported by SIMOCODE pro

Er‐ Meaning in ac‐ Cause Brief description

ror cordance with
code Modbus specifi‐
cation
1 Illegal function Illegal function code The requested function code is not supported. It is not included in the list of
function codes supported by SIMOCODE pro (see Modbus RTU function
codes (Page 90)).
2 Illegal data ad‐ Illegal bit or register Address does not exist. For functions that work with an addressing range,
dress address on the slave all addresses affected by the request are checked.
3 Illegal data value Slave has illegal data The number of addresses is not correct. The number of parameters for the
value requested function was too high (or 0)
4 Failure in Associ‐ Slave has internal er‐ There is an unspecified server error that prevented execution of the request.
ated Device ror
6 Busy, rejected Slave is not ready to The device is busy and unable to process the request at this time. This can
message receive occur following a parameterization operation via Modbus when the new
parameter values are transferred to the device.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 101
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4.1 Important notes

Note
Trademarks
This chapter makes reference to technologies with names protected by the Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association (ODVA).
The ODVA technologies referred to in this manual are as follows:
• EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol, often referred to as EIP) ™
• CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) ™

Further information about ODVA and technologies protected by ODVA can be found on the
ODVA website (odva.org (http://www.odva.org)).

2.4.2 Definitions

EDS file
The properties of the EtherNet/IP device are described in an EDS file (EDS = Electronic Data Sheet)
containing all the information required to integrate the device into an EtherNet/IP system.
You can find the EDS file in Industry Online Support at Generating an EDS file (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109741009).

Connection
Logical connection between two devices Various methods of connecting devices are described
below. Two devices can be interlinked by more than one connection.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

102 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

Scanner
The device which initiates a connection or a request. It can be regarded as the "master".

Adapter
The device which receives the connection or service request. A scanner can normally be
integrated in a network with multiple adapters.

Assembly
A predefined collection of data stored in the adapter. Each data collection is identified by a
unique instance number. It is further identified by size and type. Three types of assembly are
those which generate (data to be sent), consume (data to be received) and configure
(information required to parameterize the device).

MAC address
The MAC address can generally be read from the front on the device, e.g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0.

CIP
Message-based application protocol. This protocol implements a relative path for sending a
message from the modules that generate the message in one system to the modules that
consume the message. CIP operates with a generator-consumer model rather than a source-
destination model (master/slave). With a generator-consumer model, the volume of network
traffic is lower and transmission times shorter.

EIP
Abbreviation for EtherNet/IP.

Requested Packet Interval (RIP)

EtherNet/IP devices normally generate or consume data on the basis of an RPI value (Requested
Packet Interval). Generating devices transmit data packets in predefined time intervals on the
basis of RPI, while consumer devices wait for data packets at a specific RPI.

2.4.3 Data security in automation

See Data security in automation (Page 42).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 103
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4.4 Data transmission

Key statement
The following figure shows an overview of the EtherNet/IP communication functions supported
by SIMOCODE pro which are described in more detail in the following sections:

SPS PC NTP Server PC

SIMOCODE ES Web Browser
(TIA Portal)

1 2 4

EtherNet/IP

,1 ,1 7

3
287

287 ,1 ,1 7

6,02&2'(352931

IO Adapter '(9,&(
8)

%86 V

*(1)$8/7
3257

Web Server 3257

7(67
5(6(7
System interface
31/$1

8)$%

PC
$ $ 3(
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro V EIP (TIA Portal)

Figure 2-32 EtherNet/IP communication functions

1 Communication between PLC (I/O scanner) and SIMOCODE pro (I/O adapter) via EtherNet/IP
2 Communication between PC with parameterization software SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) and
SIMOCODE pro via Ethernet
3 Communication between PC with parameterization software SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) and
SIMOCODE pro via the SIMOCODE pro system interface (point-to-point via USB)
4 Communication between PC with web browser and SIMOCODE pro via Ethernet (TCP/IP);
transmission of time of day via NTP from a PC with NTP server to the SIMOCODE pro V EIP devices

2.4.5 Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file

Integrating SIMOCODE pro EIP using an EDS file

SIMOCODE pro V EIP can be integrated into an automation system by means of an EDS file (see
also Definitions (Page 102)). This can be downloaded from Siemens Industry Online Support via
the following link:
EDS file (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109741009)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

104 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

The EDS file contains various information such as:

• Product symbol
• Manufacturer and device names
• Available cyclic data.

Note
Integration in Rockwell Studio 5000
To facilitate integration of SIMOCODE pro EIP into Rockwell Studio 5000, a function example and
an add-on instruction for Studio 5000 are also provided on the Siemens Industry Online Support
webpage mentioned above.

2.4.6 Setting up the IP address

NOTICE
Precondition for communication with the device
The setting of IP parameters is a precondition for communication with the device. These
parameters are the IP address, the subnet mask, the gateway address and the (Profinet) device
name (optional).

IP parameters can be assigned by various methods:

• Using the SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) parameterization software
• Using a BOOTP/DHCP tool.

Assigning the IP address with the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software

Procedure:
• Start SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
• Enter a project name under option "Create new project" and click on "Create"
• Switch to the project view.
• Click on the line "Online access" in the "Project navigation" window. You can choose between
the following online access options:
– COM <x> [SIRIUS PtP] - if the device is connected to the PC via the system interface
– Intel(R) Gigabit Network Connection (or comparable designation) - if the device is
connected to the PC via Ethernet.
• Click "Show accessible nodes"
• Double-click on the relevant device to select it from the list. To do this, you will need the MAC
address attached to the front of the device.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 105
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

• Assign
– the IP address and set the subnet mask under Parameters → Ethernet parameters → IP
address when connecting via the system interface
– the IP address and set the subnet mask under Online & Diagnostics → Functions → IP
address when connecting via Ethernet
• Download the IP address and the subnet mask to the device.
• You can also assign a device name if you want to. The main purpose of doing so is to give the
device a clear, symbolic name that will be displayed in the project navigation window.
However, a device name is not essential for communication with the device.

Assigning the IP address with a BOOTP/DHCP tool

Procedure:
• Start the BOOTP/DHCP server tool (e.g. from the Rockwell Studio 5000 package)
• Set the subnet mask of your network and, if applicable, the gateway address in the tool
network settings; all of the devices that transmit BOOTP or DHCP messages into the network
are displayed under "Request History" in the tool.
• Select the relevant device from this list. To do this, you will need the MAC address of the
device: this is attached to the front panel of the SIMOCODE device.
• By clicking on button "Add to Relation List", you can assign an IP address, a host name and (if
necessary) a description to the device. After the IP address has been assigned, the device with
appear in the "Relation List", the list of all devices in this network segment with a valid IP
address.
• After the IP address has been successfully assigned, deactivate the BOOTP/DHCP mechanism
in the SIMOCODE device by selecting the device and clicking on the button labeled "Disable
BOOTP/DHCP".
Note
Behavior of SIMOCODE pro if BOOTP/DHCP is not deactivated in the SIMOCODE device
If you do not deactivate the BOOTP/DHCP mechanism in the SIMOCODE device, it will restart
after the next Power ON without a valid IP address and start sending BOOTP/DHCP messages
again.

2.4.7 Address Collision Detection (ACD)

In firmware version 1.1.0 (E04) and higher, SIMOCODE pro V EIP supports address collision
detection. This is a mechanism for detecting and avoiding IP address conflicts during device
startup.
If an address conflict exists, the BUS LED of the SIMOCODE pro V EIP basic unit flashes.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

106 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4.8 Parameterizing the device

Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) can access the device via the system interface and via Ethernet.
The "Getting Started" videos are useful for first-time users of SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal). These
can be found in Industry Online Support at Tutorial Center (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/106656707).
Further guidance for working with the TIA Portal software can be found on the Internet at TIA
Portal - An overview of the most important documents and links - Visualization (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/90939751).

Procedure for handling IP parameters

The IP parameters, consisting of IP address, subnet mask, and router can be assigned in various
ways and transferred to the IO device as described in Chapter Setting up the IP address
(Page 105).
Please note the following points relating to the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software:
• If the IP parameters are managed and assigned to the device via a BOOTP/DHCP tool, the
"Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter set in the SIMOCODE ES parameterization
software under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must not be active. This ensures that
no changes are made to previously set IP parameters when parameters are downloaded.
• If IP parameters are configured and downloaded to the device with the SIMOCODE ES
parameterization software, the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter under
"PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must be active. This ensures that IP parameter
settings are also written to the device when parameters are downloaded.

Note
Resetting the IP address and reactivating the BOOTP function
In order to restart the BOOTP/DHCP function after the IP address has been permanently assigned,
"Activate BOOTP/DHCP" (Parameters → Ethernet parameters) must be checked.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Every change to the IP parameters with SIMOCODE ES in the "Ethernet Parameters" dialog box
requires a restart of the communication interface.
A restart of the communication interface briefly interrupts all Ethernet and EtherNet/IP links and
reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 107
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4.9 Integrating SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

I/O configurations
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports a number of I/O configurations which define the structure and
length of the I/O data that are cyclically exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner (PLC) and
the adapter (SIMOCODE pro). These configurations are referred to as "basic types" and can be
selected on the basis of the chosen assembly instances when the device is integrated in
Studio 5000.
The data that are exchanged with the EtherNet/IP scanner can be set by means of function blocks
such as, for example, "Cyclic receive byte 0" or "Cyclic send byte 0" in the SIMOCODE ES software.
Detailed information about the relationship between SIMOCODE ES function blocks and
assembly instances can be found in Chapter Assembly object (Page 313).
Overview of the cyclic data available with SIMOCODE pro V EtherNet/IP:

Input data length Input assembly Output data length Output assembly
Basic Type 1 10 byte 150 4 bytes 100
Basic Type 2 4 bytes 151 2 bytes 101
Basic Type 3 20 bytes 152 6 bytes 102
Basic Type 4 488 bytes 153 6 bytes 102

2.4.10 Integration and commissioning in Rockwell Studio 5000

Sequence of steps for integrating by means of an EDS file
1. Connect the device to the control system via an Ethernet cable
2. Using the EDS wizard, register the SIMOCODE EDS file in Studio 5000
3. Add a new module to the Ethernet network of the communication card (e.g. 1756-EN2TR)
4. Select the Siemens SIMOCODE 3UF7 device in the "Select Module Type" window
5. The IP address assigned to the device, a symbolic name and the length of cyclic data ("Module
Definition → Connections") are set in the "New Module" window. The default connection is
basic type 1. It is possible to alter the default RPI (requested packet interval) time on the
"Connection" tab.
Predefined device connections:

Input data Output data

SIMOCODE Basic Type 1 10 byte 4 bytes
SIMOCODE Basic Type 2 4 bytes 2 bytes
SIMOCODE Basic Type 3 20 bytes 6 bytes
SIMOCODE Basic Type 4 488 bytes 6 bytes
Basic Overload 1 byte 1 byte
Extended Overload 1 byte 1 byte

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

108 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

Sequence of steps for integrating by means of a generic Ethernet module

1. Connect the device to the control system via an Ethernet cable
2. Add a new generic Ethernet module to the Ethernet network of the communication card (e.g.
1756-EN2TR)
3. Enter the symbolic name and the IP address of the SIMOCODE pro EIP device. The IP address
must match the IP address parameterized via BOOTP/DHCP or SIMOCODE ES.
4. Enter the connection parameters in the "Assembly Instance" and "Size" boxes on the screen.
It is possible to alter the default RPI (requested packet interval) time on the "Connection" tab.

Figure 2-33 Adding a new generic Ethernet module in Studio 5000

2.4.11 Ethernet/IP Device Level Ring functionality

The SIMOCODE pro V EIP device has two RJ45 sockets with an integral switch. It is therefore
possible to create ring structures from lines with Ethernet/IP. When a ring structure is
implemented, SIMOCODE pro V EIP supports the Device Level Ring (DLR) mechanism which
ensures that communication is maintained even when the ring is interrupted.
The advantages of a DLR are as follows:
• Simple installation using the two integral RJ45 ports.
• A single error in the communication chain does not result in restricted access to individual
nodes.
• Communication can be restored quickly after a single error has occurred.
SIMOCODE pro V EIP functions as a "ring node" within the DLR.
For a DLR to function properly, it must also contain a "supervisor node" (e.g. a control system / a
switch with supervisor node functionality).
A DLR network is configured by means of the "supervisor node" parameters ("Enable Supervisor
Node"; "Beacon Time"; "Beacon TimeOut"). No parameter settings for DLR need to be set in the
SIMOCODE pro V EIP devices.
There should be fewer than 50 ring node devices within a DLR network in order to keep the
communication restore time within acceptable limits.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 109
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

2.4.12 EtherNet/IP system redundancy

SIMOCODE pro V EIP product version *E03* supports the system-redundant connection to two
fault-tolerant controllers, e. g. 1756-L72 by Rockwell Automation.
The redundant-system connection provides a communication link (Application Relation)
between each IO device and each of the two controllers. As soon as the connection switches
from the primary to the secondary controller, the communication modules perform what is
called "IP address swapping".

2.4.13 Web diagnostics

SIMOCODE pro V EIP offers you with the web diagnosis the possibility of calling the following
information of the motor feeder from a PG/PC using an HTTP client:
• Status information
• Faults, warnings, events
• Measured values
• Service and statistical data
• Error buffer, error protocol.
Web diagnostics are available in Chinese, Russian, English and German.

Activating the web server:

The default setting of the web server is "not active." To activate it, the "Ethernet
Parameters → Web Server Activated" parameter must be active.

Setting the IP parameters:

To enable a link to be established via the web, SIMOCODE pro V EIP must have valid IP
parameters. You can find out how to make these settings in Chapter Setting up the IP address
(Page 105).

Configuration of the user name and password:

If the functions are to be used to control the motor feeder, a user must additionally be
configured with the user name and password. User name and password must not contain any
blanks. You perform the configuration under "Ethernet-Parameter → Webserver".

Web browser
For access to the HTML pages in the SIMOCODE pro V EIP, you need a web browser.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

110 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

The following web browsers are suitable for communication with SIMOCODE pro etc.:
• Internet Explorer (recommended version: Version 11)
• Firefox (recommended version: Version 56)
• Google Chrome (recommended version: Version 62)
• Opera (recommended version: Version 49.0)

Note
Connection to a web client
Connection to a web client is supported.

Settings of the web browser for access to the information

Logging on to the web server (possible with product version *E04*and higher)
You can only use functions for controlling the motor feeder after you have logged on to the web
server with user name and password. Only then are the buttons with a controlling function
active.
The log-on dialog box is only available via a secure https connection.
Certificates:
To enable the web browser to access the web server via an https connection, certificates are
mutually exchanged. On each change of the SIMOCODE pro V EIP IP address, a unique
certificate with a validity of five years is created for this purpose.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 111
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

You can also install a CA certificate with a validity up to 2037 via the integrated web server as
follows: Click the "Download certificate" link in the header of the home page and open or install
the CA certificate.

Note
Installing the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate
You only have to install the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate once for the web client in question,
which then applies to all SIMOCODE pro V EIP devices.
If you do not install the CA certificate, the web browser will signal a certificate error when the
connection is established to SIMOCODE pro V EIP.

2.4.14 Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure

SIMOCODE pro V EIP has a non-battery-backed realtime clock that can be synchronized via the
NTP procedure.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is the implementation of a TCP/IP protocol for time synchronization
in networks. The NTP procedure uses hierarchical time synchronization, that is, an external clock
(e.g. SICLOCK TM or a PC in the network) is used for synchronization.
The device transmits time-of-day queries to the configured NTP server at configured time
intervals. Using the responses of the server, the time of day of the non-battery-backed clock is
synchronized in SIMOCODE pro. This ensures that a synchronized time of day is available shortly
after the supply voltage is switched on.
The NTP synchronization is configured with the "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)" configuration
software under "EtherNet/IP Parameters → NTP procedure/synchronization."
The following settings are also made:
• NTP server address: Enter the NTP server address when the "Activate NTP synchronization"
checkbox is selected.
Note
Adoption of the NTP server address
The NTP server address is not accepted until the device has been restarted or after the supply
voltage has been switched off and on again.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

112 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

Mark the relevant SIMOCODE device in the project navigation window and then select "Connect
online" to establish a direct connection to the device. Expand the list of device settings by
clicking on the arrow on the left of the SIMOCODE device: You can now select
"Commissioning → Command → Set time (= PC time in UTC)" to download the time of day of your
PC to the SIMOCODE device.
If a valid time of day is available (either synchronized by NTP or set via SIMOCODE ES), the entries
in the error buffer/error protocol (i.e. log) will be additionally displayed with the time of day. In
addition, the "Clock set (NTP)" and "Clock synchronized (NTP)" messages are displayed.

2.4.15 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is a network protocol for monitoring and controlling network elements (e.g. switches).
SIMOCODE pro V EIP supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported. R/W
objects can be changed with SNMP tools and are stored in the basic unit.
After replacement with a new basic unit from the factory or a basic unit that has undergone a
general reset, the R/W objects will be in the factory settings.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 113
Communication
2.4 EtherNet/IP communication

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

114 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records 3
3.1 Tables general

3.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions

Table 3-1 Active control stations of control functions

Designation / control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ОN > ON >>
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Direct starter (direct-on-line - - OFF ON -
starter) 1) 2) 3)
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter 3)
- CCW OFF CW -
Dahlander starter 3) - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 3) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Pole-changing starter 3)
- - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter 3) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Solenoid valve 3) - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 3) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 2 3)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 3 3) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 4 3)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 5 3)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Soft starter 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing con‐ - CCW OFF CW -
tactor 3)

Table 3-2 Contactor control with control functions

Designation / control function Contactor control

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - Active - -
Direct-on-line starter 1) 2) 3)
ON - - - -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) CW CCW - - -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3)
ON pulse - OFF pulse - -

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 115
Tables, data records
3.1 Tables general

Designation / control function Contactor control

Star-delta starter 2) 3) Star contactor Delta contac‐ Line contactor - -
tor
Star-delta reversing starter 3) Star contactor Delta contac‐ RIGHT line LEFT line contac‐ -
tor contactor tor
Dahlander starter 3) FAST SLOW Star contactor - -
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 3) CW-FAST CW-SLOW Star contactor CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
FAST
Pole-changing starter 3) FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing starter 3)
CW-FAST CW-SLOW - CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
Solenoid valve 3)
OPEN - - - -
Positioner 1 3) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 2 3) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 3 3)
OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 4 3) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 5 3)
OPEN CLOSED - - -
Soft starter 2) 3) ON line contac‐ - Reset ON command -
tor
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ RIGHT line con‐ LEFT line con‐ Reset ON command -
tor 3) tactor tactor

Table 3-3 Lamp control with control functions

Designation / control function Lamp control

QLE << (ON <<) QLE < (ON <) QLA (OFF) QLE < (ON >) QLE >> (ON >>)
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Direct-on-line starter 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Dahlander starter 3)
- - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 3) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Pole-changing starter 3) - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter 3)
CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Solenoid valve 3) - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 3)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 2 3) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 3 3) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 4 3) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Positioner 5 3)
- CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Soft starter 2) 3)
- - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contac‐ - CCW OFF CW -
tor 3)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

116 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.1 Tables general

1) SIMOCODE pro C
2) SIMOCODE pro S / SIMOCODE pro V PN GP
3) SIMOCODE pro V (high-performance devices)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 117
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control
functions

3.2.1 Overload relay

Table 3-4 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, overload relay

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

118 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max

Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.2 Direct starter

Table 3-5 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, direct starter (direct-on-line starter)

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 119
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 1.5 Not connected

Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.3 Reversing starter

Table 3-6 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, reversing starter

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

120 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 1.2 Not connected

Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Table 3-7 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 121
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.7 Status - general warning

Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.5 Star-delta starter

Table 3-8 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta starter

Cyclic receive data

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

122 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active

Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.6 Star-delta reversing starter

Table 3-9 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta reversing starter

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 123
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.1 Status - Off

Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.7 Dahlander starter

Table 3-10 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander starter

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

124 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected

Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.8 Dahlander reversing starter

Table 3-11 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander reversing starter

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 125
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 1.5 Not connected

Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - ON<
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.9 Pole-changing starter

Table 3-12 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing starter

Cyclic receive data

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

126 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 1.2 Not connected

Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.10 Pole-changing reversing starter

Table 3-13 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing reversing starter

Cyclic receive data

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 127
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.7 Not connected

Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - ON<
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.11 Solenoid valve

Table 3-14 Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Close
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Open
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

128 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.4 Not connected

Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 → Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (CLOSED)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (OPEN)
Bit 0.3 Not connected
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.12 Positioner

Table 3-15 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, positioner

Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Close

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 129
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Stop
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Open
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (CLOSED)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (OPEN)
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Status - positioner runs in OPEN direction
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - positioner runs in CLOSED direction
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

130 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

3.2.13 Soft starter

Table 3-16 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter

Cycl. receive data

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 131
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

3.2.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor

Table 3-17 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter with reversing contactor

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start -
Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

132 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.2 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions

Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V / pro S, basic type 1 only

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 133
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.1 PROFIBUS tables

3.3.1.1 Abbreviations and specifications

Abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 3-18 Table specifications (example)

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4] *)
Cos phi Byte 0 ... 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5] * )

Max. current I_max Word 0 ... 65535 1 % / Is BU0, BU1, BU2 **)
*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
**) Entry relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2
Parameters that can be changed during operation

Event - PRM error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) that caused
the error is communicated here.

%\WH%LW 'HVLJQDWLRQ

350 JURXS
5HVHUYHG
'HYLFH FRQILJXUDWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU JURXS

Figure 3-1 Example for parameter group

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

134 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.1.2 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these
assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write them
back.

Table 3-19 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1 Fixed level ,0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
2 Fixed level ,1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test / Reset button BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9 BU - Input 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10 BU - Input 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11 BU - Input 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12 BU - Input 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1 MM
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1 MM
18 DM1 - Input 3 DM1 MM
19 DM1 - Input 4 DM1 MM
20 DM2 - Input 1 DM2
21 DM2 - Input 2 DM2
22 DM2 - Input 3 DM2
23 DM2 - Input 4 DM2
24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL
25 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y22 DM-FL
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Operator panel OP / OPD OP - Test / Reset button OP OPD
33 OP - Button 1 OP OPD
34 OP - Button 2 OP OPD
35 OP - Button 3 OP OPD

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 135
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

36 OP - Button 4 OP OPD
37 Reserved
38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 interface Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
41 (acyclic data) Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
42 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
43 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
44 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
45 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.5 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
46 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.6 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
47 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.7 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
48 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
49 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
50 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
51 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
52 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
53 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.5 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
54 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.6 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
55 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.7 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
56 PLC/PCS interface PLC [DPV0] (cyclic data) Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
57 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
58 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
59 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
60 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
61 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.5 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
62 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.6 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
63 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.7 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
64 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
65 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
66 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
67 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
68 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
69 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.5 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
70 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.6 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
71 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.7 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<< Dependent on the
73 Enabled control command ON< control function
74 Enabled control command - OFF
75 Enabled control command ON>
76 Enabled control command ON>>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

136 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

79 Reserved
80 Contactor controls Contactor controls 1 QE1 Dependent on the
81 Contactor controls 2 QE2 control function
82 Contactor controls 3 QE3
83 Contactor controls 4 QE4
84 Contactor controls 5 QE5
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<<(ON<<) Dependent on the
89 Display - QLE<(ON<) control function
90 Indication - QLA (OFF)
91 Display - QLE>(ON>)
92 Display - QLE>>(ON>>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status information - General Status - General fault BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
97 Status - General warning BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
98 Status - Device BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
99 Status - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
100 Status - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
101 Status - Current flowing IM UM(+)
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status information - Receive Status - ON<< Dependent on the
105 Status - ON< control function
106 Status - Off
107 Status - ON>
108 Status - ON>>
109 Status - Start active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta starter, Dah‐
lander starter, pole-
changing starter
112 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the
113 Status - Runs in close direction control function
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold start (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 137
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

119 Status - OPO BU2(+)
120 Status - Remote mode BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM(+)
122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM(+)
123 Status - Pause time active IM UM(+)
124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device check active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM(+)
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM(+)
127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM(+)
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM(+)
130 Event - Overload IM UM(+)
131 Event - overload + phase failure IM UM(+)
132 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM(+)
133 Event - External ground fault EM MM
134 Event - Warning ext. ground fault EM MM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM warning T> TM MM
139 Event - TM trip T> TM MM
140 Event - TM sensor fault TM MM
141 Event - TM out of range TM MM
142 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+ MM
143 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+ MM
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM(+)
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM(+)
146 Event - Warning P> UM(+)
147 Event - Warning P< UM(+)
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM(+)
149 Event - Warning U< UM(+)
150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA < AM
152 Event - Trip I> IM UM(+)
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM(+)
154 Event - Trip P> UM(+)
155 Event - Trip P< UM(+)
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM(+)
157 Event - Trip U< UM(+)
158 Event - trip 0/4-20 mA> AM
159 Event - trip 0/4-20 mA< AM
160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM(+)
161 Events - Protection Event - Warning internal ground fault BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

138 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

162 Reserved
163 Event - No start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
164 Events - Level monitoring Event - No. of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
165 Event - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
166 Event - Motor operating hours > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
167 Event - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
168 Event - Limit 1 BU2(+)
169 Event - Limit 2 BU2(+)
170 Event - Limit 3 BU2(+)
171 Event - Limit 4 BU2(+)
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
173 Event - External fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
174 Event - External fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
175 Event - External fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
176 Event - External fault 5 BU2(+)
177 Event - External fault 6 BU2(+)
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
181 Event - DM-F safety-related tripping DM-F
182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
183 Reserved
184 Events - Time stamp function Event - Timestamping function active + OK BU2(+)
185 Reserved
186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL
187 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
189 Reserved
190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F
191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL
192 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
193 Fault - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM) BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
194 Fault - temporary components (e.g. memory mod‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ule)
195 Fault - configuration error BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
196 Fault - Parameterization BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
197 Fault - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
198 Fault - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
199 Reserved
200 Faults - Control Fault - Execution Time ON Not for overload relays
201 Fault - Execution Time OFF
202 Fault - feedback (FB) ON
203 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 139
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

204 Fault - Stalled positioner Positioner
205 Fault - Double 0 Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
206 Fault - Double 1 Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
207 Fault - End position Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
208 Fault - Antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Cold start (TPF) fault BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
210 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2(+)
211 Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) BU2(+)
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely-programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU0 BU2(+)
220 Truth table 5 3I/1O output BU2(+)
221 Truth table 6 3I/1O output BU2(+)
222 Truth table 7 2I/1O output BU0 BU2(+)
223 Truth table 8 2I/1O output BU0 BU2(+)
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2(+)
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2(+)
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
233 Timer 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
234 Timer 3 output BU2(+)
235 Timer 4 output BU2(+)
236 Counter 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
237 Counter 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
238 Counter 3 output BU2(+)
339 Counter 4 output BU2(+)
240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU0 BU2(+)
243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU0 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

140 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Designation Information

244 Non-volatile element 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
245 Non-volatile element 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
246 Non-volatile element 3 output BU2(+)
247 Non-volatile element 4 output BU2(+)
248 Flashing 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
249 Flashing 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
250 Flashing 3 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
251 Flicker 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
252 Flicker 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
253 Flicker 3 output BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
254 Reserved
255 Reserved

3.3.1.3 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these
assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write them
back. All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In order to also
be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.

Table 3-20 Socket assignment table - analog

No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms BU2(+)
7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms BU2(+)
8 Counter 1 - Actual value BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9 Counter 2 - Actual value BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10 Counter 3 - Actual value BU2(+)
11 Counter 4 - Actual value BU2(+)
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM
17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM
18 Current I_L2 1 % / Is IM UM

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 141
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Unit Information

19 Current I_L3 1 % / Is IM UM
20 Phase unbalance 1% IM UM
21 Ground-fault current 1 mA UM+
22 Internal ground fault - last trip current 1 mA UM+
23 Voltage U_min 1V UM(+)
24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM(+)
25 Voltage U_L2 1V UM(+)
26 Voltage U_L3 1V UM(+)
27 Cos phi 1% UM(+)
28 Frequency 0.01 Hz UM+
29 Reserved
30 Number of overload trips IM UM(+)
31 Int. number of overload trips IM UM(+)
32 Thermal motor model 2% IM UM(+)
33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM(+)
34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM(+)
35 Last trip current 1 % / I_e IM UM(+)
36 TM - Max. temperature 1K TM MM
37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM MM
38 TM - Temperature 2 1K TM
39 TM - Temperature 3 1K TM
40 Permissible starts - Actual value BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
41 Motor stop time 1h BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F
43 Last trip current 1 mA EM(+) MM
44 AM - Input 1 See 1) AM
45 AM - Input 2 See 1) AM
46 Reserved
47 Ground-fault current 1 mA MMa EM(+)
)48 Acyclic receive data - analog value BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
49 PLC / PCS receive - analog value 1 BU0 BU2(+)
50 Reserved
51 Number of parameterizations BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
52 Motor operating hours - H word 1s BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
53 Motor operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
56 Device operating hours - H word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
57 Device operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
58 Number of starts - H word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
59 Number of starts - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
60 Int. number of starts CW - H word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
61 Int. number of starts CW - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

142 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Unit Information

62 Int. number of starts CCW - H word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
63 Int. number of starts CCW - L word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
64 Energy W - H word UM(+)
65 Energy W - L word 1 kWh UM(+)
66 ... 69 Reserved
70 Active power P - H word 1W BU2(+)
71 Active power P - L word BU2(+)
72 Apparent power S - H word 1 VA BU2(+)
73 Apparent power S - L word BU2(+)
74 ... 85 Reserved
86 Calculator 1 - output BU2(+)
87 ... 89 Reserved
90 Calculator 2 - output BU2(+)
91 ... 10 Reserved
3
104 2) Max. current I_max_10mA 10 mA
105 2)
Current I_L1_10mA 10 mA
106 2) Current I_L2_10mA 10 mA
107 2)
Current I_L3_10mA 10 mA
108 2)
Max. current I_max_100mA 100 mA
109 2) Current I_L1_100mA 100 mA
110 2)
Current I_L2_100mA 100 mA
111 2) Current I_L3_100mA 100 mA
...
255 Reserved

1) S7 format: 0/4mA=0; 20mA=27648

2) For SIMOCODE pro S only

Table 3-21 Socket assignment table - analog in float format

No. Designation Unit Info

0 Not connected BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Current I_max_A_F 1A UM+
5 Current I_avg_A_F 1A UM+
6 Current I_L1_A_F 1A UM+
7 Current I_L2_A_F 1A UM+
8 Current I_L3_A_F 1A UM+
9 Active power P_F 1W UM+
10 Apparent power S_F 1 VA UM+

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 143
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

No. Designation Unit Info

11 Voltage UL1_F 1V UM+
12 Voltage UL2_F 1V UM+
13 Voltage UL3_F 1V UM+
14 Cos phi_F 1% UM+
15 Frequency_F 1 Hz UM+
16 Reserved
... Reserved
255 Reserved

3.3.1.4 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed messages of the slave diagnostics for status
information and the hardware interrupt. This information is also contained in data record 92.

Note
Structure of the slave diagnostics
The diagnostic messages listed below are the same as those contained in the hardware
interrupts transferred via PROFIBUS. See also Chapter "Structure of the slave
diagnostics → Hardware interrupt - Structure" in the SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109743957).

Table 3-22 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

Byte.Bit Status message Information

0.0 Faults - control Fault - execution ON command BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.1 Fault - execution STOP command BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.2 Fault - feedback (FB) ON BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.3 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.4 Fault - stalled positioner BU2(+)
0.5 Fault - double 0 BU2(+)
0.6 Fault - double 1 BU2(+)
0.7 Fault - end position BU2(+)
1.0 Fault - antivalence BU2(+)
1.1 Fault - Cold start (TPF) fault BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.2 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2(+)
1.3 Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) BU2(+)
1.4 Reserved
2.0 Reserved
2.1 Faults - Protection Fault - unbalance IM UM
2.2 Fault - overload IM UM
2.3 Fault - overload + phase failure IM UM
2.4 Fault - int. ground fault IM UM

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

144 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Status message Information

2.5 Fault - ext. ground fault EM
2.6 Reserved
2.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th
3.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th
3.1 Fault - thermistor open circuit Th
3.2 Reserved
3.3 Fault - TM trip T> TM MM
3.4 Fault - TM sensor fault TM MM
3.5 Fault - TM out of range TM MM
3.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit MM EM+
3.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+
4.0 Trips - level monitoring Fault - trip I> IM UM
4.1 Fault - trip I< IM UM
4.2 Fault - trip P> UM
4.3 Fault - trip P< UM
4.4 Fault - trip cos phi< UM
4.5 Fault - trip U< UM
4.6 Fault - trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
4.7 Fault - trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
5.0 Fault - stalled rotor IM UM
5.1 Reserved
5.4 Fault - number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
5.5 Reserved
6.0 Faults - Miscellaneous Fault - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6.1 Fault - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6.2 Fault - external fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6.3 Fault - external fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6.4 Fault - external fault 5 BU2(+)
6.5 Fault - external fault 6 BU2(+)
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Fault - analog module open circuit AM
7.1 Fault - test trip BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
7.2 DM-F safety-related tripping DM-FL DM-FP
7.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-FL DM-FP
7.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 145
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Status message Information

8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM
8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM
8.2 Warning - Overload IM UM
8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM
8.4 Warning - internal ground fault IM UM
8.5 Warning - external ground fault EM MM
8.6 Reserved
8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th
9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th
9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th
9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM MM
9.3 Reserved
9.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM MM
9.5 Warning - TM out of range TM MM
9.6 Reserved
10.0 Warnings - Level monitoring Warning - Warning I> IM UM
10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM
10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM
10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM
10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM
10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM
10.6 Warning - warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
10.7 Warning - warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
11.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM
11.1 Reserved
11.3 Warning - No start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11.4 Warning - Number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours> BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

146 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Status message Information

12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.1 Warning - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.2 Warning - external fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.3 Warning - external fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.4 Warning - external fault 5 BU2(+)
12.5 Warning - external fault 6 BU2(+)
12.6 Reserved
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2(+)
13.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related tripping
13.2 Warning - Test requirement DM-FL DM-FP
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Reserved
13.5 Reserved
13.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-FL DM-FP
13.7 Warning - DM-FL DM-FL
14.0 Reserved
14.1 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
14.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
14.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
14.4 Reserved
14.5 Reserved
14.6 Status information - Receive Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.7 Reserved
15.0 Events - parameterization Event - startup parameter block active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.1 Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
current operating state
15.2 Event - Device does not support the required BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
functions
15.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.4 Event - Wrong password BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.5 Event - Password protection active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.6 Event - Factory settings BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
17.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode DM-FL
17.1 Event - DM FL configuration deviation DM-FL
17.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test DM-FL
17.3 Event - DM FP F PRM error DM-FP
17.4 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 147
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2 PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.1 PROFIBUS data records - general

Data records - Overview

Table 3-23 Data records - Overview

Data record No. Description Read / write

1 S7 system diagnostics (Page 150) Read
63 Analog value recording (Page 152) Read
67 Process image output (Page 153) Read
69 Process image input (Page 154) Read
72 Error buffer (Page 154) Read
73 Event memory (Page 155) Read
92 Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, status information) Read
(Page 155)
94 Measured values (Page 162) Read
95 Service / statistical data (Page 163) Read / write
130 Basic device parameters 1 (Page 165) (BU0 BU1 BU2) Read / write
131 Basic device parameters 2 (Page 172) (BU0 BU1 BU2) Read / write
132 Extended device parameters 1 (Page 178) (BU2) Read / write
133 Extended device parameters 2 (Page 186) (BU0 BU2) Read / write
139 Labeling (Page 190) Read / write
160 Communication parameters (Page 191) Read / write
165 Marking (Page 191) Read / write
202 Acyclic receive (Page 192) Read / write
203 Acyclic send (Page 193) Read
224 Password protection (Page 193) Write
231 I&M0 - device information (Page 194) Read
232 I&M1 - equipment identifier (Page 195) Read / write
233 I&M2 - installation (Page 195) Read / write
234 I&M3 - description (Page 196) Read / write

Writing / reading data records

Access to data records via the slot and index

• Slot: Access via slot 1
• Index: Data record number

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

148 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Writing / reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
– S7-DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
– S7 master: by calling SFC58
• Reading data sets:
– S7-DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
– S7 master: by calling SFC 59
Further information
You will find further information about the SFBs:
• in Reference Manual System software for the S7-300/400, system and standard functions
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/44240604)
• In the STEP7 online help

Byte arrangements
When data longer than one byte is stored, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

%\WH DUUDQJHPHQW 'DWD W\SH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

+LJK ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH
'RXEOH ZRUG 'ZRUG
%\WH +LJK E\WH
/RZ ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

:RUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH %\WH
%\WH
%\WH %\WH

Figure 3-2 Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

Abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 149
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)

Max. current I_max Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is BU0 BU1 BU2

*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
Parameters that can be changed during operation.
BU0 BU1 BU2: Entry relevant for basic units SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro C, and SIMOCODE pro V.

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.

"Float" data type

32-bit floating-point number
S: Sign (0 = positive; 1 = negative)
E: Exponent
M: Mantissa

3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S E: Exponent + 127 (8 bits) M: Mantissa (23 bits)

3.3.2.2 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics

Table 3-24 Data record 0/1 S7 system diagnostics

Byte DR0 DS1 Designation Type No error Error Information

Bit
0.0 X X Module fault / OK Bit 0 1
0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0
0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1
0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1
0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0
0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0
0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0
0.7 X X Wrong parameters on module Bit 0 0
1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3
1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1
1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0
1.6 X X Substitute diagnosis alarm Bit 0 0
1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
2.0 X X Application module wrong / miss‐ Bit 0 0
ing
2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

150 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte DR0 DS1 Designation Type No error Error Information

Bit
2.2 X X Operating state (0=RUN, 1=STOP) Bit 0 0
2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0
2.4 X X Supply voltage within module Bit 0 0
failed
2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0
2.6 X X Total backup power failed Bit 0 0
2.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM / UM) Bit 0 0
3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0
3.2 X X EEPROM error Bit 0 0
3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0
3.4 X X ADU/DAU error Bit 0 0
3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0
3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0
3.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D
5.0 X Length of the channel-specific di‐ Byte 0x20 0x20
agnostics
6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01
7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per Byte 0x00 0x01
channel)
8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0
8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0
8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0
8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0
8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0
8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0
8.6 X Open circuit Bit 0 0
8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0
9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0
9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Fault F9
9.2 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.3 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.4 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.5 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.6 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.7 X Reserved Bit 0 0
10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Fault F16
10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0
10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0
10.3 X Reserved Bit 0 0
10.4 X Earth fault Bit 0 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 151
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte DR0 DS1 Designation Type No error Error Information

Bit
10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0
10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0
10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0
11.0 X Actuator trip Bit 0 0
11.1 X Safety-related tripping Bit 0 0
11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0
11.3 X Non-specific error Bit 0 0
11.4 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.5 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.6 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.7 X Reserved Bit 0 0
12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0

3.3.2.3 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

Table 3-25 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0 BU2(+)
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1 BU2(+)
3.0 Analog value record Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
currently running
3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2(+)
6.0 Measured value (1) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2(+)
...
122.0 Measured value (59) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2(+)
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0

The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value. You will find all
available analog values with their units in Chapter Socket assignment table - analog (Page 141).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

152 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.4 Data record 67 - Process image output

Table 3-26 Data record 67 - Process image output

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Information

0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/ PCS [DP] ON< Bit BU0 BU1 BU2(+
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Bit )
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
1.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU0 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 153
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.5 Data record 69 - Process image input

Table 3-27 Data record 69 - Process image input

Byte. Designation Default (also see pa‐ Type Information

Bit rameters)
0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - Off Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload opera‐ Bit
tion
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking Bit
time active
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - general warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/ PLC / PCS ana‐ Max. current I_max Word Float BU0 , BU1, BU2+
PCS analog Input 1 log FI input 1 BU2(+)
4.0 PLC/PCS analog input Not assigned Word BU0, BU2(+)
2
6.0 PLC/PCS analog input PLC / PCS ana‐ Not assigned Word Float
3 log FI input 2
8.0 PLC/PCS analog input Not assigned Word
4

3.3.2.6 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Table 3-28 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Type Byte
5.0 Error number Byte
6.0 2 Time stamp D-word
10.0 Type Byte
11.0 Error number Byte
...

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

154 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

120.0 21 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
124.0 Type Byte
125.0 Error number Byte

Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).

Type/error number
Refer to the error numbers for detailed information. You will find the meaning in Chapter Data
record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 155) in column "Error number" of table "Data record 92 -
Diagnostics."

3.3.2.7 Data record 73 - Event memory

Table 3-29 Data record 73 - Event memory

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word BU2(+)
4.0 Type Byte BU2(+)
5.0 Information Byte BU2(+)
8.0 2 Time stamp D-word BU2(+)
12.0 Type Byte BU2(+)
13.0 Information Byte BU2(+)
14.0 Info Byte[2] BU2(+)

3.3.2.8 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Table 3-30 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status information - General Status - General fault BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.1 Status - General warning BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.2 Status - Device BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.3 Status - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1.5 Status - Current flowing IM UM
1.6 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 155
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
2.0 Status information - Receive Status - ON<< Dependent on the
2.1 Status - ON< control function
2.2 Status - Off
2.3 Status - ON>
2.4 Status - ON>>
2.5 Status - Start active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
2.7 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta starter,
Dahlander starter,
pole-changing starter
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the
3.1 Status - Runs in close direction control function
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold start (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
3.7 Status - OPO BU2(+)
4.0 Status - Remote mode BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.1 Status information - Protec‐ Status - Emergency start executed IM UM M
tion
4.2 Status - Cooling down period ac‐ IM UM M
tive
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
4.4 Status information - Miscel‐ Status - Device check active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
laneous
4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM
5.3 Event - overload + phase failure IM UM
5.4 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM
5.5 Event - External ground fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning ext. ground fault EM
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM MM
6.3 Event - TM trip T> TM MM
6.4 Event - TM sensor fault TM MM

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

156 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
6.5 Event - TM out of range TM MM
6.6 Event - EM+ open circuit MM EM(+) 1)
6.7 Event - EM+ short-circuit MM EM(+) 1)
7.0 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM
8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM
8.6 Event - trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM
8.7 Event - trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM
9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
9.1 Events - Protection Warning - Internal ground fault UM+
9.2 Reserved
9.3 Events - Level monitoring Event - No start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9.4 Event - No. of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9.5 Event - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9.6 Event - motor operating hours > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10.0 Event - Limit 1 BU2(+)
10.1 Event - Limit 2 BU2(+)
10.2 Event - Limit 3 BU2(+)
10.3 Event - Limit 4 BU2(+)
10.4 Events - Miscellaneous Event - ext. fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10.5 Event - ext. fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10.6 Event - ext. fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10.7 Event - ext. fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
11.0 Event - ext. fault 5 BU2(+)
11.1 Event - ext. fault 6 BU2(+)
11.2 Events - FW update Event - BU FW update active BU2+
11.3 Event - Module FW update active BU2+
11.4 Events - Miscellaneous Event - Analog module open cir‐ AM
cuit

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 157
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
11.5 Event - DM-F safety-related trip‐ DM-F
ping
11.6 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
11.7 Reserved
12.0 Events - Time stamp func‐ Event - Timestamping function BU2(+)
tion active + OK
12.1 Reserved
12.2 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL
12.3 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
12.4 Events - System interfaces Event - Configured operator panel BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
missing
12.5 Event - Module not supported BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.6 Event - No module voltage BU2(+)
13.0 Events - Memory module Event - Memory module read in BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
13.1 Event - Memory module program‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
med
13.2 Event - Memory module erased BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Event - Initialization module read BU0 BU2(+)
in
13.5 Event - Initialization module pro‐ BU0 BU2(+)
grammed
13.6 Event - Initialization module BU0 BU2(+)
cleared
13.7 Event - Addressing plug Event - Addressing plug read in BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.0 Events - parameterization Event - startup parameter block BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
active
14.1 Event - Parameter changes not al‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
lowed in the current operating
state
14.2 Event - Device does not sup‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
port the required functions
14.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
14.4 Event - Wrong password BU0 BU1 BU2(+) M
14.5 Event - Password protection active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.6 Event - Factory settings BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.0 Event - PRM error number BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
(bytes) **)
16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode DM-FL
16.1 Event - DM-FL actual and set con‐ DM-FL
figuration are different
16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up DM-FL
test
16.3 Event - DM FP PRM error DM-FP

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

158 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
16.4 Reserved
17.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM W
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM W
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM W
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase fail‐ IM UM W
ure
17.4 Warning - Internal ground fault IM UM W
17.5 Warning - external ground fault EM MM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th W
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th W
18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM MM W
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM MM W
18.5 Warning - TM out of range TM MM W
18.6 Warning - EM+ open circuit MM EM+ 1)
W
18.7 Warning - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+ 1) W
19.0 Warnings - Level monitoring Warning - Warning I> IM UM W
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM W
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM W
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM W
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM W
20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM W
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
20.4 Warning - Number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
20.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours> BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
21.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - ext. fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
21.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
21.2 Warning - ext. fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
21.3 Warning - ext. fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) W
21.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2(+) W
21.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2(+) W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 159
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
22.0 Warning - Analog module open AM W
circuit
22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related DM-F W
tripping
22.2 Warning - DM-F test requirement DM-F W
22.3 Reserved
22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F W
22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL W
23.0 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F9 0
23.1 Fault - Module fault (e.g. module BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F9 1
IM, UM, DM)
23.2 Fault - temporary components BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F9 2
(e.g. memory module)
23.3 Fault - configuration error BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F16 3
23.4 Fault - Parameterization BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F16 4
23.5 Fault - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2(+) 5
23.6 Fault - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2(+) 6
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults - Control Fault - execution ON command BU1 BU2(+) F 8
24.1 Fault - execution STOP command BU1 BU2(+) F 9
24.2 Fault - feedback (FB) ON BU1 BU2(+) F 10
24.3 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF BU1 BU2(+) F 11
24.4 Fault - Stalled positioner CF = positioner F 12
24.5 Fault - Double 0 CF = positioner F 13
24.6 Fault - Double 1 CF = positioner F 14
24.7 Fault - End position CF = positioner F 15
25.0 Fault - Antivalence CF = positioner F 16
25.1 Fault - Cold start (TPF) fault BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 17
25.2 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2(+) F 18
25.3 Fault - Operational Protection Off BU2(+) F 19
(OPO)
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Faults - Protection Fault - unbalance IM UM F 25
26.2 Fault - overload IM UM F 26
26.3 Fault - overload + phase failure IM UM F 27
26.4 Fault - int. ground fault IM UM F 28
26.5 Fault - ext. ground fault EM MM F 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th F 31
27.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th F 32
27.1 Fault - thermistor open circuit Th F 33
27.2 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

160 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information DP diag‐ Error

nostics *) No. **)
27.3 Fault - TM trip T> TM MM F 35
27.4 Fault - TM sensor fault TM MM F 36
27.5 Fault - TM out of range TM MM F 37
27.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit MM EM(+) 1)
F
27.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit MM EM(+) 1) F
28.0 Faults - level monitoring Fault - trip I> IM UM F 40
28.1 Fault - trip I< IM UM F 41
28.2 Fault - trip P> UM F 42
28.3 Fault - trip P< UM F 43
28.4 Fault - trip cos phi< UM F 44
28.5 Fault - trip U< UM F 45
28.6 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM F 46
28.7 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM F 47
29.0 Fault - stalled rotor IM UM F 48
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Fault - Number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 52
29.5 Reserved
30.0 Faults - Miscellaneous Fault - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 56
30.1 Fault - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 57
30.2 Fault - external fault 3 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 58
30.3 Fault - external fault 4 BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 59
30.4 Fault - external fault 5 BU2(+) F 60
30.5 Fault - external fault 6 BU2(+) F 61
31.0 Fault - analog module open circuit AM F 64
31.1 Fault - test trip BU0 BU1 BU2(+) F 65
31.2 Fault - DM-F - safety-related trip‐ DM-F F 66
ping
31.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-F F 67
31.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL F 68
31.5 Reserved

*) The "DP Diagnostics" column contains the bits that are additionally available in the diagnostics
using PROFIBUS DP:
• F: Fault
• M: Status information
• W: Warning
• F9, F16: Fault types
See also Chapter Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Page 144).
**) Events - PRM error number (bytes):

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 161
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) that caused
the error is communicated here. You will find the parameter group in the parameter data records
130 to 133.

%\WH%LW 'HVLJQDWLRQ
350 JURXS
5HVHUYHG
'HYLFH FRQILJXUDWLRQ
VHH DERYH 3DUDPHWHU JURXS

Figure 3-3 Example for parameter group

1) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

3.3.2.9 Data record 94 - measured values

Table 3-31 Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 - 255 See 2) IM UM(+)
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% IM UM(+)
6.0 cos phi Byte 0 - 100 1% UM(+)
7.0 Reserved Byte[5]
12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
14.0 Current I_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
16.0 Current I_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
18.0 Current I_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
20.0 Last trip current Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM(+)
24.0 Cooling down period Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM(+)
26.0 Voltage U_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
28.0 Voltage U_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
30.0 Voltage U_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
32.0 AM output Word 0 - 32767 See )1
AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 - 32767 AM
36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM
38.0 Reserved
40.0 TM - Max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM MM
42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3)
TM MM
44.0 TM - Temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3)
TM
46.0 TM - Temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM
48.0 EM+ 4)
- ground-fault current Word 0 - 65535 1 mA MM EM(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

162 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

50.0 EM+ 4) - last tripping current Word 0 - 65535 1 mA MM EM(+)
52.0 Active power P D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1W UM(+)
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM(+)
60.0 Reserved Byte[14]
132.0 Frequency Word 0 - 65535 0.01 Hz UM+
134.0 Reserved
136.0 res. UM+ ‑ ground-fault current Word UM+
138.0 Internal ground fault+ ‑ res. last UM+
trip current
140.0 Reserved Byte[4]
144.0 Current I_max_F (float) Float 1A UM+
148.0 Current I_avg_F Float 1A UM+
152.0 Current I_L1_F Float 1A UM+
156.0 Current I_L2_F Float 1A UM+
160.0 Current I_L3_F Float 1A UM+
164.0 Active power P_F Float 1W UM+
168.0 Apparent power S_F Float 1 VA UM+
172.0 Voltage U1_F Float 1V UM+
176.0 Voltage U2_F Float 1V UM+
180.0 Voltage U3_F Float 1V UM+
184.0 Cos phi_F Float UM+
188.0 Frequency_F Float 1 Hz UM+
192.0 Reserved Byte[8]

1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2% increments in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254%), bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed
level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
4) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

3.3.2.10 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 163
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Additional abbreviations:
• r / w = value can be written / changed
• r = value can only be read

Table 3-32 Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Permissible starts - actual value Byte 0 - 255 r 1) BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
5.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 - 255 1 week r BU2(+)
6.0 Reserved Byte[2]
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
10.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r/w BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
12.0 Number of internal overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.0 Motor stop time Word 0 - 65535 1h r/w BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU2(+)
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU2(+)
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
32.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
34.0 Calculation module 2 - Output 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
36.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r/w BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
56.0 Internal number of starts CW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
60.0 Internal number of starts CCW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
64.0 Consumed energy D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM(+)
68.0 Consumed energy Float 1 kWh r UM(+)
72.0 Reserved D-word
76.0 Reserved D-word[6]
100.0 Reserved Byte[16]
130.0 FTW converter 1 - output Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
132.0 FTW converter 2 - output Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
134.0 FTW converter 3 - output Word 0 - 65535 r BU2(+)
136.0 Reserved

1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

164 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.11 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Table 3-33 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
4.0 Device configura‐
tion (12)
0.0 Coordina‐ Byte BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
tion (byte[4]
4.0 Device class Byte 5, 7, 9 5 = BU1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
7 = BU0
9 = BU2(+)
5.0 Thermistor Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
the BU
(+)5. Reserved Bit[5]
1
5.6 Multifunction mod‐ Bit 0, 1 BU0
ule (MM).
5.7 Initialization mod‐ Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2(+)
ule (InM)
6.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
6.1 Analog mod‐ Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
ule 1 (AM1)
6.2 Temperature mod‐ Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2(+)
ule 1 (TM1)
6.3 3UF7500 ground- Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
fault module for
3UL22 residual cur‐
rent transformer
6.4 Digital mod‐ Bit[2] 0-3 0 = no digital module BU0 BU2(+)
ule 1 (DM1) 1 = monostable
6.6 Digital mod‐ Bit[2] 0-2 2 = bistable BU2(+)
ule 2 (DM2)
3 = special type (see 7.4)
7.0 Operator panel with Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
display (OPD)
7.1 3UF7510 ground- Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2(+)
fault module for
3UL23 residual cur‐
rent transformer
7.4 DM1 - Special type Bit[2] 0, 1 0 = DM-FL BU2(+)
1 = DM-FP
7.6 Reserved Bit[2]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 165
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
8.0 Current measur‐ Bit[7] 0-5 IM / UM: BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ing (IM) 0 = no current measure‐
ment
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A

UM+:
9 = 0.3 A - 4 A
10 = 3 A - 40 A
11 = 10 A - 115 A
12 = 20 - 200 A
13 = 63 - 630 A
8.7 Voltage measuring Bit 0, 1 BU2(+)
module (UM)
9.0 Reserved
10.0 Control function (CF) 0x00 0x00 = Overload BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0x10 0x10 = Direct starter BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0x11 0x11 = Reversing starter BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0x12 0x12 = 3VA molded BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0x20 case circuit breaker BU0 BU2(+)
(MCCB)
0x21 BU2(+)
0x20 = Star-delta starter
0x30 BU2(+)
0x21 = Star-delta revers‐
0x31 BU2(+)
ing starter
0x40 BU2(+)
0x30 = Dahlander start‐
0x41 er BU2(+)
0x50 0x31 = Dahlander re‐ BU2(+)
0x60 versing starter BU2(+)
0x61 0x40 = Pole-changing BU2(+)
0x62 starter BU2(+)
0x63 0x41 = Pole-changing BU2(+)
reversing starter
0x64 BU2(+)
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x70 BU0 BU2(+)
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x71 BU2(+)
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with
reversing contactor
11.0 Reserved Bit[8]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

166 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No configuration Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
fault due to OP
12.1 Startup parameter Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
block active
12.2 Test / Reset keys disa‐ Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
bled
12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Re‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
set 1 = Auto
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for proc‐ Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ess events
13.1 Diagnostics for proc‐ Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ess warnings
13.2 Diagnostics for proc‐ Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ess faults
13.3 Diagnostics for de‐ Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1, BU2(+)
vice faults
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
13.7 PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
14.0 Overload protection Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase IM UM(+)
- Load type 1 = 1-phase
14.1 Overload protection Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual IM UM(+)
- Reset 1 = Auto
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Save change-over Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
command
14.4 Non-maintained Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
command mode
14.5 Cold start level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1 = NC contact
14.6 Type of consumer Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
load 1 = ohmic load
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.2 External fault 3 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
15.3 External fault 4 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 167
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
15.4 External fault 1 - ac‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
tive status 1 = Only motor ON
15.5 External fault 2 - Ac‐ Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
tivity
15.6 External fault 3 - Ac‐ Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
tivity
15.7 External fault 4 - Ac‐ Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
tivity
16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters
(20)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

168 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
16.0 Thermistor - Over‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 0 = disabled Th
load response 1 = signaling
16.2 Thermistor - Re‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 2 = warn Th
sponse to sensor
3 = tripping
fault
16.4 Internal ground fault Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
- Response
16.6 Motor protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3 IM
Overload response
17.0 Motor protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 IM
Overload response
17.2 Unbalance protec‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 IM
tion - Response
17.4 Trip response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
18.0 Trip response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
18.4 Stalled rotor - Re‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
sponse
18.6 EM+ 1) - response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU2(+)
sensor fault
19.0 Monitoring the num‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ber of starts - Re‐
sponse to overshoot
19.2 Monitoring the num‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ber of starts - Re‐
sponse to prewarn‐
ing
19.4 Motor operating Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
hours monitoring -
Response
19.6 Motor stop time Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
monitoring - Re‐
sponse
20.0 External fault 1 - Re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
sponse
20.2 External fault 2 - Re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
sponse
20.4 External fault 3 - Re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
sponse
20.6 External fault 4 - Re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
sponse
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Basic unit - De‐ Bit[2] 0-3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
bounce time inputs

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 169
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Closing delay with BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
memory
2 = With opening delay
3 = With fleeting closing
22.0 Signal conditioning Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
1 - Type 1 = Inverting
22.2 Signal conditioning Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
2 - Type memory
22.4 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling with BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ment 1 - Type memory
22.6 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ment 2 - Type
23.0 EM+ 2) - monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on BU0 BU2(+)
23.2 EM+ - monitoring
2)
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = on+ BU0 BU2(+)
warning 2 = run
3 = run+
23.4 EM - response to an Bit[2] 1, 3 1 0 = disabled BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
external ground fault 1 = signaling
23.6 EM - response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 2 = warn BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
warning of an exter‐
3 = tripping
nal ground fault
24.0 Part - Bit[4] param‐
eters (24)
24.0 External fault 1 - Re‐ Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101 Bit[0] = Panel reset BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
set also by B Bit[1] = Auto-reset
24.4 External fault 2 - Re‐ Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101 Bit[2] = Remote reset BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
set also by B
Bit[4] = OFF command
25.0 External fault 3 - Re‐ Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101 reset BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
set also by B
25.4 External fault 4 - Re‐ Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
set also by B
26.0 Limit monitor - Hys‐ Bit[4] 0 - 15 1% 5 BU2(+)
teresis for limit mon‐
itor
26.4 EM+ 2) - hysteresis Bit[4] 0 - 15 1% 5 BU0 BU2(+)
27.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
27.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0 BU2+
28.0 Byte parame‐
ters (28)
28.0 Internal ground fault Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM
- Delay
29.0 Overload protection Byte 5, 7 3), 10 ... 35, 10 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
- Class 40
30.0 Motor protection - Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
Delay with overload
operation

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

170 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
31.0 Motor protection - Byte 0 - 100 1% 40 IM / UM(+)
Unbalance protec‐
tion level
32.0 Unbalance protec‐ Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
tion - Delay with un‐
balance
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0
34.0 FB time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 0 = disabled
35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM / UM(+)
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM / UM(+)
37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM / UM(+)
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM / UM(+)
39.0 Stalled rotor level Byte 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM / UM(+)
40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM / UM(+)
45.0 Monitoring the num‐ Byte 1 - 255 1 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ber of starts - Permis‐
sible starts
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
47.0 EM / MM 2)
- delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 1 BU0 BU2(+)
warning
48.0 Truth table 1 type Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
3I/1O
49.0 Truth table 2 type Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
3I/1O
50.0 Truth table 3 type Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
3I/1O
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Word parameters
(32)
52.0 Motor protection - Word 600 - 65535 100 ms 3000 IM / UM(+)
Cooling down period
54.0 Motor protection - Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 0 = disabled IM / UM(+)
Pause time
56.0 Execution time Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 10 0 = disabled BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
58.0 Monitoring the num‐ Word 0 - 65535 1s 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ber of starts - Time
range for starts
60.0 Monitoring the num‐ Word 0 - 65535 1s 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
ber of starts - Inter‐
locking time
62.0 Motor stop time level Word 0 - 65535 1h 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
>

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 171
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Designation (PRM Type Range Unit De‐ Note Information

.Bit group) fault
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
70.0 Counter 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
72.0 EM+ 2) - trip level Word 30 - 40000 1 mA 1000 BU0 BU2(+)
74.0 EM+ 2) - warning level Word 30 - 40000 1 mA 500 BU0 BU2(+)
76.0 D-word parame‐
ters (36)
76.0 Operator control en‐ Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0..0B
able
80.0 Motor protection - D-word 1)
10 mA 30 IM / UM(+)
set current Is1
84.0 Motor operating D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
hours level >
88.0 Reserved D-word 0

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor; bit 31 = 1,
i.e. conversion factor is active
2) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
3) Class 7 only for BU2+

3.3.2.12 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 3-34 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (40)
4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU1 BU2(+)
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
9.0 OP - LED green 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
10.0 OP - LED green 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
11.0 OP - LED green 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
13.0 OP - LED yellow 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
14.0 OP - LED yellow 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
15.0 Reserved Byte 0
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 105 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
ON< +)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

172 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 106 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
Off +)
18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 107 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
ON> +)
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 128 Default: Event - BU0 BU1 BU2(
Overload opera‐ +)
tion
20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 110 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
Interlocking time +)
active
21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 120 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
Auto mode +)
22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 96 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
General fault +)
23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 97 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2(
group warning +)
24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
25.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
26.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
27.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
28.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
29.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
30.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
31.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
33.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
34.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
35.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
36.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
37.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
38.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
39.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 173
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

40.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
41.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
42.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
43.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
44.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
45.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
46.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
47.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency Byte 0 - 255 60 Default: Cyclic re‐ IM UM
start ceive - Bit 0.4
50.0 Reserved Byte 0
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 - 255 61 Default: Cyclic re‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(
ceive - Bit 0.5 +)
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 - 255 2 Default: Fixed lev‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(
el value "1" +)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

174 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
ON< the control
55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 function
OFF
56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0
ON>
57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON< Byte 0 - 255 56 Default: Cyclic re‐
ceive - Bit 0.0
58.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 - 255 57 Default: Cyclic re‐
ceive - Bit 0.1
59.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON> Byte 0 - 255 58 Default: Cyclic re‐
ceive - Bit 0.2
60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON< Byte 0 - 255 0
61.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 - 255 0
62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON> Byte 0 - 255 0
63.0 Control station - Operator pan‐ Byte 0 - 255 0
el [OP] ON<
64.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] OFF
65.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON>
66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 - 255 73 Default: Group
control station
ON<
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 - 255 74 Default: Group
control station
OFF
68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 - 255 75 Default: Group
control station
ON>
69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 - 255 101 Default: Status -
current flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
71.0 External fault 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
72.0 External fault 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
73.0 External fault 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
75.0 External fault 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
76.0 External fault 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
77.0 External fault 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 175
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 59 Default: Cyclic re‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(
ceive - Bit 0.3 +)
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 62 Default: Cyclic re‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(
ceive - Bit 0.6 +)
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
89.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
90.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
91.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
92.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
93.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
94.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
95.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
96.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
97.0 Reserved Byte 0
98.0 Timer 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
99.0 Timer 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
100.0 Timer 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
101.0 Timer 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
102.0 Counter 1 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
103.0 Counter 1 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

176 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

104.0 Counter 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
105.0 Counter 2 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
106.0 Counter 2 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
107.0 Counter 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - ιnput Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
117.0 Flashing 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
118.0 Flashing 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
119.0 Flicker 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
120.0 Flicker 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
121.0 Flicker 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2(
+)
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 - 255 16 Default: Max. cur‐ BU0 BU1 BU2(
rent I_max +)
123.0 Reserved Byte 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 177
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.13 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Table 3-35 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
0.0 Coordination Byte[4 BU0 BU2(+
] )
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2(+)
4.1 3UF50 operating mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0 BU2(+)
1 = DPV1
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 OPD - Warnings Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Do not display BU2(+)
5.3 OPD - Faults Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Display BU2(+)

5.4 Analog module - Measuring range Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0 - 20mA AM1

input 1 = 4 - 20mA
5.5 Analog module - Measuring range Bit 0, 1 0 AM1
output
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting limit 1 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" (overshoot‐ BU2(+)
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting limit 2 Bit 0, 1 0 ing) BU2(+)
6.2 Overshooting/undershooting limit 3 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = "<" (under‐ BU2(+)
shooting)
6.3 Overshooting/undershooting limit 4 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2(+)
6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No, 1 = Yes BU2(+)
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU2(+)
1 = NC contact
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED BU2(+)
1 = OPEN
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta BU0 BU2(+
1 = In supply cable )
7.0 External fault 5 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU2(+)
7.1 External fault 6 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU2(+)
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

178 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always BU2(+)
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Only motor ON BU2(+)
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculation module 2 - Operating Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word BU2(+)
mode 1 = D-word
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No DM-F
1 = Yes
8.3 DM-F - reset safety-related tripping Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, DM-F
1 = Auto
8.4 Time stamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2(+)
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable pa‐ DM-FL
9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 rameters compara‐ DM-FL
ble with the mod‐
9.2 DM-FL - Configuration 3 Bit 0, 1 0 ule configuration DM-FL
9.3 DM-FL - Configuration 4 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.4 DM-FL - Configuration 5 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.5 DM-FL - Configuration 6 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.6 DM-FL - Configuration 7 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.7 DM-FL - Configuration 8 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
10.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (21)
10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2(+)
10.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
10.4 UVO timebase Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 100 ms, BU2(+)
1 = 1 s,
2 = 10 s
10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = Deactivated, BU2(+)
1 = Activated
11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (always) UM(+)
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = on+ UM(+)
(always, not TPF)
2 = RUN (motor
ON, not TPF)
11.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
11.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 179
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON (always) AM1
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = ON + (al‐ AM1
12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 ways, not TPF) AM1
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = RUN (motor AM1
ON, not TPF)
13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2(+)
3 = RUN+ (motor
13.2 Monitoring limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 ON, not TPF, start‐ BU2(+)
13.4 Monitoring limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 up override) BU2(+)
13.6 Monitoring limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2(+)
14.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.6 AM1 - active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input AM1
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
15.0 DM - Debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM2
ms MM
15.2 AM1 - Response for open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = disabled AM1
15.4 EM - response to an external ground Bit[2] 1, 3 1 1 = signal EM EM(+)
fault 2 = warn MM
15.6 EM - response to warning of an ex‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = tripping EM EM(+)
ternal ground fault MM
16.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.4 DM-F - Test requirement response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = disabled DM-F
16.6 DM-F - safety-related tripping re‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = signal DM-F
sponse 2 = warn
17.0 TM1 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 3 = tripping TM1 MM
17.2 TM1 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM1 MM
17.4 TM1 - Response to a sensor fault / Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM1 MM
out of range
17.6 TM1 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensors TM1 MM
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

180 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = disabled UM(+)
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = signal UM(+)
18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = warn UM(+)
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = tripping UM(+)
19.0 Trip response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM(+)
19.2 Warning response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM(+)
19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM(+)
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM(+)
20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.0 External fault 5 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = disabled BU2(+)
22.2 External fault 6 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = signal BU2(+)
2 = warn
3 = tripping
22.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.0 Analog-value recording - Trigger Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive BU2(+)
edge 1 = Negative
23.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing de‐ BU2(+)
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 lay BU2(+)
1 = Closing delay
with memory
2 = With opening
delay
3 = With fleeting
closing

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 181
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting BU0 BU2(+
1 = Inverting )
25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with BU0 BU2(+
memory )
26.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling BU2(+)
26.2 Non-volatile element 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 with memory BU2(+)
26.4 Calculation module 2 - Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +, BU2(+)
1 = -,
2 = *,
3=/
26.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.4 OPD - Operator panel display (bit 0 Bit[2] 0-4 2 0 = Manual BU2+
to 1) 1=3s
27.6 OPD - Operator panel display (bit 2 Bit[2] 0-4 2 = 10 s BU2+
to 3)
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
28.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (25)
28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3] 000B to 100B 000B 000B = PT100 TM1 MM
+ Bit 001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
28.4 OPD - Language Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2+
29.0 External fault 5 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset BU2(+)
29.4 External fault 6 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[1] = Auto-reset BU2(+)
Bit[2] = Remote re‐
set
Bit[3] = OFF com‐
mand reset
30.0 OPD - Contrast (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 255 1 50 BU2+
30.4 OPD - Contrast (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4] % BU2+

31.0 OPD - Profile (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 33 0 BU2+

31.4 OPD - Profile (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4] BU2+
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU0 BU2(+
)
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU0 BU2(+
)
33.0 Is1 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2(+)
33.4 Is2 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2(+)
34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM(+)
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM1

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

182 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% BU2(+)
35.4 OPD - Lighting Bit[4] 0-4 2 0 = Off BU2+
1=3s
2 = 10 s
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
36.0 Byte parameters (29)
36.0 Reserved Byte 0
37.0 EM / MM - delay trip Byte 0 - 255 10 5 EM MM
0
ms
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1 0 UM(+)
%
39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1 0 UM(+)
%
40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM(+)
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM(+)
42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *1 0 AM1
28
43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *1 0 AM1
28
44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *1 0 AM1
28
45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *1 0 AM1
28
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 183
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 UM(+)
0
ms
54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 10 5 AM1
0
ms
55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 10 5 AM1
0
ms
56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 AM1
0
ms
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 10 5 AM1
0
ms
58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 10 5 BU2(+)
0
ms
59.0 Delay limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 10 5 BU2(+)
0
ms
60.0 Delay limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 10 5 BU2(+)
0
ms
61.0 Delay limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 10 5 BU2(+)
0
ms
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1K 5 TM1 MM
63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta starter BU0 BU2(+
)
64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 10 0 BU2(+)
0
ms
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0 BU2(+)
66.0 Analog value recording - Sampling Byte 0 - 20 5% 0 BU2(+)
rate
67.0 Calculation module 2 - Denominator Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
1
68.0 Calculation module 2 - Numerator 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
69.0 Calculation module 1 - Denominator Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0, BU2(
+)
71.0 Truth table 5 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU2(+)
72.0 Truth table 6 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU2(+)
73.0 Calculation module 2 - Numerator 1 Byte -128 - 127 0 BU2(+)
74.0 Calculation module 2 - Denominator Byte -128 - 127 0 BU2(+)
2

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

184 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Un De‐ Note Informa‐

it fault tion
75.0 DM-F - Test requirement level Byte 0 - 255 1 0 BU2(+)
we
ek
76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value output Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for 0/4mA AM1
78.0 Analog Module - End value output Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for 20mA AM1
80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM1 MM

82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM1 MM

84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)

86.0 Limit monitor 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
88.0 Limit monitor 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
90.0 Limit monitor 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 10 0 BU2(+)
0
ms
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 10 0 BU2(+)
0
ms
96.0 Counter 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
98.0 Counter 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 - 65535 10 0
ms
102.0 Analog value recording - Sampling Word 1 - 50000 1 100 BU2(+)
rate ms
104.0 Is1 conversion factor - Numerator Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
106.0 Is2 conversion factor - Numerator Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2(+)
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Motor protection - Set current Is2 D-word 1)
10 0 BU2(+)
m
A
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 0 UM(+)
W
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 0 UM(+)
W
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 0 UM(+)
W
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 0 UM(+)
W
128.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Output 1 Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0 BU2(+)
132.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Output 2 Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0 BU2(+)
136.0 Calculation module 2, offset D-word -0x800000000x 0 BU2(+)
7FFFFFFF
140.0 Calculation module 1, numerator / D-word 2x 0 BU2(+)
offset -32768..32767

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 185
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor

3.3.2.14 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 3-36 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (41)
4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F MM
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F MM
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
10.0 Reserved Byte 0
11.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Time stamping - input 0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
13.0 Time stamping - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
14.0 Time stamping - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
15.0 Time stamping - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
16.0 Time stamping - input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
17.0 Time stamping - input 5 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
18.0 Time stamping - input 6 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
19.0 Time stamping - input 7 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
20.0 Analog-value recording - Trigger Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
input
21.0 Reserved Byte 0
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
ON<< the control
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 function
ON>>
24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] Byte 0 - 255 0
ON<<
25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] Byte 0 - 255 0
ON>>
26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panels Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON>>
29.0 Control station - Operator panels Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP]<>/<<>>
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

186 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
37.0 External fault 6 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
38.0 Reserved Byte 0
39.0 Reserved Byte 0
40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
42.0 Reserved Byte 0
43.0 Reserved Byte 0
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
46.0 Truth table 4 3E/1A - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
47.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
48.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
49.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
50.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
51.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
52.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
53.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
54.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
55.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
56.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
57.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
58.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
59.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
60.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
61.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
62.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
63.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - input 5 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
64.0 Timer 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
65.0 Timer 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
66.0 Timer 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
67.0 Timer 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
68.0 Counter 3 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
69.0 Counter 3 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
70.0 Counter 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
71.0 Counter 4 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
72.0 Counter 4 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
73.0 Counter 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 187
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
82.0 Reserved Byte 0
83.0 Reserved Byte 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 Analog module - output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM1
89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
90.0 Analog input limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
91.0 Analog input limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
92.0 Analog input limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
93.0 Calculator 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
94.0 Analog value recording - analog Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
input
95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
96.0 PLC/PCS analog input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
97.0 PLC/PCS analog input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2(+)
98.0 Calculator 2, input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)
99.0 Calculator 2, input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2(+)

3.3.2.15 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 2

Table 3-37 Data record 134 - ExtendedPlus device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Info
8.0 Part - Bit[2] parameters (22)
17.0 Internal ground fault+ - Warn‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Disabled UM+
ing response 1 = Signaling
2 = Warn
17.2 TLS - performance Bit[2] 0, 3 0 0 = Disabled UM+
3 = Tripping
22.0 Part - Bit[4] parameters (26)
22.4 Internal ground fault+ - Hyste‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 15 1% 5 UM+
resis
30.0 Part - Byte parameters (30)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

188 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Info
42.0 Internal ground fault+ - warn‐ Byte 0 ... 255 100 ms 1 UM+
ing delay
Part - Word parameters
43.0 Internal ground fault+ - Trip Word 10 ... 120 % / I_e 0 Value range de‐ UM+
level pendent on cur‐
rent range of
the UM+
44.0 Internal ground fault+ - Warn‐ Word 10 ... 120 % / I_e 0 Value range de‐ UM+
ing level pendent on cur‐
rent range of
the UM+
45.0 TLS - delay Byte 0 ... 100 100 ms 5 UM+_TL

46.0 TLS - T bridge Byte 0 ... 120 500 ms 0 UM+_TL

60.0 Part - Word parameters (34)

148.0 Part - Float parameters (58)
172.0 Reserved Float
176.0 TLS threshold Float UM+_TL

3.3.2.16 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

This data record is available for the SIMOCODE pro V PROFIBUS basic unit from version V4.0 and
the SIMOCODE pro V Modbus RTU basic unit from version V2.0.
The bytes of this data record that are not mentioned are reserved entries that are not used by the
stated devices.

Table 3-38 Data record 135 - ExtendedPlus device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Info
100.0 Part - FII byte parame‐
ters (62)
100.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0 BU2+
101.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0 BU2+
102.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0 BU2+
103.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0 BU2+
107 ... 113 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 189
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.17 Data record 139 - Marking

For external faults, limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog
modules, user-specific texts can be configured for marking. The diagnostics
• External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings, and faults)
• Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
• TM warning T> / tripping T> (status information, warnings, and faults)
• AM Warning / tripping 0/4-20mA<> (status information, warnings, and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings, e.g. fill level >, bearing hot, etc. To simplify
diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed,
for example, with SIMOCODE ES. The texts do not contain any functions.
You can access the following texts via data record 139:

Table 3-39 Data record 139 - Marking

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
20.0 Marking - External fault 2 Byte[10] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
30.0 Marking - External fault 3 Byte[10] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
40.0 Marking - External fault 4 Byte[10] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2(+)
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2(+)
70.0 Reserved Byte[10]
80.0 Reserved Byte[10]
90.0 Marking limit 1 Byte[10] BU2(+)
100.0 Marking limit 2 Byte[10] BU2(+)
110.0 Marking limit 3 Byte[10] BU2(+)
120.0 Marking limit 4 Byte[10] BU2(+)
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU0 BU2(+)
140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10] BU0 BU2(+)
150.0 Marking warning 0/4-20mA> Byte[10] BU2(+)
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2(+)
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2(+)
180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2(+)
190.0 Reserved Byte[10]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

190 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.18 Data record 160 - Communication parameters

Note
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is detected automatically. The actual baud
rate is read.

Table 3-40 Data record 160 - Communication parameters

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Station address Byte
5.0 Baud rate Byte
6.0 to 9.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 PROFIsafe address (read only) Word BU2(+)

3.3.2.19 Data record 165 - Identification

Table 3-41 Data record 165 - Identification

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location designation Byte[22]
58.0 Date installed Byte[16]
74.0 Reserved Byte[38]
112.0 Description Byte[54]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 191
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.20 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive

Description
The acyclic receive data can be used for any functions. The receive data is available as device-
internal outputs (sockets).

Table 3-42 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Bit
4.1 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Bit
4.2 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Bit
4.3 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Bit
4.4 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Bit
4.5 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Bit
4.6 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Bit
4.7 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Bit
5.0 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.0 Bit
5.1 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.1 Bit
5.2 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.2 Bit
5.3 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.3 Bit
5.4 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.4 Bit
5.5 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.5 Bit
5.6 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.6 Bit
5.7 Acyclic receive - Bit 1.7 Bit
6.0 Acyclic receive - Analog value Word

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

192 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

3.3.2.21 Data record 203 - Acyclic send

Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic send data. The send data is available as device-
internal inputs (plugs).

Table 3-43 Data record 203 - Acyclic send

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
0.1 Acyclic send - Bit 0.1 Bit
0.2 Acyclic send - Bit 0.2 Bit
0.3 Acyclic send - Bit 0.3 Bit
0.4 Acyclic send - Bit 0.4 Bit
0.5 Acyclic send - Bit 0.5 Bit
0.6 Acyclic send - Bit 0.6 Bit
0.7 Acyclic send - Bit 0.7 Bit
1.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.0 Bit
1.1 Acyclic send - Bit 1.1 Bit
1.2 Acyclic send - Bit 1.2 Bit
1.3 Acyclic send - Bit 1.3 Bit
1.4 Acyclic send - Bit 1.4 Bit
1.5 Acyclic send - Bit 1.5 Bit
1.6 Acyclic send - Bit 1.6 Bit
1.7 Acyclic send - Bit 1.7 Bit

3.3.2.22 Data record 224 - Password protection

Description
• Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and
the password applied. If "Password protection on" applies and the password is not identical
at the time of receipt, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change will be made.
• Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If
the password is incorrect, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is made.

Table 3-44 Data record 224 - Password protection

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
4.0 Control flag: Bit
0 = Password protection off, 1 = Password protection on

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 193
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8] BU0 BU1 BU2(+)
16.0 Reserved Byte[8]

3.3.2.23 I&M data

I&M data overview

The following I&M data are supported:

Number Name Comment

I&M0 Device identification This is stored in the device on initialization
(Page
194)
I&M1 Equipment identifier These are entered in the engineering system
(Page
195)
I&M2 Installation
(Page
195)
I&M3 Description
(Page
196)

Data set 231: I&M0 - device identification

Only read (r) access to the device identification (I&M0) is possible.

Byte Data length Content

0 10 bytes I&M header

Byte Data length Content Meaning Access

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

194 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Data length Content Meaning Access

58 2 bytes PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE Used to supplement the object "PROFILE_ID" and r
contains further information on the profile.
60 2 bytes IM_VERSION Provides information about the version of the iden‐ r
tification files (0x0101 = Version 1.1).
62 2 bytes IM_SUPPORTED Provides information about the available identifi‐ r
cation files (Index 2 to 4).

Data set 232: I&M1 - equipment identifier

Read (r) and write (w) access to the equipment identifier (I&M1) is possible.

Note
Validity of the write access
SIMOCODE pro checks the validity of the write access. The ASCII characters 0x20 - 0x7E are
accepted. If SIMOCODE pro does not accept the data of the write access, it responds with a
negative acknowledgment.

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 32 bytes TAG_FUNCTION Plant identifier r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).
42 22 bytes TAG_LOCATION Location designation r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).

Data set 233: I&M2 - installation

Read (r) and write (w) access to the installation (I&M2) is possible.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 195
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Note
Validity of the write access
SIMOCODE checks the validity of the write access. The accepted display formats are "YYYY-MM-
DD" (year-month-day) and "YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM" (year-month-day hour:minute). If SIMOCODE
does not accept the data of the write access, the SIMOCODE responds with a negative
acknowledgment.
• YYYY (year): 0001 - 9999
• MM (month): 01 - 12
• DD (day): 01 - 31 (depending on month)
• HH (hour): 00 - 23
• MM (minute): 00 - 59

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 16 bytes INSTALLATION_DATE Installation date r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).
26 38 bytes RESERVED - r

Data set 234: I&M3 - description

Read (r) and write (w) access to the description (I&M3) is possible.

Note
Validity of the write access
SIMOCODE checks the validity of the write access. The ASCII characters 0x20 - 0x7E are accepted.
If SIMOCODE does not accept the data of the write access, the SIMOCODE responds with a
negative acknowledgment.

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

196 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.3 Tables, PROFIBUS data records

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 32 bytes DESCRIPTOR Individual additional information and explanations. Fill un‐ r/w
used positions with blanks (0x20).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 197
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.1 PROFINET tables

3.4.1.1 OPC UA variables

Node IDs
The name of the variable is composed of the namespace ID2 and the node ID as follows:
ns=http://siemens.com/automation/simocode/provpn;i=Node ID of the relevant variable.
Example:
You want to access the maximum motor current. You search for the node ID of the variable "Max.
Current I_max" in the following table: Node ID=33

Table 3-45 Node IDs (1)

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

Acyclic receive
11 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 ✓ ✓
12 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.1 ✓ ✓
13 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.2 ✓ ✓
14 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.3 ✓ ✓
15 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.4 ✓ ✓
16 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.5 ✓ ✓
17 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.6 ✓ ✓
18 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.7 ✓ ✓
19 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.0 ✓ ✓
20 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.1 ✓ ✓
21 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.2 ✓ ✓
22 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.3 ✓ ✓
23 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.4 ✓ ✓
24 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.5 ✓ ✓
25 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.6 ✓ ✓
26 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.7 ✓ ✓
27 Unsigned Acyclic receive - analog value ✓ ✓
word
Measured values
30 Unsigned Thermal memory See 2) ✓ ✓
byte
31 Unsigned Phase unbalance 1% ✓ ✓
byte
32 Unsigned Cos phi 1% ✓ —
byte

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

198 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

33 Unsigned Max. current I_max 1% / Is ✓ ✓
word
34 Unsigned Current I_L1 1% / Is ✓ ✓
word
35 Unsigned Current I_L2 1% / Is ✓ ✓
word
36 Unsigned Current I_L3 1% / Is ✓ ✓
word
37 Unsigned Last trip current 1% / Is ✓ ✓
word
38 Unsigned Time to trip 100 ms ✓ ✓
word
39 Unsigned Cooling down period 100 ms ✓ ✓
word
40 Unsigned Phase voltage UL1-N 1V ✓ —
word
41 Unsigned Phase voltage UL2-N 1V ✓ —
word
42 Unsigned Phase voltage UL3-N 1V ✓ —
word
43 Unsigned AM1 output See 1) ✓ —
word
44 Unsigned AM1 input 1 ✓ —
word
45 Unsigned AM1 input 2 ✓ —
word
47 Unsigned TM1 max. temperature 1 K see 3) ✓ ✓
word
48 Unsigned TM1 temperature 1 ✓ ✓
word
49 Unsigned TM1 temperature 2 ✓ ✓
word
50 Unsigned TM1 temperature 3 ✓ ✓
word
51 Unsigned Active power P 1W ✓ —
Dword
52 Unsigned Apparent power S 1 VA ✓ —
Dword
53 Unsigned AM2 output See 1) ✓ —
word
54 Unsigned AM2 input 1 ✓ —
word
55 Unsigned AM2 input 2 ✓ —
word
56 Unsigned AM2 input 3 ✓ —
word

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 199
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

57 Unsigned Max. temperature 1 K see 3) ✓ —
word
58 Unsigned TM2 temperature 1 ✓ —
word
59 Unsigned TM2 temperature 2 ✓ —
word
60 Unsigned TM2 temperature 3 ✓ —
word
61 Unsigned EM Ground Fault Current ✓ ✓
word
62 Unsigned EM Last Trip Current ✓ ✓
word
63 Unsigned Frequency 0.01 Hz ✓ —
word
64 Float Max. current I_max 1A ✓ —
65 Float Average current I_avg 1A ✓ —
66 Float Current I_L1 1A ✓ —
67 Float Current I_L2 1A ✓ —
68 Float Current I_L3 1A ✓ —
69 Float Active power P 1W ✓ —
Statistics
70 Unsigned Permissible starts - actual value ✓ ✓
byte
71 Unsigned Time until test required ✓ ✓
byte
72 Unsigned Number of parameterizations ✓ ✓
word
73 Unsigned Number of overload trips ✓ ✓
word
74 Unsigned Int. number of overload trips ✓ ✓
word
75 Unsigned Motor stop time ✓ ✓
word
76 Unsigned Timer 1 ✓ ✓
word
77 Unsigned Timer 2 ✓ ✓
word
78 Unsigned Timer 3 ✓ ✓
word
79 Unsigned Timer 4 ✓ ✓
word
80 Unsigned Counter 1 ✓ ✓
word
81 Unsigned Counter 2 ✓ ✓
word
82 Unsigned Counter 3 ✓ ✓
word

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

200 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

83 Unsigned Counter 4 ✓ ✓
word
84 Unsigned Calculation module 1 - output ✓ ✓
word
85 Unsigned Calculation module 2 - output ✓ ✓
word
86 Unsigned Motor operating hours ✓ ✓
Dword
87 Unsigned Int. motor operating hours ✓ ✓
Dword
88 Unsigned Device operating hours ✓ ✓
Dword
89 Unsigned Number of starts ✓ ✓
Dword
90 Unsigned Int. number of direct starts ✓ ✓
Dword
91 Unsigned Int. number of reverse starts ✓ ✓
Dword
92 Unsigned Consumed energy ✓ —
Dword
93 Unsigned Timer 5 ✓ ✓
word
94 Unsigned Timer 6 ✓ ✓
word
95 Unsigned Counter 5 ✓ ✓
word
96 Unsigned Counter 6 ✓ ✓
word
97 Unsigned Calculation module 3 - output ✓ ✓
word
98 Unsigned Calculation module 4 - output ✓ ✓
word
99 Unsigned Analog multiplexer - output ✓ ✓
word
100 Float Consumed energy ✓ —
Diagnostic status
108 Boolean Status - General fault ✓ ✓
109 Boolean Status - General warning ✓ ✓
110 Boolean Status - Device OK ✓ ✓
111 Boolean Status - Bus OK ✓ ✓
112 Boolean Status - PLC/DCS in run ✓ ✓
113 Boolean Status - Current flowing ✓ ✓
114 Boolean Status - PE command Start_Pause is pend‐ ✓ ✓
ing
115 Boolean Status - PE energy-saving mode active ✓ ✓
116 Boolean Status - On<< ✓ ✓
117 Boolean Status - On < ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 201
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

118 Boolean Status - Off ✓ ✓
119 Boolean Status - On > ✓ ✓
120 Boolean Status - On >> ✓ ✓
121 Boolean Status - Start active ✓ ✓
122 Boolean Status - Interlocking time active ✓ ✓
123 Boolean Status - Change-over pause active ✓ ✓
124 Boolean Status - Positioner running in open direc‐ ✓ —
tion
125 Boolean Status - Positioner running in close direc‐ ✓ —
tion
126 Boolean Status - Feedback closed (FC) ✓ —
127 Boolean Status - Feedback open (FO) ✓ —
128 Boolean Status - Torque closed (TC) ✓ —
129 Boolean Status - Torque open (TO) ✓ —
130 Boolean Status - Test position (TPF) ✓ ✓
131 Boolean Status - Operational Protection OFF (OPO) ✓ —
132 Boolean Status - Remote mode ✓ ✓
133 Boolean Status - Emergency start executed ✓ ✓
134 Boolean Status - Cooling down period active ✓ ✓
135 Boolean Status - Pause time active ✓ ✓
136 Boolean Status - Device test active ✓ ✓
137 Boolean Status - Phase-sequence 1-2-3 ✓ —
138 Boolean Status - Phase-sequence 3-2-1 ✓ —
139 Boolean Status - Enabling circuit closed ✓ —
Diagnostic events
140 Boolean Event - Prewarning overload (I>115%Is) ✓ ✓
141 Boolean Event - Unbalance ✓ ✓
142 Boolean Event - Overload ✓ ✓
143 Boolean Event - Overload + loss of phase ✓ ✓
144 Boolean Event - Internal ground fault ✓ ✓
145 Boolean Event - External Ground Fault ✓ ✓
146 Boolean Event - Warning external ground fault ✓ ✓
147 Boolean Event - Thermistor trip level ✓ ✓
148 Boolean Event - Thermistor short circuit ✓ ✓
149 Boolean Event - Thermistor open circuit ✓ ✓
150 Boolean Event - TM1 warning level T> ✓ ✓
151 Boolean Event - TM1 trip level T> ✓ ✓
152 Boolean Event - TM1 sensor fault ✓ ✓
153 Boolean Event - TM1 out of range ✓ ✓
154 Boolean Event - EM Open Circuit ✓ ✓
155 Boolean Event - EM Short Circuit ✓ ✓
156 Boolean Event - Warning level I> ✓ ✓
157 Boolean Event - Warning level I< ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

202 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

158 Boolean Event - Warning level P> ✓ —
159 Boolean Event - Warning level P< ✓ —
160 Boolean Event - Warning level cos phi< ✓ —
161 Boolean Event - Warning level U< ✓ —
162 Boolean Event - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA> ✓ —
163 Boolean Event - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA< ✓ —
164 Boolean Event - Trip level I> ✓ ✓
165 Boolean Event - Trip level I< ✓ ✓
166 Boolean Event - Trip level P> ✓ —
167 Boolean Event - Trip level P< ✓ —
168 Boolean Event - Trip level cos phi< ✓ —
169 Boolean Event - Trip level U< ✓ —
170 Boolean Event - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA> ✓ —
171 Boolean Event - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA< ✓ —
172 Boolean Event - Stalled rotor ✓ ✓
173 Boolean Event - Warning Internal ground fault ✓ ✓
175 Boolean Event - No start possible ✓ ✓
176 Boolean Event - No. of starts> ✓ ✓
177 Boolean Event - Just one start possible ✓ ✓
178 Boolean Event - Motor operating hours > ✓ ✓
179 Boolean Event - Motor stop time > ✓ ✓
180 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 1 ✓ ✓
181 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 2 ✓ ✓
182 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 3 ✓ ✓
183 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 4 ✓ ✓
184 Boolean Event - External fault 1 ✓ ✓
185 Boolean Event - External fault 2 ✓ ✓
186 Boolean Event - External fault 3 ✓ ✓
187 Boolean Event - External fault 4 ✓ ✓
188 Boolean Event - External fault 5 ✓ ✓
189 Boolean Event - External fault 6 ✓ ✓
191 Boolean Event - Module-FW update active ✓ ✓
192 Boolean Event - AM1 open circuit ✓ —
193 Boolean Event - DM-F safety-related tripping ✓ —
194 Boolean Event - Monitoring interval for mandato‐ ✓ —
ry testing - test required
195 Boolean Event - Time set (NTP) ✓ ✓
196 - -
197 Boolean Event - Time synchronized (NTP) ✓ ✓
198 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL o.k. ✓ —
199 Boolean Event - DM-F PROFIsafe active ✓ —
200 Boolean Event - Configured operation panel missing ✓ ✓
201 Boolean Event - Module not supported ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 203
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

202 Boolean Event - No module voltage ✓ ✓
204 Boolean Event - Memory module read in ✓ ✓
205 Boolean Event - Memory module programmed ✓ ✓
206 Boolean Event - Memory module cleared ✓ ✓
208 Boolean Event - Initialization module read in ✓ ✓
209 Boolean Event - Initialization module programmed ✓ ✓
210 Boolean Event - Initialization module cleared ✓ ✓
212 Boolean Event - Parameter blocking during start-up ✓ ✓
active
213 Boolean Event - Parameter changes not allowed in ✓ ✓
the current operating state
214 Boolean Event - Device does not support the re‐ ✓ ✓
quired functions
215 Boolean Event - Wrong parameter ✓ ✓
216 Boolean Event - Wrong password ✓ ✓
217 Boolean Event - Password protection active ✓ ✓
218 Boolean Event - Factory settings ✓ ✓
219 Boolean Event - Parameter setting active ✓ ✓
220 Unsigned Event - Prm error number ✓ ✓
byte
228 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL configuration mode ✓ —
229 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL - actual configuration ✓ —
and desired configuration different
230 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL waiting for start-up ✓ —
test
231 Boolean Event - DM-F incorrect PROFIsafe address ✓ —
or incorrect PROFIsafe parameter
232 Boolean Event - Initialization Module write protec‐ ✓ ✓
ted, parameter changes not allowed
233 Boolean Event - Memory module write-protected ✓ ✓
234 Boolean Event - Initialization module write-protec‐ ✓ ✓
ted
235 Boolean Event - Initialization module identification ✓ ✓
data write-protected
Diagnostic warnings (1)
236 Boolean Warning - Prewarning overload (I>115%Is) ✓ ✓
237 Boolean Warning - Unbalance ✓ ✓
238 Boolean Warning - Overload ✓ ✓
239 Boolean Warning - Overload + loss of phase ✓ ✓
240 Boolean Warning - Internal ground fault ✓ ✓
241 Boolean Warning - External ground fault ✓ ✓
243 Boolean Warning - Thermistor trip level ✓ ✓
244 Boolean Warning - Thermistor short circuit ✓ ✓
245 Boolean Warning - Thermistor open circuit ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

204 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Table 3-46 Node IDs (2)

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

Diagnostic warnings (2)
246 Boolean Warning - TM1 warning level T> ✓ ✓
248 Boolean Warning - TM1 sensor fault ✓ ✓
249 Boolean Warning - TM1 out of range ✓ ✓
250 Boolean Warning - EM Open Circuit ✓ ✓
251 Boolean Warning - EM Short Circuit ✓ ✓
252 Boolean Warning - Warning level I> ✓ ✓
253 Boolean Warning - Warning level I< ✓ ✓
254 Boolean Warning - Warning level P> ✓ ✓
255 Boolean Warning - Warning level P< ✓ ✓
256 Boolean Warning - Warning level cos phi< ✓ ✓
257 Boolean Warning - Warning level U< ✓ ✓
258 Boolean Warning - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
259 Boolean Warning - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
260 Boolean Warning - Stalled rotor ✓ ✓
263 Boolean Warning - No start possible ✓ ✓
264 Boolean Warning - No. of starts> ✓ ✓
265 Boolean Warning - Just one start possible ✓ ✓
266 Boolean Warning - Motor operating hours > ✓ ✓
267 Boolean Warning - Motor stop time > ✓ ✓
268 Boolean Warning - External fault 1 ✓ ✓
269 Boolean Warning - External fault 2 ✓ ✓
270 Boolean Warning - External fault 3 ✓ ✓
271 Boolean Warning - External fault 4 ✓ ✓
272 Boolean Warning - External fault 5 ✓ ✓
273 Boolean Warning - External fault 6 ✓ ✓
276 Boolean Warning - AM1 open circuit ✓ ✓
277 Boolean Warning - Safety-related tripping ✓ ✓
278 Boolean Warning - Test required ✓ ✓
282 Boolean Warning - Feedback circuit ✓ ✓
283 Boolean Warning - Simultaneity ✓ ✓
Diagnostic trips
284 Boolean Trip - Hardware fault basic unit ✓ ✓
285 Boolean Trip - Module fault ✓ ✓
286 Boolean Trip - Temporary components ✓ ✓
287 Boolean Trip - Configuration fault ✓ ✓
288 Boolean Trip - Parameterization ✓ ✓
289 Boolean Trip - Bus ✓ ✓
290 Boolean Trip - PLC/DCS ✓ ✓
292 Boolean Trip - Execution on-command ✓ ✓
293 Boolean Trip - Execution stop command ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 205
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

294 Boolean Trip - Feedback on ✓ ✓
295 Boolean Trip - Feedback off ✓ ✓
296 Boolean Trip - Stalled positioner ✓ ✓
297 Boolean Trip - Double 0 ✓ ✓
298 Boolean Trip - Double 1 ✓ ✓
299 Boolean Trip - End position ✓ ✓
300 Boolean Trip - Antivalence ✓ ✓
301 Boolean Trip - Test position feedback (TPF) ✓ ✓
302 Boolean Trip - Power failure (UVO) ✓ ✓
303 Boolean Trip - Operational Protection OFF (OPO) ✓ ✓
309 Boolean Trip - Unbalance ✓ ✓
310 Boolean Trip - Overload ✓ ✓
311 Boolean Trip - Overload + loss of phase ✓ ✓
312 Boolean Trip - Internal ground fault ✓ ✓
313 Boolean Trip - External ground fault ✓ ✓
315 Boolean Trip - Thermistor trip level ✓ ✓
316 Boolean Trip - Thermistor short circuit ✓ ✓
317 Boolean Trip - Thermistor open circuit ✓ ✓
319 Boolean Trip - TM1 trip level T> ✓ ✓
320 Boolean Trip - TM1 sensor fault ✓ ✓
321 Boolean Trip - TM1 out of range ✓ ✓
322 Boolean Trip - EM Open Circuit ✓ ✓
323 Boolean Trip - EM Short Circuit ✓ ✓
324 Boolean Trip - Trip level I> ✓ ✓
325 Boolean Trip - Trip level I< ✓ ✓
326 Boolean Trip - Trip level P> ✓ ✓
327 Boolean Trip - Trip level P< ✓ ✓
328 Boolean Trip - Trip level cos phi< ✓ ✓
329 Boolean Trip - Trip level U< ✓ ✓
330 Boolean Trip - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
331 Boolean Trip - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
332 Boolean Trip - Stalled rotor ✓ ✓
336 Boolean Trip - No. of starts > ✓ ✓
340 Boolean Trip - External fault 1 ✓ ✓
341 Boolean Trip - External fault 2 ✓ ✓
342 Boolean Trip - External fault 3 ✓ ✓
343 Boolean Trip - External fault 4 ✓ ✓
344 Boolean Trip - External fault 5 ✓ ✓
345 Boolean Trip - External fault 6 ✓ ✓
346 Boolean Trip - Dry running pump ✓ —
347 Boolean Trip - Dry-running protection error ✓ —
348 Boolean Trip - AM1 open circuit ✓ ✓
349 Boolean Trip - Test shutdown ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

206 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

350 Boolean Trip - Safety-related tripping ✓ ✓
351 Boolean Trip - Wiring ✓ ✓
352 Boolean Trip - Cross circuit ✓ ✓
356 Boolean Trip - TM2 trip level T> ✓ ✓
357 Boolean Trip - TM2 sensor fault ✓ ✓
358 Boolean Trip - TM2 out of range ✓ ✓
364 Boolean Trip - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
365 Boolean Trip - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
372 Boolean Trip - AM2 open circuit ✓ ✓
Diagnostic warnings
388 Boolean Warning - TM2 warning level T> ✓ ✓
390 Boolean Warning - TM2 sensor fault ✓ ✓
391 Boolean Warning - TM2 out of range ✓ ✓
396 Boolean Warning - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
397 Boolean Warning - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
404 Boolean Warning - AM2 open circuit ✓ ✓
Diagnostic events
420 Boolean Event - TM2 warning level T> ✓ ✓
421 Boolean Event - TM2 trip level T> ✓ ✓
422 Boolean Event - TM2 sensor fault ✓ ✓
423 Boolean Event - TM2 out of range ✓ ✓
428 Boolean Event - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
429 Boolean Event - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
430 Boolean Event - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA> ✓ ✓
431 Boolean Event - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA< ✓ ✓
432 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 5 ✓ ✓
433 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 6 ✓ ✓
444 Boolean Event - AM2 open circuit ✓ ✓
Acyclic send
450 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.0 ✓ ✓
451 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.1 ✓ ✓
452 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.2 ✓ ✓
453 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.3 ✓ ✓
454 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.4 ✓ ✓
455 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.5 ✓ ✓
456 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.6 ✓ ✓
457 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.7 ✓ ✓
458 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.0 ✓ ✓
459 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.1 ✓ ✓
460 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.2 ✓ ✓
461 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.3 ✓ ✓
462 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.4 ✓ ✓
463 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.5 ✓ ✓

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 207
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Node ID Data type Description Unit GG3 GG3 GP

464 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.6 ✓ ✓
465 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.7 ✓ ✓
Measured values
466 Float Apparent power S 1 VA ✓ —
467 Float Phase voltage UL1-N 1V ✓ —
468 Float Phase voltage UL2-N 1V ✓ —
469 Float Phase voltage UL3-N 1V ✓ —
470 Float Power factor (cos phi) ✓ —
471 Float Frequency 1 Hz ✓ —

1) S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0; 20 mA = 27648

2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model": Value always related to symmetrical trip level,
representation in steps of 2% in bits 6 ...0 (range 0 to 254%), bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed
level 50%)
3) Representation in Kelvin

3.4.1.2 Abbreviations and specifications

Abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 3-47 Table specifications (example)

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)
Max. current Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is
I_max
*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
Parameters that can be changed during operation.

Event - PRM error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) that caused
the error is communicated here.

%\WH%LW 'HVLJQDWLRQ

350 JURXS
5HVHUYHG
'HYLFH FRQILJXUDWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU JURXS

Figure 3-4 Example for parameter group

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

208 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.1.3 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these
assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write them
back.

Table 3-48 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected
1 Fixed level value,0
2 Fixed level value,1
3 Reserved
4 Events – Level monitoring Event – Warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM2
5 Events – Level monitoring Event – Warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM2
6 Event – Trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM2
7 Event – Trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM2
8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test / Reset button
9 BU - Input 1
10 BU - Input 2
11 BU - Input 3
12 BU - Input 4
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1
18 DM1 - Input 3 DM1
19 DM1 - Input 4 DM1
20 DM2 - Input 1 DM2
21 DM2 - Input 2 DM2
22 DM2 - Input 3 DM2
23 DM2 - Input 4 DM2
24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL
25 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y22 DM-FL
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Events - Protection Event – TM2 sensor fault TM2
29 Event – TM2 out of range TM2
30 Event – TM2 warning T> TM2
31 Event – TM2 trip T> TM2
32 Operator panel OP / OPD OP – Test / Reset button OP, OPD
33 OP – Button 1 OP, OPD
34 OP – Button 2 OP, OPD
35 OP – Button 3 OP, OPD

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 209
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

36 OP – Button 4 OP, OPD
37 Reserved
38 Events – Limit 5+6 Event – Limit 5
39 Event – Limit 6
40 PC / OPC UA [OCM] Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.0
41 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.1
42 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.2
43 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.3
44 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.4
45 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.5
46 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.6
47 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.7
48 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.0
49 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.1
50 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.2
51 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.3
52 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.4
53 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.5
54 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.6
55 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.7
56 PLC/PCS interface PLC [PN] (cyclic data) Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.0
57 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.1
58 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.2
59 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.3
60 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.4
61 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.5
62 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.6
63 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.7
64 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.0
65 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.1
66 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.2
67 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.3
68 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.4
69 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.5
70 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.6
71 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.7
72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<< Dependent on the con‐
73 Enabled control command ON< trol function
74 Enabled control command - OFF
75 Enabled control command ON>
76 Enabled control command ON>>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

210 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

79 Reserved
80 Contactor controls Contactor controls 1 QE1 Dependent on the con‐
81 Contactor controls 2 QE2 trol function
82 Contactor controls 3 QE3
83 Contactor controls 4 QE4
84 Contactor controls 5 QE5
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<<(ON<<) Dependent on the con‐
89 Display - QLE<(ON<) trol function
90 Indication - QLA (OFF)
91 Display - QLE>(ON>)
92 Display - QLE>>(ON>>)
93 Display - QLS (fault)
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status information - General Status - General fault
97 Status - General warning
98 Status - Device
99 Status - Bus
100 Status - PLC/PCS
101 Status - Current flowing IM UM(+)
102 Status – PE command Start_Pause pending
103 Reserved
104 Status information - Receive Status - ON<< Dependent on the con‐
105 Status - ON< trol function
106 Status - Off
107 Status - ON>
108 Status - ON>>
109 Status - Start active
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta starter, Dah‐
lander starter, pole-
changing starter
112 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the con‐
113 Status - Runs in close direction trol function
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold start (TPF)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 211
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

119 Status - OPO
120 Status - Remote mode
121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM(+)
122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM(+)
123 Status - Pause time active IM UM(+)
124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device test active
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM(+)
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM(+)
127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM(+)
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM(+)
130 Event - Overload IM UM(+)
131 Event - overload + phase failure IM UM(+)
132 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM(+)
133 Event - External ground fault EM
134 Event - Warning ext. ground fault EM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM1 warning T> TM1
139 Event - TM1 trip T> TM1
140 Event - TM1 sensor fault TM
141 Event - TM1 out of range TM
142 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+
143 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM(+)
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM(+)
146 Event - Warning P> UM(+)
147 Event - Warning P< UM(+)
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM(+)
149 Event - Warning U< UM(+)
150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM1
151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM1
152 Event - Trip I> IM UM(+)
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM(+)
154 Event - Trip P> UM(+)
155 Event - Trip P< UM(+)
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM(+)
157 Event - Trip U< UM(+)
158 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1
159 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1
160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM(+)
161 Events - Protection Event - Warning internal ground fault

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

212 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

162 Reserved
163 Event - No start permitted
164 Events - Level monitoring Event - No. of starts >
165 Event - Just one start possible
166 Event - Motor operating hours >
167 Event - Motor stop time >
168 Event - Limit 1
169 Event - Limit 2
170 Event - Limit 3
171 Event - Limit 4
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1
173 Event - External fault 2
174 Event - External fault 3
175 Event - External fault 4
176 Event - External fault 5
177 Event - External fault 6
178 Reserved
179 Event - AM2 open circuit AM2
180 Event - AM1 open circuit AM1, AM2
181 Event - DM-F safety-related tripping DM-F
182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
183 Reserved
184 Reserved
185 Reserved
186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL
187 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing
189 Reserved
190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F
191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL
192 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit
193 Fault - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM)
194 Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory mod‐
ule)
195 Fault - Configuration error
196 Fault - Parameterization
197 Fault - Bus
198 Fault - PLC/PCS
199 Fault - Dry running pump UM+ TL
200 Faults - Control Fault - Execution Time ON Not for overload relays
201 Fault - Execution Time OFF
202 Fault - Feedback (FB) ON
203 Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 213
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

204 Fault - Stalled positioner Positioner
205 Fault - Double 0 Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
206 Fault - Double 1 Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
207 Fault - End position Solenoid valve / posi‐
tioner
208 Fault - Antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Cold run (TPF) error
210 Fault - power failure (UVO)
211 Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Freely programmable elements Signal conditioning 5 output
215 Signal conditioning 6 output
216 Truth table 1 3I/1O output
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output
220 Truth table 5 3I/1O output
221 Truth table 6 3I/1O output
222 Truth table 7 2I/1O output
223 Truth table 8 2I/1O output
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2
226 Truth table 10 3I/1O output
227 Truth table 11 3I/1O output
228 Counter 5 output
229 Counter 6 output
230 Timer 5 output
231 Timer 6 output
232 Timer 1 output
233 Timer 2 output
234 Timer 3 output
235 Timer 4 output
236 Counter 1 output
237 Counter 2 output
238 Counter 3 output
239 Counter 4 output
240 Signal conditioning 1 output
241 Signal conditioning 2 output
242 Signal conditioning 3 output
243 Signal conditioning 4 output

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

214 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Designation Information

244 Non-volatile element 1 output
245 Non-volatile element 2 output
246 Non-volatile element 3 output
247 Non-volatile element 4 output
248 Flashing 1 output
249 Flashing 2 output
250 Flashing 3 output
251 Flicker 1 output
252 Flicker 2 output
253 Flicker 3 output
254 PWM output
255 Reserved

3.4.1.4 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these
assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and write them
back. All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In order to also
be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies: The byte value is processed as a
low byte, the high byte is always 0.

Table 3-49 Socket assignment table - analog

No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected
1 Fixed level
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms
5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms
6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms
7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms
8 Counter 1 - Actual value
9 Counter 2 - Actual value
10 Counter 3 - Actual value
11 Counter 4 - Actual value
12 Counter 5 - Actual value
13 Counter 6 - Actual value
14 Timer 5 - Actual value 100 ms
15 Timer 6 - Actual value 100 ms
16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM(+)
17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM(+)
18 Current I_L2 1 % / Is IM UM(+)
19 Current I_L3 1 % / Is IM UM(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 215
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Unit Information

20 Phase unbalance 1% IM UM(+)
21 Ground-fault current 1 mA UM+
22 Internal ground fault - last trip current 1 mA UM+
23 Voltage U_min 1V UM(+)
24 Voltage U_L1 1 V see 2) UM(+)
25 Voltage U_L2 1 V see 2) UM(+)
26 Voltage U_L3 1 V see 2) UM(+)
27 Cos phi 1% UM(+)
28 Frequency 0.01 Hz UM+
29 Reserved
30 Number of overload trips IM UM(+)
31 Int. Number of overload trips IM UM(+)
32 Thermal motor model 2% IM UM(+)
33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM(+)
34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM(+)
35 Last trip current 1 % / Is IM UM(+)
36 TM1 - max. temperature 1K TM1
37 TM1 - temperature 1 1K TM1
38 TM1 - temperature 2 1K TM1
39 TM1 - temperature 3 1K TM1
40 Permissible starts - Actual value
41 Motor stop time 1h
42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F
43 EM+ - last trip current 1 mA EM+
44 AM1 - input 1 See 1) AM1
45 AM1 - input 2 See 1) AM1
46 AM1 - input 3 See 1)
47 EM+ - ground fault current 1 mA
48 Acyclic receive data - analog value
49 Cyclic receive data - analog value 1
50 Cyclic receive data - analog value 2
51 Number of parameterizations
52 Motor operating hours - H word 1s
53 Motor operating hours - L word 1s
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word 1s
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word 1s
56 Device operating hours - H word 1s
57 Device operating hours - L word 1s
58 Number of starts - H word
59 Number of starts - L word
60 Int. number of starts CW - H word
61 Int. number of starts CW - L word
62 Int. number of starts CCW - H word

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

216 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Unit Information

63 Int. number of starts CCW - L word
64 Energy W - high word 1 kWh UM(+)
65 Energy W - low word 1 kWh UM(+)
66 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Active power P - H word 1W
71 Active power P - L word 1W
72 Apparent power S - H word 1 VA
73 Apparent power S - L word 1 VA
74 Reserved
.. Reserved
85 Reserved
86 Calculation module 1 - Output
87 Reserved
88 Reserved
89 Reserved
90 Calculation module 2 - Output
91 Analog arithmetic 1 output
92 Analog arithmetic 2 output
93 Analog multiplexer output
94 Reserved
.. Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Max. current I_max_10mA 10 mA UM(+) IM
105 Current I_L1_10mA 10 mA UM(+) IM
106 Current I_L2_10mA 10 mA UM(+) IM
107 Current I_L3_10mA 10 mA UM(+) IM
108 Max. current I_max_100mA 100 mA UM(+) IM
109 Current I_L1_100mA 100 mA UM(+) IM
110 Current I_L2_100mA 100 mA UM(+) IM
111 Current I_L3_100mA 100 mA UM(+) IM
112 Reserved
113 Reserved
114 Reserved
115 Reserved
116 TM2 - max. temperature 1K TM2
117 TM2 - temperature 1 1K TM2
118 TM2 - temperature 2 1K TM2
119 TM2 - temperature 3 1K TM2
120 AM2 - input 1 AM2
121 AM2 - input 2 AM2
122 AM2 - input 3 AM2

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 217
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

No. Designation Unit Information

123 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved

1) S7 format: 0/4mA=0; 20mA=27648

2) If "line-to-line voltage = 1," "Voltage U_Lx" contain the line-to-line voltages

Table 3-50 Socket assignment table - analog in float format

No. Designation Unit Info

0 Not connected
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Current I_max_A_F 1A UM+
5 Current I_avg_A_F 1A UM+
6 Current I_L1_A_F 1A UM+
7 Current I_L2_A_F 1A UM+
8 Current I_L3_A_F 1A UM+
9 Active power P_F 1W UM+
10 Apparent power S_F 1 VA UM+
11 Voltage UL1_F 1V UM+
12 Voltage UL2_F 1V UM+
13 Voltage UL3_F 1V UM+
14 Cos phi_F 1 UM+
15 Frequency_F 1 Hz UM+
16 Reserved
... Reserved
49 Reserved
50 Active power Pa_F 1) 1W V2.1 UM+
51 Active power Pb_F 1)
1W V2.1 UM+
52 Reserved
... Reserved
255 Reserved

1) When replacing the current/voltage acquisition module (UM+), you must check the sign (+,
-).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

218 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2 PROFINET data records

3.4.2.1 PROFINET data records - general

Data records - overview

Table 3-51 Data records - overview

Data record Length Description Read / write

No. [byte]
63 200 Analog value recording (Page 221) Read
67 10 Process image output (Page 222) Read
69 30 Process image input (Page 222) Read
72 126 Error buffer (Page 223) Read
73 168 Event memory (Page 224) Read
92 46 Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, status informa‐ Read
tion) (Page 224)
94 172 Measured values (Page 233) Read
95 148 Service / statistical data (Page 234) Read / write
130 92 Basic device parameters 1 (Page 236) Read / write
131 124 Basic device parameters 2 (Page 244) Read / write
132 144 Extended device parameters 1 (Page 247) Read / write
133 100 Extended device parameters 2 (Page 255) Read / write
134 180 Extended device parameters 1 (Page 257) Read / write
135 114 Extended device parameters 2 (Page 263) Read / write
139 200 Labeling (Page 266) Read / write
140 200 Labeling 2 (Page 267) Read / write
165 168 Marking (Page 267) Read / write
224 24 Password protection (Page 268) Write
231 I&M0 - device information (Page 269) Read
232 I&M1 - equipment identifier (Page 269) Read / write
233 I&M2 - installation (Page 270) Read / write
234 I&M3 - description (Page 271) Read / write

Writing / reading data records

Access to data records via the slot and index

• Index: Data record number

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 219
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Writing / reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records: By calling SFB 53 "WR_REC"
• Reading data records: By calling SFB 52 "RD_REC"
Further information
You can find additional information about the SFBs
• in System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions reference manual
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574)
• In the STEP7 online help

Byte arrangements
When data longer than one byte is stored, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

%\WH DUUDQJHPHQW 'DWD W\SH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

+LJK ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH
'RXEOH ZRUG 'ZRUG
%\WH +LJK E\WH
/RZ ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

:RUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH %\WH
%\WH
%\WH %\WH

Figure 3-5 Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

Abbreviations
See SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

220 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 3-52 Table specifications (example)

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)

Max. current I_max Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is

*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.

Parameters that can be changed during operation.

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.

"Float" data type

32-bit floating-point number
S: Sign (0 = positive; 1 = negative)
E: Exponent
M: Mantissa

3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S E: Exponent + 127 (8 bits) M: Mantissa (23 bits)

3.4.2.2 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

You can read out the data of the "Analog value recording" function stored in the device.

Table 3-53 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1
3.0 Analog value record currently run‐ Bit 0, 1
ning
3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 - 65535
6.0 Measured value (1) Word 0 - 65535
...
122.0 Measured value (59) Word 0 - 65535
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 221
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value. You will find all
available analog values with their units in Chapter Socket assignment table - analog (Page 215).

3.4.2.3 Data record 67 - Process image output

Table 3-54 Data record 67 - Process image output

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Informa‐

tion
0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON< Bit
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
1.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 Cyclic receive - analog value 1 Not assigned Word
4.0 Cyclic receive - analog value 2 Not assigned Word
6.0 Reserved Bytes[4]

3.4.2.4 Data record 69 - Process image input

Table 3-55 Data record 69 - Process image input

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type

0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - Off Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

222 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type

1.2 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/PCS analog Input 1 PLC / PCS ana‐ Max. current I_max Word Float
4.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 log FI input 1 Not assigned Word
6.0 PLC/PCS analog input 3 PLC / PCS ana‐ Not assigned Word Float
8.0 PLC/PCS analog input 4 log FI input 2 Not assigned Word
10.0 PLC/PCS analog input 5 PLC / PCS ana‐ Not assigned Word Float
12.0 PLC/PCS analog input 6 log FI input 3 Not assigned Word
14.0 PLC/PCS analog input 7 PLC / PCS ana‐ Not assigned Word Float
16.0 PLC/PCS analog input 8 log FI input 4 Not assigned Word
18.0 PLC/PCS analog input 9 Unassigned Word
20.0 Reserved Bytes[
10]

3.4.2.5 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Table 3-56 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word
4.0 Type Byte
5.0 Error number Byte
6.0 2 Time stamp D-word
10.0 Type Byte
11.0 Error number Byte
...
120.0 21 Time stamp D-word
124.0 Type Byte
125.0 Error number Byte

Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).

Type/error number
You will find the mean in Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 224) in column "Error
number" of table "Data record 92 - Device diagnostics."
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - On". In this case, the error number
contains the number of power ON operations, reduced by 1 (0 = 1x power ON, ...).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 223
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2.6 Data record 73 - Event memory

Table 3-57 Data record 73 - Event memory

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word
4.0 Entry - Type Byte
5.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
8.0 2 Time stamp D-word
12.0 Entry - Type Byte
13.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
16.0 3 Time stamp D-word
20.0 Entry - Type Byte
21.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
...
160.0 21 Time stamp D-word
164.0 Entry - Type Byte
165.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]

3.4.2.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Table 3-58 Data record 92 - Diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status informa‐ Status - General fault
tion - General
1.1 Status - General warning
1.2 Status - Device
1.3 Status - Bus
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS
1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM(+)
1.6 Reserved
1.7 Reserved
2.0 Status informa‐ Status - ON<< Dependent on
tion - Receive the control
2.1 Status - ON< function
2.2 Status - Off
2.3 Status - ON>
2.4 Status - ON>>
2.5 Status - Start active

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

224 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing
starters and
positioners
2.7 Status - Change-over pause ac‐ Star-delta
tive starter, Dah‐
lander starter,
pole-changing
starter
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on
3.1 Status - Runs in close direction the control
function
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) 1 0x1009
3.7 Status - OPO
4.0 Status - Auto mode
4.1 Status informa‐ Status - Emergency start execu‐ IM UM(+) 1 0x1031
tion - Protection ted
4.2 Status - Cooling down period IM UM(+) 1 0x1032
active
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM(+)
4.4 Status informa‐ Status - Device check active
tion - Miscellane‐
ous
4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM(+)
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM(+)
4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
5.0 Events - Protec‐ Event - Overload operation IM UM(+)
tion
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM(+)
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM(+)
5.3 Event - Overload + loss of phase IM UM(+)
5.4 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM(+)
5.5 Event - External ground fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning ext. ground EM
fault
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM1 warning T> TM1
6.3 Event - TM1 trip T> TM1
6.4 Event - TM1 sensor fault TM1

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 225
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
6.5 Event - TM1 out of range TM
6.6 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+ 1)
6.7 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 1)
7.0 Events - Level Event - Warning I> IM UM(+)
monitoring
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM(+)
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM(+)
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM(+)
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM(+)
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM(+)
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM1
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM1
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM(+)
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM(+)
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM(+)
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM(+)
8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM(+)
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM(+)
8.6 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1
8.7 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1
9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM(+)
9.1 Events - Protec‐ Warning - Internal ground fault UM+
tion
9.2 Reserved
9.3 Events - Level Event - No start possible
monitoring
9.4 Event - No. of starts >
9.5 Event - Just one start possible
9.6 Event - Motor operating hours >
9.7 Event - Motor stop time >
10.0 Event - Limit 1
10.1 Event - Limit 2
10.2 Event - Limit 3
10.3 Event - Limit 4
10.4 Events - Miscella‐ Event - ext. fault 1
neous
10.5 Event - ext. fault 2
10.6 Event - ext. fault 3
10.7 Event - ext. fault 4
11.0 Event - ext. fault 5
11.1 Event - ext. fault 6

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

226 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
11.2 Events - FW up‐ Event - BU FW update active
date
11.3 Event - Module FW update ac‐
tive
11.4 Events - Miscella‐ Event - AM1 open circuit AM1
neous
11.5 Event - DM-F safety-related trip‐ DM-F
ping
11.6 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
11.7 Event - NTP clock set
12.0 Events - Time‐ Event - Timestamping function
stamping func‐ active + OK
tion
12.1 Events - Miscella‐ Event - NTP clock synchronized
neous
12.2 Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL
12.3 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
12.4 Events - System Event - Configured operator
interfaces panel missing
12.5 Event - Module not supported
12.6 Event - No module voltage
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Events - Memory Event - Memory module read in
module / initializa‐
tion module
13.1 Event - Memory module pro‐
grammed
13.2 Event - Memory module cleared
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Event - Initialization module
read in
13.5 Event - Initialization module
programmed
13.6 Event - Initialization module
cleared
13.7 Reserved
14.0 Events - parame‐ Event - Start-up parameter ***)
terization block active
14.1 Event - Parameter changes not 1 0x0010
allowed in the current operat‐
ing state
14.2 Event - Device does not support 1 0x0010
the required functions
14.3 Event - Wrong parameter 1 0x0010

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 227
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
14.4 Event - Wrong password 1 0x0010
14.5 Event - Password protection ac‐
tive
14.6 Event - Factory settings
14.7 Event - Parameterization active
15.0 Event - PRM error number
(bytes) ****)
16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration
mode
16.1 Event - DM-FL configuration de‐
viation
16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-
up test
16.3 Event - DM-FP F-Prm error *) 3 0x0010
16.4 Event - Initialization module 1 0x0010
write-protected, parameter
changes not allowed
16.5 Events - Memory Event - Memory module write-
module - initiali‐ protected
zation mod‐
ule (InM)
16.6 Event - Initialization module
write-protected
16.7 Event - Initialization module
identification data write-protec‐
ted
17.0 Warnings - Protec‐ Warning - Overload operation IM UM(+) 2 0x1020
tion
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM(+) 2 0x1021
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM(+) 2 0x1022
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase fail‐ IM UM(+) 2 0x1023
ure
17.4 Warning - Internal ground fault IM UM(+) 2 0x1027
17.5 Warning - External ground fault EM 2 0x1028
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th 2 0x1024
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short cir‐ Th 2 0x1025
cuit
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open cir‐ Th 2 0x1026
cuit
18.2 Warning - TM1 warning T > TM1 2 0x102B
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM1 sensor fault TM1 2 0x102C
18.5 Warning - TM1 out of range TM1 2 0x102D

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

228 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
18.6 Warning - EM+ open circuit EM+ 1) 2 0x1029
18.7 Warning - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 1) 2 0x102A
19.0 Warnings - Level Warning - Warning I> IM UM(+) 2 0x1040
monitoring
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM(+) 2 0x1041
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM(+) 2 0x1042
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM(+) 2 0x1043
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM(+) 2 0x1045
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM(+) 2 0x1047
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM1 2 0x1048
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM1 2 0x1049
20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM(+) 2 0x104C
20.1 Reserved bit [2]
20.3 Warning - No start possible 2 0x1056
20.4 Warning - Number of starts > 2 0x1057
20.5 Warning - Just one start possi‐ 2 0x1058
ble
20.6 Warning - Motor operating 2 0x1059
hours>
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > 2 0x105A
21.0 Warnings - Miscel‐ Warning - ext. fault 1 2 0x1070
laneous
21.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 2 0x1071
21.2 Warning - ext. fault 3 2 0x1072
21.3 Warning - ext. fault 4 2 0x1073
21.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 2 0x1074
21.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 2 0x1075
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - AM1 open circuit AM1 2 0x105B
22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related DM-F 2 0x0019
tripping
22.2 Warning - DM-F test require‐ DM-F 2 0x105E
ment
22.3 Reserved bit[3]
22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F 2 0x105F
22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL 2 0x1060
23.0 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit 3 0x0009 0
23.1 Fault - Module fault (e.g. mod‐ 3 0x0009 1
ule IM, UM, DM)
23.2 Fault - Temporary components 3 0x0009 2
(e.g. memory module)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 229
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
23.3 Fault - Configuration fault 3 0x0010 3
23.4 Fault - Parameterization 3 0x0010 4
23.5 Fault - Bus 5
23.6 Fault - PLC/PCS 6
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults - Control Fault - Execution ON command 3 0x1000 8
24.1 Fault - Execution STOP com‐ 3 0x1001 9
mand
24.2 Fault - FB ON 3 0x1002 10
24.3 Fault - FB OFF 3 0x1003 11
24.4 Fault - Stalled positioner CF = positioner 3 0x1004 12
24.5 Fault - Double 0 CF = positioner 3 0x1005 13
24.6 Fault - Double 1 CF = positioner 3 0x1006 14
24.7 Fault - End position CF = positioner 3 0x1007 15
25.0 Fault - Antivalence CF = positioner 3 0x1008 16
25.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) fault 3 0x100A 17
25.2 Fault - UVO fault 3 0x100B 18
25.3 Fault - OPO fault 3 0x100C 19
25.4 Reserved bit[4]
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Fault - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM UM(+) 3 0x1021 25
26.2 Fault - Overload IM UM(+) 3 0x1022 26
26.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM UM(+) 3 0x1023 27
26.4 Fault - Int. ground fault IM UM(+) 3 0x1027 28
26.5 Fault - Ext. ground fault EM 3 0x1028 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th 3 0x1024 31
27.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th 3 0x1025 32
27.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th 3 0x1026 33
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Fault - TM1 trip T> TM1 3 0x102B 35
27.4 Fault - TM1 sensor fault TM1 3 0x102C 36
27.5 Fault - TM1 out of range TM1 3 0x102D 37
27.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit EM+ 3 0x1029
27.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 3 0x102A
28.0 Faults - Level Fault - Trip I> IM UM(+) 3 0x1040 40
monitoring
28.1 Fault - Trip I< IM UM(+) 3 0x1041 41
28.2 Fault - Trip P> UM(+) 3 0x1042 42
28.3 Fault - Trip P< UM(+) 3 0x1043 43
28.4 Fault - Trip cos phi< UM(+) 3 0x1045 44

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

230 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
28.5 Fault - Trip U< UM(+) 3 0x1047 45
28.6 Fault - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1 3 0x1048 46
28.7 Fault - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1 3 0x1049 47
29.0 Fault - Stalled rotor IM UM(+) 3 0x104C 48
29.1 Reserved bit[3]
29.4 Fault - Number of starts > 3 0x1057 52
29.5 Reserved bit[3]
30.0 Faults - Miscella‐ Fault - External fault 1 3 0x1070 56
neous
30.1 Fault - External fault 2 3 0x1071 57
30.2 Fault - External fault 3 3 0x1072 58
30.3 Fault - External fault 4 3 0x1073 59
30.4 Fault - External fault 5 3 0x1074 60
30.5 Fault - External fault 6 3 0x1075 61
30.6 Fault - Dry running pump 3 0x104D 62
30.7 Fault - Dry-running protection - 3 0x104E 63
Error
31.0 Fault - AM1 open circuit AM1 3 0x105B 64
31.1 Fault - Test trip 3 0x1055 65
31.2 Fault - DM-F safety-related trip‐ DM-F 3 0x0019 66
ping
31.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-FL 3 0x1061 67
31.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL 3 0x1062 68
31.5 Reserved bit[3]
32.0 Faults - Protection Fault - TM2 trip T > TM2 3 0x102E
extended
32.1 Fault - TM2 sensor fault TM2 3 0x102F
32.2 Fault - TM2 out of range TM2 3 0x1030
32.3 Reserved bit[5]
33.0 Faults - Level Fault - Trip 0/4-20mA > AM2 3 0x104A
monitoring exten‐
ded
33.1 Fault - Trip 0/4-20mA < AM2 3 0x104B
33.2 Reserved bit[6]
34.0 Faults - Miscella‐ Fault - AM2 open circuit AM2 3 0x105C
neous extended
34.1 Reserved bit[7]
35.0 Reserved bit[8]
36.0 Warnings - Protec‐ Warning - TM2 warning T > TM2 2 0x102E
tion extended
36.1 Reserved
36.2 Warning - TM2 sensor fault TM2 2 0x102F

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 231
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO diag‐ PNIO error Error no.

nostic sta‐ num‐
tus **) ber (channel
error type)
36.3 Warning - TM2 out of range TM2 2 0x1030
36.4 Reserved bit[4]
37.0 Warnings - Level Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA > AM2 2 0x104A
monitoring exten‐
ded
37.1 Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA < AM2 2 0x104B
37.2 Reserved bit[6]
38.0 Warnings - Miscel‐ Warning - AM2 open circuit AM2 2 0x105C
laneous extended
38.1 Reserved bit[7]
39.0 Reserved bit[8]
40.0 Events - Protec‐ Event - TM2 warning T> TM2
tion extended
40.1 Event - TM2 trip T> TM2
40.2 Event - TM2 sensor fault TM2
40.3 Event – TM2 out of range TM2
40.4 Reserved bit[4]
41.0 Events - Level Event - Warning 0/4-20mA > AM2
monitoring
41.1 Event - Warning 0/4-20mA < AM2
41.2 Event - Trip 0/4-20mA > 2 AM2
41.3 Event - Trip 0/4-20mA < AM2
41.4 Event - Limit 5 Limit monitor
5
41.5 Event - Limit 6 Limit monitor
6
41.6 Reserved bit[2]
42.0 Reserved bit[8]
43.0 Events - Miscella‐ Event - AM2 open circuit AM2
neous extended
43.1 Reserved bit[7]
44.0 Reserved Bit[16]
45.0 Reserved bit[8]

*) The "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit is not activated; instead, the "SF" LED lights up on the
DM-FP (because PROFIsafe is not active)
**) PNIO diagnostic status for the raised alarm:
• 1 = Maintenance required
• 2 = Maintenance demanded
• 3 = Failure
***) No PNIO diagnostics
****) Events - PRM error number (bytes):

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

232 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2.8 Data record 94 - measured values

Table 3-59 Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 - 255 See 2) IM UM(+)
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% IM UM(+)
6.0 cos phi Byte 0 - 100 1% UM(+)
7.0 Reserved Byte[5]
12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
14.0 Current I_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
16.0 Current I_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
18.0 Current I_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
20.0 Last trip current Word 0 - 65535 1% / Is IM UM(+)
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM(+)
24.0 Cooling down period Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM(+)
26.0 Voltage U_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
28.0 Voltage U_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
30.0 Voltage U_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM(+)
32.0 AM1 - output Word 0 - 32767 See 1)
AM1
34.0 AM1 - input Word 0 - 32767 AM1
36.0 AM1 - input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM1
38.0 Reserved
40.0 TM1 - max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM1
42.0 TM1 - temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
44.0 TM1 - temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
46.0 TM1 - temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
48.0 EM+ 4)
- ground-fault current Word 0 - 65535 EM(+)
50.0 EM+ 4 - last trip current Word 0 - 65535 EM(+)
52.0 Active power P D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1W UM(+)
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM(+)
60.0 Reserved Byte[14]
64.0 Reserved Byte[28]
92.0 Reserved Byte[24]
116.0 AM2 - output Word 0 - 32767 See 1) AM2
118.0 AM2 - input 1 Word 0 - 32767 AM2
120.0 AM2 - input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM2
122.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 233
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

124.0 TM2 - max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM2
126.0 TM2 - temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
128.0 TM2 - temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
130.0 TM2 - temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
132.0 Frequency Word 0 - 65535 0.01 Hz UM+
134.0 Reserved
136.0 res. UM+ ‑ ground-fault current Word UM+
138.0 Internal ground fault+ ‑ res. last UM+
trip current
140.0 Reserved Byte[4]
144.0 Current I_max_F (float) Float 1A UM+
148.0 Current I_avg_F Float 1A UM+
152.0 Current I_L1_F Float 1A UM+
156.0 Current I_L2_F Float 1A UM+
160.0 Current I_L3_F Float 1A UM+
164.0 Active power P_F Float 1W UM+
168.0 Apparent power S_F Float 1 VA UM+
172.0 Voltage U1_F Float 1V UM+
176.0 Voltage U2_F Float 1V UM+
180.0 Voltage U3_F Float 1V UM+
184.0 Cos phi_F Float UM+
188.0 Frequency_F Float 1 Hz UM+
192.0 Reserved Byte[8]

1) S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0; 20 mA = 27648

3.4.2.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.

Additional abbreviations:
• r / w = value can be written / changed
• r = value can only be read

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

234 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Table 3-60 Data record 95 - service data/statistical data

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Permissible starts - Actual value Byte 0 - 255 r 1)
5.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 - 255 1 week r
6.0 Reserved Byte[2]
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 - 65535 r
10.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r/w
12.0 Number of internal overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r
14.0 Motor stop time Word 0 - 65535 1h r/w
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
32.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r
34.0 Calculation module 2 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r
36.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r/w
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r/w
56.0 Internal number of starts CW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r
60.0 Internal number of starts CCW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r
64.0 Consumed energy D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM(+)
68.0 Consumed energy Float 1 kWh r UM+
72.0 Reserved D-word
76.0 Reserved D-word[6]
100.0 Reserved Byte[16]
116.0 Timer 5 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
118.0 Timer 6 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
120.0 Counter 5 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
122.0 Counter 6 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
124.0 Analog arithmetic 1 output Word 0 - 65535 r
126.0 Analog arithmetic 2 output Word 0 - 65535 r
128.0 Analog multiplexer output Word 0 - 65535 r
130.0 FTW converter 1 - output Word 0 - 65535 r
132.0 FTW converter 2 - output Word 0 - 65535 r
134.0 FTW converter 3 - output Word 0 - 65535 r
136.0 Reserved Word[6]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 235
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!

3.4.2.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Table 3-61 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
0.0 Coordination (byte[4] Byt
e
4.0 Device configuration (12)
4.0 Device class Byt 5, 7, 9, 5 = BU1
e 13 7 = BU0
9 = BU2
13 = BU3
5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU
5.1 Reserved Bit[
5]
5.6 Reserved
5.7 Initialization module (InM) Bit 0, 1
6.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1
6.1 Analog module (AM1) Bit 0, 1
6.2 Temperature module (TM1) Bit 0, 1
6.3 Ground-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1
6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[ 0-3 0 = no digital module
2] 1 = monostable
6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[ 0-2 2 = bistable
2]
3 = DM-F (see Byte.Bit 7.4)
7.0 Operator panel with display Bit 0, 1
(OPD)
7.1 Ground-fault module for Bit 0, 1
3UL23 transformer (EM+)
7.2 Analog module 2 (AM2) Bit 0, 1
7.3 Temperature module 2 (TM2) Bit 0, 1
7.4 DM1 - Special type Bit[ 0, 1 0 = DM-FL
2] 1 = DM-FP
7.6 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

236 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
8.0 Current measuring (IM) Bit[ 0 .. 5 IM / UM:
7] 0 = no current measurement
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A

UM+:
9 = 0.3 A - 4 A
10 = 3 A - 40 A
11 = 10 A - 115 A
12 = 20 - 200 A
13 = 63 - 630 A
8.7 Voltage measuring module Bit 0, 1
(UM)
9.0 Reserved
10. Control function (CF) Byt 0x00 0x00 = Overload
0 e 0x10 0x10 = Direct starter
0x11 0x11 = Reversing starter
0x12 0x12 = 3VA molded case circuit
0x20 breaker (MCCB)
0x21 0x20 = Star-delta starter
0x30 0x21 = Star-delta reversing starter
0x31 0x30 = Dahlander starter
0x40 0x31 = Dahlander reversing starter
0x41 0x40 = Pole-changing starter
0x50 0x41 = Pole-changing reversing
starter
0x60
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x61
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x62
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x63
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x64
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x70
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x71
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with reversing
contactor
11. Reserved Bit[
0 8]
12. Bit parameters (16)
0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 237
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
12. No configuration fault due to OP Bit 0, 1 0
0
12. Startup parameter block active Bit 0, 1 1
1
12. Test/Reset keys disabled Bit 0, 1 0
2
12. Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual
3 1 = Auto
12. Reserved Bit 0
4
12. Reserved Bit 0
5
12. Reserved Bit 0
6
12. Reserved Bit 0
7
13. Diagnostics for process events Bit 0, 1 0
0
13. Diagnostics for process warn‐ Bit 0, 1 1
1 ings
13. Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1
2
13. Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1
3
13. Reserved Bit 0
4
13. Reserved Bit 0
5
13. Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1
6
13. PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1
7
14. Overload protection - Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase IM UM(+)
0 1 = 1-phase
14. Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual IM UM(+)
1 1 = Auto
14. Reserved Bit 0
2
14. Save change-over command Bit 0, 1 0
3
14. Non-maintained command Bit 0, 1 0
4 mode
14. Cold start level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
5 1 = NC contact

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

238 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
14. Type of consumer load Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor
6 1 = Resistive load
14. Reserved Bit 0
7
15. External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
0 1 = NC contact
15. External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0
1
15. External fault 3 - Type Bit 0, 1 0
2
15. External fault 4 - Type Bit 0, 1 0
3
15. External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always
4 1 = Only motor ON
15. External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0
5
15. External fault 3 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0
6
15. External fault 4 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0
7
16. Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 239
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
16. Thermistor - Overload response Bit[ 1, 2, 3 3 0 = Disabled Th
0 2] 1 = signaling
16. Thermistor - Response to sensor Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 2 2 = warn Th
2 fault 2] 3
3 = tripping
16. Internal ground fault - Response Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
4 2] 3
16. Motor protection - Overload re‐ Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 3 IM
6 sponse 2] 3
17. Motor protection - Overload re‐ Bit[ 0, 1, 2 2 IM
0 sponse 2]
17. Unbalance protection - Re‐ Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 2 IM
2 sponse 2] 3
17. Trip response I> Bit[ 0, 1, 3 0
4 2]
17. Warning response I> Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0
6 2]
18. Trip response I< Bit[ 0, 1, 3 0
0 2]
18. Warning response I< Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0
2 2]
18. Stalled rotor - Response Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
4 2] 3
18. EM+ 1)- Response to sensor fault Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
6 2] 3
19. Monitoring the number of Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
0 starts - Response to overshoot 2] 3
19. Monitoring the number of Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0
2 starts - Response to prewarning 2]
19. Motor operating hours monitor‐ Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0
4 ing - Response 2]
19. Motor stop time monitoring - Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0
6 Response 2]
20. External fault 1 - Response Bit[ 1, 2, 3 1
0 2]
20. External fault 2 - Response Bit[ 1, 2, 3 1
2 2]
20. External fault 3 – Response Bit[ 1, 2, 3 1
4 2]
20. External fault 4 - Response Bit[ 1, 2, 3 1
6 2]
21. Reserved Bit[ 0
0 2]
21. Basic unit - Debounce time in‐ Bit[ 0-3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms
2 puts 2]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

240 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
21. Timer 1 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = With closing delay,
4 2] 3 1 = Closing delay with memory
21. Timer 2 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 2 = With opening delay
6 2] 3
3 = With fleeting closing
22. Signal conditioning 1 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = Non-inverting
0 2] 3 1 = Inverting
22. Signal conditioning 2 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 2 = Edge rising with memory
2 2] 3
3 = Edge falling with memory
22. Non-volatile element 1 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
4 2] 3
22. Non-volatile element 2 - Type Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0
6 2] 3
23. EM+ 2) - monitoring Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 0 = on
0 2] 3 1 = on+
23. EM+ 2) - monitoring warning Bit[ 0, 1, 2, 0 2 = run
2 2] 3
3 = run+
23. EM - response to an external Bit[ 1, 3 1 0 = Disabled
4 ground fault 2] 1 = Signaling
23. EM - response to warning of an Bit[ 0, 1, 2 0 2 = Warn
6 external ground fault 2]
3 = Tripping
24. Bit[4] - Parameters (24)
0
24. External fault 1 - Reset also by Bit[ 0- 010 Bit[0] = Panel reset
0 4] 1111B 1B Bit[1] = Auto-reset
24. External fault 2 - Reset also by Bit[ 0- 010 Bit[2] = Remote reset
4 4] 1111B 1B
Bit[4] = OFF command reset
25. External fault 3 - Reset also by Bit[ 0- 010
0 4] 1111B 1B
25. External fault 4 - Reset also by Bit[ 0- 010
4 4] 1111B 1B
26. Limit monitor - Hysteresis for Bit[ 0 - 15 1% 5
0 limit monitoring 4]
26. EM+ 2) - hysteresis Bit[ 0 - 15 1% 5
4 4]
27. Parameter target version - Part a Bit[ 0
0 4]
27. Parameter target version - Part b Bit[ 0
4 4]
28. Byte parameters (28)
0
28. Internal ground fault - Delay Byt 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
29. Overload protection - Class Byt 5, 7, 10 10
0 e .. 35,
40

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 241
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
30. Motor protection - Delay with Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 overload operation e
31. Motor protection - unbalance Byt 0 - 100 1% 40 IM UM(+)
0 protection level e
32. Motor protection - Unbalance Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 protection - Delay in the event e
of unbalance
33. Interlocking time Byt 0 - 255 1 s 0
0 e
34. FB time Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 0 = disabled
0 e
35. Trip level I> Byt 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM UM(+)
0 e
36. Warning level I> Byt 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM UM(+)
0 e
37. Trip level I< Byt 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM UM(+)
0 e
38. Warning level I< Byt 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM UM(+)
0 e
39. Stalled rotor level Byt 0 - 255 4% / Is 0 IM UM(+)
0 e
40. Trip delay I> Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
41. Warning delay I> Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
42. Trip delay I< Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
43. Warning delay I< Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
44. Blocking delay Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM(+)
0 e
45. Monitoring the number of Byt 1 - 255 1
0 starts - Permissible starts e
46. Reserved Byt 0
0 e
47. EM+ 2) - delay Byt 0 - 255 100 ms 0
0 e
48. Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byt 0- 0
0 e 11111
111B
49. Truth table 2 type 3I/1O Byt 0- 0
0 e 11111
111B
50. Truth table 3 type 3I/1O Byt 0- 0
0 e 11111
111B

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

242 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byt Designation (PRM group) Typ Range Unit De‐ Note Information
e.Bi e faul
t t
51. Reserved Byt 0
0 e
52. Word parameters (32)
0
52. Motor protection - Cooling Wor 600 - 100 ms 300 IM UM(+)
0 down period d 65535 0
54. Motor protection - Pause time Wor 0 - 100 ms 0 0 = disabled IM UM(+)
0 d 65535
56. Execution time Wor 0 - 100 ms 10 0 = disabled
0 d 65535
58. Monitoring the number of Wor 0 - 1s 0
0 starts - Time range for starts d 65535
60. Monitoring the number of Wor 0 - 1s 0
0 starts - Interlocking time d 65535
62. Motor stop time level > Wor 0 - 1h 0
0 d 65535
64. Timer 1 - Limit Wor 0 - 100 ms 0
0 d 65535
66. Timer 2 - Limit Wor 0 - 100 ms 0
0 d 65535
68. Counter 1 - Limit Wor 0 - 0
0 d 65535
70. Counter 2 - Limit Wor 0 - 0
0 d 65535
72. EM+ 2) - trip level Wor 30 - 1 mA 100
0 d 40000 0
74. EM+ 2) - warning level Wor 30 - 1 mA 500
0 d 40000
76. D-word parameters (36)
0
76. Operator control enables Bit[ 0 - 1-1B 0-0
0 32] B
80. Motor protection - Set current D- 1)
10 mA 30 IM UM(+)
0 Is1 wor
d
84. Motor operating hours level > D- 0- 1s 0
0 wor 0xFFFF
d FFFF
88. Reserved D- 0
0 wor
d

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor Bit 31 = 1,
i.e. conversion factor active.
2) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 243
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 3-62 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (40)
4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
9.0 OP - LED green 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
10.0 OP - LED green 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
11.0 OP - LED green 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
13.0 OP - LED yellow 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
14.0 OP - LED yellow 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
15.0 Reserved Byte 0
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 105 Default: Status - ON<
17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 106 Default: Status - Off
18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 107 Default: Status - ON>
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 128 Default: Event - Overload op‐
eration
20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 110 Default: Status - Interlocking
time active
21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 120 Default: Status - Auto mode
22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 96 Default: Status - General fault
23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 97 Default: Status - General
warning
24.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
25.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 .. 255 0
28.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
29.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
30.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
33.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
37.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
38.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

244 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

39.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
40.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
41.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
42.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
43.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 - 255 0
44.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
45.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
46.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0
47.0 OPC UA Send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 - 255 0
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency Byte 0 - 255 60 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 IM UM(+)
start
50.0 Reserved Byte 0
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 - 255 61 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 - 255 2 Default: Fixed level value "1"
54.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
[LC] ON< the control
55.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0 function
[LC] OFF
56.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0
[LC] ON>
57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 56 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0
ON<
58.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 57 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1
OFF
59.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 58 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2
ON>
60.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] ON<
61.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] OFF
62.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] ON>
63.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON<
64.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] OFF
65.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON>
66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 - 255 73 Default: Group control station
ON<
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 - 255 74 Default: Group control station
OFF
68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 - 255 75 Default: Group control station
ON>

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 245
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 - 255 101 Default: Status - Motor cur‐
rent flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 External fault 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 External fault 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 External fault 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 External fault 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 External fault 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 External fault 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Cold start (TPF) Byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 59 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 62 Default: Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
89.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
90.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
91.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
92.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
93.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
94.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
95.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
96.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
97.0 Reserved Byte 0
98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

246 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
117.0 Flashing 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
118.0 Flashing 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
119.0 Flicker 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
120.0 Flicker 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
121.0 Flicker 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 - 255 16 Default: Max. current I_max
123.0 Reserved Byte 0

3.4.2.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Table 3-63 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 Reserved
4.1 Reserved
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Voltage measuring - Type of Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase
load 1 = 1-phase
5.2 OPD - Warnings Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Do not display
5.3 OPD - Faults Bit 0, 1 1 1 = Display
5.4 AM1 - Measuring range input Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0-20mA AM1
5.5 AM1 - Measuring range out‐ Bit 0, 1 0 1 = 4-20mA AM1
put
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 247
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" (overshooting)
limit 1 1 = "<" (undershoot‐
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 ing)
limit 2
6.2 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0
limit 3
6.3 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0
limit 4
6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No
1 = Yes
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
1 = NC contact
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED
1 = OPEN
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta
mounting 1 = In supply cable
7.0 External fault 5 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
7.1 External fault 6 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Only motor ON
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculator 2, Operating mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word
1 = D-word
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No DM-F
1 = Yes
8.3 DM-F - Safety-related tripping Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual DM-F
reset 1 = Auto
8.4 Reserved
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable parame‐ DM-FL
9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 ters comparable with DM-FL
the module configura‐
9.2 DM-FL - Configuration 3 Bit 0, 1 0 tion DM-FL
9.3 DM-FL - Configuration 4 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.4 DM-FL - Configuration 5 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.5 DM-FL - Configuration 6 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.6 DM-FL - Configuration 7 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.7 DM-FL - Configuration 8 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

248 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
10.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (21)
10.0 Reserved Bit[2]
10.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
10.4 UVO timebase Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated
1 = Activated
11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (always) UM(+)
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = ON+ (al‐ UM(+)
ways, not TPF)
2 = RUN (motor ON,
not TPF)
11.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
11.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON (always) AM1
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = ON + (al‐ AM1
mA> ways, not TPF)
12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = RUN (motor ON, AM1
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 not TPF) AM1
mA< 3 = RUN+ (motor ON,
13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 not TPF, startup over‐
ride)
13.2 Monitoring limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.4 Monitoring limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.6 Monitoring limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
14.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.6 AM1 - active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input AM1
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
15.0 DM - Delays inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM
2
15.2 AM1 - Response for open cir‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Disabled AM1
cuit 1 = Signaling
15.4 EM - Response to external Bit[2] 1, 3 1 2 = Warn EM EM+
ground fault
3 = Tripping
15.6 EM - response to warning of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM EM+
an external ground fault
16.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 249
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
16.4 DM-F - Test requirement re‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Disabled DM-F
sponse 1 = Signaling
16.6 DM-F - safety-related tripping Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Warn DM-F
response
3 = Tripping
17.0 TM1 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 TM1
17.2 TM1 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM1
17.4 TM1 - Response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM1
fault / out of range
17.6 TM1 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor TM1
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors
18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Disabled UM(+)
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = Signaling UM(+)
18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = Warn UM(+)
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = Tripping UM(+)
19.0 Trip response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM(+)
19.2 Warning response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM(+)
19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM(+)
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM(+)
20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
mA>
20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
mA<
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.0 External fault 5 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = Disabled
22.2 External fault 6 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = Signaling
2 = Warn
3 = Tripping
22.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.0 Analog-value recording - Trig‐ Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive
ger edge 1 = negative
23.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

250 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
24.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Closing delay with
memory
2 = With opening de‐
lay
3 = With fleeting clos‐
ing
25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting
25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Inverting
26.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with
26.2 Non-volatile element 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 memory
3 = Edge falling with
memory
26.4 Calculator 2, Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0=+
1=-
2=*
3=/
26.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.4 OPD - Operator panel display Bit[2] 0-4 2 0 = Manual
(bit 0 to 1) 1=3s
27.6 OPD - Operator panel display Bit[2] 0-4 2 2 = 10 s
(bit 2 to 3)
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
28.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (25)
28.0 TM1 - sensor type Bit[3] + 000B to 1 000B 000B = PT100 TM1
Bit 00B 001B = PT100
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
28.4 OPD language Bit[4] 0-7 1 0 = English
1 = German
2 = French
3 = Polish
4 = Spanish
5 = Portuguese
6 = Italian
7 = Finnish

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 251
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
29.0 External fault 5 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset
29.4 External fault 6 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[1] = Auto-reset
Bit[2] = Remote reset
Bit[3] = OFF com‐
mand reset
30.0 OPD - Contrast (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 255 1% 50
30.4 OPD - Contrast (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4]
31.0 OPD - Profile (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 26 0
31.4 OPD - Profile (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4]
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0
33.0 Is1 conversion factor - Denom‐ Bit[4] 0 - 15 0
inator
33.4 Is2 conversion factor - Denom‐ Bit[4] 0 - 15 0
inator
34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM(+)
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM1 AM
2
35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1%
35.4 OPD - Lighting Bit[4] 0-4 2 0 = Off
1=3s
2 = 10 s
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
36.0 Byte parameters (29)
36.0 Reserved Byte 0
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 EM
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM(+)

39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM(+)

40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM(+)

41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM(+)

42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1

43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

252 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM(+)

54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1

55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
59.0 Delay limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
60.0 Delay limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
61.0 Delay limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1K 5 TM1 TM2

63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta starter

64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0
66.0 Analog value recording - Sam‐ Byte 0 - 20 5% 0
pling rate
67.0 Calculator 2, Denominator 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 Calculator 2, Numerator 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 Calculator 1, Denominator Byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
71.0 Truth table 5 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
72.0 Truth table 6 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
73.0 Calculator 2, Numerator 1 Byte -128 - 0
127
74.0 Calculator 2, Denominator 2 Byte -128 - 0
127
75.0 DM-F - Test requirement level Byte 0 - 255 1 week 0
76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for 0/4mA AM1
output

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 253
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
78.0 Analog Module - End value Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for 20mA AM1
output
80.0 TM1 - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1 K 0 TM1
82.0 TM1 - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1 K 0 TM1
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
86.0 Limit monitor 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
88.0 Limit monitor 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
90.0 Limit monitor 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
96.0 Counter 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
98.0 Counter 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 - 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Analog value recording - Sam‐ Word 1 - 50000 1 ms 100
pling rate
104.0 Is1 conversion factor - Numer‐ Word 0 - 65535 0
ator
106.0 Is2 conversion factor - Numer‐ Word 0 - 65535 0
ator
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Motor protection - Set current D-word 1)
10 mA 0
Is2
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0- 1W 0 UM(+)
0xFFFFFF
FF
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0- 1W 0 UM(+)
0xFFFFFF
FF
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0- 1W 0 UM(+)
0xFFFFFF
FF
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0- 1W 0 UM(+)
0xFFFFFF
FF
128.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Out‐ Bit[32] 0 - 1-1B 0
put 1
132.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Out‐ Bit[32] 0 - 1-1B 0
put 2
136.0 Calculator 2, Offset D-word -0x80000 0
000 -
0x7FFFFF
FF
140.0 Calculator 1, Numerator/ D-word 2x -3276 0
Offset 8 - 32767

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor; bit 31 = 1,
i.e. conversion factor is active

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

254 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 3-64 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Informa‐

tion
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (41)
4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 FM-F
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
10.0 Reserved Byte 0
11.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Reserved
13.0 Reserved
14.0 Reserved
15.0 Reserved
16.0 Reserved
17.0 Reserved
18.0 Reserved
19.0 Reserved
20.0 Analog value recording - Trigger input Byte 0 - 255 0
21.0 Reserved Byte 0
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0 on the con‐
trol func‐
24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0 tion
25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC/OPC UA[OCM] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC/OPC UA[OCM] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panels [OP] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
29.0 Control station - Operator panels [OP]<>/ Byte 0 - 255 0
<<>>
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 - 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
38.0 Reserved Byte 0
39.0 Reserved Byte 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 255
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Informa‐

tion
40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
42.0 Reserved Byte 0
43.0 Reserved Byte 0
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 - 255 0
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 - 255 0
46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
47.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
48.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
49.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
50.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
51.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
52.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
53.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
54.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
55.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
56.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
57.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
58.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
59.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
60.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
61.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
62.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
63.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 5 Byte 0 - 255 0
64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

256 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Informa‐

tion
82.0 Reserved Byte 0
83.0 Reserved Byte 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 AM1 - Output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM1
89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
90.0 Analog input limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
91.0 Analog input limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
92.0 Analog input limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
93.0 Calculator 1, Input Byte 0 - 255 0
94.0 Analog value recording - Analog input Byte 0 - 255 0
95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
96.0 PLC/PCS analog input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
97.0 PLC/PCS analog input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
98.0 Calculator 2, Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
99.0 Calculator 2, Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0

3.4.2.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 2

Table 3-65 Data record 134 - ExtendedPlus device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Part - Bit parameters (18)
4.0 AM2 - Measuring range input Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0 - 20 mA AM2
4.1 AM2 - Measuring range out‐ Bit 0, 1 0 AM2
put
4.2 Overshooting/undershooting 0
limit 5
4.3 Overshooting/undershooting 0
limit 6
4.4 Reserved
4.5 Reserved
4.6 Reserved
4.7 Reserved
5.0 Reserved
5.1 Reserved
5.2 Reserved
5.3 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 257
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
5.4 Reserved
5.5 Reserved
5.6 Reserved
5.7 Reserved
6.0 Reserved
6.1 Reserved
6.2 Reserved
6.3 Reserved
6.4 Reserved
6.5 Reserved
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Reserved
7.1 Reserved
7.2 Reserved
7.3 Reserved
7.4 Reserved
7.5 Reserved
7.6 Reserved
7.7 Reserved
8.0 Part - Bit[2] parameters (22)
8.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on (always) AM2
8.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = on+ (al‐ AM2
mA> ways, not TPF)
8.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = run (motor AM2
8.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 on, not TPF, AM2
mA< startup over‐
ride)
9.0 Monitoring limit 5 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
9.2 Monitoring limit 6 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
9.4 AM2 - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 Like AM1 AM2
9.6 AM2 - Response to open cir‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Disabled AM2
cuit 1 = Signaling
10.0 TM2 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1,3 3 2 = Warn TM2
10.2 TM2 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 3 = Tripping TM2
10.4 TM2 - Response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM2
fault / out of range
10.6 TM2 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor TM2
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

258 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
11.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Disabled AM2
11.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = Signaling AM2
11.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = Warn AM2
11.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = Tripping AM2
12.0 Timer 5 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.2 Timer 6 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.4 Signal conditioner 5 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.6 Signal conditioning 6 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.0 Calculator 3 Operator 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
13.2 Calculator 3 Operator 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1=-
13.4 Calculator 3 Operator 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2=*
3=/

13.6 Reserved
14.0 Calculator 4 Operator 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
14.2 Calculator 4 Operator 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1=-
14.4 Calculator 4 Operator 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2=*
3=/

14.6 Reserved
15.0 Calculator 3 Priority 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = L,
15.2 Calculator 3 Priority 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = M,
15.4 Calculator 3 Prio 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 2=H

15.6 Reserved
16.0 Calculator 4 Prio 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = L,
16.2 Calculator 4 Prio 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = M,
16.4 Calculator 4 Priority 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 2=H

16.6 Reserved
17.0 Internal ground fault+ - Warn‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Disabled UM+
ing response 1 = Signaling
2 = Warn
17.2 TLS - performance Bit[2] 0, 3 0 0 = Disabled UM+
3 = Tripping
18.2 Reserved
18.4 Reserved
18.6 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 259
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
19.0 Reserved
19.2 Reserved
19.4 Reserved
19.6 Reserved
20.0 Reserved
20.2 Reserved
20.4 Reserved
20.6 Reserved
21.0 Reserved
21.2 Reserved
21.4 Reserved
21.6 Reserved
22.0 Part - Bit[4] parameters (26)
22.0 TM2 - sensor type Bit[3+1] 000B to 100B 000B Like TM1 TM2
22.4 Internal ground fault+ - Hyste‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 15 1% 5 UM+
resis
23.0 Reserved
23.4 Reserved
24.0 Reserved
24.4 Reserved
25.0 Reserved
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.4 Reserved
27.0 Reserved
27.4 Reserved
28.0 Reserved
28.4 Reserved
29.0 Reserved
29.4 Reserved
30.0 Part - Byte parameters (30)
30.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

31.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

32.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

33.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

34.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

260 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
35.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

36.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

37.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

38.0 Delay limit 5 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5

39.0 Delay limit 6 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5

40.0 Truth table 10 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0

41.0 Truth table 11 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0
42.0 Internal ground fault+ - warn‐ Byte 0 ... 255 100 ms 1 UM+
ing delay
43.0 Internal ground fault+ - Trip Word 0 ... 65535 1 mA 0 Value range de‐ UM+
level pendent on cur‐
rent range of
the UM+
44.0 Internal ground fault+ - Warn‐ Word 0 ... 65535 1 mA 0 Value range de‐ UM+
ing level pendent on cur‐
rent range of
the UM+
45.0 TLS - delay Byte 0 ... 100 100 ms 5 UM+_TL

46.0 TLS - T bridge Byte 0 ... 120 500 ms 0 UM+_TL

47.0 Reserved
48.0 Reserved
49.0 Reserved
50.0 Reserved
51.0 Reserved
52.0 Reserved
53.0 Reserved
54.0 Reserved
55.0 Reserved
56.0 Reserved
57.0 Reserved
58.0 Reserved
59.0 Reserved
60.0 Part - Word parameters (34)
60.0 AM2 - Start value output Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for 0/4 mA AM2

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 261
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
62.0 AM2 - End value output Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for 20 mA AM2

64.0 TM2 - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM2

66.0 TM2 - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM2

68.0 Limit level 5 Word 0 - 65535 0

70.0 Limit level 6 Word 0 - 65535 0
72.0 Timer 5 value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
74.0 Timer 6 value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
76.0 Counter 5 value Word 0 - 65535 0
78.0 Counter 6 value Word 0 - 65535 0
80.0 Calculator 3 const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
82.0 Calculator 3 const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
84.0 Calculator 3 const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
86.0 Calculator 3 const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
88.0 Calculator 4 const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
90.0 Calculator 4 const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
92.0 Calculator 4 const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
94.0 Calculator 4 const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
96.0 Analog multiplexer const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
98.0 Analog multiplexer const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
100.0 Analog multiplexer const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
102.0 Analog multiplexer const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
104.0 PWM input const Word 0 - 65535 0
106.0 PWM input Min Word 0 - 65535 0
108.0 PWM input Max Word 0 - 65535 0
110.0 PWM duration Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 20
112.0 Reserved Word
114.0 Reserved Word
116.0 Reserved Word
118.0 Reserved Word
120.0 Reserved Word
122.0 Reserved Word
124.0 Reserved Word
126.0 Reserved Word
128.0 Reserved Word
130.0 Reserved Word
132.0 Reserved Word
134.0 Reserved Word
136.0 Reserved Word
138.0 Reserved Word

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

262 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
140.0 Part - D-word parame‐
ters (38)
140.0 PE - min. pause time motor D-word 0 - FFFFFFFF 1 ms 0
144.0 Reserved D-word
148 Part - Float parameters (58)
148.0 .. 1 Reserved Float
68.0
172.0 Reserved Float
176.0 TLS threshold Float UM+_TL

3.4.2.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

Table 3-66 Data record 135 - ExtendedPlus device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Part - DI byte parame‐
ters (42)
4.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
5.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 2 DI byte 0 - 255 0
6.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 3 DI byte 0 - 255 0
7.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
8.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 2 DI byte 0 - 255 0
9.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 3 DI byte 0 - 255 0
10.0 Timer 5 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
11.0 Timer 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
12.0 Timer 6 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
13.0 Timer 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
14.0 Counter 5 input + DI byte 0 - 255 0
15.0 Counter 5 input - DI byte 0 - 255 0
16.0 Counter 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
17.0 Counter 6 input + DI byte 0 - 255 0
18.0 Counter 6 input - DI byte 0 - 255 0
19.0 Counter 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
20.0 Signal conditioning 5 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
21.0 Signal conditioning 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
22.0 Signal conditioning 6 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
23.0 Signal conditioning 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
24.0 Analog multiplexer S1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
25.0 Analog multiplexer S2 DI byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 263
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
26.0 Reserved
27.0 Reserved
28.0 Reserved
29.0 Reserved
30.0 Reserved
31.0 Reserved
32.0 Reserved
33.0 Reserved
34.0 Reserved
35.0 Reserved
36.0 Reserved
37.0 Reserved
38.0 Reserved
39.0 Reserved
40.0 Reserved
41.0 Reserved
42.0 Reserved
43.0 Reserved
44.0 Reserved
45.0 Reserved
46.0 Reserved
47.0 Reserved
48.0 Reserved
49.0 Reserved
50.0 Reserved
51.0 Reserved
52.0 Reserved
53.0 Reserved
54.0 Reserved
55.0 Reserved
56.0 Reserved
57.0 Reserved
58.0 Reserved
59.0 Reserved
60.0 Reserved
61.0 Reserved
62.0 Reserved
63.0 Reserved
64.0 Part - AI byte parame‐
ters (46)
64.0 AM2 - Output AI byte 0 - 255 0 AM2
65.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 5 AI byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

264 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Informa‐
tion
66.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 6 AI byte 0 - 255 0
67.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 7 AI byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 8 AI byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 9 AI byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Analog input limit 5 AI byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 Analog input limit 6 AI byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
80.0 Analog multiplexer input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0
81.0 Analog multiplexer input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
82.0 Analog multiplexer input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
83.0 Analog multiplexer input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
84.0 PWM input AI byte 0 - 255 0
85.0 Reserved AI byte
86.0 Reserved AI byte
87.0 Reserved AI byte
88.0 Reserved AI byte
89.0 Reserved AI byte
90.0 Reserved AI byte
91.0 Reserved AI byte
92.0 Reserved AI byte
93.0 Reserved AI byte
94.0 Reserved AI byte
95.0 Reserved AI byte
96.0 Reserved AI byte
97.0 Reserved AI byte
98.0 Reserved AI byte
99.0 Reserved AI byte
100.0 Part - FII byte parame‐
ters (62)
100.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0
101.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0
102.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0
103.0 PLC / PCS analog FI input FII byte 0 ... 255 0
107 ... 113 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 265
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

3.4.2.16 Data record 139 - Marking

For external faults, limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog
modules, user-specific texts can be configured for marking.
You can access the following texts via data record 139:
• External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings, and faults)
• Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
• TM1 warnings T> / trip T> (status information, warnings, and faults)
• AM1 warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (status information, warnings and faults).
Can be parameterized to have various meanings, e.g. fill level >, bearing hot, etc. To simplify
diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed,
for example, with SIMOCODE ES. The texts do not contain any functions.

Note
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and reestablishes
them afterward.

Table 3-67 Data record 139 - Marking

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10]
20.0 Marking - External fault 2 Byte[10]
30.0 Marking - External fault 3 Byte[10]
40.0 Marking - External fault 4 Byte[10]
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10]
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10]
70.0 Reserved Byte[10]
80.0 Reserved Byte[10]
90.0 Marking limit 1 Byte[10]
100.0 Marking limit 2 Byte[10]
110.0 Marking limit 3 Byte[10]
120.0 Marking limit 4 Byte[10]
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10]
140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10]
150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

266 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
190.0 Reserved Byte[10]

3.4.2.17 Data record 140 - Marking 2

For limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog modules, user-
specific texts can be configured for marking.
You can access the following texts via data record 140:
• Limit 5 and 6
• TM2 warnings T> / trip T>
• AM2 warning / trip 0/4-20mA<>.
Note
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when
the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Table 3-68 Data record 140 - Marking 2

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved
10.0 Marking limit 5 Byte[10]
20.0 Marking limit 6 Byte[10]
30.0 Marking - TM2 warning T> Byte[10]
40.0 Marking - TM2 trip T> Byte[10]
50.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
60.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
70.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
80.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
90.0 Reserved Byte[110]

3.4.2.18 Data record 165 - Identification

You can access the following identifiers stored in the device:
• Plant identifier
• Location designation
• Installation date
• Comment.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 267
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Table 3-69 Data record 165 - Identification

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location designation Byte[22]
58.0 Date Byte[16]
74.0 Reserved Byte[38]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]

3.4.2.19 Data record 224 - Password protection

Description
• Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and
the password applied. If "Password protection on" and the password are not identical at the
time of receipt, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change will be made.
• Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If
the password is incorrect, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is made.

Table 3-70 Data record 224 - Password protection

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Control flag: Bit
0 = Password protection off, 1 = Password protection on
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8]
16.0 Reserved Byte[8]

3.4.2.20 I&M data

I&M data overview

The following I&M data are supported:

Number Name Comment

I&M0 Device identification This is stored in the device on initialization
(Page
269)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

268 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

I&M1 Equipment identifier These are entered in the engineering system

(Page
269)
I&M2 Installation
(Page
270)
I&M3 Description
(Page
271)

Data set 231: I&M0 - device identification

Only read (r) access to the device identification (I&M0) is possible.

Byte Data length Content

0 10 bytes I&M header

Byte Data length Content Meaning Access

10 2 bytes MANUFACTURER_ID 42 = SIEMENS manufacturer identification r
12 20 bytes ORDER_ID Order number r
32 16 bytes SERIAL_NUMBER Serial number r
48 2 bytes HARDWARE_REVISION Revision level r
50 4 bytes SOFTWARE_REVISION Firmware version r
54 2 bytes REV_COUNTER Provides information about the parameterized r
changes on the device.
56 2 bytes PROFILE_ID Provides information about the profile supported r
by the device and the device family belonging to
the device.
58 2 bytes PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE Used to supplement the object "PROFILE_ID" and r
contains further information on the profile.
60 2 bytes IM_VERSION Provides information about the version of the iden‐ r
tification files (0x0101 = Version 1.1).
62 2 bytes IM_SUPPORTED Provides information about the available identifi‐ r
cation files (Index 2 to 4).

Data set 232: I&M1 - equipment identifier

Read (r) and write (w) access to the equipment identifier (I&M1) is possible.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 269
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 32 bytes TAG_FUNCTION Plant identifier r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).
42 22 bytes TAG_LOCATION Location designation r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).

Data set 233: I&M2 - installation

Read (r) and write (w) access to the installation (I&M2) is possible.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

270 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.4 Tables, PROFINET data records

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 16 bytes INSTALLATION_DATE Installation date r/w
Fill unused positions with blanks (0x20).
26 38 bytes RESERVED - r

Data set 234: I&M3 - description

Read (r) and write (w) access to the description (I&M3) is possible.

Byte Data for‐ Meaning

mat
0 ... 9 - I&M header
9 - Transfer the value 0x00 for writing the data set for byte 9.

Byte Data Content Meaning Access

length
10 32 bytes DESCRIPTOR Individual additional information and explanations. Fill un‐ r/w
used positions with blanks (0x20).

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 271
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

3.5 Modbus data tables

3.5.1 General information

3.5.1.1 Memory image

Hexadecimal address Chapter

0x0000 See Process image output - command data (Page 274)
0x0400 See Process image input - monitoring data (Page 274)
0x0800 See Measured values (Page 275)
0x0C00 See Display and statistical data (Page 277)
0x1C00 See Device diagnostics (Page 278)
0x2100 See Error memory (Page 286)
0x2200 See Event memory (Page 287)
0x2A80 See Trace data (Page 288)
0x4000 See I&M0 - device identification (Page 288)
0x4020 See I&M1 data (Page 289)
0x4040 See I&M2 - Installation date (Page 289)
0x4060 See I&M3 - Comment (Page 290)
0x4180 See Basic device parameter 1 (Page 290)
0x4380 See Extended device parameters 1 (Page 297)
0x4880 See Marking (Page 309)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

272 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

3.5.1.2 Byte arrangement

Byte arrangement
When data longer than one byte is stored, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

%\WH DUUDQJHPHQW 'DWD W\SH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

+LJK ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH
'RXEOH ZRUG 'ZRUG
%\WH +LJK E\WH
/RZ ZRUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH +LJK E\WH

:RUG
%\WH /RZ E\WH

%\WH %\WH
%\WH
%\WH %\WH

Figure 3-6 Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

3.5.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 3-71 Table specifications (example)

Register ad‐ Identifier Type Area Units Access ***) Info

dress *)
15 Reserved **) Byte[4] **) R

16 Max. current Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is R BU

I_max

*) The values given are decimal values

**) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to
Parameters that can be changed during operation
BU: Entry for SIMOCODE Modbus basic unit
***) Access: R: Read (access); W: Write (access); R/W: Read Write (access)

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 273
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

3.5.2 Modbus RTU data tables

3.5.2.1 Process image output - command data

The command data can be written via the register memory area with the function codes 06
and 16, or via the coil memory area with function codes 05 and 15.
The process image output and the process image input can also be accessed via function code 23
as a combined write/read access operation.
Read access is possible from the register memory area with function codes 03 and 04, or the coil
memory area with function codes 01 and 02.
Max. data length per access: 2 registers, 16 coils.

Table 3-72 Process image output - command data

Register high/low Coil ad‐ Type Description Default value Access

address dress
0x0000 low 0x0000 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] r/w
ON<
0x0001 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] r/w
OFF
0x0002 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] r/w
ON>
0x0003 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.3 Test 1 r/w
0x0004 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.4 Motor protection emergency r/w
start
0x0005 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 r/w
0x0006 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.6 Reset 1 r/w
0x0007 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 0.7 Unassigned r/w
high 0x0008 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.0 Unassigned r/w
0x0009 Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.1 Unassigned r/w
0x000A Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.2 Unassigned r/w
0x000B Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.3 Unassigned r/w
0x000C Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.4 Unassigned r/w
0x000D Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.5 Unassigned r/w
0x000E Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.6 Unassigned r/w
0x000F Bit Cyclic receive - bit 1.7 Unassigned r/w
0x0001 Word Cyclic receive - Analog value Unassigned r/w

3.5.2.2 Process image input - monitoring data

Access to the monitoring data is possible from the register memory area with function codes 03
and 04, or the coil memory area with function codes 01 and 02.
Max. data length per access: 5 registers, 16 coils.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

274 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

The process image output and the process image input can also be accessed via function code 23
as a combined write/read access operation.

Table 3-73 Process image input - monitoring data

Register ad‐ high/lo Coil ad‐ Type Designation Default value Ac‐
dress w dress cess
0x0400 low 0x0400 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.0 Status - On< r
0x0401 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.1 Status - Off r
0x0402 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.2 Status - On> r
0x0403 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.3 Event - overload opera‐ r
tion
0x0404 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking r
time active
0x0405 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode r
0x0406 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.6 Status - group fault r
0x0407 Bit Cyclic send - bit 0.7 Status - group warning r
high 0x0408 Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.0 Unassigned r
0x0409 Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.1 Unassigned r
0x040A Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.2 Unassigned r
0x040B Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.3 Unassigned r
0x040C Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.4 Unassigned r
0x040D Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.5 Unassigned r
0x040E Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.6 Unassigned r
0x040F Bit Cyclic send - bit 1.7 Unassigned r
0x0401 Word Float PLC/ PLC / PCS analog FI Max. current I_max r
PCS analog input 1 input 1
0x0402 Word PLC/PCS analog. Unassigned r
Input 2
0x0403 Word Float PLC/PCS analog. PLC / PCS analog FI Unassigned r
Input 3 input 2
0x0404 Word PLC/PCS analog. Unassigned r
Input 4

3.5.2.3 Measured values

Table 3-74 Measured values

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit Access 5) Info

Address offset high/low
0x0800 Reserved Byte[2] r
0x0801 Reserved Byte[2] r
0x0802 high Thermal motor model Byte 0 - 255 See 2)
r
low Phase unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% r
0x0803 high Cos phi Byte 0 - 100 1% r
low Reserved Byte[1] r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 275
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit Access 5) Info

Address offset high/low
0x0804 Reserved Byte[2] r
0x0805 Reserved Byte[2] r
0x0806 Max. current I_max Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is r
0x0807 Current I_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is r
0x0808 Current I_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is r
0x0809 Current I_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is r
0x080A Last trip current Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is r
0x080B Time to trip Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
0x080C Cooling down period Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
0x080D Voltage U_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1V r
0x080E Voltage U_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1V r
0x080F Voltage U_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1V r
0x0810 AM1 - output Word 0 - 32767 See 1)
r
0x0811 AM1 - input 1 Word 0 - 32767 r
0x0812 AM1 - input 2 Word 0 - 32767 r
0x0813 Reserved Word 0 - 32767 r
0x0814 TM1 - Temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) r
0x0815 TM1 - temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 r
0x0816 TM1 - temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 r
0x0817 TM1 - temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 r
0x0818 EM+ - ground-fault
4)
Word 0 - 65535 r
current
0x0819 EM+ 4) - last tripping Word 0 - 65535 r
current
0x081A Active power P D-word 0- 1W r
0xFFFFFFFF
0x081C Apparent power S D word 0- 1 VA r
0xFFFFFFFF
0x0842 Frequency Word 0 - 65535 0.01 Hz r from E03
0x0848 Current I_max_A_F Float 1A r from E03
0x084A Current I_avg_A_F Float 1A r from E03
0x084C Current I_L1_A_F Float 1A r from E03
0x084E Current I_L2_A_F Float 1A r from E03
0x0850 Current I_L3_A_F Float 1A r from E03
0x0852 Active power P_F Float 1W r from E03
0x0854 Apparent power S Float 1 VA r from E03
0x0856 Voltage UL1_F Float 1V r from E03
0x0858 Voltage UL2_F Float 1V r from E03
0x085A Voltage UL3_F Float 1V r from E03
0x085C Cos phi_F Float r from E03
0x085E Frequency_F Float 1 Hz r from E03

1) S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0; 20 mA = 27648

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

276 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model": Value related to symmetrical trip level,
representation in steps of 2 % in bits 6 ...0 (range 0 to 254 %), bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed
level 50 %)
3) Representation in Kelvin
4) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
5) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.4 Display and statistical data

Read access to the display and statistical data is possible from the register memory area with
function codes 03 and 04.
Individual statistical data can be written via the register memory area with function codes 06
and 16, and be reset, for example.
Max. data length per access: 34 registers.

Table 3-75 Display and statistical data

Input/holding regis‐ Designation Type Range Unit Access 1) Info

ter
Address high/low
0x0C00 Coordination Byte[4] r
0x0C02 high Permissible starts - ac‐ Byte 0 .. 255 r/w
tual value
low DM-F - Time until test Byte 0 .. 255 1 week r
requirement
0x0C03 Reserved Byte[2] r
0x0C04 Number of parameteri‐ Word 0 .. 65535 r
zations
0x0C05 Number of overload Word 0 .. 65535 r/w
trips
0x0C06 Number of internal Word 0 .. 65535 r
overload trips
0x0C07 Motor stop time Word 0 .. 65535 1h r/w
0x0C08 Timer 1 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r
0x0C09 Timer 2 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r
0x0C0A Timer 3 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r
0x0C0B Timer 4 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r
0x0C0C Counter 1 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C0D Counter 2 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C0E Counter 3 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C0F Counter 4 actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C10 Calculator 1 output Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C11 Calculator 2 output Word 0 .. 65535 r
0x0C12 Reserved Word[2] r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 277
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding regis‐ Designation Type Range Unit Access 1) Info

ter
Address high/low
0x0C14 Motor operating hours D word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFF 1s r/w
F
0x0C16 Internal motor operat‐ D word 0 .. 1s r
ing hours 0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C18 Device operating hours D word 0 .. 1s r
0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C1A Number of starts D word 0 .. r/w
0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C1C Number of internal D word 0 .. r
starts CW 0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C1E Number of internal D word 0 .. r
starts CCW 0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C20 Energy W D word 0 .. 1 kWh r/w
0xFFFFFFFF
0x0C22 Energy W_F Float 1 kWh r from E03

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.5 Device diagnostics

Read-only access to the device diagnostics is possible from the register memory area with
function codes 03 and 04, or the coil memory area with function codes 01 and 02.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

278 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Max. data length per access: 16 registers.

Table 3-76 Device diagnostics

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C00 low Bit 0x1C00 Reserved r
0x1C01 Reserved r
0x1C02 Reserved r
0x1C03 Reserved r
0x1C04 Reserved r
0x1C05 Reserved r
0x1C06 Reserved r
0x1C07 Reserved r
high Bit 0x1C08 Status - group fault r
0x1C09 Status - General warning r
0x1C0A Status - Device r
0x1C0B Status - Bus r
0x1C0C Status - PLC/PCS r
0x1C0D Status - Current flowing r
0x1C0E Status - PE command Start_Pause pending r
0x1C0F Status - PE energy saving mode active r
0x1C01 low Bit 0x1C10 Status - On<< r
0x1C11 Status - On< r
0x1C12 Status - Off r
0x1C13 Status - On> r
0x1C14 Status - On>> r
0x1C15 Status - Start active r
0x1C16 Status - Interlocking time active r
0x1C17 Status - Change-over pause active r
high Bit 0x1C18 Status - Runs in open direction r
0x1C19 Status - Runs in close direction r
0x1C1A Status - FC r
0x1C1B Status - FO r
0x1C1C Status - TC r
0x1C1D Status - TO r
0x1C1E Status - Cold run TPF r
0x1C1F Status - OPO r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 279
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C02 low Bit 0x1C20 Status - Auto mode r
0x1C21 Status - Emergency start executed r
0x1C22 Status - Cooling down period active r
0x1C23 Status - Pause time active r
0x1C24 Status - Device test active r
0x1C25 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 r
0x1C26 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 r
0x1C27 Status - DM-F enabling circuit r
high Bit 0x1C28 Event - Overload operation r
0x1C29 Event - Unbalance r
0x1C2A Event - Overload r
0x1C2B Event - overload + phase failure r
0x1C2C Event - Internal ground fault r
0x1C2D Event - External ground fault r
0x1C2E Event - external ground fault warning r
0x1C2F Event - Thermistor overload r
0x1C03 low Bit 0x1C30 Event - Thermistor short-circuit r
0x1C31 Event - Thermistor open circuit r
0x1C32 Event - TM warning T> r
0x1C33 Event - TM trip T> r
0x1C34 Event - TM sensor fault r
0x1C35 Event - TM out of range r
0x1C36 Event - EM+ open circuit r
0x1C37 Event - EM+ short-circuit r
high Bit 0x1C38 Event - Warning I> r
0x1C39 Event - Warning I< r
0x1C3A Event - Warning P> r
0x1C3B Event - Warning P< r
0x1C3C Event - Warning cos phi< r
0x1C3D Event - Warning U< r
0x1C3E Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA> r
0x1C3F Event - Warning 0/4 - 20mA< r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

280 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
1x1C04 low Bit 0x1C40 Event - Trip I> r
0x1C41 Event - Trip I< r
0x1C42 Event - Trip P> r
0x1C43 Event - Trip P< r
0x1C44 Event - Trip cos phi< r
0x1C45 Event - Trip U< r
0x1C46 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> 1 r
0x1C47 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< 1 r
high Bit 0x1C48 Event - Stalled rotor r
0x1C49 Reserved bit[1] r
0x1C4A Reserved bit[1] r
0x1C4B Event - No start permitted r
0x1C4C Event - No. of starts > r
0x1C4D Event - Just one start possible r
0x1C4E Event - Motor operating hours > r
0x1C4F Event - Motor stop time > r
0x1C05 low Bit 0x1C50 Event - Limit 1 r
0x1C51 Event - Limit 2 r
0x1C52 Event - Limit 3 r
0x1C53 Event - Limit 4 r
0x1C54 Event - External fault 1 r
0x1C55 Event - External fault 2 r
0x1C56 Event - External fault 3 r
0x1C57 Event - External fault 4 r
high Bit 0x1C58 Event - External fault 5 r
0x1C59 Event - External fault 6 r
0x1C5A Reserved event - External fault 7 r
0x1C5B Reserved event - External fault 8 r
0x1C5C Event - AM1 open circuit r
0x1C5D Event - DM-F safety-related tripping r
0x1C5E Event - DM-F - Test requirement r
0x1C5F Reserved r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 281
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C06 low Bit 0x1C60 Event - timestamp function active + ok r
0x1C61 Reserved r
0x1C62 Event - DM-FL safety ok r
0x1C63 Reserved r
0x1C64 Event - Configured operator panel missing r
0x1C65 Event - Module not supported r
0x1C66 Event - module voltage missing r
0x1C67 Reserved r
high Bit 0x1C68 Event - memory module read in r
0x1C69 Event - memory module programmed r
0x1C6A Event - Memory module erased r
0x1C6B Reserved r
0x1C6C Event - Initialization module read in r
0x1C6D Event - Initialization module programmed r
0x1C6E Event - Initialization module cleared r
0x1C6F Event - Addressing plug read in r
0x1C07 low Bit 0x1C70 Event - startup parameter block active r
0x1C71 Event - parameter changes not allowed in the cur‐ r
rent operating state
0x1C72 Event - Device does not support the required func‐ r
tions
0x1C73 Event - Bad parameter r
0x1C74 Event - Password wrong r
0x1C75 Event - Password protection active r
0x1C76 Event - Factory settings r
0x1C77 Event - Parameterization active r
high Bit 0x1C78 Event - Prm error number r
0x1C79 Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7A Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7B Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7C Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7D Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7E Event - Prm error number r
0x1C7F Event - Prm error number r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

282 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C08 low Bit 0x1C80 Event - DM-FL configuration operation r
0x1C81 Event - DM-FL actual and set configuration are dif‐ r
ferent
0x1C82 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test r
0x1C83 Reserved r
0x1C84 Event - initialization module write-protected, param‐ r
eter changes not allowed
0x1C85 Event - memory module write-protected r
0x1C86 Event - initialization module write-protected r
0x1C87 Event - initialization module ident. data write pro‐ r
tected
high Bit 0x1C88 Warning - overload operation r
0x1C89 Warning - Unbalance r
0x1C8A Warning - Overload r
0x1C8B Warning - Overload + phase failure r
0x1C8C Warning - Internal ground fault r
0x1C8D Warning - external ground fault r
0x1C8E Reserved r
0x1C8F Warning - Thermistor overload r
0x1C09 low Bit 0x1C90 Warning - Thermistor short circuit r
0x1C91 Warning - Thermistor open circuit r
0x1C92 Warning - TM1 warning T > r
0x1C93 Reserved r
0x1C94 Warning - TM1 sensor fault r
0x1C95 Warning - TM1 out of range r
0x1C96 Warning - EM+ open circuit r
0x1C97 Warning - EM+ short circuit r
high Bit 0x1C98 Warning - Warning I> r
0x1C99 Warning - Warning I< r
0x1C9A Warning - Warning P> r
0x1C9B Warning - Warning P< r
0x1C9C Warning - Warning cos phi< r
0x1C9D Warning - Warning U< r
0x1C9E Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20mA> r
0x1C9F Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20mA< r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 283
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C0A low Bit 0x1CA0 Warning - Stalled rotor r
0x1CA1 Reserved r
0x1CA2 Reserved r
0x1CA3 Warning - No start possible r
0x1CA4 Warning - Number of starts > r
0x1CA5 Warning - Just one start possible r
0x1CA6 Warning - Motor operating hours> r
0x1CA7 Warning - Motor stop time > r
high Bit 0x1CA8 Warning - External fault 1 r
0x1CA9 Warning - External fault 2 r
0x1CAA Warning - External fault 3 r
0x1CAB Warning - External fault 4 r
0x1CAC Warning - External fault 5 r
0x1CAD Warning - External fault 6 r
0x1CAE Reserved warning - External fault 7 r
0x1CAF Reserved warning - External fault 8 r
0x1C0B low Bit 0x1CB0 Warning - AM1 open circuit r
0x1CB1 Warning - DM-F safety-related tripping r
0x1CB2 Warning - DM-F test requirement r
0x1CB3 Reserved r
0x1CB4 Reserved r
0x1CB5 Reserved r
0x1CB6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit r
0x1CB7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity r
high Bit 0x1CB8 Fault - HW fault basic unit r
0x1CB9 Fault - Module fault r
0x1CBA Fault - Temporary components r
0x1CBB Fault - Configuration error r
0x1CBC Fault - Parameterization r
0x1CBD Fault - Bus r
0x1CBE Fault - PLC/PCS r
0x1CBF Reserved r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

284 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C0C low Bit 0x1CC0 Fault - execution ON command r
0x1CC1 Fault - execution STOP command r
0x1CC2 Fault - Feedback (FB) ON r
0x1CC3 Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF r
0x1CC4 Fault - Stalled positioner r
0x1CC5 Fault - Double 0 r
0x1CC6 Fault - Double 1 r
0x1CC7 Fault - End position r
high Bit 0x1CC8 Fault - Antivalence r
0x1CC9 Fault - Cold run (TPF) error r
0x1CCA Fault - power failure (UVO) r
0x1CCB Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) r
0x1CCC Reserved r
0x1CCD Reserved r
0x1CCE Reserved r
0x1CCF Reserved r
0x1C0D low Bit 0x1CD0 Reserved r
0x1CD1 Fault - unbalance r
0x1CD2 Fault - overload r
0x1CD3 Fault - overload + phase failure r
0x1CD4 Fault - int. ground fault r
0x1CD5 Fault - ext. ground fault r
0x1CD6 Reserved r
0x1CD7 Fault - thermistor overload r
high Bit 0x1CD8 Fault - thermistor short circuit r
0x1CD9 Fault - thermistor open circuit r
0x1CDA Reserved r
0x1CDB Trip - TM1 trip T> r
0x1CDC Trip - TM1 sensor fault r
0x1CDD Trip - TM1 out of range r
0x1CDE Fault - EM+ open circuit r
0x1CDF Fault - EM+ short circuit r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 285
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding Type Discrete input / coil ad‐ Identifier Access 1)

register dress
Ad‐ high/lo
dress w
0x1C0E low Bit 0x1CE0 Fault - trip I> r
0x1CE1 Fault - trip I< r
0x1CE2 Fault - trip P> r
0x1CE3 Fault - trip P< r
0x1CE4 Fault - trip cos phi< r
0x1CE5 Fault - trip U< r
0x1CE6 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA> r
0x1CE7 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA< r
high Bit 0x1CE8 Fault - stalled rotor r
0x1CE9 Reserved r
0x1CEA Reserved r
0x1CEB Reserved r
0x1CEC Fault - Number of starts > r
0x1CED Reserved r
0x1CEE Reserved r
0x1CEF Reserved r
0x1C0F low Bit 0x1CF0 Fault - External fault 1 r
0x1CF1 Fault - External fault 2 r
0x1CF2 Fault - External fault 3 r
0x1CF3 Fault - External fault 4 r
0x1CF4 Fault - External fault 5 r
0x1CF5 Fault - External fault 6 r
0x1CF6 Reserved fault - External fault 7 r
0x1CF7 Reserved fault - External fault 8 r
high Bit 0x1CF8 Fault - AM1 open circuit r
0x1CF9 Fault - test trip r
0x1CFA Fault - DM-F safety-related tripping r
0x1CFB Fault - DM-F wiring r
0x1CFC Fault - DM-FL cross circuit r
0x1CFD Reserved r
0x1CFE Reserved r
0x1CFF Reserved r

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.6 Error memory

Read-only access to the error memory is possible via function codes 03 and 04 .

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

286 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Max. data length per access: 63 registers.

Table 3-77 Error buffer

Input register Entry Designation1) Type Units Access 2)

Address high/low
0x2100 1 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x2102 high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info Byte r
0x2103 2 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x2105 high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info Byte r
... ... r
0x213C 21 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x213E high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info Byte r

1 ) The meaning of the error events can be found in the table "Alarm, fault, and system events,
PROFIBUS error handling" in the SIMOCODE pro system manual.
2) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.7 Event memory

Read-only access to the event memory is possible via function codes 03 and 04.
Max. data length per access: 84 registers.

Table 3-78 Event memory

Input/holding register Entry Identifier Type Units Access 2)

Address high/low
0x2200 1 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x2202 high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info (part 1) 1) Byte r
0x2203 high/low Entry - Info (part 2) 1)
Byte[2] r
0x2204 2 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x2206 high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info (part 1) 1)
Byte r
0x2207 high/low Entry - Info (part 2) 1) Byte[2] r
0x2208 3 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x220A high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info (part 1) 1)
Byte r
0x220B Entry - Info (part 2) 1)
Byte[2] r
... r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 287
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Entry Identifier Type Units Access 2)

Address high/low
0x2250 21 Time stamp D word 1s r
0x2252 high Entry - Type Byte r
low Entry - Info (part 1) 1) Byte r
0x2253 high/low Entry - Info (part 2) 1)
Byte[2] r

1) Entry - Info consists of a total of 3 bytes distributed across two register addresses respectively.
The following applies for the data set length: SIMOCODE pro V basic unit Modbus RTU: 168 byte
2) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.8 Trace data

Read-only access to the trace data is possible via function codes 03 and 04.
Max. data length per access: 63 registers.

Table 3-79 Trace data

Input/holding register Identifier Type Range Access 1)

Address high/low byte; bit Bit
position
0x2A80 StartPos Word 0 r
0x2A81 high Channel No. Byte 0 ... 59 r
low 0 Trace status - Trace recording Bit 0, 1 r
in progress
1 Trace status - Trigger event oc‐ Bit 0, 1 r
curred
2-7 Reserved Bit[6] 0 r

0x2A82 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 r

0x2A83 Measured value (1) Word 0 ... 65535 r
... ... Word 0 ... 65535 r
0x2ABD Measured value (59) Word 0 ... 65535 r

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.9 I&M0 - device identification

Read-only access to the I&M0 device identification is possible via function codes 03 and 04.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

288 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Max. data length per access: 32 registers.

Table 3-80 I&M (device identification)

Input register Content Size Coding (H) Access 1)

Address
0x4000 RESERVED 10 byte 0x00, ... 0x00 r
0x4005 MANUFACTURER_ID 2 bytes 42 = 0x002A (SIE‐ r
MENS AG)
0x4006 ORDER_ID 20 byte "3UF7 ..." r
0x4010 SERIAL_NUMBER 16 byte ASCII r
0x4018 HARDWARE_REVISION 2 bytes r
0x4019 SOFTWARE_REVISION 4 byte Va.b.c r
0x401B REVISION_COUNTER 2 bytes 0x0000 r
0x401C PROFILE_ID 2 bytes 0x5E10 = VA, r
GG3 = 0
0x401D PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE 2 bytes 0x1039 = GG2_MBR r
0x401E IM_VERSION 2 bytes 0x0101 (V1.1) r
0x401F IM_SUPPORTED 2 bytes 0x000E r

Data record length: 64 bytes

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.10 I&M1 data

Read access to the I&M1 data is possible via function codes 03 and 04. Write access is possible
via function codes 06 and 16.
Max. data length per access: 32 registers.

Table 3-81 I&M1D data

Input/holding register Content Size Access 1)

Address
0x4020 Reserved 10 byte r
0x4025 Plant identifier 32 byte r/w
0x4035 ... 0x403F Location designation 22 byte r/w

Access to these designations via Modbus: read/write

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.11 I&M2 - Installation date

Read access to the I&M2 data is possible via function codes 03 and 04. Write access is possible
via function codes 06 and 16.

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 289
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Max. data length per access: 13 registers.

Table 3-82 I&M2 - Installation date

Input/holding register Content Size Access 1)

Address
0x4040 Reserved 10 byte r
0x4045 Date 16 byte r/w

1) Access to the installation date via Modbus: read/write

3.5.2.12 I&M3 - Comment

Read access to the I&M3 data is possible via function codes 03 and 04. Write access is possible
via function codes 06 and 16.
Max. data length per access: 32 registers.

Table 3-83 I&M3 - Comment

Input/holding register Content Size Access 1)

Address
0x4060 Reserved 10 byte r
0x4065 ... 0x407F Comments 54 byte r/w

1) Access to the comment via Modbus: read/write

3.5.2.13 Basic device parameter 1

Read access to the device parameters is possible from the register memory area with function
codes 03 and 04.
Individual parameter data (marked with the motor symbol in the "Info" column) can be written
via Modbus RTU via the register memory area with function codes 06 and 16. This function can
be used to adjust settings such as the rated motor current during operation of the motor.
Max. data record length per access: 46 registers.
The "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)" software is nonetheless required for full parameterization of the
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus devices (see also Chapter "Commissioning with Modbus RTU" in the
SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957)).

Table 3-84 Basic device parameter 1

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x4180 Coordination Byt r
e[4]
0x4182 Device configu‐ Byt r
ration e[8]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

290 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x4186 high 0 No configuration Bit 0, 1 0 r
fault due to OP
1 Startup parame‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
ter block active
2 TEST/RESET but‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tons blocked
3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual r
Reset 1 = Auto
4 Reserved Bit 0 r
5 Reserved Bit 0 r
6 Reserved Bit 0 r
7 Reserved Bit 0 r
low 0 Diagnostics for Bit 0, 1 0 r
process events
1 Diagnostics for Bit 0, 1 1 r
process warnings
2 Diagnostics for Bit 0, 1 1 r
process faults
3 Diagnostics for Bit 0, 1 1 r
device faults
4 Reserved Bit 0 r
5 Reserved Bit 0 r
6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 r
7 PLC/PCS monitor‐ Bit 0, 1 1 r
ing

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 291
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x4187 high 0 Motor protection - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase r
Type of load 1 = 1-phase
1 Motor protection - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual r
Reset 1 = Auto
2 Reserved Bit 0 r
3 Save change-over Bit 0, 1 0 r
command
4 Non-maintained Bit 0, 1 0 r
command mode
5 Cold start level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact r
(TPF) 1 = NC contact
6 Type of consumer Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor r
load 1 = ohmic load
7 Reserved Bit 0 r
low 0 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact r
el 1 1 = NC contact
1 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
el 2
2 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
el 3
3 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
el 4
4 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always r
nal fault 1 1 = Only motor ON
5 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
nal fault 2
6 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
nal fault 3
7 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
nal fault 4
Part - Bit[2] pa‐
rameter

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

292 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x4188 high 0-1 Thermistor - Over‐ Bit[2 1, 2, 3 3 0 = Disabled r
load response ] 1 = Signaling
2-3 Thermistor - Re‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 2 2 = Warn r
sponse to sensor ]
3 = Tripping
fault
4-5 Internal ground Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
fault - Response ]
6-7 Motor protection - Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
Overload re‐ ]
sponse
low 0-1 Motor protection - Bit[2 0, 1, 2 2 r
Overload re‐ ]
sponse
2-3 Motor protection - Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 2 r
Response to un‐ ]
balance
4-5 Trip response I> Bit[2 0, 1, 3 0 r
]
6-7 Warning response Bit[2 0, 1, 2 0 r
I> ]
0x4189 high 0-1 Trip response I< Bit[2 0, 1, 3 0 r
]
2-3 Warning response Bit[2 0, 1, 2 0 r
I< ]
4-5 Response to stal‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
led rotor ]
6-7 EM+ - Response to Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
sensor fault ]
low 0-1 Response to num‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ber of starts > ]
2-3 Response to early Bit[2 0, 1, 2 0 r
warning number ]
of starts >
4-5 Motor operating Bit[2 0, 1, 2 0 r
hours response > ]
6-7 Motor stop time Bit[2 0, 1, 2 0 r
response > ]
0x418A high 0-1 External fault re‐ Bit[2 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 1 ]
2-3 External fault re‐ Bit[2 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 2 ]
4-5 External fault re‐ Bit[2 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 3 ]
6-7 External fault re‐ Bit[2 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 4 ]
low 0-1 Reserved Bit[2 0 r
]

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 293
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
2-3 Delay for BU in‐ Bit[2 0 ... 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms r
puts ]
4-5 Timer 1 - type Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay r
] 1 = Closing delay with
6-7 Timer 2 - type Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 memory r
] 2 = With OFF delay
3 = With fleeting clos‐
ing
0x418B high 0-1 Signal condition‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting r
ing 1 - type ] 1 = Inverting
2-3 Signal condition‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with r
ing 2 - type ] memory
4-5 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling with r
ment 1 - type ] memory
6-7 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ment 2 - type ]
low 0-1 EM+ - monitoring Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on r
] 1 = on+
2-3 EM+ - monitoring Bit[2 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = run r
warning ]
3 = run+
4-5 Reserved Bit[2 0 r
]
6-7 Reserved Bit[2 0 r
]
Part - Bit[4] pa‐ r
rameters
0x418C high Reset response ex‐ Bit[4 0 ... 111 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset r
ternal fault 1 ] 1B Bit[1] = Auto reset
Reset response ex‐ Bit[4 0 ... 111 0101B Bit[2] = Remote reset r
ternal fault 2 ] 1B
Bit[1] = OFF com‐
low Reset response ex‐ Bit[4 0 ... 111 0101B mand reset r
ternal fault 3 ] 1B
Reset response ex‐ Bit[4 0 ... 111 0101B r
ternal fault 4 ] 1B
0x418D high 0-3 Hysteresis current Bit[4 0 ... 15 1% 5 r
levels ]
4-7 EM+ - hysteresis Bit[4 0 ... 15 1% 5 r
]
low Reserved Bit[4 0 r
]
Reserved Bit[4 0 r
]
Part - Byte pa‐
rameters

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

294 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x418E high Internal ground Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
fault - Delay ms

low Motor protection - Byte 5, 10 ... 10 r/w

Class 35, 40
0x418F high Motor protection - Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
Delay with over‐ ms
load operation
low Motor protection - Byte 0 ... 100 1 % 40 IM UM(+) r/w
Unbalance level

0x4190 high Motor protection - Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
Delay with unbal‐ ms
ance
low Interlocking time Byte 0 ... 255 1 s 0 r/w

0x4191 high FB time Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 0 = Disabled r/w

ms
low Trip level I> Byte 0 ... 255 4 % / I 0 IM UM(+) r/w
_s

0x4192 high Warning level I> Byte 0 ... 255 4 % / I 0 IM UM(+) r/w
_s

low Trip level I< Byte 0 ... 255 4 % / I 0 IM UM(+) r/w

0x4193 high Warning level I< Byte 0 ... 255 4 % / I 0 IM UM(+) r/w
_s

low Stalled rotor level Byte 0 ... 255 4 % / I 0 IM UM(+) r/w

0x4194 high Trip delay I> Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
ms

low Warning delay I> Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
ms

0x4195 high Trip delay I< Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
ms

low Warning delay I< Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
ms

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 295
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
0x4196 high Blocking delay Byte 0 ... 255 100 5 IM UM(+) r/w
ms

low Monitoring the Byte 1 ... 255 1 r/w

number of starts -
Permissible starts
0x4197 high Reserved Byte 0
low EM+ - warning de‐ Byte 0 ... 255 100 1 r/w
lay ms
0x4198 high Truth table 1 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B
low Truth table 2 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B
0x4199 high Truth table 3 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B
low Reserved Byte 0 r
Part - Word pa‐
rameters
0x419A Motor protection - Wor 600 ... 6 100 3000 IM UM(+) r/w
Cooling down pe‐ d 5535 ms
riod
0x419B Motor protection - Wor 0 ... 655 100 0 0 = Disabled IM UM(+) r/w
Pause time d 35 ms

0x419C Execution time Wor 0 ... 655 100 10 0 = Disabled r/w

d 35 ms
0x419D Monitoring the Wor 0 ... 655 1 s 0 r/w
number of starts - d 35
Time range for
starts
0x419E Monitoring the Wor 0 ... 655 1 s 0 r/w
number of starts - d 35
Interlocking time
0x419F Motor stop time Wor 0 ... 655 1 h 0 r/w
level > d 35
0x41A0 Timer 1 value Wor 0 ... 655 100 0 r/w
d 35 ms
0x41A1 Timer 2 value Wor 0 ... 655 100 0 r/w
d 35 ms
0x41A2 Counter 1 value Wor 0 ... 655 0 r/w
d 35
0x41A3 Counter 2 value Wor 0 ... 655 0 r/w
d 35
0x41A4 EM+ - trip level Wor 30 ... 40 1 mA 1000 r/w
d 000
0x41A5 EM+ - warning lev‐ Wor 30 ... 40 1 mA 500 r/w
el d 000

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

296 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Typ Range Unit De‐ Comments Info Ac‐
Address high/lo Bit e fault cess
1)
w
Part - D word pa‐
rameter
0x41A6 Operator control Bit[3 0 ... 1 ... 0 ... 0B r
enables 2] 1B
0x41A8 Motor protection - D 10 m 30 IM UM(+) r/w
Set current Is1 2) wor A
d
0x41AA Motor operating D 0 ... 0xF 1 s 0 r/w
hours level > wor FFFFFFF
d
0x41AC Reserved D- 0 r
wor
d

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

2) Bit 15 = 1 → Transformation ratio active

3.5.2.14 Extended device parameters 1

Read access to the device parameters is possible from the register memory area with function
codes 03 and 04.
Individual parameter data (marked with the motor symbol in the "Info" column) can be written
via Modbus RTU via the register memory area with function codes 06 and 16. This function can
be used to adjust settings such as the rated motor current during operation of the motor.
The "SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)" software is nonetheless required for full parameterization of the
SIMOCODE pro V Modbus devices (see also Chapter "Commissioning with Modbus RTU" in the
SIMOCODE pro – System Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109743957)).
Max. data length per access: 72 registers.

Table 3-85 Extended device parameters 1

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4380 Coordination Byte[ r
4]
Part - Bit parame‐
ters

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 297
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4382 high 0 3UF50 compatibili‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
ty mode
1 3UF50 operating Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0 r
mode 1 = DPV1
2 Reserved Bit 0 r
3 Reserved Bit 0 r
4 Reserved Bit 0 r
5 Reserved Bit 0 r
6 Reserved Bit 0 r
7 Reserved Bit 0 r
low 0 Reserved Bit 0 r
1 Voltage measuring Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase r
- Type of load 1 = 1-phase
2 OPD - Warnings Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Do not display r from E0
3 OPD - Faults Bit 0, 1 1 1 = Display 3
4 AM1 - Measuring Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0 ... 20 mA r
range input 1 = 4 ... 20 mA
5 AM1 - Measuring Bit 0, 1 0 r
range
Output
6 Reserved Bit 0 r
7 Reserved Bit 0 r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

298 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4383 high 0 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = > (overshooting) r
undershooting lim‐ 1 = < (undershoot‐
it 1 ing)
1 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 r
undershooting lim‐
it 2
2 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 r
undershooting lim‐
it 3
3 Overshooting/ Bit 0, 1 0 r
undershooting lim‐
it 4
4 Line-to-line volt‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No r
age 1 = Yes
5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact r
1 = NC contact
6 Positioner re‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED r
sponse for OPO 1 = OPEN
7 Star-delta - Trans‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta r
former mounting 1 = In supply cable
low 0 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact r
el 5 1 = NC contact
1 External fault lev‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
el 6
2 Reserved Bit 0 r
3 Reserved Bit 0 r
4 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always r
nal fault 5 1 = Only motor ON
5 Monitoring exter‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
nal fault 5
6 Reserved Bit 0, 1 0 r
7 Reserved Bit 0, 1 0 r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 299
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4384 high 0 Calculator 2 - Oper‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word r
ating mode 1 = D word
1 Reserved Bit 0 r
2 DM-F - Safe trip‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No r
ping function 1 = Yes
3 DM-F - Safety-rela‐ Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual r
ted tripping reset 1 = Auto
4 Time stamping ac‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tive
5 Reserved Bit 0 r
6 Reserved Bit 0 r
7 Reserved Bit 0 r
low 0 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable pa‐ r
tion 1 rameters compara‐
1 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 ble with the module r
tion 2 configuration
2 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 3
3 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 4
4 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 5
5 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 6
6 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 7
7 DM-FL - Configura‐ Bit 0, 1 0 r
tion 8
Part - Bit[2] pa‐ r
rameter

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

300 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4385 high 0-1 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 UVO timebase Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 100 ms r
1=1s
2 = 10 s
6-7 UVO operating Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Disabled r
mode 1 = Device connec‐
ted to voltage (re‐
served)
2 = Voltage fails
low 0-1 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (always) r
2-3 Warning monitor‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = ON+ (al‐ r
ing U < ways, not TPF)
2 = RUN (motor ON,
not TPF)
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
0x4386 high 0-1 Trip monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
0/4-20mA >
2-3 Warning monitor‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ing 0/4-20mA >
4-5 Trip monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
0/4-20mA <
6-7 Warning monitor‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ing 0/4-20mA <
low 0-1 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
2-3 Monitoring limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
4-5 Monitoring limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
6-7 Monitoring limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 301
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4387 high 0-1 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 AM1 - active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input r
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
low 0-1 DM - Input delay Bit[2] 0 ... 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms r
2-3 AM1 - Response to Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Disabled r
open circuit 1 = Signaling
4-5 EM - response to Bit[2] 1, 3 1 2 = Warn r
an external ground
3 = Tripping
fault
6-7 EM - response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
warning of an ex‐
ternal ground fault
0x4388 high 0-1 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 DM-F - Test require‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
ment response
6-7 DM-F - safety-rela‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ted tripping re‐
sponse
low 0-1 TM1 - Trip re‐ Bit[2] 1, 3 3 r
sponse T>
2-3 TM1 - Warning re‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 r
sponse T>
4-5 TM1 - Response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 r
a sensor fault / out
of range
6-7 TM1 - active sen‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2*) 0 = 1 sensors r
sors 1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

302 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4389 high 0-1 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Disabled r
2-3 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = Signaling
P> 2 = Warn
4-5 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 3 = Tripping r
6-7 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
P<
low 0-1 Trip response Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 r
cos phi <
2-3 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
cos phi <
4-5 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 r
6-7 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
U<
0x438A high 0-1 Trip response Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 r
0/4-20 mA >
2-3 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
0/4-20 mA >
4-5 Trip response Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 r
0/4-20 mA <
6-7 Warning response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 r
0/4-20 mA <
low 0-1 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
0x438B high 0-1 External fault re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 5
2-3 External fault re‐ Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 r
sponse 6
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
low 0-1 Trace - Trigger edge Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive r
1 = negative
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 303
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x438C high 0-1 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
low 0-1 Timer 3 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing de‐ r
2-3 Timer 4 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 lay r
1 = Closing delay
with memory
2 = With OFF delay
3 = With fleeting
closing
4-5 Signal condition‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting r
ing 3 - type 1 = Inverting
6-7 Signal condition‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with r
ing 4 - type memory
0x438D high 0-1 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling with r
ment 3 - type memory
2-3 Non-volatile ele‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ment 4 - type
4-5 Calculator 2 - Oper‐ Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 r
ator
6-7 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
low 0-1 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
2-3 Reserved Bit[2] 0 r
4-5 OPD - Operator Bit[2] 0 ... 4 2 0 = Manual r from E0
panel dis‐ 1=3s 3
play (bit 0 ... 1)
2 = 10 s
6-7 OPD - Operator Bit[2] r
3 = 1 min
panel dis‐
play (bit 2 ... 3) 4 = 5 min
Part - Bit[4] pa‐ r
rameters

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

304 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x438E high 0-2 TM1 - sensor type Bit[3] 000B to 000B 000B = PT100 r
100B 001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
Reserved Bit r
4-7 OPD - Language Bit[4] 0 ... 15 0 r from E0
3
low 0-3 Reset response ex‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 111 0101 Bit[0] = Panel reset r
ternal fault 5 1B B Bit[1] = Auto reset
4-7 Reset response ex‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 111 0101 Bit[2] = Remote re‐ r
ternal fault 6 1B B set
Bit[3] = OFF com‐
mand reset

0x438F high 0-3 OPD - Con‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 255 1% 50 r from E0

trast (bit 0 ... 3) 3
4-7 OPD - Con‐ Bit[4] r
trast (bit 4 ... 7)
low 0-3 OPD - Pro‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 33 0 r
file (bit 0 ... 3)
4-7 OPD - Pro‐ Bit[4] r
file (bit 4 ... 7)
0x4390 high 0-3 Truth table 7 type Bit[4] 0 ... 111 0 r
2I/1O 1B
4-7 Truth table 8 type Bit[4] 0 ... 111 0 r
2I/1O 1B
low 0-3 Is1 conversion fac‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 15 0 r
tor - Denominator
4-7 Is2 conversion fac‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 15 0 r
tor - Denominator
0x4391 high 0-3 Hysteresis P - Bit[4] 0 ... 15 1% 5 r
cos phi - U
4-7 Hysteresis 0/4-20 Bit[4] 0 ... 15 1% 5 r
mA
low 0-3 Hysteresis free lim‐ Bit[4] 0 ... 15 1% 5 r
its
4-7 OPD - Lighting Bit[4] 0 ... 4 2 0 = OFF r from E0
1=3s 3
2 = 10 s
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
Part - Byte param‐
eters

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 305
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x4392 high Byte r
low EM - Delay Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w EM
s

0x4393 high Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 ... 100 1% 0 r/w UM

low Warning lev‐ Byte 0 ... 100 1% 0 r/w UM

el cos phi<

0x4394 high Trip level U< Byte 0 ... 255 8V 0 r/w UM

low Warning level U< Byte 0 ... 255 8V 0 r/w UM

0x4395 high Trip level 0/4-20 Byte 0 ... 255 *128 0 r/w AM1
mA>

low Warning lev‐ Byte 0 ... 255 *128 0 r/w AM1

el 0/4-20mA>

0x4396 high Trip lev‐ Byte 0 ... 255 *128 0 r/w AM1
el 0/4-20 mA<

low Warning lev‐ Byte 0 ... 255 *128 0 r/w AM1

el 0/4-20mA>

0x4397 high Trip delay P> Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM
s

low Warning delay P> Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM

0x4398 high Trip delay P< Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM
s

low Warning delay P< Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM

0x4399 high Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM
s

low Warning delay cos Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM

phi< s

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

306 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x439A high Trip delay U< Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM
s

low Warning delay U< Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w UM

0x439B high Trip delay 0/4-20 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w AM1
mA> s

low Warning de‐ Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w AM1

lay 0/4-20 mA> s

0x439C high Trip delay 0/4-20 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w AM1
mA< s

low Warning de‐ Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w AM1

lay 0/4-20 mA< s

0x439D high Delay limit 1 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w

s
low Delay limit 2 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w
s
0x439E high Delay limit 3 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w
s
low Delay limit 3 Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 5 r/w
s
0x439F high TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 ... 255 1K 5 r
low Max. star time Byte 0 ... 255 1s 20 r
0x43A0 high UVO time Byte 0 ... 255 100 m 0 r
s, 1 s,
10 s
low Staggering time Byte 0 ... 255 1s 0 r
0x43A1 high Trace - Pre-trigger Byte 0 ... 20 5% 0 r
low Calculator 2 - De‐ Byte 0 ... 255 0 r
nominator 1
0x43A2 high Calculator 2 - Nu‐ Byte 0 ... 255 0 r
merator 2
low Calculator 1 - De‐ Byte 0 ... 255 0 r
nominator
0x43A3 high Truth table 4 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B
low Truth table 5 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 307
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
0x43A4 high Truth table 6 Byte 0 ... 111 0 r
type 3I/1O 11111B
low Calculator 2 - Nu‐ Byte -128 ... 1 0 r/w
merator 1 27
0x43A5 high Calculator 2 - De‐ Byte -128 ... 1 0 r/w
nominator 2 27
low DM-F - Test require‐ Byte 0 ... 255 Week 0 r/w
ment level
Part - Word pa‐ r/w
rameters
0x43A6 AM1 - Start value Word 0 ... 655 0 Value for 0/4 mA r/w AM1
output 35

0x43A7 AM1 - End value Word 0 ... 655 2764 Value for 20 mA r/w AM1
output 35 8

0x43A8 TM1 - Trip level T> Word 0 ... 655 1K 0 r/w TM1
35

0x43A9 TM1 - Warning lev‐ Word 0 ... 655 1K 0 r/w TM1

el T> 35

0x43AA Limit level 1 Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w

35
0x43AB Limit level 2 Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w
35
0x43AC Limit level 3 Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w
35
0x43AD Limit level 4 Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w
35
0x43AE Timer 3 - value Word 0 ... 655 100 m 0 r
35 s
0x43AE Timer 4 - value Word 0 ... 655 100 m 0 r
35 s
0x43B0 Counter 3 - value Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w
35
0x43B1 Counter 4 - value Word 0 ... 655 0 r/w
35
0x43B2 Change-over pause Word 0 ... 655 10 ms 0 r/w
35
0x43B3 Trace - Sampling Word 1 ... 500 1 ms 100 r/w
period 00
0x43B4 Is1 - Conversion Word 0 ... 655 1/8 0 r/w
factor - Numerator 35
0x43B5 Is2 - Conversion Word 0 ... 655 1/8 0 r/w
factor - Numerator 35

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

308 Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Designation Type Range Unit De‐ Comments Access 1) Info
Address high/l Bit fault
ow
Part - D word pa‐
rameter
0x43B6 Motor protection - D 10 m 0 r
Set current Is2 word A
0x43B8 Trip level P> D 0 ... 0xFF 1 W 0 r/w
word FFFFFF
0x43BA Warning level P> D 0 ... 0xFF 1 W 0 r/w
word FFFFFF
0x43BC Trip level P< D 0 ... 0xFF 1 W 0 r/w
word FFFFFF
0x43BE Warning level P< D 0 ... 0xFF 1 W 0 r/w
word FFFFFF
0x43C0 Truth table 9 5I/ Bit[32 0 ... 1 ... 0 r
2O type - Output 1 ] 1B
0x43C2 Truth table 9 5I/ Bit[32 0 ... 1 ... 0 r
2O type - Output 2 ] 1B
0x43C4 Calculator 2 - Offset D -0x8000 0 r
word 0000 ...
0x7FFFF
FFF
0x43C6 .. Calculator 1 - Nu‐ D 2x -3276 0 r
. 0x43C7 merator / offset word 8 ... 327
67

1) r/w: Value is read/write; r: Value is read-only

3.5.2.15 Marking
Read access to the labeling is possible via function codes 03 and 04. Write access is possible via
function codes 06 and 16.
Max. data length per access: 100 registers.

Table 3-86 Marking

Input/holding register Identifier Type Access 1)

Address high/low
0x4880 Coordination Byte[4] r
0x4882 Reserved Byte[6] r/w
0x4885 Marking - external fault 1 Byte[10] r/w
0x488A Marking external fault 2 Byte[10] r/w
0x488F Marking external fault 3 Byte[10] r/w
0x4894 Marking external fault 4 Byte[10] r/w
0x4899 Marking external fault 5 Byte[10] r/w
0x489E Marking external fault 6 Byte[10] r/w
0x48A3 Reserved Byte[10] r/w

SIMOCODE pro - Communication

Function Manual, 06/2021, A5E40508495002A/RS-AE/005 309
Tables, data records
3.5 Modbus data tables

Input/holding register Identifier Type Access 1)

Address high/low
0x48A8 Reserved Byte[10] r/w
0x48AD Marking limit 1 Byte[10] r/w
0x48B2 Marking limit 2 Byte[10] r/w
0x48B7 Marking limit 3 Byte[10] r/w
0x48BC

Part Number Codes ACS-800 - en
No ratings yet
Part Number Codes ACS-800 - en
3 pages
Vertical Load Best Practices
No ratings yet
Vertical Load Best Practices
4 pages
Descartes - Meditations On First Philosophy PDF
No ratings yet
Descartes - Meditations On First Philosophy PDF
35 pages
Manual Simocode Pro pcs7 Library v80sp3 en-US
No ratings yet
Manual Simocode Pro pcs7 Library v80sp3 en-US
248 pages
Sinamics g120p Pm330 Him En-Us
No ratings yet
Sinamics g120p Pm330 Him En-Us
150 pages
G120C KBA2 0116 Eng en-US
No ratings yet
G120C KBA2 0116 Eng en-US
88 pages
G120X Op Instr 0319 en-US
No ratings yet
G120X Op Instr 0319 en-US
966 pages
s120 Function
No ratings yet
s120 Function
810 pages
20-Comm-E Ethernet/Ip Adapter: User Manual
No ratings yet
20-Comm-E Ethernet/Ip Adapter: User Manual
288 pages
COMbricks User Manual1 en
No ratings yet
COMbricks User Manual1 en
124 pages
SIMOCODE Pro V PN-Info Dashboard With Node-RED ENGLISH
No ratings yet
SIMOCODE Pro V PN-Info Dashboard With Node-RED ENGLISH
43 pages
Siemens Micromaster 420 Parameter List
No ratings yet
Siemens Micromaster 420 Parameter List
201 pages
PowerFlex 70
No ratings yet
PowerFlex 70
48 pages
SINAMICS V20 PID Functionality V1 PDF
No ratings yet
SINAMICS V20 PID Functionality V1 PDF
27 pages
Et200al Manual Collection en-US PDF
No ratings yet
Et200al Manual Collection en-US PDF
1,585 pages
Thyristor Diagnostics Simoreg and Sinamics DCM
No ratings yet
Thyristor Diagnostics Simoreg and Sinamics DCM
2 pages
Aop Bop
100% (1)
Aop Bop
8 pages
PowerFlex Digital DC Drive Hardware Service Manual - Frame A
100% (1)
PowerFlex Digital DC Drive Hardware Service Manual - Frame A
134 pages
02 Power Module and Operator Panel IOP-2 en
No ratings yet
02 Power Module and Operator Panel IOP-2 en
30 pages
Manual PacDrive C400
No ratings yet
Manual PacDrive C400
8 pages
Sinamics DC Master Migration Guide en
No ratings yet
Sinamics DC Master Migration Guide en
38 pages
Siemens Micromaster 430 Manual
No ratings yet
Siemens Micromaster 430 Manual
118 pages
Sinamics V20
No ratings yet
Sinamics V20
274 pages
G120 Manual 080414
No ratings yet
G120 Manual 080414
16 pages
GFK1353D - CIMPLICITY HMI Server Redundancy Operation Manual
No ratings yet
GFK1353D - CIMPLICITY HMI Server Redundancy Operation Manual
96 pages
MV3000 Software Manual
No ratings yet
MV3000 Software Manual
464 pages
PowerFlex 700S - 700H Drives Component Replacement Procedures
No ratings yet
PowerFlex 700S - 700H Drives Component Replacement Procedures
3 pages
Abb Drive Library Export
No ratings yet
Abb Drive Library Export
28 pages
Siemens Sinamics DCM DC Converter Manual
No ratings yet
Siemens Sinamics DCM DC Converter Manual
184 pages
RSLogix 5000 - Type 10 Code 14 Minor Fault
No ratings yet
RSLogix 5000 - Type 10 Code 14 Minor Fault
3 pages
Flexpak 3000
No ratings yet
Flexpak 3000
110 pages
11 CL Control - Sinamic G130/150
No ratings yet
11 CL Control - Sinamic G130/150
21 pages
MC 4 Operating Manual
No ratings yet
MC 4 Operating Manual
76 pages
Tm440 Asim Basic Functions
No ratings yet
Tm440 Asim Basic Functions
58 pages
Catalog d11 Sinamics g130 g150
No ratings yet
Catalog d11 Sinamics g130 g150
212 pages
01 - Scout
No ratings yet
01 - Scout
250 pages
Upload Download S7
No ratings yet
Upload Download S7
11 pages
Et200s F Operating Manual en-US en-US PDF
No ratings yet
Et200s F Operating Manual en-US en-US PDF
260 pages
Isa HD
No ratings yet
Isa HD
5 pages
PDF
No ratings yet
PDF
14 pages
20 G 1 Anc 140 Aa 0 NNNNN
No ratings yet
20 G 1 Anc 140 Aa 0 NNNNN
12 pages
Control de Velocidad de Sinamics G120 Con S7 1500 Por Profinet y
No ratings yet
Control de Velocidad de Sinamics G120 Con S7 1500 Por Profinet y
50 pages
Servicing Schneider Altivar 66
No ratings yet
Servicing Schneider Altivar 66
118 pages
Poweflex 400 User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Poweflex 400 User Manual PDF
218 pages
ABB Drives ACS580 Manual 2017
No ratings yet
ABB Drives ACS580 Manual 2017
278 pages
Siemens Sirius 3RW30 3RW40 Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Siemens Sirius 3RW30 3RW40 Manual PDF
212 pages
710-03971-00B MVS User Manual - Press
No ratings yet
710-03971-00B MVS User Manual - Press
116 pages
DeviceNet The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
From Everand
DeviceNet The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2023-02 EN 202303141638542509
No ratings yet
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2023-02 EN 202303141638542509
1,173 pages
Getting Started SIMOCODE Pro en-US
No ratings yet
Getting Started SIMOCODE Pro en-US
40 pages
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2019-05 en
No ratings yet
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2019-05 en
1,205 pages
Getting Started SIMOCODE Pro en-US
No ratings yet
Getting Started SIMOCODE Pro en-US
32 pages
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2018-05 EN 201806211156538801
No ratings yet
Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2018-05 EN 201806211156538801
1,121 pages
Manual Collection - SIMOCODE Pro 3UF7 Ausgabe 11 - 2018
No ratings yet
Manual Collection - SIMOCODE Pro 3UF7 Ausgabe 11 - 2018
1,177 pages
Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF
No ratings yet
Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF
760 pages
Systemhandbuch SIMOCODE Pro en-US
No ratings yet
Systemhandbuch SIMOCODE Pro en-US
408 pages
Manual Simocode Pro V PN Fdi En-Us
No ratings yet
Manual Simocode Pro V PN Fdi En-Us
172 pages
Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE 3UF SIMOCODE PRO V PN FDI V2.0
No ratings yet
Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE 3UF SIMOCODE PRO V PN FDI V2.0
182 pages
How to Use the Snap-On SOLUS
From Everand
How to Use the Snap-On SOLUS
Mandy Concepcion
No ratings yet
Major Solution Components of Industrial Automation: Industrial Automation, #2
From Everand
Major Solution Components of Industrial Automation: Industrial Automation, #2
The Digital Allchemist
No ratings yet
Practical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part One
From Everand
Practical, Made Easy Guide To Building, Office And Home Automation Systems - Part One
Kerwin Mathew
No ratings yet
Tildas Christmas Crafting Ideas
100% (1)
Tildas Christmas Crafting Ideas
11 pages
Course Code and Title: GEMA2
No ratings yet
Course Code and Title: GEMA2
5 pages
2020 Nov Integral 5
No ratings yet
2020 Nov Integral 5
1 page
Selfstudys Com File
No ratings yet
Selfstudys Com File
12 pages
The Tower of The Elephant - A Classic Sword & Sorcery Story Adapted For Old School RPGs
No ratings yet
The Tower of The Elephant - A Classic Sword & Sorcery Story Adapted For Old School RPGs
58 pages
INAX 2009 Ecocarat
No ratings yet
INAX 2009 Ecocarat
31 pages
Self Management of Breathlessness Using Hand Reflexology A4 1pp 1
No ratings yet
Self Management of Breathlessness Using Hand Reflexology A4 1pp 1
1 page
CLASS 9 ENGLISH NCERT NOTES CHAPTER 8. On Killing A Tree
No ratings yet
CLASS 9 ENGLISH NCERT NOTES CHAPTER 8. On Killing A Tree
31 pages
Capgemini Research Institute DigitalTwins Web
No ratings yet
Capgemini Research Institute DigitalTwins Web
57 pages
Science 6 - Adpatations For Flight Rubric
No ratings yet
Science 6 - Adpatations For Flight Rubric
2 pages
Vampire, The
No ratings yet
Vampire, The
10 pages
Grammar Notes 111
No ratings yet
Grammar Notes 111
6 pages
Nortel Optera Connect DX-55 Slide
100% (1)
Nortel Optera Connect DX-55 Slide
53 pages
Gear Solutions May 2011 Company Profile PDF
No ratings yet
Gear Solutions May 2011 Company Profile PDF
3 pages
1 s2.0 S1474667017537349 Main
No ratings yet
1 s2.0 S1474667017537349 Main
5 pages
Case Study 3 - Group 3
No ratings yet
Case Study 3 - Group 3
5 pages
Chachimbiro Chancana
No ratings yet
Chachimbiro Chancana
32 pages
8516902-Panasonic Hdc-Sd5 Series Service Manual Repair Guide
No ratings yet
8516902-Panasonic Hdc-Sd5 Series Service Manual Repair Guide
79 pages
Installation and Repair Manual For Compressor G4481/G6204 Lincoln Air Vantage Welder
No ratings yet
Installation and Repair Manual For Compressor G4481/G6204 Lincoln Air Vantage Welder
23 pages
Lecture 19-Selection, Installation & Commissioning
No ratings yet
Lecture 19-Selection, Installation & Commissioning
29 pages
Agama Kristen & Katolik
No ratings yet
Agama Kristen & Katolik
26 pages
Saudi Arabian Oil Company: Notes
No ratings yet
Saudi Arabian Oil Company: Notes
1 page
MODULE 1-Volleyball
No ratings yet
MODULE 1-Volleyball
16 pages
3 (A) Thermodynamics Relations
No ratings yet
3 (A) Thermodynamics Relations
6 pages
PM572, PM573, PM582, PM583, PM585, PM590, PM591, PM592: Processor Module
No ratings yet
PM572, PM573, PM582, PM583, PM585, PM590, PM591, PM592: Processor Module
19 pages
Star Wars - Revenge of The Sith Script at IMSDb
100% (1)
Star Wars - Revenge of The Sith Script at IMSDb
69 pages
4 Cardinal Rules of Gun Safety.
No ratings yet
4 Cardinal Rules of Gun Safety.
2 pages
Vergleich Modell Vs Calc
No ratings yet
Vergleich Modell Vs Calc
5 pages
Exercises For Lecture 2 (Normal Form Games, Domination and IEDS)
No ratings yet
Exercises For Lecture 2 (Normal Form Games, Domination and IEDS)
3 pages

Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2021-06 EN 202107091542421799

Uploaded by

Manual Collection SIMOCODE Pro 2021-06 EN 202107091542421799

Uploaded by

Manual Collection

This document contains

Edition 06/2021 siemens.com

Motor management and

Siemens AG A5E40507294002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Brief description of the responses:

Recycling and disposal

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

1.3 Siemens Industry Online Support app

Siemens Industry Online Support app

1.4 Support Request

Support Request: Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)

1.5 Security information

1.6 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

1.7 Recycling and disposal

Objective of the example

• The SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) software is installed.

Item Ordering data Order number

Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

0DLQ FLUFXLW &RQWURO FLUFXLW

13( a +] 9

Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

6WDQGDUG UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU 5HYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU ZLWK 6,02&2'( SUR

1HFHVVDU\ LQWHUORFNV )

$ $ ,1 ,1 ,1  9

6 /()7 EXWWRQ 4 &RQWDFWRU FORFNZLVH URWDWLRQ

The basics of parameterization

Table 2-2 Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks

General procedure for parameterizing the reversing starter

ವ &RQQHFW ವ 6HOHFW UHYHUVLQJ VWDUWHU ವ &RQQHFW

&RQWURO VWDWLRQ  /RFDO &RQWURO >/&@ &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

Figure 2-3 Schematic of a parameterization example

Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

11 Check the following settings:

Specific procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES 2007

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

6 Check the following settings:

Configuration with local control station completed

2.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)

Setting the PROFIBUS-DP address with SIMOCODE ES 2007

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Additional internal components of the basic unit

Figure 2-4 Functional diagram of reversing starter

2.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Additional internal components of the basic unit

Figure 2-5 Functional diagram of reversing starter

Setting the IP configuration and station names with SIMOCODE ES 2007

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device names with STEP 7 HW Config

Additional internal components of the basic unit

Figure 2-6 Functional diagram of reversing starter

Industrial Controls Areas of application 3

Motor management and Features 4

3UF50 compatibility mode 11

Siemens AG A5E40507475002A/RS-AE/005 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

6 Check list for selecting a device series ................................................................................................ 59

9 Compartment identification .............................................................................................................. 149

13 Commissioning, service, troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 241

14.1.5 Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 296

Purpose of this manual

Required basic knowledge

Scope of the manual

SIMOCODE pro V PN GP (PROFINET) (see Device series (Page 24))

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Short description of the responses:

Operating instructions and other manuals

Recycling and disposal

1.2 Siemens Industry Online Support

Information and service

13( a +] 9

1HFHVVDU\ LQWHUORFNV )

$ $ ,1 ,1 ,1 9

6 /()7 EXWWRQ 4 &RQWDFWRU FORFNZLVH URWDWLRQ

&RQWURO VWDWLRQ /RFDO &RQWURO >/&@ &RQWDFWRU FRQWUROV

3URWHFWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ &RQWUROFLUFXLW &RPPXQLFDWLRQ

3URWHFWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ &RQWUROFLUFXLW &RPPXQLFDWLRQ

3/&3&6 &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

&XUUHQW PHDVXULQJ $ $ ,1 ,1 9 ,Q ,Qದ &RQWURO VWDWLRQ

7 7 287 2XW 2XWದ